Im 9000 SM

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SERVICE MANUAL
Rev. 05/19/2021
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh USA, Inc. and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH USA, Inc.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2021 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh USA, Inc. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh USA, Inc.

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D0CZ IM 7000 IM 7000 IM 7000
D0D0 IM 8000 IM 8000 IM 8000
D0D1 IM 9000 IM 9000 IM 9000
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 12/2020 Original Printing
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ......................................................... 1-1
1.1 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 PAPER PATH (WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY) ......................................... 1-2
1.1.3 PAPER PATH (WITH 9-BIN MAILBOX) .............................................................. 1-3
1.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS...................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 MAIN MACHINE .................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.2 PERIPHERAL UNITS .......................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.3 OTHER OPTIONS ............................................................................................... 1-7
Mainframe Options: External................................................................................... 1-7
Mainframe Options: Internal .................................................................................... 1-7
Controller Options: I/F Slots .................................................................................... 1-8
Controller Options ................................................................................................... 1-8
Fax Options ............................................................................................................. 1-8
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 1-9
1.4 DIFFERENCES FROM PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS.............................................. 1-10
2. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 2-1

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 2-2
2.1.4 DIMENSIONS ...................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 2-4
2.2 MAIN MACHINE............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ........................................................................................ 2-6
2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW ........................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 2-8
Remove Tapes and Shipping Materials .................................................................. 2-8
Attaching Fine Particle Filter ................................................................................. 2-15
Attach Power Cord to Machine ............................................................................. 2-16
Remove Development Unit ................................................................................... 2-17
Load Developer ..................................................................................................... 2-21
Re-install Development Unit.................................................................................. 2-23
Set Toner Bottle ..................................................................................................... 2-26
Set Tandem Tray for LT or A4 Paper ..................................................................... 2-27
Level the Machine ................................................................................................. 2-37
Attach Cleaning Cloth Holder ................................................................................ 2-38
Connect Drum Heater, Tray Heater (Optional) ..................................................... 2-39
Load Paper, Attach Decals .................................................................................... 2-40
Attach Name Plate ................................................................................................ 2-41
Initialize Toner and Process Control Settings ....................................................... 2-41
2.2.4 CHECK IMAGE QUALITY AND SETTINGS ..................................................... 2-42
Checking the copy image with the test chart ........................................................ 2-42
Date/Time Setting and Other SP Settings............................................................. 2-42
2.2.5 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES ............................................... 2-43
Overview................................................................................................................ 2-43
Canceling Password Setup ................................................................................... 2-43
Password Setting Procedure................................................................................. 2-44
Auto Remote Firmware Update Settings .............................................................. 2-45
2.2.6 SECURITY SETTINGS ..................................................................................... 2-49
2.2.7 MOVING THE MACHINE .................................................................................. 2-49
2.2.8 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE .................................................................... 2-50
2.2.9 IMPORTANT SP CODES: INSTALLATION....................................................... 2-50
2.3 DRUM HEATER (OPTION) (H2).................................................................................. 2-52
2.3.1 ACCESSORIES................................................................................................. 2-52
2.3.2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 2-52
Install Drum Heater ............................................................................................... 2-52
2.4 SCANNER HEATER (OPTION) ................................................................................... 2-57
2.4.1 ACCESSORIES................................................................................................. 2-57
2.4.2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 2-57
Install Scanner Heater ........................................................................................... 2-57
2.5 A3/11"X17" TRAY TYPE M44 (D3JG) ......................................................................... 2-62
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-62
2.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................................... 2-62
2.6 LCIT RT4080 (D3J6) .................................................................................................... 2-68
2.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-68
2.6.2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 2-68
Removing Tape...................................................................................................... 2-68
Preparing the Main Machine ................................................................................. 2-70
Docking the LCIT................................................................................................... 2-71
Paper Size Adjust and Setting............................................................................... 2-74
2.6.3 LCIT HEATER (H5) (OPTION) .......................................................................... 2-79
Accessories ........................................................................................................... 2-79
Installation ............................................................................................................. 2-80
2.7 8 1/2"X14" PAPER SIZE TRAY TYPE 9002 (B474) .................................................. 2-100
2.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-100
2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 2-100
2.8 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4020 (D3HH)................................................................... 2-105
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-105
2.8.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-106
Removing Parts for the Cover Interposer Tray CI4040....................................... 2-112
Attaching the Guide Plate ................................................................................... 2-113
Installing the Z-fold Support Tray ........................................................................ 2-113
Skew Correction .................................................................................................. 2-114
2.9 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4010 (D3HJ) ................................................................... 2-117
2.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-117
2.9.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 2-118
Height Adjustment ...............................................................................................2-130
Side-to-side Registration Adjustment .................................................................. 2-130
Note When Moving the Option ............................................................................ 2-131
2.10 SLIDE SORT TRAY SH4020 ............................................................................... 2-132
2.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-132
2.10.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-132
2.11FINISHER SR4140 (D3HD) .......................................................................................2-135
2.11.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-135
How to Use the Spacer to Correct Paper Skew.................................................. 2-142
2.11.3 SP SETTING ...................................................................................................2-145
2.12 PUNCH UNIT PU5050 (D3HE) ........................................................................... 2-146
2.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK ...................................................................................2-146
2.13 FINISHER SR4150 (D3HB), BOOKLET FINISHER SR4160 (D3HC) ................ 2-157
2.13.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-157
2.13.3 USING THE SUPPORT TRAYS FOR THE PROOF TRAY ............................ 2-166
2.13.4 INSTALLING THE SUPPORT TRAY POCKET ............................................... 2-169
2.14 PUNCH UNIT PU3090 (D3FP) ........................................................................... 2-172
2.14.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-172
2.14.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-172
2.15 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25 (D3CJ) ..................................................... 2-182
2.15.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-182
2.15.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-182
2.16 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI4040 (DC3N)................................................... 2-192
2.16.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-192
2.16.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-193
Finisher Already Installed? ..................................................................................2-193
Prepare the Finisher ............................................................................................2-195
Shipping Tapes and Retainers ............................................................................ 2-196
Prepare the Main Machine ..................................................................................2-197
Finisher SR4140: Change the Fix Position of the Drawer Connector Bracket ... 2-197
Cover Interposer Tray..........................................................................................2-198
Extensions ...........................................................................................................2-206
Sponge Strip ........................................................................................................2-215
Main Machine ......................................................................................................2-215
Docking the Finisher............................................................................................2-217
Finish the Installation...........................................................................................2-219
2.17 MAILBOX CS4010 (D708) ..................................................................................2-220
2.17.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-220
2.17.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-220
2.18 COPY TRAY TYPE 9002 (B756)......................................................................... 2-226
2.18.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-226
2.18.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-226
2.19 SMALL PAPER FEEDING UNIT TYPE M37 (D3FF) .......................................... 2-229
2.19.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-229
2.20 PAGE KEEPER TYPE M37 (D3FF) .................................................................... 2-232
2.20.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-232
2.21 TAB SHEET HOLDER TYPE 9002 (B499) ......................................................... 2-245
2.21.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-245
2.21.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-245
2.22 NFC CARD READER TYPE M42 (D3HP) .......................................................... 2-248
2.22.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-248
Installing with the Keyboard Bracket ................................................................... 2-254
2.23 SMART CARD READER BUILT-IN UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-22)....................... 2-261
2.23.1 COMPONENT CHECK ...................................................................................2-261
2.24 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE 3352 (D593) ................................................ 2-267
2.24.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-267
2.24.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-268
2.25 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE TYPE M12 (B870) ................................... 2-273
2.25.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-273
2.25.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-273
2.26 COPY CONNECTOR TYPE M25 (D3D3) ........................................................... 2-276
2.26.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-276
2.26.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-276
2.27 EXTERNAL KEYBOARD BRACKET TYPE M25 (D3DH) .................................. 2-278
2.27.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-278
2.27.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-278
External Keyboard Only ......................................................................................2-278
External Keyboard with Card Reader ................................................................. 2-283
2.28 INTERNAL OPTIONS .........................................................................................2-284
2.28.1 LIST OF SLOTS ..............................................................................................2-284
2.28.2 INSERTING CARDS .......................................................................................2-285
2.29 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 ..................................................... 2-287
2.29.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-287
2.29.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-287
2.30 IEEE 802.11 A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT M19 ....................................................... 2-289
2.30.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-289
Before You Begin.................................................................................................2-289
2.30.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-290
User Tool Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n ............................................................. 2-294
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN .............................................. 2-295
2.31 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19........................................................... 2-297
2.31.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-297
2.31.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-297
2.32 DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M37 (D3GF)................................................. 2-299
2.32.1 COMPONENT CHECK ...................................................................................2-299
2.32.3 MANUALLY ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS .................................................... 2-303
2.33 SD CARD OPTIONS ...........................................................................................2-305
2.33.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................2-305
2.33.2 OPTIONS AVAILABLE ON SD CARDS .......................................................... 2-305
2.33.3 INSERTING SD CARDS ................................................................................. 2-306
2.33.4 MOVE EXEC: MERGING APPLICATIONS ..................................................... 2-307
2.33.5 UNDO EXEC: UNMERGING APPLICATIONS ............................................... 2-309
2.33.6 STORING ORIGINAL SD CARDS .................................................................. 2-309
2.34 OCR TYPE M13 (D3AC) ..................................................................................... 2-311
2.34.1 WHAT IS SEARCHABLE PDF? ...................................................................... 2-311
2.34.2 ACCESSORIES............................................................................................... 2-311
Installation ........................................................................................................... 2-311
Restoration ..........................................................................................................2-313
When the original SD card exists ........................................................................ 2-313
If Original SD Card is Lost...................................................................................2-313
2.35 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M44 (D3J8)............................................................ 2-314
2.35.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-314
2.35.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-314
2.36 IPDS UNIT TYPE M44 (D3J8) ............................................................................ 2-316
2.36.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-316
2.36.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-316
2.37 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M44 (D3J8).............................................. 2-318
2.37.1 ACCESSORIES...............................................................................................2-318
2.37.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2-318
2.38 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS) ................................ 2-320
2.38.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................2-320
2.38.2 COMPONENT LIST.........................................................................................2-320
2.38.3 BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE .................................................... 2-320
Seal Check and Removal ....................................................................................2-321
2.39 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M12 (D3A6-02)......................... 2-323
2.40 AFTER INSTALLATION CHECK ......................................................................... 2-328
2.40.1 SAFETY CHECK .............................................................................................2-328
2.40.2 CHECK LIST ...................................................................................................2-328
2.41 SECURITY SETTING..........................................................................................2-330
2.41.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION ........................................................ 2-330
2.41.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY ..................................................................... 2-330
Before You Begin the Procedure ......................................................................... 2-330
Using "Auto Erase Memory"................................................................................ 2-331
2.41.3 HDD ENCRYPTION ........................................................................................2-333
Before You Begin the Procedure ......................................................................... 2-333
Enable Encryption Setting ...................................................................................2-333
Backing Up the Encryption Key........................................................................... 2-335
Encryption Key Restoration................................................................................. 2-336
2.42 @REMOTE SETTINGS ......................................................................................2-338
2.43 "WEB HELP SUPPORT" SETTINGS.................................................................. 2-341
2.43.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................2-341
2.43.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE WEB HELP SUPPORT .................................... 2-341
2.44 "REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT" SETTINGS ................................................... 2-343
2.44.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................2-343
2.44.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT ..................... 2-343
2.44.3 UNINSTALLING REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT ......................................... 2-346
2.45 "REMOTE PANEL OPERATION" SETTINGS..................................................... 2-347
2.45.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................2-347
2.45.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE REMOTE PANEL OPERATION/MONITORING2-348
2.46 USER INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................................2-349
2.46.1 OPERATION GUIDANCE FOR USERS ......................................................... 2-349
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 3-1

3.1 PM TABLES ................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 MAIN MACHINE .................................................................................................. 3-1
Scanner Optics ........................................................................................................ 3-1
Around the Drum ..................................................................................................... 3-1
Drum Cleaning ........................................................................................................ 3-3
Development Unit .................................................................................................... 3-3
Paper Feed: Main Paper Path................................................................................. 3-4
Paper Feed: Paper Trays ........................................................................................ 3-4
Transfer Belt Unit..................................................................................................... 3-5
Fusing Unit and Paper Exit ..................................................................................... 3-5
Fusing Unit Paper Exit............................................................................................. 3-7
Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 3-7
ADF.......................................................................................................................... 3-7
Others ...................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.2 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES.................................................................. 3-8
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6) ............................................................................................... 3-8
Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 (DC3N) (for 2K/3K Finishers) ................................. 3-8
Finisher SR4140 (D3HD) ........................................................................................ 3-9
Finisher SR4150 (D3HB), Booklet Finisher SR4160 (D3HC) ................................. 3-9
Punch Unit PU3090 (D3FP) .................................................................................... 3-9
Multi-Folding Unit FD4010 (D3HJ) ........................................................................ 3-10
Related SP Codes ................................................................................................. 3-10
3.2 IMAGE QUALITY TABLES........................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.1 CHECKING IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................... 3-11
Resolution.............................................................................................................. 3-11
Even Density ......................................................................................................... 3-11
Magnification Errors .............................................................................................. 3-11
Magnification Error Variation ................................................................................. 3-12
3.3 PAPER TRANSFER QUALITY STANDARDS ............................................................. 3-14
3.3.1 REGISTRATION ................................................................................................ 3-14
3.3.2 SKEW ................................................................................................................ 3-15
3.3.3 LCIT ................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.3.4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY ........................................................................... 3-16
3.4 PM PARTS SETTINGS ................................................................................................ 3-17
3.4.1 BEFORE REMOVING OLD PM PARTS ........................................................... 3-17
3.4.2 AFTER INSTALLING NEW PM PARTS ............................................................ 3-17
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

4.1 NOTES ON REPLACING THE PARTS ......................................................................... 4-1
4.2 POWER SWITCH .......................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 PUSH SWITCH ................................................................................................... 4-2
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch (PCB14)) ...................................... 4-2
Shutdown Method ................................................................................................... 4-3
Forced Shutdown .................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................ 4-5
Drum ........................................................................................................................ 4-5
Drum Unit ................................................................................................................ 4-5
Transfer Belt Unit..................................................................................................... 4-6
Scanner Unit ............................................................................................................ 4-6
Laser Unit ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Charge Corona ........................................................................................................ 4-6
Development ........................................................................................................... 4-7
Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 4-7
Fusing Unit .............................................................................................................. 4-7
Paper Feed .............................................................................................................. 4-8
Used Toner .............................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR THIS MACHINE ............................................................... 4-8
Inner Covers ............................................................................................................ 4-8
Proximity Sensor (PCB13) ...................................................................................... 4-9
PSU Precautions ..................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.3 IMPORTANT SP CODES: MACHINE INFORMATION, SERVICING ............... 4-11
4.4 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ........................................................................ 4-14
4.4.1 SPECIAL TOOLS .............................................................................................. 4-14
4.4.2 LUBRICANTS .................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5 COVERS ...................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.1 FRONT DOOR .................................................................................................. 4-15
4.5.2 RIGHT COVERS ............................................................................................... 4-16
Right Upper Cover................................................................................................. 4-16
Right Lower Cover................................................................................................. 4-18
4.5.3 REAR COVERS ................................................................................................ 4-19
Rear Upper Cover ................................................................................................. 4-19
Rear Lower Cover ................................................................................................. 4-20
4.5.4 LEFT COVERS.................................................................................................. 4-21
Left Upper Cover ................................................................................................... 4-21
Left Lower Cover ................................................................................................... 4-23
4.5.5 CONTROLLER BOX COVER PLATE ............................................................... 4-24
4.5.6 CONTROLLER BOX ......................................................................................... 4-25
4.5.7 IOB BRACKET .................................................................................................. 4-26
4.6 OPERATION PANEL.................................................................................................... 4-28
4.6.1 OPERATION PANEL REMOVAL....................................................................... 4-28
4.7 SCANNER UNIT .......................................................................................................... 4-32
4.7.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ....................................................................................... 4-32
4.7.2 SCANNER UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................................. 4-32
4.7.3 EXPOSURE GLASS ......................................................................................... 4-39
4.7.4 CONTACT GLASS ............................................................................................ 4-42
Contact Glass Removal and Reinstallation........................................................... 4-42
Convert from Non-Contact to Contact Scanning Configuration ............................ 4-44
Contact Glass Cleaning......................................................................................... 4-46
4.7.5 LENS BLOCK COVER ...................................................................................... 4-47
4.7.6 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS (S80, S79, S78, S77, S76) .............................. 4-48
4.7.7 LENS BLOCK .................................................................................................... 4-50
4.7.8 EXPOSURE LEDS (EXPOSURE LAMP) ......................................................... 4-53
4.7.9 SCANNER MOTOR (M22) ................................................................................ 4-59
4.7.10 SCANNER HP SENSOR (S62) ......................................................................... 4-63
4.7.11 ADF OPEN SENSOR (S65) .............................................................................. 4-65
4.7.12 SCANNER WIRE............................................................................................... 4-67
Scanner Wire Removal ......................................................................................... 4-67
Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment ........................... 4-68
4.7.13 IMPORTANT SP CODES: SCANNER UNIT..................................................... 4-69
4.8 LASER UNIT ................................................................................................................ 4-70
4.8.1 WARNING DECAL LOCATIONS....................................................................... 4-70
4.8.2 POLYGON MOTOR, POLYGON MOTOR DRIVE BOARD, LD UNIT .............. 4-70
Polygon Motor Cover............................................................................................. 4-70
Polygon Motor (M23) ............................................................................................. 4-71
Polygon Motor Drive Board ................................................................................... 4-72
Laser Diode Unit.................................................................................................... 4-73
4.8.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR ...................................................... 4-74
4.8.4 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT ............................................................................... 4-76
4.8.5 TONER SHIELD GLASS ................................................................................... 4-78
4.8.6 LASER UNIT REMOVAL ................................................................................... 4-79
4.8.7 LD SAFETY SWITCHES ................................................................................... 4-85
4.8.8 IMPORTANT SP CODES: LASER UNIT........................................................... 4-86
4.9 DRUM UNIT ................................................................................................................. 4-87
4.9.1 CORONA UNIT.................................................................................................. 4-87
Corona Grid ........................................................................................................... 4-87
Charge Wire .......................................................................................................... 4-88
Cleaning Pad ......................................................................................................... 4-89
Corona Wire Cleaning Motor................................................................................. 4-89
Corona Power Pack .............................................................................................. 4-91
4.9.2 DRUM ................................................................................................................ 4-94
Drum Unit Removal ............................................................................................... 4-94
Drum Removal....................................................................................................... 4-94
4.9.3 PTL (PRE-TRANSFER LAMP).......................................................................... 4-97
4.9.4 QL (QUENCHING LAMP)................................................................................ 4-100
4.9.5 POTENTIAL SENSOR (S11)........................................................................... 4-101
4.9.6 CLEANING FILTER .........................................................................................4-105
4.9.7 DRUM CLEANING BLADE ............................................................................. 4-106
4.9.8 CLEANING BRUSH ........................................................................................4-106
4.9.9 PICK-OFF PAWLS...........................................................................................4-108
4.9.10 ID SENSOR (S13) ...........................................................................................4-109
4.9.11 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE ..................................................................... 4-110
4.9.12 FINE PARTICLE FILTER ................................................................................. 4-111
4.9.13 OPTICS DUST FILTER ................................................................................... 4-111
4.9.14 INTERNAL DUST FILTER ............................................................................... 4-112
4.9.15 TONER BOTTLE FAN ..................................................................................... 4-113
4.9.16 DRUM MOTOR (M25) ..................................................................................... 4-119
4.9.17 IMPORTANT SP CODES: DRUM UNIT.......................................................... 4-123
4.10 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ........................................................................................4-125
4.10.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL AND RE-INSTALLATION ........................ 4-125
Removing the Development Unit ........................................................................ 4-125
Separating the Development Unit and Toner Hopper ......................................... 4-128
Re-installing the Development Unit ..................................................................... 4-129
Just Replaced Developer? ..................................................................................4-132
Replacement with a Used Development Unit ..................................................... 4-132
4.10.2 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT ...................................................................... 4-133
Replacing the Developer .....................................................................................4-133
Re-installing the Development Unit ..................................................................... 4-136
Initializing the Developer .....................................................................................4-137
4.10.3 ENTRANCE SEAL, SIDE SEALS ................................................................... 4-137
4.10.4 DEVELOPMENT FILTER ................................................................................4-139
4.10.5 TD SENSOR....................................................................................................4-142
4.10.6 TONER END SENSOR (S1) ........................................................................... 4-144
4.10.7 TONER SEPARATION UNIT ........................................................................... 4-145
4.10.8 TONER BOTTLE MOTOR (M1) ...................................................................... 4-147
4.10.9 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR (M24) .................................................................... 4-151
4.10.10 DEVELOPMENT UNIT POWER PACK .................................................... 4-154
4.10.11 USED TONER COLLECTION UNIT ......................................................... 4-156
Used Toner Collection Unit Removal .................................................................. 4-156
Toner Collection Motor Sensor ............................................................................ 4-158
Used Toner Collection Motor ............................................................................... 4-159
Toner Bottle Set Switch, Toner Bottle Full Switch ............................................... 4-159
4.10.12 IMPORTANT SP CODES: DEVELOPMENT UNIT .................................. 4-162
4.11TRANSFER BELT UNIT.............................................................................................4-164
4.11.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................... 4-164
4.11.2 TRANSFER BELT, TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING BLADE ...................... 4-164
Transfer Belt Assembly Removal ........................................................................ 4-164
Transfer Roller Cleaning Blade ........................................................................... 4-165
Transfer Belt Replacement..................................................................................4-166
Re-assembly........................................................................................................4-167
4.11.3 TRANSFER POWER PACK (PCB4) ............................................................... 4-168
Re-installation ......................................................................................................4-171
4.11.4 DISCHARGE PLATE .......................................................................................4-172
4.11.5 IMPORTANT SP CODES: TRANSFER BELT UNIT ....................................... 4-173
4.12 FUSING UNIT......................................................................................................4-175
4.12.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................................... 4-175
4.12.2 THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR, NC SENSOR ............................................ 4-177
End Thermistor (IM 7000/8000) .......................................................................... 4-177
End Thermistor (IM 9000) ...................................................................................4-180
Thermostats.........................................................................................................4-182
Reinstallation .......................................................................................................4-183
Center Thermistor (NC Sensor) (IM 7000/8000) ................................................ 4-184
Center Thermistor (NC Sensor) (IM 9000).......................................................... 4-186
4.12.3 WEB CLEANING ROLLER ............................................................................. 4-187
Web Unit Disassembly ........................................................................................4-187
Re-assembly........................................................................................................4-188
Web Unit Re-assembly........................................................................................4-188
4.12.4 WEB MOTOR (M9), WEB END SENSOR (S21) ............................................ 4-189
Reinstallation .......................................................................................................4-191
4.12.5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING UNIT, CLEANING ROLLERS .................. 4-191
Pressure Roller Cleaning Unit ............................................................................. 4-191
Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller (IM 7000/8000) ................................................ 4-192
Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller (IM 9000) ......................................................... 4-192
Re-assembly........................................................................................................4-193
4.12.6 FUSING LAMPS (H6, H7, H9), HOT ROLLER, AND PRESSURE ROLLER . 4-193
Fusing Lamps (x3) IM 7000/8000 ....................................................................... 4-194
Fusing Lamps (x2) IM 9000 ................................................................................ 4-199
Hot Roller, Pressure Roller..................................................................................4-202
Pressure Roller Only ...........................................................................................4-204
Checking the Fusing Nip .....................................................................................4-208
4.12.7 STRIPPER PAWLS .........................................................................................4-209
4.12.8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT ................................................................. 4-210
4.12.9 FUSING UNIT EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................ 4-211
4.12.10 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR ............................................................................. 4-212
4.12.11 FUSING EXIT SENSOR (S66), EXIT UNIT ENTRANCE SENSORS (S25)4-216
4.12.12 TURN SENSOR ........................................................................................4-217
4.12.13 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE SENSOR (S22) ................................... 4-218
4.12.14 FUSING PRESSURE MOTOR ................................................................. 4-219
4.12.15 TEMPERATURE SENSOR ....................................................................... 4-220
4.12.16 IMPORTANT SP CODES: FUSING UNIT ................................................ 4-222
4.13 DUPLEX UNIT .....................................................................................................4-223
4.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL .............................................................................. 4-223
Re-installation ......................................................................................................4-224
4.13.2 ADJUSTMENTS ..............................................................................................4-224
Duplex Unit Side-to-Side Adjustment .................................................................. 4-224
Jogger Fence Adjustment ...................................................................................4-225
4.13.3 DUPLEX MOTORS .........................................................................................4-225
Duplex Unit Front Cover ......................................................................................4-225
Duplex Inverter Motor ..........................................................................................4-226
Duplex Jogger Motor (M6) ..................................................................................4-227
Duplex Transport Motor (M8) .............................................................................. 4-228
4.13.4 DUPLEX SENSORS .......................................................................................4-229
Jogger Fence HP Sensor ....................................................................................4-229
Duplex Entrance Sensor (S15) ........................................................................... 4-229
Duplex Transport Sensor 3 (S20)........................................................................ 4-230
Inverter Exit Sensor, Transport Sensors 1, 2 ...................................................... 4-231
4.13.5 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT ....................................................... 4-235
4.13.6 IMPORTANT SP CODES: DUPLEX UNIT ...................................................... 4-238
4.14 PAPER FEED UNITS ..........................................................................................4-239
4.14.1 PAPER TRAYS ................................................................................................4-239
Tandem Tray ........................................................................................................4-239
Universal Trays ....................................................................................................4-240
4.14.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR ................................................................. 4-241
4.14.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ........................................................................... 4-242
4.14.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR (S49) ............................................ 4-242
4.14.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE .......................................................................... 4-243
Re-assembly........................................................................................................4-244
4.14.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE......................................................... 4-245
4.14.7 TANDEM TRAY SIDE REGISTRATION .......................................................... 4-248
4.14.8 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER ...................................................... 4-249
4.14.9 PAPER TRAY LIFT MOTORS, TRAY 1 LOCK SOLENOIDS ......................... 4-250
Tray Motor, Solenoid Access ............................................................................... 4-250
Tray 1 Lift Motor (M19) ........................................................................................4-254
Tray 2 Lift Motor (M17) ........................................................................................4-255
Tray 3 Lift Motor (M18) ........................................................................................4-256
Right Tray Lock Solenoid ....................................................................................4-257
Left Tray Lock Solenoid .......................................................................................4-258
4.14.10 PAPER FEED UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................... 4-259
4.14.11 PAPER FEED MOTORS........................................................................... 4-263
4.14.12 RELAY MOTOR ........................................................................................4-266
4.14.13 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT ............................. 4-270
4.14.14 LIFT SENSOR (S30,S57,S61), PAPER END SENSOR (S29,S56,S60) . 4-270
4.14.15 FEED SENSOR (S27,S54,S58), VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR
(S28,S55,S59)............................................................................................................4-272
4.14.16 PICK-UP SOLENOID (SOL6,SOL15,SOL17) .......................................... 4-275
4.14.17 REVERSE RELEASE SOLENOID (SOL7,SOL16,SOL18) ...................... 4-279
4.14.18 RELAY SENSOR (S5) .............................................................................. 4-282
4.14.19 REGISTRATION MOTOR (M2) ................................................................ 4-283
4.14.20 BY-PASS TRAY .........................................................................................4-284
By-Pass Tray Removal ........................................................................................4-284
By-Pass Tray Disassembly ................................................................................. 4-286
4.14.21 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD ......................................... 4-286
Re-assembly........................................................................................................4-287
By-Pass Paper Length Sensor ............................................................................ 4-287
4.14.22 BY-PASS TRAY ROLLERS ....................................................................... 4-288
4.14.23 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT ............. 4-289
4.14.24 REGISTRATION SENSOR ....................................................................... 4-291
4.14.25 BY-PASS UNIT..........................................................................................4-294
By-Pass Unit Removal ........................................................................................4-294
Re-installation ......................................................................................................4-298
By-Pass Motor .....................................................................................................4-299
Guide Plate Sensor .............................................................................................4-301
4.14.26 PAPER PATH LEDS..................................................................................4-302
LED Locations .....................................................................................................4-302
Jam LED A: Vertical Inner Cover......................................................................... 4-303
Jam LEDs C2, B2, B1 .........................................................................................4-304
Jam LED C1 Inner Cover ....................................................................................4-305
Jam LED E3/Z: Inverter Duplex Inner Cover ...................................................... 4-306
Jam LED D1/E1: Fusing Unit Inner Cover .......................................................... 4-307
4.14.27 PAPER FEED ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................ 4-310
Paper Registration...............................................................................................4-310
Buckle Adjustment ...............................................................................................4-310
4.14.28 IMPORTANT SP CODES: PAPER FEED................................................. 4-311
4.15 PCBS, HDD .........................................................................................................4-313
4.15.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .....................................................................................4-313
Board Locations ..................................................................................................4-313
4.15.2 CONTROLLER BOARD REPLACEMENT...................................................... 4-314
Before You Begin.................................................................................................4-314
Controller Board ..................................................................................................4-315
When Installing the New Controller Board .......................................................... 4-318
4.15.3 BICU ................................................................................................................4-318
NVRAM/SMB Replacement Procedure .............................................................. 4-319
4.15.4 HDD .................................................................................................................4-324
HDD Removal......................................................................................................4-324
Re-installation ......................................................................................................4-326
After HDD Replacement ......................................................................................4-327
4.15.5 RYB (RELAY BOARD) ....................................................................................4-327
4.15.6 PSU .................................................................................................................4-328
4.15.7 AC DRIVE BOARD ..........................................................................................4-329
4.15.8 IOB...................................................................................................................4-331
4.15.9 IMPORTANT SP CODES: PCBS, HDD .......................................................... 4-331
4.16 ADF......................................................................................................................4-333
4.16.1 ADF REMOVAL ...............................................................................................4-333
4.16.2 AFTER ADF REPLACEMENT ........................................................................ 4-335
CIS RGB Adjustment ...........................................................................................4-335
Checking the vertical registration ........................................................................ 4-335
Checking the horizontal registration.................................................................... 4-336
Checking skew ....................................................................................................4-336
Checking magnification .......................................................................................4-337
Platen Adjustment ...............................................................................................4-337
4.16.3 ADF COVERS .................................................................................................4-338
ADF Front Cover .................................................................................................4-338
ADF Rear Cover ..................................................................................................4-338
ADF Feed Cover .................................................................................................4-340
4.16.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ...................................................................................4-340
4.16.5 PICK-UP ROLLER, TRANSPORT BELT ........................................................ 4-340
4.16.6 ADF SEPARATION ROLLER .......................................................................... 4-341
4.16.7 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR (S88) ................................................. 4-342
4.16.8 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR (S87) .................................................................... 4-344
4.16.9 ADF CONTROL BOARD (PCB9) .................................................................... 4-345
4.16.10 SEPARATION SENSOR (S82), SKEW CORRECTION SENSOR (S81) 4-345
4.16.11 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSOR (S80, S79, S78, S77, S76), INTERVAL
SENSOR (S86) ..........................................................................................................4-346
4.16.12 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS (S70, S69, S68) ................................... 4-348
4.16.13 APS FEELER ............................................................................................4-348
4.16.14 ADF LIFT INTERLOCK SWITCH, LIFT SENSOR ................................... 4-348
4.16.15 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR (S73)............................................................... 4-349
4.16.16 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSOR (A4/LT LEF) (S74) .................................. 4-350
4.16.17 BOTTOM PLATE HP SENSOR (S72) ...................................................... 4-350
4.16.18 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR (S84) .......................................... 4-351
4.16.19 ADF FEED COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH (SW7), PICK-UP ROLLER HP
SENSOR (S83) ..........................................................................................................4-351
4.16.20 PULL-OUT MOTOR (M29) ....................................................................... 4-352
4.16.21 ADF SCANNING MOTOR (M31) .............................................................. 4-353
4.16.22 ADF EXIT MOTOR ...................................................................................4-354
4.16.23 ADF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR (M32) ............................................. 4-355
4.16.24 ADF PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR (M34) .......................................... 4-356
4.16.25 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR (M33) ........................................................... 4-356
4.16.26 ADF FEED MOTOR (M28) ....................................................................... 4-357
4.16.27 CIS UNIT (PCB10) ....................................................................................4-359
4.16.28 CIS WHITE ROLLER CLEANING ............................................................ 4-362
4.16.29 SMALL SIZE PAPER TRAY SET SENSOR (S145).................................. 4-363
4.17 FANS, SWITCHES ..............................................................................................4-364
4.17.1 FANS ...............................................................................................................4-364
Quick Reference..................................................................................................4-364
Drum Fan (FAN11) ..............................................................................................4-364
Development Unit Fan 1, 2 ................................................................................. 4-366
Duplex Fan (FAN1)..............................................................................................4-367
PCU Fan ..............................................................................................................4-369
Toner Bottle Fan ..................................................................................................4-371
Fusing Exit Fan ...................................................................................................4-374
PSU Fan 1, 2 .......................................................................................................4-377
AC Drive Board Fan ............................................................................................4-378
Controller Fan ......................................................................................................4-379
PFU Fan 1, 3, 4 (FAN15, FAN17, FAN18) .......................................................... 4-379
Main Intake Fan (FAN10) ....................................................................................4-384
Main Exhaust Fan (FAN9) ...................................................................................4-385
Heat Exhaust Fan (FAN8) ...................................................................................4-387
4.17.2 SWITCHES......................................................................................................4-390
Power Switch .......................................................................................................4-390
Front Door Safety Switch ....................................................................................4-390
Human Detection (Proximity) Sensor Switch ...................................................... 4-392
4.17.3 IMPORTANT SP CODES: FANS, SWITCHES ............................................... 4-399
4.18 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING .................................. 4-400
4.18.1 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING .............................................................. 4-400
Preparation ..........................................................................................................4-400
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side........................................................... 4-400
Blank Margin........................................................................................................4-401
Registration Buckle Adjustment .......................................................................... 4-402
4.18.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: SCANNING ............................................................ 4-402
Registration: Platen Mode ...................................................................................4-402
Magnification .......................................................................................................4-403
4.18.3 ADF SCANNING ADJUSTMENTS.................................................................. 4-403
Vertical Black Lines .............................................................................................4-403
DIP Switch Settings (ADF Main Board) .............................................................. 4-403
ADF Skew Correction ..........................................................................................4-404
5. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................... 5-1

5.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ............................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................................... 5-2
Bypass Unit ............................................................................................................. 5-2
Optics ...................................................................................................................... 5-3
Paper Feed Unit (PFU)............................................................................................ 5-3
Electrical Components ............................................................................................ 5-5
Tandem Tray ............................................................................................................ 5-6
Around the Drum ..................................................................................................... 5-7
Sensors, Switches ................................................................................................... 5-8
Motors, Fans............................................................................................................ 5-9
Transfer, Fusing, Exit Units ................................................................................... 5-10
Duplex Unit ............................................................................................................ 5-12
ADF Unit ................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.3 PAPER PATH..................................................................................................... 5-15
5.1.4 MOTORS ........................................................................................................... 5-17
5.2 SCANNER .................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.2.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-18
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 5-18
Cross Section ........................................................................................................ 5-18
Configuration ......................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.2 MECHANISM..................................................................................................... 5-19
Scanner ................................................................................................................. 5-19
Scanner drive ........................................................................................................ 5-20
Original Size Detection .......................................................................................... 5-20
Sensor States ........................................................................................................ 5-21
5.2.3 ORIGINAL FEED FROM ADF ........................................................................... 5-23
5.2.4 DUST DETECTION ........................................................................................... 5-24
Overview................................................................................................................ 5-24
Shifting the Scanning Position .............................................................................. 5-25
Scanner Anti-Condensation Heater ...................................................................... 5-25
5.3 IMAGE PROCESSING ................................................................................................ 5-27
5.3.1 IMAGE DATA FLOW.......................................................................................... 5-27
5.3.2 IMAGE PROCESSING ...................................................................................... 5-27
Image Processing Flow ......................................................................................... 5-27
Manual Gamma Adjustment .................................................................................. 5-28
SP Codes Related to Gamma Adjustments .......................................................... 5-29
5.4 PRINT PROCESS (MAIN ENGINE COMPONENTS) ................................................. 5-30
5.4.1 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................................... 5-30
Block Diagram of Laser Unit ................................................................................. 5-30
Laser Unit Components......................................................................................... 5-30
Laser Unit .............................................................................................................. 5-31
APC (Auto Power Control) .................................................................................... 5-31
Line scan mechanism............................................................................................ 5-32
Multi-beam Scanning............................................................................................. 5-32
5.4.2 DRUM UNIT ...................................................................................................... 5-33
Cross Section of Drum Unit................................................................................... 5-33
OPC Drum ............................................................................................................. 5-34
Charge ................................................................................................................... 5-34
Charge Wire Cleaning ........................................................................................... 5-35
PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp) ...................................................................................... 5-35
Paper separation pawls ......................................................................................... 5-36
Drum Cleaning mechanism ................................................................................... 5-37
Drum Cleaning Drive ............................................................................................. 5-38
Ozone Filters and Drum Cooling ........................................................................... 5-38
Toner recycling mechanism................................................................................... 5-39
Reusable and Unreusable Toner Separation Mechanism .................................... 5-40
Used Toner Bottle .................................................................................................. 5-41
Process Control ..................................................................................................... 5-43
Automatic Setting Operation ................................................................................. 5-44
5.4.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................................... 5-46
Development Unit Cross Section .......................................................................... 5-46
Toner Supply Unit .................................................................................................. 5-47
Development Mechanism ...................................................................................... 5-47
Inside the Development Unit ................................................................................. 5-48
Development Bias ................................................................................................. 5-49
Development Unit Pressure Release (IM9000 only)............................................. 5-49
Toner Supply.......................................................................................................... 5-50
Development Unit Drive and Cooling .................................................................... 5-50
Toner Transport ..................................................................................................... 5-51
Toner End Detection .............................................................................................. 5-52
Shutter Mechanism ............................................................................................... 5-52
Toner Bottle Supply, Toner Bottle Cooling ............................................................. 5-52
5.4.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL ............................................................................ 5-53
Sensor Control Mode ............................................................................................ 5-54
Pixel Count Mode .................................................................................................. 5-54
TD Sensor Reference Voltage .............................................................................. 5-54
Abnormal TD Sensor (S2) Output ......................................................................... 5-55
ID Sensor Control .................................................................................................. 5-55
Both TD Sensor (S2) and ID Sensor (S13) Abnormal .......................................... 5-56
Toner Near-End Control ........................................................................................ 5-56
Toner End Recovery .............................................................................................. 5-57
5.4.5 TRANSFER BELT UNIT .................................................................................... 5-59
Overview................................................................................................................ 5-59
Transfer Separation Mechanism ........................................................................... 5-60
Image Transfer Mechanism................................................................................... 5-60
Transfer Bias Charge Mechanism......................................................................... 5-61
Transfer Belt Lift .................................................................................................... 5-62
Transfer Belt Drive and Paper Transport Mechanism........................................... 5-62
Transfer Belt Cleaning Mechanism ....................................................................... 5-63
Transfer Belt Release Mechanism ........................................................................ 5-64
Anti-Condensation Heater (Option) (H1)............................................................... 5-64
Image Transfer Current Settings ........................................................................... 5-64
5.4.6 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................................... 5-65
Overview................................................................................................................ 5-65
More About the Fusing Unit................................................................................... 5-67
Fusing Pressure Mechanism................................................................................. 5-68
Pressure Application.............................................................................................. 5-69
Fusing Safety Devices........................................................................................... 5-70
Entrance Guide Height Adjustment ....................................................................... 5-70
Fusing Drive Mechanism ....................................................................................... 5-70
Temperature Control for Special Paper................................................................. 5-71
Fusing Temperature Control .................................................................................. 5-71
CPM Down Mode .................................................................................................. 5-71
Important Related SP Codes ................................................................................ 5-72
5.4.7 TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN CONTROL .................................................... 5-72
Fans Controlled by Temperature Sensor .............................................................. 5-73
Fan Speed Control by Temperature Sensor ......................................................... 5-75
Relate SP Codes ................................................................................................... 5-76
5.5 PAPER TRANSPORT .................................................................................................. 5-77
5.5.1 PAPER FEED UNITS (PFU) ............................................................................. 5-77
Overview................................................................................................................ 5-77
5.5.2 TRAY PAPER FEED DRIVE.............................................................................. 5-79
Paper Feed From Tray 1 ....................................................................................... 5-79
5.5.3 PFU AND TRAY DETAILS ................................................................................. 5-81
Paper Feed and Separation .................................................................................. 5-81
Separation Roller Release .................................................................................... 5-83
Tray Raising and Lowering.................................................................................... 5-84
Tray Upper Limit Detection.................................................................................... 5-85
Paper End Detection ............................................................................................. 5-85
Paper Size Detection............................................................................................. 5-86
Tray Set Mechanism.............................................................................................. 5-88
Vertical Paper Feed ............................................................................................... 5-88
Paper Feed Retry Control ..................................................................................... 5-89
Pre-feed Stop Time Adjustment ............................................................................ 5-92
5.5.4 TRAY 1 (TANDEM TRAY).................................................................................. 5-93
Paper Size Detection............................................................................................. 5-93
Tray Movement Mechanism .................................................................................. 5-93
Paper Height Detection ......................................................................................... 5-94
Right Tray Fence Movement Mechanism ............................................................. 5-95
Left Tray Movement............................................................................................... 5-96
Left Tray Lock Mechanism .................................................................................... 5-96
Right Tray Lock Mechanism .................................................................................. 5-97
5.5.5 BYPASS TRAY .................................................................................................. 5-98
Bypass Feed Tray Mechanism .............................................................................. 5-98
Bypass Tray Feed and Separation Mechanism .................................................... 5-99
Paper Stopper Mechanism.................................................................................... 5-99
Bypass Tray Paper End Detection Mechanism .................................................. 5-100
Paper Size Detection...........................................................................................5-101
Paper Registration and Transport in Bypass Unit ............................................... 5-102
5.5.6 INVERT, DUPLEX UNIT ..................................................................................5-104
Overview..............................................................................................................5-104
Motors ..................................................................................................................5-105
Invert Duplex Entrance ........................................................................................5-105
Jogging Operation ...............................................................................................5-106
Invert Operation ...................................................................................................5-107
Duplex Transport Mechanism ............................................................................. 5-108
Paper Jam Release and Reset Mechanism........................................................ 5-109
5.5.7 EXIT UNIT ....................................................................................................... 5-110
Overview.............................................................................................................. 5-110
Decurl Mechanism............................................................................................... 5-110
Exit Junction Gate Mechanism............................................................................ 5-111
Duplex Interleave Feed Sequence ...................................................................... 5-112
5.6 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ................................................................................. 5-114
5.6.1 BOARDS ......................................................................................................... 5-114
Board Layout ....................................................................................................... 5-114
Board Functions .................................................................................................. 5-114
5.7 ADF UNIT ...................................................................................................................5-125
5.7.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................5-125
Specifications ......................................................................................................5-125
Supported Original Sizes ....................................................................................5-125
5.7.2 MECHANISM DETAILS ...................................................................................5-126
Drive Components...............................................................................................5-126
Original Pick-up ...................................................................................................5-126
Bottom Plate Lift ..................................................................................................5-127
Skew Correction Mechanism .............................................................................. 5-128
Original Size Detection ........................................................................................5-129
Original Feed/Transport Mechanism ................................................................... 5-131
Original Scanning ................................................................................................5-133
Jam Detection......................................................................................................5-134
Abnormal Detection .............................................................................................5-135
5.8 NEW FEATURES .......................................................................................................5-139
5.8.1 PS3/PDF DIRECT EMULATION (CLONE PS) ............................................... 5-139
Overview..............................................................................................................5-139
How to Distinguish Adobe PS from Clone PS ..................................................... 5-139
Difference in Device Fonts ..................................................................................5-142
Font Change Confirmation Screen ..................................................................... 5-143
List of fonts and their replacements (Adobe PS -> Clone PS) ........................... 5-144
Differences in Driver Functions ........................................................................... 5-148
5.8.2 SETTINGS ON DISPLAYING AN ALERT WHEN THE ETHERNET CABLE IS
BROKEN OR DISCONNECTED ............................................................................... 5-149
5.8.3 OTHER NEW FEATURES .............................................................................. 5-150
6. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ........................................................... 6-1

6.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ............................. 6-1
Entering SP Mode ................................................................................................... 6-1
Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES ....................................................................................... 6-1
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................................... 6-2
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............................. 6-3
Selecting the Program Number ............................................................................... 6-3
Exiting Service Mode............................................................................................... 6-4
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................................... 6-4
PM Counter/ Firmware Update ............................................................................... 6-4
Checking the PM Counter ....................................................................................... 6-5
Executing Firmware Update .................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.3 REMARKS ........................................................................................................... 6-6
Others ...................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ......................................................................... 6-8
6.2.1 SP TABLES ......................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING .......................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902 ................................................................. 6-9
Test Pattern Table .................................................................................................... 6-9
6.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SD CARD) .............................................................................. 6-11
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 6-11
6.4.2 UPDATE PROCEDURE .................................................................................... 6-11
6.4.3 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING ........................................................ 6-15
6.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) ........................................... 6-25
6.5.2 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION ................................................................. 6-25
6.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE) .............................................. 6-26
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 6-26
6.6.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE ....................................................................................... 6-27
6.6.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) ..................................................... 6-29
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (Reserve) ........................ 6-30
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve.................................... 6-32
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve ............................................. 6-33
6.6.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD .................................................................................... 6-35
6.7 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) ................................ 6-38
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 6-38
6.7.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS ................................................ 6-39
Downloads the latest package .............................................................................. 6-39
ARFU Update Determination ................................................................................ 6-40
Update Process ..................................................................................................... 6-42
6.7.3 RELATED SP .................................................................................................... 6-43
6.8 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................................................ 6-48
6.8.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD ................................. 6-48
6.8.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM.................................................... 6-49
6.9 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT.................................................................................. 6-50
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 6-50
6.9.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT ............................................................................. 6-50
Data that can be imported and exported............................................................... 6-50
Data that cannot be imported or exported ............................................................ 6-50
Exporting Device Information ................................................................................ 6-51
Importing Device Information ................................................................................ 6-52
6.9.3 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT ............................................................................. 6-52
Data that can be imported and exported............................................................... 6-52
Exporting Device Information ................................................................................ 6-53
Importing Device Information ................................................................................ 6-54
6.9.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS ...................... 6-54
6.10 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................................... 6-57
6.10.1 INFORMATION LIST ......................................................................................... 6-57
6.10.2 DOWNLOAD ..................................................................................................... 6-57
Auto Backup Setting .............................................................................................. 6-58
6.10.3 UPLOAD ............................................................................................................ 6-58
6.11CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS .............................................................................. 6-60
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 6-60
Security of the Operation Log ............................................................................... 6-61
6.11.2 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL ......................... 6-62
Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with SD Card ....................................... 6-62
6.11.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE MONITOR .................... 6-65
7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 7-1

7.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE........................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 SC LOGGING ...................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT ................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT ....................................................................................... 7-4
7.2 SC100: SCANNING ....................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 SC100 (ENGINE) ................................................................................................ 7-6
7.3 SC200: EXPOSURE .................................................................................................... 7-23
7.3.1 SC200 (ENGINE) .............................................................................................. 7-23
7.4 SC300: IMAGE DEVELOPMENT 1 ............................................................................. 7-28
7.4.1 SC300 (ENGINE) .............................................................................................. 7-28
7.5 SC400: IMAGE DEVELOPMENT 2 ............................................................................. 7-35
7.5.1 SC400 (ENGINE) .............................................................................................. 7-35
7.6 SC500: FEED, TRANSPORT, DUPLEX, AND FUSING .............................................. 7-38
7.6.1 SC500 (ENGINE) .............................................................................................. 7-38
7.7 SC600: DATA COMMUNICATION ............................................................................... 7-69
7.7.1 SC600 (ENGINE) .............................................................................................. 7-69
7.7.2 SC600 (CONTROLLER) ................................................................................... 7-75
7.8 SC700: PERIPHERALS ............................................................................................... 7-84
7.8.1 SC700 TO 703: ADF.......................................................................................... 7-84
7.8.2 SC720: FINISHER/ BOOKLET FINISHER ....................................................... 7-88
Troubleshooting for SC720-XX ............................................................................. 7-95
7.8.3 SC722: FINISHER ...........................................................................................7-104
7.8.4 SC724: SLIDE SORT TRAY ............................................................................ 7-112
7.8.5 SC725: MULTI-FOLDING UNIT ...................................................................... 7-116
7.8.6 SC726: MULTI-FOLDING UNIT ...................................................................... 7-123
7.8.7 SC740: COVER INTERPOSER TRAY............................................................ 7-127
7.8.8 SC745: MAIL BOX...........................................................................................7-128
7.9 SC800: CONTROLLER .............................................................................................7-129
7.9.1 SC800 (CONTROLLER) ................................................................................. 7-129
7.10 SC900: OTHERS ................................................................................................7-150
7.10.1 SC900 (ENGINE) ............................................................................................7-150
7.10.2 SC900 (CONTROLLER) ................................................................................. 7-151
7.11SC540 TO SC545 ......................................................................................................7-154
7.11.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .....................................................................................7-154
7.11.2 SC540 FUSING WEB MOTOR ERROR ......................................................... 7-154
Confirm failure to feed .........................................................................................7-154
Web drive gears ..................................................................................................7-155
Web motor (M9)...................................................................................................7-155
IOB (PCB1) connections .....................................................................................7-156
IOB (PCB1)..........................................................................................................7-156
Web motor harnesses .........................................................................................7-156
Paper exit unit harnesses ....................................................................................7-157
7.11.3 SC542 FUSING WARM-UP ERROR 1: CENTER THERMISTOR ................. 7-157
Error duplication ..................................................................................................7-157
Power supply voltage level..................................................................................7-157
Center NC sensor position ..................................................................................7-158
Thermostats.........................................................................................................7-159
Fusing lamp connections ....................................................................................7-159
Fusing lamp filaments .........................................................................................7-160
AC control board connections ............................................................................. 7-160
AC control board .................................................................................................7-160
IOB (PCB1)..........................................................................................................7-161
Harnesses ...........................................................................................................7-161
7.11.4 SC543 FUSING LAMP OVERHEAT ERROR 1 (SOFTWARE) ...................... 7-161
End thermistor alignment ....................................................................................7-162
End thermistor damage .......................................................................................7-162
AC control board .................................................................................................7-163
IOB (PCB1) connection .......................................................................................7-163
IOB (PCB1)..........................................................................................................7-164
Harnesses ...........................................................................................................7-164
7.11.5 SC544 FUSING LAMP OVERHEAT ERROR 1: HARDWARE ....................... 7-164
End thermistor alignment ....................................................................................7-165
End thermistor damage check ............................................................................ 7-165
AC control board .................................................................................................7-166
IOB (PCB1) Connections ....................................................................................7-167
IOB.......................................................................................................................7-167
Harnesses ...........................................................................................................7-167
7.11.6 SC545 FUSING LAMP OVERHEAT ERROR 2: CENTER LAMP .................. 7-167
Duplication of the error ........................................................................................7-167
Power supply voltage level..................................................................................7-168
Thermostats.........................................................................................................7-169
Fusing lamp connections ....................................................................................7-169
Fusing lamp filaments .........................................................................................7-170
AC control board .................................................................................................7-170
IOB.......................................................................................................................7-171
Harnesses ...........................................................................................................7-171
7.12 JAM DETECTION ...............................................................................................7-172
7.12.1 PAPER JAM CODE DISPLAY ......................................................................... 7-172
7.12.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES ............................................................. 7-172
ADF......................................................................................................................7-172
Main Machine ......................................................................................................7-173
LCIT RT4080 .......................................................................................................7-174
Finisher SR4150, Booklet Finisher SR4160 ....................................................... 7-175
Finisher SR4140..................................................................................................7-177
Punch Unit PU 5050 ............................................................................................7-179
Multi-Folding Unit FD4020 ..................................................................................7-179
Mail Box CS4010.................................................................................................7-180
Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 ............................................................................. 7-181
Multi-Folding Unit FD4010 ..................................................................................7-181
Slide Sort Tray SH4020 .......................................................................................7-182
7.12.3 PAPER SIZE CODES ......................................................................................7-183
7.12.4 MAIN MACHINE SENSOR LOCATIONS ........................................................ 7-183
7.12.5 FREQUENT PAPER JAMS ............................................................................. 7-184
7.13 PERIPHERAL UNITS ..........................................................................................7-187
7.13.1 HEIGHT AND LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ............................................................. 7-187
Before you begin: ................................................................................................7-187
Setting the Leveling Shoes ................................................................................. 7-187
7.13.2 SKEW AND SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ................................................ 7-189
Overview..............................................................................................................7-189
Checking Side-to-Side Registration .................................................................... 7-191
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration .................................................................. 7-192
Detecting Paper Skew .........................................................................................7-193
Correcting Skew ..................................................................................................7-194
7.13.3 BOOKLET FINISHER CENTER FOLD CORRECTION ................................. 7-195
Slant in the direction of paper feed ..................................................................... 7-195
Slant opposite the direction of paper feed .......................................................... 7-196
How to Correct Misaligned Center Folding ......................................................... 7-197
7.13.4 FINISHER SR4150, BOOKLET FINISHER SR4160 ...................................... 7-199
Troubleshooting for Jam at Proof Guide Plate .................................................... 7-199
How to Deal with Stapling Errors Caused by Curls ............................................ 7-201
7.13.5 OUTPUT JOGGER UNITS.............................................................................. 7-201
Jogger Width Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 7-201
7.14 OTHER PROBLEMS ...........................................................................................7-203
7.14.1 COMMON PROBLEMS...................................................................................7-203
7.14.2 CHECKING IMAGE QUALITY ........................................................................ 7-203
Resolution............................................................................................................7-203
Even Density .......................................................................................................7-204
Magnification Errors ............................................................................................7-204
Magnification Error Variation ............................................................................... 7-204
7.14.3 REINSTRALLING OCR UNIT ......................................................................... 7-205
7.15 FUSES.................................................................................................................7-207
7.15.1 AC DRIVE BOARD ..........................................................................................7-207
7.15.2 PSU .................................................................................................................7-207
8. SMART OPERATION PANEL ..................................................... 8-1

8.1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 NFC BOARD ....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 LCD...................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 MICROPHONE .................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.4 WI-FI MODULE ................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.5 SPEAKER ............................................................................................................ 8-4
8.1.6 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................ 8-5
8.2 MECHANISM ................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ................................................................................... 8-9
Hardware Specifications ......................................................................................... 8-9
Software Specifications ......................................................................................... 8-12
Communication Specifications .............................................................................. 8-13
8.2.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT ..................................................... 8-16
Components of the Control Panel ......................................................................... 8-16
Panel Display......................................................................................................... 8-17
8.2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................................... 8-19
Touch Panel ........................................................................................................... 8-20
8.2.4 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY .......................................................... 8-21
Exiting Energy Saving Modes ............................................................................... 8-21
Screen Startup Mode ............................................................................................ 8-21
Shutdown Functions .............................................................................................. 8-23
8.3 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................... 8-25
8.3.1 MAINTENANCE MODES .................................................................................. 8-25
8.3.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE MODE ................. 8-25
Login ...................................................................................................................... 8-25
Login Status Indicator............................................................................................ 8-26
Logout.................................................................................................................... 8-26
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator .......................... 8-27
8.3.3 SERVICE MODE MENU ................................................................................... 8-27
Wireless & Networks ............................................................................................. 8-27
Device .................................................................................................................... 8-28
Personal ................................................................................................................ 8-29
System ................................................................................................................... 8-30
8.3.4 PANEL SELF CHECK ....................................................................................... 8-36
LED Check ............................................................................................................ 8-37
Key Check ............................................................................................................. 8-38
LCD Check ............................................................................................................ 8-38
TouchPanel Calibration ......................................................................................... 8-38
Bluetooth Check .................................................................................................... 8-39
Speaker Check ...................................................................................................... 8-40
TouchPanel Check ................................................................................................ 8-40
Wireless LAN Check ............................................................................................. 8-41
MultiTouch Calibration ........................................................................................... 8-42
eMMC Erasure Count............................................................................................ 8-43
MultiTouch Sensitivity Adjustment ......................................................................... 8-44
8.3.5 RECOVERY MODE........................................................................................... 8-45
8.3.6 SPECIAL KEY COMBINATIONS....................................................................... 8-46
8.3.7 BACKUP/RESTORE FOR SMART OPERATION PANEL
APPLICATION/SETTINGS FUNCTION....................................................................... 8-47
Overview................................................................................................................ 8-47
Backup................................................................................................................... 8-47
Restore .................................................................................................................. 8-48
8.3.8 SOFTWARE UPDATE ....................................................................................... 8-48
Updating the Smart Operation Panel .................................................................... 8-48
Installation/Update from a Media .......................................................................... 8-50
Installation/Update from the eDC Server .............................................................. 8-50
Application Site ...................................................................................................... 8-53
8.4 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 8-54
8.4.1 MULTITOUCH MISDETECTION BY THE OPERATION PANEL DUE TO AN AM
RADIO SIGNAL............................................................................................................ 8-54
8.4.2 PROBLEMS AND ERRORS RELATED TO HARDWARE ................................ 8-56
8.4.3 ERRORS RELATED TO APPLICATIONS ......................................................... 8-58
8.4.4 FACTORY RESET AND RESTORATION ......................................................... 8-58
Factory Reset ........................................................................................................ 8-59
8.4.5 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING APPLICATION UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD
8-60
Error Messages ..................................................................................................... 8-60
Error Codes ........................................................................................................... 8-61
8.4.6 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING UPDATE FROM THE EDC SERVER ....... 8-61
8.4.7 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................... 8-63
Operation Panel Unit ............................................................................................. 8-63
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations.
Symbols:
Symbol What it means
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
Location of the screw(s) to be unscrewed or loosen
Location of the connector(s), clamp(s) or spring(s) to be removed

Direction (Rotating or moving)
Abbreviations:
Abbreviations such as (M1), (S1), or (TH1) attached after the name of some electrical
components show the symbols in Point-to-Point diagram.
Abbreviation Meaning
SEF Short Edge Feed [A]
LEF Long Edge Feed [B]
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
TRADEMARKS
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox is registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Dropbox is a registered trademark or trademark of Dropbox, Inc.
Google, Android, Google Drive, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or
other countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Bonjour, macOS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Edge, and Internet Explorer are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The proper name of Edge is Microsoft® EdgeTM.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 11 is Internet Explorer® 11.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2019 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2019 Essentials
Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks
of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screenshots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Machine Configuration
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
1.1 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Information
0BProduct
1.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
No. Part No. Part

1 Entrance Roller (ADF) 18 Feed Roller (Paper Tray)
2 Feed Belt (ADF) 19 Separation Roller (Paper Tray)
3 Separation Roller (ADF) 20 Pick-up Roller (Paper Tray)
4 Pick-up Roller (ADF) 21 Universal Tray (Tray 3)
5 CIS (Contact Image Sensor) (PCB10) 22 Universal Tray (Tray 2)
6 Original Feed-in Tray 23 Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
7 Exposure Glass 24 Duplex Unit
SM 1-1 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
No. Part No. Part

8 Fusing Unit 25 Inverter
9 Lens Block 26 Inverter Exit Roller
10 OPC Drum 27 Inverter Entrance Roller
11 Development Unit 28 Duplex Junction Gate
12 Development Roller 29 Reverse Trigger Roller
13 Registration Sensor (S3) 30 Exit Unit
14 By-pass Tray 31 Pressure Roller
15 Relay Sensor (S5) 32 Hot Roller
16 Grip Roller 33 Contact Glass (ADF)
17 Feed Sensor (S27, S54, S58) (Paper Tray)
1.1.2 PAPER PATH (WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY)
No. Part
1 Proof Exit Tray
2 Cover Sheet Path
3 Original Path
4 By-pass Tray
5 LCT Feed
6 Vertical Transport Path
7 Finisher Exit Tray 2
8 Finisher Exit Tray 1
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 1-2 SM
1.1.3 PAPER PATH (WITH 9-BIN MAILBOX)
Information
0BProduct
No. Part
1 Original Paper Path
2 Vertical Transport Path
3 LCT Feed
4 Selected Trays
5 Turn Gates
6 Mailbox Paper Path
7 Junction Gate
8 Junction Gates
1.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
No. Part
1 Scanner Motor (M22)
2 Drum Motor (M25)
3 Fusing Exit Motor (M26)
4 Registration Motor (M2)
5 Used Toner Motor (M4)
6 Tray 3 Paper Feed Motor (M14)
8 Lower Relay Motor
10 Bypass Motor (M3)
11 Development Motor (M24)
Machine Codes and Peripherals
1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS
1.2.1 MAIN MACHINE
Information
0BProduct
No. Item Machine Code
1 IM 7000 D0CZ-17 (NA)
D0CZ-27 (EU)
D0CZ-29 (AP/KOR)
D0CZ-19 (TWN)
D0CZ-61 (CHN)
2 IM 8000 D0D0-17 (NA)
D0D0-27 (EU)
D0D0-29 (AP/KOR)
D0D0-19 (TWN)
D0D0-61 (CHN)
3 IM 9000 D0D1-17 (NA)
D0D1-27 (EU)
D0D1-29 (AP/KOR)
D0D1-19 (TWN)
D0D1-61 (CHN)
1.2.2 PERIPHERAL UNITS
(1) Options Mounted to the Machine’s Top Section
Unit No.
1 Page Keeper Type M37 D3FF
2 Small Paper Feeding Unit Type M37 D3FF
3 NFC Card Reader Type M42 D3HP
(2) Options Mounted to the Machine’s Right Side Section
Unit No.
1 LCIT RT4080 D3J6
2 81/2" × 14" PAPER SIZE TRAY TYPE 9002 B474
(3) Options Mounted to the Machine’s Left Side Section
Unit No.
1 Copy Tray Type 9002 B756
2 Multi-Folding Unit FD4010 D3HJ
3 Multi-Folding Unit FD4020 D3HH
Information
0BProduct
4 Shift Sort Tray SH4020 D3HG
5 Mail Box CS4010 D708
6 Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 D3CN
7 Booklet Finisher SR4160 D3HC
8 Finisher SR4150 D3HB
9 Finisher SR4140 D3HD
10 Output Jogger Unit Type M25 D3CJ
- Punch Unit PU 3090 D3FP
- Punch Unit PU 5050 D3HE
(4) Other Options
Unit No.
1 A3/11"×17" Tray Type M44 D3JG
2 Copy Connector Type M25 D3D3
1.2.3 OTHER OPTIONS
Mainframe Options: External

Unit No. Connection
ADF Handle Type C D593 On mainframe
Card Reader Bracket Type 3352 D593 On mainframe
External Keyboard Bracket Type M25 D3DH On mainframe
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M19 D3BS On mainframe
Tab Sheet Holder Type 9002 B499 On mainframe
Mainframe Options: Internal

Unit No Connection
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 B870 Main machine
Controller Options: I/F Slots

Unit No Connection
File Format Converter Type M19 D3BR Controller Box I/F Slot
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 D3C0 Controller Box I/F Slot
IEEE 802.11 a/g/n Interface Unit M19 B3BR Controller Box I/F Slot
Device Server Option Type M37 D3GF Controller Box I/F Slot, USB B
Controller Options
Unit No Connection
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 D3BS SD Card
Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 D792 HDD
IPDS Unit Type M44 D3J8 SD Card
OCR Unit Type M13 D3AC SD Card
PostScript3 Type M44 D3J8 SD Card
SD Card for Fonts Type D D641 SD Card
Unicode Font Package for SAP(R) 1 License, 10 License B869 SD Card
XPS Direct Print Option Type M44 D3J8 SD Card
Fax Options
Unit No Connection
Fax Option Type M44 D3J9 Controller Board
G3 Interface Unit Type M44 D3J9 Controller Board
Fax Connection Unit Type M44 D3J9 SD Card
Fax Memory Unit Type M25 64MB D3D5 Fax Board
Specifications
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS
See " Appendices" for the following information:
Information
0BProduct
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes
• Software Accessories
• Optional Equipment Specifications
Differences from Predecessor Products
1.4 DIFFERENCES FROM PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
The following table shows main differences from predecessor machine (RICOH MP
9003_7503_6503).
Items RICOH MP RICOH IM 9000_8000_7000
9003_7503_6503 (This Machine)
(Predecessor Machine)
Productivity Continuous Copying MP 6503: 65cpm, MP IM 7000: 70cpm, IM 8000:
Speed 7503: 75cpm, MP 9003: 80cpm, IM 9000: 90cpm
90cpm
WUT MP 6503/7503: 20 sec., IM 7000/8000: 20sec., IM
MP 9003: 300sec. 9000: 60sec.
Recovery from MP 6503/7503: 10sec., IM 7000/8000: 10sec., IM
sleep MP 9003: 300sec. 9000: 60sec.
Scan speed One-side: 120ipm / One side: 120ipm /
Two-sides: 220ipm Two-sides: 240ipm
Operation Panel Operation panel Smart Operation Panel Smart Operation Panel G2.5
generation G2
Tilt Function 1 step (CE operation) No steps
Fusing Hot Roller, Pressure Different parts are used Common parts are used in
Roller in MP 6503/7503 and IM 7000/8000 and IM 9000.
MP 9003.
Paper Paper Feed Control - Jam prevention control
Feed/Transport (Retry paper feed control,
pre-feed stop time
adjustment) is added.
User notification - Notification of mistakes of
paper size settings is added.
Paper Feed Roller - Very durable EPDM roller is
adopted.
Electrical JAVA Applicable Not applicable
Components ROM mounted on EEPROM SMB
BiCU
Toner Collection Operator that CE User (It can be changed
Bottle replaces this bottle from User to CE by SP
switching.
Automatic shipment -
service
Differences from Predecessor Products
Items RICOH MP RICOH IM 9000_8000_7000

9003_7503_6503 (This Machine)
(Predecessor Machine)
Option FAX G4 unit -
Information
0BProduct
Main Machine Fine Particle Filter - The filter, supplied as an
Installation accessory, is installed on the
rear side.
Anti-condensation The heater is The heater is already
Heater connected during main connected. (switched on/off
machine installation. by SP)
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1BInstallation
2.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range
• Recommended: 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F)
• Possible: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 90°F)
2. Humidity Range:
• Recommended: 30% to 70 %RH
• Possible: 15% to 80% RH (27 °C 80%, 32 °C 54%)
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or strong light.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3
6. The optimum operation range is shown in the shaded area of the illustration below.
Performance of the machine outside this range cannot be guaranteed.
7. If the work site is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the machine where it will be:
• Subjected to sudden temperature changes
• Directly exposed to cool air from an air-conditioner
• Directly exposed to heat from a heater
8. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
9. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet) above sea level.
10. Place the copier on a strong and level base with the front and back of the machine within
±5 mm (0.2") of level.
11. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
12. Do not connect the machine to a power source shared with another electrical appliance.
13. The machine can generate an electromagnetic field which could interfere with radio or
television reception.
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within ±5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within ±5 mm (0.2") of level
The machine legs may be screwed up or down in order to level the machine. Set a carpenter’s
level on the exposure glass.
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the machine near the power source with minimum clearance as shown below. The same
amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral devices are installed.
• NA
• EU
1BInstallation
NA EU
Rear [A] 5 cm (1.97") 7.3 cm (2.88")
Right [B] 10 cm (3.94") 10 cm (3.94")
Front [C] 70 cm (27.6") 70 cm (27.6")
Left [D] 4 cm (1.58") 4 cm (1.58")
2.1.4 DIMENSIONS
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS
• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible so it can
be unplugged in an emergency.
• Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Be sure to ground the machine.
• Never place anything on the power cord.
Input voltage level North America IM7000/8000: 120-127V / 60Hz / 20A or more
IM9000: 208-240V / 60Hz / 20A or more
Europe/Asia 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: 10 A or more
Taiwan 110V, 60 Hz, 20A or more
Permissible voltage fluctuation ±10%
• Never turn off the power switch when the power LED on the operation panel is lit or
flashing.
The Main Power LED lights or flashes:

• While the platen cover or ADF is open
• While the main machine is communicating with the network server
• While the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory when reading or writing data.
1BInstallation
• There is only one power switch at the upper left corner of the machine. There is no power
switch on the operation panel.
• When you turn the machine off, a message will appear and tell you that it may take as long
as 2 minutes for the machine to switch off. Wait for this message to go off.
• Never unplug the machine from its power source until the message power off screen on the
operation panel goes off.
Main Machine
2.2 MAIN MACHINE
2.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
No. Description Q'ty Comments

IM IM IM
7000 8000 9000
1 Power Cord 1* 1* 1 *TWN: 2
Main Machine

IM IM IM
7000 8000 9000
2 Stopper:Power Supply Cord 1* 1* 1 *TWN: 2
1BInstallation
3 Screw - M3 x 6 1* 1* 1 *TWN: 2
4 Cloth Holder 1 1 1
5 Cloth – Exposure Glass 1 1 1
6 Stand:Auxiliary:Ass'y 2 2 2
7 Leveling Shoe 2 2 2
8 Decal: Caution Chart: Paper Set: 3 3 3
Direction
9 Decal:Size Indication:Multi-Language:C5 1 1 1
10 Accessory:Cover:Corpuscle:Ass'y 1 1 1
11 CD-ROM:DRV:M-C7:EU:ASS'Y 1 1 1 EU Only
CD-ROM:DRV:M-C7:NA:ASS'Y 1 1 1 NA Only
CD-ROM:DRV:M-C7:AA:ASS'Y 1 1 1 AP Only
CD-ROM:DRV:M-C7:CHN_TWN:ASS'Y 1 1 1 CHN, TWN Only
CD-ROM:DRV/OI:M-C7:KOR:ASS'Y 1 1 1 KOR Only
12 Manual:Read this first 1 1 1
- Manual:Waste_Toner_Bottle:EXP 1 1 1
13 Safety Information Sheet 1 1 1 EU Only
14 Sheet:EULA:21Languages:JA 1 1 1 EU, NA, AP Only
- Sheet:EULA:CN 1 1 1 CHN Only
- Sheet:EULA:Taiwan:AD-C3V2/RU-C3 1 1 1 TWN Only
15 Seal:Caution:21Languages 1 1 1 EU, NA, AP Only
16 Sheet:Name:Key Top-Tel:CHN 1 1 1 CHN Only
17 Sheet:Notes_AIR:GB (D0CM7064) 1 1 1 EU, AP Only
Sheet:Notes_AIR:GB (D0CM7065) 1 1 1 EU Only
Sheet:Notes_AIR:NA 1 1 1 NA Only
Sheet:Notes_AIR:AA 1 1 1 CHN, TWN Only
18 Caution Chart:Cheetah:EXP 1 1 1 NA, AP, EU Only
19 Label:KEMCO 1 1 1 KOR Only
20 Caution Chart:FCC:JA 1 1 1 NA Only
21 Caution Chart:CAN:JA 1 1 1 NA Only
22 Caution Chart:CE:JP 1 1 1 EU Only
- Plate:Logotype:RIC 1 1 1 EU, NA Only
- Plate:Logotype:LANIER 1 1 1 NA Only
- Plate:Logotype:SAVIN 1 1 1 NA Only
Main Machine

IM IM IM
7000 8000 9000
- Sheet:Notes_SEC:EXP 1 1 1 EU, NA Only
- Sheet:Notes_SEC:AA 1 1 1 AP, CHN, TWN
Only
- Shield:Caution:Chinese 1 1 1 CHN Only
- Shield:Caution:Taiwan:English 1 1 1 TWN Only
2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW

No. Step
Before Power On
1 Remove Tapes and Shipping Materials
2 Attach Power Cord to Machine
3 Remove Development Unit
4 Load Developer
5 Re-install Development Unit
6 Set Toner Bottle
7 Set Tandem Tray for A4 or LT Paper
8 Level the Machine
9 Attach Cleaning Cloth Holder
10 Connect Drum Heater, Tray Heater (Optional)
11 Load Paper, Attach Decals
12 Attach Nameplate
After Power On
13 Initialize Toner and Process Control Settings
14 Check Image Quality and Settings
15 Important Notice on Security Issues
16 Auto Remote Firmware Update Settings
17 @Remote Settings
18 Security Settings
2.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Remove Tapes and Shipping Materials
1. Remove the cover [A].
Main Machine
2. With four people, one person at each corner of the machine, lift the machine slightly while a
5th person slides the pallet [B] from under the machine.
1BInstallation
3. Remove visible orange tape and cardboard strips from the front [A] and right side [B] of the
main machine.
4. Remove tape and cardboard strips from rear [C] and left side [D].
Main Machine
5. Remove tapes from the surface of ADF.
6. Open ADF [A], and then remove the packing material [B] inside the ADF.
7. Remove all tapes inside the ADF, and then close ADF.
8. Remove accessory decals [A] attached on the original output tray.
Main Machine
9. Raise the ADF, and then remove the operation panel and the cover sheet.
1BInstallation
10. Raise the ADF and remove tape.
11. Release the lever [A] to open the exit unit, and then pull the protection sheet [B] out from
behind the white plate.
Main Machine
12. Remove the protection sheet [A] from the reference scale of the scanner unit.
13. Open the bypass tray [A], and then remove the protection sheet [B].
14. Open the front door, and then remove the tapes.
Main Machine
15. Open the toner supply unit [A], and then remove the tapes [B].
1BInstallation
16. Remove the screws and connector from the PCU inner cover [A].
Main Machine
17. Rotate down the lever [A], and then remove the PCU inner cover [B].
18. Remove bracket, wire, red tag [A].
19. Remove plug, wire, red tag [A].
20. Remove the tape [A] from the used toner unit.
Main Machine
21. Remove the tapes of the tray 1, and take out the accessories.
1BInstallation
Attaching Fine Particle Filter
• EU: IM 7000/ IM 8000 only
Main Machine
1. Attach the fine particle filter [A] to the rear of the main machine.
2. Fix the fine particle filter [A].
3. Attach the cover [A].
Attach Power Cord to Machine

1. Locate the power connection point [A] on the left rear corner of the main machine.
Main Machine
2. Attach the safety bracket [B] near the end of the power plug.
1BInstallation
3. Set bracket [A] into the slot.
4. Plug the cord [B] into the machine, and then fasten the bracket.
• Do not connect the power cord until you are instructed to do so.
Remove Development Unit

1. If the LCIT is connected to the right side of the machine, disconnect it and pull it away.
2. Prepare a clean, flat surface for the development unit.
3. Open the developer kit box and take out the protective sheet [A] and developer pack [B].
4. Unwrap the sheet and spread it on a flat clean surface [C].
Main Machine
5. Remove the shuttle cover [A].
• A washer is attached to the shuttle cover screw in order to prevent the screw from
falling into the machine. Turn the screw counter-clockwise only enough turns to
remove it. If you loosen the screw too much the washer will fall into the machine.
6. Remove lock screw of the toner bottle holder, and then open the toner supply unit [A].
• Open the front door completely by pushing the front door until the toner supply
unit stops.
Main Machine
1BInstallation
9. Remove the knob [A], and then remove the development unit face plate [B].
• Turn the knob clockwise to remove it.
Main Machine
10. Raise the toner supply pipe shutter to close the pipe.
11. On the right [A] disconnect the development unit.
12. Slip the development unit [A] to the right.

13. Push the development unit [A] slightly to the right, and then pull the unit [B] straight out of
the machine.
Main Machine
14. Lay the development unit on the prepared surface.
1BInstallation
Load Developer
1. (IM9000 only) At the front end of the unit, disconnect the pressure release tube.
2. Disconnect the toner hopper.
3. Rotate the toner hopper slightly as you lift it.
Main Machine
4. Remove the toner hopper and set it aside.
5. Shake the developer pack to loosen the developer inside.

6. Cut off the top of the pack.
7. Save the top with the lot number embossed on it. You will need to enter this number later
with SP2963-002.
Main Machine
8. While turning the knob slowly in the direction of the arrow as shown below, move the open
end of the pack side to side as you continuously pour developer into the open slot of the
development unit.
1BInstallation
Re-install Development Unit
Pay attention to these important points as you re-install the development unit.
• To re-assemble the top and bottom half of the development unit, first allow the bottom half
[A] to tip slightly forward.
• Hold the top half [B] (toner hopper) over the bottom half, set the cutouts on the ends of the
shaft below, and then slowly rock the top half forward [C] so the holes are aligned.
Main Machine
• Make sure that the holes are aligned at the rear [A] and front [B], and then fasten the
screws.
• If you are installing a IM 9000, be sure to re-connect the pressure release tube at the front
of the development unit.
• Slip slightly to the right as you push it slowly back into the machine.
• Push the development unit in until it stops, and then push it to the left.
Main Machine
• You should see the pin through the oval hole as shown below. This means the unit is
locked in the correct position.
1BInstallation
• The horizontal pin must be through the hole and overlapping the plate as shown below on
the left.
• If the pin does not slide over the plate as shown above, turn the front gear of the
development unit counter-clockwise and try again.
• Be sure to re-connect the development unit [A].
Main Machine
• You must remember to lower the supply pipe shutter so the pipe is open.
• The shutter must be down. If it remains up, you will not be able to close the toner
bottle holder and the front door.
• Be sure to raise lever C1 before you close the door. (The front door will not close if C1 is
down.)
Set Toner Bottle

1. Hold both sides [A] of the toner bottle, and then rotate the bottle at least 10 times to make
sure that the toner inside is loose.
2. Remove toner bottle cap.

3. Swing out the toner bottle holder as shown [1]
Main Machine
4. Set the toner bottle in the holder [2], push it in until you hear a click, and then turn it
clockwise [3] to lock it in place.
1BInstallation
5. Swing the toner bottle and holder to the left against the front of the machine.
Set Tandem Tray for LT or A4 Paper

Before You Begin
The tandem tray (Tray 1) can accommodate either letter (LT) or A4-size paper, depending on
how the side fences are set. The tray is set for either LT or A4 paper before the machine leaves
the factory, depending on the destination of the machine.
1. Open Tray 1 and pull it out completely.
2. Check the position of the screw on the upper right corner of the left tray. The position of the
screw tells you how the tandem tray is set (LT or A4).
3. In the illustration:
[1] Tray is set for LT (letter-size) paper.
[2] Tray is set for A4-size paper.
Main Machine
There are two trays in the tandem tray, a left tray [A] and a right tray [B]. If you want to change
the setting to LT or A4, you need to do five adjustments.
• Change the positions of the front side fences [1] in both the left and right tray.
• Change the positions of the rear side fences [2] in both the left and right tray.
• Change the position of the left tray sensor [3] in the left tray.
• The following procedures show you how to switch the tandem tray from LT to A4 size
paper.
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the tandem tray and push the right tandem tray [A] into the rear side.
Main Machine
3. Remove the support plate [A] of the left tray.
1BInstallation
4. Remove the fixing screws from the left rail [A].
5. Pull left tray [B] slightly more until it stops.
6. Disconnect
• Left [A] of rear side fence.
• Left [B] of rear side fence.
Main Machine
7. Disconnect right end [A] of rear side fence.
8. Lift the rear side fence out of the front slot (LT), and then set it in the rear slot (A4).
9. Re-attach the screw at the left end of the side fence, and then re-attach the screws at the
right end of the side fence ( x4).
10. Disconnect the marker plate at LT, and then reset the screw at A4. This serves as a
reminder for the paper setting of the tandem
Main Machine
1BInstallation
tray.
11. Re-attach the left side of the tray to the left rail.
12. Disconnect left side [A] of the left tray front fence.
Main Machine
13. Lift the front side fence out of the rear slot (LT), and then set it in the front slot (A4).
14. Re-fasten the front fence ( x4).

15. Set the motor cover over the front side fence, and then re-attach the left side [A] of the
cover.
16. Re-attach right side of the cover [B].
17. Set the base of Tray 1 faceplate [A], and then re-attach it to the tray [B]
Main Machine
18. Remove rear plate [A].
1BInstallation
19. Remove the screw of the sensor bracket, and then slide the bracket from the left (LT) to the
right (A4).
20. Re-attach and tighten the screw.
21. Remove the left tray [A].
Main Machine
22. Re-Attach the support plate [A] of the left tray.
23. Remove the right tray inner cover [A].
24. Remove the right tray [A].
Main Machine
25. Remove the support plate [A] of the right tray.
1BInstallation
26. Remove the fixing parts from the side fence right front and side fence rear right, and lift the
side fence out of the slot (LT) and insert it in the slot (A4), and then fix it.
Main Machine
27. Attach the support plate [A] of the right tray.
28. Set the right tray on the main machine, attach the right tray inner cover.
29. Set the sheets.
30. Change the paper size of the tandem tray in SP5-959-001.
Size setting table
Setting Value Size Setting Value Size
0 A4 6 8 1/2x14
1 8 1/2x11 7 8 1/2x11 vertical length
2 A3 8 B5
3 B4 9 B5 vertical length
4 A4 vertical length 10 Custom Size
5 11x17 - -
• Set the sheets to the correct position by shifting it to the right side or left side.
31. Attach the size decal provided with the machine.
Main Machine
Level the Machine

1. There are two pairs of shoes for leveling the machine, the front shoes [1] (attached
brackets) and rear shoes [2].
1BInstallation
2. Open the bottom drawer and remove the paper cassette.
3. Position the front shoes (with the brackets) under the front of the machine.
4. Run the brackets down with your fingers, and then tighten with the accessory wrench.
5. At each rear corner, run the hex screw down with your fingers, and then slide a shoe under
the screw.
Main Machine
6. Tighten the screw with the accessory wrench.
7. Raise the ADF.

8. Place a level on the front edge of the exposure glass [A], and then on the right edge of the
exposure glass [B].
9. The machine should be level:

• Front to back: Within ±5 mm (0.2") of level
• Right to left: Within ±5 mm (0.2") of level
10. If necessary, use the accessory wrench to adjust the height of the machine at each corner.
Attach Cleaning Cloth Holder

1. Clean the upper, right front corner of the machine above the bypass tray with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Peel the tape from the back of the cleaning cloth holder.
Main Machine
3. Attach the holder [A] at the upper left corner of the machine, and then put the cleaning cloth
in the holder.
1BInstallation
Connect Drum Heater, Tray Heater (Optional)
The drum heater and tray heater prevent moisture from gathering on the surface of the drum
and in the paper feed trays.
1. Turn on/off anti-condensation heaters in SP5-805-001.
• 0 (Heater OFF): All anti-condensation heaters are turned off.
• 1 (Heater ON): When the engine is turned off, All anti-condensation heaters are turned
on. (When the machine is in sleep or the power is turned off)
• 2 (Always heater ON): All anti-condensation heaters are always turned on.
• 3 (Calendar Function): Set whether to use calendar function. According to the setting
of each month, the machine controls anti-condensation heaters.
• When setting anti-condensation heaters on/off, all anti-condensation heaters

(drum heater, tray heater) and dew condensation prevention heaters (Scanner,
transfer belt) are turned on/off. If all the heaters are connected and always turned
on, electricity consumption is higher.
• When all anti-condensation heaters are always turned on, use calendar function
and connector connection/disconnection also.
• During rainy season, disconnect the connector of the scanner heater.
Connect the connector of the drum heater and tray heater.
• During winter season, connect the connector of the scanner heater.
Disconnect the connector of the drum heater and tray heater.
• Calendar Function:
Turn on/off the anti-condensation heater of each month in SP5-805-101 to 112.
• 1 (Heater ON): When the engine is turned off, all anti-condensation heaters
Main Machine
are turned on. (When the machine is in sleep or the power is turned off)
Load Paper, Attach Decals

Paper Size Decals
1. Load the paper trays.
2. At the upper right corner of each tray [A], clean the area below the tray number.
3. Peel the appropriate decal [B] from the accessory sheet and attach it to the tray.
Original Decals
1. Use a damp clean cloth to wipe clean the surface of the original feeder.
2. Attach the precautions decal to the feeder cover
3. Attach the ‘load originals face-up’ reminder to the original output tray.
Main Machine
Attach Name Plate

1. Attach the nameplate to the center of the front door.
1BInstallation
Initialize Toner and Process Control Settings
1. Make sure that the power cord is attached to the right lower corner of the main machine.
2. Plug the power cord into the power source.
• There is no power switch on the operation panel of this machine.

• The front door must remain open until you are instructed to close it.
• The open front door prevents the machine from doing automatic process control
normally executed every time the machine is turned on.
4. Make sure that the front door is open.
5. Press the power switch [A] on the front left corner of the machine to turn the machine on.
You will see “Please Wait” until the Program/Change Administrator screen appears.
Main Machine
• The machine is waiting for entry of the Supervisor and Administrator passwords.
• It is the responsibility of the site supervisor and system administrator to set these
passwords.
• The Home menu will not display until these passwords have been set. However, you
can bypass this screen to complete the installation.
6. Enter the SP mode (System/Copy SP).
7. Close the front door.
8. Do SP5755-002. This cancels the password request screen and allows you to continue
with the machine installation as long as the machine remains on.
• For more information about setting the passwords, see "Important Notice on
Security Issues" in this section.
9. While still in the SP mode, open SP2963-002
10. Enter the lot number of the developer. (This is the number embossed on the edge of the
developer pack.)
11. Open SP2963-001 and then touch [Execute].
In this SP, the following are performed; initial setting of developer, forcible toner supply, and
auto adjustment around drums
This will require about 4 min.
12. When you see the "Completed" message, touch [Exit].
13. Press [Exit] twice to exit the SP mode.
2.2.4 CHECK IMAGE QUALITY AND SETTINGS
Checking the copy image with the test chart

Check the copy image with the test chart.
Date/Time Setting and Other SP Settings

1. Press [Settings] on the Home screen.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Date/Time/Timer] .
4. Press [Date/Time].
Main Machine
5. Press “Set Date” to enter the date.

6. Press “Set Time” to enter the time.
7. You may also need to do the following SP code settings.
SP5812-001 Service Telephone Number Settings.
1BInstallation
Enter the contact number of the customer engineer. This is the number
displayed when a service call is issued.
SP5841-001 Supply Name Setting – Toner Name Setting:
2.2.5 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES

In order to increase the security of the MFP, and to ensure that the customer sets the
administrator password, an administrator set/change prompt display appears the first time the
machine is turned on.
Overview
The Program/Change Administrator screen appears when the machine is turned on if the
passwords have not been set. This is a new security feature.
• After the customers set the administrator/supervisor login password, the Home display
every time the machine is turned on.
• However, setting these passwords is not mandatory. The customer disable the
Program/Change Administrator screen if they choose not to set passwords
Canceling Password Setup

1. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and then
touch [OK] without inputting any password.
2. Touch [OK] again when the Confirm password display shows up.
3. For Administrator 1, do the same procedure as steps 1 and 2.
4. Press the [OK] button. The Home display appears.
• SP5-755-002 allows the service technician to skip this screen temporarily and
continue the installation procedure without setting an administrator password.
• However, the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time the machine
is cycles off/on if the password has not been set.
Main Machine
Password Setting Procedure

Follow this procedure to set the passwords.
• If the Supervisor/Administrator passwords (up to four passwords) are set up through the
network, the "Change Supervisor login password” window will not appear.
• The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator can be set with “System Settings”, but the
Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time the power switch is turned on if
the passwords are set up this way.
• Therefore, we recommend that customers set passwords through the network or with the
Program/Change Administrator screen.
1. Install the main machine.
2. Turn the main power switch on
3. Change the Supervisor login password.
4. Input the password.

5. Press [OK].
6. Confirm the Password.
7. Press [OK].
8. Change the Administrator 1 login password.
9. Input the password.

10. Press [OK].
11. Confirm the password.
12. Press [OK].
13. Cycle the machine off/on.
Main Machine
Auto Remote Firmware Update Settings

Specify ARFU settings as required.
Operating Conditions:
1BInstallation
• Use the machine in an environment where it can be connected to the Internet.
• Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) requires connection to an external network.

Be sure to get permission from the customer before setting ARFU up.
• The connection is one-way, so the user’s data will not be accessed from the global
server.
Pre-Operation Set Up and Checks
1. Check the network settings (IP address, Subnetmask, Gateway, and DNS).
2. Check the proxy settings.
3. In the environment to execute ARFU, check that the machine’s main power is always
turned on and it is always connected to the Internet.
4. This condition is required for downloading the firmware package in the background and
also for updating the firmware by ARFU when the machine is turned ON for the first time at
machine installation.
5. Check the time (day of the week and time) to prohibit the execution of ARFU.
• If the access to the external server is restricted, request the network administrator
(customer) to permit the following FQDN name for communication:
• - FQDN: p-rfu-ds2.support.ricoh.com
Configuration Procedure
1. Settings > System settings > Network/Interface, specify the IP address, Subnet, Gateway,
and DNS settings according to the user’s network environment.
• Make sure to specify the DNS settings. To acquire the firmware data, it is
necessary to have the host name resolved so that access to the global server is
possible using the host name.
2. Check the user’s network environment and, as required, specify the proxy server settings
in the following SPs:
• SP5-819-062 (Use Proxy DFU(SSP))
1: Use / 0: Not use
• SP5-816-063 (Use Proxy DFU(SSP))
• SP5-816-064 (Proxy Port Number)
• SP5-816-065 (Proxy User Name)
Main Machine
• SP5-816-066 (Proxy Password)
• They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor, from Device
Management>Configuration>Device Setting>Auto Firmware Update.
(However, "Auto Firmware Update" appears on Web Image Monitor only if
the ARFU function is set to "ON".)
3. Set SP5-886-111(AutoUpdateSetting) to "1(ON)"
• To download the firmware only using SFU, and not by ARFU, specify the settings
as follows:
- SP5-886-111(AutoUpdateSetting) to "0 (OFF)"
- Set SP5-886-115 (SfuAutoDownloadSetting) to "1 (ON)"
4. When setting the prohibited day, time and so on of the auto firmware update, set them with
following SPs, or Web Image Monitor.
• SP5-886-112 (AutoUpdateProhibitTermSetting)
0: OFF, 1: ON (Default)
• SP5-886-113 (AutoUpdateProhibitStartHour)
Default: 9
• SP5-886-114 (AutoUpdateProhibitEndHour)
Default: 17
• SP5-886-120 (AutoUpdateProhibitDayOfWeekSetting)
Default: 0x00
Set the bits for the days of the week to prohibit updating.
Prohibited (Monday - Sunday): Bit 7
Monday: bit 6
Tuesday: bit 5
Wednesday: bit 4
Thursday: bit 3
Friday: bit 2
Saturday: bit 1
Sunday: bit 0
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun.: 0x47 (01000111)
5. Use the machine with its main power on and connected to the Internet.
Specifying the Times, Days of the Week to Prohibit Updating by Web Image
Monitor
1. Start the Web Image Monitor.

2. Log in as the machine administrator.
Main Machine
3. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Configuration].
1BInstallation
4. Click "Auto Firmware Update".
Main Machine
5. In the applicable items, specify the times and days of the week to prohibit updating. Select
the check boxes of the applicable days of the week to prohibit updating on that day
Checking the ARFU Connection
1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Press [Firmware update].
3. Press [Update].
4. Press [Execute update].
• ”Execute update” appears even if @Remote connection has not been established.
• If an error code appears when you click “Execute update”, the machine is in the following
status.
Error code Status
E51 The machine in operation for printing, etc.
E71 Network connection error
1. Check if one of the following messages appears: "Will you download the latest package Ver
*** and update?" or "The installed package is the latest version.".
• If the message appears, it is possible to execute ARFU: Press “No” and close SP mode to
complete the configuration.
Main Machine
• If the message does not appear, it is not possible to execute ARFU: Check the network
settings again.
• SP5-886-116 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) displays the scheduled date
1BInstallation
and time of the next ARFU.
• If the scheduled date and time of the next ARFU coincides with a time and day of
the week when ARFU is prohibited, the machine sends an inquiry to the server to
check if there is a new firmware package at this time. If there is a new firmware
package, it is downloaded in the background, but the package updating is
cancelled and executed on the next occasion, 76 hours later, to update the
package.
Checking the Result from the Firmware Update Setting

2. Press [Firmware update].
3. Press [Update].
4. Press [Update Package Information].
5. If the firmware package is the same as the one on the global server, the update was
completed successfully. Otherwise, check the result using the logging data.
• In SP7-520-041 to -045 (Update Log: Auto:Version), you can check the versions of the
packages updated by ARFU. (-041 displays the latest result. It is also printed on the
SMC sheet.)
Checking the Result Using the Logging Data

2. Press [System/Copy].
3. Check the results for ARFU by SP7-520-051 to 060 (Update Log: Auto:Result) "-051" is the
latest update result.
2.2.6 SECURITY SETTINGS

The machine has two security functions built into the controller board: Data Overwrite Security
and HDD Encryption. However, these features must be activated at completion of installation if
the client wants to use them. Security Setting
2.2.7 MOVING THE MACHINE
• When moving the machine, never push on the ADF.

• Pushing on the ADF could damage it or throw it out of alignment, causing problems
with scanning and copying.
Main Machine
Do the procedure below before moving the machine from one floor to another. See
"Transporting the Machine" in the next section if you have to pack the machine and move it to a
distant location.
1. Turn the main power OFF and disconnect the power plug.
2. Close all the covers and trays.
3. Disconnect peripheral units connected to the main machine: LCIT, Finishers, etc.
4. Keep the machine horizontal and move it slowly.
5. To avoid damage to the machine, avoid tipping and excess vibrations.
2.2.8 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE
• When moving the machine, never push on the ADF.

• Pushing on the ADF could damage it or throw it out of alignment, causing problems
with scanning and copying.
1. Remove the toner cartridge. This prevents toner leakage caused by vibration during
transport.
2. Fasten the front door and covers with shipping tape, and then shrink-wrap the machine
tightly.
2.2.9 IMPORTANT SP CODES: INSTALLATION

Here is a summary of important SP codes that you will need for installation of the main
machine.
Item SP Function
No.
Data Overwrite 5878-1 Enables/disables the Data Overwrite Security feature. Check this
Security setting to confirm whether this feature is turned on or off. Cycle the
machine off/on after changing this setting.
Developer lot 2963-2 Enter the lot number embossed at the top edge of the developer
number package. Enter the lot number with SP2963-2 before you initialize
developer with SP2963-1
HDD 5878-2 Enables/disables data encryption. Cycle the machine off/on after
Encryption changing this setting.
Initialize 2963-1 Initializes fresh developer at installation. Enter the lot number with
developer SP2963-2 before you initialize developer with SP2963-1
Password 5755-2 Cancels the password request screen and allows you to continue with
request cancel the machine installation as long as the machine remains on
Service tel. 5812-1 Enter the contact number of the customer engineer. This is the
number number displayed when a service call is issued.
Main Machine
Item SP Function
No.
Supply name 5841-1 This name appears when the user presses the Inquiry on the User
setting Tools screen.
1BInstallation
Transport 4806-1 Move the scanner carriage from the home position. This prevents dust
from falling into the machine during transportation.
Drum Heater (Option) (H2)
2.3 DRUM HEATER (OPTION) (H2)
2.3.1 ACCESSORIES
The drum heater is an option for the main machine. Check the accessories and their quantities
against this list.
No. Description Q'ty
1. Drum Heater 1
2. Holder 1
3. Heat Insulation 1
- Screws M3x6 2
- Clamp 1
- Caution Sheet (only for 120V) 1
2.3.2 INSTALLATION
Install Drum Heater

1. Open the front door, and then swing the toner bottle holder to the right.
2. Remove development unit [A]. Development Unit Removal and Re-Installation
3. Remove charge corona unit [B]. Corona Unit
4. Remove drum unit [A]. Drum_1
5. Remove transfer belt unit [B]. Transfer Belt Unit Removal
1BInstallation
6. The drum heater harness [A], shown here on the back of the machine behind the IOB, is
pre-installed at the factory before shipping.
7. At the front, drum heater harness connector [B] at the back of the machine can be seen
where the transfer belt unit was removed.
8. If lever C1 is down to the left, turn it to the right.
9. Unfasten stay [A].
10. Remove the stay. Keep this screw.
11. Install the drum heater [A], inserting the rear end of the stay into the cutout inside the
machine.
12. Connect the heater at the rear.
1BInstallation
13. At the front, fasten the tray.
14. Re-install:
• Transfer belt unit
• Drum unit
• Charge corona unit
• Development unit

Scanner Heater (Option)
2.4 SCANNER HEATER (OPTION)
2.4.1 ACCESSORIES
1BInstallation
The scanner heater is an option for the main machine. Check the accessories and their
quantities against this list.
1. Scanner Heater 1
2. Screws M3x6 2
2.4.2 INSTALLATION
Install Scanner Heater

1. Raise the ADF.
2. Disconnect the rear end of the right edge cover [1].
3. Slide the cover to the rear [2].
4. Remove the cover [3].
5. Remove the rear scale.
6. Remove the left exposure glass edge cover.
7. Remove the exposure glass.
8. At the right front corner of the machine [A] turn the scanner motor belt and move the 1st
scanner unit to the left edge of lens cover [B].
9. With the harness on the left, slide scanner heater [A] under the 2nd carriage, and then
arrange it parallel to the back of the scanner unit [B].
1BInstallation
10. Pull the heater harness through the left side of the scanner unit.
11. Disconnect the left edge cover [A], and then remove it, so you can see cut-out [B].
12. Insert a screwdriver into the cut-out [A], and then loosely fasten the left end of the heater.
13. Attach the right end of the heater [B].
14. Tighten both screws.
15. On the left side of the scanner unit, clamp the heater harness, and then connect it to the
harness pre-installed on the side of the machine.



1BInstallation
A3/11"x17" Tray Type M44 (D3JG)
2.5 A3/11"X17" TRAY TYPE M44 (D3JG)

Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:
No. Description Q’ty
1. A3/DLT Tray 1
2. Short connector 1
3. Page size decals 1
• Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure.
1. Remove the retainer [A].
2. Remove the stay [A].
1BInstallation
3. Remove the retainer [A].
4. Draw out the tandem tray completely, and then push in the right tandem tray [A].
5. Remove the left tandem tray [A]. Keep these screws.
6. Remove the front cover [A].
7. Remove the right tandem tray [A]. Keep these screws.
8. Connect the short connector [A] to the left tandem tray terminal.
1BInstallation
9. Pull out the rails.
10. Install the A3/DLT tray on the right rail, center rail, and left rail. Use the screws that you
removed earlier.
• You must use the short, silver screws on the left and right rails. If you use one of
the longer screws, it will stop the movement of the tray on the rails.
11. Attach the front cover [A] by fitting the brackets [B] of the front cover into the cutouts [C] of
the A3/DLT tray.
12. Fix the front cover [A].
1BInstallation
13. Switch the machine on, enter the SP mode and select the paper size for Tray 1 with
SP5959-001 (Paper Size – Tray 1). For details, see SP5959 in “Service Tables”.
14. Attach the appropriate decal for the selected paper size.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
2.6 LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)

1. Upper docking pins (grooved) 2
2. Lower docking pin (not grooved) 1
3. Flat-head shoulder screw - M4 x 6 1
4. Paper Set Decal 1
• Handle the LCIT unit carefully, especially when you are pushing it around the floor. The
LCIT is unbalanced and tips easily because it has only three wheels.
• Never attempt to move the machine with the LCIT attached to the right side of the
machine. Separate the main machine and LCIT before moving to a new location.
2.6.2 INSTALLATION
Removing Tape
When moving the LCIT, move it together with the main machine. If you try to move only the LCIT,
it may fall down, causing injury.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
1. Remove all tape and packing material on front [A] and right side [B].
1BInstallation
2. Remove tape and cardboard from rear side and left side. Be sure to retrieve the
accessories packed in the plastic bag taped to the rear panel.
3. Open the unit.

4. Remove tape from around the lift plate [A] and under the top cover [B].
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
5. Inspect the unit outside, inside [A], and under the cover [B] to confirm that there is no tape,
cardboard, or scraps remaining in the LCIT.
Preparing the Main Machine
procedure.
1. On the right side of the main machine, remove the LCIT installation cover.
2. Remove the LCIT connector cover.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
3. On the same side of the machine, remove the three docking pin hole covers[1], [2], [3].
1BInstallation
4. Select the two grooved docking pins [A], and then attach them at [B].
5. Attach the remaining docking pin at [C].
Docking the LCIT

1. Slowly, push the left side of the LCIT against the side of the main machine.
2. If you need to release the LCIT and try again, push the release button and then pull the
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
LCIT away from the side of the main machine.
3. Open the top cover of the LCIT.
4. Remove the right panel [A].
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
5. Look inside the LCIT and locate the hole for the shoulder screw.
1BInstallation
6. Set the flat-head shoulder screw [A] on the tip of a screwdriver, and then fasten in the hole
behind panel [B].
• This screw locks the release button on the front of the LCIT.
• In order to separate the LCIT from the main machine, you will need to first remove
this screw.
• After you have removed the screw you can press the release button, and then pull
the LCIT away from the main machine.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
7. If the screw falls, press the release button [A] of the front of the LCIT. Pull the LCIT away
from the main machine. You should see the screw at [B] near the ground plate.
8. Plug the LCIT power cord into the connector.
When moving the LCIT to change installation site, move the LCIT keeping its connection to the
main machine located under the LCIT.
Paper Size Adjust and Setting

The side fences [A] and [B] can be adjusted for different paper sizes:
• A4 LEF
• B5 LEF
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
• LT LEF
1BInstallation
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
2. Remove the right panel of the LCIT.
3. If the LCIT is connected to the main machine, remove the lock screw.
4. Press the release button on the front of the LCIT [A], and then pull the LCIT slightly away
from the side of the main machine, but do not disconnect the LCIT I/F cable.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
5. If the LCIT is disconnected, connect the I/F cable to the main machine, and then turn the
machine on.
1BInstallation
6. You must disconnect front fence [1] and rear fence [2], but these fences cannot be
removed with tray plate [A] in the up position.
7. Confirm that the main machine is on, and that the LCIT is connected to the main machine.
8. To lower the tray plate, cover photosensor [1] with your left hand, and then press and hold
down button [2].
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
9. Keep the sensor covered and the button depressed until the tray plate reaches bottom and
the motor switches off. You can now remove the fences.
10. Unfasten and remove rear fence [A].
11. Unfasten and remove front fence [A].
12. Set the bottom edge of each side fence into the slot for the paper size that you want you
load into the LCIT
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
13. Set the notches at the top of each side fence at the name of the paper size.
14. Fasten the side fences at the top, and then re-assemble the LCIT.
15. Load some paper in the LCIT.
16. Turn the machine on.
1BInstallation
17. Open SP5959-005 (Paper Type - Tray 4), and then select the paper size you have selected
with the side fences.
2.6.3 LCIT HEATER (H5) (OPTION)
Accessories
All three of the following Set Parts are required to install the LCIT Heater.
No. Set Parts

1 HEATER Set : A
2 HEATER Set : B
3 HEATER Set : C

No. Description Q’ty Set Parts
1 LCIT Heater 1 HEATER Set : A
2 LCIT Heater Harness 1 HEATER Set : A
3 Ground Wire 1 HEATER Set : C
4 Bracket 1 HEATER Set : B
5 Clamps 6 HEATER Set : A
6 RBWS-1M-V0 BK-R 3 HEATER Set : A
7 Screws M3x6 4 HEATER Set : A (2)
HEATER Set : B (2)
8 Ground Screws – Pan Head 2 HEATER Set : C
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
Installation
LCIT Side
1. Turn the machine off.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
1BInstallation
3. Remove the right panel of the LCIT.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
4. If the LCIT is connected to the main machine, remove the lock screw.
5. Press the release button on the front of the LCIT [A], and then pull the LCIT slightly away
from the side of the main machine, but do not disconnect the LCIT I/F cable.
6. If the LCIT is disconnected, connect the I/F cable to the main machine, and then turn the
machine on.
7. You must remove front fence [1] and rear fence [2], but these fences cannot be removed
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
with tray plate [A] in the up position.
1BInstallation
8. Turn the machine on, and confirm that the LCIT is connected to the main machine.
9. To lower the tray plate, cover photosensor [1] with your left hand, and then press and hold
down button [2].
10. Keep the sensor covered and the button depressed until the tray plate reaches bottom and
the motor switches off. You can now remove the fences.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
11. Unfasten and remove rear fence [A].
12. Unfasten and remove front fence [A].
13. After both fences have been removed, close the top cover [A].
14. The lift motor will switch on and raise the tray plate to the up position [B]. This will take
about 30 sec.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
15. At the left bottom edge of the LCIT, remove the stay.
1BInstallation
16. Remove left screws [A] of the positioning plate inside the LCIT.
17. Inside the LCIT [B] unfasten the positioning plate.
18. Remove the positioning plate.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
19. Attach the clamps to the bottom of the LCIT.
20. Set the LCIT heater, and then pass the heater harness under the rear side of the shaft.
21. Set accessory bracket [A], position the bracket [B] over the harness, and then fasten it.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
22. Fasten the heater with the accessory screws.
1BInstallation
23. Insert the bayonet connector [1] into the cut-out in the frame.
24. Lay the harness in the open clamps [2] and then close the clamps.
25. Re-assemble the LCIT in reverse order. This completes preparation on the LCIT side.
Main Machine Side
• The machine is shipped from the factory with main machine upper and lower paper
bank heaters (standard) disconnected.
• These heaters are pre-installed but may or may not be connected in your machine.
However, the procedure below starts with the main machine tray heaters connected.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
1. Loosen these screws slightly. Do not remove them.
2. Remove the rear upper cover [A].
3. Disconnect left bracket [A], and then remove bracket with I/F cable attached.
4. Disconnect harness [B] connector and clamp.
5. Free harness [C] from its clamps.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
6. Disconnect the edge of the controller box [A].
1BInstallation
7. Lift the handle [A] off of its hook on top of the box, and then pull the controller box [B]
toward you.
8. Remove the fixing parts from the IOB (PCB1) mounting bracket.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
9. Open the IOB (PCB1) mounting bracket [A].
10. Remove the rear lower cover. Rear Lower Cover

11. Open the clamps at the top and right edge of the AC drive board [A].
12. Pull out the upper heater harness [B] of the main machine.
• The upper heater harness has the box receptacle [1] at the top and bayonet
connector [2] at the bottom.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
13. One end of the LCIT harness has two connectors: box receptacle [1] and bayonet
connector [2].
1BInstallation
14. Disconnect the main machine upper heater harness.
15. Insert the bayonet connector [1] of the connector pair on the end of the LCIT heater
harness to the box receptacle of the upper heater harness.
16. Clamp the connectors [A] as shown.
17. Raise the heater harness and clamp it [B].
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
18. Raise the LCIT heater harness, and clamp it at the top edge of the AC drive board [A].
19. Raise the LCIT heater harness through the hole in the frame [B].
20. Clamp the LCIT heater harness behind the IOB (PCB1).
21. Behind the IOB (PCB1), push the LCIT heater harness behind the stay [A], and then pull it
out under flywheel [B].
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
22. Pull the LCIT harness below the flywheel [A] and then clamp it [B].
1BInstallation
23. Disconnect stopper [A] on the base of the toner collection pump.
24. Pass the harness under arm [B] of the base, and then re-fasten the stopper.
25. Clamp the harness at [A], and then push it out the right side of the main machine [B].
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
26. Pull the harness out of the main machine, and then fix it with the clamp [A].
This completes preparation on the main machine side.
• Route the harness so that it does not go slack on the side of the waste toner
bottle.
Docking
1. Before you dock the LCIT to the main machine, make sure that you have completed the
procedures above to prepare the main machine side [A] and LCIT side [B].
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
2. Hold the ground wire straight up, and then fasten it tightly.
1BInstallation
3. Measure the positions for the flat clamps on the left side of the LCIT.
4. Attach the flat clamps [A] to the left face of the LCIT.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
5. Remove the left upper plate from the LCIT.
6. Pass the end of the harness through saddle clamp [A] and then clamp it.
7. Re-attach the left upper plate [B].
8. Connect the harness from the main machine to LCIT heater.

9. Clamp the harness to the left side of the LCIT.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
10. Connect the ground wire to the side of the main machine near the joint connector, at about
a 45 degree angle as shown.
1BInstallation
11. Push the LCIT [A] close to the side of the main machine.
12. If there is any slack in the harness pull it down [B].
13. Push the LCIT [A] onto the joint pins on the side of the main machine.
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
14. Connect the LCIT [B] to the main machine.
15. Set the flat-head shoulder screw [A] on the tip of a screwdriver, and then fasten in the hole
behind panel [B] to lock the LCIT against the side of the main machine.
16. Re-attach the right panel of the LCIT.

This completes installation of the LCIT heater.
Turning on/off anti-condensation heaters

LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)
1BInstallation
8 1/2"x14" Paper Size Tray Type 9002 (B474)
2.7 8 1/2"X14" PAPER SIZE TRAY TYPE 9002 (B474)

1. Cover 1
2. B4/LG frame 1
3. Bottom plate extension 1
4. Rear bracket 1
5. Front bracket 1
6. Harness clamp 1
7. Tapping hex screws - M4 x 8 6
8. Tapping screws - M4 x 8 4

1. If the LCT is connected to the machine, open the cover and remove the paper.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-100 SM
2. To lower the LCT tray, cover the near end sensor [A] with one hand, and then press the tray
down button [B].
1BInstallation
procedure.
3. Disconnect the LCT from the machine.
4. Remove the LCT cover [A].
5. Remove the right cover [B].
6. Remove the right stay [C] at and re-attach it below at .
7. Attach the front bracket [A] with the beveled corner down.
• If the brackets are difficult to install, raise the bottom plate with your hand.
8. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the beveled corner down.
SM 2-101 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
9. Attach the bottom plate extension [C] with the hex nuts.
10. Align the positioning pin [A].

11. Attach the B4/LG frame [B] with the hex nuts.
• The kit is set for B4. If you need to change the paper size to LG, do the following
steps.
12. Move the front side fence [A] to the LG position and fasten.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-102 SM
13. Move the rear side fence [B] to the LG position and fasten.
1BInstallation
14. Change the position of the lower limit sensor [A].
15. Attach the harness (not shown) to the back of the plate and secure the sensor connector
wire.
16. Attach the LCT cover [A] provided with the kit.
SM 2-103 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
17. Re-attach the right cover [B].
18. Connect the LCT to the machine.

19. Switch the machine on, enter the SP mode, then use SP5959 005 (Paper Size – Tray 4
(LCT) to select the new paper size. For details, see SP5959 in "Service Tables".
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-104 SM
Multi-Folding Unit FD4020 (D3HH)
2.8 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4020 (D3HH)
1BInstallation
• To use Multi-Folding Unit FD4020, one of the following is also required: Finisher
SR4150, Booklet Finisher SR4160, or Finisher SR4140

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration
and list.
1. Joint Bracket 1
2. Entrance Guide Plate – Long 1
3. Support Tray 1
4. Ground Plate 1
5. Screws 3x6 2
6. Screws M3x6 2
7. Screws M4x20 4
8. Screws M4x14 (Not used) 4
9. Leveling Shoes 5
10. Power Cord *1 1
11. Sponge Strip 1
12. Guide Plate: Quenching 1
13. Power cord bracket 1
- EMC Address 1
*1: When using this unit in China, do not use this power cord provided with this unit. Contact
your supervisor and use the power cord specified for use in China.
SM 2-105 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2.8.2 INSTALLATION
• The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily
accessible.
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
disconnected before doing the following procedure.
Tapes
1. Remove all tape and retainers from the front, left, rear, and right sides.
2. Open the front door [A].

3. Remove all tape from inside [B].
Paper Guide, Sponge Strip
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-106 SM
1. Fasten the connecting bracket [A] to the left side of the upstream device. (M4x20)
1BInstallation
2. If a downstream device will be installed then fasten the connecting bracket, provided with
the device to be installed, to the left side of the multi-folding unit. (M4x14)
• Use the screws provided with the downstream device.

• If no screws are provided with the downstream device, use the screw provided
with this option.
3. Select the long entrance guide plate for the installation.
• Two entrance guide plates are provided.
• The short one is for another machine.
• If the upstream device is the Decurl Unit DU5020 (D727), attach the black mylar
provided with the cover interposer tray (Cover Interposer Tray CI4040) or decurl
unit to this entrance guide plate.
4. Attach the long entrance guide plate [A] to the left side of the multi-folding unit. (M3x6)
5. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [B], and attach the strip to the top right edge of the
SM 2-107 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
multi-folding unit.
Ground Plate
1. Attach the grounding plate [A] to the lower right edge of the unit. (M3x6)
Docking
Do steps 8 to 12 only if the upstream device is the Cover Interposer Tray CI4040.
1. Open the front door [A].
2. Remove the lock bar screw [B] (M3x6) on the front right corner and keep it.
3. Pull out the lock bar.
4. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the upstream device (or main machine) so
that the lock bar is directly and squarely move under the arms of the connecting bracket.
5. Push in the lock bar so it slides up into the notches in the arms on both ends of the
connecting bracket [D].
6. Secure the lock bar with the screw removed in Step 2.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-108 SM
7. Connect the I/F cable [E] to the upstream device (or main machine).
• If you are connecting to the main machine, you must first remove the plastic cap
on the I/F cable connection point.
1BInstallation
8. Remove the items below:
• [A] Rear upper cover
• [B] Rear lower cover
9. Use a stubby screwdriver to loosen the bracket [A].

10. Fasten the bracket to the upstream device at [B].
SM 2-109 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
11. Tighten the screws.
12. Re-attach the rear covers.

13. Insert the power cord [A] into the power connection point.
• In China, do not use the power cord provided with this unit. Contact your
supervisor and use the power cord specified for use in China.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-110 SM
14. Attach the power cord bracket [A].
1BInstallation
15. Plug in the power cord for the Multi-Folding Unit into an AC wall outlet.
16. Disconnect the power cord from the copier, and then press the main power switch.
• Pressing the main power switch will release the residual charge from the machine.
If you do not do this step, the copier will not recognize the Multi-Folding Unit and
cause paper jams. (See Power Switch.)
17. Plug in the copier's power cord to an AC wall outlet.
18. Turn ON the main power switch.
• If the copier main power turns on automatically when you plug in the cord, wait
until the machine finishes warming up. Then, turn the main power OFF and ON
again.
19. Make sure that the Multi-Folding Unit operates correctly.
Height Adjustment
Adjust the height of the unit and ensure it is level.

1. Turn the lower nut to lower the bolt.
SM 2-111 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2. Set the leveling shoes [A] below the bolt.
Removing Parts for the Cover Interposer Tray CI4040

Three parts must be removed before the tray unit of the cover interposer tray can be mounted
on top of the Multi Folding Unit.
• The following parts require removal only if the upstream device is the Cover
Interposer Tray CI4040.
• These parts must be removed so that the tray unit of the Cover Interposer Tray
will fit on top of the Multi Folding Unit.
2. Remove:
• [A] Bracket
• [B] Cross-piece
• [C] Metal plate from the door
3. After removing [B] and [C], reattach [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-112 SM
Attaching the Guide Plate

Attach the polyester film aligned along the edge of the entrance guide plate of the downstream
unit.
1BInstallation
• The gap between the polyester film and the edge should be within 2 mm at [A].
• The gap between the polyester film and the edge should be within 1 mm at [B].
Installing the Z-fold Support Tray

Use Z-fold support tray if Z-folded paper is output to the paper tray on the multi-folding unit.
[A]: Without support tray
[B]: With support tray
[C]: Support tray
Installation Procedure
Place the support tray at the center of the concave side of the multi-folding tray [A]. The back of
the support tray [C] should touch the end fence [B].
SM 2-113 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Storage Space
If the support tray is not used, open the front door [A] and hang the tray on the inner cover as
shown [B].
Skew Correction
Detecting Paper Skew
Do this check to detect the presence of skew in the paper path.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-114 SM
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream device.
2. If a peripheral unit is connected on the left side, disconnect it and pull it away.
3. Execute a straight-through run.
4. Check the scale where each sheet exits.
1BInstallation
• The rear scale is for DLT-size paper.
• The front scale [2] is for A3-size paper.
• Be sure to read the correct scale for the paper size in use.
[A] Centered. No adjustment necessary.

[B] Trailing edge skew to the front, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment required.
[C] Trailing edge skew to the rear, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment required.
Correcting Skew
1. Disconnect the multi-folding unit from the upstream device.

2. Remove the spacers from the multi-folding unit.
SM 2-115 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
3. Loosen the screws of the connecting bracket attached to the upstream device.
4. Insert a spacer and tighten the screws.
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the front of the machine, insert a spacer [B] under
the rear end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
Or, if the trailing edge is skewing toward the rear of the machine, insert a spacer [A]
under the front end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
5. Do another run to check the adjustment. If skew is still present, insert another spacer.
• Each spacer is 2 mm thick.
• Only two spacers are provided, so the maximum adjustment is 4 mm (using two
spacers).
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-116 SM
Multi-Folding Unit FD4010 (D3HJ)
2.9 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4010 (D3HJ)
1BInstallation
• For installing this option, one of the Finisher SR4150, Booklet Finisher SR4160 or
Finisher SR4140 is required.
• Multi-Folding Unit FD4020 and Multi-Folding Unit FD4010 cannot be used
simultaneously.
No. Description Q'ty Remark

1 Relay guide plate 1
2 Docking bracket 1
3 Sponge strip 1
4 Sponge strip 1
5 Sponge strip (410mm) 1
6 Clamp 1
7 Tapping Screw 4x10 1
8 Tapping Screw 3x6 4
9 Screw 4x14 4
10 Power cord 1
11 Leveling shoe 4
12 Ground plate 1
- EMC sheet 1 EU only
SM 2-117 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2.9.2 INSTALLATION
• Always turn off and unplug the power cable of the machine before the following
procedure.
If installing downstream options to this option, be sure to check the registration skew before
installing downstream options.
Tapes
1. Remove the tape and retainers.

2. Pull out the fall-prevention parts.
Pressing the Folding Roller
Be sure to do this steps. Otherwise, noises or folding errors may occur.

1. Open the front cover.
2. Tighten the two screws.
Do not apply excessive torque.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-118 SM
1BInstallation
Ground Plate
1. Attach the ground plate.
When tightening the screw, be careful of the unit falling off.
SM 2-119 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Sponge Strip
Entrance Guide Plate Sponge Strip

1. Clean the attachment surface, where the sponge strip will be adhered, with
alcohol.
2. Adhere sponge strip [A] to the tray [B] as shown below.
Checking points:
[A]: Do not extend beyond the edges.

[B]: Clearance 0 - 2 mm: Do not extend.
3. Press the sponge strip to fix it completely.
4. Make sure that the sponge strip is not twisted, floating or peeled off.
Inner Cover Upper Sponge Strip
1. Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
2. Stick the sponge strip [A] to the inner cover [B] as shown below.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-120 SM
1BInstallation
Checking points:
SM 2-121 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
[A]: Inner cover

[B]: Sponge strip
3. Press the sponge strip to fix it completely.
4. Make sure that the sponge is not twisted, floating or peeled off.
Inner Cover Lower Sponge Strip
1. Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-122 SM
2. Attach the sponge strip [B] to the inner cover [A] as shown below.
1BInstallation
Checking points:
SM 2-123 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
[A]: Inner cover

[B]: Sponge strip
3. Press the area where the sponge strip is attached to fix it completely.
4. Make sure that the sponge is not twisted, floating or peeled off.
Docking Bracket, Relay Guide Plate
1. Temporarily fasten the 2 screws to the hole [A].

Leave a gap of 3 mm and hang the docking bracket on the
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-124 SM
1BInstallation
screws.
2. Hang the docking bracket on the screws fastened in step 1.
Ensure the bracket can slide freely.

3. Align the center of the right screw with the scale on the docking
bracket.
4. Attach the screws.
SM 2-125 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
5. Tighten the screws attached in step1.
6. Ensure the center of the right screw and the scale are aligned.
7. Attach the relay guide plate [A].
1. Attach the screw. Leave a gap of 3 mm so that the docking bracket can be hanged on
it.
2. Hang the relay guide plate [A] on the screws attached here.
3. Ensure the docking bracket is not misaligned and tighten the screws.
Hang the relay guide plate on the temporarily attached screws, in the direction of the
arrow.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-126 SM
1BInstallation
Docking the Unit with the Main Machine

2. Remove the screw of the docking lever and pull out the docking lever.
[A]: Relay Guide Plate

[B]: Docking Socket
3. Slide the fall-prevention part under the unit and hide
SM 2-127 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
it.
4. Pull the multi-folding unit so that the bending part of the docking bracket of upstream
devices comes between the side plate of the multi-folding unit.
5. Push the docking lever into the notch of the docking bracket.
6. Fasten the docking lever with the screw removed in step 2.
7. Plug the interface cable of the multi-folding unit into the main machine.
8. Using the clamp [A], secure the power cord to the marked area of the unit.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-128 SM
1BInstallation
When securing the clamp, allow enough space for the power cord to plug in and pull out.
9. Plug in the power cord of the multi-folding unit first, and then, plug in the AC power cord of
the main machine.
• If the residual charge in the main machine is not discharged, it will not recognize
the Multi-Folding Unit and cause paper jams.
• To release residual charge inside the main machine, pull out the power cord and
push the main power switch several times. (Characteristics of the Push Switch
(DC Switch (PCB14)))
• If the main machine is automatically turned ON when the AC power cord is

plugged in, then turn OFF then ON the main power again.
11. Make sure that the multi-folding unit works correctly.
SM 2-129 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Height Adjustment
Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level.
1. Turn the nuts to lower the bolt until the bolts reach the holders [A].
Make sure that the bolts fits within the frame [B].
Side-to-side Registration Adjustment

1. Loosen the screws. (Do not remove the bracket.)
2. Unscrew the securing bracket and change the direction of it.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-130 SM
1BInstallation
3. Fasten the securing bracket with the screws.
4. Adjust the position with sliding the docking bracket.
5. Tighten the screws of the docking bracket.
Note When Moving the Option
• When moving the folding unit, move it together with the main machine or upstream
devices linked to it. If you try to move only the folding unit, it may fall down, causing
injury.
SM 2-131 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Slide Sort Tray SH4020
2.10 SLIDE SORT TRAY SH4020
No Description Q'ty Notes

1 Tray:Upper:Ass'y 1
2 Bracket:Coupling:Machine or cop 1
3 Spacer:Side Fence 1
4 Tapping Screw - M4X20 5
5 Tapping Screw:4X8 1
6 Knob Screw:Document Feeder:Fix 1
7 Stepped Screw - M4 1
8 Size Stopper:Side Fence:Front 3
- Accessory:EMC:Address:RIC 1
2.10.2 INSTALLATION
• When installing this option, turn off the main machine, and then unplug the power cord.
• Installing the machine being supplied with power causes electric shock and
malfunction.
1. Remove the filament tapes.
• Do not place the machine with its entrance guide plate side facing down.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-132 SM
1BInstallation
2. Attach the bracket (Bracket:Coupling:Machine or cop) provided with the machine to the left
side of the main machine. (M4×20: x5)
*The fifth screw is attached to the place that appears after removing the half round blindfold
board at the upper center of the right lower cover.
3. Attach the shift sort tray with a thumb screw to the bracket (Bracket:Coupling:Machine or
cop). ( x1)
SM 2-133 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
4. Attach the shift tray. ( x1)
5. Turn on the main power switch.

6. Check the operation panel to make sure that the shift sort tray correctly operates.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-134 SM
Finisher SR4140 (D3HD)
2.11 FINISHER SR4140 (D3HD)
1BInstallation
• You cannot install more than one finisher at the same time.
2.11.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description Q'ty
1. Side Tray 1
2. Sponge Strip 1
3. Leveling Shoes 4
4. Shift Tray 1
5. Entrance Guide Plate 1
6. Ground Plate 1
7. Joint Bracket 1
8. Support Plate for Proof Tray 1
9. Support Plate Pocket 1
10. Support Plate 1
11. Support Plate for Shift Tray 1
12. Screws – M4 x 14 4
13. Screws – M4 x 20 4
14. Tapping Screws – M3 x 6 4
17. Coupling Seal 1
- EMC Address 1
SM 2-135 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
• The output jogger unit is pre-installed on this finisher, so it is not an option.
Spacer
A spacer for correcting paper skew is attached to the bottom right of the finisher.
[A]: Spacer for skew correction and side-to-side registration adjustment
• Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this
procedure.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-136 SM
1. Remove the tapes, shipping retainers, and accessory [A] from the machine.
1BInstallation
2. Remove the tapes and shipping retainers from inside of the finisher.
SM 2-137 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
3. Remove the fixing bracket [A] [B] with tags.
4. Pull out the staple unit, and then remove the fixing bracket [A] with tags and shipping
retainers.
5. Attach the joint bracket to devices to be connected.
Refer to the installation procedure of each device for attaching the joint bracket.
The illustration below is for connecting it to the main machine. ([A]: Connector cover, [B]:
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-138 SM
Joint bracket)
1BInstallation
Attach the coupling seal [A]:
6. Attach the sponge strip [A] to the right side of the upper cover.
• The sponge strip prevents the sheets from falling down the sheet in between the
finisher and the main machine during transport.
• When attaching the sponge strip, align the sponge strip with the lines [B] [C] [D] of
the side of the top cover.
SM 2-139 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
[B]: Front line, [C]: Center line, [D]: Rear line

7. Attach the entrance guide plate [A] (M3 x 6).
8. Attach the side tray [A] (M4 x 8) .
9. Attach the ground plate [A] (M3 x 8).
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-140 SM
10. Insert the shift tray [A] into the grooves and fasten it. (M3 x 8)
1BInstallation
• When attaching the shift tray, fit the rails [A] of the finisher into the grooves of the
shift tray.
11. Pull out the locking lever [A].

12. Align the finisher [B] with the connecting brackets [C], then slowly push the finisher onto the
brackets.
13. Push in the locking lever. [A]
14. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the copier. (Install the punch unit at this point)
15. Check that the top edges of the finisher are parallel with the edges of the device (or the
copier) to the right.
16. Fasten the locking lever [A].
SM 2-141 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
18. Set the leveling shoes [A] under the feet.

19. Turn the nuts to adjust the height of the finisher until it is level.
How to Use the Spacer to Correct Paper Skew

A spacer for correcting paper skew is attached to the bottom right of the finisher.
[A] Spacer for skew correction and side-to-side registration adjustment

1. Check to see if the paper is skewed when it exits the machine.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-142 SM
2. If a skew correction is required, dock the finisher to the copier using the M4x20 screws
provided with the finisher.
• M4x20 screws are required to dock because M4x14 screws are not long enough
1BInstallation
when the spacer(s) are attached.
• When you attach the bracket, attach the spacer(s) as follows:

• If the leading edge is skewed about 2mm toward the front (operator) side of
the machine, attach a 2mm spacer to the rear side of the connecting bracket.
• If the leading edge is skewed about 2mm toward the rear (the opposite side
of the operator) side of the machine, attach a 2mm spacer to the front side of
the connecting bracket.
[A]: Joint Bracket

[B]: Spacer
[C]: Finisher side
[D]: Main machine (Mainframe) side
[E]: Adjustable direction
SM 2-143 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
[A]: Screws (with spacer(s): M4 x 20, without spacer(s): M4 x 14)

[B]: Joint Bracket
[C]: Without spacer
[D]: With 1-2 spacers
[E]: Exterior Cover
3. If skew correction is NOT required, dock the finisher to the copier using the M4x14 screws
included with the finisher.
• If docked without spacers and using M4 x 20 screws the bracket cannot be

tightened enough in place because the M4 x 20 screws too long.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-144 SM
[A]: Folding Unit

[B]: Joint Bracket
[C]: Screw (M4 x 20)
[D}: Screw is too long and cannot be fully inserted
1BInstallation
2.11.3 SP SETTING
2. Do SP5841-11 and enter the name of the staples used for corner stapling.
• This is the name that shows when the user prints the Inquiry List.
• To print this list, push User Tools > [Inquiry] > [Print Inquiry List] > [Start].
SM 2-145 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Punch Unit PU5050 (D3HE)
2.12 PUNCH UNIT PU5050 (D3HE)
2.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:

1. Punch Unit 1
2. Guide plate 1
3. Hopper 1
4. Bracket 1
5. Harness 1
6. Screw (M3x6) 7
7. Spring 1
8. Stepped screw 1
9. Hopper 1
10. Harness 1
11. Bracket 1
- Tapping Screw:3X10 2
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-146 SM

This punch unit is for the Finisher SR4140 only.
1BInstallation
procedure.
1. Open the front cover and cut out the following points with a nipper.
2. Remove the rear cover.
SM 2-147 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
3. Remove the guide plate.
Go to the left side seeing from the rear side, lift the guide plate up and pull it out from the
rear side.
4. Insert the guide plate for the image sensor from the rear side.
5. Insert the front side of the guide plate between the inner cover and the side plate.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-148 SM
6. Set the rear side of the guide plate on the front of the side plate.
1BInstallation
7. Set the guide plate on the positioning boss [A] and fasten the blue screw.
8. Attach the blue screw to the rear side of the guide plate.
SM 2-149 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
9. Secure the harness with edge saddle [A].
10. Position the punch unit so that the motor [A] faces up.
11. Remove the tape [A] and then remove the spacer [B].
12. Remove the punch unit cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-150 SM
13. Slide the guide roller on the guide.
1BInstallation
14. Secure the punching unit.
SM 2-151 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
15. Remove the stepped screw with red tag.
16. Ensure the punch unit can move back and forth smoothly.
17. Fasten the PCB.
18. Remove the bracket [A] and [B]
To remove the bracket [B], raise it and then pull near side.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-152 SM
1BInstallation
19. Secure the bracket of punch full sensor with a stepped screw.
20. Insert the spring in the hang hole of the frame and
bracket.
21. Ensure the bracket of punch full sensor can move smoothly.
22. Prepare the shorter harness provided with this option.
SM 2-153 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
23. Connect the harness to the punch full sensor.
24. Run the opposite end of the harness through the hole
[A].
25. Connect the 3-pin connector to the punch move HP sensor [A].
26. Connect the 6-pin connector to the PCB [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-154 SM
27. Route the harness as shown below.
Ensure the harnesses are connected firmly.
1BInstallation
SM 2-155 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
28. Perform INPUT Check for the following 3 items. (Executing condition)
• The values of SP6-147-053 are all "0". (Front door closed, and no sheet remains in the
finisher)
• The values of SP6-147-053 are all "1". (Front door closed, and inserted a sheet into
the front side of the punching area)
• All the values of SP6-147-053 are NOT "1" and "0". (Front door closed, and inserted
a sheet into the center of the punching area)
29. If the result in the previous steps are not met the conditions, the registration is failed.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-156 SM
Finisher SR4150 (D3HB), Booklet Finisher SR4160 (D3HC)
2.13 FINISHER SR4150 (D3HB), BOOKLET FINISHER
SR4160 (D3HC)
1BInstallation
2.13.1 ACCESSORIES
No. Description Q'ty Remarks

1 Tray 1 For SR4160 only
2 Shift Tray Support Tray 1 Use when Multi-folding unit installed
3 Proof Tray Support Tray 1
4 Sponge Strip 1
5 Relay Guide Plate 1
6 Shift Tray 1
7 Screw: M4x20 4
8 Round Rivet 2
9 Tapping Screw 3×8 1
10 Tapping Screw 3×6 6
11 Bracket 1
12 Joint Bracket 1
13 Proof Tray Support Tray 1
14 Pocket 1 Support Tray
15 Rear Upper Cover 1
16 Finisher Coupling Seal 1
17 Leveling Shoes 4
18 Decal (Warning: High Temperature) 1 For Output Jogger Unit
SM 2-157 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
No. Description Q'ty Remarks

19 Cushion 1 For SR4160 only
- Cover Hopper 1 For SR4160 only
- EMC Address 1
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from
the wall socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a
malfunction may occur.
Do not hold on the guide cover in the area highlighted in red during installing. Otherwise, the
cover may break and SC720 occur.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-158 SM
1. Remove the tape and retainers and then pull out the accessories.
1BInstallation
2. Open the front door and remove the tape and retainers inside the finisher.
3. Remove the upper bracket [A] attached a red tag.
4. Remove the lower bracket [A] attached a red tag.
SM 2-159 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
5. Pull the booklet unit [A] and remove the retainer [B].
6. Remove the tape and retainers on the booklet unit [A].
7. Put back the booklet unit.

8. Attach the relay guide plate.
1. Attach the screw front side so that the relay guide plate can be hang on it.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-160 SM
2. With the relay guide plate [A] hanging on, fasten the screw of the rear side.
1BInstallation
3. Tighten the screw front side.
9. Attach the ground plate to the finisher.
10. Attach the cover [A] to the finisher.
If the finisher is used with CI4040, this cover is not used.

11. Attach the sponge strip [A] by aligning the line [B]. Wipe the area with alcohol before
SM 2-161 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
attaching it.
• Be sure to attach the sponge strip. Otherwise, paper between the main machine
and the finisher may fall down.
• Attach it within 1 mm from the upper edge.
12. Attach 2 screws on the upper side and hang the joint bracket [A] on the screws (M4 x 20).
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-162 SM
13. Set the screw head on the center of the scale [A].
1BInstallation
14. Fasten the joint bracket [A]. (M4 x 20)
15. Attach the finisher coupling seal [A].
16. Open the front cover of the finisher.
SM 2-163 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
17. Remove screw [1] and pull the docking lever [2] to release.
18. Push the finisher again to joint with the main machine firmly.
• Make sure that the finisher and the main machine are parallel.
19. Set the docking lever just released, and fasten the screw.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-164 SM
20. Plug in the interface cable to the main machine.
1BInstallation
21. Close the front cover of the finisher.
22. Set the shift tray [A] and tighten the lower side [B].
23. (SR4160 only) Attach the multi-folding tray [A].
SM 2-165 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
24. If necessary, attach the holders to the finisher, and level the finisher.
25. Turn ON the power of the main machine.

26. Make sure that the finisher can be selected on the operation panel. Also check that it can
be operated.
27. Print 5 sheets of A3 paper to proof tray. Check the side-to-side registration with A3
adjustment scale.
If the paper passes at the center of the scale, then it means that the paper passes the
center and no adjustment is required.
One division of the scale is 2 mm. If the paper edge passes at the 1 division from the center,
then the paper is offset 2 mm front.
The outermost division of the scale represents 6 mm. If the paper edge passes at the
leftmost division, then the paper is offset 6 mm rear.
28. Make sure that folding operation works correctly.
If there are folding errors, see the troubleshooting for peripherals.
2.13.3 USING THE SUPPORT TRAYS FOR THE PROOF TRAY

When delivering z-folded sheets, or the paper is curled, the sensor may prematurely detect the
exit tray. The job will be suspended until the paper is removed from the exit tray.
By using a support tray, you can prevent premature detection of a tray full.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-166 SM
1BInstallation
Support Tray "1"
When using B4, LG or larger paper, or when using limp paper, the sheet may bend, resulting in
premature full detection.
In such a case, attach the support tray [A] to the proof tray.
However, when this support tray is used, when printing with A4, LT or smaller paper, the
machine can stack only 200 sheets (less than the specified stack capacity of 250 sheets).
When printing with B4, LG or larger paper, the machine stacks 50 sheets (specified stack
SM 2-167 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
capacity).
Support Tray "2"
When delivering z-folded sheets, using the support tray can prevent premature full detection.
Support Tray "3"
Use this tray if the multi-folding unit is installed on. This support tray allows much more paper to
stack.
<Installation Procedure>
1. Raise the feeler [A] and place the support tray [B] on the shift tray.
2. Set the support tray while pushing up the feeler [A].
• Check that there is no gap between the shift tray and support tray. Installing it
incorrectly may cause dropping off of the paper height sensor.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-168 SM
Correct:
1BInstallation
Incorrect:
2.13.4 INSTALLING THE SUPPORT TRAY POCKET
The pocket can be installed at one of the following three locations.
SM 2-169 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
1. Attach the pocket with rivets.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-170 SM
2. If the support tray is not used, then store it in the pocket.
1BInstallation
SM 2-171 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Punch Unit PU3090 (D3FP)
2.14 PUNCH UNIT PU3090 (D3FP)
• This punch unit is for Booklet Finisher SR4160/Finisher SR4150.
2.14.1 ACCESSORIES
1 Side-to-side detection unit 1
2 Guide plate 1
3 Hopper 1
4 Punch unit 1
5 Punch unit movement motor unit 1
6 Cover 1
7 Tapping screws - M3 × 6 9
- EMC Address 1
2.14.2 INSTALLATION
1. Remove all packing tapes and retainers from the punch unit.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-172 SM
2. Pull out the finisher interface cable, and move it away from the machine.
3. Remove the finisher rear cover [A] ( ×3).
1BInstallation
4. Open the top cover, and then remove the arms.
5. Remove the top cover [A].
6. Cut off part of the finisher inner cover.
SM 2-173 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
7. Remove the guide plate [A].
8. Insert and attach the guide plate [A] from the rear.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-174 SM
9. Insert and attach the side-to-side detection unit [A] from the rear.
*Front: The two shafts of the unit are passed through bearings in the finisher.
In the picture below, the inner cover has been removed to show the position of the bearings.
In actual, the inner cover is not removed.
1BInstallation
10. Connect the harness at the bottom part of the side-to-side detection unit to the connector
on the finisher.
SM 2-175 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
11. Insert and attach the punch unit [A] from the rear.
12. Attach the punch unit movement motor unit [A] so that the gear [B] meshes firmly ( ×2).
13. Insert the hopper [A].
14. Connect the harnesses by following the procedure below.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-176 SM
Booklet Finisher
1. Unclamp the harness [A] at the rear. Route the connector through the top part, and
clamp it.
1BInstallation
3. Connect the harness to the punch unit board.
SM 2-177 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
4. Route the harness [A] of the punch unit movement motor unit, and connect it to the
punch unit board.
5. Release the harness of the side-to-side detection unit, and route it as shown below.
Finisher
1. Release the harnesses clamped at the rear of the finisher.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-178 SM
1BInstallation
3. Connect the harness to the punch unit board.
SM 2-179 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
4. Route the harness [A] of the punch unit movement motor unit, and connect it to the
punch unit board.
5. Release the harness of the side-to-side detection unit, and route it as shown below.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-180 SM
15. After connecting all the harnesses, check that cable ties are attached at the following
positions next to the clamps.
1BInstallation
16. Attach the supplied cover [A] to the punch unit board.
17. Reattach all the removed covers.

18. Close the front cover.
19. Reconnect the finisher to the machine, and connect the interface cable.
20. Turn ON the main power.
21. Check that the punch function can be specified from the operation panel, and check punch
operations.
SM 2-181 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Output Jogger Unit Type M25 (D3CJ)
2.15 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25 (D3CJ)
• This jogger unit is installed and used with the Finishers SR4150/SR4160 only
2.15.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No Description Qty
1 Jogger Unit Cover 1
2 Jogger Unit 1
3 Rear End Cover 1
4 Front End Cover 1
5 Cushions 5
6 Shoulder Screws 2
7 Screws (Blue) M3x6 2
8 Screws (Silver) M3x8 5
2.15.2 INSTALLATION
• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following
procedure.
1. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-182 SM
2. Remove the rear cover.
1BInstallation
3. Remove the shift tray.
4. Push the paper guides to the center.
SM 2-183 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
5. Remove the paper guide cover [A].
• Remove the hook [A] on the right side.
6. Disconnect the cover installation bracket.
7. Slowly, disconnect the bracket from the rail above, and then remove it.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-184 SM
8. At the rear [A], set one shoulder screw.
1BInstallation
9. At the front [A], set the other shoulder screw.
10. Spread the paper guides to the maximum width.
SM 2-185 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
11. Move the jogger arms on the jogger unit to the center.
12. Hold the jogger unit so the hooks [A] on both ends of the unit are in line with the installed
shoulder screws [B].
13. Rotate the jogger unit slightly up under the output tray so the motors on both ends of the
unit go under the tray, and then hang the hooks on the shoulder screws at the front and
rear.
14. Confirm that the rear bracket [A] is on the shoulder screw.
15. Confirm that the rear motor [B] is up under the tray.
16. Confirm that the front bracket [A] is on the shoulder screw.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-186 SM
17. Confirm that the front motor [B] is up under the tray.
1BInstallation
18. Fasten the jogger unit at the rear [A] and front [B].
19. Connect the jogger unit at the rear.
20. Peel the back off the two accessory cushions.
SM 2-187 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
21. Attach the cushions to the front [A] and rear [B] of the lower arms of the output tray.
22. Set the front end cover [A]. Do not attach the screw yet.
23. Set the rear end cover [A], and then fasten it [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-188 SM
24. Look at the jogger cover. Note the tabs and slots on the rear end [A], center arm covers [B],
and front end [C].
1BInstallation
25. Slowly, set the jogger cover [A] on the jogger unit.
26. At the rear [A] confirm that the tab inserts correctly.
27. At the front [B] confirm that both tabs set correctly.
SM 2-189 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
28. In the center under the jogger unit, make sure the rear arm cover [A] and front arm cover
[B] fit over the edge of the plate as shown.
29. After making sure that all tabs are set correctly, fasten the cover to the jogger unit.
30. Re-install the shift tray.
31. Check the center of the shift tray.

If the jogger arms are touching the surface of the shift tray as shown, this will cause a jam
when the machine is turned on because the arms will move and hit the tray.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-190 SM
1BInstallation
32. To avoid a jam at power on, before you turn the machine on you can:
Raise the jogger arms [A] slightly so they are not touching the shift tray below.
-or-
You can spread the jogger arms [B] away from the center so they are not touching the
surface of the tray.
SM 2-191 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 (DC3N)
2.16 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI4040 (DC3N)
2.16.1 ACCESSORIES
• This Cover Interposer Tray is designed for use with the Finisher SR4150 and Finisher
SR4140 only.

1 Plate Extension (bottom) 1
2 Rear cover extension (bottom) 1
3 Front door extension (top) 1
4 Front door extension (bottom) 1
5 Connecting Bracket (rear) 1
6 Connecting Bracket (front) 1
7 Front Joint Bracket 1
8 Rear Joint Bracket 1
9 Right front corner plate 1
10 Right Rear Cover Plate 1
11 Entrance Guide Plate 1
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-192 SM

12 Plate cover (bottom) 1
13 Door hinge 2
14 Lower cover bracket 4
1BInstallation
15 Cushion (with double-sided tape) 1
16 Gasket 2
17 Screws– M4 x 14 4
18 Shoulder screw 2
19 Tapping screws – M3 x 6 8
21 Tapping screws – 3 x 6 5
23 SCREW:M4:DIA6X1.2 3
- EMC Address 1
2.16.2 INSTALLATION
Finisher Already Installed?

If the finisher is installed, it must be separated from the main machine.
1. At the left rear corner of the machine [A], disconnect the finisher cable.
2. Open the finisher door.

3. Remove screw [A] from the lock bar. Keep this screw.
SM 2-193 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
4. Pull out lock bar [B] completely.
5. Pull the finisher away from the side of the machine.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-194 SM
Prepare the Finisher

1. Remove the entrance guide plate on the right side of the finisher.
1BInstallation
2. If the finisher is the Finisher SR4140, remove the ground plate [A] from the lower side of
the finisher.
• The removed ground plate is attached to the plate cover (bottom) in the later
procedure.
SM 2-195 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
3. If the finisher is the Booklet Finisher SR4160, remove the upper right plate [A]. (The
Finisher SR4150 does not have this plate.)
4. If the finisher is the Booklet Finisher SR4160 or Finisher SR4150, remove the sponge strip
[A] from the upper right edge of the finisher.
Shipping Tapes and Retainers
1. Remove tape from the top [A] of the tray.

2. Under the tray, remove the tape and cardboard on connector [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-196 SM
3. Open the tray and remove all tape and pieces of cardboard.
1BInstallation
Prepare the Main Machine
1. On the left side of the main machine, unfasten rear end [A] and front end [B] of the joint
bracket.
2. Remove the bracket.
Finisher SR4140: Change the Fix Position of the Drawer Connector

Bracket
1. Change the fix position of the drawer connector bracket.
• Finisher SR4150/Booklet Finisher SR4160 (At the time of factory shipment)
SM 2-197 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
• Finisher SR4140
Cover Interposer Tray

1. On top of the finisher, remove the connector cover [A].
2. Remove metal cover [B].
• Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-198 SM
• Finisher SR4140 has a different bracket in shape.
1BInstallation
3. On the right inside panel of the finisher, fasten one shoulder screw [A].
• Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160
SM 2-199 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
• Finisher SR4140
Shoulder screws: AA1433562
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-200 SM
4. To avoid damaging the guides on the right side of the unit, elevate the unit with some
blocks, boxes, etc. so it is not flat on the floor.
1BInstallation
5. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Select the connecting bracket (rear) [A], and
then locate its screw holes between the keyholes on the rear frame.
6. Align the holes, and then fasten the connecting bracket (rear) to the frame.
SM 2-201 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
7. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Fasten the connecting bracket (front) to the
front frame at [A] and [B].
8. If the upstream device is the main machine, the multi folding unit FD4020, or the multi
folding unit FD4010, replace the guide plate in the following procedures.
• If the guide plate is not replaced, open/close guide plate cannot be opened
because of interference when you handle jams on the cover interposer.
1. Lower the lever [A].
3. Attach the entrance guide plate [A] provided with this option to the bracket of the cover
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-202 SM
interposer.
1BInstallation
4. Put back the lever.
9. On the right side of the finisher, hold the tray unit over the finisher, and then align the hooks
of the mounting brackets with the installed shoulder screws in the finisher.
10. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Slowly, lower the tray unit hooks onto the
shoulder screws inside the finisher.
SM 2-203 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
11. Look inside the finisher to confirm that the hook of the rear bracket is seated correctly on
the shoulder screw.
12. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Fasten one screw below the Q2 lever to
fasten the tray to the frame.
13. Raise Q2.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-204 SM
14. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Fasten one screw to fasten the tray to the
frame at the rear.
1BInstallation
15. Finisher SR4140: When the finisher front door is open, pick up the cover interposer tray,
align the keyholes with the three shoulder screws, and then slide the cover interposer tray
down onto the screws.
SM 2-205 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
• The shoulder screws [A] (attached in a previous step) slide into the cutouts [B] in
the frame of the cover interposer tray and fasten to the side of the finisher.
• Pay attention to the harness of the exit sensor.

16. Make sure that the shoulder screw fits into the cutout correctly [A], and then fix the finisher
and the cover interposer tray with the tapping screw [B] provided with this option.
Extensions
1. Set two screws in the bottom half of the finisher front door [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-206 SM
2. Do not tighten these screws [B].
1BInstallation
3. Set two screws in the top half of the finisher front door [A].
4. Do not tighten these screws [B].
SM 2-207 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
5. Select the front door bottom extension.

6. Set the keyholes of the hinges [1] over the heads of the screws, and then slide the
extension [2] down so the heads of the screws slide into the cutouts.
7. Tighten both screws.
When installing the finisher SR4140, remove the metal part of the front door extension
(bottom), and then replace it to the two lower cover brackets [A].
Dispose of the removed metal part.
8. Select the front door top extension.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-208 SM
9. Set the keyholes of the hinges [1] over the heads of the screws, and then slide the
extension [2] down so the heads of the screws slide into the cutouts.
1BInstallation
When installing the finisher SR4140, remove the metal part of the front door extension (top),
and then replace it to the two door hinges [A].
10. Check the top of the door and extension.

• If the top the door and extension are not even [A], slide the extension up slightly [B].
• Tighten the screws.
SM 2-209 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
11. Attach the rear cover extension (bottom) [A].
When installing the finisher SR4140, remove the metal part of the rear cover extension
(bottom), and then replace it to the two lower cover brackets [A].
Attach the screws (M3X6) provided with the machine to the holes of the frame [A] at the
rear side of the finisher. (Do not tighten them yet.)
Set the keyholes of the rear cover extension (bottom) [B] over the heads of the screws
(M3X6), and then slide it down so the heads of the screws slide into the cutouts, and then
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-210 SM
tighten the screws.
1BInstallation
12. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Remove ground plate [A] from the bottom
right edge of the finisher.
13. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Set the tab [1] and boss [2] of the ground
plate extension on the bottom edge, and then fasten it with the screws.
SM 2-211 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
14. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Hook the ground plate to the right edge of
the extension.
15. Finisher SR4150 or Booklet Finisher SR4160: Fasten the ground plate to the extension.
16. Finisher SR4140: Open the door [A] of the finisher, and then set the plate cover (bottom)
[B] provided with this option.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-212 SM
17. Finisher SR4140: Fix the front side [A] and rear side [B] of the plate cover (bottom) with the
screws provided with this option.
1BInstallation
18. Finisher SR4140: Attach the ground plate which have been removed in the previous step to
the plate cover (bottom).
19. At the right front corner of the finisher [A], peel off the tape.
20. Set one screw [B]. Do not tighten it.
(SR4150,SR4160: M4X16, SR4140: M4X8)
21. Select the right front corner plate (the smaller plate).
22. Attach to the right edge [A], and then lower its cutout over the gap of the set screw [B].
SM 2-213 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
23. Use a long screwdriver inserted through the hole at [C] to tighten the screw and fasten the
plate.
24. At the right rear corner of the finisher [A], peel off the tape.
25. Set two screws [B]. Do not tighten them.
26. When you attach the plate [C], lower the cutouts under the plate over the set screws.
(SR4150,SR4160: M4X16, SR4140: M4X8)
27. Use a long screwdriver inserted through the cutouts under the plate [A] to tighten the
screws and fasten the plate.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-214 SM
Sponge Strip
1. Open the tray [A].
2. Peel the cover ]B] from the tape on the sponge.
1BInstallation
3. Attach the sponge to the bare plate.
4. Raise and lower the tray a few times to make sure that the strip is not sticking to the tray.
Main Machine
1. On the left side of the main machine, attach the front joint bracket (marked "R") on the right
side of the paper exit [A].
SM 2-215 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2. Remove the tape [B] from one gasket.
Attach gasket [A] to the front joint bracket.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-216 SM
3. Attach the rear joint bracket (marked "L") on the left side of the paper exit [A], and then
attach the other gasket [B] to this bracket.
1BInstallation
4. Finisher SR4140: Attach the sponge cushion provided with the finisher to the left side of the
machine.
Docking the Finisher

1. Push the finisher close to the left side of the main machine.
SM 2-217 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2. Confirm that the lock bar is pulled out completely.
3. Push in the lock bar, and then fasten it with its screw.
• After docking the finisher, lower and raise guide Q2 to confirm that it opens and
closes smoothly.
• If it does not operate smoothly, make sure that the right side of the finisher is
straight against the left side of the machine (or upstream unit).
• Also, check the guideQ2 and the paper guide above to see if either is bent or
loose.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-218 SM
4. Connect the finisher cable at the right rear corner of the machine [A].
1BInstallation
Finish the Installation
1. Plug in the machine and switch the machine on.
2. Enter the [System Settings].
3. Select Cover Sheet Tray > Front Cover Sheet Tray > Back Cover Sheet Tray > Tray Paper
Settings > Designation Sheet 2 Tray.
SM 2-219 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Mailbox CS4010 (D708)
2.17 MAILBOX CS4010 (D708)
• The Mail Box can be installed on the Finisher SR4150 and Booklet Finisher SR4160
only. The Mail Box cannot be installed on the Finisher SR4140.
• The Mail Box and Cover Interposer tray cannot be installed together. (Only one will fit
on top of the finisher.)
2.17.1 ACCESSORIES
No. Description Qty
1. Trays 9
2. Guide plate 1
3. Screws - M3x8 6
4. Decals (bin display) 1
2.17.2 INSTALLATION
• Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this
procedure.
1. Remove the filament tape [A].
• Move the mailbox carefully. The soft corner leaf [B] can be damaged easily.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-220 SM
1BInstallation
2. At the rear left corner of the main machine, disconnect the finisher cable [A].
3. Open the front door of the finisher.

4. Remove lock screw [A]. Keep this screw.
SM 2-221 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
5. Pull out lock bar [B] until it stops.
6. Pull the finisher away from the machine.
• If the Cover Interposer Tray is installed on the Finisher, it must be removed. Do

this now.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-222 SM
7. Remove top cover [A] of the finisher.
1BInstallation
8. Open the finisher door, and make sure that the lock bar is pulled out completely.
9. With the finisher door open, slowly, push the finisher against the left side of the machine.
10. Push the lock lever [A] into the finisher, and then fasten it with the screw [B].
SM 2-223 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
11. At the left rear corner of the main machine, connect finisher cable [A].
12. Attach guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher.
13. Attach the mailbox [A] to the top of the finisher.

14. Attach the 9 trays [B] to the mailbox.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-224 SM
15. Give the decals [C] to the customer. The operator will fill out the decals and attach them at
the desired locations.
1BInstallation
17. Check the finisher operation.
SM 2-225 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Copy Tray Type 9002 (B756)
2.18 COPY TRAY TYPE 9002 (B756)
2.18.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list.
1. Copy Tray 1
2. Actuator Arm and Bracket (not used) 1
3. Tapping Screw (not used) 2
4. Large Cap 1
5. Small Cap 4
6. Paper Height Sensor (Black Connector) 1
7. Paper Height Sensor (White Connector) Not Used 1
2.18.2 INSTALLATION
• To avoid the hazard of electrical shock, before doing this procedure turn the machine
off and unplug the machine from the power source.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-226 SM
1. Remove the left upper cover [A].
1BInstallation
2. Select the paper height sensor with the black connector.
3. Attach the paper height sensor [A] to the actuator.
4. Free the harness [B] in the machine, and then connect it to the sensor.
5. Attach the actuator [C] with connected sensor to the machine.
6. Reattach the left upper cover to the machine.

7. Attach the tray [A].
8. Insert the small caps into the small holes.
SM 2-227 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
9. Fasten the square cap as shown.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-228 SM
Small Paper Feeding Unit Type M37 (D3FF)
2.19 SMALL PAPER FEEDING UNIT TYPE M37 (D3FF)
2.19.1 ACCESSORIES
1BInstallation
No. Item Q'ty
1 Pocket 1
2 Spacer 2
3 Rivet 2
4 Seal 2

Installing this option to the document feeder allows the handling of A6 originals.
Following apps can be handled:
•Copy
•Scanner
•Media print and Scan
Other apps such as fax are not available.
Installing the option
1. Enter SP mode.
2. Set the value of SP6-050-001 to "1".
3. Exit SP mode.
4. Turn the main power OFF then ON.
SM 2-229 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
5. Remove the caps on the original tray.
6. Attach the small size tray [A] on the original tray.
7. Start one of the following apps.

• Copy
• Scanner
• Media print and Scan
8. A message that small size unit is ready appears.
When an original is set on the tray, you can select paper size in the display.
Attaching the Pockets
The pocket can be installed on the left side of the main machine, the front or rear side of the
finisher.
Store the small paper unit in the pocket when it is not used.
If the customer wishes to use two pockets together in piles, attach the spacers provided as
shown below.
[A]: Pocket
[B]: Rivet
[C]: Spacer
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-230 SM
1BInstallation
Related SPs:
Adjust the image positions for small paper mode with the following SPs.
• SP6-006-017 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:Front: with Feeding Unit)
• SP6-006-018 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:Rear: with Feeding Unit)
• SP6-006-019 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-pass):Front: with Feeding Unit)
• SP6-006-020 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass):Rear:with Feeding Unit)
• SP6-006-021 (ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (1-Pass):Front:with Feeding Unit)
• SP6-006-022 (ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (1-Pass):Rear:with Feeding Unit)
• SP6-006-023 (ADF Adjustment 1st Buckle (1-Pass):with Feeding Unit)
SM 2-231 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Page Keeper Type M37 (D3FF)
2.20 PAGE KEEPER TYPE M37 (D3FF)

1 Double-feed Sensor 2 (Receiver) (S85) 1
2 Double-feed Sensor Board 1
3 Double-feed Sensor 1 (Emitter) (S75) 1
4 13 pin harness 1
5 2 pin harness 1
6 7 pin harness 1
7 Long harness 1
8 Screw (M3x8) 2
9 Screw (M3x6) 4
10 Large Clamp 1
11 Small Clamp 1
12 Plastic Sheet 1

1. Open the ADF feed cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-232 SM
1BInstallation
4. Remove the ADF front cover [A].
5. Remove the blue screw fixed on the rear side.
SM 2-233 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
6. Release the clamps and remove the connector that connects the ADF feed cover.
7. Remove the screw [A] securing the link, and then remove the screw [B].
8. Remove the ADF feed cover [C].
9. Remove the screw [A] (Silver) and screws [B] (Black), and then, remove the pullout lower
guide [C].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-234 SM
10. Attach the clamp to the URB board bracket [A].
1BInstallation
11. Connect and clamp the connector of 7-pin harness [A], 13-pin harness [B], and 2-pin
harness [C] to the URB board.
12. Attach the URB board [A] to main board. (Use blue screws)
13. Connect the 13-pin harness to the main board [A].
SM 2-235 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
14. Pull out the two harnesses.
15. Route the harnesses as shown below.
16. Remove the paper feed upper guide [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-236 SM
17. Remove the bracket [A].
1BInstallation
18. Discard the harness already connected, and connect the replacement harness.
Connect the connector [A] and connector [B] as shown below.
19. Attach the clamp on the bracket [A].
20. Connect the connector of the double-feed sensor to the double-feed detector board [A].
SM 2-237 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
21. Attach the double-feed detector board [A].
22. Set the bearing on the mounting positions [A] of the paper feed guide.
23. Clamp the harness [A].
24. Attach the bracket [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-238 SM
25. Attach the ground harness [A], and then clamp it together with the harness [B].
1BInstallation
26. Attach the bracket [A].
28. Wipe the attaching area [A] for double-sided tape on the paper feed upper guide with
alcohol.
SM 2-239 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
29. Insert the gap [B] of the shield into the bracket [C].
30. Align the top of the shield with the top of the paper feed upper guide within ±1mm.
31. Press the area [A] where the double-sided tape is attached several times to fix it
completely.
32. Reassemble the ADF feed cover and paper feed upper guide.
Check that the harness [A] is routed as shown below.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-240 SM
33. Clamp the 2-pin harness with clamp [A] and [B], and then pull out the harness.
1BInstallation
34. Release the clamps and open the ferrite core [A].
35. Connect the 2-pin harness to the double-feed detector board (Emitter).
36. Secure the bracket [A] (Blue screws)
37. Clamp the harness.
SM 2-241 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
38. Route the harness [A] of the double-feed sensor, close the ferrite core [B] and clamp the
harness.
39. Insert the harness into the notch of the ADF.
40. With the link [A] is not interfered, attach the pullout lower guide [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-242 SM
41. Secure the guide [C] with the silver screw [A] and black screws [B].
1BInstallation
42. Insert the rotating shaft of the paper feed cover (rear) into the hole of the rear side board,
so that the rubber element [B] on paper feed cover faces outer side of the boss of scanning
entrance section.
43. Attach the pivot screw [A] and link securing screw [B].
SM 2-243 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
44. Connect the harness from paper feed cover and secure the ground with blue screw.
45. Reassemble the exterior covers.

46. Turn On the main power.
47. Enter SP mode.
48. Check that both SP6-040-001 and SP6-040-002 are set to "1".
SP6-040-001 checks whether the double-feed sensor exists and switches automatically.
SP6-040-002 can switch through UP mode.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-244 SM
Tab Sheet Holder Type 9002 (B499)
2.21 TAB SHEET HOLDER TYPE 9002 (B499)
The tab sheet holder can installed in trays 2 and 3, and allows the user to load tab stock.
1BInstallation
2.21.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
1 Tab Sheet Holder 1
2 Decal 1
2.21.2 INSTALLATION
1. Attach the decal [B] to the tab sheet holder [A].
2. Check that the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out until it stops.
SM 2-245 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
3. Install the tab sheet holder on the end fence of the paper tray.
4. When the tab sheet holder is installed correctly, you can hear a clicking noise.
[A]: End fence
[B]: Tab sheet holder
5. Load tab stock in the paper tray so the side with the tab faces the tab sheet holder.
6. Adjust the end fence position so that the tab sheet holder will fit the tab stock.
7. Carefully slide the paper tray fully in.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-246 SM
8. When removing the tab stock holder, spread the hook [A] of the tab sheet holder and then
remove it as shown below.
1BInstallation
SM 2-247 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
NFC Card Reader Type M42 (D3HP)
2.22 NFC CARD READER TYPE M42 (D3HP)

No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 SPACER:IC CARD 1
2 COVER:IC CARD:ASS'Y 1
3 IC CARD:NFC_R/W:ASS'Y 1
4 SPONGE:20X20 2 Use only 1 piece
5 CABLE:USB:NFC 1
1. Disconnect the front edge cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-248 SM
2. Bend the ends of the cover toward you slightly to disengage the tabs on the ends, and then
remove the cover.
1BInstallation
3. Remove the operation panel cover center [A].
4. To make it easy to remove the operation panel cover right, remove the fixing screw from
the right side of the operation panel center front.
SM 2-249 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
5. Remove the operation panel cover right [A].
6. Remove the square cover [A] on the right side of the operation panel.
7. Remove the cover [A] from the rear side of the operation panel.
8. Remove the cover [A], and then insert the cable [B] that comes with this option.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-250 SM
1BInstallation
9. Reattach the cover just removed fitting the cable into the opening [A] of the cover.
SM 2-251 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
11. Remove the cover [B] and attach it to the main machine, and then insert the cable into the
opening [A].
12. Attach the base [A] of this kit to the exterior cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-252 SM
13. Attach the sponge [A], and then attach the card reader [B] as shown below.
1BInstallation
14. Attach the card reader cover [A].
15. Reattach the exterior covers.
When attaching the cover to the operation panel, route the cable through the opening [A].
SM 2-253 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Installing with the Keyboard Bracket

remove the cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-254 SM
1BInstallation
SM 2-255 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
9. Reattach the cover just removed.

11. Attach the cover [A] and attach the main machine, and then insert the cable into the
opening [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-256 SM
1BInstallation
12. Attach the double-sided tape to the left of the bottom of the Keyboard Bracket.
13. Peel off the release paper of the double-sided tape and attach the double-sided tape to the
cover.
14. Set the keyboard on the Keyboard Bracket and insert the cable into the opening of the
bracket.
SM 2-257 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
15. Route the harness of the keyboard as shown below.
When attaching the panel cover, insert the cable of the keyboard through the upper
opening.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-258 SM
1BInstallation
16. Attach the panel center lower cover.
Insert the cable of the keyboard through the opening [A].
17. Attach the base of card reader to the keyboard bracket and then set the card reader.
SM 2-259 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
18. Attach the cover of the keyboard bracket.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-260 SM
Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M19 (D3BS-22)
2.23 SMART CARD READER BUILT-IN UNIT TYPE M19
(D3BS-22)
1BInstallation
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 IC Card Reader Spacer 1
2 IC Card Reader Table 1
3 Sponge 2
An IC card reader and a USB cable are not included with this unit. The customers must obtain
these themselves, and the technicians must install them.
There are 2 ways to connect the USB cable of the IC card. One is to the machine USB slot
which is the same way as the previous machine, and another is to the smart operation panel
USB slot.
SM 2-261 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
remove the cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-262 SM
1BInstallation
SM 2-263 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
9. Reattach the cover just removed fitting the cable into the opening [A] of the cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-264 SM
1BInstallation
11. Remove the cover [B] and attach it to the main machine, and then insert the cable into the
opening [A].
12. Attach the base [A] of this kit to the exterior cover.
SM 2-265 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
13. Attach the sponge [A], and then attach the card reader [B] as shown below.
14. Attach the card reader cover [A].
15. Reattach the exterior covers.
When attaching the cover to the operation panel, route the cable through the opening [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-266 SM
Card Reader Bracket Type 3352 (D593)
2.24 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE 3352 (D593)
2.24.1 ACCESSORIES
1BInstallation
No. Description Qty
1. Table Top 1
2. Table Frame 1
3. Table Bottom 1
4. Screw M4x35 2
5. Screw M3x6 2
6. Screw M3x8 2
SM 2-267 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2.24.2 INSTALLATION
1. At the right rear corner, remove the I/F harness connector cover.
2. On the right side of the machine, lower bypass tray [1], remove screw [2], and then remove
right upper cover [3].
3. Lay the cover down with the inner surface of the rear upper corner facing up.
4. Use a punch or the tip of a screw driver, to punch out the knockouts.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-268 SM
5. Clean the holes so they are smooth.
1BInstallation
6. Reattach the right upper cover to the machine ( x1).
7. Fasten the long accessory screws in the holes and leave about 2.5 cm (1”) of the screw
heads protruding.
8. Bring the flat side of the table frame to the side of the machine.
9. Align the knockout in the side of the frame with the harness connector port [1], and then
hang the keyholes on the side of the frame over the heads of the screws [2] and [3].
SM 2-269 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
10. Fasten the left front corner of the table [A].

11. Fasten the left rear corner of the table [B].
12. Set the hooks on the left edge of the table top [A] into the holes in the table frame, and then
lower the top onto the frame.
13. Run the card reader I/F harness [B] through the center of the table.
14. Below the table, connect the card reader harness.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-270 SM
15. Attach the table bottom under the table frame.
1BInstallation
16. Fasten the front left corner of the table [A].
17. Fasten the rear left corner of the table [B].
18. Fasten the front right corner of the table [A].

19. Fasten the rear right corner of the table [B].
SM 2-271 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
20. This completes installation of the card reader table.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-272 SM
Optional Counter Interface Type M12 (B870)
2.25 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE TYPE M12 (B870)
2.25.1 ACCESSORIES
1BInstallation
No. Description Qty
1. PCB: MKB 1
2. Harness (MKB to IOB) Not Used 1
3. Harness (MB to MKB) Not Used 1
4. Screws M3x6 4
5. Standoffs 4
6. Clam 1
7. Lock Band 1
8. Relay Harness Not Used 1
2.25.2 INSTALLATION
• Before doing this procedure, to prevent electrical shock always switch the machine off
and then disconnect it from the power source.
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Disconnect the machine from the power source.
3. Remove the rear upper cover. Rear Upper Cover
SM 2-273 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
4. Use a pair of nippers to remove knockout [A].
5. Open the controller box cover. Controller Box Cover Plate

6. Attach the standoffs to four holes [A].
7. Locate the free harness in front of the frame where you just attached to standoffs.
8. Remove relay cap [A] from the end of the harness [B].
9. Attach the PCB [A] to the standoffs on the frame.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-274 SM
10. Connect harness [B] to the PCB.
1BInstallation
SM 2-275 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Copy Connector Type M25 (D3D3)
2.26 COPY CONNECTOR TYPE M25 (D3D3)
With this option you can connect two machines to perform simultaneous copying for the same
job.
2.26.1 ACCESSORIES
1. PCB D3D3 2
2. LAN Cable 1
2.26.2 INSTALLATION
• Before doing this procedure, turn the machine off and disconnect its power cord from
the power source.
• Before you handle the boards, touch a metal surface to discharge accumulated static
charge from your hands. A static discharge could damage the boards.
• Handle the boards carefully to avoid damaging them.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-276 SM
Copy Connector Type M25 (D3D3)
1. Remove the cover [A] from the right I/F slot (marked “Tandem”).
1BInstallation
2. Insert one of the boards in the slot.
3. Tighten the knob screws with your fingers.
• To avoid damage to the board, never tighten these knob screws with a
screwdriver.
4. In the same way, install the other board in the right slot of the other machine.
5. Connect the provided LAN cable to both boards.
SM 2-277 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
External Keyboard Bracket Type M25 (D3DH)
2.27 EXTERNAL KEYBOARD BRACKET TYPE M25 (D3DH)
2.27.1 ACCESSORIES
1 Cover (for card reader) 1
2 Cover (no card reader) 1
3 Keyboard Holder 1
4 Screws 2
2.27.2 INSTALLATION
The external keyboard can be installed with or without a card reader. Do the first procedure
below to install only the keyboard. Do the second procedure to install the keyboard with the
card reader.
External Keyboard Only

Do this procedure to install the external keyboard without a card reader.
2. Disconnect the machine from its power source.
3. Open the ADF.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-278 SM
1BInstallation
remove the cover.
SM 2-279 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
10. Remove a USB port cover [A] on the right edge of the operation panel.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-280 SM
11. Set and fasten the keyboard holder [A].
1BInstallation
12. Remove the tape [A] from the holder.
13. Set the keyboard [A] on the keyboard holder and insert the cable into the opening [B] at the
side of the bracket.
SM 2-281 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
14. Connect the USB cable [A] to the operation panel, and then route the cable as shown
below.
15. Put the extra length of the cable in the keyboard holder, and then attach the cover without
the cut-out.
16. Attach the removed covers.
• When attaching the cover on the rear side of the operation panel, pass the cable
of the keyboard through the opening [A] at the upper side.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-282 SM
• When attaching the operation panel cover center, pass the cable of the keyboard
through the opening [A].
1BInstallation
External Keyboard with Card Reader
For details, refer to "Installing with the Keyboard Bracket" in NFC Card Reader.
SM 2-283 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Internal Options
2.28 INTERNAL OPTIONS
2.28.1 LIST OF SLOTS

The internal options are the options that are available on I/F cards inserted into the controller
board.
• Tandem I/F Card. The left slot is used exclusively for the I/F card used to slave one
machine to another.
• Option Slot. The right slot is used for other options. As the I/F must reside in the slot, this
means only one option can be used at a time. For example, you will not be able to use the
File Format Converter if you have installed a wireless LAN.
No. Name Item

1 USB A Standard
2 USB B Device Server Option Type M37
3 Ethernet Standard
4 SD Card Slots Slot 1 Controller options on SD cards
Slot 2 Service slot (firmware updates, etc.)
5 Option (I/F Slot) File Format Converter Type M19
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19
IEEE 802.11 a/g/n Interface Unit M19
Device Server Option Type M37
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-284 SM
Internal Options
No. Name Item

6 Tandem (I/F Slot) Copy Connector Type M25
7 LINE 2 G3 Interface Unit Type M44 (1 Channel)
8 LINE 3 G3 Interface Unit Type M44 (2 Channel)
1BInstallation
9 ISDN G3 Interface Unit Type M44 (3 Channel)
10 LINE Fax Connection Type M44
11 TEL
• Only one board can be installed for No. 5 because only one slot is available.
2.28.2 INSERTING CARDS

1. Remove the cover on the controller board faceplate.
2. Insert the edge of the board into the groove at the top and bottom of the right side of the
slot.
3. Slowly push the board into the slot until you feel it connect with the controller board.
4. Fasten the board by tightening the knob screws with your fingers.
SM 2-285 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Internal Options
• Tighten these knob screws with your fingers.

• Never use a screwdriver to tighten these screws.
• If a screw is tightened with too much pressure, this could damage the I/F board or
the edged connectors between the I/F card and the controller board.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-286 SM
2.29 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19
2.29.1 ACCESSORIES
1BInstallation
1. IEEE 1284 Centronics Board 1
Only one I/F slot (labeled "Option") is available for one of these options:
• Centronics 1284
• IEEE 802.11a/g/n (Wireless LAN)
• File Format Converter
• If another card is installed in the "Option" slot on the right, you must remove it before
installing this card.
2.29.2 INSTALLATION
SM 2-287 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2. Remove the cover of the "Option Slot" on the right.
3. Insert the board into the slot.

screwdriver.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-288 SM
2.30 IEEE 802.11 A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT M19
2.30.1 ACCESSORIES
1BInstallation
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list and
diagram.
1. IEEE802.11 a/g/n 1
2. Velcro Fasteners 2
3. Clamps 8
Before You Begin

Observe the following points when installing and using this unit:
• Never attempt to disassemble the IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit.
• If you need to replace any part, replace the entire unit.
• Give the Cautions chart to the customer.
• It is illegal to disassemble or modify this product. If illegal modifications are done to this
product, we shall not assume any responsibility.
• Depending where you use this product, or the access point you select, restrictions may be
imposed on the use of some channels. If wireless LAN communications are not possible,
check the environment or access point.
• You cannot use this option if you use Ethernet.

Check the markings on the antenna brackets and the ferrite cores of the antenna cables.
• ANT1. The ferrite core on the Antenna 1 cable is black. Antenna 1 transmits and receives.
SM 2-289 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
It must be installed in the middle of the rear edge of the main machine.
• ANT2. The ferrite core on Antenna 2 cable is white. Antenna 2 only receives. It is installed
on the rear right corner of the machine. .
The illustration below shows both antennas installed on the back of the machine with Antenna 1
(black ferrite core) on the rear cover and antenna 2 (white ferrite core) on the controller box
cover.
• The PCB is installed in the controller box.

• Both antennas are held in place by easily installed and removed Velcro fasteners. (The
antennas and cables will need to be removed before the covers can be removed to service
the machine.)
• The seven clamps are fastened to the machine by double-sided tapes.
• The clamps can be easily opened to free the cables and then closed to once again clamp
the cables.
2.30.2 INSTALLATION
• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
• To prevent damage to the controller box, always work carefully.

• Never put your hand or a tool into the box when you remove the controller box or
install an option.
• To prevent damage to the circuits on the boards, always touch a metal surface to
discharge static charge from your hands before you handle a board.
• The usable frequency range of this product may be used by products (industrial,
scientific, or medical devices) of other companies.
• Outdoor use of wireless devices may be restricted. Pay attention to where you use this
product.
1. Find the best location of the machine.
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment
that generates strong magnetic fields.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-290 SM
• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.

3. Remove the cover of the "Option Slot".
1BInstallation
4. Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
5. Insert the board [A] into the slot.
6. Tighten the knob screws [B] with your fingers.
screwdriver.
7. Pull the antennas away from machine and make sure that they are not tangled.
8. Look at the markings on the antenna bracket.
• ANT1. Antenna 1 transmits and receives. The ferrite core on the Antenna 1 cable is
black. It must be installed at the top center of the rear cover [1].
• ANT2. Antenna 2 only receives. The ferrite core on the Antenna 2 cable is white. It is
installed on the right rear corner of the machine [2].
SM 2-291 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
9. Peel the tapes from the backs of the two Velcro fasteners, and then attach them to the rear
cover of the main machine.
10. Select Antenna 1, with the black ferrite core [A] on its cable, and then attach it to the center
[B].
• The tips of the antennas should not be above the edge of the rear cover.
• They must be straight and not slanted to one side.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-292 SM
1BInstallation
11. Attach the other antenna [A] behind the right rear corner of the machine.
• Like the other antenna, the tip of this antenna should be perfectly vertical and not
above the rear edge of the cover.
12. Attach two clamps to the left of the controller box faceplate, set both harnesses in the
clamps, and then close the clamps.
SM 2-293 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
13. Attach two clamps to the rear cover as shown, set both harnesses in the clamps, and then
close the clamps.
14. Keep the unused clamps, or you can attach additional clamps to the harnesses.
15. Turn on the main machine.

16. Confirm that the machine can recognize the unit:
> >User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page
17. If reception is poor, you may need to move the machine.
User Tool Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n

Enter the UP mode. Follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE
802.11a/g/n. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
• If Ethernet is connected, the wireless LAN cannot be used.

1. Press the "Settings" icon.
2. Press "System Settings".
• Select "Network/Interface"> "IEEE802.X Authentication" > "IEEE802.X

Authentication for Ethernet". Either the Ethernet or the wireless LAN must be set
to "Inactive".
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-294 SM
3. Select "Network/Interface" > "Control Panel:Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options
show.
4. Set the “Communication Mode”.
5. Enter the SSID setting. (The SSID is case sensitive.)
1BInstallation
6. Set the “Adhoc Channel”. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. The
allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
Region A (mainly Europe and Asia)
Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
In some countries, only the following channels are available:
Range: 1-11 channels (default: 11)
Region B (mainly North America)
Range: 1-11, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
7. Set the “Security Method” to specify the encryption of the Wireless LAN.
• The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data
transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side to unlock encoded
data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
Range of Allowed Settings:
- 64 bit: 10 characters
- 128 bit: 26 characters
• Specify “WPA2” when “Communication Mode” is set to “Infrastructure Mode”. Set the
“WPA2 Encryption Method” and “WPA2 Authent. Method”.
WPA2 Encryption Method: CCMP (AES) is fixed.
WPA2 Authent. Method: Select either “WPA2-PSK” or ”WPA2”.
If you select “WPA2-PSK”, enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8 -63 characters in ASCII
code. When “WPA2” are selected, authentication settings and certificate installation
settings are required.
8. Press "Wireless LAN Signal Status" to check the machine’s radio wave status using the
operation panel.
Press "Restore Factory Defaults" to initialize the following settings:

• Transmission mode
• Channel
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP Key
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11a/g/n:
SM 2-295 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SP No. Name Function

SP5-840-011 WEP Key Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Select
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used
for the WEP Key entry.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-296 SM
File Format Converter Type M19
2.31 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19
1BInstallation
1. File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) 1
2.31.2 INSTALLATION
2. Remove the cover of the "Option Slot" on the right.
3. Insert the board into the slot.

screwdriver.
SM 2-297 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
File Format Converter Type M19
5. Switch the machine on.

6. Set SP5836-3 to "1" to enable the print backup feature.
7. Confirm or set the following SP codes with the values in the table listed below.
SP No. Setting SP No. Setting
5-836-1 1 5-836-73 0
5-836-2 0 5-836-85 1
5-836-3 1 5-836-86 2
5-836-72 0 5-836-91 50
8. Set the following SP codes according to the customer's needs.
SP No. Setting Comment
SP5-836-94 2 Selects JPEG2000 file format for documents copied from the document
server to Palm2.
Note: Files backed up to Palm2 in J2K format cannot be edited by other
software applications.
0 Selects the TIFF file format for documents copied from the document
server to Palm2.
Note: Select this so the backed up files can be used with other software
applications (editing, OCR, etc.) with only slight loss in image quality.
SP-5836-98 1 Applies dot correction and eliminates ghost images transferred from the
back sides of double-sided originals when files are copied to Palm2. This
selection also reduces the size of the file.
Note: This function is applied to both J2K and TIFF files and is
particularly useful for copying large J2K documents quickly with only a
slight loss in image quality.
0 Does not apply the features of the "1" setting when files are copied to
Palm2.
Note: This setting preserves the quality of the original image, especially
with J2K files, but also requires more time for copying and requires more
disk space to store the larger files.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-298 SM
Device Server Option Type M37 (D3GF)
2.32 DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M37 (D3GF)
1BInstallation
No Description Q'ty
1 Interface Board 1
2 Ferrite Core 2
3 Cable Ties 2
An Ethernet cable is not packed with this option.
Interface Board Surface
No. Item Description

1 Switch Used to reset to the factory settings.
2 Ethernet port Used to connect the Ethernet cable.
3 USB port Used to connect this option to the main machine.
Do not use this port with other options.
When installing the device server option, make sure that the labels 'USB-A' and 'Ethernet' are
SM 2-299 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
upside down.
When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
occur.
The device server option has an IP address stored on the PCB. This is different from the
machine's IP address. The IP address and other network settings of the device server option
must be configured after installing this option.
1. Turn OFF the main power of the machine, and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
2. Remove the slot cover [A] from the I/F slot B.
• The Device Server Option Type M37 can be connected to either of I/F slot A and
B.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-300 SM
3. Insert the interface board [A] into the slot.
1BInstallation
4. Insert the USB cable into the USB port (Type A) [C] on the machine I/F.
5. Insert the other side of the USB cable into the USB port (Type B) [B] on this option board.
6. Insert the Ethernet cable [A] into the Ethernet port on this option.
7. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting.
8. Plug the power cord into the wall socket and turn on the main power of the machine.
Do not unplug the USB cable while the machine is recognizing this option. It may take
between 30 seconds to 1 minute to finish recognizing it (the LEDs on the Ethernet port of
this option light up after recognizing this option; see below). If unplugged, connect the
cable again.
9. Make sure that the machine recognizes this option correctly by doing one of the following:
1. Using the option's IP address, access the interface via a web browser.
SM 2-301 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2. Ping the option’s IP address using a computer in the same network as the mainframe.
If the IP address cannot be found, use the MAC address. The PCB has a label MAC
address is printed.
3. Add the "RX" prefix to the MAC address and access the interface via a web browser.
Example:
http://RX0080926A3264
4. Ping the MAC address with the prefix added. Example: ping
RX0080926A3264.
• When installing the Device Server Option Type M37, the installation status is not
shown on the Configuration Page.
• The customer should keep the removed slot covers.
LED Status Indicators
When this option installed and recognized by the main machine, the LED indicators light up
under the following conditions:
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-302 SM
1BInstallation
No. Light Color Lights Up When
1 Green and Yellow 1000BASE-T operates
2 Green 10BASE-T operates
3 Yellow 100BASE-TX operates
Notes for Energy Save Mode Setting
When a machine with this option enters energy save mode, attempting to print will result in a
communication error.
1. Enter SP mode, and then set SP5-191-001 (Power Setting: Power Str) to "0 (Off)".
2.32.3 MANUALLY ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS

This section describes assigning an IPv4 address manually. Note that an IPv4 address can be
entered which is not only on the same network segment but also on a different network
segment to share a single printer with multiple devices, on multiple networks.
The IPv4 address cannot be assigned using the operation panel of the machine. It must be set
from the option's user interface accessed via a web browser.
The network setting of this option is initially assigned as follows:
IP address: 192.168.100.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
The network setting of your PC must be in the same network segment to change the network
setting of this option.
1. Make a note of the current network settings of your PC.
2. Change the IP address on your PC to [192.168.100.xxx (*0 - 255)].
3. Change the subnet mask on your PC to [255.255.255.0].
4. Open a web browser.
5. Type [http://192.168.100.100/] in the address bar.
6. Press the "Enter" key.
The setting screen for this option appears.
SM 2-303 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
7. Click [Network Setting].
8. Type [root] in the user name textbox and click [OK].

9. Input [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway].
10. Set other items if needed.

11. Press [Set].
12. Close the web browser.
13. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the PC.
14. Connect the Ethernet cable to a network device (e.g. switching hub).
15. Set the IP address of this option in the printer driver which you use.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-304 SM
SD Card Options
2.33 SD CARD OPTIONS
2.33.1 OVERVIEW
1BInstallation
Two SD card slots are provided on the controller box.
• Slot 1. Slot 1 is where most SD cards with applications on them are inserted for either use
or downloading. When merging (copying) applications from one SD card to another, Slot 1
holds the target SD card (the application is moved to this card from the SD card in Slot 2.)
• Slot 2. Slot 2 is the service slot. This is where the SD card with the new firmware is
inserted for the firmware update procedure. When merging (moving) applications from one
SD card to another, Slot 2 holds the source SD card (the application is moved from this
card to the SD card in Slot 1.)
2.33.2 OPTIONS AVAILABLE ON SD CARDS

Here is a list the available options for this machine provided on SD cards.
• IPDS Unit Type M44 (D3J8-11, 12, 13)
• OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC)
• PostScript3 Type M44 (D3J8-03, 04, 05)
• XPS Direct Print Option Type M44 (D3J8-07, 09)
• If the customer wants to use more than one application on SD cards, applications must
SM 2-305 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SD Card Options
be merged on the same SD card.
• The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to
the target SD card. This is described below.
• Do not use an SD card if it has previously been used with a computer. Correct
operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
• The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application
program. The service technician may also occasionally need to check the SD card and
its data to solve problems. For these reasons SD cards must be stored with the
machine. The storage location is described at the end of this section.
• After an SD card has been used to move other applications onto that card, that SD
card cannot be used for a different function.
• Before copying and application to an SD card, always make sure that the write-protect
switch is OFF. It is very easy to accidentally turn on the write-protect switch when
inserting or removing an SD card.
2.33.3 INSERTING SD CARDS

2. Remove the SD card slot cover.
3. With its corner notch down and label facing the front of the machine, insert the SD card into
Slot 2.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-306 SM
SD Card Options
4. Push the SD card in until it clicks and locks in place.
1BInstallation
• Pushing in the SD Card also releases it for removal.
• Make sure the SD Card is inserted and locked in place. If it is partially out of the
slot, push it in gently until it locks in place.
5. Turn the machine on, and then proceed with the installation of the option.
2.33.4 MOVE EXEC: MERGING APPLICATIONS

Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card.
• Due to copyright restrictions, some applications may not allow you to copy the
application to another SD card with Move Exec.
• In this case, just use the SD with the restricted application as the target SD card for
Move Exec.
1. Turn the main machine off.
3. Insert the Source SD card [1] in Slot 2 (Service slot). This card contains the application that
you want to move.
SM 2-307 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SD Card Options
4. Check the target SD card and confirm that its write-protect switch is OFF.
5. Insert the Target SD card [2] into the SD card Slot 1.

7. Turn the main machine on.
8. Do SP5873-001.
9. Touch "Execute".
10. Follow the instructions on the display to complete the procedure.
12. Remove the Source SD card from Slot 2. Leave the target SD card in Slot 1.
13. Turn the main machine on.
14. Go into the User Tools mode and confirm that all the applications on the SD card in Slot 1
are enabled:
> >User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version
15. Turn the main machine off again.
16. Remove the SD card in Slot 1.
17. Reattach the SD card slot cover.
18. Store the copied SD cards in the machine. (See below.)
• Never remove copied SD cards from the machine site. The copied original SD cards
are the only proof that the customer has purchased the options.
• After an SD card has been copied, it can no longer be used. However, it must be
stored in the machine to serve as proof of purchase by the customer.
• The original SD card can also be restored to its original condition with the Undo Exec
procedure (SP5873-002) described below.
• Before you store an SD card, label it carefully so it can be identified easily if you need
to do the Undo Exec procedure.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-308 SM
SD Card Options
2.33.5 UNDO EXEC: UNMERGING APPLICATIONS

Do this procedure if you moved an option from the original SD card to another card by mistake
and you need to restore the original SD card.
1BInstallation
2. Insert the SD card holding the merged applications in SD Card Slot 1 [A].
3. Put the original destination SD card (the one removed from storage) into Slot 2 [B].
• The SD card in Slot 2 must be the original SD card of the application you want to
move from Slot 1 to Slot 2. You cannot use any blank SD card in Slot 1.
4. Turn the main switch ON.
5. Do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).
6. Follow the instructions on the operation panel to complete the procedure..
8. Remove the SD cards from the slots.
9. Replace the SD card slot cover ( x1).
10. Turn the main switch ON.
2.33.6 STORING ORIGINAL SD CARDS

SD cards must be stored at the site to server as proof of purchase by the customer. Do not
remove copied SD cards from the machine site. Store the SD cards inside the machine for
safekeeping.
1. Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord.
2. Raise the platen.
SM 2-309 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SD Card Options
3. Disconnect the front edge cover ( x2).
remove the front edge cover.
5. Locate the slots at the upper right corner of the operation panel display [A].
6. Up to three SD cards can be stored here.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-310 SM
OCR Type M13 (D3AC)
2.34 OCR TYPE M13 (D3AC)
2.34.1 WHAT IS SEARCHABLE PDF?
1BInstallation
• Searchable PDF embeds the text information in the scanned document without processing
the data on a computer.
• If this option is installed:
1. You can search the text in the scanned document.
2. You can add extra text to the file name.
3. The orientation of the originals is detected, and the document is automatically rotated.
• The OCR unit is provided on an SD card. By installing the SD card on the main machine, a
function key is added to the operation panel. The OCR application does not need to be
installed on the computer.
• After OCR installation, you can specify the settings of the searchable PDF function.
• The machine embeds the text information of the scanned document after scanning the
originals (after the originals are ejected from the ADF). Therefore, you can remove the
originals from the exposure glass or ADF.
• You can use other applications such as copy and printer while the machine embeds the
text information of the scanned document.
2.34.2 ACCESSORIES
1. SD Card 1
Installation
SM 2-311 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
OCR Type M13 (D3AC)
2. Insert the OCR SD card in Slot 2 with its label facing the front of the machine.
3. Turn on the machine.

4. Go into the SP mode and do SP5-878-004.
• This records the content of the SD card in NVRAM
• The machine ID of the main machine is recorded on the SD card.
5. When the display tells you that the execution is completed, touch [Exit].
• If the machine returns the “Failed” alert, check if the SD card to determine if it has
already been used.
• Turn off the machine and then steps 1 to 5 again.
7. Go in the SP mode and do SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR) and then press [EXECUTE].
The OCR dictionary is copied to the HDD from the SD card.
• In the first execution, the SD card and the machine are linked.
• In the second execution, the OCR dictionary is copied onto the HDD.
8. Turn off the machine, and then remove the SD card.
• Store the SD card in a safe location.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-312 SM
OCR Type M13 (D3AC)
• You will need the original SD card in case the HDD unit ever fails.
9. Turn on the main power switch.
10. Press [Scanner] on the Home screen.
11. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen.
1BInstallation
12. Press [File Type] > [Others].
13. Press [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A].
14. Check to see if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the screen.
• The searchable PDF function can be changed on the [OCR Settings] screen after
installing the OCR unit.
• If you want to use the searchable PDF function, press [OCR Settings], and specify how
to perform OCR. After completing the OCR setting, press [OK].
Restoration
After installation of the OCR Unit:
• The searchable PDF function is saved on the HDD and the SD card ID is saved in NVRAM.
• After replacement of either the HDD unit or the NVRAM, OCR Unit Type M13 must be
installed again.
When the original SD card exists

• If you replace the HDD.
Re-install the OCR Unit Type M13 from the original SD card.
• If you replace the NVRAM.
If you upload / download the NVRAM data, re-install the OCR Unit Type M13 from the
original SD card. If you don’t upload / download the NVRAM data, order a new SD card
(service part) of the OCR Unit Type M13. Then re-install the OCR Unit Type M13 from the
new SD card.
• When you replace the HDD and NVRAM at the same time.
Re-install the OCR Unit Type M13 from the original SD card.
If Original SD Card is Lost

• Order a new SD card (service part) of the OCR Unit Type M13, and then re-install from the
new SD card.
• When you re-install the OCR Unit Type M13, do the same procedure as the original
installation procedure.
SM 2-313 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PostScript3 Unit Type M44 (D3J8)
2.35 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M44 (D3J8)
2.35.1 ACCESSORIES
1. PostScript3 Emulation SD Card 1
2. Decal 1
• Only Slot 1 is available for applications on SD cards. If more than one application will
be used, the applications must be merged onto one SD card with SP5873 -1.
2.35.2 INSTALLATION
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-314 SM
PostScript3 Unit Type M44 (D3J8)
3. Set the SD card with it is label facing the front of the machine, and then push it in until it
clicks.
1BInstallation
4. Switch the machine on.
5. Print an SMC report to confirm that the machine recognizes the option.
6. Re-attach the SD card slot cover.
7. Attach the Adobe PostScript3 decal to the front of the machine.
8. If application has been moved to another SD card, store the original card under the
operation panel at [A]. (The original SD card is the client's only proof of purchase.) Storing
Original SD Cards
SM 2-315 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
IPDS Unit Type M44 (D3J8)
2.36 IPDS UNIT TYPE M44 (D3J8)
diagram.
2.36.1 ACCESSORIES
No Description Q'ty
1 IPDS Emulation SD Card 1
- CD-ROM:IPDS:EXP:Assy 1
- Sheet: IPDS: EULA 1
2.36.2 INSTALLATION
2. Insert the target SD card into Slot 1 [1] with its label facing the front of the machine.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-316 SM
IPDS Unit Type M44 (D3J8)
3. Insert the IPDS SD card into Slot 2 [2] with its label facing the front of the machine.
1BInstallation
4. Perform the SD Card Appli Move with SP5873-001.
5. After the application move is finished, remove the SD card from Slot 2
6. Turn on the machine.
7. Make sure that the machine recognizes the option:
[User Tools] > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page
8. Attach the decal to the left side of the Adobe PDF decal on the right door.
SM 2-317 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
XPS Direct Print Option Type M44 (D3J8)
2.37 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M44 (D3J8)
diagram.
2.37.1 ACCESSORIES
No Description Q'ty
1 SD Card 1
2.37.2 INSTALLATION
1. Remove SD card slot cover [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-318 SM
XPS Direct Print Option Type M44 (D3J8)
2. Insert the XPS card in Slot 1.
1BInstallation
• If another card is in Slot 1, do Move Execute to move the content of the XPS card
to the card in Slot 1. Move Exec: Merging Applications
3. After doing the merge, remove the SD card from Slot 2 and store it. Storing Original SD
Cards
4. The card in Slot 1 must remain in Slot 1.
SM 2-319 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M19 (D3BS)
2.38 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19
(D3BS)
2.38.1 OVERVIEW
This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data
Overwrite Security function. The function of this option is completely the same as the Data
Overwrite Security in Security Functions, which is standard on this machine.
2.38.2 COMPONENT LIST

1. SD Card 1
2.38.3 BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE

1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that “Administrator Authentication” is On.
"Settings" icon > [System Settings] > [Administrator Authentication/User
Authentication/App Auth.] > [Administrator Authentication Management] > [Administrator
Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before the installation
procedure.
3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-320 SM
Tools]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled
(selected) before the installation procedure.
1BInstallation
Seal Check and Removal
• Before doing the installation, you must check the box seals to make sure that they
have not been removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank.
• If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do not install the components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the box.
3. You can see the “VOID” marks [B] when you remove each seal. After removal they cannot
be attached to the box again.

1. Turn the main power OFF.
SM 2-321 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
3. Insert the SD card into SD Slot 1 with its label facing the front of the machine.
4. Push it slowly until you hear a click.
5. Do SP5-878-001 to install the application.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-322 SM
Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M12 (D3A6-02)
2.39 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M12
(D3A6-02)
1BInstallation
Accessory Check
1 Enhanced Security HDD 1
- EMC Address 1
Installation Procedure
• Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main
power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur.
• When the MFP is already in use (not a new machine) and “Data Encryption Settings” is
enabled, disable Data Encryption Settings before installing this option. If installing
without disabling, the function of the Enhanced Security HDD Option is not
guaranteed.
• When the MFP is already in use (not a new machine), Copy the address book data to
an SD card with SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book) if possible.
SM 2-323 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
1. Remove the standard HDD installed. (HDD)

2. Separate the standard HDD from the bracket.
3. Disconnect the cables from the standard HDD. ( × 2)
4. Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-324 SM
5. Connect the two cables to the enhanced security HDD. ( × 2)
1BInstallation
6. Fasten the HDD to the bracket. ( × 4)
7. Install the HDD bracket in the mainframe. ( × 3, × 2)

8. Reassemble the machine.
SM 2-325 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
After Installing the HDD
1. Connect the power cord and turn the machine on. A message prompts you to format the
hard disk.
2. Touch [Format].
3. Wait for the machine to finish formatting the hard disk.
• Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress. Wait for
the machine to tell you that the formatting is finished.
4. Turn the machine off/on after the message tells you formatting is finished.
5. Do this step only if you are installing the option on a machine that is already in use (not a
new machine):
 Enter the SP mode
 Run SP5-853-001, to install the fixed stamps.
 Run SP5-846-052, to copy the address book from the SD card to the HDD.
 Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-326 SM
SP descriptions
• SP5-853-001 (Stamp Date Download)

Downloads the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk. Then these
stamps can be used by the Settings menu. If this is not done, the user will not have access
1BInstallation
to the fixed stamps ("Confidential", "Secret", etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the HDD.
• SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book)

Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
6. Confirm that "Secure HDD" is displayed in the firmware version list to be sure that
encryption is performed correctly. If "Secure HDD" is displayed, there are no abnormalities
in the Enhanced Security HDD Option and the encryption function is running.
The firmware version can be confirmed in the setting on the operation panel at the location
shown below.
Menu location/item Display
name
[System Settings] >
[Machine/Control
Panel Information]>
[Firmware Version]
SM 2-327 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
After Installation Check
2.40 AFTER INSTALLATION CHECK
2.40.1 SAFETY CHECK

Check the following points after installing the machine, or after moving or transporting it to a
new location. Consult with the operator before making or scheduling any changes. Determine
which changes should be done by the client and those that should be done by the service
technician.
2.40.2 CHECK LIST

The answer should be “Yes” for each item in the table. As each task is accomplished initial the
“Client” or “CE” for whoever confirmed the point.
No. Item Done by:
Client CE
Excessive Vibration
1 Floor strong enough to prevent vibration?
2 Machine located away from vibrating floors, machinery?
Power
3 Power supply point dedicated for the machine and not shared with other
devices?
4 Cable and connection point capacity rated correctly for the requirements of
the machine?
5 Power cable connection point stable and not loose?
6 Power connection point clean, free of dust?
7 Power cord connection point close to the machine so it can be reached
quickly in an emergency?
8 Power cord away from foot traffic, not bundled or under other equipment?
9 Power cord slack and free (not taut or bundled) and free of damage?
10 Power source rated correctly for machine specifications, and initial display
does not flicker after power on?
11 Is machine grounded properly?
Setup Location
12 Machine located away from space heaters, heating ducts, humidifiers?
13 Ambient temperature stable and not subject to wide range of low/high
temperatures which could cause condensation in the machine?
14 Machine located away from direct sunlight and open windows (protected from
dust, rain)?
15 No televisions, radios near the machine which could cause noise
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-328 SM
After Installation Check
No. Item Done by:

Client CE
interference?
16 Area around machine and power point free of dust?
1BInstallation
17 Bulk of machine located away from heavy foot traffic at the work site?
Ventilation
18 Is the machine in a well-ventilated area?
19 Is there sufficient space behind the machine for ventilation, away from
personnel?
Other
20 Are the exposure glass and contact glass free of nicks and scratches?
21 Are the areas around moving parts of finishers (shift trays, etc.) free of
obstacles that could interfere with their operation?
SM 2-329 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Security Setting
2.41 SECURITY SETTING
2.41.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION

The machine contains two security functions: Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption.
Both are built-into the firmware on the controller board.
• If you are installing a new machine, and the user wants to use these security functions, you
must log in as the System Administrator and activate Data Overwrite Security and HDD
Encryption by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel.
Formatting the HDD is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet
(Address Book data, image data, etc.).
• If the customer needs to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on
a machine that is already running (valuable data is already on the HDD), activate the unit
by selecting "All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation panel. Selecting "All Data"
will preserve the data that has already been saved to the HDD. If there is data on the HDD
and "Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the HDD up to that point will be
erased.
Please keep these points in mind when setting up these security features:
• Encryption setup will take several minutes to complete.
• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or of the encryption key is
changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
• The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
• Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
• Never allow the machine to shut down while the encryption setup is in progress.
• If the machine loses power while the encryption setup is in progress, the HDD will be
damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
• Print the encryption key and then store it in a safe place. If the encryption key is
lost, the controller board, HDD and NVRAM on the controller board must all be
replaced at the same time.
2.41.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY
Before You Begin the Procedure

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-330 SM
Security Setting

1BInstallation
Authentication]
procedure.
Tools]
Using "Auto Erase Memory"

The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the operation panel.
2. Press "Settings" icon.
4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [Data Management] > [Auto Erase Memory
Setting].
5. From the list next to Auto Erase Memory Setting, select [On], and then select an erase
method.
The default erase method is [Random Numbers], and the default number of overwrites
is [3].
SM 2-331 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Security Setting
• NSA*1: Overwrites data twice with random numbers and once with zeros.
• DoD*2: Overwrites data with a random number, then with its complement, then
with another random number, and the data is verified.
• Random Numbers: Overwrites data multiple times with random numbers. Select
the number of overwrites from one to nine.
*1 National Security Agency (U.S.A)
*2 Department of Defense (U.S.A)
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [ ], and then log out of the machine.
If you enable both overwriting and data encryption, the overwriting data will also be
encrypted.
To check the overwriting process on the operation panel
When Auto Erase Memory is enabled, the Data Overwrite icon is displayed at the bottom right
of the operation panel screen to indicate the status of data that is not overwritten.
1. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during
overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
Icon This icon lights up when there is data to be overwritten, and flashes during
[1] overwriting.
Overwriting starts automatically once the job is completed.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-332 SM
Security Setting
The Copier, Fax, and Printer functions take priority over the Auto Erase
Memory function. Overwriting will start after the job is completed.
Icon The trash box of the icon is empty when there is no data to be overwritten.
[2] This icon is also displayed when there is Hold Print/Stored Print/Locked
1BInstallation
Print/Sample Print data in the hard disk.
2.41.3 HDD ENCRYPTION
Before You Begin the Procedure

Authentication]
procedure.
Tools]
Enable Encryption Setting

The data contained in the Address Book, authentication information, and stored documents can
be encrypted to prevent data leaks in case the hard disk is removed from the machine.
Once encryption is enabled, all data subsequently stored on the machine will be encrypted.
The encryption algorithm used in the machine is AES-256.
Setting Up Encryption
• This function is only available for the standard hard disk. If your machine is equipped
with the Enhanced Security HDD Option, data on the hard disk is always encrypted.
Therefore, this function can only encrypt the machine's NVRAM data.
• The machine cannot be operated while encrypting data, updating the encryption key,
or canceling encryption.
SM 2-333 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Security Setting
• The encryption process takes several hours. Once the encryption process starts, it
cannot be stopped.
When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data (initialize) or
encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to encrypt it.
3. Press "Settings" icon > [System Settings].
4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [File Management] > [Machine Data Encryption
Settings].
5. Press [Encrypt].
• If the data has been encrypted, you can decrypt the data, update the encryption Key,
or back up the data.
• Update Encryption Key: Encrypts data again and creates a new encryption Key.
• Cancel Encryption: Cancels encryption.
• Back Up Encryption Key: Makes a backup of the encryption key. The encryption
setting is not changed. Proceed to Step 7.
6. Select one of the options from among [All Data], [File System Data Only], and [Format All
Data] to encrypt the data.
• All Data: Encrypts all data.
• File System Data Only: The following data are encrypted or initialized:
• Data that are encrypted
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-334 SM
Security Setting
Program/log of the Embedded Software Architecture application, Address Book,

registered fonts, job logs, access logs, thumbnail images of stored documents,
sent/ received e-mail, documents transferred to the document management
server, files received by Mail to Print, spooled jobs
1BInstallation
• Data that are initialized
Stored documents (documents in the Document Server, documents related to
Locked Print/Sample Print/Stored Print/Hold Print, documents of fax stored
reception), registered data (stamps/forms)
• Format All Data: Initializes all data without encryption. The NVRAM data (memory
that remains even after the machine is turned off) will not be deleted (initialized).
7. Select the location to store the encryption key.
• Save to SD Card: Saves the encryption key to an SD card. Insert an SD card into the
media slot, and then press [Save to SD Card] > [OK].
• Print on Paper: Prints the encryption key on a sheet of paper. Press [Print on Paper] >
[Print].
8. Press [OK].
9. When the confirmation dialog is displayed, press [Exit].
10. Press [ ], and then log out of the machine.
11. Turn off the main power of the machine, and then turn it back on.
When the main power is turned on, the machine starts to convert the data on the memory.
Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off."
appears. After that, turn off the main power again.
Check the Encryption Settings
Settings].
4. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
Backing Up the Encryption Key

The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
SM 2-335 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Security Setting
• The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure
to store the encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.
Settings].
5. Press [Encrypt].
6. Select the location to store the encryption key.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of
the control panel and press [OK]. After the machine's data encryption key is backed up,
press [Exit].
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Print] key. Print out the machine's data
encryption key.
7. Press [Exit].
8. Log out.
Encryption Key Restoration

How to restore the old encryption key to the machine
The following message appears after the controller board(PCB18) is replaced. In such a case, it
is necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board(PCB18).
To do this, follow the procedure below.

1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as machine’s serial
number, “xxxxxxxxxxx” (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx“ folder. Write
the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
• Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been
printed out by the user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt"
file.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-336 SM
Security Setting

6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains
the encryption key.
7. Turn OFF the main power.
1BInstallation
8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
• The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on
the controller board(PCB18).
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key backup has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
• The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

• Encrypted data will be deleted.
• User settings will be cleared.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card. Then, save
the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
• Write this string at the head of the file.

• Use all lower-case letters.
• Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
• It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is
executed and the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
4. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains
the encryption key.
6. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
7. Turn ON the main power and the machine automatically clears the HDD encryption.
8. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
9. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 2.
11. Memory clear SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP5-801-001: All Clear and SP5-801-002: Engine),
and clear SP5-846-046: address book.
12. Set necessary user settings with the User Tools key.
SM 2-337 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
@Remote Settings
2.42 @REMOTE SETTINGS
• Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For
details, ask the @Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
1. The setting of SP5816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Print the SMC with SP5990-002 and then check if a device ID2 (SP5811-003) must be
correctly programmed.
• 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
• ID2 (SP5811-003) and the serial number (SP5811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
• Proxy server IP address (SP5816-063)
• Proxy server Port number (SP5816-064)
• Proxy User ID (SP5816-065)
• Proxy Password (SP5816-066)
4. Get a Request Number
Execute the @Remote Settings
2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then
enter [OK] with SP5816-202.
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
3 Communication error (proxy Check the network condition.
enabled)
disabled)
5 Proxy error (authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
8 Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.
9 Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-338 SM
@Remote Settings

20 Dial-up authentication error These errors occur only in the modems that
21 Answer tone detection error support @Remote.
22 Carrier detection error
1BInstallation
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line
5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816-205 only when it
has been input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5816-207.
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.
enabled)
disabled)
5 Proxy error (Authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
8 Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.
9 Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error These errors occur only in the modems that
21 Answer tone detection error support @Remote.
22 Carrier detection error
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line
8. Exit the SP mode.
SP5816-208 Error Codes: Caused by Operation Error, Incorrect Setting
Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
-12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without Obtain a Request Number before
acquiring Request No. attempting the Inquiry or
SM 2-339 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
@Remote Settings

Registration.
-12003 Attempted registration without execution of a Perform Confirmation before
confirmation and no previous registration. attempting the Registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for Check ID2 of the mainframe.
certification and ID2.
-12005 @Remote communication is prohibited. The Make sure that "Remote Service" in
device has an Embedded RC gate-related User Tools is set to "Do not
problem. prohibit".
-12006 A confirmation request was made after the Execute registration.
confirmation had been already completed.
-12007 The request number used at registration was Check Request No.
different from the one used at confirmation.
-12008 Update certification failed because Check the mainframe condition. If
mainframe was in use. the mainframe is in use, try again
later.
-12009 The ID2 in the NVRAM does not match the Check ID2 of the mainframe.
ID2 in the individual certification.
-12010 The certification area is not initialized. Initialize the certification area.
Error Caused by Response from GW URL
-2385 Other error
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for the same Check the registration condition of the
mainframe mainframe
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 External RCG not managed
-2394 Mainframe not managed
-2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal.
-2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is
illegal.
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe.
-2398 Incorrect request number format Check the Request No.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-340 SM
"Web Help Support" Settings
2.43 "WEB HELP SUPPORT" SETTINGS
2.43.1 OVERVIEW
1BInstallation
The Web Help Support function is a feature that assists users on the operation panel.
When a user encounters problems while operating the machine, the solution is displayed on the
operation panel, so they can attempt to resolve the problem themselves. By offering this
solution, we aim to reduce the number of calls, thereby improving the rate of self-resolution.
This function is available when the machine is connected to the Internet.
[A]: Tap "?" to display help contents
The Web Help Support function is preinstalled and enabled by default. Specify whether or not to
enable or disable the function in SP or UP mode.
2.43.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE WEB HELP SUPPORT

This function is enabled by default. If a customer is not willing to use this function, the function
can be disabled via UP and SP as follows:
UP setting
1. Enable machine administrator authentication and login as administrator.
2. Press "Settings" icon.
4. Press [Machine] > [Others] > [Support Settings].
5. Select [On] or [Off] for "Help Functions".
SP setting
1. Log in to Screen SP mode.
SM 2-341 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
"Web Help Support" Settings
2. Select "Screen Device Settings".
3. Select "Application Settings".
4. Select "Settings" for “Support Settings”.
5. Enable or disable Help Functions.
If this function is disabled in SP mode (5-828-091(Network Setting Web)), the function in

the UP setting menu will not be displayed.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-342 SM
"RemoteConnect Support" Settings
2.44 "REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT" SETTINGS
2.44.1 OVERVIEW
1BInstallation
The RemoteConnect Support function allows monitoring and remote control of the customer’s
machine’s operation panel.
• Allow a customer support operator to remotely connect with client's machine equipped with
the Smart Operation panel (SOP-G2), or PC over the internet.
• Enable the support center to diagnose and resolve the issue through real-time screen
sharing, remote guidance, and operation.
Previously, to avoid security concerns, the function was disabled by default. However, this has
changed and the application is now enabled by default on machines produced since September
2018. (This setting is enabled by default on the current model.)
So, it’s necessary to confirm with customers whether enabling the remote function is acceptable.
If after explaining the function and benefits, the customer does not agree, then disable it via SP
mode.
2.44.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT

2. Select "Screen Device Settings".
SM 2-343 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
3. Select "Application Settings".
4. Select "Settings" in "RemoteSupportService" and check "Service availability".
• The application is enabled by default on machines produced from August 2018.

• The setting is located in RemoteSupport Service. However, the name of the
settings menu is RemoteConnect Support settings,
You can find “RemoteConnectSupport” in the applications list, however, it does
not have any settings. Be sure to open the settings of “RemoteSupportService”.
5. Confirm if a connection can be established.

To confirm if RemoteConnect Support is working properly, open the application from the
"Check Status" menu or by pressing down on the status bar on the Smart Operation Panel
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-344 SM
for over five seconds.

After pressing down for over five seconds, stop pressing on the panel and RemoteConnect
Support will open.
1BInstallation
If setup was done correctly, four digits will be displayed on the panel. If the setup was not
done correctly, the four digits will not be displayed.
RemoteConnect Service needs an Internet connection, so the following error message

might appear after long-pressing the status bar if an Internet connection is not detected. To
check the connection, open the web browser in Smart Operation Panel and navigate to a
webpage to confirm that the machine is connected to the Internet.
• If the browser cannot load webpages, check the network settings such as IP address
and proxy settings.
SM 2-345 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
2.44.3 UNINSTALLING REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT

Some customers might ask for this feature to be disabled because of security precautions. In
many cases, disabling RemoteConnect Support should be sufficient.
However, if a customer asks for RemoteConnect Support to be completely uninstalled, remove
it by conducting the following procedure:
2. Select Apps > Install.
3. Select Uninstall for the following two applications:
Firmware Type Part Number Version
RemoteConnectSupport D2411470A 1.0.5
RemoteSupportService D1961459A 1.0.1
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-346 SM
"Remote Panel Operation" Settings
2.45 "REMOTE PANEL OPERATION" SETTINGS
2.45.1 OVERVIEW
1BInstallation
Remote Panel Operation will be preinstalled in models that have Smart Operation Panel G2.5.
This is a built-in function.
With the Web Image Monitor, you can view and operate the operation panels of devices on the
same network. For example, in a large company, the machine administrator can use the remote
control to check for errors, operate machines, and change settings to provide support and
manage machines easily.
[A]: Smart Operation Panel G2.5

[B]: Web browser
[C]: IT manager/ administrator
• Eliminating a trip to device
• Reducing end user's wait time
Usage
• Remote Panel Operation enables the IT manager or in-house help desk staff to remotely
view and operate the Smart Operation Panel G2 screen through a Web UI.
• It can be used to provide real-time interactive user support and also facilitate customer
training.
Startup
1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as the administrator.
SM 2-347 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
"Remote Panel Operation" Settings
2. Click [Device Management] > [Remote Panel Operation]
Notes
• When connected by the Remote Panel Operation function, the machine does not
automatically switch to Sleep mode, and the Auto Logout and System Auto Reset functions
do not operate.
• You cannot connect to a single unit from multiple computers and operate it by the Remote
Panel Operation function.
• The Remote Panel Operation function is supported by Internet Explorer 11 and later
versions, Google Chrome 62 and later versions, Firefox 56 and later versions, and
Microsoft Edge 40 and later versions.
About the Settings
• This function has been preinstalled. (Its icon does not appear on the operation panel.)
• For security reasons, the settings have not been specified by default. Enable or disable
each setting according to the customer’s request.
2.45.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE REMOTE PANEL

OPERATION/MONITORING
1. Enable machine administrator authentication and login as administrator.
2. Press the "Settings" icon on the Home screen.
4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [Remote Panel Operation].
5. Select [Active] or [Inactive] for "Remote Operation/Monitoring”.
• “Remote Operation/Monitoring” Functions is disabled by default. When it is disabled,

Remote Panel Operation is not displayed in the Web Image Monitor.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 2-348 SM
User Instructions
2.46 USER INSTRUCTIONS
2.46.1 OPERATION GUIDANCE FOR USERS
1BInstallation
Function/Operation Instruction to provide
Basic machine functions, • How to load the toner bottle and toner collection bottle
operations • How to load paper and other consumables/supplies
• How to turn the main power switch ON/OFF
• How to clear paper jams
• How to program, modify, and delete Address Book entries
• How to customize the UI and home screen
• Overview of machine options/peripherals
• How to take the proper action for SC errors (clearing the error,
contacting service and support, etc.), how to interpret @Remote
notifications
• Setting up ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware Update).
• Important notes to keep in mind whenever moving the machine
• Product limitations
Copier • Basic Copier operations
• How to load an original in the ARDF or place it on the exposure
glass for scanning
• How to use thick paper and other specialized paper/media
• How to configure the Copier main screen (duplex/simplex, auto
color selection, User Codes, etc.)
• Basic Document Server operations
Fax (when installed) • How to send a fax (Memory Transmission, Direct Transmission)
Printer (when installed) • How to install printer drivers (using the recommended method)
• How to connect to a PC (performing the port settings)
• How to print out a test page
• Overview of various settings inside each tab in the printer driver
(e.g. duplex printing)
Scanner (when installed) • How to install scanner drivers (using the recommended method)
• How to connect to a PC and perform a test scan
SM 2-349 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PM Tables
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 PM TABLES
2BPreventive
Maintenance
The amounts mentioned (K=1,000) as the PM interval indicate the number of prints or copies
unless stated otherwise. These numbers are based on the PM counter.
Symbol Key
Letter Meaning
AN As Necessary, or at scheduled maintenance
C Clean
EM Emergency Maintenance
Exp Expected service life
I Inspect
L Lubricate
R Replace
U User
S Service
• Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord before performing any procedure
in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
3.1.1 MAIN MACHINE
Scanner Optics
Item BY 300K AN Note
1st, 2nd, 3rd Mirror S C C Optics cloth
Contact Glass S/U C C Damp cloth
Scanner Guide Rails (both S C CL After cleaning with alcohol, lubricate with
sides) Launa Oil.
Toner Shield Glass S C Optics cloth
Around the Drum

Item BY 300K 450K 1200K 4500K AN Exp. Note
Dust Filters S C C Blower brush
Charge S C C Damp cloth
Corona
Casing
Charge S R 300K Blower brush
PM Tables
Item BY 300K 450K 1200K 4500K AN Exp. Note

Corona Grid
Charge S R 300K When replacing the charge
Corona Wire corona wire, check if
foreign objects are not
attached on it.
Charge Wire S R 300K
Cleaning Pad
Cleaning S R 300K
Filter
Drum S 1200K Always apply setting
powder to new drum.
Dust Filter S R C
(intake)
ID Sensor S C C Blower brush
Ozone Filter S C C Blower brush
Replace when an overhaul
is performed.
PTL S C C Dry cloth, PTL case
Pick-off Pawl S IC IC Dry cloth
Brackets
Pick-off Pawls S IC IC Replace if damaged.
Potential S C C Blower brush
Sensor
Quenching S C C Dry cloth
Lamp
Transfer S C C Dry cloth
Entrance Stay
PTL stay [A] can be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner because there is no sensors and only the
quenching lamp is installed on it.
PM Tables
• Replace the dust filter and the cleaning web together.
Drum Cleaning
2BPreventive
Maintenance
Item BY 300K 450K AN Exp. Note
Cleaning Blade S R 300K Dry cloth
Cleaning Brush S R 300K Poor blade cleaning causes distorted
images.
Cleaning Entrance S IC Inspect for cracks, fissures. Dry cloth
Seal
Cleaning Unit S C Dry cloth
Casing The cleaning unit can be cleaned with a
vacuum cleaner.
Side Seals S C Dry cloth
Toner Collection U IR Replace when bottle full is detected.
Bottle
Toner Pan S C C Dry cloth
Development Unit
Item BY 300K 600K AN Note
Developer S R When replacing the developer, perform
developer initial settings.
Development Filter S R Inspect the gaps between filter and casing after
cleaning or replacement and confirm that they
are tight.
Development S C Sleeve cleaning at bending part of paper
Roller
Development S C C Remove the toner from the development roller
Roller Drive Shaft drive shaft with adhesive tape. (Use not powerful
one. e.g. Teflon tape)
Check if the developer and toner are not
attached on the shaft and adhesive agents of the
tape are also not left on the shaft.
Development Unit S C C Dry cloth
Casing
Entrance Seal S C C Blower brush
Pressure Release S IC IC Remove toner collected inside duct
Duct
Side Seals S C C Blower brush
PM Tables
Item BY 300K 600K AN Note

Toner Bottle Gear S C C Blower brush
Toner Bottle Holder S C C Dry cloth
Remove toner from the toner bottle holder.
Toner Hopper S C C Dry cloth
Toner Trap S C C Dry cloth
Used Toner S R Remove toner from the toner trap with dry cloth.
Separation Unit
Paper Feed: Main Paper Path

Registration Rollers S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Relay Rollers S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Paper Dust Mylar S C C Dry cloth
Registration Sensor S C C Blower brush
Relay Sensor S C C Blower brush
Bypass Paper End S C C Blower brush
Sensor
Bypass Paper Length S C C Blower brush
Sensor
Feed Roller (By-Pass S - R When jams or double-feed occurrence frequency is
Tray) increasing, replace the roller.
Pick-up Roller (By-Pass S - R When jams or double-feed occurrence frequency is
Tray) increasing, replace the roller.
Separation Roller S - R When jams or double-feed occurrence frequency is
(By-Pass Tray) increasing, replace the roller.
Paper Feed: Paper Trays

Feed Rollers 1, 2, 3 S When jams or double-feed occurrence frequency is
increasing, replace the rollers.
Grip Drive Rollers, S C Alcohol damp cloth
Idle Rollers
Paper End Sensors 1, S C Blower brush
2, 3
Paper Feed Guide S C Dry cloth
Plate
Paper Feed Sensors S C Blower brush
1, 2, 3
PM Tables

Pick-up Rollers 1, 2, 3 S R When jams or double-feed occurrence frequency is
Separation Rollers S R When jams or double-feed occurrence frequency is
2BPreventive
Maintenance
Vertical Transport S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Sensor
Transfer Belt Unit

Item BY 300K 600K AN Exp. Note
Transfer Belt S R 600K Do not use alcohol damp cloth.
Dry cloth
Transfer Bias S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Roller (Combination of heat roller cleaner, damp
cloth and dry cloth is also available, if water
can be wiped out by that.)
Transfer S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Cleaning Roller
Transfer Drive S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Transfer S C C Dry cloth
Entrance Guide
Plate
Transfer Exit S C C Dry cloth
Guide Plate
Transfer Idle S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Transfer Roller S R 600K Dry cloth
Cleaning Blade
• Replace transfer belt and transfer roller cleaning blade together.
Fusing Unit and Paper Exit

Item By 300K 450K AN Exp. Note
Cleaning Web S R 450K Replace at near-end alert.
PM Tables
Item By 300K 450K AN Exp. Note

Cleaning Web S R 450K
Pressure Roller
Bearings
Cleaning Web S R 450K
Pressure Roller
Fusing Entrance S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Guide Plate
Fusing Exit Guide S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Plate
Fusing Lamps S I C Inspect when the hot roller is replaced.
Hot Roller S R 450K
Hot Roller S R 450K
Bearings
Hot Roller S C R C 450K
Strippers
Pressure S R 450K
Cleaning Roller
Bearings
Pressure Roller S R 450K After replacing the pressure roller, perform
test print using A3 or DLT, and then check
if fusing is performed evenly and paper is
not crinkled.
Pressure Roller S R 450K
Bearings
Pressure Roller S R 450K
Cleaning Roller
Thermistor (end) S R 450K
Thermistor S C C If the thermistor is dirty, clean the surface
(center) with cloth.
Ratchet: pressure S R 450K
roller
• Replace Hot Roller and Hot Roller Stripper together.

• Replace Cleaning WEB and Dust Filter together.
• Replace Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearing together.
• Replace Cleaning WEB Pressure Roller, Cleaning WEB Pressure Roller Ratchet, Plain
Shaft Front Bearing, and Plain Shaft Inner Back Bearing together.
• Replace the thermistor (end) and the hot roller together.
PM Tables
• Replace the pressure cleaning roller and the pressure cleaning roller bearings
together.
Fusing Unit Paper Exit
2BPreventive
Maintenance
De-Curler Rollers S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Exit Static Discharge Brush S C C Dry cloth
Exit Rollers S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Transport Rollers S C C Alcohol damp cloth
Duplex
Entrance Sensor S C C Blower brush
Reverse Trigger Rollers S C C Dry cloth
Duplex Turn Roller S C C Dry cloth
Transport Rollers S C C Dry cloth
Inverter Entrance Roller S C C Alcohol
Entrance Anti-Static Brush S C C Dry cloth
Reverse Junction Gate S C C Dry cloth
ADF
The PM interval is for the number of originals that have been fed.
Item 120K AN Note
CIS exit roller C Alcohol damp cloth, then water damp cloth
CIS glass C Wipe with clean cloth and Ricoh contact glass cleaner
(A1939310).
Driver rollers C Alcohol damp cloth, then water damp cloth
Exit roller C Alcohol damp cloth, then water damp cloth
Exit sensor C Blower brush
Feed belt*1 R C Damp cloth, water or alcohol
Interval sensor C Blower brush
Original size sensors C Blower brush
Paper drive gear C Blower brush
Pick-up roller*1 R C Damp cloth
Platen C Blower brush
Registration sensor C Blower brush
Relay roller C Lubricate with EM-50L grease for resin base material.
Scan entrance roller C Alcohol damp cloth, then water damp cloth
PM Tables
Item 120K AN Note

Scan exit roller C Alcohol damp cloth, then water damp cloth
Scan reverse side C Alcohol damp cloth, then water damp cloth
roller
Separation roller*1 R C Damp cloth
Separation sensor C Blower brush
Skew correction C Blower brush
sensor
Transport roller C Alcohol damp cloth, then water damp cloth
White guide plate C Alcohol damp cloth, then water damp cloth
*1 Pick-up roller, feed roller, and separation roller should always be replaced together as a set.
Others
Item BY 1200K AN Exp. Note
Fine Particle Filter*1 S R 1200K
*1 EU: IM 7000/ IM 8000 only
3.1.2 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES
LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)

300K 450K 1000K Exp. Note
Pick-up R 1000 Always replace these rollers as a set. The target
Roller service life of the feed, pick-up, and separation
Feed Roller R 1000 rollers is 1000 K. However, they should be
Separation R 1000 replaced sooner if the machine begins to jam or
Roller double-feed
Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 (DC3N) (for 2K/3K Finishers)

The cover interposer tray can be used with the Finisher SR4150 (D3HB), or Booklet Finisher
SR4160 (D3HC). The interposer tray is installed between the main machine and the finisher.
Note: The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed.
Feed Belt R R R Replace as a set.
Pick-up Roller R R R
Separation Roller R R R
Driver Rollers C C C Damp clean cloth.
Idle Rollers C C C Damp clean cloth.
PM Tables

Discharge Brush C C C Damp clean cloth.
Sensors C C C Blower brush.
2BPreventive
Maintenance
Drive rollers I I I Alcohol
Idle rollers I I I
Discharge brush I I I
Bushings I I I Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
Sensors I I I Blow brush.
Jogger fences I I I Make sure screws are tight.
Staple waste hopper C C C Empty staple waste.

300K 500K 1000K 3000K Exp. Note
Drive Rollers C Damp cloth, dry cloth
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth, dry cloth
Anti-Static C Dry cloth
Brush
Roller Shafts C Lubricate bushings with silicone oil,
other bushings with Launa oil.
Sensors C Blower brush
Corner R 3000K Print an SMC report with SP5990.
Stapler Replace the unit if the staple count is
500K.
Booklet R 1000K Print an SMC report with SP5990.
Stapler Replace the unit if the staple count is
200K.
Positioning R 3000K This is a sponge roller.
Roller

This punch unit is installed in the Finisher SR4150 (D3HB), Booklet Finisher SR4160 (D3HC).
2400K 3000K 4000K EM Note
Punch Waste Hopper I I I I Remove and empty
Punch Unit C Replace after 1000k punches.
PM Tables

Part PM Visit Notes
Rollers (drive, idle rollers) I/C Alcohol, clean cloth
Anti-static brush I/C
Shafts I/C Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
Sensors I/C Blower brush
Positioning roller I/C Inspect for scratches or nicks
Fold rollers (1st, 2nd, 3rd) I/C Alcohol, clean cloth
Crease rollers (drive, idle roller) I/C
Related SP Codes
This is a list of the PM related SP codes.
SP7803 PM Counter Display Displays the PM count since the last PM.
SP7804 PM Counter Reset Resets the PM count.
Image Quality Tables
3.2 IMAGE QUALITY TABLES
3.2.1 CHECKING IMAGE QUALITY
2BPreventive
Maintenance
Resolution
Standard 1:1/Enlargement: 4.5 lines/mm or more
Reduction: 4.5 x M or more mag.
What You S-2-1 Chart
Need
Method
Resolution measured after copying in Text Mode at AE5 notch with Normal
Paper
Even Density
Standard Left, right grayscale within 0.1 at 0.2 to 0.6
Need
Method
Right, left density measured after copying in Text Mode at AE5 notch with
Normal Paper.
Magnification Errors
Standards 1:1 Main scan: <±0.5%, Sub scan: <±0.8%
Magnification Main scan: <±1.0%, Sub scan: <±1.0%
What You Need 150 mm scale
Method
1. Set two scales on the exposure glass, and then copy them.
2. Wait at least 10 min. after the paper exits.
3. Measure 100 mm on the copied images with the actual scale.
Magnification Error Variation

Standard 1:1/Mag.: Sub scan (horizontal, vertical) less than 1.0%
What You 150 mm scale
Need
Method
1. Place three 150 mm scales on the exposure glass, and then copy them.
3. Use a scale to measure 100 mm against each scale image (x1, x2, x3) on the
paper.
4. Determine the maximum and minimum deviation (%) from the standard.
5. Calculate the difference between the maximum and minimum deviation.
Notes
• For example, if the three measurements of the scales are 100.4 mm, 99.5 mm,
100.2 mm, then the difference between the maximum and minimum values is
0.9 mm (100.4 – 99.5).
• Set the scales in the main scan direction (horizontal), copy them, and then use
the same method to determine the variation
• For best results, using at least three scales is recommended.
• If you have only one scale, then you can make three copies with the scale at
different positions.
• Please remember that line speed may vary slightly depending on the number
of copies in a job.
2BPreventive
Maintenance
Paper Transfer Quality Standards
3.3 PAPER TRANSFER QUALITY STANDARDS
3.3.1 REGISTRATION
Standard: Main Machine
Simplex Engine Sub scan 0±0.5 mm
Copy Sub scan 0±1.5 mm
Duplex Engine Sub scan 0±0.5 mm
Copy Sub scan 0±1.5 mm
Standard: Main Machine + ADF
Copy Paper (40 to 128 g/m2)
Front Side Reverse Side
Plotter 0±0.5 mm 0±0.5 mm
With ADF
Front A3 to A5 Main scan 0±1.0 mm 0±2.5 mm 0±2.5 mm
Sub scan 0±2.0 mm 0±1.5 mm 0±1.5 mm
Reverse A3 to A5 Main scan 0±3.0 mm 0±3.5 mm 0±3.5 mm
Sub scan 0±1.0 mm 0±1.5 mm 0±1.5 mm
What You S-2-1 Chart, 150 mm scale

Need
Method
1. Make a 1:1 copy of the S-2-1 chart with normal paper.

2. Use the scale to measure the registration marks at the leading edge.
3. The range is vertical registration A: 5 mm, and horizontal registration B: 4
mm for the front side.
3.3.2 SKEW
Standard: Main Machine
2BPreventive
Maintenance
Function Specification Feed Length
Simplex Engine Less than 0±0.5 mm/200 mm More than 270 mm
Less than 0±0.5 mm/100 mm Up to 279 mm
Copy Less than 0±1.0 mm/200 mm More than 270 mm
Duplex Engine Less than 0±0.5 mm/200 mm More than 270 mm
Copy Less than 0±1.0 mm/200 mm More than 270 mm
Standard: Main Machine + ADF
Plotter Copy Paper (40 to 128 g/m2)
Front Side (mm) Reverse Side (mm)
More than 279 Up to 279 More than 279 Up to 279
±0.5 mm/200 ±0.5 mm/100 ±0.5 mm/200 ±0.5 mm/100
ADF: Copy Paper (40 to 128 g/m2)
Front Side (mm) Reverse Side (mm)
Front Main scan: ±2.0/200 ±2.5/200 ±2.0/200 ±2.5/200
±1.5 mm/200 mm
Sub scan: ±1.5/200 ±2.0/200 ±1.5/200 ±2.0/200
±1.0 mm/200 mm
Reverse Main scan: 2.5/200 3.0/200 2.5/200 3.0/200
±2.0 mm/200 mm
What You S-2-1 Chart, 150 mm scale

Need
Method
1. Make a 1:1 copy of the S-2-1 chart with normal paper.

2. Use the scale to measure the left and right registration marks at the leading
edge.
3.3.3 LCIT
Registration Leading edge registration 0±2 mm (±1 mm variation per job)
Horizontal registration 0±2 mm
Skew A4 SEF, LT SEF and larger 0±1/200 mm
B5 SEF and smaller 0±1/100 mm
3.3.4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY

Horizontal registration 0±2 mm
Skew A4 LEF, B5 LEF 0±0.63/100 mm
A3, B4 0±0.83/100 mm
PM Parts Settings
3.4 PM PARTS SETTINGS
3.4.1 BEFORE REMOVING OLD PM PARTS
2BPreventive
Maintenance
2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5990-004.
3. Press the PM parts counter reset button in the PM Parts display before you turn the power
off.
• After the PM count for the fusing cleaning web and the drum lubricant bar expire, the
machine stops automatically.
• After replacing developer, the count is cleared by executing SP3024-001 (Developer
Filling), so there is no need to perform a counter clear.
3.4.2 AFTER INSTALLING NEW PM PARTS

1. Turn on the main power switch. The machine will reset the PM counts automatically and
initialize default SP code settings.
2. Check the "Initial Adjustment SP Lists". Refer to this list if any SP must be set manually
after a part replacement.
3. Output the SMC logging data with SP5990-004 and check the counter values.
4. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced parts are "0" in the PM parts display. If the
PM counter for a unit has not been reset to zero, reset that counter again.
Notes on Replacing the Parts
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 NOTES ON REPLACING THE PARTS
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
When replacing parts, use the parts registered in P/C, and replace or use them in the unit of
supply.
If the rule is not observed, machine's function and quality may deteriorate.
Power Switch
4.2 POWER SWITCH
4.2.1 PUSH SWITCH

The power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch from the
conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different
from the rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch (PCB14))

1. Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power switch is turned OFF.
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord
is connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board (PCB18), the
operation unit and other modules even when the main power is turned OFF. When
replacing the controller board (PCB18) and the operation unit in this state, not only these
boards, it will damage other electrical components.
In 100V models, only one of the AC lines for the fusing unit is shut off when you turn off the
main power; the other line carries current even when you turn off the main power switch.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning off
the main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord.
2. When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine
there is still residual charge.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine for a
while there is still residual charge. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can
cause a blown fuse or memory failure.
In order to discharge this residual charge inside the machine after you unplug the power
cord from the AC wall outlet, press the main power switch. The residual charge in the
machine is discharged, so it is safe to remove the boards.
3. When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start
automatically.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch while you disconnect
the AC power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore,
after you finish work on the machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you
do not press the main power switch, the machine will start automatically and the moving
parts will begin to move.
• When working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get
caught.
• Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC
Power Switch
power cord or unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after
the resumption of power, the machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does
not start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
timing of releasing the residual charge. If you press the main power switch while the
t and
residual charge was already released, the power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start
the machine manually by pressing the main power switch.
Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch [A] on the front of the machine.
2. Take out the power cord

3. Wait 3 minutes (this is the time required if you will remove the rear cover and access the
interior of the machine, to take out the controller board for example).
4. After you remove the rear covers, if you see any PCB LEDs flashing, this means there is
residual current on the boards, wait until the LEDs go off.
When the shutdown is complete:
Main power LED: Off
Operation panel LED: Off
• How to start from shutdown

• To start the machine, press the main power switch. However, if you press the main
power switch between the beginning and the end of a shutdown, the machine will not
start.
Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced
shutdown function.
To execute a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
Power Switch
• Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to
the machine.
• Do forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.
Before You Begin
4.3 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
• Before servicing the machine, always turn the machine off and disconnect the power
t and
cord.
• After replacing parts, make sure that all removed harnesses are connected again and
secured in their clamps.
• Never turn off the machine while the machine is operating.

• If the machine is switched off during operation, the transfer belt, drum, or development
unit could be damaged when it is removed or reinstalled.
4.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Drum
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drum is more sensitive to light and ammonia gas than a
selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a minute.
3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is touched with a
finger or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton. Wipe with a dry
cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
6. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily damaged.
7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when keeping the drum unit, or the drum
itself, out of the machine. Doing so avoids exposing it to bright light or direct sunlight, and
will protect it from light fatigue.
9. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.
10. When installing a new drum, execute SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
Drum Unit
1. Before pulling out the drum unit, place a sheet of paper under the drum unit to catch any
spilt toner.
2. Make sure that the drum unit is set in position and the drum stay is secured with the screw
before the main switch is turned on.
3. If the drum unit is loose, poor contact of the drum connectors may cause electrical noise,
resulting in unexpected malfunctions (RAM data change is the worst case).
Before You Begin
4. To avoid scratching the drum, always remove the development unit before removing the
drum unit.
Transfer Belt Unit

1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged.
3. Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of the transfer
belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.
Scanner Unit
1. When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the white dot is at the rear upper left
corner.
2. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or glass cleaner to reduce the amount of static
electricity on the glass surface.
3. Use a cotton pad with water or a blower brush to clean the mirrors and lens.
4. Never bend or crease an exposure lamp cable.
5. Never disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and the copy image out of
focus.
6. Never adjust any of the CCD positioning screws. These screws are paint-locked and
should never be removed.
Laser Unit
1. Never loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. Doing so
would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Never adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the factory.
3. Never open the optical housing unit. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very
sensitive to dust
4. Never touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment. Otherwise, an SC condition
will be generated.
Charge Corona
1. Clean the corona wires with a dry cloth. Never use sandpaper or an organic solvent.
2. Clean the charge corona casing with water first to remove NOx based compounds. Then
clean it with alcohol if any toner still remains on the casing.
3. Clean the end block with a blower brush first to remove toner and paper dust. Then clean
with alcohol if any toner still remains.
4. Never touch the corona wires with bare hands. Oil stains from fingers can cause uneven
image density on copies.
Before You Begin
5. Confirm that the wires are correctly installed between the cleaner pads and that there is no
foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing.
6. When installing new corona wires, never bend or scratch the wire surface. Doing so may
cause uneven charge. Also be sure that the corona wires are correctly positioned in the
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
end blocks.
t and
7. Clean the grid plate with a blower brush (not with a dry cloth).
8. Never touch the charge grid plate with bare hands. Also, do not bend the charge grid plate
or make any dent in it. Doing so may cause uneven charge.
Development
1. Work carefully to avoid nicking or scratching the development roller.
2. Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from the machine.
3. Never disassemble the development roller assembly. The position of the doctor plate is set
with special tools and instruments at the factory to ensure the proper gap between the
doctor blade and the development roller.
4. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
5. Dispose of used developer in accordance with local environmental laws and regulations.
6. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than specified for
this model. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner scatter.
7. Immediately after installing new developer, the TD sensor (S2) initial setting procedure
should be done with SP2801 (TD Sensor (S2) Initialization) to avoid damage to the
machine.
8. Never do the TD sensor (S2) initial setting with used developer. Do not make any copies
before doing the TD sensor (S2) initial setting.
9. When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing, always ground the
casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor with static electricity.
10. When replacing the TD sensor (S2), replace the developer, then execute SP2801 (TD
Sensor Initialization) and SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
Cleaning
1. When servicing the cleaning section, be careful not to damage the edge of the cleaning
blade.
2. Do not touch the cleaning blade with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling the cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to catch any
toner falling from it.
Fusing Unit
1. After installing the end thermistor, make sure that it is in contact with the hot roller.
2. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their tension springs.
Before You Begin
3. Never touch a fusing lamp or fusing roller with bare hands.

4. Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch the inner
surface of the hot roller.
Paper Feed
1. Avoid touching the surfaces of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers when replacing
them.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fence of the paper tray must be
positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.
Used Toner
1. We recommend checking the amount of used toner at every EM.
2. Always dispose of used toner in accordance with local environmental lawys and
regulations.
3. Used toner is flammable. Never incinerate used toner.
4.3.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR THIS MACHINE
Inner Covers
1. Each inner cover has one or more LEDs at critical locations in the paper path. An LED
lights when a paper jam occurs at that location.
2. To avoid breaking LED connectors or harnesses, be careful about inner cover removal.
Before You Begin
3. After the screws are removed, the cover should be pulled away partially so the LED can be
disconnected before the cover is pulled away completely.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Proximity Sensor (PCB13)
1. As soon as the new proximity sensor (PCB13) detects the presence of the operator in front
of the machine, it will prepare the machine to accelerate the recovery from low power
mode..
2. This sensor works on the principle of detection of body heat. The sensitivity of the detection
device is affected by both ambient temperature and the amount and type of clothing worn
by the operator.
PSU Precautions
PSU (PCB23) High Voltage Applied Part

High voltage is applied to the inside parts of the red frames on the picture below.
Do not touch the parts during power supply.
When about 3 minutes have elapsed after the power plug is disconnected, the voltage of the
block condenser will decrease to 20V or less.
Before You Begin
Before the PSU (PCB23) is attached, disconnect the power plug and wait for about 3 minutes.
• To avoid personal injury, always handle the PSU (PCB23) by its edges.
• Never touch the back of the board.
• Some of the soldered contacts are extremely sharp and can cut or puncture your
fingers if you grip the back of the board.
Here is a summary of the amount of residual voltage on the PSU (PCB23) condensers after the
machine is switched off and unplugged from the power source. The residual charge is designed
to make the machine recover faster from the Energy Save Mode.
Address Power off* 1min. 2min. 5min. 1hr.
C010,C011 340V 200V 80V 16V 15V
Before You Begin
* At time just after the machine is unplugged.

The photo below shows the danger zone, and the location and address of each condenser
where residual charge remains.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.3.3 IMPORTANT SP CODES: MACHINE INFORMATION,
SERVICING
Here are quick summaries of SP codes that give you useful information about the machine, and
some common SP codes you will need during maintenance.
Machine Information
Item SP Function
No.
Auto process control 3901 Displays whether auto process control is switched on or off
(Default: On)
CIS ID 4700 Reads and displays the ID of the CIS board at power on.
Drum potential after 3902-7 Displays the drum potential after quenching.
quenching (Vql)
Firmware version 7801 Displays ROM number and firmware information for main
machine and all other connected devices.
Fusing temperature 1106 Displays the fusing temperature at the center and end of the
display hot roller, and temperature of the pressure roller.
ID sensor pattern 3902-6 Displays Vid, the latest drum surface voltage measured on the
potential ID sensor pattern.
LD level 3902-5 Displays the LD power correction value as a result of the latest
Vh adjustment.
Machine serial number 5811 Use this SP to display the serial number for the machine and
BICU.
ROM number 7801 Displays ROM number and firmware information for main
machine and all other connected devices.
SC history 7403 Displays the following information about the most recently
Before You Begin
Item SP Function
No.
issued SC code: Source file name, SC number, Result
SMC report, print 5990 The SMC report can display all the current settings in the
machine, as well as logged SC codes that do not show on the
operation panel.
SMC report, text file 5992 Writes the SMC report to an SD card inserted into the SD card
slot on the side of the operation panel.
Self-diagnostic 7832 Displays a list of error codes, if errors have occurred.
Otherwise, nothing is displayed.
Temperature, fusing 1106 Displays the hot roller temperature at center and ends, and
pressure roller temperature.
Temperature, machine 2913 Displays the internal temperature of the machine.
Vd 3902-2 Displays drum dark potential, the standard potential, electrical
potential of the black areas after exposure.
Vg 3902-4 Displays the charge grid voltage resulting from the latest Vd
adjustment.
Vh 3902-3 Displays standard halftone drum potential, used for laser
power adjustment. Creation of the Vh pattern is turned on/off
with SP2950.
Vl 3902-7 Shows the standard electrical potential of white areas on the
drum after exposure.
Commonly Used During Servicing
Item SP Function
No.
Forced 2207 Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner supply unit. Use to
toner determine if toner supply is operating correctly. If forcing toner supply with
supply this SP does not darken the image, then toner supply is not operating
correctly.
Free run 5802 Forces the base engine to run in free run mode for testing.
Fusing SC 5810 Fusing unit SC errors disable the machine until the problem is corrected.
clear Execute CE reset by entering and exiting the SP mode, and then power
cycle the machine.
Input check 5803 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches.
Output 5804 Switches electrical components on/off one by one for testing.
check
Scanner 4802 Executes a scanner free run with and without the LEDs on
free run
Test pattern 2902 Produces the printer test patterns.
Before You Begin
Item SP Function
No.
printing
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Special Tools and Lubricants
4.4 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
4.4.1 SPECIAL TOOLS

Part No. Description
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set)
A2929500 Test Chart - OS-A3 (10 pcs/set)
B6455020 SD-CARD:SERVICE:1GB
A2579300 Grease - Barrierta S552R
52039502 Silicon Grease G-501
B0649500 Test Chart for CIS
B2348614 Setting Powder
4.4.2 LUBRICANTS
Part No. Description
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – JFE 5 5/2
52039502 Silicon Grease G-501
54429101 Setting Powder
Covers
4.5 COVERS
4.5.1 FRONT DOOR
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
2. At [A] locate the hinge bracket plunger [B].
3. While supporting the door with one hand, press the hinge plunger [A] down to release the
door, and then pull the door [B] slightly away from the corner of the machine.
Covers
4. Disconnect the brackets [A] at the bottom of the door and pull it away from the machine.
4.5.2 RIGHT COVERS
Right Upper Cover

1. Remove the LCIT entrance guide cover [A].
2. Disconnect the right upper cover [B].
3. Open bypass tray [A].
Covers
4. Pull the right upper cover [B] down and away from the machine.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Close the bypass tray.
To re-attach right upper cover

1. First, insert the tabs at the front edge [A] and rear edge [B] of the tray into the slots of the
frame.
2. Open the bypass tray [A].

3. Position the cover over the bypass tray.
Covers
4. Slide the top edge of the cover [B] under the edges of the covers [C] above.
Right Lower Cover

1. Disconnect the cover.
2. Lift the cover slightly and pull it away.
To re-attach the right lower cover
Covers
1. Insert the front tab [1] and rear tab [2] into the holes of the cross-stay, and then set the
cover.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.5.3 REAR COVERS
Rear Upper Cover

1. Locate the three shoulder screws at the bottom edge of the cover.
3. Remove the rear upper cover [A].
Covers
Rear Lower Cover

1. Locate the two shoulder screws at the bottom edge of the cover.
3. Remove the screws at each upper corner of the cover.
4. Remove the cover.
Covers
4.5.4 LEFT COVERS
Left Upper Cover

3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
2. On the rear edge of the cover [A] disconnect the tab from its post.
Covers
3. Disconnect the tabs on the side.
To re-attach the left upper cover:

1. First, engage the tab and post [A] at the rear edge of the cover.
Covers
2. At the front, set the cover so it will slide up under the edge [A] of the covers above.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Set the tabs into knockouts on the cross-stay [A].
4. Re-attach the screws.
Left Lower Cover

2. Lift the bottom edge slightly.
Covers
3. Pull the cover away.
4.5.5 CONTROLLER BOX COVER PLATE

Many procedures require that you open the controller box plate so you can access the BICU
(PCB11), controller board (PCB18), and HDD.
2. Remove the controller box plate [A].
Re-assembly
1. Set the bottom edge of the cover plate on the front bottom edge of the controller box.
2. Make sure that all the metal tabs line up with their holes on the frame.
Covers
3. Press the plate against the box, and then slide it to the left.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Check the tabs and make sure that they are inserted in their holes.
4.5.6 CONTROLLER BOX

Many procedures require that you open the controller box so you can access the back of the
machine.
1. Remove the rear upper covers. Rear Upper Cover
2. Disconnect left bracket [A], and then remove bracket with I/F cable attached.
3. Disconnect harness [B] connector and clamp.
4. Free harness [C] from its clamps.
5. Disconnect the edge of the controller box [A].
Covers
6. Lift the handle [A] off of its hook on top of the box, and then pull the controller box [B]
toward you.
4.5.7 IOB BRACKET

Some procedures require that you access the components behind the IOB (PCB1). You do not
have to remove the IOB (PCB1). The IOB support bracket is set on hinges so it can swing open
to the left.
1. Remove the rear upper covers. Rear Upper Cover
2. Remove the screw from the IOB bracket [A].
3. Swing the bracket open.
Covers
4. If you need still more space to work, lift the IOB bracket off its hinges at the top [1] and
bottom [2].
5. Check the bottom corner and confirm that the bottom hinge [2] is out of the hole.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
• The metal of the IOB bracket is soft. If the bracket is lowered with the bottom peg
t and
still in its hole, the metal will bend.
6. Slowly, lower the IOB bracket and allow it to hang free.
7. With the controller box open and the IOB bracket lowered, you now have full access to all
the components on the back of the machine.
Operation Panel
4.6 OPERATION PANEL
4.6.1 OPERATION PANEL REMOVAL

Follow this procedure to replace the operation panel unit.
1. Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord.
remove the cover.
Operation Panel
5. Remove the screws from the operation panel cover center front.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
6. Open the front door, turn down the operation panel, and then remove the operation panel
cover center front [A].
7. Remove the fixing parts from the operation panel.
Operation Panel
8. Lay the sheet [A] for protecting the contact glass, remove and turn over the operation panel
[B].
9. Remove the operation panel rear cover [A].
10. Remove the harness guide [A] and connectors.
Operation Panel
11. Remove the hinge [A] and bracket [B] from operation panel.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
12. Make sure that the DIP switch 1, 3 and 6 on the main board is set to ON.
• If the DIP switch setting is not correct, the machine will issue SC672.
13. After replacing the operation panel, make sure that the latest version of the Smart
Operation Panel firmware has been installed. For details, refer to Updating the Smart
Operation Panel in the Smart Operation Panel manual.
Scanner Unit
4.7 SCANNER UNIT
4.7.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

There is no SIOB (Scanner Interface Board) in this machine. The functions of the SIOB of the
previous machine are controlled by the BICU (PCB11). Both harnesses of the scanner unit
connect directly to the BICU in the controller box on the back of the machine.
4.7.2 SCANNER UNIT REMOVAL

1. Prepare a clean, flat location to lay the scanner unit.
2. Raise the ADF.
3. At the right side [A] remove the right edge plate.
Scanner Unit
4. At the left side [A] remove the left edge plate.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. At the back of the scanner unit, remove the rear edge plate (no screws).
6. At the front, remove the front edge plate.
7. Remove the screw from the operation cover center [A].
Scanner Unit
8. Remove the screws of the operation cover center front.
9. Open the front door, turn down the operation panel, and then remove the operation cover
center front [A].
Scanner Unit
11. Remove the operation panel cover left [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
12. Remove the operation panel [A].
13. Remove the screws.
14. Remove the controller box cover. (Controller Box Cover Plate)
Scanner Unit
15. Disconnect the base of the scanner unit at each corner.
16. Remove the fixing screw and clamps from the cables near the BICU (PCB11).
17. At the right rear upper corner, free the triple-harness and I/F cable.
Scanner Unit
18. Below rear right corner [A], open the clamp, and then pull out the I/F cable.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
19. Next, free the I/F cable above rear right corner [A].
20. Pull the triple harness out through the corner [A].
21. Lay the triple harness and I/F cable across the exposure glass [A].
Scanner Unit
22. On the left edge of the scanner unit [B], raise the elastic handle.
23. Grip the scanner unit by the handle on each side, and then lift it out and remove it.
24. Lay the scanner unit on a flat, clean surface.
• When installing, install the laser unit [B] so that the two sheets [A] are located over
the laser unit.
Reassembly
1. When you re-attach the PCB cover plate [A], first set the tabs on the rail below. Make sure
each tab is engaged with the rail.
Scanner Unit
2. When you re-attach the rear, upper cover [B], make sure the I/F cables are in the
knockouts [1] and that the top edge of the cover is under the rear edge [2].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.7.3 EXPOSURE GLASS
1. Prepare a clean, flat location to lay the exposure glass.
2. Raise the ADF.
3. On the right [A], remove the right edge plate.
Scanner Unit
4. At [A] near the rear edge of the exposure glass, remove rear scale.
5. At the top left side of the machine [A] remove the u-bracket.
6. Remove the exposure glass, and then lay it on a flat, clean surface.
7. Lift out the exposure glass and left scale together.
• The left scale is attached to the exposure glass with double-sided tape. Do not
separate the left scale and the exposure glass unless you are going to replace a
broken glass.
8. The >PS< notation and arrow [A] of the left scale mark the upper left corner of the exposure
glass.
Scanner Unit
9. If you are replacing the exposure glass, the left scale [A] must be attached to the corner of
the new class so that the corner marked with two dots [B] is under the >PS< notation and
the down arrow.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
10. Hold the exposure glass so the >PS< notation is at the upper left corner, and then set the
glass in the machine.
11. Make sure the >PS< notation [A] is at the upper left corner, and that the hole on the end is
snug over the boss.
12. At the lower left corner of the glass [B], make sure that the hole is snug over the boss.
Scanner Unit
4.7.4 CONTACT GLASS
Contact Glass Removal and Reinstallation

1. Remove the exposure glass. Exposure Glass
2. Remove the contact glass.

• Step strip [A] is attached to the top of the contact glass.
• The right side of the contact glass [B] is fastened by double-sided tape below its right
edge.
Scanner Unit
3. Use a clean cloth dampened with alcohol to clean the area where the double-sided tape
will be attached.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Peel the back from the double-sided tape strip.
5. Set the one end of the tape at the rear [A] aligned with the line marker, and then set the
other end of the tape at the front [B] at its line marker.
6. Press the tape down so it is perfectly smooth along its length, and then peel off the
remaining strip from the tape.
7. Identify the corner of the contact glass with the orange dot.
8. With the dotted corner pointing to the left, set this end of the contact glass at the rear [A]
against the rear and right stud.
9. Set the other end of the glass at the front [B] against the left stud.
Scanner Unit
10. Press down gently on the right edge of the glass onto the tape below it.
11. Re-install the exposure glass, rear scale, and left edge cover.
12. Locate the notch [A] on the rear end of the right edge cover.
13. Peel the tape from the back of the step strip.
14. Align the rear corner of the strip [B] with notch [A], and then align the left edge of the step
strip against the right edge of the cover.
15. Press down on the step strip so it is perfectly flat and parallel with the right edge of the
edge cover.
Convert from Non-Contact to Contact Scanning Configuration

The step strip mounted to the left of the contact glass keeps the surface of the original out of
contact from the glass. This is the standard configuration. However, with the replacement of two
parts this configuration can be modified to revert to the old method with the surface of the
original in contact with the glass as it passes.
1. Raise the ADF.
2. Remove entrance guide unit [A].
Scanner Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
1. Note that the lower part of the non-contact guide unit [A] (just removed) is black, and the
same part of the contact-type [B] (replacement) is colorless, and transparent.
2. Remove scanning guide [A]
Scanner Unit
3. Note that the tabs [A] on the ends of the non-contact scanning guide plate (just removed)
are black, and the tabs [B] (replacement) of the contact-type are white.
4. Attach the contact-type scanning guide plate [A] (white tabs).

5. Attach contact-type guide unit [B] (colorless, transparent strip).
6. Enter the SP mode, open SP4688-002 (Scan Image Density Adjustment – 1-Pass DF), and
then enter “96” as the setting.
Contact Glass Cleaning

1. Carefully, peel the black step strip [A] away from the contact glass.
Scanner Unit
2. Dampen a clean cloth with alcohol and clean the contact glass.
4.7.5 LENS BLOCK COVER

1. Remove exposure glass. Exposure Glass
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
2. The lens block cover is on the right side of the scanner unit.
t and
3. Disconnect the lens block cover.
4. Raise the lens block cover and remove it.
Under the lens block cover:
Scanner Unit
[A] Original Width Sensors (S80, S79, S78, S77, S76)

[B] Lens
[C] SBU (PCB8)
• Never remove a paint-locked screw [1] on the lens block.
4.7.6 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS (S80, S79, S78, S77, S76)

2. Remove the lens block cover. Lens Block Cover
3. Free the harness of the left sensor.
Scanner Unit
4. Press the back of left sensor [A] to release it, and then disconnect it.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Lay the sensor on a flat, clean surface.
6. Press the back right sensor [A] to release it, and then disconnect it.
Scanner Unit
7. The original width sensors (S80, S79, S78, S77, S76) are identical and interchangeable.
4.7.7 LENS BLOCK

2. Remove the lens block cover. Lens Block Cover
3. Disconnect original sensors [A].
4. Disconnect SBU (PCB8) [B].
5. The FFC at the front edge of the SBU (PCB8) is locked in place by a sliding collar [A].
Scanner Unit
6. Slide the collar [B] out to release the FFC.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Disconnect the FFC.
Scanner Unit
8. Disconnect the lens block.
• Never loosen or attempt to remove a paint-locked screw on the lens block.
Scanner Unit
9. Remove the lens block, and then lay it on a flat, clean surface.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• The lens block is replaced as a set. Do not remove the SBU (PCB8).
Re-installation
• Reattach the FFC to the SBU (PCB8) before you re-install the lens block.
1. First, slide the collar lock [1] away from the SBU (PCB8).
2. Insert the edge of the FFC [2].
3. Push the collar in [3] to lock the FFC in place.
4. Confirm that the FFC is locked and straight.

5. After reassembly, do the scanner and printer adjustments. Copy Image Adjustments:
Printing/Scanning
4.7.8 EXPOSURE LEDS (EXPOSURE LAMP)
• The Exposure LEDs (exposure lamps) are comprised of a pair of LED arrays mounted
on separate brackets. Either bracket can be removed separately.
Scanner Unit
2. Remove the front edge plate.
3. Slowly, pull the Exposure LED pair toward the center of the scanner unit until both ends are
even with the cutouts in the frame at the front and back.
Left Exposure LED

1. You may need to move the Exposure LED bracket slightly so you can see the FFC of the
left bracket at the rear.
2. Disconnect FFC at the rear end of the left Exposure LED.
3. Disconnect the rear end of the left FFC bracket.
Scanner Unit
4. At the front, push the mylar [A] aside so you can see the front end of the left FFC bracket.
5. Detach mylar sheet [A], and then disconnect the front end of the left Exposure LED bracket
[B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• Never touch the window surface of the Exposure LED with bare fingers.
6. Remove the left Exposure LED bracket with LED attached.
7. Lay the left Exposure LED bracket on a flat, clean surface.
8. Turn the bracket over, and disconnect the LED PCB.
Scanner Unit
9. Separate the LED PCB and bracket.
10. Lay the LED PCB flat with the LEDs facing up.
Right Exposure LED

1. You may need to move the Exposure LED bracket [A] slightly so you can see the FFC of
the right bracket at the front [B].
2. Disconnect the rear end [A] of the right Exposure LED bracket.
3. Disconnect the front end [B] of the right Exposure LED bracket.
Scanner Unit
• Never touch the window surface of the Exposure LED with bare fingers.
4. Remove the right Exposure LED bracket with LED attached.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Lay the right Exposure LED on a flat, clean surface.
6. Turn the bracket over, and disconnect the LED PCB.
7. Separate the bracket and LED PCB.
Scanner Unit
8. Lay the LED PCB flat with the LEDs facing up.
Reassembly
1. Inspect replacement Exposure LEDs for dust or other particles and clean with a blower
brush before installation.
• Handle Exposure LEDs with care. Never touch the LED window [A] or LEDs [B]
with bare hands.
2. Before installation, make sure the LED PCB is perfectly flat against the bracket.
Scanner Unit
3. To install the bracket, hold the bracket up at a slight angle [A] and then lower it [B] so it
locks against the frame..
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Be sure to re-attach the mylar completely over the cutout if you detached it.
4.7.9 SCANNER MOTOR (M22)

2. The scanner motor (M22) is at the right front corner of the scanner unit.
3. Remove the front edge plate.
4. Remove the lens block cover [A] so you can reach the timing belt and scanner drive gear
Scanner Unit
[B]
5. Remove the right upper cover.
6. On the right side of the machine, disconnect the development unit fans.
7. Disconnect the development unit fan bracket [A].
Scanner Unit
8. Remove the development unit fan bracket with fans attached.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
9. Disconnect the cross-stay.
10. Lower the cross-stay and let it hang. It is not necessary to remove it.
11. Disconnect the scanner motor bracket.
12. Inside the scanner unit, disconnect the left end [A] of the drive belt.
Scanner Unit
13. Disconnect the right end [B] of the drive belt from the motor.
14. Disconnect motor [A] and then remove the bracket with motor attached.
15. Disconnect motor bracket.
Scanner Unit
16. Separate motor and bracket.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
To re-attach the cross-stay
1. Set the front hook [A] and rear hook [B] into the holes provided so the stay is perfectly
straight.
4.7.10 SCANNER HP SENSOR (S62)

1. Remove the scanner unit and set it on the frame of the machine. Scanner Unit Removal
• It is not necessary to disconnect the ADF I/F cables at the back of the machine.
• Just remove the exposure glass and the four base screws that secure the scanner
unit, raise the scanner out of the well, and then set on the frame of the machine.
Scanner Unit
2. The scanner HP sensor (S62) [A] is at the left rear corner of the scanner unit.
3. Remove the sensor hook plate stopper [A].
4. Disconnect the sensor [A] from the frame.
Scanner Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.7.11 ADF OPEN SENSOR (S65)
1. Remove the ADF. ADF Removal
2. Disconnect rear flat plate.
3. Remove left edge plate [A].
Scanner Unit
4. Remove right top plate.
5. Remove rear flat plate.
6. Disconnect the ADF open sensor (S65).
Scanner Unit
7. Remove the sensor.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• When attaching the ADF open sensor (S65), set it inside the frame of the sponge
[A].
4.7.12 SCANNER WIRE
Scanner Wire Removal

1. Remove the scanner unit. Scanner Unit Removal
2. Disconnect ground wire [1] ( x1)
3. Disconnect the head of the wire [2] from tension bracket 1.
4. Remove spring [3].
5. Loosen the screw [4] of tension bracket 1.
6. Disconnect the end of the wire at [A].
7. Remove lock bracket [B] of the 1st scanner ( x1).
8. Disconnect the wire from the pulley [C] ( x1).
Scanner Unit
9. Remove the wire from the scanner.
Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment

1. Place the beads [A] on the middle of the wire in the openings in the pulley.
2. Wind the ball end of the wire [B] 4 times.
3. Wind the other end of the wire [C] 5 times.
4. Attach tape [D] across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place.
5. Position the 1st scanner [A] so that the holes are aligned, and insert the positioning pins [B]
(x4).
6. Position the 2nd scanner [C] so that its holes are aligned, and insert the positioning pins
Scanner Unit
[D].
7. Attach the lock bracket [E] to fasten the wire to the 1st scanner.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
8. Tighten the screw of the tension bracket.
9. Attach the pulley and tighten its lock screw.
10. Remove the positioning pins (x4).
11. Remove the tape from the pulley.
12. Slowly push the scanner left and right to confirm that the wires are engaged correctly. The
1st and 2nd scanners should move smoothly.
4.7.13 IMPORTANT SP CODES: SCANNER UNIT

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the scanner unit.
Item SP Function
No.
APS size detection 4305 Adjusts APS size detection for SEF/LEF in order to detect 8K/16K
paper.
CIS ID 4700 Displays the ID of the CIS board at power on.
Magnification, sub 4008 Fine adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for
scan scanning by changing the speed of the scanner motor.
Registration, main 4011 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in the main scan
scan direction across the page.
Registration, sub 4010 Adjusts the registration of the leading edge for scanning in the sub
scan scan direction.
Scan NVRAM 1001 This is a Scanner SP Code. Displays the scanner firmware
version version stored in NVRAM in a 9-digit format:
Func. Name_Model Name_History No.
Scanner free run 4013 Executes a free run for testing with the LEDs either on or off.
Laser Unit
4.8 LASER UNIT
• Turn off the machine and unplug its power cord before performing any procedure in
this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
• This laser unit uses four laser beams produced by a Class IIIb LDA with a wavelength
of 657 to 663 nm and intensity of 15 mW. Direct exposure to the eyes could cause
permanent blindness.
• Before performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit, push the machine
power switch to switch the machine off. Then unplug the machine from the power
source.
• Do not touch the machine for 10 minutes. This allows enough time for the fusing unit to
cool and for the polygon motor to stop rotating.
• Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: LD unit, polygon
motor cover, synchronization detector.
• To avoid serious eye injury, always confirm that the machine has been completely
re-assembled before you turn the machine on.
4.8.1 WARNING DECAL LOCATIONS

Two caution decals are attached to the top of the laser unit.
4.8.2 POLYGON MOTOR, POLYGON MOTOR DRIVE BOARD, LD

UNIT
Polygon Motor Cover
• An accidental static discharge could damage the LDB (Laser Diode Board) (PCB15) in
the LD unit.
• Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
• The polygon motor (M23) rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after
Laser Unit
switching the machine off.

• To avoid damaging the motor, never remove the polygon motor (M23) within three
minutes of switching off the machine and disconnecting its power plug.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
2. Remove polygon motor cover [A].
t and
3. There are three components in the well under the cover.
1 Polygon motor (M23)

2 Polygon motor drive board
3 Laser diode (LD) unit
• An accidental static discharge could damage the laser diode board or other
boards under the polygon motor cover.
• To prevent damage to a PCB, always touch a metal surface to discharge any
static electricity from your hands before you remove a component.
Polygon Motor (M23)

1. Remove scanner unit. Scanner Unit Removal
2. Remove polygon motor cover. Polygon Motor, Polygon Motor Drive Board, LD Unit
3. Touch a metal surface to discharge any static charge from your hands.
Laser Unit
4. Remove the polygon motor (M23).
• Handle the motor carefully.

• Keep tools and your fingers away from the mirror port [A] on the side of the motor.
Polygon Motor Drive Board

3. Disconnect the polygon motor drive board.
Laser Unit
5. Remove the drive board.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Laser Diode Unit
3. Disconnect the LD unit [A].
5. Pull the unit out partially [B], and then disconnect the harness on the left edge.
6. Remove the LD unit.
After Reassembly
Do this procedure if you replaced the LD unit.
1. Reconnect the machine.
2. Make sure the front door is closed, and then turn the machine on.
3. Go into the SP mode and execute SP2110-005. This automatically downloads the settings
Laser Unit
to the machine for the new LD unit.

4. If execution of SP2110-005 fails on the first attempt, just do it again.
5. Perform the printer adjustments. Copy Image Adjustment: Printer/Scanner
4.8.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR

1. If the LCIT is installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the right side of the main
machine.
2. Disconnect the right upper cover [A].
3. Remove cover plate [B], and then remove the right upper cover.
4. The laser synchronization detector [A] is inside the right front corner of the machine.
• You do not need to remove the development unit fans next to the laser
synchronization detector.
5. Loosen the single screw of the laser synchronization detector [A] (do not remove it!).
Laser Unit
6. Pull the detector out partially and disconnect it [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Remove the detector.
Re-installation
1. Connect the harness to the detector.
2. Slide the cutout on the right edge of the detector behind the screw head [1].
3. Set the hole [2] onto the point of the boss on the left, and then tighten the screw.
4. After replacement of the laser synchronization detector, set SP1002-1 to -7 (Side-to-Side
Laser Unit
Registration) to their default settings.
4.8.4 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT

This adjustment corrects the parallelogram pattern to the desired rectangular pattern for printing.
It does not correct the skew of scanned images.
1. Execute SP2902-3 (Test Pattern - Printing Test Pattern #18) to print the A4 LEF pattern.
2. Check the printed patterns and estimate the angle of adjustment required.
4. Loosen both screws on the right side of the laser unit [A].
5. On the left [A], loosen the adjustment screw.
Laser Unit
6. While watching at the scale [1], use a flathead screwdriver at [2] to move the laser
exposure unit left or right on the scale until it is centered on the scale.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• The scale is set for increments of 1 mm.
7. Refer to the illustration below:
• If the pattern is skewed at the corner of the leading edge [A], move the unit so it moves
the pointer on the scale toward the rear of the machine.
• If the pattern is skewed at the trailing edge [B], move the unit so it moves the pointer
on the scale toward the front of the machine.
1. After adjustment, tighten the screws on the laser unit ( x3).

2. Re-assemble the machine.
3. Print the pattern again with SP2902-3 Pattern #18.
4. Check the pattern. Repeat the procedure if more adjustment is required.
Laser Unit
4.8.5 TONER SHIELD GLASS

The toner shield glass must be inspected and cleaned at regular intervals.
1. Prepare a clean, flat location to lay the toner shield glass.
2. Open front door [1], and then swing out toner bottle [2].
3. Locate and remove the metal bracket.
4. Slowly, pull the toner shield glass straight out to remove it.
Laser Unit
5. Lay the glass on a flat, clean surface.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.8.6 LASER UNIT REMOVAL
1. Remove the toner shield glass. Toner Shield Glass
3. First, you must remove top cover [A],
4. Disconnect the left side [A] of the top cover.
Laser Unit
5. Disconnect the front edge [A] of the top cover.
6. Disconnect right side [A] of the top cover.
7. Disconnect right rear corner [A] of top cover.
Laser Unit
8. Release the harnesses attached to the back of the cover [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
9. Remove the top cover.
10. At the front, right corner [A] of the laser unit disconnect the laser synchronization unit.
Laser Unit
11. Disconnect the left side of the unit at [A] and [B].
12. The shielded cable is fastened to the unit frame with a metal clamp [1].
13. Remove the clamp [2] and free the shielded cable.
14. Disconnect the LD unit [3].
15. Disconnect the left side of the laser unit [A].
Laser Unit
16. Disconnect the right side of the laser unit.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
17. Remove the laser unit and lay it on a flat, clean surface.
• When installing, install the laser unit [B] so that the two sheets [A] are located over
the laser unit.
Reinstallation
Laser Unit
1. When you install the laser unit in the machine, first set the front right corner under support
[A].
2. On the left, before you re-attach the screw at [1], shift the notch on the left side of the unit
[2] so it is aligned with the middle line of the scale below.
3. Insert a screwdriver [3] into the plate to hold the unit in place as you re-attach the screws.
Laser Unit
4. Set the right front corner of the plate under the support [A] and then lay the plate on top of
the laser unit.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. After you set the top plate on the unit, make sure that the harnesses on the left are not
pinched under the plate.
6. Reconnect the machine.

7. Make sure the front door is closed, and then turn the machine on.
8. If you have replaced the laser unit, go into the SP mode and execute SP2110-005. This
automatically downloads the settings to the machine for the new LD unit.
9. If execution of SP2110-005 fails on the first attempt, just do it again.
10. Print the alignment pattern with SP2902-3 Pattern #18 and check the alignment of the
pattern.
11. If there is a problem, you will need to realign the laser unit. Laser Unit Alignment
4.8.7 LD SAFETY SWITCHES

In this machine the mechanism that makes the laser unit operational is a 24V1 line interrupted
Laser Unit
using a 5VS relay and then 24VS is dropped to +5VS1 using a regulator.
To ensure the safety of the machine operators and service technicians, one switch prevents the
laser beams from switching on accidentally. When the front door is opened, the +5VS1 line
connecting the LD driver on the LD control board is disconnected to disable the laser units.
4.8.8 IMPORTANT SP CODES: LASER UNIT

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the laser unit.
Item SP Function
No.
Download LD 2110-5 Automatically downloads the settings to the machine for the new
settings LD unit after replacement. It is no longer necessary to read the
settings from a label and enter them manually.
Laser 1002 After replacement of the laser synchronization detector, set 001
synchronization to 007 (Side-to-Side Registration) to their default settings.
detector
Test pattern 2902-3 Use this pattern for testing after LD unit replacement.
Drum Unit
4.9 DRUM UNIT
4.9.1 CORONA UNIT
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Corona Grid
2. Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the bottle to the right.
3. Disconnect the charge corona unit.
4. Without touching the wire mesh on top of the unit, pull the charge corona unit out of the
machine.
5. Lay the unit on a flat, clean surface.
• Always lay the unit down with the wire grid facing up.
• Never lay the unit down with the grid facing down.
Drum Unit
6. Remove grid [A].
Charge Wire
1. Remove the corona grid. (See procedure above.)
2. Remove terminal plate [A].
3. Rear grid fastening bracket [B].
4. Remove front and back end covers [C].
5. Remove charge wire [D].
6. Remove wire cushions [E].
Drum Unit
• Never touch the charge corona wire with bare hands. Always protect it from dust,
oil, etc.
• Never bend or knot the wire. Charge will not distribute evenly on a bent wire.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Cleaning Pad
1. Remove the charge wire. Corona Unit
2. Remove cleaning pad [A].
Re-assembly
1. At the front and back, make sure that the wire is threaded correctly into the grooves in the
end blocks.
2. After replacing the charge corona wire, make sure that the wire cleaner pads are engaged
correctly with the wires.
Corona Wire Cleaning Motor

2. Swing the toner bottle holder to the right.
3. Disconnect the charge corona unit.
Drum Unit
4. Remove the charge corona unit from the machine.
5. Lay the unit on a flat, clean surface with the grid side facing up.
6. The wire cleaning motor [A] is enclosed in the front end of the unit.
• Always lay the unit down with the wire grid facing up.
• Never lay the unit down with the grid facing down.
7. Disconnect the front plate [A].
8. Free the snap plate [B].
9. Remove the motor.
Drum Unit
10. If the motor is being replaced, apply a small amount of grease to the worm gear of the
motor before you install it.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Corona Power Pack
1. Remove the rear upper and rear lower cover. Rear Covers
2. Open the controller box. Controller Box
3. The corona power pack is located behind the flywheel.
4. Remove the flywheel and rear center stay.
Drum Unit
5. Clear the ADF cables away from the center stay.
6. Disconnect the center stay.
7. Slowly and carefully, lower the center stay [A] away from the corner plate [B] of the IOB
bracket below.
Drum Unit
• The bracket on the bottom of the center stay provides the pivot point for the hinge
at the upper left corner of the IOB bracket. The arm of the IOB bracket is soft and
bends easily.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
8. Disconnect the power pack.
t and
9. Disconnect the power pack bracket, and then remove it with the power pack attached.
10. Separate the power pack from the bracket.
Drum Unit
4.9.2 DRUM
Drum Unit Removal

1. Remove the development unit. Development Unit Removal and Re-Installation
2. Remove the corona unit. Corona Unit
3. Grasp the front of the drum unit by the small handle, and then pull the drum unit out of the
machine.
4. Lay the drum unit on a flat, clean surface.
Drum Removal
1. Remove the drum unit. Development Unit Removal and Re-Installation
Drum Unit
2. Remove front screw and bracket.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove rear screw.
4. Open the drum unit.
Drum Unit
5. Without touching the surface of the drum, grasp the drum by each end and lift it out of the
unit.
6. For reassembly, note the shape of the rear end of the drum.
7. Cover the drum with some paper to protect its surface from strong light.
• Never touch the surface of the drum.

• Never attempt to clean the surface of the drum with alcohol or any other type of
organic solvent.
• Never place the drum where it would be exposed to strong light, or sunlight.
8. Before installing a new drum, dust the surface of the OPC drum carefully with setting
Drum Unit
powder.
• The surface of a new drum is dry, so you must apply Drum Setting Powder (P/N:
54429101) to the drum surface before installation.
• Without the drum powder which acts as a lubricant, the drum cleaning blade could
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
scour the drum surface.
t and
• If setting powder is not available, use some used toner. However, this could cause dirty
backgrounds on the first several copies.
9. Apply the setting powder by tapping the powder bag across the surface of the drum.
10. Cover the entire length of the drum over a 45-90 degree portion [A] (about 1/4 of the total
drum surface). Apply enough powder so the area turns white.
11. Install the new drum in the OPC unit so that the forward edge of the powdered surface [B]
faces the cleaning blade [C].
12. Manually rotate the drum once clockwise [D] until it stops again at the position where you
started.
13. After replacing the drum, do SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
4.9.3 PTL (PRE-TRANSFER LAMP)

1. Remove the drum unit and drum. Drum_1
2. The PTL bracket is held in place by two screws [A] and [B]. Screw [B] is a shoulder screw.
Drum Unit
This screw must be installed at the same position.
3. At the front [A] pass the end of the screwdriver under the shaft arm to remove the screw.
Do not place the screwdriver on top of the arm [B] to remove the screw.
4. At the rear [A] pass the screwdriver under the unit to remove the screw.
5. Do not place the screwdriver on top of the plate [B] to remove the screw.
Drum Unit
6. At the center, disconnect the PTL.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Roll the PTL bracket out from under the edge of the frame.
8. Separate the PTL from its bracket.
9. Lay the PTL on a flat, clean surface.
Re-assembly
1. Set the PTL in its bracket.
Drum Unit
2. Rock the edge of the bracket up under the edge of the frame.
• If the edge of the bracket is not under the edge of the frame, the PTL and its
bracket will not be perfectly flat against the frame, and you will not be able to
re-attach the screws and the connector.
4.9.4 QL (QUENCHING LAMP)

2. With the drum removed, you can see the green QL [A].
3. At the center, disconnect the QL [A].
4. At the center, push back the hook [A] to release the quenching lamp, and then slide out the
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-100 SM
Drum Unit
end of the QL [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Lift out the QL.
6. Use only a blower brush to clean the quenching lamp.
4.9.5 POTENTIAL SENSOR (S11)

1. Remove the drum unit. Drum_1
SM 4-101 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
2. Disconnect the potential sensor bracket.
3. Pull the bracket forward [A] to detach the rear end of the bracket from the machine, and
then pull it out [B].
4. Lay the potential sensor bracket on a flat, clean surface.

5. The potential sensor power pack [A] is on the end of the bracket, and the potential sensor
[B] is on the opposite side.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-102 SM
Drum Unit
6. Free the black harness.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Push the harness [A] through the bracket, and then pull the connector [B] through the hole.
8. Disconnect the potential sensor.
SM 4-103 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
9. On the other end of the bracket, disconnect the power pack cover.
10. Remove cover [A] and power pack [B].
11. The potential sensor (S11) and power pack are always replaced together.
Re-assembly
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-104 SM
Drum Unit
1. The end of the potential sensor bracket [A] is inserted into the cut-out [B] on the rear panel.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
2. After replacing the drum potential sensor, go into the SP mode and make sure that SP3901
is on, and then do SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum Conditions).
4.9.6 CLEANING FILTER

2. You can easily see the cleaning filter with the drum removed.
3. Lift out the filter.
4. After replacing the filter, make sure that its edges are perfectly flat against the unit.
SM 4-105 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
4.9.7 DRUM CLEANING BLADE

2. Disconnect the blade.
3. Remove the blade.
4. Clean the blade edge carefully with only a soft, clean cloth.
• Handle the blade carefully to avoid nicking its edge.

• New blades are treated with special setting powder, so avoid touching the edge of
a new cleaning blade. If the edge of a new blade is accidentally wiped clean, dust
it lightly with some toner before installing it.
5. Before installing a new blade:
• Clean the entrance seal, side seals, and cleaning brush.
• Make sure that the blade side seals are not pinched by the blade.
4.9.8 CLEANING BRUSH

2. Remove the drum cleaning blade. Drum Cleaning Blade
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-106 SM
Drum Unit
3. Insert the tip of a small screwdriver into cutout [1] (this keeps the gears from turning), and
then remove the coupling [2].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Remove the inner bushing.
5. Pull the shaft of the cleaning brush toward the rear to disengage the coupling on the end of
the shaft from its pin, and then pull the brush out.
• Avoid touching the cleaning brush with bare hands.
Re-assembly
SM 4-107 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
1. The pin [A] fits into the slot of the coupling [B] on the end of the cleaning brush.
2. After replacing the cleaning brush, use a blower brush and clean the ID sensor (S13) to
make sure that it is free of toner.
3. Check the entrance seals and confirm that they are not bent.
4.9.9 PICK-OFF PAWLS

2. Remove the pick-off pawl bracket with the pawls attached.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-108 SM
Drum Unit
3. Disconnect the pick-off pawls.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Re-assembly
1. Each pawl must be positioned as shown.
4.9.10 ID SENSOR (S13)

2. Remove the pick-off pawl bracket.
3. Raise the drum unit [A] slightly so you can see the sensor [B].
SM 4-109 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
4. Disconnect the sensor.
5. Remove the sensor.
6. Re-assemble the machine.

7. Connect the machine, turn it on, and go into the SP mode.
8. Do SP3901 and make sure that it is on (default), and then do SP2962 (Adjustment of Drum
Conditions).
9. Do SP3001-002 (ID Sensor Initialization Setting).
4.9.11 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE

2. Pull out the used toner collection bottle [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-110 SM
Drum Unit
4.9.12 FINE PARTICLE FILTER

3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
2. Remove the fine particle filter [A].
4.9.13 OPTICS DUST FILTER

1. At the right rear corner of the machine [A] remove the cover bracket with filter attached.
SM 4-111 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
2. Separate the filter and cover bracket.
Reinstallation
1. Set the tabs on the bottom edge of the filter into the notches provided on the bottom of the
filter frame.
2. Make sure that the edges of the filter are flat and even with the edges of the frame.
4.9.14 INTERNAL DUST FILTER

2. Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the toner bottle holder to the right.
3. Remove the PCU inner cover [A] do you can see the dust filter [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-112 SM
Drum Unit
4. Remove the filter.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Lay the filter on a clean, flat surface.
6. Clean the filter with a vacuum cleaner.
4.9.15 TONER BOTTLE FAN

2. Remove the left upper inner cover.
SM 4-113 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
3. With the cover removed you can see the duct of the toner bottle fan (FAN6).

5. Disconnect the left edge [A] of the laser unit cover.
6. Disconnect the front edge [B] of the laser unit cover.
7. Disconnect the right edge [A] of the cover.

8. Disconnect the right rear corner [B] of the cover.
• Do not loosen either screw [C] below. These screws are used to adjust the
position of the scanner unit.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-114 SM
Drum Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
9. Free the harness along the rear edge of the cover.
SM 4-115 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
10. Pull the cover [A] away from the front edge of the machine [B] . (You do not need to
remove.)
11. Disconnect the toner bottle motor (M1).
12. Push in the tab release [A] on the right side of the motor bracket.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-116 SM
Drum Unit
13. Rotate the motor [B] straight up, and then remove the motor bracket.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
14. Disconnect the motor bracket.
15. Separate the motor and bracket.
Re-assembly
1. Hold the motor [A] over the position where you removed it, and then rotate it straight down.
SM 4-117 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
2. Check the front of the machine under the operation panel, and confirm that the duct [B] is
aligned straight with its cutout.
3. On the right side of the motor [A], insert the lap into its slot to position the motor.
4. Press the tab release [B] on the left side of the bracket to lock bracket and motor in place.
5. Once again, check the alignment of the duct at the front of the machine and confirm that it
is straight.
6. Reassemble the machine.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-118 SM
Drum Unit
4.9.16 DRUM MOTOR (M25)

1. Remove rear upper cover. Rear Upper Cover
2. Open the controller box [A]. Controller Box
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Disconnect the IOB bracket [A]. IOB Bracket
4. Remove the flywheel.
SM 4-119 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
5. Remove the flywheel sprocket.
6. Remove the small gear. (This gear is black in the IM 7000/8000, and white in the IM 9000.)
7. Remove the lower gear (This gear is black in the IM 7000/8000 and white in the IM 9000.)
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-120 SM
Drum Unit
8. Remove the large gear.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
9. Remove the timing belt [A] from the gear [B].
10. Loosen the screw [A] for belt tension, and then remove the timing belt [B].
SM 4-121 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
11. Remove the motor bracket [A].
12. Remove the support bracket [A].
13. Remove the boss [A] and hook [B], and then remove the cover [C].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-122 SM
Drum Unit
• To remove the boss, insert a flathead screwdriver into the gap in the metal plate.
14. Remove the drum motor [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.9.17 IMPORTANT SP CODES: DRUM UNIT
Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the drum and components around the
drum.
Item SP Function
No.
Drum condition 3902-5 Displays the LD power correction value as a result of the latest Vh
display (LD level) adjustment.
Drum condition 3902-2 Displays drum dark potential, the standard potential, electrical
display (Vd) potential of the black areas after exposure.
Drum condition 3902-4 Displays the charge grid voltage resulting from the latest Vd
display (Vg) adjustment.
Drum condition 3902-3 Displays standard halftone drum potential, used for laser power
display (Vh) adjustment.
Drum condition 3902-6 Displays ID sensor pattern potential, the latest drum surface voltage
display (Vid) measured on the ID sensor pattern.
Drum condition 3902-7 Displays the drum potential after quenching.
display (Vql)
Drum 3901 After replacement, check this SP code and confirm that auto
replacement process control is on and operating.
Drum 2962 After replacement, do SP3901 to confirm that auto process control
replacement is on and operating, and then do SP2962 to execute process control
manually for the new drum. This SP2962 executes only if SP3901 is
on (enabled).
Forced toner 2207 Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the toner supply unit. Use
supply to determine if toner supply is operating correctly. If forcing toner
supply with this SP does not darken the image, then toner supply is
not operating correctly.
SM 4-123 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Drum Unit
Item SP Function
No.
ID sensor 2962 After replacement, do SP3901 to confirm that auto process control
manually for the new sensor. SP2962 executes only if SP3901 is on
(enabled).
ID sensor 3901 After replacement, check this SP code and confirm auto process
replacement control is on and operating.
Potential sensor 2962 After replacement, do SP3901 to confirm that auto process control
manually for the new sensor. This SP2962 executes only if SP3901
is on (enabled).
Potential sensor 3901 After replacement, check this SP code and confirm auto process
replacement control is on and operating.
Print margins 2101 Do this SP to adjust the margins (erase, blank space) at the top,
bottom, and sides of the paper.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-124 SM
Development Unit
4.10 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
4.10.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL AND RE-INSTALLATION
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Removing the Development Unit
1. If the LCIT is connected to the right side of the machine, disconnect it and pull it away.
2. Prepare a clean, flat surface for the development unit.
SM 4-125 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
• Open the front door completely by pushing the front door until the toner supply
unit stops.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-126 SM
Development Unit
7. Remove the knob [A], and then remove the development unit face plate [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• Turn the knob clockwise to remove it.
8. Raise the toner supply pipe shutter to close the pipe.
9. On the right [A] disconnect the development unit [A].
10. Slip the development unit [A] to the right.
SM 4-127 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
11. Push the development unit [A] slightly to the right, and then pull the unit [B] straight out of
the machine.
12. Lay the development unit on the prepared surface.
Separating the Development Unit and Toner Hopper

1. At the front end of the unit, disconnect the pressure release tube.
• Only the IM 9000 Model has this pressure release tube. This step is not required
for the IM 7000/8000 models.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-128 SM
Development Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Rotate the toner hopper slightly as you lift it.
4. Remove the toner hopper and set it aside.
Re-installing the Development Unit

Pay attention to these important points as you re-install the development unit.
1. Hold the hopper perfectly level when re-attaching it, to prevent toner from entering the rails
of the development filter.
2. To re-assemble the top and bottom half of the development unit, first allow the bottom half
[A] to tip slightly forward.
3. Hold the top half [B] (toner hopper) over the bottom half, set the cutouts on the ends of the
shaft below, and then slowly rock the top half forward [C] so the holes are aligned.
SM 4-129 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
4. Make sure that the holes are aligned at the rear [A] and front [B], and then fasten the
screws.
5. If you are installing a IM 9000, be sure to re-connect the pressure release tube at the front
of the development unit.
6. Slip the unit slightly to the right as you push it slowly back into the machine.
7. Push the development unit in until it stops, and then push it to the left.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-130 SM
Development Unit
8. You should see the pin through the oval hole as shown below. This means the unit is
locked in the correct position.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
9. The horizontal pin must be through the hole and lapped over the plate as shown below on
the left.
• If the pin does not slide over the plate as shown above on the left, turn the front
gear of the development unit counter-clockwise and try again.
10. Be sure to re-connect the development unit [A].
SM 4-131 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
11. You must remember to lower the supply pipe shutter so the pipe is open.
• The shutter must be down. If it remains up, you will not be able to close the toner
bottle holder and the front door.
12. Re-install the PCU inner cover [A].
13. Be sure to raise lever C1. (The front door will not close if C1 is down.)
Just Replaced Developer?

If you have just replaced the developer, you must initialize the developer immediately after
re-installing the development unit. See "Initializing Developer" below.
Replacement with a Used Development Unit

Do the following procedure if you need to replace the development unit with a unit from another
machine for testing.
1. Do SP2220 (Vref Manual Setting) and SP2906 (TD Sensor Control Voltage) on the loan
machine and note the settings.
2. Remove the development unit from the loan machine and then install it in the other
machine.
3. Do SP2220 and SP2906 on the machine where you just installed the loan development
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-132 SM
Development Unit
unit and enter the values from the loan machine.

4. After the test, reinstall the old development unit and restore the original settings of both SP
codes.
3BReplacemen
4.10.2 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT
Adjustment
t and
Replacing the Developer
1. Gather what you need.
• One developer packet
• Plastic disposal bag [A]
• Plastic cover sheet [B]
2. Place the development unit [A] on the plastic sheet.

3. Have the disposal bag [B] for the old developer close at hand.
SM 4-133 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
4. Disconnect the hose. (This is necessary only for the IM 9000.)
6. While holding the hopper perfectly level as you remove it to prevent toner spill, rotate the
toner hopper very slightly (10° to 20°) and remove it.
7. Set the toner hopper aside.

8. Spread a sheet of paper on the table.
9. Slowly, turn the development unit upside down onto the paper.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-134 SM
Development Unit
10. Turn the knob through several complete rotations to empty all the developer in the
development unit.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
11. Set the development unit aside, and then gather the dumped toner and paper.
12. Dump them in the disposal bag and seal it.
13. Vacuum clean these areas:

• Rear side seal [A]
• Front side seal [B]
• Development roller sleeve and shaft [C] with clean, dry cloth and blower brush
14. Shake the developer packet several times to loosen the developer.
SM 4-135 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
15. Cut off the top edge of the packet.
16. Keep the cut edge with the lot number embossed on it. You will need this number to
register the developer lot number on the machine.
17. While turning the knob slowly, pour in one pack of developer from one end of the
development unit to the other.
18. Make sure that the developer is evenly distributed across the length of the roller.
19. Continue to turn the knob several times to prevent clumping in the developer.
Re-installing the Development Unit

Re-assemble the developer unit and toner hopper, and then re-install the unit in the machine.
Development Unit Removal and Re-Installation
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-136 SM
Development Unit
Initializing the Developer

Follow the procedure below precisely to enter the developer lot number, and to initialize the new
developer.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
• You must open the door and leave it open before you switch the machine on. This
t and
prevents the machine from executing automatic process control. (It does this every
time the machine is turned on.)
• The TD sensor must be initialized with the new developer SP2801-001 before
automatic process control executes for the first time with the new developer.
1. Connect the power cord to the power source.
4. Enter the SP mode (System/Copy SP).
6. Do SP2801-002 and enter the Lot No. (This is the number written on the edge of the packet
you cut from the developer packet.)
7. Do SP2801-001 to initialize the TD sensor.
8. Exit the SP mode and resume normal operation.
4.10.3 ENTRANCE SEAL, SIDE SEALS

2. Separate the development unit and toner hopper. See "Separating the Development Unit
and Toner Hopper" in this section.
SM 4-137 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
3. Press in the catches on either end to release the entrance seal bracket, then remove it.
4. Remove the side seals from both ends [A] and [B].
5. Vacuum clean the area, and then attach new seals as shown below.
6. Make sure that the seals are attached correctly.

• The bottoms of the seals [A] should be fully visible.
• The bottom of a seal [B] should not be in the slit.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-138 SM
Development Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Re-assembly
1. Clean the entrance seal bracket before re-installing it.
2. When you re-install the entrance seal bracket, make sure the tabs and bosses are
engaged at four locations (both end tabs, and two bosses on the bracket).
4.10.4 DEVELOPMENT FILTER

2. Separate the development unit and toner hopper. See "Separating the Development Unit
and Toner Hopper" in this section.
3. Lift out the filter bracket base.
• There are some minor differences in the shape and size of the development filters
for the IM 7000/8000 and IM 9000. The procedure below shows filter replacement
for the IM 9000.
SM 4-139 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
IM 7000/8000
There is no hose attached to the filter bracket.
4. Remove first filter bracket [1].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-140 SM
Development Unit
5. Remove second filter bracket [2].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
6. Remove rear filter [1].
IM 7000/8000
The filter bracket is one piece.
This photo shows the filter bracket base [1], filters [2], and filter brackets [3] removed from
the IM 9000.
This photo shows the [1] filter bracket base, [2] filters, and [3] filter brackets removed from
the IM 7000/8000.
SM 4-141 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
Re-assembly
1. Inspect the rails on both ends of the bracket case and make sure they are clean.
2. If there is any toner in the rails, wipe them clean before re-installing the bracket case.
3. When installing a new filter, set the filter [A] snug inside the filter case, and then place the
case [B] over the top of the filter bracket.
4. Vacuum clean, and then check the gaps at the ends of the filters to make sure that they are
flat and sealed.
4.10.5 TD SENSOR
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-142 SM
Development Unit
2. You can see the TD Sensor (S2)on the side of the development unit.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. First, free the harness [A].
4. Disconnect TD Sensor (S2) [B].
1. Remove the TD sensor (S2).

2. Clean the port now before you re-attach the TD sensor (S2).
Re-assembly
SM 4-143 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
1. Be sure to run the harness through the frame as it was originally.
2. If you have just replaced the TD sensor (S2), go into the SP mode.
3. Do SP3901 (Auto Process Control) and make sure that it is on (default).
4. Do SP2801 (TD Sensor (S2) Initial Setting)
5. Do SP2962 (Auto Process Control) to execute auto process control.
4.10.6 TONER END SENSOR (S1)

2. Disconnect and remove the toner end sensor cover.
3. On the other side [A] of the toner hopper, free the harness.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-144 SM
Development Unit
4. While removing the screws carefully to avoid stripping the holes, disconnect the toner end
sensor (S1) [A].
5. Clean the port now before you re-attach the sensor [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Re-assembly
1. Pass the harness through the cutout [A] on the edge of the cover.
2. Make sure the harness is not pinched between the side of the toner hopper and the edge
of the cover as shown [B].
4.10.7 TONER SEPARATION UNIT

2. Disconnect toner separation unit [A].
SM 4-145 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
3. Disconnect hose [B] (IM 9000 development unit only)
4. Remove the toner end sensor cover.
5. On the back of the toner hopper, release the long tab of the toner separation unit cover [A],
and then remove the toner separation unit [B].
6. Lay the toner separation unit on a flat, clean surface.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-146 SM
Development Unit
Reassembly
1. Pass the harness through the cutout [A] on the edge of the toner end sensor cover.
2. Make sure the harness is not pinched between the side of the toner hopper and the edge of
the cover as shown [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.10.8 TONER BOTTLE MOTOR (M1)
1. Spread some paper on a flat, clean surface.
2. Open the front door, and then remove the toner bottle.
SM 4-147 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
5. Locate the C-clamp under the base of the toner bottle holder, and then remove it.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-148 SM
Development Unit
6. Locate the small motor harness between the door and toner bottle holder on the right, and
then disconnect it.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Lift the toner bottle unit off its hinges and lay it on the paper to catch toner spill.
9. Disconnect bottom plate [A].
SM 4-149 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
10. Disconnect toner pan [B], and then remove it.
• The toner pan must be cleaned at every PM interval (300 K).

11. Separate the bottom plate so you can see the motor [A].
12. Disconnect motor bracket [B]
13. Remove the motor bracket with motor attached [A], and then lay it on a flat, clean surface.
14. Disconnect motor bracket [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-150 SM
Development Unit
15. Separate the motor and bracket.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.10.9 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR (M24)
1. Remove the rear covers. Rear Covers
SM 4-151 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
3. The used toner pump tube assembly and drive rod [A] block the removal of the motor [B].
4. Pull out the stopper [A], and then remove the screw from the tube pump assembly [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-152 SM
Development Unit
5. Pull the bottom of the tube [A] up, and then remove the tube pump assembly [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
6. Remove the cover [A] of the development motor (M24).
7. Remove the development motor (M24) [A] with the bracket attached.
Re-assembly
SM 4-153 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
1. To hang the motor correctly, insert the hook [1] on the motor bracket into the hole [2] in the
frame inside the machine.
4.10.10 DEVELOPMENT UNIT POWER PACK

1. Remove the rear upper and lower covers. Rear Covers
4. The development unit power back is located next to the registration motor (M2).
5. Remove the clamps [A], and then remove the fixing parts from the development unit power
back [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-154 SM
Development Unit
6. Remove the development unit power back [A] with the bracket attached.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• Unhook the bracket with the power pack attached and remove it.
7. Lay the bracket on a flat, clean surface.

8. Remove the cover bracket [A].
SM 4-155 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
9. Separate the development unit power pack [A] and bracket.
4.10.11 USED TONER COLLECTION UNIT
Used Toner Collection Unit Removal

1. Remove the rear upper and rear lower covers. Rear Covers
3. The used toner collection unit [A] is located at the right, rear edge of the main machine. The
unit contains three components.
1 Used Toner Collection Motor

2 Bottle Set Sensor
3 Bottle Full Sensor
4. Open the front door, and then pull out the used toner collection bottle [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-156 SM
Development Unit
5. Disconnect the part [A], and then remove the fixing parts of the toner pump assembly [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
6. Grasp the tube [A], and then remove the toner pump assembly [B].
7. Disconnect the bracket.
SM 4-157 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
8. Pull the used toner collection unit straight out the back of the machine, and then twist it
down and to the right to remove it [A].
Toner Collection Motor Sensor

1. Remove the used toner collection unit. Used Toner Collection Unit
2. The toner collection motor sensor [A] is on top of the toner pump assembly.
3. Disconnect gear shaft.
4. Open the release tabs on the face of both gears [A], then remove the shaft [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-158 SM
Development Unit
5. Remove the plate [A], and then remove the toner collection motor [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Used Toner Collection Motor
2. The used toner collection motor [A] is at the rear of the used toner collection unit.
3. Release the hook to remove the cover [A].
4. Remove the motor [A].
Toner Bottle Set Switch, Toner Bottle Full Switch

SM 4-159 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
2. The bottle set sensor [A] is at the front of the unit, and the bottle full sensor [B] is at the rear.
Both are press switches.
Toner Bottle Set Switch

1. Use the tip of a very small screw driver to release the tab at the front bottom edge [A].
2. Release the tab at the rear top edge [B].
3. Pull out the switch and disconnect it.
Toner Bottle Full Sensor

1. Remove the top of the unit [A].
2. Pinch together the side tabs [B] to release the top, and then remove it.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-160 SM
Development Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Pull the gear and coil [A] out partially. Do not try to remove it.
4. Use the tip of a small screwdriver to disconnect the sensor [B].
5. Remove screw [A].

6. Use the tip of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on sensor [B].
SM 4-161 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Development Unit
7. Use a pair of small radio pliers to remove the switch.
4.10.12 IMPORTANT SP CODES: DEVELOPMENT UNIT

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the development unit.
Item SP Function
No.
Developer 2967 Determines whether the amount of toner is checked during auto
adjustment process control with only the TD sensor (S2). With this feature on, the
mode machine uses the TD sensor (S2) only. During auto process control
execution after the main switch is turned on, the toner amount in the
development unit is normally checked and adjusted using the ID
sensor (S13). However, in some environments, such as where there
could be traces ammonia in the air, copies could appear dirty or too
dark because the ID sensor (S13) reading is not reliable. In such a
case, SP2967 should be enabled so only the TD sensor (S2) is used.
New developer, 2801-1 In this order: Enter the lot number (SP2801-2), initialize the new toner
TD sensor (S2) (SP2801-21).
New developer, 2801-1 Enter the lot number with SP2801-2 before you initialize developer
initialize with SP2801-1.
New developer, 2801-2 Enter the lot number embossed at the top edge of the developer
lot number package. Enter the lot number with SP2801-2 before you initialize
developer with SP2801-1
TD sensor (S2) 2801-1 After replacement, do SP3901 to confirm that process control is on
replacement and operating, do 2801-1 to initialize the TD sensor (S2), and then do
SP2962 to execute auto process control manually.
Toner supply 2208 Selects the toner supply mode: Sensor Control or Image Pixel Count.
mode Select Image Pixel Count only if the TD sensor (S2) has failed and
cannot be replaced immediately, so that the customer can use the
machine. Return the setting to Sensor Control after replacing the
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-162 SM
Development Unit
Item SP Function
No.
sensor.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
SM 4-163 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Transfer Belt Unit
4.11 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
4.11.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL

1. Prepare a place to lay the unit by spreading some clean paper or a drop cloth on a flat,
clean surface.
2. Remove the drum unit. Drum_1
• Removal of the drum unit is recommended to prevent scratching the surface of

the belt on the as it is removed.
3. Disconnect transfer belt unit [A].
4. Remove transfer belt unit stay [B].
5. Lower C1 [C] and then pull the transfer belt unit out of the machine.
• Avoid touching the surface of the belt with bare hands.
4.11.2 TRANSFER BELT, TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING BLADE
Transfer Belt Assembly Removal

1. Remove the transfer belt unit. Transfer Belt Unit Removal
2. Raise the transfer belt partially by its knob [A].
3. At the front, disconnect terminal [B].
4. At the rear, disconnect terminal [C].
5. Raise the belt until it is perpendicular, and then remove it.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-164 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
• To avoid scratching the belt on the guide, never rotate the belt unit up more than
90 degrees.
6. Raise and stand the belt perpendicular to the unit and remove it.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Lay the belt assembly on a flat, clean surface.
8. Replace the transfer roller cleaning blade before you replace the belt.
• The transfer belt and transfer roller cleaning blade should be replaced together.
(See next section.)
Transfer Roller Cleaning Blade
• Never touch the edge of a new transfer roller cleaning blade.

• The edge of the blade is dusted with setting powder.
• If the setting powder is removed accidentally, dust the edge of the blade with some
toner.
• To avoid damage from static electricity, always work carefully around the exposed
transfer power pack, especially when cleaning with a vacuum cleaner.
1. Remove the transfer belt assembly. (See previous section.)
2. Remove transfer roller cleaning blade [A].
• Never remove or loosen the paint locked screws on the blade [B].
SM 4-165 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Transfer Belt Unit
3. After replacing the blade, clean the area around the rollers thoroughly before you attach
the new belt.
Transfer Belt Replacement

1. Replace the transfer roller cleaning blade. (See previous section.)
2. Remove the screws from the ends of the driver roller bracket at the front [A] and rear [B].
3. While holding the belt assembly level, raise the drive roller [C] to collapse the unit and
release tension on the belt.
4. Slowly remove the belt [D] and then replace it with a new one.
• Avoid touching the surface of the new belt with your bare hands.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-166 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
Re-assembly
• Never touch the surface of the belt with bare hands and never apply alcohol to the
3BReplacemen
surface of the belt.
Adjustment
1. Before re-assembling the transfer belt unit, use a clean cloth and alcohol to clean the
t and
surfaces the [1] drive roller, [2] transfer roller, and idle [3] idle roller. Make sure these areas
are clean and free from toner, paper dust, etc.
2. Clean the surface and underside of the transfer belt with a blower brush.
SM 4-167 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Transfer Belt Unit
3. When you position the new the transfer belt unit over the rollers, make sure that the belt is
centered between the triangular marks on front and rear side of the unit.
4. Confirm that all harnesses are connected and securely fastened in their hook clamps.
5. After re-installing the transfer belt unit, turn the belt and confirm that the toner collection coil
turns.
6. Raise and lower the belt with lever C1 to make sure that the belt raises and lowers
smoothly.
4.11.3 TRANSFER POWER PACK (PCB4)

1. Remove the transfer belt unit. Transfer Belt Unit Removal
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-168 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
2. Remove the transfer belt assembly. Transfer Belt, Transfer Roller Cleaning Blade
3. Disconnect ground wire and free its harness across the width of the unit.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Free the ground harness at the rear
SM 4-169 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Transfer Belt Unit
5. Free the terminal wire at the front.
6. Remove the top screw [A] of the solenoid bracket, and then loosen the two left screws [B].
(This allows you to free the front terminal harness below the bracket at [A].)
7. Free the front terminal wire from under the loosened solenoid bracket.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-170 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
8. Free the rear current terminal wire [A] at the rear.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
9. Disconnect the power pack [A], and then unfasten the right edge of the power pack [B].
10. Lift the right edge of the power, remove it, and then lay it on a flat, clean surface.
Re-installation
• The power pack must be locked correctly in place, and all the harnesses must be
secured in their clamps. A loose harness could interfere with the rotation of the transfer
belt.
Do these checks before you re-install the transfer belt assembly.
1. Before you re-connect the power pack, confirm that the left edge [A] of the power pack is
below the tabs on the left.
SM 4-171 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Transfer Belt Unit
2. Confirm that the transfer current terminal wire [B] is below the wire guides on the right.
3. Pass the ground terminal wire under the top arm of the solenoid bracket [A] and then
tighten the bracket screws [B] on the left.
4. After you connect the ground wire, make sure the wire is below all the wire guides at the
top.
4.11.4 DISCHARGE PLATE

1. Remove the transfer belt unit Transfer Transfer Belt Unit Removal
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-172 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
• It is not necessary to remove the transfer belt assembly. However, work carefully
to avoid scratching the surface of the belt.
2. Remove the shoulder screw and spring [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
3. Rotate the discharge unit [B] up, and then raise it off.
t and
4. Disconnect three tabs [1], [2], [3].
5. Remove small bracket [C].
6. Open the case [D].
7. Remove discharge plate [E].
• At re-installation make sure that the discharge plate is perfectly flat before you
re-assemble the case.
4.11.5 IMPORTANT SP CODES: TRANSFER BELT UNIT

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the development unit.
Item SP Function
No.
Transfer belt, 2970 Displays the resistance of the surface of the transfer belt.
resistance
Transfer current 2931 These SP codes adjust the on/off timing for copying on paper from
timing, LCIT the LCIT.
timing, Tray 1 Tray 1.
SM 4-173 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Transfer Belt Unit
Item SP Function
No.
timing, bypass tray the bypass tray.
Transfer current, 2301 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying. Many
adjusting selections are available for both the area of the belt where the
current is applied, and the type of paper in used.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-174 SM
Fusing Unit
4.12 FUSING UNIT
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
• Switch off the machine, disconnect the plug from the power source, and then wait a
t and
few minutes to allow the fusing unit to cool before you remove it from the machine.
4.12.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL
• Before you begin, spread a mat or some clean paper on the floor or a table where you
intend to set the fusing unit.
2. Pull out the transfer unit.
3. Open D2 and D3 until you can see the hole [A] in the shaft where the knob is attached.
4. Insert the tip of a screwdriver into the hole so the shaft cannot move when you turn the
knob screw.
5. Remove knob [B].
6. Disconnect the other cover screws.
7. Slowly, pull the cover away partially, and then disconnect the LED [C].
8. Remove the inner cover [D].
SM 4-175 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
9. Open D3 [A].
10. Remove stopper bracket [A].
11. Close D3, and then remove the fixing parts from the web unit.
The following picture shows IM 9000.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-176 SM
Fusing Unit
12. Remove fusing unit [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• Support the bottom of the fusing unit with your hand as you remove it.
• At reassembly, make sure that the two harnesses of the web unit are not pinched
between the inner cover and frame of the fusing unit.
4.12.2 THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR, NC SENSOR

The end thermistor [1], center thermistor (NC Sensor) [2], and thermostats [3] are arrayed
across the top of the fusing unit and protected by the fusing unit upper cover.
End Thermistor (IM 7000/8000)

1. Remove the fusing unit. Fusing Unit Removal
SM 4-177 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
2. Remove harness cover [A].
3. Remove upper cover [A].
1. Raise metal harness clamp [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-178 SM
Fusing Unit
2. Disconnect thermistor harness [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Disconnect spring [A], and then disconnect first bracket [B].
SM 4-179 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
4. Disconnect second bracket [A].
5. Remove the bracket with thermistor attached.

6. Separate the thermistor and bracket.
End Thermistor (IM 9000)

2. Pull out the fusing unit until it stops.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-180 SM
Fusing Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. At the rear, open metal clamp [A], and then disconnect end thermistor harness [B].
5. Disconnect spring [A] and remove the bracket [B].
SM 4-181 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
6. Remove bracket [A] with thermistor and harness attached.
7. Separate thermistor and bracket.
Thermostats
2. Pull out the fusing unit until it stops.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-182 SM
Fusing Unit
4. Disconnect the thermostat bracket.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Lay the bracket on a flat, clean surface.
6. Separate the thermostats from the bracket.
• To prevent a fire, never attempt to reset a blown thermostat by manipulating the

exposed edges of the black cover with a screwdriver, or by hitting it on a table.
• A thermostat that has been reset manually could fail and cause a fire.
• Always replace a blown thermostat with a new one.
Reinstallation
• To prevent damage to a thermostat, never touch its detection surface.

1. Place the end of the thermostat harness that has the round lead [A] in between the two ribs
SM 4-183 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
[1], [2] in the bracket.

2. Tighten the screw for the round lead [A] as tight as possible without damaging the screw or
screw hole.
3. Check the harness.

• The harness should be straight [A]. This is correct.
• If the harness is not straight between [1], [2] as [B], this is incorrect. This could cause
error SC542 or SC545.
Center Thermistor (NC Sensor) (IM 7000/8000)

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-184 SM
Fusing Unit
3. Remove top cover [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. At the front, raise metal harness clamps [A].
5. Disconnect thermistor harness [B].
6. Disconnect center thermistor harness bracket [A].
7. Remove the bracket with thermistor attached, and then separate bracket and thermistor
SM 4-185 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
[A].
Center Thermistor (NC Sensor) (IM 9000)

1. Remove fusing unit upper cover.
2. Open the clamp [A] and disconnect the NC sensor harness [B].
3. Open the clamps [A] and remove bracket with NC sensor [B] and harness attached.
4. Separate bracket [A] and harness.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-186 SM
Fusing Unit
4.12.3 WEB CLEANING ROLLER
Web Unit Disassembly
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
• The web unit can be removed without removing the fusing unit from the machine.
t and
1. Remove the inner cover of the fusing unit.
2. Remove web unit [A].
3. Remove the upper cover [A].
4. Remove web shafts [A].

5. Remove the web cleaning rollers from shaft driver pins [B].
6. Remove web bushing [C].
SM 4-187 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
7. Remove cleaning roller [D].
Re-assembly
1. After replacing the web, you must execute SP1902-001 (Fusing Web Used Area
Display/Setting) to reset the web consumption count to zero. This SP code must be
executed to release SC550.
Web Unit Re-assembly

1. Insert the end of the web into the slot , and attach the cleaning roller [A]
2. Insert the drive pins [B] into the web shaft .
3. After installing bushing [C], rotate the shaft right to lock it, then attach the lock screw .
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-188 SM
Fusing Unit
4. Set the web [A] under the feeler [B] of the web end sensor (S21) .
5. Attach bushing 2 [C] .
6. Attach the new web roll [D] and wind it tight .
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• Before you re-assemble the machine, make sure there is no slack in the web roll,
and confirm that the web is below the feeler of the web end sensor (S21).
7. Attach the upper cover.
8. After installing a new web roll, do SP1902-001 to reset the web count to zero.
4.12.4 WEB MOTOR (M9), WEB END SENSOR (S21)

1. Remove the web unit and end cover [A].
SM 4-189 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
2. Remove bracket [A].
4. Remove the web motor (M9) [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-190 SM
Fusing Unit
5. Disconnect the web end sensor (S21) [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Reinstallation
1. Set the motor in its bracket with the red dot [A] facing toward the front end of the fusing unit.
2. Make sure that the harness of the web driver motor is not pinched by the fusing inner cover.
4.12.5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING UNIT, CLEANING

ROLLERS
Pressure Roller Cleaning Unit

2. Remove cover [A] ( x 1)
SM 4-191 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
3. Cleaning roller assembly [B] ( x 1)
Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller (IM 7000/8000)

1. Remove the pressure roller cleaning unit. Pressure Roller Cleaning Unit, Cleaning
Rollers
2. Disconnect the springs [A] on each end of the roller shaft [B].
3. Separate the roller and bracket.
Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller (IM 9000)

1. Remove the pressure roller cleaning unit. Pressure Roller Cleaning Unit, Cleaning
Rollers
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-192 SM
Fusing Unit
2. Remove a screw on one end of the roller.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Disconnect roller from its bracket.
Re-assembly
1. When attaching the lower cover [A] of the pressure roller cleaning roller, make sure that the
tab engages with the groove.
2. If the bushings are noisy after replacement, lubricate them on both ends and the holes
where the bushings are attached with Barrierta Grease S522R.
4.12.6 FUSING LAMPS (H6, H7, H9), HOT ROLLER, AND

PRESSURE ROLLER
• If you wish to remove the pressure roller only, without removing the hot roller and
fusing lamps (H6, H7, H9), please do not use this procedure. Use the procedure in the
SM 4-193 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
next section.
Fusing Lamps (x3) IM 7000/8000

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-194 SM
Fusing Unit
1. At the rear, open the metal clamp, and then disconnect the harnesses.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
2. Remove top cover plate [A] of the drawer connector.
3. Disconnect bracket connector, and then remove screw.
SM 4-195 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
4. Unhook and then remove bracket [A].
5. Disconnect lamp harnesses [A] (Blue) and [B] (Green) from the back of the drawer
connector.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-196 SM
Fusing Unit
6. Open the bracket and then pull it away from the fusing unit.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Remove lamp holder [A], and then slowly pull the lamps out of the fusing unit.
8. Disconnect the connector cover at the front.
SM 4-197 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
9. Disconnect the fusing lamps (H6, H7, H9) at the front.
10. Remove the fusing lamp holder from the front.
11. Slowly, remove the fusing lamps (H6, H7, H9).
Re-assembly
Each fusing lamp is rated for a different voltage and must be re-installed at its original location.
• The rear lamp connectors are color coded (White, Green, Blue).
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-198 SM
Fusing Unit
• The rear lamp bracket is embossed with the letters W, G, B show your where each lamp
with its White, Green, or Blue connector should be installed.
• The front lamp bracket is also embossed with these letters, but the front connectors are all
white.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
• Use the rear lamp bracket as a guide for re-installing the lamps correctly.
t and
Fusing Lamps (x2) IM 9000
1. Remove the fusing unit Fusing Unit Removal
2. Open the clamp [A] and disconnect the connectors [B] of fusing unit thermistors
(end/center), and them remove the screw at the top of the backet.
3. At the lower rear corner, disconnect the harness, and then remove the bracket screw.
SM 4-199 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
4. Remove the cover plate [A].
5. At the lower left, lift the bracket [A] and pull it away from the rear of the fusing unit.
6. Disconnect the fusing lamp connectors [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-200 SM
Fusing Unit
7. Remove the rear fusing lamp holder [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
8. At the front, remove the plate [A].
9. Disconnect two harnesses [A].
SM 4-201 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
10. Remove front fusing holder [A].
11. Remove the two fusing lamps (H6, H7) [A].
• Never touch the surface of a fusing lamp with bare hands.

• The fusing lamps (H6, H7) are fragile so handle them with care.
Re-assembly
Each fusing lamp is rated for a different voltage and must be re-installed at its original location.
• The rear lamp connectors are color coded.
• The rear lamp bracket is embossed with the letters G, B show your where each lamp with
its Green, or Blue connector should be installed.
• The front lamp bracket is also embossed with these letters, but the front connectors are all
white.
• Use the rear lamp bracket as a guide for re-installing the lamps correctly.
Hot Roller, Pressure Roller

Do this procedure when you want to remove both rollers.
1. Remove the web unit Web Cleaning Roller
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-202 SM
Fusing Unit
2. Insert the tips of two screwdrivers and press down to release the pressure arm.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Disassemble:
[A] C-clamps (both ends)
[B] Drive gear
[C] Bushings front and rear
[D] Bearings front and rear
4. Remove hot roller [E]
5. Disconnect entrance guide plate [A].
SM 4-203 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
6. Remove pressure roller [B].
• The pressure roller and pressure roller bearing should always be replaced
together.
7. Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the bushings with Barrierta S552R.
• If the bushings are warm, allow them to cool before applying the Barrierta grease.
Applying the grease while the bushings are hot could generate gas.
Pressure Roller Only

Do this procedure if you need to remove only the pressure roller.
2. Turn the fusing unit upside down.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-204 SM
Fusing Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Remove lower cover [A].
5. Remove pressure roller cleaning unit [A].
6. Release the pressure arms [A].
SM 4-205 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
7. Remove pressure roller springs [A].
8. Remove the levers [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-206 SM
Fusing Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
9. Finally, remove pressure roller [A].
Put your fingers on the ends of the roller and slide the roller to one side to remove it.
SM 4-207 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
• The fusing lamps (H6, H7) are fragile. Work carefully to avoid breaking them.
• During assembly, handle the roller carefully to avoid scratching it on the bracket.
• Make sure the tabs and grooves of the lower cover are engaged correctly before
tightening the screw.
Checking the Fusing Nip

There are two ways to check the width of the nip between the pressure roller and hot roller.
Method 1
1. Open SP1109-001, set it to “1”.
2. Click the button in the upper right corner of the screen to switch from the SP Screen to the
Copy Screen.
3. Make a copy. The sheet of paper will stop in the nip of the pressure roller and hot roller for
the prescribed time, and then exit.
4. Measure the width of the nip.
Method 1
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-208 SM
Fusing Unit
1. Open SP1109-01 and set it to “1”.

2. Open SP2902 and select the Black Band Test Pattern.
3. Click the button in the upper right corner of the screen to switch from the SP Screen to the
Copy Screen.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
4. Make a copy and then measure the width of the nip.
t and
• The optimum width for the IM 7000/8000 is 5.5±0.5 mm
• The optimum width for the IM 9000 is 7.5±0.5 mm.
Manual Nip Adjustment
The size of the nip is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the amount of pressure exerted by
the pressure roller on the hot roller.
• When fusing is performed poorly, you can adjust the nip width [A].
• Two holes are provided on each pressure arm for the springs [B]. Normally the springs
should be attached to the lower holes.
• Attaching the springs to the upper holes exerts less pressure on the hot roller. Attach the
springs to the upper holes only for especially thin paper, or when fusing is performing
poorly (wrinkling, excessive curl, etc.)
4.12.7 STRIPPER PAWLS

SM 4-209 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
3. Remove bracket [B].
4. Stripper pawl [A].
4.12.8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT

1. After the machine is turned on, make an A4/LT LEF copy, then stop the machine while the
paper is still in the fusing unit by switching the machine off.
• This is easier with an OHP sheet. Use an OHP sheet if you have one available.
2. Open the front door, then turn the fusing knob to feed out the copy.
3. Measure the width of the band on the part of the image where it is particularly black. The
band, called the nip band [A], should be 9.0 ± 0.7 mm at the center.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-210 SM
Fusing Unit
• When the fusing is incorrect (wrinkles, offset, curl), measure the nip band width.
• The nip band width can be adjusted by changing the position of the springs [B] on the
ends of the pressure roller.
• The fusing temperature can also be adjusted with SP1105 (Fusing Temperature
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
Adjustment) for Normal, OHP, and Thick Paper.
t and
4.12.9 FUSING UNIT EXIT SENSOR
2. Open the hot roller stripper pawl unit [A]
3. Remove:
[B] Exit guide plate
[C] Fusing exit sensor holder
[D] Plate spring
[E] Fusing exit sensor (S66)
SM 4-211 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
4.12.10 FUSING/EXIT MOTOR

2. Open the IOB Bracket.
3. The fusing exit motor (M26) is behind the fusing exit motor bracket.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-212 SM
Fusing Unit
4. Remove the clamp [A], and then remove fusing exit motor bracket [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Remove the cover [A] of fusing exit motor (M26).
SM 4-213 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
6. Free the harness at the upper right corner of the motor bracket [A].
7. Press down pulley arm [A] to release tension on the belt.

8. Disconnect drive belt [B] from pulleys.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-214 SM
Fusing Unit
9. Disconnect ground plate at top and bottom.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
10. Remove ground plate and drive belt.
• The top arm of the ground plate bracket has the "U" cutout.
11. Disconnect motor:

[A] Top
[B] Lower right
[C] Lower left
SM 4-215 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
12. Remove the bracket with motor attached.

13. Lay the bracket and motor on a flat, clean surface.
14. Turn the bracket over.

15. Remove the screws, and then separate the bracket and motor.
4.12.11 FUSING EXIT SENSOR (S66), EXIT UNIT ENTRANCE

SENSORS (S25)
1. Open the front door and pull out the exit/inverter unit.
2. Disconnect fusing exit sensor bracket [A].
3. Remove fusing exit sensor (S66) [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-216 SM
Fusing Unit
4. Disconnect exit unit entrance sensor bracket [C].

5. Remove exit unit entrance sensor (S25) [D].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.12.12 TURN SENSOR
1. Remove the fusing unit cover. Fusing Unit Removal
2. The sensor is on the left front corner of the fusing unit tray.
3. Disconnect and free harnesses [A].
SM 4-217 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
4. Disconnect sensor bracket [B].
5. Remove bracket with sensor attached, and then disconnect sensor.
6. Separate sensor from bracket.
4.12.13 FUSING PRESSURE RELEASE SENSOR (S22)

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-218 SM
Fusing Unit
2. Remove fusing pressure release sensor bracket [A]
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Separate bracket and sensor.
4.12.14 FUSING PRESSURE MOTOR

SM 4-219 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
2. Remove fusing pressure motor cover [A].
3. Remove fusing pressure motor [A].
4.12.15 TEMPERATURE SENSOR

2. Move the toner bottle holder to the right.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-220 SM
Fusing Unit
3. Remove the inner cover next to the power switch.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Release the clamps, disconnect the connector [A] of the temperature sensor, and then
remove the bracket [B].
• When attaching the inner cover, make sure that the harness is inside the cover.
5. Remove the sensor bracket with sensor attached.
SM 4-221 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fusing Unit
6. Separate the sensor and bracket.
4.12.16 IMPORTANT SP CODES: FUSING UNIT

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the fusing unit.
Item SP No. Function
Fusing idling 1907 This SP switches pre-fusing idling on/off. Pre-fusing idling can be
on/off switched on and adjusted for heavier, thick paper to improve fusing.
Fusing idling 1103 Adjusts the length of time the hot roller is allowed to idle in order to
time raise the fusing temperature.
Fusing jam SC 1159 This SP determines what the machine does when paper jams occur
settings three consecutive times in the fusing unit.
(A jam alert is shown on the screen, and the operator can remove
the jam, the machine issues SC559, the machine stops and cannot
be used until the CE corrects the problem.
Fusing 1105 Adjust temperature for Normal, OHP, Thick Paper
temperature
adjustment
Fusing 1106 Displays the fusing temperature at the center and end of the hot
temperature roller, and temperature of the pressure roller.
display
Nip band 1109-001 Open SP1109-001, set it to “1”. Click the button in the upper right
measuring corner of the screen to switch from the SP Screen to the Copy
Screen. Make a copy. The sheet of paper will stop in the nip of the
pressure roller and hot roller for the prescribed time, and then exit.
Measure the width of the nip.
Web count 1902-001 After the web has been replaced, this SP code must be reset to
zero.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-222 SM
Duplex Unit
4.13 DUPLEX UNIT
4.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
1.
t and
Open the front door.
2. Pull out the duplex unit [A].
3. Remove the ring and the stopper [A] from the right side of the duplex unit.
SM 4-223 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Duplex Unit
4. Remove the screws of the bracket [A] and the stopper [B] from the left side of the duplex
unit.
5. Remove the duplex unit.
Re-installation
To re-install the duplex unit;
1. Insert the duplex unit partially, only until it enters the black guide rail, and then re-attach the
stopper to each slide.
2. Next, push the duplex unit into the machine completely. This method prevents interference
from the guide plate.
4.13.2 ADJUSTMENTS
Duplex Unit Side-to-Side Adjustment

1. Remove the duplex unit front cover. (Duplex Unit Front Cover)
2. Loosen the left lock screw, then adjust the position of the duplex unit.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-224 SM
Duplex Unit
Jogger Fence Adjustment

SP1008 Duplex Fence Adjustment
Execute this SP to adjust the distance between the jogger fences.
3BReplacemen
A smaller value shortens the distance. If the fences are too far apart, skewing may
Adjustment
occur in the duplex tray. If the fences are too close, the paper may be creased in the
t and
duplex unit.
4.13.3 DUPLEX MOTORS
Duplex Unit Front Cover

2. Pull out the duplex unit [A].
3. Remove the duplex unit front cover [A].
SM 4-225 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Duplex Unit
4. There are three motors in the duplex unit.
1 Duplex inverter motor

2 Duplex Jogger motor (M6)
3 Duplex Transport motor (M8)
Duplex Inverter Motor

1. Open the front door, and then pull out the duplex unit.
2. Remove the duplex unit front cover. Duplex Unit Front Cover
3. Remove the cover [A] of the motor.
4. Disconnect the connector.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-226 SM
Duplex Unit
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Re-assembly
1. Hook the timing belt [A] onto the motor.
Duplex Jogger Motor (M6)

2. Pull out the duplex unit.
4. Remove the duplex jogger motor (M6) [A].
SM 4-227 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Duplex Unit
Duplex Transport Motor (M8)

5. Remove the motor (M8) [A] with the bracket attached.
• Re-install and remove the motor with bracket attached. There is no need to
separate motor and bracket.
• When attaching the duplex transport motor (M8), hook the timing belt [A] onto the
motor.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-228 SM
Duplex Unit
4.13.4 DUPLEX SENSORS
Jogger Fence HP Sensor

3BReplacemen
Adjustment
2. Remove the spring.
t and
3. Remove the jogger HP sensor [A] with the bracket attached.
4. Remove the jogger HP sensor [A].
Duplex Entrance Sensor (S15)

SM 4-229 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Duplex Unit
3. Remove the duplex entrance sensor (S15) [A].
Duplex Transport Sensor 3 (S20)

1. Disassemble right half of table [A].
• The front screw is a shoulder screw.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-230 SM
Duplex Unit
2. Remove sensor bracket [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove transport sensor 3 [A].
Inverter Exit Sensor, Transport Sensors 1, 2

1. Remove the duplex unit. Duplex Unit Removal
4. Remove the cross-stay [A].
SM 4-231 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Duplex Unit
5. Open the metal clamps [A] and remove the inverter unit [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-232 SM
Duplex Unit
6. Remove reverse trigger roller shaft [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Disconnect jogger fences [A].
SM 4-233 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Duplex Unit
8. Disassemble left half of table [A].
• The front screw [B] is a shoulder screw.

• To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to the
right to disengage the tabs before you remove it.
10. Remove the inverter exit sensor [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-234 SM
Duplex Unit
11. Remove the transport sensor 1 [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
12. Remove the transport sensor 2 [A].
4.13.5 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove the duplex unit. Duplex Unit Removal
4. Remove the cross-stay [A].
SM 4-235 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Duplex Unit
5. Open the metal clamps [A] and remove the inverter unit [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-236 SM
Duplex Unit
6. Remove reverse trigger roller shaft [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Disconnect jogger fences [A].
SM 4-237 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Duplex Unit
8. Disassemble left half of table [A].
• The front screw [B] is a shoulder screw.

• To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to the
right to disengage the tabs before you remove it.
9. Remove the jogger motor bracket. Duplex Jogger Motor (M6)
10. If you are replacing the belt, set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the belt and
tighten the screw [A].
-or-
If you are adjusting the belt, loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece [B] on the belt to
the left or right to adjust the position of the front fence, then tighten the screw.
4.13.6 IMPORTANT SP CODES: DUPLEX UNIT

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the duplex unit.
Item SP Function
No.
Duplex fence 1008 Adjusts the distance between the jogger fences in the duplexer. A
adjustment smaller value shortens the distance. If the fences are too far apart,
skewing may occur in the duplex tray. If the fences are too close, the
paper may be creased in the duplex unit.
Page 5212 Positions horizontally and vertically the page numbers printed on both
numbering sides during duplexing.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-238 SM
Paper Feed Units
4.14 PAPER FEED UNITS
4.14.1 PAPER TRAYS
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Tandem Tray
2. Pull out the tandem tray and push the right tandem tray [A] into the rear side.
3. Remove the left tandem tray [A] ( x 5).
SM 4-239 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
4. Remove the right tandem tray [A].
Re-assembly
When re-installing the right tandem tray:
1. Make sure that the wheels [A] ride on the slide rail [B].
2. Make sure that the tandem tray stopper [C] is set behind the stopper [D] on the frame.
Universal Trays
1. Pull out Tray 2 or Tray 3 [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-240 SM
Paper Feed Units
2. Lift the tray [B] out of the drawer.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.14.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Pull out Tray 1, the tandem feed tray.
3. Remove rear bottom plate [A].
4. Remove return sensor [B].
SM 4-241 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
4.14.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR

2. Pull out Tray 1, the tandem feed tray.
3. Remove rear bottom plate [A].
4. Remove back fence transport gear [B].
5. Push the back fence [C] to the right.
6. Remove rear HP sensor [D].
4.14.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR (S49)

1. Turn off the machine.
2. Remove the right tandem tray Tandem Tray
3. Remove cover [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-242 SM
Paper Feed Units
4. Side fences [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Remove bottom plate [A]
6. Disconnect sensor [B].
7. Remove sensor [C].
4.14.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE

Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift wire. The shaft
must be removed to replace the lift wire of the bottom plate.
1. Remove Tray 1, tandem tray. Tandem Tray
SM 4-243 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
2. Remove the inner cover [A].
3. Remove the left stay [A].

4. Lift the front bottom plate slightly, and then unhook the wire stoppers [B]
5. Remove:
[C] Wire covers
[D] Bracket
[E] Gear
[F] Bottom plate lift wire
Re-assembly
1. Set positioning pin [A] in hole [B].
2. Set projection [C] in hole [D].
3. Position wire [E] as shown.
• Do not cross the wires.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-244 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.14.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE
At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT LEF. Only A4 or LT LEF paper can be used for
tandem feed.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull out the Tray 1 [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right [C] sides of the tandem
tray.
3. Remove the right tandem cover [A].

4. Re-position the side fences [B].
• The outer slots for A4, the inner slots for LT.
SM 4-245 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
5. Re-install the right tandem inner cover.

6. Remove tray cover [A].
7. Remove the DC motor cover [B].
8. Remove the rear side fence [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-246 SM
Paper Feed Units
9. Re-position rear cover [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
10. Re-position the side fences [A], [B].
• A4: Outer slot position
• LT: Inner slot position
11. Re-install the DC motor cover and tray cover.

12. Remove the rear bottom plate [A].
13. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [B].
• To use the paper tray for A4 size, set the screw in the left hole as shown.
• For LT size, the screw should be placed on the right.
SM 4-247 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
14. Reinstall the rear bottom plate.

15. Enter the new paper size with SP5959-001 (Paper Size – Tray 1).
16. Do the printer adjustments. Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
4.14.7 TANDEM TRAY SIDE REGISTRATION

Normally the side registration of the image can be adjusted in the SP mode.
• If the punch hole positions are not aligned from a particular feed station, however, you can
manually adjust the side registration by changing the tray cover position for that tray.
• Next, you can adjust the side registration of the image. Copy Image Adjustments:
Printing/Scanning
1. Pull out the tray and remove the right inner cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Loosen the screws and adjust the position of the plate [B].
• Adjustment range: 0 ± 2.0 mm adjustment step: 1.0 mm/step
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-248 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.14.8 PICK-UP, FEED, SEPARATION ROLLER
1. Remove the tray.
2. Remove the clip for each roller to replace it.
[1] Feed roller
[2] Pick-up roller
[3] Separation roller
• The same FRR mechanism is used in all the trays, so the rollers are
interchangeable between the trays.
• Avoid touching the surface of new rollers during replacement.
SM 4-249 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
4.14.9 PAPER TRAY LIFT MOTORS, TRAY 1 LOCK SOLENOIDS
Tray Motor, Solenoid Access

1. Turn the machine off and disconnect it from its power source.
• The tray motors and solenoids are located behind the plate where the RYB
(PCB24), PSU (PCB23), and AC drive board are mounted.
• While you are doing the procedures below, never touch any component on the
PSU (PCB23), especially a heat sink.
• These heat sinks are live and labeled with warnings not to touch them.
• These heat sinks can retain a considerable electrical charge for hours after the
machine has been turned off and unplugged.
4. As a safety precaution, disconnect the power cord from the main machine.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-250 SM
Paper Feed Units
5. Disconnect the left rear corner plate.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
6. Pull the plate away from the corner of the machine. Do not remove it.
7. Disconnect all harnesses from the RYB (PCB24), and then open the clamps above the
RYB (PCB24) to free the harnesses.
SM 4-251 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
8. Check the insulated harness on the right side of the RYB (PCB24) [A] and confirm that it is
disconnected and free.
9. At the top of the AC drive board, open the clamp and free the large harnesses.
10. Near the left edge of the RYB (PCB24), disconnect the harness guide bracket [A] by
removing screws [1], [2], [3], and edge clamp [4].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-252 SM
Paper Feed Units
11. Push the guide bracket and harnesses [B] to the left away from the board.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
12. Disconnect the mounting plate at on the left side of the RYB (PCB24) [1], on the right side
of the RYB (PCB24) [2], and near the lower right corner of the AC drive board [3].
13. Continue to disconnect the mounting plate near fan [1] and then fan [2].
14. Slowly, disconnect the left edge of the mounting plate [A], and then swing it open [B].
SM 4-253 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
15. With the mounting plate open, you can see the hidden components.
1 Tray 1 Lift Motor (M19)

4 Right Tray Lock Solenoid (in Tray 1)
5 Left Tray Lock Solenoid (in Tray 1)
• Before you service any of these components, be sure to open the trays at the front
so the motor drives and solenoid arms are disengaged.
Tray 1 Lift Motor (M19)

1. Open the board mounting plate. Tray Motor, Solenoid Access
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-254 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Unhook the motor and remove it.

SM 4-255 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-256 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Right Tray Lock Solenoid
2. The right tray lock solenoid locks the right half of the tandem tray (Tray 1) during machine
operation. It is located above Tray 2 lift motor (M17) [A].
3. Disconnect the solenoid.
4. Unhook the solenoid from the frame, and then lay it on a flat, clean surface.
SM 4-257 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
5. Disconnect the spring.
6. Disconnect the extension arm.
7. Disconnect and then remove the mounting plate.
Left Tray Lock Solenoid

2. The left tray lock solenoid locks the left half of the tandem tray (Tray 1) during machine
operation. It is located to the right of the right tray lock solenoid.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-258 SM
Paper Feed Units
3. Disconnect the solenoid.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Lay the solenoid on a flat, clean surface, and then remove the extension arm.
5. Disconnect and then remove the mounting plate.
4.14.10 PAPER FEED UNIT REMOVAL

There are three paper feed units, one for each tray.
1. Take off the front door. Front Door
2. Remove the right covers. Right Covers
SM 4-259 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
3. If the LCIT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
4. Pull out all three trays completely but do not remove them.
5. Pull out the toner collection bottle [A].
6. Open the vertical transport guide.
7. Disconnect vertical cover [A].

8. Pull it away slightly, and then disconnect the LED harness [B].
9. At the rear, disconnect the fan harness at the rear right corner of the vertical transport
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-260 SM
Paper Feed Units
guide plate.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
10. Lift the vertical guide to disconnect it, and then pull it out of the machine.
Tray 1 PFU
• This procedure is for Tray 1 only. If you are servicing Tray 2 or Tray 3, just go to the
next section below.
There is a guide plate above the PFU of Tray 1 that must be removed before you can remove
the Tray 1 PFU.
1. At the front [A] remove the guide plate screw.
SM 4-261 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
2. Swing the front of the plate [B] slightly to the right.
3. Disconnect the rear end of the machine, and then pull it out.
Tray 1, 2, 3 PFU
The remaining steps for PFU removal are basically the same for all PFUs. Each PFU has three
connectors and one lock screw at the front.
1. Free the harnesses in front of the PFU that you want to remove.
2. Disconnect the PFU.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-262 SM
Paper Feed Units
3. Remove the lock screw [A].

4. Remove the PFU [B] through the side of the machine.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Lay the PFU on a flat, clean surface.
4.14.11 PAPER FEED MOTORS

One paper feed motor is encased in each PFU unit.
1. Remove the feed unit, and then lay it on a flat, clean surface. Feed Unit Removal
2. Disconnect the corner bracket [A].
SM 4-263 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
3. Remove the ground plate [B].
• The lowest screw [1] is a machine screw. The other two screws are tapping
screws.
4. Disconnect the motor.
5. Disconnect the motor cover plate at the front [A] and at the rear [B].
6. Remove the motor bracket [A] with motor attached.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-264 SM
Paper Feed Units
7. Lay the motor and bracket [B] on a clean, flat surface.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
8. Separate motor and bracket [A].
9. Disconnect the motor from the second bracket [A].
SM 4-265 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
4.14.12 RELAY MOTOR

1. Take off the front door. Front Door
2. Remove the right covers. Right Covers
3. If the LCIT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
4. Pull out all three trays completely but do not remove them.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-266 SM
Paper Feed Units
6. Open the vertical transport guide.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Disconnect vertical cover [A].
8. Pull it away slightly, and then disconnect the LED harness [B].
9. At the rear, disconnect the fan harness at the rear right corner of the vertical transport
guide plate.
SM 4-267 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
10. Lift the vertical guide to disconnect it, and then pull it out of the machine.
11. Locate the relay motor unit [1] directly below PFU 1 [2].
12. Disconnect the front end of the relay motor unit plate.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-268 SM
Paper Feed Units
13. Remove the unit and lay it on a flat, clean surface.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
14. Remove the cover [A] from the motor.
15. Disconnect the motor from bracket [A].

16. Disconnect motor [B].
17. Connect the motor [A] before your re-attach it to the bracket with screws.
SM 4-269 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
4.14.13 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT

The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed to adjust the amount of
pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment can be done:
• When feeding special paper (thick paper)
• When the customer is experiencing feed problems
1. Remove the feed unit where you want to do the adjustment. Paper Feed Unit Removal
2. Loosen the hex screw [A].
3. The separation roller gear [B] is positioned at the groove before shipping.
4. To adjust for thick paper, move the separation roller gear to the left to decrease the
pressure.
-or-
To correct misfeeds, move the separation roller gear to the right to increase the pressure.
4.14.14 LIFT SENSOR (S30,S57,S61), PAPER END SENSOR

(S29,S56,S60)
1. Remove the PFU. Paper Feed Unit Removal
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-270 SM
Paper Feed Units
2. Locate the lift sensor (S30, S57, S61) [A] and paper end sensor (S29, S56, S60) [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove separation roller [A].
4. Remove torque limiter [B].
SM 4-271 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
5. Remove lift sensor, paper end sensor bracket [A] with sensors attached.
6. Remove lift sensor (S30, S57, S61) [A], paper end sensor (S29, S56, S60) [B] from the
bracket.
4.14.15 FEED SENSOR (S27,S54,S58), VERTICAL TRANSPORT

SENSOR (S28,S55,S59)
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-272 SM
Paper Feed Units
2. Locate the feed sensor (S27, S54, S58) [A] and vertical transport sensor (S28, S55, S59)
[B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Open the two clamps on the back of the feed unit, free the harness, and then remove gear
cover [A].
4. Remove top cover [A] from the PFU.
• The blue-circled screws in the photo are tapping screws.
SM 4-273 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
5. Open clamp [A], free the harness, separate the top of the PFU, and then lay the separated
parts on a flat, clean surface.
• You do not need to disconnect the harness.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-274 SM
Paper Feed Units
6. Remove feed sensor bracket [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Remove feed sensor (S27, S54, S58) from the bracket.
8. Remove vertical transport sensor (S28, S55, S59) [A].
4.14.16 PICK-UP SOLENOID (SOL6,SOL15,SOL17)

2. Remove the top cover of the PFU.
SM 4-275 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
3. Locate the pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) [A].
4. Disconnect springs [A], [B].
• The longer spring [A] is the rear spring and must be re-attached at the same
location.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-276 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. At the rear end of the PFU, remove gear [A] and gear shaft [B].
6. Remove feed roller [A] and feed roller collar [B].
7. Remove feed roller shaft assembly [A].
SM 4-277 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
8. Turn the PFU 90 degrees, and then remove solenoid screws at the back.
9. Remove spring [A], and then disconnect the harness.
10. Remove pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) [A] at its back end, pull out the plunger,
and then remove the solenoid.
11. Disconnect the plunger at each arm [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-278 SM
Paper Feed Units
12. Lay the parts on a flat, clean surface.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Re-assembly
1. Make sure that the connector is inside sheet [A] so it cannot interfere with other parts.
4.14.17 REVERSE RELEASE SOLENOID (SOL7,SOL16,SOL18)

2. Remove the top cover of the PFU.
3. Locate the reverse release solenoid (SOL7, SOL16, SOL18) [A].
4. Remove lift sensor (S30, S57, S61), paper end sensor bracket.
5. Remove gear cover [A] from the rear end of the PFU.
SM 4-279 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
6. Remove timing belt [A].
7. Push in coupling [A] to detach the e-ring, and then remove the coupling.
8. Use a small, precision screwdriver to release the tab, and then remove coupling [A] to the
outside.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-280 SM
Paper Feed Units
9. Remove gears [A], [B], [C].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
10. Remove gears [A], [B], [C], [D].
11. Remove bracket [A].
SM 4-281 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
12. Disconnect reverse release solenoid bracket [A] and then remove it with solenoid attached.
13. Remove reverse release solenoid (SOL7, SOL16, SOL18) [A] from the bracket.
4.14.18 RELAY SENSOR (S5)

1. Remove the right upper cover. Right Upper Cover.
2. Disconnect relay sensor bracket [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-282 SM
Paper Feed Units
3. Remove relay sensor (S5) [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.14.19 REGISTRATION MOTOR (M2)
2. Remove the controller box. Controller Box
SM 4-283 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
5. Remove the registration motor (M2) [A].
• When installing the registration motor (M2), attach the timing belt when the
development unit power back on the left side is removed. (Development Unit
Power Pack)
4.14.20 BY-PASS TRAY
By-Pass Tray Removal

The by-pass paper size detection board and paper length sensor (S8) (photosensor) are inside
the by-pass tray.
1. Remove the bypass tray cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-284 SM
Paper Feed Units
2. Remove the fixing parts from the bypass tray .
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Disconnect the bypass tray on the front side [A].
4. Disconnect the tray on the rear side [B], and then remove the tray.
5. Lay the removed tray on a flat, clean surface.
SM 4-285 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
6. When you re-install the tray, tuck the harnesses into the corner slot of the bypass tray
before you re-install it.
By-Pass Tray Disassembly

1. Remove the By-Pass Tray. By-Pass Tray Removal
2. Remove the screws from the two halves of the tray.
3. Remove the two halves of the tray [A].
4.14.21 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD

2. Disassemble the By-Pass Tray. By-Pass Tray Disassembly
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-286 SM
Paper Feed Units
3. Disconnect the two halves of the tray.

4. Remove the screws from the paper size detection board [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Pull the pin [A] out of the rack gear [B] to remove the paper size detection [C].
Re-assembly
Go into the SP mode and do SP1904 to calibrate the maximum and minimum paper sizes for
the side fences:
1. SP1904-001 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection – Minimum Size: Move the side fences to
the minimum size, then execute this SP.
2. SP1904-002 By-pass Tray Paper Size Detection – Maximum Size: Move the side fences to
the maximum size, then execute this SP.
By-Pass Paper Length Sensor

SM 4-287 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
3. Remove the by-pass paper length sensor [A].
4.14.22 BY-PASS TRAY ROLLERS

1. Remove right covers. Right Covers
2. Remove the By-Pass Tray By-Pass Tray Removal
3. Remove the by-pass cover [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-288 SM
Paper Feed Units
• When attaching the by-pass cover, put Mylars on it.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. With the cover removed, you can access the rollers.
[1] Pick-up roller

[2] Feed roller
[3] Separation (reverse) roller
5. Remove each roller and replace it.
• During replacement, try to avoid touching the surfaces of the rollers with bare
hands.
• The FRR mechanisms for Tray 1 (tandem tray), Tray 2, Tray 3 (universal trays),
By-Pass Tray, and ADF are similar, but the rollers are interchangeable only
between Trays 1,2,3 (not By-Pass, ADF).
4.14.23 BY-PASS SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE

ADJUSTMENT
The position of the drive gear of the separation roller can be changed to adjust the amount of
pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment can be done:
• When feeding special paper, especially thick paper
SM 4-289 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
• When the customer experiences feed problems

1. Use an Allen key to loosen the separation roller gear [A].
• The separation roller gear is positioned at the groove before shipping.

2. Loosen and move the separation roller gear to adjust pressure.
• Move left to lessen pressure and correct double feeding.
• Move right to increase pressure and correct failure to feed.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-290 SM
Paper Feed Units
4.14.24 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Remove cover [A] ( x 4)
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
2. Remove these components'
• Development unit Development Unit Removal and Re-Installation
3. Remove paper dust collection unit [A].
SM 4-291 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
• When removing the paper dust collection unit, shift the unit to the upper side while
pulling the tab [A] forward, and then holding the tab [A] to remove the
unit.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-292 SM
Paper Feed Units
• When attaching the paper dust collection unit, set the bracket of the paper dust
collection unit to the two cutouts [A] [B] at the rear side.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Separate the unit.
5. Turn the top over and note the position of the mylar over the registration sensor (S3). The
mylar must remain on top of the sensor as shown.
SM 4-293 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
6. Disconnect sensor and harness from the unit.
7. Disconnect sensor.
4.14.25 BY-PASS UNIT
By-Pass Unit Removal
• Work carefully to avoid catching any harnesses on the unit while removing and
re-installing it.
Preparation
2. Remove right upper cover. Right Upper Cover
3. Remove rear covers. Rear Covers
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-294 SM
Paper Feed Units
5. Remove inner cover C2.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
6. Disconnect the cover LED.
7. Remove the cover of by-pass motor.
SM 4-295 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
8. Disconnect the harnesses.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-296 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
9. Pull the duplex unit [A] out of the machine far enough so you can see the pin [B].
• If the duplex unit remains closed, you cannot remove or re-install the bypass unit.
The duplex unit must be pulled out so the pin is free before you can remove the
unit or re-install it.
10. Pull out the front side of the bypass unit [A] first to remove it.
SM 4-297 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
Re-installation
1. Pull out the duplex unit [A] before you re-install the bypass unit, and then confirm that pin
[B] is out of its hole.
• If the duplex unit is in the machine, you will not be able to re-install the bypass unit.
Make sure the duplex unit is pulled out completely.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-298 SM
Paper Feed Units
2. After you have re-installed the bypass unit and re-connected the motor and sensors, check
this sensor to the right and make sure that it is securely connected.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Work carefully to avoid catching any harnesses on the unit while moving it.
4. After re-installing the bypass unit, make sure no harnesses are pinched between the
bypass unit and the frame.
By-Pass Motor
1. Remove the by-pass unit. By-Pass Unit Removal
2. The by-pass motor is on the back of the by-pass unit.
SM 4-299 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
3. Unfasten the motor bracket.
4. Loosen the tension screw [A] to create some slack in the drive belt and remove the motor
bracket [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-300 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
6. After you re-install the motor, move the tension screw [A] to put more tension on the belt,
and then tighten the screw.
Guide Plate Sensor

1. Remove the by-pass unit. By-pass Unit Removal
2. The guide plate sensor is on the inside of the rear plate.
SM 4-301 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
3. On the other side of the plate, raise the guide plate away from the sensor.
4. Free the harness [A].

5. Unfasten the sensor [B].
6. Disconnect sensor and harness.
4.14.26 PAPER PATH LEDS
LED Locations
The paper feed path LEDs are mounted inside the inner covers on the front of the main
machine. An LED lights when a paper jam occurs at that location.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-302 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
No. Name
1 Jam LED A
2 Jam LED B1
3 Jam LED B2
4 Jam LED C2
5 Jam LED C1
6 Jam LED D1/E1
7 Jam LED D2/D3
8 Jam LED E2/Z
Each LED assembly is comprised of a plate held by one screw [1], an easily detachable lens [2],
a small harness and connector [3] and the LED [4].
Jam LED A: Vertical Inner Cover

2. Pull out the trays [A] (do not remove them.)
3. Disconnect the vertical inner cover [B].
SM 4-303 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
4. Pull the cover away slightly [C], and then disconnect harness [D].
5. Lay the inner cover on a flat, clean surface.

6. Remove plate [1], remove LED and lens, and then disconnect the LED [2].
7. Separate the LED and lens [3].
Jam LEDs C2, B2, B1

2. Disconnect the inner cover [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-304 SM
Paper Feed Units
3. Pull the cover away slightly, and then disconnect harness [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Remove plate, and then disconnect the LED [1].
Jam LED C1 Inner Cover

2. Disconnect the inner cover [A].
SM 4-305 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units

Jam LED E3/Z: Inverter Duplex Inner Cover

3. Disconnect the duplex unit front cover [A].
5. Lay the duplex unit front cover on a flat, clean surface.

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-306 SM
Paper Feed Units
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Jam LED D1/E1: Fusing Unit Inner Cover
2. Pull out the fusing unit [A].
3. Open the top of the fusing unit [B].
4. Locate the hole [A] in the shaft of the large knob on the front of the fusing unit.
5. If you cannot see the hole, turn the knob until the hole is visible.
SM 4-307 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
6. Insert a small screwdriver [B] into hole to keep the shaft from turning when you remove the
large knob.
7. Remove large knob [A].

8. Disconnect top left corner [B] of the cover.
9. Disconnect right side [A] and left side [B] of the cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-308 SM
Paper Feed Units
10. Pull the cover away slightly, and then disconnect harness [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
11. Lay the cover on a flat, clean surface.
12. Remove plate [1].
13. Disconnect the LED, and then separate the LED and lens [2].
14. Remove plate [1].

15. Disconnect the LED, and then separate the LED and lens [2].
Re-assembly
SM 4-309 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units
1. Be sure to remove the screwdriver and close the top of the fusing unit before you push the
fusing unit into the machine.
4.14.27 PAPER FEED ADJUSTMENTS
Paper Registration
The position of image on paper can be adjusted with SP codes in the main scan and sub scan
directions. Before doing any of these adjustments you should always first check the alignment
of the laser unit. Laser Unit Alignment
Main Scan (Side-to-Side) Registration
• SP1002-001 to 007 (Side-to-Side Registration). Use this SP code to correct paper
registration problems for each paper feed station (Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Bypass Tray, LCIT,
and Duplex Tray (during duplex printing). These settings correct printing position.
• SP4011 (Main Scan Registration Adj). This SP adjusts the side-to-side registration for
scanning in the main scan direction across the page. [–2.5 to 2.5/0.1mm]. Setting a
negative value shifts the image toward the left edge, and setting a positive value shifts the
image toward the right edge.
Sub Scan (Vertical) Registration
This SP codes are used for sub scan adjustments.
• SP1001 (Printer Sub Scan Registration – Main Tray Feed, LCIT Duplex)
• SP1002 (Printer Sub Scan Registration – Thick Paper Main Tray, LCIT Duplex)
• SP1003 (Printer Sub Scan Registration – Bypass)
• SP1004 (Printer Sub Scan Registration – Thick Paper Bypass)
• SP4010 (Scanner Sub Scan Registration)
Buckle Adjustment
During paper feed, the registration roller stops but the paper keeps moving for a very short time
so its leading edge can buckle against the roller to correct paper skew. The amount of buckle at
the registration roller can be adjusted for special paper.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-310 SM
Paper Feed Units
• Too much buckle can cause the paper to wrinkle, crease, or jam when feeding Z-folded
paper because the interval between the sheets is too small.
• Too little buckle can cause lag jams and lead to more skew in the paper path.
SP1003 adjusts the amount of buckled by adjusting the timing of the registration motor (M2) (a
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
higher setting creates more buckle).
t and
2. Open SP1003. [0 to 9/0/1 mm]
• Enter a smaller setting to correct paper wrinkling, creasing, or jams with Z-folded
sheets.
• Enter a larger setting to correct lag jams and skew.
1003 Registration Buckle Adjustment
Adjusts the registration motor (M2) timing. This timing determines the amount of
paper buckle at registration. (A higher setting causes more buckling.)
[–9 to +9/0/1 mm]
1 Tray LCIT
2 Duplex Tray
3 By-pass Tray
4 Thick Paper Tray
5 Thick Paper Duplex Tray
4.14.28 IMPORTANT SP CODES: PAPER FEED

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing paper feed components.
Image 4011 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in the main scan
registration: direction across the page. Setting a negative value shifts the image
Main scan toward the left edge, and setting a positive value shifts the image
toward the right edge.
Leading edge 1001 Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming
registration area pattern.
Paper 1003 Adjusts the registration motor (M2) timing. This timing determines
registration the amount of paper buckle at registration. (A higher setting causes
more buckling.) The buckling straightens the paper in the paper
path.
Paper 1002-1 Use this SP to adjust printing side-to-side paper registration for
registration: to 7 each feed station. These SP's should be adjusted after replacing
Printing the laser synchronization detector or the laser optical unit.
Paper size set 5959 The paper sizes must be selected with this SP code for Tray 1
(tandem tray), the LCIT, and Cover Interposer Tray. Tray 2 and Tray
3 can detect their paper sizes automatically with switches.
SM 4-311 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Feed Units

Registration, sub 4010 Adjusts the registration of the leading edge for scanning in the sub
scan scan direction.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-312 SM
PCBs, HDD
4.15 PCBS, HDD
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
Board Locations
Inside the Controller Box
[1] BICU (PCB11)

[2] Controller board (PCB18)
[3] HDD
Below the Controller Box
[1] RYB (PCB24)

[2] PSU (PCB23)
[3] AC Control Drive Board (PCB25)
Behind the Controller Box
The controller box must be opened to access this board.
SM 4-313 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
[1] IOB (PCB1)
• Before you touch a board, touch a metal surface to discharge accumulated static from
your hands.
• Remove screws carefully so the tip of the screwdriver does not touch any part of the
board.
• Handle boards carefully by their edges to avoid sharp edges and points on the backs
of the boards.
• To avoid electrical shock, never touch a component on the PSU (PCB23) or AC drive
board. Some of these parts retain an electric charge long after the machine has been
turned off.
4.15.2 CONTROLLER BOARD REPLACEMENT
Before You Begin

• The photo below shows rear of the machine with the controller box cover removed.
• The controller board (PCB18) [2] is on the right, connected to the BICU (PCB11) [1] on the
left.
• Each model in this series (IM 7000, IM 8000, IM 9000) has a different controller board.
• If you install the wrong controller board, the machine will return SC955-03. The machine
will not operate until the correct controller board has been installed.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-314 SM
PCBs, HDD
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
[1]: BICU
[2]: Controller board
[3]: HDD
Controller Board
2. Remove controller box cover plate. Controller Box Cover Plate
3. If there are any option I/F boards in the controller box, remove them.
4. Remove the connectors and screws from the controller board (PCB18) [A].
SM 4-315 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
5. Unfasten the controller faceplate [A].
6. Disconnect the connector connected with the BICU (PCB11) [B], and then draw the
controller board (PCB18) [A].
7. Separate the controller board (PCB18) [A] and controller board guide plate [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-316 SM
PCBs, HDD
8. Remove both NVRAM [A] from the old controller board and install them on the new
controller board.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• The controller board (PCB18) has two NVRAMs, 2M-1 and 2M-2.
• These NVRAMs are always replaced as a set.
• Each NVRAM must be installed at the correct location as shown above.
• If their positions are reversed, this will cause a short circuit and damage the board
and NVRAMs.
9. Fasten the controller board guide plate to the controller board (PCB18).
• The plate is soft metal so install it carefully to prevent bending it out of shape.
10. Connect the left edge of the controller board (PCB18) to the right edge of the
BICU (PCB11) on the other side of the partition.
SM 4-317 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
When Installing the New Controller Board

The machine has an NVRAM [A] on the controller board (PCB18).
When replacing the controller board (PCB18), remove the NVRAM from the old controller board.
Then install it on the new controller board. If this is not done, SC195-00 occurs.
• When replacing the controller board (PCB18), first, check which ESA applications have
been installed. After replacing the controller board (PCB18), re-install the ESA applications
by following the installation instructions for each application.
• After reinstalling the ESA applications, print the SMC (SP-5-990-024/025 (SMC:
SDK/Application Info)).
4.15.3 BICU
The BICU (PCB11) is located at [1].
[1]: BICU
[2]: Controller board
[3]: HDD
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-318 SM
PCBs, HDD
3. Remove the BICU (PCB11) [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Attach the SMB (PCB22) [A] that is removed from the old BICU onto the new BICU.
• If turning ON the main power without SMB (PCB22), the machine cannot start.
5. Input the machine serial number to BICU (PCB11) using SP5-811-004.
• If the serial number is incorrect, SC995-01 may occur.

6. Turn OFF then ON the main power.
NVRAM/SMB Replacement Procedure
• When removing the NVRAM/SMB, do not put the NVRAM/SMB near a static charge.
SM 4-319 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
The data stored in the NVRAM/SMB might be damaged by the static charges.
There is a single pair of NVRAM/SMB in the machine: NVRAM on the controller board and SMB
on the BICU.
DO NOT replace the NVRAM on the controller board and the SMB on the BICU
simultaneously.
Doing so will cause the following symptoms when turning ON the machine:
• Status light red
• SC195 and SC995-1
• Toner cartridge set error
• Fusing unit set error
NEVER lose either the original NVRAM on the controller board or the original SMB on the
BICU. If they are lost, the machine will not recover even if they are replaced with a new
set of NVRAM/SMB.
NVRAM on the Controller Board
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Print out the SMC data (“ALL”) in SP5-990-001.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card into slot #2, and then turn on the main power switch.
5. Upload the Address Book Data to the blank SD card in SP5-846-051 (UCS Setting / Back
Up All Addr Book).
• If the Fax Option is installed on the machine, do the following:

• Print out the "Box List". (Settings > Fax Settings > Reception Settings > Box
Setting > Box Setting: Print List)
• Print out the "Program Special Sender List". (Settings > Fax Settings >
Reception Settings > Register Special Sender > Register Special Sender:
Print List.)
• Take note of the settings in "Settings > Fax Settings > Reception Settings".
• Take note of the settings in "Settings > Fax Settings > Send Settings".
6. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord.
7. Remove the SD card containing the Address Book Data from slot #2.
8. Insert another blank SD card into slot #2, plug in the AC power cord, and then turn on the
main power switch.
9. Upload the NVRAM data to the blank SD card in SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload).
• Make sure to note the following SP settings as they will not be automatically
uploaded to the SD card. These settings will be input manually in Step 16.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-320 SM
PCBs, HDD
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)

0: No external controller, 1: EFI controller
• SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer )
0: Valid, 1: Invalid
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
• SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner )
t and
0: Valid, 1: Invalid
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting / On Board NIC )
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting / On Board USB )
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
10. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord.
11. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from slot #2.
12. Replace the NVRAM [A] on the Controller Board with the new one.
• There is one NVRAM on the controller board as mentioned in When Installing

the New Controller Board_132060906.
• Work carefully to avoid mistakes when installing the NVRAM. Incorrect installation
will damage both the NVRAM and controller board.
13. Plug in the AC power cord, and then turn ON the main power switch.
• DO NOT insert the SD card containing the NVRAM data that you removed in Step
7 before turning on the main switch.
• SC995-02 (Defective NVRAM) will appear when powering on the main power
switch, but ignore this SC. DO NOT turn off the main power switch. Continue with
this procedure.
14. Re-insert the SD card containing the NVRAM data that you removed in Step 5 back into
slot #2.
15. Download the old NVRAM data from the SD card onto the new NVRAM in SP5-825-001
SM 4-321 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
(NVRAM Data Download).
• This will take about 2 or 3 minutes.
• After the download completes, "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear, but
ignore this message and press the “Exit” button. DO NOT reboot at this moment.
• SC870-11 (Address Book Data Error) will appear in the banner, but DO NOT turn
off the main power switch. Continue with this procedure.
16. Input the following SP settings according to the notes took in Step 5.
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)
• SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer)
• SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner)
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting / On Board NIC)
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting / On Board USB)
• "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear after inputting each of the above SP
settings, but ignore this message and press the “Exit” button. DO NOT reboot at
this moment.
17. Turn OFF the main power switch. This will take about 3 minutes. Wait until the machine
power is turned off completely, and then remove the SD card from slot #2.
19. Insert the SD card containing the Address Book Data removed in Step 11 into slot #2.
20. Execute SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting / Restore All Addr Book) to download the Address
Book Data on to the new NVRAM.
• SP5-846-052 will fail, if the settings in SP5-193-001, SP5-985-001 and

SP5-985-002 input in Step 16 are incorrect.
• "Completed. You have to reboot." will appear if SP5-846-052 results in success.
21. Turn OFF the main power switch and remove the SD card from slot #2.
• Make sure that the “Reception Settings” and “Send Settings” correspond with the
notes took in Step 9. Correct the settings if they are wrong.
23. Print out the SMC data (“ALL”) in SP5-990-001, and make sure that it matches the SMC
data printed out in Step 2 (except for the total counter value).
• The total counter value is reset to “0” when the NVRAM is replaced.
24. Do the self-check Process Control.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-322 SM
PCBs, HDD
25. Do ACC for the printer application program.
• If you cannot execute SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and SP5-825-001

(NVRAM Data Download) for some reason, try the following.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
• Restore the settings manually with all the data on the SMC report (factory
t and
default setting) provided with the machine.
• Reinstall the Data Overwrite Security function and HDD Encryption feature.
• If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM
replacement, restore the encryption key. (HDD Encryption_1)
SMB on the BICU
Before performing the following procedure, contact your supervisor to obtain information on
how to input the machine serial number in the new SMB.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Print out the SMC data (SP5-990-001).
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Install an SD card into SD card slot #2 and then, turn on the main power switch.
5. Copy the SMB data to an SD card (SP5-824-001).
6. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the SMB on the BICU and put back the covers.
8. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the main power switch.
9. Select the paper-size system in SP5-131-001 (Paper Size Type Selection).
0: DOM (JAPAN)
1: NA
2: EU
10. Specify the area code in SP5-807-001.
1: DOM (JAPAN)
2: NA
3: EU
4: TWN
5: AA
6: CHN
• Setting the wrong area code will cause the system to display SC995-04(CPM Set
Error).
11. Input the machine serial number according to the procedure instructed by your supervisor.
• Inputting an incorrect serial number will cause the system to display SC195-00
SM 4-323 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
(Serial Number Set Error).

12. Turn the main power switch off and on.
13. Copy the data from the SD card to the SMB (SP5-825-001).
14. Turn OFF the main power switch, and then remove the SD card from SD card slot #2.
16. Specify the SP and UP mode settings, if necessary.
17. Do the self-check Process Control.
18. Do ACC for the copier application program.
19. Do ACC for the printer application program.
• If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the SMB
replacement, restore the encryption key.
4.15.4 HDD
HDD Removal
[1] BICU (PCB11)

[2] Controller board (PCB18)
[3] HDD
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-324 SM
PCBs, HDD
3. Disconnect the HDD from the controller board (PCB18).
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Unfasten the HDD bracket.
5. Unhook the HDD bracket from the machine frame.
SM 4-325 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
6. Lay the bracket with HDD attached on a flat, clean surface.
7. Remove the screws from the bracket front [A] and rear [B].
8. Separate the HDD from the bracket.
Re-installation
1. Hook the HDD bracket to the frame on the right so the bracket is flat against the frame.
• If the bracket is not flat against the frame you will not be able to re-attach the
screws.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-326 SM
PCBs, HDD
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
2. After restoring the machine for normal operation, execute SP5832-011 (HDD Format – All)
to format the hard disk.
After HDD Replacement

Explain to the operator that after a faulty HDD has been replaced the following data is lost and
cannot be recovered'
• Document server documents
• Custom-made stamps
• Document server address book.
The address book and document server documents must be input again.
If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security feature, the DOS function must be set
enabled again with SP5878-001.
4.15.5 RYB (RELAY BOARD)

1. Remove both rear covers. Rear Covers
3. Remove the RYB (PCB24) [A].
SM 4-327 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
4.15.6 PSU
PSU (PCB23) High Voltage Applied Part

Before the PSU (PCB23) is attached, disconnect the power plug and wait for about 3 minutes.

3. Remove the PSU (PCB23) [A].
• To avoid personal injury, never touch the back of the board.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-328 SM
PCBs, HDD
• Some of the soldered contacts are extremely sharp and can cut or puncture your
fingers if you grip the back of the board.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. While carefully handling the board by its edges, lay the PSU (PCB23) on a flat clean
surface.
4.15.7 AC DRIVE BOARD

3. Release the clamps, and then disconnect the connector from AC drive board [A].
SM 4-329 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
• The machine for TWN has two power cords.
4. Remove the AC drive board [A].
• The bayonet connectors at the lower left corner of the board must be installed with
the black connector on the left and white connector on the right.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-330 SM
PCBs, HDD
• The connector blades are clearly marked "BLACK" and "WHITE" to indicate the
correct connection point.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.15.8 IOB
3. Remove the IOB (PCB1) [A].
4.15.9 IMPORTANT SP CODES: PCBS, HDD

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the main boards and the HDD.
Item SP Function
No.
Data Overwrite 5878-1 Enables the Data Overwrite Security feature.
Security:
SM 4-331 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
PCBs, HDD
Item SP Function
No.
Enable
Format HDD 5832-1 Formats the entire HDD. The HDD can also be formatted by selecting
the partition to format. A new HDD should always be formatted after it
has been installed.
HDD 5878-2 Enables the HDD encryption feature.
encryption
NVRAM data 5825 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After
download downloading is completed, remove the SD card and cycle the machine
off/on.
NVRAM data 5824 Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
upload number) from NVRAM on the control board to an SD card. While using
this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents a
software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.
SMC Report, 5990-1 Prints a complete SMC report with all the current machine settings.
print all
SMC report, 5992 Writes the SMC report to an SD card inserted into the SD card slot on
text file the side of the operation panel.
UCS settings 5846 Provides all the options for the UCS settings.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-332 SM
ADF
4.16 ADF
4.16.1 ADF REMOVAL
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
1.
t and
Remove the rear upper cover. Rear Upper Cover
2. Remove the controller box cover. Controller Box Cover Plate
3. Disconnect cable brackets [A] and [B].
4. Disconnect ground wire [C].
5. Pull away both brackets with harnesses connected.
6. Free harnesses [A] and [B] on top of the controller box.
SM 4-333 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
7. Set the cables up behind the ADF.
8. Disconnect the CIS unit (PCB30) cable [A] inside the controller box.
9. Remove the screws on the ADF base on the left and right.
10. Slowly and carefully (the ADF is heavy) lift the ADF [A] off the machine.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-334 SM
ADF
11. Set the ADF on its edge on the floor, and then lean it against a wall [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• To prevent damage to the fragile feelers [A] of the ADF position sensor, never lay
the ADF on a flat surface as shown below.
• If the ADF is being replaced, do SP4-730-002 after the new ADF has been installed.
4.16.2 AFTER ADF REPLACEMENT
CIS RGB Adjustment

Enter the four-digit numeric values for RGB that are listed on the paper that comes with the ADF
into the following SP.
R: SP4-712-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: R)
G: SP4-713-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: G)
B: SP4-714-001 (CIS GB Adj Value: B)
Checking the vertical registration

SP6-006-001 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front)
SP6-006-002 (ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear)
SM 4-335 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
1. Create an original as shown in the following picture.
The arrows indicate the direction of feed.

2. Copy the original and make sure that the position of the line [A] is within 0±1mm
3. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP modes.
Checking the horizontal registration

SP6-006-010 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Front)
SP6-006-011 (ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): Rear)
1. Copy the original and make sure that the position of the line [B] is within 0±2mm.
2. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP modes.
Checking skew
1. Make sure that the difference between both ends of the line [A] is within 0±2mm.
2. If not within the standard, change the position of the fixing screw [A] to the long hole [B] at
the right hinge.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-336 SM
ADF
Checking magnification
SP6-017-001 (DF Magnification Adj.)
1. Copy the original and make sure that the length of the line [B] is within 100±1mm.
3BReplacemen
2. If not within the standard, adjust with the SP mode.
Adjustment
t and
Platen Adjustment
1. Open the ADF and remove the white cover [A] (magic tape x 10).
2. Put the white cover [A] in the correct position on the exposure glass, aligning it with the
glass cover [B] and the rear scale [C].
3. Close the ADF [A] slowly and attach the white cover [B] to the ADF with the magic tape.
SM 4-337 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
4.16.3 ADF COVERS
ADF Front Cover

1. Open the ADF feed cover [A].
2. Slide the ADF front cover [A] to the left.
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing.
ADF Rear Cover

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-338 SM
ADF
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Lift off the rear cover [A].
• Check the position of the hooks in the photo below before removing
SM 4-339 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
ADF Feed Cover

1. Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover)
2. Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover)
3. Remove the ADF feed cover [A].
4.16.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

2. Remove the original feed unit [A]. (Pull the original feed unit, and remove the back side of
the shaft. Then remove the bushing in the foreground.)
4.16.5 PICK-UP ROLLER, TRANSPORT BELT

1. Remove the original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit)
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-340 SM
ADF
2. Slide the resin bushing [A], and then remove the pick-up roller unit [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove the pick-up roller [B].
4. Lift the left and right sides of the feed belt holder [A], then remove it.
5. Remove the feed belt [B] from the feed belt holder [A].
4.16.6 ADF SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Open the feed cover.
SM 4-341 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
2. Original feed unit (Original Feed Unit) .

3. ADF separation roller cover [A].
4. ADF separation roller [A] and torque limiter clutch [B] (snaps off)
4.16.7 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR (S88)

1. Remove the entrance lower guide [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-342 SM
ADF
2. Disconnect a hook, and remove the scanning guide plate [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove the original registration sensor(S88) [A] along with the bracket.
4. Disconnect the hooks, and remove the original registration sensor(S88) [A].
SM 4-343 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
4.16.8 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR (S87)

1. Remove the entrance lower guide [A].
2. Disconnect a hook, and remove the scanning guide plate [A].
3. Open the white cover [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-344 SM
ADF
4. Remove the original exit sensor (S87) [B], which is mounted on the upper guide [A]. ( x
6)
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Remove the original exit sensor (S87) [B] from the upper guide [A].
4.16.9 ADF CONTROL BOARD (PCB9)

2. Remove the ADF controller board (PCB9) [A].
4.16.10 SEPARATION SENSOR (S82), SKEW CORRECTION
SM 4-345 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
SENSOR (S81)
1. Remove the feed upper guide [A] in the ADF feed cover.
2. Remove the sensors along with the bracket [A].
3. Remove the separation sensor (S82) [A] and skew correction sensor (S81) [B].
4.16.11 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSOR (S80, S79, S78, S77, S76),

INTERVAL SENSOR (S86)
1. Remove the ADF feed cover. (ADF Feed Cover)
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-346 SM
ADF
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove the interval sensor (S86) [A].
4. Remove the original width sensor guide plate [A], then remove the original width
sensors (S80, S79, S78, S77, S76) [B].
SM 4-347 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
4.16.12 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS (S70, S69, S68)

1. Raise the document tray [A], then remove the lower cover [B].
2. Remove the original length sensor (B5) (S70) [A], original length sensor (A4) (S69) [B] and
original length sensor (LG) (S68) [C].
4.16.13 APS FEELER

1. Remove the ADF rear cover (ADF Rear Cover)
2. Remove the APS feeler [A].
4.16.14 ADF LIFT INTERLOCK SWITCH, LIFT SENSOR

1. Remove the ADF controller board (PCB9). (ADF Control Board (PCB9))
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-348 SM
ADF
2. Remove the ADF lift-up interlock switch (SW8) [A] along with the bracket.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove the lift sensor (S67) [A].
4.16.15 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR (S73)

2. Remove the screw and raise the original tray [A].
SM 4-349 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
3. Remove the original set sensor (S73) [A].
4.16.16 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSOR (A4/LT LEF) (S74)

3. Disconnect a hook, and remove the original length sensor (A4/LT LEF) (S74) [A].
4.16.17 BOTTOM PLATE HP SENSOR (S72)

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-350 SM
ADF
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Remove the bottom plate HP sensor (S72) [A].
4.16.18 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR (S84)

2. Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Rear Cover)
3. Remove the bottom plate position sensor (S84) [A].
4.16.19 ADF FEED COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH (SW7), PICK-UP

ROLLER HP SENSOR (S83)
SM 4-351 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
2. Remove the ADF feed cover interlock switch (SW7) [A] from the retaining bracket. (Pull the
pin [B] to the right.)
3. Remove the ADF feed cover interlock switch (SW7) [A].
4. Remove the pick-up roller HP sensor (S83) [A] along with the bracket.
4.16.20 PULL-OUT MOTOR (M29)

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-352 SM
ADF
2. Remove the Pull-out Motor (M29) [A] along with the frame.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove the Pull-out Motor (M29) [A] from the bracket.
4.16.21 ADF SCANNING MOTOR (M31)

1. Remove the ADF entrance motor along with the frame. (Pull-out Motor (M29))
SM 4-353 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
2. Remove the ADF scanning motor (M31) [A] along with the bracket.
3. Remove the ADF scanning motor (M31) [A] from the bracket.
4.16.22 ADF EXIT MOTOR

1. Remove the ADF control board. (ADF Control Board (PCB9))
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-354 SM
ADF
2. Remove the ADF exit motor (M30) [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4.16.23 ADF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR (M32)
1. Remove the pull-put motor along with the frame. (Pull-out Motor (M29))
2. Remove the ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32) [A].
SM 4-355 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
4.16.24 ADF PICK-UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR (M34)

2. Remove the frame (black) [A] and the grounding wire [B].
3. Remove the ADF pick-up roller lift motor (M34) [A].
4.16.25 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR (M33)

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-356 SM
ADF
2. Remove the ADF transport motor (M33) [A] along with the bracket.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Remove the ADF transport motor (M33) [A] from the bracket.
4.16.26 ADF FEED MOTOR (M28)

2. Remove the frame (black) [A] and the grounding wire [B].
SM 4-357 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
3. Remove the pull-out motor along with the frame. (Pull-out Motor (M29))
4. Remove the ADF feed motor (M28) [A] along with the bracket.
5. Remove the ADF feed motor (M28) [A] from the bracket.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-358 SM
ADF
4.16.27 CIS UNIT (PCB10)
• To prevent scratches on the surface of the CIS glass, removal of the CIS unit (PCB30)
3BReplacemen
must be done with the white cover [A] open.
Adjustment
t and
2. Remove the ADF separation roller. (ADF Separation Roller)
4. Remove the guide plate (large) [A].
5. Remove the guide plate (small) [A].
SM 4-359 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
• Do not fold or bend the guide plate [A], because the mylar [B] is attached to the
plate.
7. Remove the polyester film [A] from the front side.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-360 SM
ADF
8. Pull the CIS unit (PCB30) [A] out slowly, and lay it on a flat and clean surface.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• To re-install the CIS unit, two pegs [A] of the CIS unit fit into two holes [B] at the
back of the ADF unit. Set the CIS in its channel so it is perfectly flat, and push it
slowly to the rear until the pegs slide into the holes.
SM 4-361 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF
9. Execute SP4-721-001, and then execute SP4-730-004.
Close the ADF when executing the SP.
4.16.28 CIS WHITE ROLLER CLEANING
• Frequently inspect the CIS white roller. A dirty or incorrectly installed white roller will
cause the machine to issue SC152-00 (White Level Error: Back Side).
1. Open the ADF.
2. Release the pawl at the upper left corner, and open the white plate.
3. Keep the white cover opened, and rotate the white roller [A] by its gear [B], while using a
clean, dry cloth to wipe the surface of the roller clean.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-362 SM
ADF
4.16.29 SMALL SIZE PAPER TRAY SET SENSOR (S145)

1. Remove the original feed unit.
2. Remove the ADF front cover.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Remove the small size paper tray set sensor (S71) [A] with bracket.
5. Remove the small size paper tray set sensor (S71) [A].
SM 4-363 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
4.17 FANS, SWITCHES
4.17.1 FANS
Quick Reference
Here is a list of the fans described in this section and the corresponding SC code issued by the
machine in case of a failure.
SC Code Fan
SC530-01 Drum Fan (FAN11)
SC530-02 Development Unit Fan 1 (FAN12)
SC530-02 Development Unit Fan 2 (FAN13)
SC530-04 Duplex Fan (FAN1)
SC530-04 PCU Fan (FAN7)
SC530-06 Toner Bottle Fan (FAN6)
SC530-07 Fusing Exit Fan (FAN14)
SC530-08 PSU Fan 1 (FAN4)
SC530-09 PSU Fan 2 (FAN5)
SC530-10 AC Control Drive Board Fan (FAN3)
SC530-11 Controller Fan (FAN2)
SC530-13 PFU Fan 1 (FAN15)
SC531-01 Main Intake Fan (FAN10)
SC531-02 Main Exhaust Fan (FAN9)
SC531-03 Heat Exhaust Fan (FAN8)
Drum Fan (FAN11)

2. The drum fan (FAN11) is at the rear right corner of the machine above the flywheel.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-364 SM
Fans, Switches
3. Disconnect the duct bracket.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Pull the duct and fan out slightly, and then disconnect the fan.
5. Pull the duct with fan attached out of the machine.
SM 4-365 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
6. Unfasten the fan, and then separate it from the duct bracket.
Development Unit Fan 1, 2

1. Remove the right upper cover. Right Upper Cover
2. Disconnect the fan bracket [A].
3. Remove the fan cover [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-366 SM
Fans, Switches
4. Disconnect Fan 1 (FAN12) [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Disconnect Fan 2 (FAN13) [A].
Duplex Fan (FAN1)

1. Remove front door. Front Door
2. Remove Tray 1. Tandem Tray
3. Remove duplex unit. Duplex Unit Removal
4. Remove left lower cover. Left Lower Cover
5. Pull out fusing unit.
6. The duplex fan (FAN1) is in the center of the machine, below the duplex unit.
SM 4-367 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
7. From the left side of the machine, disconnect the fan.
8. From the front of the machine [A], disconnect the fan bracket.
9. From the left side of the machine, disconnect the fan bracket [A], and then remove the
bracket with fan attached from the machine [B].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-368 SM
Fans, Switches
10. Disconnect the plate.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
11. Separate plate and fan.
PCU Fan
2. Swing open the toner bottle holder [A].
SM 4-369 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
3. Disconnect the PCU inner cover [A].
4. Rotate down the handle C1 [A], and then remove the PCU inner cover [B].
5. Remove the fixing parts from the harness.
6. Remove the plastic cover [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-370 SM
Fans, Switches
7. Slide the fan [A] out of its bracket. There are no screws.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
• The fan must be re-installed with the label side up.
Toner Bottle Fan

2. Remove inner cover [A].
3. Duct [B] is the duct of the toner bottle fan (FAN6) inside the machine.

5. The toner bottle fan (FAN6) is below the front edge of the laser unit [A].
SM 4-371 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
6. Disconnect left side [A] of the laser unit cover.

7. Disconnect center of the cover [B].
8. Disconnect front right corner of cover [A].

9. Disconnect rear right corner of cover [B].
10. Free harness [A] behind cover.

11. Pull cover [B] slightly to the rear. You do not need to remove the cover.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-372 SM
Fans, Switches
12. Disconnect the fan.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
13. Release tab [A] on the left side of the duct.
14. Pull duct with fan attached [B] out of the machine.
15. Separate the fan and duct.
Re-installation
1. When you re-install the fan, first, set tab [A] into the slot on the right.
SM 4-373 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
2. Next, set and lock tab [B] on the left.
3. Check the front of the machine.

4. Confirm that the fan duct is flat and parallel to the frame as shown.
5. If the duct is not straight, set the fan again.
Fusing Exit Fan

1. Open the front door, and then pull out the fusing unit.
2. The fan is inside the cover at the upper right corner.
3. Raise D2 [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-374 SM
Fans, Switches
4. Locate the hole in the shaft [B]. If you cannot see the hole, turn the large knob until you can
see it.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
5. Insert a small screwdriver [A] into the hole to prevent the shaft from rotating.
6. Remove the large knob [B].
7. Disconnect the fusing unit cover.
SM 4-375 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
8. Pull the cover slightly away, and then disconnect the LED harness.
9. Remove the cover and lay it on a flat, clean surface.

10. At [A] disconnect the fan and free the LED harness.
11. Unfasten the duct cover [B].
12. Remove the duct with fan attached.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-376 SM
Fans, Switches
13. Unfasten the fan from the duct.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
14. Separate the fan from the duct.
PSU Fan 1, 2
2. Remove the PSU fan 1 (FAN4) [A].
3. Remove the PSU fan 2 (FAN5) [A].
SM 4-377 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
AC Drive Board Fan

2. Remove the screws and clamp from the AC drive board fan [A].
3. Remove the clamp and connector from the AC drive board fan [A].
4. Release the two holding tabs to remove the AC drive board fan [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-378 SM
Fans, Switches
Controller Fan
2. Remove the controller fan (FAN2) [A].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
PFU Fan 1, 3, 4 (FAN15, FAN17, FAN18)
1. Remove the right lower cover. Right Lower Cover
4. Push button A to open the vertical plate.
SM 4-379 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
5. Remove the vertical inner cover [A].
6. Disconnect the harness at the back of the vertical plate.
7. Lift the vertical plate [A] off its hinge pegs, and then remove it.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-380 SM
Fans, Switches
8. The upper fan [1] is the PFU fan 1 (FAN15), and the lower fan [2] is PFU fan 3 (FAN17).
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
PFU Fan 1 (FAN15)
1. Free the fan harness and disconnect it.
2. Remove the fan (FAN15).
PFU Fan 3 (FAN17)
SM 4-381 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
1. Free the fan harness and disconnect it.
2. Remove the fan (FAN17).
PFU Fan 4 (FAN18)
1. PFU Fan 4 (FAN18) is below the bottom paper feed unit.
• The right lower cover, used toner bottle, vertical inner cover, and vertical plate
must first be removed, the same as in the procedure to remove Fan 1 (FAN15)
and Fan 3 (FAN17).
2. Disconnect the front of PFU 3 (FAN17) [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-382 SM
Fans, Switches
3. Remove bracket lock screw [B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Remove the PFU [A].
5. Remove the screws for waste toner rail [A].
SM 4-383 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
6. Reverse the rail face [A], and then disconnect the harness.
7. Remove the thermistor [A].
8. Remove the fan (FAN18) [A].
Main Intake Fan (FAN10)

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-384 SM
Fans, Switches
2. The main intake fan (FAN10) is at the rear right corner of the machine.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Disconnect fan duct [A].
4. Slowly, pull the duct partially out of the machine so you can see connector [B], and then
disconnect it.
5. Separate the fan and duct.
Main Exhaust Fan (FAN9)

SM 4-385 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
2. The main exhaust fan (FAN9) is at the rear left corner of the machine.
3. Disconnect fan bracket [A] on the left.

4. Disconnect the clamps and harness at [B] so they do not block removal of the fan bracket
and duct.
5. Disconnect the duct [C] on the right.
6. Remove the bracket and duct with fan attached.
7. Disconnect the duct [A].

8. Separate the duct [B] from the fan.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-386 SM
Fans, Switches
9. Unfasten fan [C].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
10. Separate fan and bracket.
Heat Exhaust Fan (FAN8)

2. The heat exhaust fan (FAN8) [1] is located below the main exhaust fan (FAN9) [2].
3. Remove main exhaust fan (FAN9). (See procedure above. The main exhaust fan (FAN9)
must be removed before the heat exhaust fan (FAN8) can be removed.)
SM 4-387 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
4. Disconnect the duct at [A].
5. Disconnect bracket at [A].

6. Disconnect bracket at [B] (left screw).
7. Lift the duct and bracket [A] to unhook the front and rear.
8. Remove the bracket and duct [B] with fan attached.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-388 SM
Fans, Switches
9. Lay the unit on a flat, clean surface.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
10. Disconnect the duct.
11. Separate duct [A] from the fan.

12. Unfasten fan [B].
SM 4-389 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
13. Separate fan from bracket.
4.17.2 SWITCHES
Power Switch
2. Remove the power switch cover.
3. Remove the fixing parts from the power switch board [A], loosen the screw [B], and then
remove the power switch board.
Front Door Safety Switch

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-390 SM
Fans, Switches
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
3. Unfasten the door switch.
4. Disconnect the door switch bayonet connector.
SM 4-391 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
5. Remove the switch.
Human Detection (Proximity) Sensor Switch

This sensor, mounted in the front, detects the presence of the operator as soon as he or she
approaches within 1.8 meters of the front of the machine.
• The sensor uses infrared so the maximum distance at which the operator's presence can
be detected may vary with ambient temperature.
• The standard is for the sensor to detect the operator at 1.8 meters away from the front of
the machine at ambient 28C (82F). However, this can vary with changes in ambient
temperature.
• At lower ambient temperature, this distance may increase and the operator can be
detected farther away. At higher ambient temperature, the distance may decrease and the
operator will have to be closer to the front of the machine for the sensor to detect.
• The sensor monitors the space from the floor to the approximate height of the operator's
knees. The sensitivity of the sensor detection can also be affected by the operator’s
clothing.
• If the sensor fails to switch off, this will cause SC869-01. If the sensor fails to switch on, this
will cause SC869-02.
Test the Switch
Do this procedure in order to identify the problem with the sensor.
1. Go into the SP mode.
2. Open SP5-102 (this is the sensor input check).
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-392 SM
Fans, Switches
3. While keeping your hand away from the sensor, cover the sensor at the front of the
machine with a stack of about 10 sheets of paper, and then see if the value on the display
resets to "0" (no detection).
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
4. Take the paper away from the sensor to see if the value resets to "1" (detect).
• If the value resets to "0" and "1", this means the sensor is functioning but a heating
source or a failed fan in the machine could be causing a rise in temperature that is
interfering with operation of the sensor.
• If the values fail to reset to "0" and "1" correctly, switch off the machine, and then
replace the three PCBs (MSENS1 x2, MSENS2 x1). This is described below.
5. Turn the machine on, and then do Steps 1, 2, 3 to test the operation of the sensor.
6. If the test fails again, turn the machine off, and then replace the harness between MENS1
and MENS2.
7. Turn the machine on, and then do Steps 1, 2, 3 again.
8. If the sensor fails the test again, the harness between MSENS-2 and the BiCU, or the
controller board may need replacement.
Switch Disassembly
SM 4-393 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
3. Open the ADF.

4. Remove the front edge plate of the scanner unit.
5. Remove the screw from the operation cover center [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-394 SM
Fans, Switches
6. Remove the screws of the operation cover center front.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
7. Open the front door, turn down the operation panel, and then remove the operation cover
center front [A].
8. Remove the operation panel cover left [A].
SM 4-395 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
9. This detection device [1] and PCB [2] comprise the sensor.
10. Remove the PCB (MSENS2).
11. Unfasten the detection device bracket, and then pull it out partially.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-396 SM
Fans, Switches
12. Open clamp [A] to free the harness, and then remove the bracket with harness attached
[B].
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
t and
13. The MENS1 PCBs are in the bracket [1]. The PCB [2] is MENS2.
14. Disconnect the MENS1 PCBs [A], and then remove the top half of the bracket [B].
SM 4-397 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fans, Switches
15. Remove both MENS1 PCBs from the bracket.
[1] MENS1 PCB pair

[2] MENS2 PCB
[3] Harness
Re-assembly
1. Set the MENS1 PCB pair in the bracket at the correct angle [A].
2. The boss and screw holes will align correctly [B] only when the PCBs are set at the correct
angle.
3. Clamp the harness between the two permanent binders on the harness.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-398 SM
Fans, Switches
4.17.3 IMPORTANT SP CODES: FANS, SWITCHES

Here is a list of SP codes related to testing and servicing the large number of fans and switches.
Item SP Function
3BReplacemen
No.
Adjustment
t and
Input check 5803 Displays the signals received from fans.
Output check 5804 Switches fans on/off one by one for testing.
Proximity sensor 5102 This SP returns a "1" if the sensor on the front of the machine
check detects the presence of the operator.
SM 4-399 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Copy Image Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
4.18 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
These adjustments must be performed after replacing any of the following parts:
• Scanner wires
• Lens block
• Scanner motor
• Polygon motor
• Tandem tray side fences
• Memory All Clear
4.18.1 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING
Preparation
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these
adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No. 18 to print the test pattern for the following
procedures.
3. After completing these printing adjustments, be sure to set SP 2-902-3 to 0 again.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration, and adjust it using SP1-001.
Specification: 4±2mm.
2. Check side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following SP
modes.
SP mode Specification
Tray 1 (Tandem Tray) SP1002-001 0 ±1.5
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-400 SM
Tray 2 (Universal Tray) SP1002-002

Tray 3 (Universal Tray) SP1002-003
Tray 4 SP1002-004 Japan Only
LCT SP1002-006 0±1.5
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
Duplex Tray SP1002-007 0±1.5
t and
Blank Margin
If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications, adjust the
leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins, and adjust them with the following
SP modes.
Letter What It Means

A Trailing edge blank margin
B Right edge blank margin
C Leading edge blank margin
D Left edge blank margin
SP2101 Print Erase Margin
SP mode Specification
Leading Edge SP2101-001 2.5±2 mm
Trailing Edge SP2101-002
Left edge SP2101-003 2±1.5 mm
Right edge SP2101-004
SM 4-401 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Registration Buckle Adjustment

When the customer is using special paper, buckle adjustment may be required if paper feed
problems arise.
• If the buckle is too large, this can cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams caused by sheets
overtaking the sheets ahead of them in the paper path.
• If the buckle is too small, this can cause jams at the registration roller or skew during paper
feed.
2. Open SP1003.
• To prevent wrinkling, creasing, or jams, set a smaller value.
• To prevent jams at the registration roller or to eliminate skew, set a larger value.
SP1003-001 Registration Buckle Adjustment – Tray, LCT
SP1003-002 Registration Buckle Adjustment – Duplex Tray
SP1003-003 Registration Buckle Adjustment – Bypass Tray
Adjustment range -9 mm -> +9 mm (small -> large buckle)
Initial value 0 mm (Buckle = 10 mm)
4.18.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS: SCANNING

Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
• Use an S-5-S test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them with the following SP
modes if necessary.
SP No. Name Initial Comment
SP4010 Scanner Leading 0 A positive value shifts the image away from the
Edge Registration leading edge, a negative value shifts it toward the
leading edge.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-402 SM
SP No. Name Initial Comment

SP4011 Scanner Side-to-Side 0 A positive value shifts the image toward the right
Registration edge, a negative value shifts it toward the left edge.
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
Magnification
t and
Use an S-5-S test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Main Scan Magnification
2. Check magnification, and then SP2909-001 (Main Scan Magnification - Copy) to adjust
magnification if required. Specification: ±2%.
Sub Scan Magnification
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust if
necessary. Specification: ±0.9%.
4.18.3 ADF SCANNING ADJUSTMENTS
Vertical Black Lines

Vertical black lines in scanned images may be caused by dust or scratches on the ADF
exposure glass. If the problem cannot be solved by cleaning the ADF exposure glass, do
SP4020 (Dust Check).
1. Open SP4020-001 and then select "1" (On).
2. Make a test copy.
3. If vertical lines still appear, set the detection level higher with SP4020-002.
• The correction level is set with SP4020-003 (0:Off, 1: Lowest, 4: Highest.
DIP Switch Settings (ADF Main Board)

SW 101 Operation Mode
1 2 3 4
SM 4-403 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SW 101 Operation Mode

OFF OFF OFF OFF I/F Operation
ON OFF OFF OFF Free run (Simplex: each sheet stopped for registration)
OFF ON OFF OFF Free run (Simplex: continuous scanning)
ON ON OFF OFF Free run (Duplex: no registration) SP6009 (ADF Free Run)
ON OFF ON OFF Not used.
OFF ON ON OFF
ON ON ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
ON OFF OFF ON Free run (Entrance mode *1, simplex, no registration)
OFF ON OFF ON Free run (Entrance mode, simplex, continuous scanning)
OFF ON ON ON Motor test (feed, transport, exit motors)
*1: The entrance mode disregards paper size. Skew correction is performed at the scanning
roller.
ADF Skew Correction

If the skew with A4 SEF paper is more than 0.5/200 mm in the main scan direction, you can
adjust the position of the ADF hinge [A] or adjust the appropriate SP codes below.
6006* ADF Registration Adjustment

001 ADF Horizontal Registration (Front)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front in ADF mode.
[–3 to +3/0.1 mm]
002 ADF Horizontal Registration (Back)
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the back in ADF mode.
[–3 to +3/0.1 mm]
003 ADF Vertical Registration (Front)
Adjusts the vertical registration for the front in ADF mode.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 4-404 SM
[–30 to +24/1 mm]

-30 = -5.1 mm
+24 = +4.1 mm
004 ADF Vertical Registration (Back)
3BReplacemen
Adjustment
Adjusts the vertical registration for the back in ADF mode.
t and
[–30 to +30/1 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+30 = +5.1 mm
005 ADF Buckle Adjustment 1
Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction sensor/entrance roller. A larger setting
causes more buckling.
[–12.0 to +12/1 mm]
-12 = -3.0 mm
+12 = +3.0 mm
006 ADF Buckle Adjustment 2
Adjusts the roller timing at the interval sensor/scanning roller. A larger setting causes
more buckling.
[–8.0 to +8/1 mm]
-8 = -2 mm
+8 = +2 mm
007 ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Front)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the front.
[–20 to +20/1 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
008 ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin (Back)
These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the back.
[–20 to +20/1 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm
• Normally, the interval sensor detects the leading edge of small originals (B6, A5, HLT),
or originals for duplex copying, and delays the start of the scanning roller for the
prescribed number of pulses to buckle the paper and correct skew. This feature can be
switched on for all paper sizes with SP6020 (ADF Contact Mode In/Out). However,
switching this feature on for all sizes reduces scanning speed slightly.
SM 4-405 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Overview
5. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
5.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
4BDetailed
5.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
No. Part Name No. Part Name

1 Original Transport Unit 15 Relay Transport Unit
2 CIS Unit (PCB30) 16 Used Toner Unit
3 Original Feed Unit 17 Tray 3 PFU
4 Original Exit Unit 18 Tray 2 PFU
5 Drum Cleaning Unit 19 Tray 1 Unit (Tandem Tray)
6 Charge Corona Unit 20 Duplex Transport Unit
7 Laser Unit 21 Duplex Unit
8 Drum Unit 22 Inverter Unit
9 Toner Supply Unit 23 Exit Unit
10 Development Unit 24 Invert/Exit, Duplex/Transport Unit
11 Bypass Unit 25 Fusing Unit
12 Bypass Separation Roller 26 Fusing Cleaning Unit
Overview

13 Separation/Transport Unit 27 Scanner Unit
14 Vertical Paper Path
5.1.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT
Bypass Unit

1 Registration Sensor (S3) 6 Paper Length Sensor (S8)
2 Bypass Paper End Sensor (S4) 7 Bypass Size Sensor (S7)
3 Guide Plate Release Sensor (S6) 8 Guide Plate Release Solenoid (SOL2)
4 Bypass Pick-up Solenoid (SOL1) 9 Relay Sensor (S5)
5 Bypass Feed Clutch (CL1)
Overview
Optics
Descriptions
4BDetailed
1 Scanner HP Sensor (S62) 8 Scanner Motor (M22)
2 Scanner LED (PCB7) (x2) 9 Synchronization Detection Board (PCB17)
3 ADF Open Sensor (S65) 10 Polygon Motor (M23)
4 Original Size Sensor (Length) (S63) 11 LD Unit
5 SBU (PCB8) 12 Polygon Motor Control Board (PCB16)
6 Development Unit Fan 2 (FAN13) 13 Anti-Condensation Heater (Option) (H1)
7 Development Unit Fan 1 (FAN12)
Paper Feed Unit (PFU)

Each tray in the paper bank (Tray 1, 2, and 3) has an identical paper feed unit.
Overview

1 Feed Motor (M16, M15, M14, M13) 5 Lift Sensor (S30, S57, S61)
2 Feed Sensor (S27, S54, S58) 6 Pick-up Solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17)
3 Vertical Transport Sensor (S28, S55, 7 Reverse Release Solenoid (SOL7, SOL16,
S59) SOL18)
4 Paper End Sensor (S29, S56, S60)
Overview
Electrical Components
Descriptions
4BDetailed
1 Internal Temperature Sensor (S12) 8 Humidity Sensor (S26)
2 IOB (PCB1) 9 PSU Fan 1 (FAN4)
3 Charge Power Pack (PCB6) 10 PSU Fan 2 (FAN5)
4 AC Control Drive Board (PCB25) 11 AC Control Drive Board Fan (FAN3)
5 Development Power Pack (PCB3) 12 Paper Bank Lower Heater (Standard) (H4)
6 RYB (Relay Board) (PCB24) 13 Paper Bank Upper Heater (Standard) (H3)
7 PSU (PCB23) 14 Drum Heater (Option) (H2)
Overview
Tandem Tray

1 Left Tray Paper End Sensor (S37) 10 Tandem Left Tray Lock Solenoid (SOL11)
2 Front/Back Fence Release Sensor 11 Tandem Right Tray Lock Solenoid
(S42) (SOL10)
3 Front/Back Fence Open Sensor (S41) 12 Right Tray Paper Sensor (S49)
4 Side Fence HP Sensor (S35) 13 Tray 1 Paper Height Sensor 1 (S45)
5 Tray 1 Near End Sensor (S48) 14 Tray 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 (S46)
6 Pressure Sensor (S36) 15 Tandem Tray Down Sensor (S47)
7 Side Fence Close Sensor (S44) 16 Tray 1 Paper Height Sensor 3 (S50)
8 Side Fence Open Sensor (S43) 17 Front/Back Fence Open Solenoid (SOL13)
9 Side Fence Open Solenoid (SOL14) 18 Side Fence Motor (M10)
Overview
Around the Drum
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Part Name: No. Part Name:

1 Toner Bottle Motor (M1) 5 PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp)
2 TD Sensor (Toner Density) (S2) 6 ID Sensor (S13)
3 Toner End Sensor (S1) 7 QL (Quenching Lamp)
4 Charge Cleaning Motor (M5) 8 Potential Sensor Board (PCB5)
Overview
Sensors, Switches

1 Used Toner Lock Sensor (S9) 7 Tray 2 Paper Size Switch (SW3)
2 Used Toner Motor Sensor (S14) 8 Front Door Switch (SW6)
3 Used Toner Motor (M4) 9 DC Switch (PCB14)
4 Used Toner Bottle Full Sensor (SW2) 10 Proximity Sensor Control Board (PCB12)
5 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor (SW1) 11 Proximity Sensor (PCB13)
6 Tray 3 Paper Size Switch (SW4)
Overview
Motors, Fans
Descriptions
4BDetailed
1 Heat Exhaust Fan (FAN8) 11 Tray 2 Lift Motor (M17)
2 Main Exhaust Fan (FAN9) 12 Tray 3 Lift Motor (M18)
3 Controller Fan (FAN2) 13 PFU Fan 1 (FAN15)
4 Main Intake Fan (FAN10) 14 PFU Fan 3 (FAN17)
5 Drum Fan (FAN11) 15 PFU Fan 4 (FAN18)
6 Drum Motor (M25) 16 Duplex Fan (FAN1)
7 Development Motor (M24) 17 PCU fan (FAN7)
8 Registration Motor (M2) 18 Fusing Exit Fan (FAN14)
9 Bypass Motor (M3) 19 Toner Bottle Fan (FAN6)
10 Tray 1 Lift Motor (M19) 20 Fusing Exit Motor (M26)
Overview
Transfer, Fusing, Exit Units

1 Transfer Power Pack (PCB4) 5 Fusing Exit Sensor (S66)
2 Transfer Separation Solenoid 6 Paper Exit Sensor (S24)
3 Paper Exit Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL5) 7 Exit Unit Entrance Sensor (S25)
4 Fusing Exit Knob Turn Sensor (S23) - -
Overview
Descriptions
4BDetailed
IM 9000
1 Fusing Thermistor – End (TH2) (Contact Type) 5 Fusing Thermostat (TS1) (192°C)
2 Fusing Thermistor - Center (TH1) (NC Sensor) 6 Web Motor (M9)
3 Fusing Thermostat (TS3) (200°C) 7 Web End Sensor (S21)
4 Fusing Thermostat (TS2) (200°C) 8 Fusing Lamps (x2) (H6, H7)
IM 7000/8000
9 Fusing Thermistor - End (TH2) (Contact) 14 Web Motor (M9)
10 Fusing Thermistor - Center (TH1) (NC 15 Web End Sensor (S21)
Sensor)
11 Fusing Thermostat (TS3) (192°C) 16 Fusing Pressure Release Sensor
(S22)
12 Fusing Thermostat (TS2) (200°C) 17 Fusing Pressure Release Motor
(M27)
Overview

13 Fusing Thermostat (TS1) (192°C) 18 Fusing Lamps (x3) (H6, H7, H9)
Duplex Unit

1 Duplex Transport Sensor 1 (S17) 7 Duplex Invert Motor (M7)
2 Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL4) 8 Duplex Invert Solenoid (SOL3)
3 Duplex Transport Sensor 2 (S19) 9 Duplex Jogger HP Sensor (S18)
4 Duplex Transport Sensor 3 (S20) 10 Duplex Invert Exit Sensor (S16)
5 Duplex Transport Motor (M8) 11 Duplex Entrance Sensor (S15)
6 Duplex Jogger Motor (M6) - -
Overview
ADF Unit
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Part No. Part

1 Original Width Sensor (S76) 5 17 Original Set Sensor (S73)
2 Original Width Sensor (S77) 4 18 Bottom Plate HP Sensor (S72)
3 Original Width Sensor (S78) 3 19 CIS Unit (PCB30)
4 Original Width Sensor (S79) 2 20 Original Registration Sensor (S88)
5 Original Width Sensor (S80) 21 Interval Sensor (S86)
6 Skew Correction Sensor (S81) 22 Original Exit Sensor (S87)
7 Separation Sensor (S82) 23 ADF Transport Motor (M33)
8 Pick-up Roller HP Sensor (S83) 24 ADF Feed Cover Interlock Switch (SW7)
9 ADF Pick-Up Roller Lift Motor (M34) 25 ADF Feed Motor (M28)
Overview
No. Part No. Part

10 Bottom Plate Position Sensor (S84) 26 Pull-out Motor (M29)
11 ADF Bottom Plate Lift Motor (M32) 27 ADF Controller Board (PCB29)
12 Original Length Sensor (A4/LT LEF) (S74) 28 ADF Lift-up Interlock Switch (SW8)
13 Original Length Sensor (B5) (S70) 29 Lift Sensor (S67)
14 Original Length Sensor (A4) (S69) 30 ADF Exit Motor (M30)
15 Original Length Sensor (LG) (S68) 31 ADF Scanning Motor (M31)
16 Small Size Paper Tray Set Sensor (S71)
No, Part No. Part

1 Feed Belt 11 CIS White Roller
2 Bottom Plate Position Sensor (S84) 12 CIS
3 Pick-up Roller 13 Original Exit Sensor (S87)
4 Original Set Sensor (S73) 14 Original Registration Sensor (S88)
5 Small Size Paper Tray Set Sensor (S71) 15 Scanning Entrance Roller
6 Original Length Sensors 16 Interval Sensor (S86)
7 Lift Sensor (S67) 17 Original Width Sensors
8 ADF Lift-up Interlock Switch (SW8) 18 Skew Correction Sensor (S81)
9 Bottom Plate HP Sensor (S72) 19 Separation Sensor (S82)
10 Exit Roller 20 ADF Separation Roller
Overview
5.1.3 PAPER PATH
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name No. Name
1 Proof Tray Exit 5 LCIT Paper Path
2 Cover Tray Path 6 Main Feed Path
3 Original Path (1 Pass Duplex) 7 Booklet Tray
4 Bypass Paper Path 8 Shift Tray
Overview
No. Name No. Name

1 Original Path (1 Pass Duplex) 6 Booklet Tray Path
2 Bypass Paper Path 7 Shift Tray Exit
3 LCIT Paper Path 8 Proof Tray Exit
4 Main Feed Path 9 Mailbox Exit
5 Invert Exit Path - -
Overview
5.1.4 MOTORS
Descriptions
4BDetailed
1 Scanner Motor (M22) 7 Tray 1 Feed Motor (M16)
2 Drum Motor (M25) 8 Used Toner Motor (M4)
3 Fusing Exit Motor (M26) 9 Bypass Motor (M3)
4 Tray 3 Feed Motor (M13) 10 Bypass Feed Clutch (CL1)
5 Tray 2 Feed Motor (M14) 11 Development Motor (M24)
6 Relay Transport Motor 12 Toner Supply Clutch
Scanner
5.2 SCANNER
5.2.1 OVERVIEW
Block Diagram
Cross Section
Scanner

1 Scanner HP Sensor (S62) 8 SBU (PCB8)
2 2nd Mirror 9 Scanner Motor (M22)
3 3rd Mirror 10 Development Unit Fan 1 (FAN12)
Descriptions
4BDetailed
4 1st Carriage 11 1st Mirror
5 Scanner LED (PCB7) 12 2nd Carriage
6 Original Size Sensor (Length) (S63) 13 Anti-Condensation Heater (Option) (H1)
7 Lens Block
Configuration
Scanner Light source: LED (x2)
Scanner drive SBU (3-line C-MOS image sensor, 600 dpi)
Scanner motor (2-phase STM)
Original size detection Length: One original size sensor
Width: Line sensor (C-MOS image sensor)
APS (Length sensor x1, Width sensors x2)
Other Anti-condensation heater (option) (H1)
5.2.2 MECHANISM
Scanner
The scanner unit uses LEDs as the light source. The lower power scanner LEDs (PCB7) [A]
produce little heat, making them a cost effective, superior light source. Two LEDs are used to
ensure there is enough stable light for the C-MOS image sensor to scan images. The LEDs
illuminate the original, and then the light is reflected from the original to the 1st mirror [B] > 2nd
mirror > 3rd mirror > scanner lens > C-MOS image sensor.
1st Mirror > 2nd Mirror > 3rd Mirror > Scanner Lens > C-MOS Image Sensor
• Scanner LED (PCB7)

The unit employs two high-intensity LEDs as the exposure lamp.
• C-MOS Image Sensor
The C-MOS image sensor converts the contrast of the light and shade of the original to
Scanner
three colors (RGB). This produces a high-resolution 600-dpi C-MOS image.

• Shading Correction
At power on, the exposure LED moves to the white plate for shading correction located
behind the rear scale, switches on, and then determines the white peak level for the job.
Regardless of whether the original image is monochrome or color, with this machine
shading correction is done for every page during scanning. However, for continuous copy
jobs the machine switches to shading correction at intervals (not every page) in order to
maintain high production speed.
Scanner drive
A single scanner motor drives the timing belt, gears, pulleys, and wires that drive the scanner
unit.
Original Size Detection

• Original size detection is triggered by the APS [A] when lowering the ADF switches the
sensor from off to on.
• Original length is detected using one original size sensor (S64) [B].
• At the same time, pre-scanning is done so the C-MOS image sensor can detect the original
width. At this time the scanner LED lights only one-third of the detection area near the front.
• If the Start key is pressed with the ADF (platen) is up (APS: OFF), the size of the previous
original is used.
Scanner
Sensor States
The combinations of the sensor states are used to determine the original size, and this data can
be confirmed with SP4-301-001. The data for each detected size is displayed by SP4-301-001
as shown below. Due to the layout of the sensors, paper sizes smaller than B5 cannot be
Descriptions
4BDetailed
detected, so in this case all zeroes are displayed (0000 0000).
[A] A4 SEF
[B] A4 LEF
A: A4 SEF
B: A4 LEF
Size L1 SP4-301-001 Display
A3 On 00000001
B4 On 00000001
A4 SEF On 00000001
A4 LEF Off 00000000
B5 SEF On 00000001
B5 LEF Off 00000000
A5 SEF Off 00000000
A5 LEF Off 00000000
For width detection, SP4-313-010 to -036 show the CCD readings at three detection locations
(S1, S2, or S3). The CCD reading is done at each detection location three times. If the value
detected by the CCD at any of the three detection locations is 28 or larger twice or more, the
machine detects that an original has been placed. The values shown are the latest detection
results.
SP4-313-001 to -003: If the value is 1 or larger, the
S1 point: R-value, G-value, machine detects disturbance
Scanner
B-value at CCD original light and corrects threshold value

size detection (Lamp off) automatically.
SP4-313-004 to -006:
S2 point: R-value, G-value,
B-value at CCD original
size detection (Lamp off)
SP4-313-007 to -009:
size detection (Lamp off)
SP4-313-010 to -012: If any of the values is 28 or If the value detected at the S1
S1 point: R-value, G-value, larger, the machine determines point is 28 or larger twice or
B-value at CCD original tentatively that an original is more out of three times, an
size detection (First time) placed. original exists at the S1 point.
SP4-313-019 to -021:
size detection (Second
time)
SP4-313-028 to -030:
size detection (Third time)
SP4-313-013 to -015: If the value detected at the S2
S2 point: R-value, G-value, point is 28 or larger twice or
B-value at CCD original more out of three times, an
size detection (First time) original exists at the S2 point.
SP4-313-022 to -024:
time)
SP4-313-031 to -033:
SP4-313-016 to -018: If the value detected at the S3
S3 point: R-value, G-value, point is 28 or larger twice or
B-value at CCD original more out of three times, an
Scanner
size detection (First time) original exists at the S3 point.

SP4-313-025 to -027:
Descriptions
4BDetailed
time)
SP4-313-034 to -036:
Size Name Feed Direction Size (Width x Length) S1 S2 S3

A3 SEF 297 x 420 - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364 - -
A4 SEF 210 x 297 - -
A4 LEF 297 x 210 - -
B5 SEF 182 x 257 - - -
B5 LEF 257 x 182 - -
A5 SEF 148 x 210 - - -
A5 LEF 210 x 148 - -
B6 SEF 128 x 182 - - -
B6 LEF 182 x 128 - - -
" ": Either of the R, G, or B values is 28 or larger.
"-": The R, G, and B values are all smaller than 28.
5.2.3 ORIGINAL FEED FROM ADF

With this new machine, there are some changes in the configuration of the original feed path
from the ADF.
On this machine a step at [A] keeps the original separated from the contact glass as it feeds,
while in the previous machine, shown on the right, the original touched the surface of the glass.
• In the new configuration because the original passes over the glass without touching it,
there is less transfer of paper dust and other material from the original to the glass. This
makes it more difficult for streaking due to transfer to appear in copies.
• In the previous configuration, because the original touched the surface of the glass as it
Scanner
passed, this cleaned material from the surface of the glass and prevented free-floating dust
from collecting on the glass. This makes it more difficult for streaking due to free-floating
dust to appear in copies.
• The incidence of streaking caused by transfer of dust from original to glass was thought to
be greater in the old configuration than any streaking caused by free-floating dust in the
new configuration, so the new configuration was adopted as standard for the new machine.
There are some important points to keep in mind about this new configuration:
• This new step strip which keeps the original above the glass must be attached correctly
when the contact glass is replaced.
• When the step strip is installed, it must be aligned perfectly parallel with and attached to the
left scale on the left side of the exposure glass.
• The new step strip can be removed to discard the non-contact feature if the operator
prefers the older configuration with the original touch and sweeping the contact glass as it
passes.
5.2.4 DUST DETECTION
Overview
Setting an original in the ADF and pressing the Start key triggers Dust Detection processing at
the ADF scanning position.
Dust detection processing starts when the first page of the original starts to scan, and the
scanned data is processed by the MACARON module where it is determined whether there is
spotting or streaking in the image.
The operational flow is different depending on how the SP codes are set.
However, this is not done when in the large original mode, or when originals are feed into the
ADF without pause while a long scanning job is in progress..
Related SP Codes
SP Name
4-020-001 Dust Detect: On/Off: Front
4-020-002 Detection Level: Front
4-020-003 Correction Level: Front
4-020-001 Detect Level: Rear
4-020-012 Correction Level: Rear
7-852-001 DF Glass Dust Check: Dust Detection Counter
7-852-002 DF Glass Dust Check: Dust Counter Clear Counter
7-852-003 DF Glass Dust Check: Dust Detection Counter: Back
Scanner
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Shifting the Scanning Position
The scanning position can be shifted toward the front from the home position (default) at 0.7
mm, and then 1.4 mm (a total of three positions counting the home position). In the illustration
below, the direction of shift is:
a > b > c > a > b.
Scanner Anti-Condensation Heater

Condensation on the optics inside the scanner unit (specially the mirrors) caused by a rapid rise
in temperature when the scanner unit is cold can cause images to blur, or turn black or gray.
The scanner unit heater (option) is designed to eliminate these problems.
Scanner
If the machine is in the state of shipment from the factory, the scanner heater is always off.
If the machine is turned off and you want to turn the heater on conventionally, set SP5-805-001
to 1 (heater ON).
If you always have the heater on, set SP5-805-001 to 2 (always heater ON).
Image Processing
5.3 IMAGE PROCESSING
5.3.1 IMAGE DATA FLOW
Descriptions
4BDetailed
5.3.2 IMAGE PROCESSING
Image Processing Flow

Image processing is done on the BICU and follows the direction of flow described below.
However, unlike previous machines the image processing in this machine has been changed
slightly so it is more suited for the content of the image. This greatly improves the quality of the
image:
• Selective filter processing, based on the amount of image edge, results in sharper text
characters and less moire in fill areas.
Image Processing
• There is also smoother texture with less granulation in flat areas of images.
Shading Corrects the dispersion of the scanning lens and C-MOS
Correction
Gamma Background erase

Correction
Auto Select Determines if an image is text or raster image data and processes the
data accordingly.
Selects the best methods for Filtering, Density Control, and Grayscale
Processing.
Filtering MTF and smoothing. Either of two filters is selected by Auto Select
above.
Independent Dot Removes isolated pixels.

Erase
Line Width
Correction
Main Scan
Magnification
Video Path Application (printer)
Density Control Employs one of two gamma tables, selected by Auto Select above
Grayscale Error diffusion, dithering, or binary picture processing. Black-and-white

Processing digitization or dithering is selected by Auto Select above.
LD Unit
Manual Gamma Adjustment

Two adjustment settings are provided for each of these four IDmax categories:
• Text
• Gamma curves with independent highlights (H)
• Middle (M)
• Shadow (S).
Image Processing
Offset (H). Adjusts the density of bright areas of the original (highlights). A lower setting lowers
density to create lighter image, a larger setting increases density to create darker image.
Offset (M). Adjusts the density in the middle of the original (middle). A lower setting lowers
density to create lighter image, a larger setting increases density to create darker image.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Offset (S). Adjusts the density of dark areas of the original (shadows). A lower setting lowers
density to create lighter image, and a larger setting raises density to create darker image.
Offset: IDmax . Adjusts the development density for the entire image. Adjusts density. A lower
setting lowers density to create lighter image, and a larger setting raises density to create
darker image.
Option (H). Adjusts the texture of image background. A lower setting subdues the background,
and a larger setting enhances the background.
Option (M). Adjusts the contrast of the original. A lower setting reduces the contrast, and a
larger setting increases contrast.
Option (S). Not Used.
Option (IDmax). Not Used.
SP Codes Related to Gamma Adjustments

The table below summarizes the settings of SP4-918-009 (Manual Gamma Adjustment).
Item Range/Default/Step
Copy: Photo 1-Color K Offset (Highlight) 0 to 30/15/1
Copy: Photo 1-Color K Offset (Middle) 0 to 30/15/1
Copy: Photo 1-Color K Offset (Shadow) 0 to 30/15/1
Copy: Photo 1-Color K Offset (IDmax) 0 to 30/15/1
Copy: Photo 1-Color K Option (Highlight) 0 to 255/0/1
Copy: Photo 1-Color K Option (MIddle) 0 to 12/0/1
Copy: Photo 1-Color K Option (Shadow) 0 to 255/01/1
Copy: Photo 1-Color K Option (IDmax) 0 to 255/0/1
Copy: Text 1-Color K Offset (Highlight) 0 to 30/15/1
Copy: Text 1-Color K Offset (Middle) 0 to 30/15/1
Copy: Text 1-Color K Offset (Shadow) 0 to 30/15/1
Copy: Text 1-Color K Offset (IDmax) 0 to 30/15/1
Copy: Text 1-Color K Option (Highlight) 0 to 255/0/1
Copy: Text 1-Color K Option (Middle) 0 to 12/0/
Copy: Text 1-Color K Option (Shadow) 0 to 255/0/1
Copy: Text 1-Color K Option (IDmax) 0 to 255/0/1
Print Process (Main Engine Components)
5.4 PRINT PROCESS (MAIN ENGINE COMPONENTS)
5.4.1 LASER UNIT
Block Diagram of Laser Unit
Laser Unit Components
No. Name
1 Laser Unit
2 Polygon Motor
3 L1 Lens
No. Name
4 L2 Lens
5 2nd Mirror
6 Main Scan Line
Descriptions
4BDetailed
7 Drum (OPC)
8 Laser Synchronization Detector
9 Dust Prevention Glass
10 1st Mirror
11 L0 Lens
12 LD Unit
Laser Unit
The laser unit uses two 2-beam laser diodes that write four lines simultaneously.
The diodes are fixed at 1200 dpi so beam pitch adjustment is not required.
No. Name
1 Photo Diode
2 LD Array
3 Aperture
4 Collimating Lens
APC (Auto Power Control)

A built-in PD (Photo Diode) detects the light emitted by the LD (Laser Diode). When the PD
detects the light emitted from the LD, the PD sends an output signal to the LD control board,
and then the feedback from this signal is used to fix the standard value for the strength of the
laser. The LD unit is also non-adjustable so there are no LD power adjustments required after
the LD unit has been replaced.
Line scan mechanism

The six facets of a polygon mirror, driven by a polygon motor, are used to expose the drum in
the main scan direction. The polygon motor rotates constantly and stops only when the
machine is off or in low power mode.
Multi-beam Scanning
The LD unit emits four beams simultaneously. There are three advantages to this multi-beam
method.
• The service life of the polygon motor is extended because the rotation speed is reduced.
• There is less noise from operation of the polygon motor because the number of rotations is
reduced.
• The modulation frequency of the LD unit is reduced.
The speed of the rotation of the polygon motor is different for each mode and line speed:
• Polygon motor rotations (IM7000/IM8000/IM9000: 31,890 rpm 1200 dpi) thick paper line
speed (Thick Paper 3 or thicker)
• Polygon motor rotations (IM7000/IM8000: 42,756 rpm 1200 dpi) normal paper line speed
• Polygon motor rotations (IM9000: 42,756 rpm 1200 dpi) thick paper line speed (Thiner than
Thick Paper 3)
• Polygon motor rotations (IM9000: 49,606 rpm 1200 dpi) normal paper line speed
The diagonal arrangement of the LD four beams from CH0 and CH2 at the front, and CH1 and
CH3 at the rear achieves 1200 dpi resolution.
5.4.2 DRUM UNIT
Cross Section of Drum Unit
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Quenching Lamp
2 Drum Charge Unit
3 Toner Recycling Pipe
4 Potential Sensor (S11)
5 Development Sleeve
6 PTL
7 Drum (OPC)
8 Stripper Pawls
9 ID Sensor (S13)
10 Stripper Spurs
11 Toner Collection Coil
12 Brush Cleaning Roller
13 Pressure Release Filter
14 Cleaning Blade
Here is a summary of the main components ands features of the drum unit:
• OPC Drum. Durable OPC Drum (100 mm dia.)
• Quenching. 16 red LEDs quench the charge from the surface of the drum.
• Drum charge mechanism. Scorotron grid charge wire charging and cleaning system.
• Paper separation pawls. Paper separation with pick-off spurs.
• Cleaning mechanism. Counter blade method.
• ID sensor (S13), Potential sensor (S11). Used for process control.
• Drive unit. A single drum motor drives both drum and drum cleaning mechanism.
• Toner recycling mechanism. Toner is retrieved and recycled in the development unit by
suction through a recycling tube.
OPC Drum
The OPC drum has an open flange with large holes to permit air to flow through to cool the
drum. The drum is also grounded with a brush at the back of the machine. Quenching is done
with an array of 16 red LEDs.
No. Name
1 Brush Ground
2 Drum (OPC)
Charge
The Scorotron method, a charge wire and grid, applies an even charge over the surface of the
drum, Applying the same electrical potential to the grid and casing also ensures a uniform
charge on the drum.
No. Name
1 Drum Charge Unit
2 Drum Charge Power Pack (PCB6) (CG PP)
3 PTL
Descriptions
4BDetailed
4 Drum (OPC)
Charge Wire Cleaning

In order to prevent poor quality images caused by a dirty corona wire, the charge unit is
equipped with a wire cleaning mechanism.
A Cleaner pad has a home position on the front side.
When the charge wire cleaner motor switches on, the cleaner pad moves backward to clean the
wire.
During cleaner operation, the cleaner pad moves from the front side to the rear side, and then
moves to the home position on the front side.
The wire is cleaned every 5,000 prints.
No. Name
1 Forward stroke – Cleaning
2 Rear stroke – Return without cleaning
3 Cleaner Pad
4 Charge Wire Cleaner Motor
PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp)

The PTL improves paper separation and reduces the appearance of pawl marks on the leading
edges of paper. In order to improve paper separation from the drum, the PTL switches on at the
leading edge of the paper only when printing with normal or translucent paper in simple mode.
The PTL does not illuminate for jobs that use OHP, index tab, thick paper or postcards.
• On Timing. Synchronized with registration motor (M2) on timing.
• Off Timing. Goes off when the leading edge of the paper has advanced 3 mm. However,
this distance can be adjusted in the range 30 mm in 1 mm steps with an SP code.
No. Name
1 PTL
2 Drum (OPC)
Paper separation pawls

The separation pawls are always in contact with the drum surface to separate paper that clings
to the drum. The drum spurs of this machine are an improved design and are more efficient in
separating paper from the drum. In order to prevent damage to the drum from the separation
pawls as a result of constant contact, a small vibrating cam operates while the drum rotates to
keep the pawls vibrating slightly and free on the drum surface.
No. Name
1 Paper Separation Pawls
2 Vibrating Cam
Drum Cleaning mechanism

The cleaning blade skims toner from the surface of the drum, and then the drum cleaning roller
brushes the loose toner into the toner collection unit, as both brush roller and drum rotate
forward (clockwise). The toner collected from the drum is sent into the toner collection coil and
Descriptions
4BDetailed
then into the recycle pipe.
No. Name
1 Cleaning Blade
2 Drum Cleaning Roller (Brush)
4 Agitator
A small cam vibrates the cleaning blade slightly to keep the blade loose on the surface of the
drum so it does snag on the drum surface. At the end of every job, the drum motor stops and
reverse rotates the drum briefly to remove any toner that has stuck to the edge of the cleaning
blade. The arc of this reverse rotation is about 5 mm.
No. Name
1 Rotating Cam
No. Name
2 Cleaning Blade
Drum Cleaning Drive

The drum motor rotates the drum and drives the cleaning mechanism through a single gear
train. A large flywheel on the shaft of the drum reduces jitter during drum rotation. The drum
speeds are different for each model of this series:
• IM 7000/IM 8000/IM 9000 (Thick Paper 3, 4): 270 mm/sec.
• IM 7000/IM 8000 (Normal Paper: Except for Thick Paper 3, 4): 362 mm/sec.
• IM 9000 (Thick Paper 1, 2): 362 mm/sec.
• IM 9000 (Normal Paper: Except for Thick Paper 1, 2, 3, 4): 420 mm/sec.
No. Name
1 Drum Cleaning Coupling
2 Drum Motor (M25)
3 Flywheel
4 Drum Drive Coupling
Ozone Filters and Drum Cooling

As shown below, the machine is provided with fans that draw air through the flange of the drum
and into the center to cool the drum as well as expel ozone from inside the machine.
• In order to reduce the amount of noise from the fans, the fans switch on when the machine
is turned on, and then the fan operation and speed are synchronized with the operation
level of the machine.
• The PCU fans (FAN7) are switched on and off when the machine is switched on and off to
draw off the heat from the fusing unit and drum.
• The main intake fan (FAN10) also cycles on/off when the machine is switched on/off.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Main Intake Fan (FAN10)
2 Drum Fan (FAN11)
3 OPC Drum
4 PCU fan (FAN7)
5 Charge Corona Unit
6 Dust Filter
Toner recycling mechanism

The toner collected by the drum cleaning mechanism is sent through the recycling pipe to the
toner separation unit in the hopper of the development unit.
• Reusable toner and waste toner are separated in the toner separation unit.
• The toner separation unit is driven by the toner transport coil.
No. Name
1 Used Toner Transport Coil
2 Toner Separation Unit
Reusable and Unreusable Toner Separation Mechanism

Toner that can pass through the mesh inside the toner separation unit can be reused.
• A brush outside the mesh brushes away toner that collects on the mesh to prevent the
mesh from clogging.
• Another brush roller inside the mesh pushes out the reusable toner from the collected
toner.
No. Name
1 Toner Recycle Pipe
2 Toner Separation Mesh
3 Reusable Toner
Clumps of toner that cannot pass through the mesh go into the toner collection unit. The used
toner transport coil then carries them away and dumps them into the used toner bottle.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Used Toner
Used Toner Bottle

After toner from the transfer unit is moved by the transport coil, it is sent to the used toner bottle
through the toner exit coil driven by the used toner motor (M4).
• The toner in the toner separation unit that cannot be reused is also sent to the used toner
bottle.
• If the used toner lock sensor (S9) detects that the used toner coil has become overloaded
and cannot rotate, the drum motor (M25) continues to rotate for 3 sec., stops, and then the
machine issues SC495-00 (Toner Transport Unit Lock).
• The used toner motor rotation sensor monitors the rotation of the used toner motor (M4),
and if the motor stops rotation for more than 3 sec. then the machine issues SC590-00
(Toner Motor Lock).
• The used toner motor (M4) and drum motor (M25) switch on at the same time.
• When the used toner bottle full sensor (SW2) signals that the toner bottle is full, the
pressure on the toner exit coil shuts off the toner collection motor, and a message alerts the
operator that the machine will shut down after 100 more copies.
No. Name
1 Used Toner Motor Sensor (S14)
2 Used Toner Lock Sensor (S9)
3 Transport Coil (from Belt Transfer Unit)
4 Used Toner Motor (M4)
5 Used Toner Bottle
6 Transport Coil (from Toner Separation Unit)
The used toner bottle full alert is released when the full toner bottle is replaced by an empty
bottle [A] that activates the toner bottle set switch [B].
• If the used toner bottle is not installed correctly, The operation panel shows the warning of
the not installed unit.
• The capacity of the used toner bottle is 5,000 cc, equivalent to about 500K copies (A4 at
6% coverage).
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Name
[A] Used Toner Bottle

[B] Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor (SW1)
Process Control
The machine uses process control to make adjustments to compensate for changes over time
around the drum that can be caused by dirty optics, changes in the output of the charge corona
unit, and deterioration of the drum sensitivity. Here is a description of what happens when the
machine is turned on with the fusing temperature below 50°C (122F) (when process control is
switched on with SP3901).
Settings Adjusted Around the Drum Automatically at Power On
• IM 9000 not only performs Vref update by the potential sensor (S11) pattern density but
also performs toner density adjustment to improve the performance of follow-up of toner
density.
• These adjustments are used to determine toner supply or consumption in process control,
so during machine installation or every time developer is replaced, open the front door, turn
the power ON, and then enter SP mode (system/copy SP) to make sure to prevent the
process control.
Main SW ON
(Fusing Temp. < 50°C)
V
Potential sensor (S11)
(Vb, Vg, LD control)
V
Image density control

Vref update by ID sensor (S13) pattern density
V
(IM 9000 only) Toner density adjustment
V
Process control is completed
Automatic Setting Operation

1.Development bias (Vb) / Charge grid voltage (Vg) / LD power Adjustment by
Potential Sensor
• The development bias (Vb), charge grid voltage (Vg) and LD power are determined based
on the potential sensor (S11) readings in the process shown in the flowchart above.
• The LD power cannot be determined if the setting cannot be done after 82 attempts and
the amount of step change of LD power in a retry is -127 or +127 on referring to the initial
value. In that case, the previous process control reading value is used.
• If the charge grid voltage cannot be determined, SC411-01 and SC411-02 will be logged.
2.Image density control Vref update by ID sensor pattern density
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• After the development bias, drum charge grid, and laser diode (LD) power have been
adjusted based on the readings of the potential sensor (S11), the ID sensor (S13) reading
is used to update the standard Vref for the TD sensor (S2).
• The ID sensor (S13) pattern density is calculated (Vsp/Vsg), and based on this result, the
value of Vref is retrieved from a lookup table and used to adjust the amount of shift for the
standard Vref setting for the TD sensor (S2).
• By adjusting the Vref setting, this sets the correct setting according to the reading of the
current ID sensor (S13) pattern with reference to the toner supply to the development unit.
5.4.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Development Unit Cross Section
No. Name
1 Development Filter
2 Toner Transport Coil
3 Agitator
4 TD Sensor (S2)
5 Paddle Roller
7 Back-spill Plate
Here is a summary of the development unit mechanisms and features.
• Development Mechanism. Dual, small diameter granulated components for dry
electrostatic development.
• Developer auger mechanism. A paddle roller, developer agitator, separator, and transport
coil mix and transport the developer and toner.
• Development bias mechanism. The development power pack (PCB3) supplies bias to
the development unit.
• Toner density control. Toner density is monitored and controlled by the ID sensor (S13)
and TD sensor(S2).
• Development Unit Drive Mechanism. A single, dedicated motor drives the development
unit.
• Development Unit Pressure Release (IM9000 only). A pressure release tube ensures air
flow.
Toner Supply Unit
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Toner Bottle
2 Shutter Lever
3 Shutter
4 Agitator
5 Toner Supply Roller
6 Toner End Sensor (S1)
7 Toner Bottle Motor (M1)
Here is a summary of the toner supply mechanisms and features.
• Toner Transport Mechanism. Toner inside the toner hopper on top of the development
unit is moved from the front to the rear on the toner supply roller.
• Toner end detection. The toner end sensor (S1) (a pressure sensor (S36)) detects when
there is no toner in the hopper.
• Toner bottle shutter. The toner bottle shutter prevents toner from spilling when the toner
bottle holder is opened during toner bottle replacement.
• Toner bottle supply mechanism. A small toner bottle motor (M1) rotates the toner bottle.
• Toner separation. The toner separation mechanism separates paper dust and clumps
from recycled toner.
Development Mechanism
In order to improve the quality of images, the development unit employs a single development
roller sleeve, and a concentrated magnetic band inside the sleeve.
• The small diameter, pulverized toner is comprised of two components.
• The toner collected during cleaning can be recycled and used again, greatly reducing toner
consumption.
No. Name
Inside the Development Unit

The thickness of toner on the sleeve is controlled by the doctor blade. Excess toner flows to the
back-spill plate on top of the development unit. From there, the Toner Transport Coil distributes
the toner evenly from front to rear.
• The toner at the rear of the separator falls into the mixing vanes which move the toner from
rear to front.
• New toner supplied to the development agitator is agitated by the paddle roller while it is
being mixed with the developer.
No. Name
1 Transport Coil
2 Development Agitator
No. Name
3 Paddle Roller
4 Doctor Blade
5 Separator
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Development Bias
The development power pack (PCB3) above the drum applies a negative charge (-550V) to the
development unit which in turn passes this negative charge to the toner for its part in the
development process. (-550 V). When bias is applied to the development sleeve roller, it is also
applied to the lower casing and doctor blade to prevent toner back spill from the drum.
No. Name
2 Development Bias Terminal
Development Unit Pressure Release (IM9000 only)

In order to relieve the build up of pressure inside the development unit, the development unit of
the IM9000 is provided with pressure release tube [A].
Toner Supply
The readings of the ID sensor (S13) and TD sensor (S2) are used to control toner density by
telling the machine when to switch the toner supply clutch on and off to control the supply of
toner to the toner supply roller. The toner supply roller has 8 grooves that catch the toner and
then dump it into the development unit as the roller rotates.
No. Name
1 Toner Supply Clutch
Development Unit Drive and Cooling

The development motor (M24) drives the development unit, toner supply mechanism, and toner
separation mechanism. The knob attached to the paddle roller rotates in one direction only.
No. Name
1 Toner Supply Drive
2 Manual Turn Knob
3 Development Coupling
4 Development Motor (M24)
Two large fans on the right side of the machine cool the development unit. These fans are set to
switch on/off when the machine is switched on/off (the fans remain on for 10 sec. after the
machine is switched off).
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Development Unit
Toner Transport
Fresh toner from the toner bottle and reusable toner collected during drum cleaning are sent to
the agitator where they are mixed with developer. A gear train operates the paddle drive when
the toner supply clutch is on.
No. Name
1 Toner Bottle
2 Agitator
Toner End Detection

The toner end sensor (S1) (a piezoelectric sensor sensitive to changes in pressure) at the front
end of the development unit detects toner end. The machine is released from the toner end
state by opening and closing the front door of the machine.
No. Name
1 Toner End Sensor (S1)
Shutter Mechanism
When the toner holder is opened and the toner bottle is removed for maintenance, a
self-sealing shutter closes automatically to prevent toner spillage. The top of the shutter has a
semi-circular opening that normally allows toner to flow into the toner hopper.
No. Name
1 Toner Shutter
2 Toner Hopper
3 Toner Port
4 Toner Bottle
Toner Bottle Supply, Toner Bottle Cooling

The toner bottle motor (DC motor) (M1) drives the gear that rotates the toner bottle.
• The operation of the toner bottle motor (M1) is controlled by the toner end sensor (S1);
when the sensor detects no toner in the hopper twice, it signals the motor to rotate the
bottle for 1.1 sec.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Toner Bottle
2 Toner Bottle Motor (M1)
3 Toner Hopper
• In order to prevent toner from clumping in the toner bottle, the toner bottle cooling fan
behind the toner bottle switches on/off when the polygon motor (M23) in the laser switches
on/off.
5.4.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

There are two toner supply control modes:
• Sensor Control
• Pixel Count
Either can be selected with SP2208 with Sensor Control as the default, or normal operation
mode).
Sensor Control Mode

In sensor control mode the machine uses the input of the ID sensor (S13) and the TD sensor
(S2): the TD sensor (S2) reads the toner density during development and the ID sensor (S13)
reads the density of the toner on the drum. The purpose of monitoring the toner density is to
keep a fixed amount of toner in the developer while keeping the density level suitable for the
images being printed.
Here is a brief overview of toner density control:
1. The TD sensor (S2) reads the density of the toner in the developer for every copy. This
reading is output by the TD sensor (S2) as Vt. Vt (the TD sensor (S2) reading) and Vref
(the targeted control reference voltage for the TD sensor (S2)) are used to calculate the
value of the GAIN. (0, 1, 2, 3, 4).
2. The equation below is used to calculate the clutch ON time.
Where, if GAIN = 0, startup time of 16 ms is reset to 0.

• Image pixel count: The density for every dot in the output data for the page is
calculated (Example: 255 for A3).
• Target density: 0.7 mg/cm2
• Toner supply: 850 mg/s (This default setting can be adjusted with SP2209).
• Clutch startup time: 16 ms (The actual time required for the toner to reach the hopper
after the clutch turns on.)
3. At 10-copy intervals (adjustable with SP2210) and at job end the ID sensor (S13)
measures Vsg, Vsp.
4. Vref (target reference voltage) from the TD sensor (S2) is updated with the new readings of
Vsp, Vsg.
Pixel Count Mode

The ON time is calculated with the same formula described above, but the GAIN value is fixed
at 0.7.
TD Sensor Reference Voltage

The TD sensor (S2) reference voltage must be initialized the first time the development unit is
filled with developer at machine installation and every time the developer is replaced. The
sensor control voltage is adjusted until the output is 3.0±0.1V, and after the control voltage is set,
Vt is sampled 100 times, and then these samplings are averaged and used to set the standard
reference value for Vt.

Here are some important points to remember:
• After the developer has been replaced, it must be initialized with SP2801.
• After the TD sensor (S2) has been replaced, it must be initialized with SP2801.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• If a partially used development unit from another machine is installed, open SP2220 (Vref
Manual Setting) on the loan machine to display the Vref value of the TD sensor (S2), and
then enter this value in the other machine with the same SP. Next, open SP2906 (TD
Sensor (S2) Control Voltage Setting) to display the setting, and then enter this setting on
the other machine with the same SP.
• These initial settings are stored in NVRAM. Before replacing an NVRAM, always print an
SMC report so you can read the settings off the report and enter them manually after
NVRAM has been replaced.
Abnormal TD Sensor (S2) Output

If a problem occurs with the TD when developer in initialized:
• SC codes are issued and the machine will display the immediately previous value of
SP2906 (TD Sensor (S2) Control Voltage Setting).
• If Vt is "0" then the machine returns SC360-01.
• After the start of adjustment, if the TD sensor (S2) output does not enter the target range of
Vt = 3.0±0.1V within 20 sec., the machine returns SC360-11.
If a problem occurs with the TD sensor (S2) during a print job, one of the following conditions
has been detected:
• TD sensor (S2) outut Vt is 0.5V or lower (SC362-00).
• TD sensor (S2) outut Vt is 4V or higher (SC361-00).
The SC code is logged, and the toner supply moves into the ID Sensor Supply Mode + Pixel
Count Mode, or the Pixel Count Mode (using ID sensor reading as reference).
ID Sensor Control
At power on, or after the specified number of prints (Default: 10) and at job end, the ID
sensor (S13) reads the ID sensor (S13) pattern on the drum. The purpose of the ID
sensor (S13) reading is to calculate the ID sensor (S13) pattern density (Vsp/Vsg) and then use
this result to determine the target reference voltage of the TD sensor (S2). The timing of when
these ID sensor (S13) patterns are created on the drum is controlled by turning process control
on/off in the SP mode.
When process control is on and the potential sensor output is normal:
• Drum charge grid voltage is set automatically, based on conditions around the drum.
• LD power is set automatically, based on conditions around the drum, and on the reading of
a Vh pattern (reading of half-tone) on the drum.
• The potential sensor checks the development bias voltage when the ID sensor (S13)
pattern is created (Target: -240V set by SP2201-004).

If process control is off, or if the potential sensor is defective:
• Charge corona grid voltage is set to the previous successful process control value
• LD power is set to the previous successful process control value.
• Development bias is set to the previous successful process control value.
• For operators who are concerned about changes in toner density during long,
continuous copy jobs, the machine can be set to create ID sensor (S13) patterns
during long jobs by switching on SP2507-001, and then setting the interval for pattern
creations with SP2507-002. However, if an interval is set for ID sensor (S13) pattern
creation and sampling during long jobs, this could cause delays at 2 or 3 sec. intervals
and lower productivity of the machine.
Both TD Sensor (S2) and ID Sensor (S13) Abnormal

If the output of both of these sensors is abnormal during toner supply, toner supply mode will
change.
• When the TD sensor (S2) and ID sensor (S13) are both operating normally, both sensors
are used during toner supply control.
• If only the TD sensor (S2) fails, then ID sensor (S13) output is used with Pixel Count.
• If only the ID sensor (S13) fails, then TD sensor (S2) output is used.
• If TD sensor (S2) and ID sensor (S13) both fail, then only Pixel Count is used.
SC codes are issued with the failure of either the TD sensor (S2) or ID sensor (S13).
Toner Near-End Control

The toner end detection and control sequence is described in the flowchart below. The machine
can continue to print up to 1,000 sheets (A4 at 6% coverage) after the toner near-end alert is
issued.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Toner End Recovery

At toner near-end the toner bottle is nearly empty and can be replaced.
• When the front door is opened and closed, the machine attempts to recover on the
assumption that the bottle has been replaced.
• The description below is based on the assumption that front door has been opened and
closed after the toner near-end or toner end alert appeared.
5.4.5 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
Overview
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Transfer Belt
2 Transfer Bias Roller
3 Belt Idle Roller
4 Separation Lever
5 Agitator
7 Cleaning Blade
8 Belt Drive Roller
9 Cleaning Bias Roller
Here is a summary of the transfer belt unit mechanisms and features:
• Image Transfer and Paper Separation Mechanism. A system wherein a bias roller
applies an electrostatic charge to a transfer belt of moderately low resistance. A wide
transfer belt compatible with many types of paper and that generates no ozone is used.
• Transfer Belt Lift Mechanism. Job timing controls the DC solenoid that raises and lowers
the transfer belt unit.
• Drive and Paper Transport Mechanism. The drum motor rotates the gear and roller that
drives the transport belt that carries the paper.
• Transfer Belt Cleaning Mechanism. A counter blade, cleaning bias roller, and bias roller
cleaning blade comprise the transfer belt cleaning mechanism.
• Transfer Belt Release Mechanism. The easy-to-operate belt release makes paper jam
removal easy.
• Transfer Belt Anti-Slip Mechanism. Roller ends are tapered to prevent belt slippage.
• Anti-Condensation Mechanism. A single heater (option) installed below the belt unit.
Transfer Separation Mechanism

Each sheet of paper is fed as far as the registration roller. This is timed so that the leading edge
of the sheet reaches the leading edge of the image on the surface of the drum above.
• Normally, the transfer belt remains separated from the drum.
• The transfer separation solenoid switches on and raises the transfer belt when the
registration sensor (S3) detects the leading edge of the first sheet, and then the belt
remains up until the end of the job.
No. Name
1 Transfer Belt
2 Drum (OPC)
3 Registration Roller
• When the paper approaches the point where the leading edge of the paper on the belt will
come into contact with the drum above, the transfer belt lift solenoid raises the separation
lever so the belt comes into contact with the drum above.
• This creates a nip between the belt and drum about 8 mm wide.
No. Name
1 Separation Lever
Image Transfer Mechanism

When the paper enters the nip between belt and drum, the transfer bias roller applies a
negative bias charge to the belt. This pulls the toner with a positive charge from the drum onto
the paper.
• The transfer belt is of moderately low resistance, so the belt and electrical charge on the
belt is neutralized with the movement of toner from drum to belt.
• The transfer power pack inside the transfer belt unit applies the high bias charge to the
transfer bias roller.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• This transfer system is controlled with a constant voltage system that ensures stable image
transfer and paper separation for a variety of paper in variable ambient conditions which
can cause changes on the surface of the low resistance belt.
No. Name
2 Transfer Power Pack (PCB4)
Transfer Bias Charge Mechanism

The transfer power pack inside the transfer belt unit applies the charge (Max. +7.0 KV) to the
bias roller.
• The power pack divides the charge and also applies a charge (Max. 1000V) to the terminal
of the cleaning bias roller.
• The belt drive roller and idle roller are grounded to improve the efficiency of cleaning.
No. Name
No. Name
2 Transfer Bias Terminal
3 Transfer Power Pack (PCB4)
4 Transfer Belt Idle Roller
5 Ground Terminal
6 Cleaning Bias Terminal
7 Transfer Belt Drive Roller
Transfer Belt Lift

The transfer belt lift solenoid inside the transfer belt unit is switched on by job timing to raise the
belt against the drum. Springs are attached to the front of the solenoid to apply pressure in the
direction of lift to reduce the load placed on the solenoid.
Normally, the transfer belt remains separated from the drum for the following reasons:
• The transfer belt would rub the ID sensor (S13) patterns off the surface of the drum.
• Cleaning ID sensor (S13) patterns from the surface of the belt would put an extra load on
the belt cleaning mechanism.
• If the transfer belt and drum were in constant contact this would cause the materials from
the belt to stick to the drum and increase wear on both drum and belt.
No. Name
1 Transfer Separation Lever (Rear)
2 Separation Lever
3 Transfer Separation Lever (Front)
4 Transfer Separation Solenoid
Transfer Belt Drive and Paper Transport Mechanism

The drum motor drives the belt and gears that rotate the transfer belt drive roller.
• The electrostatic charge on the belt holds the paper on the belt while the drive roller drives
the belt.
• The electrical charge on the belt is discharged, to make the separation of paper from the
belt at the drive roller much easier.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Transfer Belt Driver Roller
2 Center Connecting Gear
Transfer Belt Cleaning Mechanism

While the job timing keeps the transfer belt and drum in contact as paper passes between them,
paper dust and toner from blank areas on the paper can adhere to the surface of the drum
above and then pass on to the transfer belt below.
• The positive charge applied to the cleaning bias roller can pull the negatively charged toner
and paper dust away from the belt and onto the bias roller blade.
• The cleaning blade in direct contact with the belt also scrapes away toner and paper dust,
the collected toner and dust are dumped into the toner collection coil and transported to the
rear of the machine, and then are sent to the used toner bottle.
No. Name
1 Drive Roller
2 Cleaning Blade
4 Idle Roller
6 Agitator
Transfer Belt Release Mechanism

Rotating the C1 release lever to the left lowers the drive roller clockwise to release the belt.
Lowering the transfer belt lets the operator easily remove paper jams, and allows the service
technician to service the machine much easier, especially when removing and reinstalling the
drum unit.
No. Name
1 Transfer Pressure Arm
2 Separation Lever
Anti-Condensation Heater (Option) (H1)

If the drum heater (option) (H2) is installed below the transfer belt unit and drum, it will switch on
every time the main unit is switched off to prevent condensation from forming around the
transfer belt and drum while the machine is idle.
No. Name
1 Drum Heater
Image Transfer Current Settings

Here is a list of the default electrical current settings for optimal image transfer to paper from
each paper station.
Optimal Transfer Current Settings
Conditions Transfer Current (Default) SP No.

Tray 1 (Front Side) IM 7000/8000 65uA, IM 9000 80uA 2-301-001
Tray 2 (Back Side) IM 7000/8000 65uA, IM 9000 80uA 2-301-002
Bypass Tray (Front Side) IM 7000/8000 75uA, IM 9000 80uA 2-301-003
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Postcard (Back Side) 165 uA 2-301-004
Paper Interval 15 uA 2-301-005
Paper Line Speed Mode Transfer Current Settings (IM 7000/8000 Only)
Conditions Transfer Current (Default) SP No.
Thick 3 (Front Side) IM 7000/8000:120uA 2-301-145
Thick 3 (Back Side) IM 7000/8000:120uA 2-301-146
Thick 4 (Back Side) Japan only IM 7000/8000:120uA 2-301-149
• In order for the machine to recognize postcard size, the bypass side fences must be set to
A6 width.
• Bias is applied to the intervals between paper edges to improve the efficiency of belt
cleaning.
• Not done at job end, or when process control is executing to automatically compensate for
ambient conditions around the drum.
The transfer output is set for 2.6 KV (constant voltage) while the main motor is on, and the
cleaning bias is set for 1000V for transfer belt cleaning.
5.4.6 FUSING UNIT
Overview
IM 7000/8000 (Three Fusing Lamps)

1 Paper Exit Sensor (S24) 10 Fusing Lamp (100V/550W)

2 Exit Unit Entrance Sensor (S25) 11 Cleaning Web
3 Pickoff pawls 12 Pressure Spring
4 Hot Roller 13 Entrance Guide Plate
5 Thermostats (Non-Contact Type) 14 Pressure Roller
6 Thermostats (192°C/200°C) 15 Pressure Arm
7 Thermistor (Contact x1, NC x) 16 Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller
8 Fusing Lamp (100V/700W) 17 Fusing Unit Paper Sensor
9 Fusing Lamp (50V/750W) 18 Exit Junction Gate
IM 9000 (Two Fusing Lamps)

1 Paper Exit Sensor (S24) 9 Fusing Lamp (100V/630W)
2 Exit Unit Entrance Sensor (S25) 10 Pressure Spring
3 Pickoff pawls 11 Entrance Guide Plate
4 Hot Roller 12 Pressure Roller
5 Thermistor (Non-Contact Type) 13 Pressure Arm
6 Thermostats (192°C/211°C/200°C) 14 Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller
7 Thermistor (Contact Type) 15 Fusing Unit Paper Sensor
8 Fusing Lamp (100V/800W) 16 Exit Junction Gate
Here is summary of the mechanisms and features of these fusing units.
• Fusing. Finely lubricated heat roller system.
• Fusing Pressure. Pressure roller and spring mechanism
• Pressure Application Method (IM 7000/8000 Only). A pressure release mechanism
prevents the pressure roller from being permanently warped.
• Fusing Unit Drive. Fusing exit motor and drive belt

• Fusing Pressure. Spring mounted on cleaning roller
• Temperature Control. Hot roller center fusing lamp, hot roller end fusing lamp heated by
DC fusing lamp. (The DC fusing lamp is provided on the IM 7000/8000 only.)
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• Hot Roller Cleaning Web. Web roller applies a thin coat of oil for lubrication and cleaning.
More About the Fusing Unit

The fusing unit employs two fusing lamps (H9) inside the hot roller, an end fusing lamp (H7) (IM
7000/8000 700W, IM 9000 630W) and a center fusing lamp (H6) (IM 7000/8000 550W, IM 9000
800W). The IM 7000/8000, however, are provided with an additional auxiliary fusing DC lamp
(750W) to prevent a drop in fusing temperature during startup time and at the beginning of
copying.
IM 7000/8000
• The surface of the roller is thin (0.7 mm) so it can reach standby temperature within 10 sec.
of startup.
• The pressure roller surface is a soft, pliable bubble like material that creates a nip of
optimal width against the hot roller.
• The center thermistor is a non-contact thermistor, but the end thermistors contact the hot
roller to achieve more precise fusing temperature control.
• The end thermistors are located far enough away from the ends of the roller so as to not
interfere with image fusing.
• The stripper pawls are the same as those on the IM 9000, making it easier to service all
models with the same replacement pawls.
No. Part Name

1 Fusing Thermostat (TS3) (192°C)
No. Part Name

4 Fusing Thermistor - Center (TH1)
5 Fusing Thermistor – End (TH2)
IM 9000
• The composition of the hot roller, including the surface of the hot roller coating and the
diameter of the roller, is equal to IM7000/8000 in specification. (Only some of thermistors
and harness are different.)
• Startup time is 60 .sec at the maximum.
No. Part Name

4 Fusing Thermistor - Center (TH1)
5 Fusing Thermistor – End (TH2)
Fusing Pressure Mechanism

Large springs apply pressure to the front and rear ends of the pressure roller to create the
fusing pressure between pressure roller and hot roller.
• The springs are attached to the pressure arms below both ends of the pressure roller,
pulling the pressure roller up against the hot roller.
• The pressure exerted by the pressure roller can be released easily in order to service the
fusing unit.
• There are two holes on each pressure arm, and normally the springs should be attached to
the lower holes, but the ends of the springs can be set in the upper holes for printing on
extremely thin paper.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Hot Roller
2 Pressure Roller
3 Pressure Arm
Pressure Application
This mechanism ensures that the shape of the pressure roller does not become distorted:
• At power on, the pressure roller HP sensor activates and keeps the pressure roller at rest
away from the surface of the hot roller.
• At the start of a job, the pressure roller moves up against the hot roller.
• After the last sheet exits at the end of a job, the pressure roller pulls away from the hot
roller.
• If there is no next job, the pressure roller remains away from the hot roller.
• If a paper jam or SC error occurs during a job, the hot roller and pressure roller stop, and
then the pressure roller pulls away from the hot roller.
No. Name
1 Hot Roller
2 Pressure Roller
3 Pressure Roller Spring
4 Pressure Arm
5 Fusing Pressure Release Sensor (S22)
6 Fusing Pressure Release Motor (M27)
Fusing Safety Devices

The fusing units are provided with thermostats that trip the power supply to the fusing unit if the
unit overheats. Always pay attention to the placement of thermostats when they are replaced.
There are three thermostats.
Entrance Guide Height Adjustment

The height of the entrance guide can be adjusted with screws.
• Remove the screws and move them to the inner holes to lower the guide for paper smaller
than A4 or thin paper that wrinkles easily.
• For sheets larger than A4 that wrinkles easily, move the screws to the outer positions.
• The screws are set at the outer holes before the machine leaves the factory (default
positions).
No. Name
1 Entrance Guide
Fusing Drive Mechanism

The fusing exit motor drives the drive belt that rotates the fusing unit drive coupling.
This coupling on the rear end of the fusing unit engages automatically when the unit is pushed
into the machine.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
2 Fusing Unit
Temperature Control for Special Paper

The method of fusing temperature control for special paper is determined by the type of paper
(OHP, thick paper, etc.) selected on the operation panel by the operator.
• For OHP sheets fed from the bypass tray, the initial setting is 210°C (This can be adjusted
in SP1-105-003), and for Thick Paper, the initial setting is 220°C (this can be changed in
SP1-105-005).
• CPM Down Mode (CPM=Copies per Minute) adjusts the speed for Thick Paper in long print
jobs. The fusing temperate for CPM Down Mode can be adjusted with SP1901-001.
Fusing Temperature Control

When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamps (H6, H7, H9) are switched on and off to
heat the hot roller (on/off control). During printing or copying, however, the hot roller is heated
using phase control.
• If an ambient temperature is 15°C (59°F) or higher, it will take 20 sec. for IM 7000/IM 8000
to perform copying/printing, and it will take 60 sec. for IM9000, but if an ambient
temperature is lower than 15°C (59°F), it will take 60 sec. for IM 7000/IM 8000 to reach
standby temperature, and it will take 66 sec. for IM9000.
• These temperature readings are done by the temperature/humidity sensor (S26) located in
the center of the machine, near the laser unit.
CPM Down Mode

At low ambient temperature (less than 15°C (59°F)):
• CPM is reduced 80% (Example: 70 CPM to 56 CPM)
• CPM is restored to 100% when hot roller temperature rises to 165°C +3°C.
At temperature below 165°C during a job at normal ambient temperature:
• CPM is reduced 80% (Example: 70 CPM to 56 CPM)
• CPM is restored to 100% when hot roller temperature rises to 165°C +3°C.
Important Related SP Codes

To Reduce Back Side Paper Curl During Duplex Printing
• SP1102-001 Fusing Temperature Adjustment - Duplex Actual Temperature (Default: None).
The temperature for fusing control is calculated based on the values of SP1102-2 (Center)
and SP1102-002 (End) in order to reduce back curl (paper curl toward back side of the
paper).
To Improve Fusibility
• SP1901-001 CPM Down Setting for Special Paper - Thick Paper 1, 2 (Default: 40 cpm)
• SP1901-005 CPM Down Setting for Special paper - Thick Paper 3 or More (Default: 40
cpm). If fusibility is low, CPM can be lowered to 35 or 25. At this time SP1907-001 (Thick
Paper 1, 2) or SP1907-009 (Thick Paper 3 or More), the "Pre-Fusing Idling Time" setting
can be switched on to improve fusibility. However, this setting increases the amount of time
to reach standby temperature and will slow down the line speed.
• SP1901-002 CPM Down Setting for Special Paper - Tab Sheet (Default: 25 cpm). Turning
"Pre-Fusing Idling Time" on can significantly improve fusibility.
• SP1901-003 CPM Down Setting for Special Paper - Label CPM (Default: 25 cpm). Turning
"Pre-Fusing Idling Time" of SP1907-007 on can also significantly improve fusibility.
• SP1925-001 to 004 Idling Setting (001 Medium Thick "On", 002 Thick "Off", 003 Normal 1
"Off", 004 Normal 2 "Off"). The pre-fusing idling time done immediately after the machine is
turned on at the start of the work day can improve fusibility. The machine enters fusing
idling mode if the center thermistor returns a reading lower than 60°C (140°F) at startup. If
the reading is more than 60°C, pre-fusing idling is not done. However, the maximum wait is
60 sec.
5.4.7 TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN CONTROL

The readings of a new temperature center mounted near the center of the machine are used to
control the cooling fans and operation of the machine. Also, these temperature readings are
used to control the speed of rotation of the main intake fan, main exhaust fan (FAN9), and heat
exhaust fan (FAN8).
Fans Controlled by Temperature Sensor
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Part No. Part
1 Heat Exhaust Fan (FAN8) 6 Duplex Fan (FAN1)
2 Main Exhaust Fan (FAN9) 7 PCU Fan (FAN7)
3 Controller Fan (FAN2) 8 Fusing Exit Fan (FAN14)
4 Main Intake Fan (FAN10) 9 Toner Bottle Fan (FAN6)
5 Drum Fan (FAN11)
No. Part
10 PSU Fan 1 (FAN4)
11 PSU Fan 2 (FAN5)
12 AC Drive Board Fan
No. Part
Fan Speed Control by Temperature Sensor

Main Exhaust Fan
Critical Temp. Operation Parameters (SP Codes)
Up to 25°C (77°F) SP1956-001 Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. Silent
Descriptions
4BDetailed
[0 to 100/28/1%]
25°C to 40°C (77°F to 104°F) SP1956-002 Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. Low Speed
[0 to 100/28/1%]
40°C to 42°C (104°F to 107.6°F) SP1956-003 Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. Mid Speed
[0 to 100/28/1%]
Above 42°C (107.6°F) SP1956-004 Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. High Speed
[0 to 100/30/1%]
Print Status SP1956-005 Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. Printing
[0 to 100/48*/1%] * IM 9000: 58
Main Intake Fan
Up to 25°C (77°F) SP1957-001 Intake Fan Duty Adj. Silent
[0 to 100/30/1%]
25°C to 40°C (77°F to 104°F) SP1957-002 Intake Fan Duty Adj. Low Speed
[0 to 100/50/1%]
40°C to 42°C (104°F to 107.6°F) SP1957-003 Intake Fan Duty Adj. Mid Speed
[0 to 100/60/1%]
Above 42°C (107.6°F) SP1957-004 Intake Fan Duty Adj. High Speed
[0 to 100/70/1%]
Heat Exhaust Fan
Up to 25°C (77°F) SP1958-001 Heat Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. Silent
[0 to 100/33/1%]
25°C to 40°C (77°F to 104°F) SP1958-002 Heat Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. Low Speed
[0 to 100/33/1%]
40°C to 42°C (104°F to 107.6°F) SP1958-003 Heat Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. Mid Speed
[0 to 100/38/1%]
Above 42°C (107.6°F) SP1958-004 Heat Exhaust Fan Duty Adj. High Speed
[0 to 100/55*/1%] * IM 9000: 65
Up to 25°C (77°F) SP1958-005
[0 to 100/55*/1%] * IM 9000: 65
25°C to 40°C (77°F to 104°F) SP1958-006
[0 to 100/55*/1%] * IM 9000: 65
40°C to 42°C (104°F to 107.6°F) SP1958-007

[0 to 100/55*/1%] * IM 9000: 65
Relate SP Codes
SP Name, Function Settings
2972-001 Toner Bottle Fan (FAN6) Setting – [0 to 1/0/1 Step]
Force Operation 0: Operates fan based on engine operation and
Switches toner bottle fan (FAN6) temperature sensor readings.
control off/on 1: Fan always operates regardless of machine
mode when it would normally be off (standby, low
power mode, etc.)
2974-001 Drum Fan (FAN3) Setting – Force 0 to 1/0/1 Step]
Operation 0: Operates fan based on engine operation and
Switches drum fan (FAN3) control temperature sensor readings.
off/on 1: Fan always operates regardless of machine
mode when it would normally be off (standby, low
power mode, etc.)
2976-001 Development Unit Fan 1, 2 0 to 1/0/1 Step]
(FAN12, FAN13) – Force 0: Operates fans based on engine operation and
Operation temperature sensor readings.
Switches development unit 1: Fans always operates regardless of machine
fan (FAN12, FAN13) control mode when they would normally be off (standby,
off/on. low power mode, etc.)
2978-001 Fan Time Extension Setting [0 to 255/0/1 min.]
Extends fan operation time at job Fans normally turn off at job end, but the length
end. time the fans remain on after job end can be
extended with this SP.
9540-001 Temperature Control Switch [0 to 4/0/1]
Setting – Sensor Detection Sets fans to always operate within a fixed
DFU (for Design and Factory Use temperature ranged, defined by the operator.
only). Normally not adjusted in the 0: Normal
field. 1: Up to x°C
2: x°C to y°C
3: y°C to z°C
4: Above z°C
Paper Transport
5.5 PAPER TRANSPORT
5.5.1 PAPER FEED UNITS (PFU)
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Overview
Each paper bank has an independent, identical paper feed unit (PFU). The universal paper
trays also have identical components.
• The PFUs are also provided with two grip rollers for handling thick paper.
• The bypass paper feed unit also employs the FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) paper feed
mechanism.
No. Part Name

1 Tray 1 (Tandem Tray)
2 Grip Roller
3 Lower Grip Roller
4 Feed Roller
5 Separation Roller
6 Pick-up Roller
7 Tray 2 (Universal Tray)
8 Tray 3 (Universal Tray)
Here is a summary of the PFU mechanisms and features.
Paper Bank
• Paper Separation and Feed. The FRR system employs a maintenance free, nip release
Paper Transport
torque limiter in the separation roller. Driven by the feed motor (M16, M15, M14, M13).
• Tray Movement. A lift motor raises and lowers the bottom plate. Pulling out a paper tray
disengages a coupling at the back of the tray and this lowers the bottom tray automatically.
• Paper Stack Height Detection. The lift motor can detect paper near-end and trigger a
paper near-end alert.
• Paper End Detection. A reflective photo-interrupter sensor detects paper end (paper out).
• Paper Size Detection. For Tray 1 (tandem tray) SP5959-001 must be set for the size of
the paper loaded in the tray. The universal trays have actuators connected to the side
fences that will activate switches in a 5-switch array, indicating the size of the loaded paper.
• Vertical Paper Feed. Each PFU has a grip roller that pulls the paper fed out of the tray by
the feed roller and sends it into the vertical paper path.
• Tray Set Mechanism. Each tray locks in place automatically when pushed into the
machine.
• Anti-Condensation. Two paper bank heaters are provided as standard equipment with the
machine.
• Tandem Tray. The left tray of Tray 1 has a mechanism that can move a stack of paper into
the right tray.
Bypass Feed
• Bypass Feed Tray. The bypass feed tray which can be opened and closed against the
right side of the machine can hold up to 100 sheets of paper.
• Paper Separation and Feed and Separation. A maintenance free torque limiter (slip
clutch) is employed in an FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) system. Driven by bypass feed
motor and bypass feed clutch.
• Paper End Detection. A drop feeler and photo-interrupt sensor comprise the paper end
detection mechanism.
• Paper Size Detection. Side fences set against the side of the stack detect paper size. A
new paper length sensor detects paper length as it feeds.
Paper Registration and Transport
• Registration and Transport Mechanism. Paper from each of four paper feed stations
(paper banks, bypass feed tray, duplex unit, LCIT) is guided to the same paper registration
unit. In order to make it easier to remove paper jams, jammed sheets can be removed from
the area between the registration rollers and the entrance to the duplex unit.
• Paper Dust Collection. A mylar sheet extends below the registration roller to collect paper
dust.
• Paper Transport Drive Layout. Each PFU is equipped with its own paper feed motor (DC
motor).
Paper Transport
5.5.2 TRAY PAPER FEED DRIVE
Paper Feed From Tray 1

• There are two paper feed motors in Tray 1 (tandem tray).
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• In Tray 1 and Tray 2, both motors work together when feeding from either tray.
• This change was implemented to provide more drive power during paper feed.
Tray 1 (Rear View)

No. Part
1 Tray 1 Grip Roller
2 Tray 1 Feed Roller
3 Tray 1 Reverse Roller
4 Belt
5 Tray 1 Lower Motor
6 Tray 1 Upper Motor
Tray 1 Paper Feed
• The upper motor turns clockwise and rotates the pick-up and feed rollers.
• The reverse roller does not turn at this time because it has a one-way clutch.
• The lower motor turns counter-clockwise, and the belt drives the grip roller and reverse
roller.
Paper Transport
Tray 2, Tray 3 (Rear View)

No. Part
4 Belt
5 Tray 3 Motor
6 Tray 2 Motor
Tray 2 Paper Feed
• Tray 2 motor turns clockwise and rotates the pick-up and feed rollers.
• Tray 3 motor turns counterclockwise, and the belt drives the grip roller and reverse rollers
in Tray 2.
Paper Transport
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Tray 1 (Rear View)
No. Part
5 Tray 3 Motor
7 Tray 2 Motor
Tray 3 Paper Feed
• Tray 3 motor turns clockwise and rotates the pick-up and feed rollers.
• Tray 2 motor turns counterclockwise, and the belt drives the grip roller and reverse rollers
in Tray 2 and Tray 3.
• The grip roller in Tray 2 must rotate in order to feed the paper up from Tray 3 into the
machine.
5.5.3 PFU AND TRAY DETAILS
Paper Feed and Separation

During Standby
Paper Transport
• The adjacent feed motor [A] rotates, grip roller [B] also rotates, and the shaft of separation
roller [C] rotates in the direction of the arrow.
• The reverse roller rotates freely in either direction because the separation solenoid is off.
Paper Feed and Separation

• Separation solenoid [A] turns on, and then the adjacent feed motor [B] turns on. Next,
pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) [C] turns on, and at the same time, the PFU feed
motor turns on. The shaft of feed roller [D] rotates, and the feed roller turns with the rotation
of the one-way clutch. Next, pick-up roller [E] (driven by relay gears) feeds the first sheet
from the top of the stack.
• Separation roller [F], with its internal torque limiter that allows the roller to rotate in either
direction depending on the coefficient of friction with the paper above, also rotates with the
feed roller.
• If two or more sheets of paper feed at the same time the extra friction will lock the torque
limiter and reverse the direction of rotation of the separation roller, and then force the lower
sheets back into the tray.
• Next, feed sensor (S27, S54, S58) [G] (a reflective sensor) detects the paper, the pick-up
solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) turns off, and the pick-up roller lifts and releases the
paper. The paper is then fed to the registration unit.
Paper Transport
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• The table below shows the rotation of each roller when the feed motor is rotating forward or
reverse.
Name Forward Reverse
Pick-up Roller Rotate Stop
Feed Roller Rotate Stop
Separation Roller Stop Rotate
Grip Roller Stop Rotate
Lower Grip Roller Stop Rotate
Separation Roller Release

When the machine is idle, the separation roller [A] and feed roller [B] are separated, but during
paper feed the separation roller [C] is pushed up by the separation roller solenoid [D] against
the feed roller.
Paper Transport
These mechanisms have the following advantages:

• Pressure is on the separation roller only when the feed station is selected for paper feed,
so this reduces wear on the rollers and extends their service lives.
• Paper is easier to remove from separated rollers if a paper jam occurs.
Tray Raising and Lowering

The tray lift motor behind the tray is coupled by a socket and pin to the arm of a bottom plate
that holds the stack. The stack is raised and lowered when the motor operates.
• This mechanism raises and lowers the bottom tray and the paper stack. The socket and pin
of the coupling and the plate lift arm automatically disengage and engage again smoothly
when the paper tray is opened and closed.
• The rotation angle of the tray lift motor is adjusted for the amount of paper remaining in the
tray.
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Bottom Plate Lift Motor
2 Plate Lift Arm Shaft
3 Bottom Plate
Descriptions
4BDetailed
4 Plate Lift Arm
Tray Upper Limit Detection

As soon as the tray is closed, the pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) turns on and lowers
the pick-up roller.
• At this time the tray lift motor (M19, M17, M18) lifts the tray, and the top of the stack raises
the pick-up roller until the actuator on the pick-up roller arm activates the tray lift sensor
(S30, S57, S61) which turns off the lift motor (M19, M17, M18).
• Next, in order to verify that the top of the stack is at the feed position, the lift motor (M19,
M17, M18) reverses, the tray lift sensor (S30, S57, S61) deactivates, the motor turns
forward, this activates the lift sensor (S30, S57, S61), and then this stops the motor.
• Once printing begins, the pick-up roller arm gradually descends as more and more paper
leaves the tray. When the arm is low enough the actuator deactivates the sensor, which
turns on the tray lift motor, and this raises the bottom plate and the paper stack.
No. Name
1 Pick-up Solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17)
2 Pick-up Roller
3 Lift Sensor (S30, S57, S61)
Paper End Detection

A reflective sensor below bottom plate activates and signals paper end when the last sheet
leaves the tray.
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Paper End Sensor (S29, S56, S60)
Paper Size Detection

• Tandem Tray (Fixed Tray). Side fences are adjusted to the size of the paper (A4 or LT),
and then the selected paper size must be input with SP5959-001.
• Universal Trays. The operator can adjust the side fences to the sides of the stack in the
tray, and the machine automatically detects the paper size based on the settings of the side
fences. An array of 5 switches is used to detect the positions of the end fence and side
fence, and the combination of these settings is used to detect the size of the setting that will
be displayed for the tray on the operation panel.
No. Name
1 Front Side Fence
2 Rear Side Fence Sensor
3 Rear Fence
4 Front Side Fence
0: Switch OFF (Sensor output: H)
1: Switch ON (Sensor output: L)
Paper Size Feed Edge Width A B C D E
Paper Transport
Paper Size Feed Edge Width A B C D E

A3 420 297 1 1 0 0 1
B4 364 257 1 0 0 1 1
A4 SEF 297 210 0 1 0 0 1
Descriptions
4BDetailed
A4 LEF 210 297 1 1 0 0 0
B5 SEF 257 182 1 0 1 0 1
B5 LEF 182 257 0 0 0 1 1
A5 SEF 210 148 1 1 1 0 1
A5 LEF 148 210 0 1 1 0 1
DLT (11"x17") 431.8 279.4 1 1 1 0 0
LG(8.5"×14") 355.6 215.9 1 0 1 1 0
LT(8.5"×11") 279.4 215.9 1 1 0 1 0
LT LEF 215.9 279.4 0 1 1 0 0
HTL SEF 215.9 139.7 0 1 1 1 0
HLT SEF 139.7 215.9 1 1 1 1 0
F4(8.5"×13") 330.2 215.9 1 1 0 1 1
Folio(8.25"×13") 330.2 209.55 0 1 0 1 1
F4(8"×13") 330.2 203.2 0 1 1 1 1
Executive(7.25"×10.5")SEF 266.7 184.2 1 0 1 0 0
Executive(7.25"×10.5")LEF 184.2 266.7 0 0 1 1 1
8-kai SEF 390 267 0 0 1 1 0
16-kai SEF 267 195 1 0 0 1 0
16-kai LEF 195 267 1 0 1 1 1
Settings for custom paper sizes can also be specified in the User Tools menus. The entered
paper sizes are displayed on the operation panel.
Size Sensor
A3 SEF 01111
Paper Transport
Size Sensor
B4 SEF 00111
A4 SEF 10011
A4 LEF 01001
B5 SEF 00100
B5 LEF 00010
A5 SEF 00001
A5 LEF 10000
LT LEF 11000
210x170, x182 11100
* 11110
Tray Set Mechanism

To set the position of the tray when the tray is pushed into the machine, a stopper [A] mounted
on the bank frame drops behind a lock roller [B] on the tray cover.
• A spring comprises the mechanism that locks the tray lock roller and the lock arm for each
tray. Each tray has a rail stopper that prevents the tray from moving.
• When a tray is pushed into the machine, the stopper pushes against the lock roller, and
locks the tray once it is pushed in completely.
No. Part Name

[A] Stopper
[B] Lock Roller
[C] Lock Arm
[D] Pressure Spring
[E] Stopper Arm
Vertical Paper Feed

Each PFU is provided with a grip roller [A] and these three rollers (one in each PFU) comprise
part of the vertical transport paper path.
• The shaft of each grip roller is driven by the paper feed motor [B] of each PFU. This
Paper Transport
arrangement allows more efficient paper feed (CPM: Copies per Minute) for optimum
image development.
• The bank paper feed motors drive the rollers of the vertical transport unit, and the main unit
vertical transport drive is provided by the bypass motor (M3).
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• Transport guide [C] (held in place by a lock pin) opens and closes the vertical transport
feed path.
• Each grip roller is provided with a vertical drive belt [D] held in place by a pressure spring.
• Relay sensor (S5) [E] triggers image development and also detects jams at the top of the
vertical path.
Paper Feed Retry Control

Instead of stopping operating once a non-feed jam occurs, the machine can be configured to
retry feeding paper a specified number of times. The number of retries can be specified
between 0 and 5 for each paper tray in the SP mode.
Paper Transport
<Related SPs>
SP No. Value Overview
SP1-009-001 0 to 5 times Specify the number of times the machine retries
Retry Times: Tray1 Default: 2 feeding the paper.
SP1-009-004 0 to 5 times Japan Only
Retry Times: Tray4 Default: 2 Specify the number of times the machine retries
feeding the paper.
Retry Times: By-pass Default: 2 feeding the paper.
Retry Times: LCT Default: 2 feeding the paper.
SP1-010-001 0 to 99999999 Records the number of times paper feed retry has
Retry Execute Times: times been executed.
Tray1
Tray2
Tray3
SP1-010-004 0 to 99999999 Japan Only
Retry Execute Times: times Records the number of times paper feed retry has
Tray4 been executed.
By-pass
Paper Transport

LCT
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Retry Succeed Times: times been successful.
Tray1
Tray2
Tray3
SP1-011-004 0 to 99999999 Japan Only
Retry Succeed Times: times Records the number of times paper feed retry has
Tray4 been successful.
By-pass
LCT
SP1-012-001 - Resets the numbers of times paper feed retry has
Reset No. of Retry been executed/successful.
Success: Tray1
Success: Tray2
Success: Tray3
SP1-012-004 - Japan Only
Reset No. of Retry Resets the numbers of times paper feed retry has
Success: Tray4 been executed/successful.
Success: By-pass
Paper Transport

Success: LCT
Pre-feed Stop Time Adjustment

When the fed sheet reaches the feed sensor and the sensor is ON, pre-feed is completed. The
interval between pre-feed completion and paper feed restart can be adjusted in the SP mode.
When using a type of paper that can be double-fed easily, prolonging the pre-feed stop time
may help prevent double-feeds.
[1] Pick-up roller

[2] Feed roller
[3] Separation roller
[4] Feed sensor
[5] Paper
• Make adjustments only when double-feeds occur.

• When the stop time is longer, the gaps between sheets of paper may become wider,
which lowers productivity.
• If changing the setting does not seem to be effective, return the setting to the previous
value.
<Related SPs>
SP1-013-001 0 to 100 Specify how long the machine waits to restart paper
Adjust Pre-feed Stop msec feed after the feed sensor is ON.
Time: Tray1 Default: 0
Paper Transport

SP1-013-004 0 to 100 Japan Only
Adjust Pre-feed Stop msec Specify how long the machine waits to restart paper
Time: Tray4 Default: 0 feed after the feed sensor is ON.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
5.5.4 TRAY 1 (TANDEM TRAY)

The tandem tray (Tray 1) has no mechanism to automatically detect paper size, so in order to
switch the paper size the service technician must move the rear and front side fences, and then
enter the new setting into SP5959-001.
Tray Movement Mechanism

• A pin on the end of the tray lift motor drive shaft behind the tray meshes with the coupling
on the end of the arm of the bottom tray where the paper sits, and the rotation of the
coupled shaft raises the bottom tray and paper stack.
• The rotation of the coupled shaft drives wires on pulleys at the front and rear of the tray
raises the bottom tray.
• The pin on the end of the bottom tray lift arm and the socket of the tray lift motor drive shaft
disengage easily when the tray is opened, and then the bottom tray descends slowly under
its own weight.
• Dampers ensure that the tray descends slowly and quietly and prevent the tray from falling
too rapidly.
• The right tray paper sensor (S49) (a light reflective sensor) detects the presence of paper
in the right tray.
• The capacity of the right tray is 1,550 sheets, and the paper sensor is provided for
immediate detection of paper in the right tray to avoid having to raise the bottom plate to
detect paper end and wasting several seconds.
• A lower limit sensor is positioned below the bottom tray to detect the lower limit of bottom
plate movement.
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Bottom Plate Lift Motor
2 Right Tray Paper Sensor (S49)
3 Tray Down Sensor
Paper Height Detection

Three sensors at the front of the right tray detect the amount of paper remaining in the tray.
• Every time the tray lift motor stops, and detects which sensor has been actuated (blocked
by the actuator): tray end sensor, sensor 1 (25% remains), sensor 2 (50% remains), sensor
3 (75% remains), and then this reading is displayed on the operation panel.
• If no sensor has been actuated (blocked by the actuator), then the reading is 100%.
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Near-end Sensor
2 Paper Height Sensor 1
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Right Tray Fence Movement Mechanism

• The tandem tray is equipped with two fence solenoids, one for the front side fence and one
for the rear fence.
• When paper runs out in the right tray, the front and rear fence solenoids turn on, open the
front and rear fence, and then remain on until the fence open sensor goes on.
• When the paper stack is pushed into the right tray from the left tray, the rear fence return
sensor detects the stack now in the right tray, and then switches the fence solenoids off
which closes the front side fence and rear side fence.
• The fence closed sensor detects the fences at the closed position, switches on, and then
signals that the fences are closed.
• If the fences are not closed, the machine will prompt the operator to manually correct the
setting of the stack in right tray.
No. Name
1 Front Side Fence
2 Rear Side Fence
3 Rear Side Fence Closed Sensor
4 Rear Side Fence Open Sensor
5 Rear Side Fence Solenoid
6 Front Side Fence Solenoid
Paper Transport
Left Tray Movement

• When left tray paper sensor detects paper in the left tray and the right tray paper end
sensor detects paper end, the rear fence motor (DCM) switches on and pushes the rear
fence against the stack in the left tray to move it into the right tray.
• When the rear fence return sensor of the left tray detects that the stack is no longer in the
left tray it will signal the rear fence motor to reverse rotate (counter-clockwise) and bring
the rear fence back to its home position, and then the motor will turn off once the rear fence
return sensor detects the rear fence at its home position.
• For the left tray to move paper into the right tray, the left tray paper end sensor (S37) must
detect 10 sheets of paper or more in the left tray.
No. Name
1 Rear Side Fence HP Sensor
2 Rear Tray Return Sensor
3 Rear Side Fence Motor
4 Left Tray Paper End Sensor (S37)
5 Rear Side Fence
Left Tray Lock Mechanism

• The left tray is locked and cannot be opened while paper is moving from the left tray into
the right tray.
• When the stack in the left tray starts to move into the right tray, the left tray lock solenoid
turns on and locks a pawl into the bottom plate of the left tray.
• After the stack has moved into the right tray and the side fence of the left tray has returned
to its home position, the left tray lock solenoid goes off and releases the pawl from the
bottom of the left tray.
• This mechanism prevents opening the left tray while the stack is moving from left to right.
Paper Transport
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Left Tray Lock Solenoid
2 Lock Pawl
Right Tray Lock Mechanism

• When the lock release solenoid turns on, a lock lever opens.
• There is a lock lever on the left tray that latches to a shaft in the right tray, and this allows
only the left tray to open when Tray 1 drawer is opened.
• While the release lock solenoid is off, the lock lever is engaged with the shaft of the right
tray and both trays will come out when Tray 1 is opened.
No. Name
1 Lock Release Solenoid
2 Lock Lever
3 Shaft
• When Tray 1 is opened completely, the lock lever is pushed up by a bracket and the left
and right trays separate. The separation of the trays allows easier loading of paper.
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Lock Lever
2 Bracket
5.5.5 BYPASS TRAY
Bypass Feed Tray Mechanism

The bypass tray [A], which opens and closes against the right side of the machine, becomes the
selected paper feed station once paper is loaded in the tray. The bypass tray has a capacity of
100 sheets.
Name
Paper Transport
Name
[A] Bypass Tray
Descriptions
Bypass Tray Feed and Separation Mechanism
4BDetailed
The bypass feed unit uses the same FRR feed mechanisms as those in the PFUs of the main
machine.
• At the start of a job, the pick-up solenoid(SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) turns on and lowers the
pick-up roller [A] to the top of the stack.
• Next, the bypass feed motor [B] and bypass feed clutch (CL1) [C] switch on and paper feed
starts.
• The diameter and size of the feed roller [D] is different to prevent it from being installed in
the incorrect position.
Paper Stopper Mechanism

The feed slot of the bypass paper tray is provided with a paper stopper [A] that prevents the
paper from sliding into the bypass unit when it is set on the tray.
• At the start of the job, the pawl of the stopper attached to the arm of the pick-up roller [A]
releases when the roller is lowered so the edge of the stack is no longer blocked and can
feed.
Paper Transport
Bypass Tray Paper End Detection Mechanism

• When paper is set in the bypass tray, the top of the stack pushes up the paper feeler that
switches on the paper end sensor (S29, S56, S60) mounted next to the pick-up roller (this
detects paper in the tray).
• After the last sheet of the stack feeds, the feeler drops into a slot in the tray, the paper end
sensor (S29, S56, S60) goes off and signals paper end.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-100 SM
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Paper Feeler
2 Bypass Paper End Sensor (S4)
3 Bypass Pick-up Solenoid (SOL1)
Descriptions
4BDetailed
When paper is set in the bypass tray, the operator manually adjusts the front and rear paper
guides to the sides of the stack.
• The size guides are attached inside the tray to a rack and pinion mechanism that activates
an array of switches registered with the bypass paper width sensor that detects the size of
the paper based on the positioning of the paper guides.
• Paper size is determined by combination of the above detection and bypass paper length
sensor (S8) on/off.
No. Name
[A] Rear Paper Guide
[B] Bypass Paper Width Sensor
[C] Bypass Paper Length Sensor
[D] Front Paper Guide
• The operator can also specify custom paper sizes (non-standard) with User Tool settings.
SM 5-101 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Transport
Paper Registration and Transport in Bypass Unit

Every sheet of paper fed into the machine must pass the paper registration rollers.
• Paper comes to the paper registration roller from four feed stations.
• All paper fed from the PFUs through the vertical transport path is fed to the registration unit
by the upper relay roller.
• Paper fed from the bypass tray (or LCIT option) goes directly to the registration rollers
• Paper from the duplex unit or paper bank is fed from below, into the vertical feed path, and
then fed to registration rollers by the relay roller.
• The bypass feed motor switches off when the registration sensor (S3) detects the leading
edge of the paper, and then the paper is stopped briefly at the registration roller to correct
skew.
• Next, registration motor (M2) [B] rotates the registration roller so the paper can start
moving again in the paper path.
• The machine is equipped with an independent registration motor (M2), which eliminates
the shock and jitter caused by a registration clutch turning on and off.
• A mylar sheet [C] in contact with the top of the registration roller (and covering the
registration sensor (S3)) scavenges paper dust that may have accumulated on the feed
and reverse rollers and passed on to the paper at paper feed. This arrangement greatly
reduces the amount of paper dust in the paper path downstream of the registration roller.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-102 SM
Paper Transport
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• The registration guide plate is at the end of the registration roller at the front of the
machine.
• In order to make jam removal easier, if a paper jam occurs at the registration roller, the
guide plate solenoid turns on and opens the guide plate.
• After a jam has occurred, this action guides the following sheets into the duplex tray and
stacks them.
• As soon as the guide plate opens, at the front an actuator on the guide plate actuates the
guide plate position sensor.
• After the jammed paper has been removed from the jam point and from the duplex tray, the
guide plate must be closed.
• If the plate is not closed the guide plate position sensor will trigger a prompt on the
operation panel for the operator to close the plate at B2 (the Start key will be disabled until
the guide plate is closed).
SM 5-103 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Guide Plate Lock Pawl
2 Normal Paper Feed Direction
3 Guide Plate Set Lever
4 Guide Plate
5 Jam Removal Direction
6 Guide Plate Sensor
7 Guide Plate Solenoid
5.5.6 INVERT, DUPLEX UNIT
Overview

1 Duplex Entrance Sensor (S15) 11 Duplex Transport Sensor 1 (S17)
2 Invert Entrance Roller 12 Transport Roller 1
3 Invert Positioning Roller 13 Reverse Roller
4 Jogger Fence 14 Duplex Transport Sensor 2 (S19)
5 Duplex Right Table 15 Transport Roller 2
6 Right Table Guide 16 Horizontal Transport Guide Plate
7 Invert Junction Gate 17 Transport Roller 3
8 Duplex Junction Gate 18 Duplex Transport Sensor 3 (S20)
9 Duplex Turn Roller 19 Transport Roller 4
10 Invert Exit Sensor - -
Here is a summary of the mechanisms and features of the invert duplex unit.
• Invert Mechanism. The invert entrance roller transports the copied sheet into the invert
unit. The invert positioning roller inverts the printed sheet.
• Exit/Duplex Junction Gate Mechanism. The invert/duplex exit roller sends the printed
paper out of the machine. The duplex junction gate opens and closes to guide the paper
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-104 SM
Paper Transport
into the duplex or exit path.

• Duplex Transport Mechanism. The invert/duplex exit roller sends the paper to transport
rollers 1, 2, 3, 4. Feeding A5 LEF is also possible. Pulling out the unit drops the edge guide
plate to the horizontal, making it easier to remove paper.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Motors
In the duplex unit the single invert/entrance roller [A] is driven by the fusing exit motor (M26) [B],
and the other rollers are driven by the duplex invert motor (M7) [C] and the duplex transport
motor (M8) [D].
Invert Duplex Entrance

The invert duplex roller feeds the printed sheet transported from the exit unit into the invert
duplex unit. The invert junction gate mounted in the invert duplex unit lowers under pressure of
the printed sheet and guides the sheet into the jogger unit.
SM 5-105 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Duplex Entrance Sensor (S15)
2 Invert Entrance Roller
3 Invert Junction Gate Pawl
Jogging Operation
After the trailing edge of the printed sheet fed by the transport roller passes the invert junction
gate into the jogger unit.
• The jogger unit front and rear fence align each sheet.
• The actual timing for the start of jogging is 83 ms after the trailing edge of the paper
switches off the invert/duplex entrance sensor (S15) when it passes.
• After the Start key is pressed to start the job, the front and rear jogger fences are moved to
the standby position 12 mm away from the sides of the selected paper size.
• As each sheet comes into the jogger unit, both fences move to the sides of the sheet to
align it.
• After the edges of the sheet are aligned, both jogger fences return to the standby position
12 mm away from the sides of the selected paper size and wait for the next sheet.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-106 SM
Paper Transport
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Jogger Fences
2 Duplex Jogger Motor (M6)
3 Duplex Jogger HP Sensor (S18)
4 Invert Positioning Roller
Invert Operation
After the jogging operation finishes, the invert positioning roller [A], activated by the duplex
invert solenoid (SOL3) [B], contacts the sheet and grips it with the reverse roller [C] to invert the
sheet, and then the paper is fed by the duplex turn roller [D].
The duplex invert exit sensor (S16) [1] detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper
as it passes out of the unit and triggers a jam if the paper stops.
SM 5-107 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Transport
No. Name
1 Duplex Invert Exit Sensor (S16)
Duplex Transport Mechanism

• If the job is set for printing on the back side of the paper, the duplex junction gate solenoid
(SOL4) [A] turns on and opens the junction gate [B] which guides the paper into the duplex
feed path.
• The jogger fences do not reset to the standby position and the positioning step is skipped if
image processing requires much time.
• The paper passes through the duplex unit past transport roller 1 [C], transport roller 2 [D],
transport roller 3 [E], and finally transport roller 4 [F], all driven by the duplex transport
motor (M8).
• If the paper is to exit from the duplex unit, then it exits according to the timing of the bypass
feed motor as it feeds straight through.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-108 SM
Paper Transport
Paper Jam Release and Reset Mechanism

In the previous machine when there was a jam at the fusing exit, the adjacent knob had to be
turned 11 to 12 times (with the operator keeping the count mentally) to feed the jammed sheet
manually far enough so it could be removed.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• This machine is equipped with a turn sensor [A] and actuator [B] that will turn off the LED to
signal when the paper has been fed manually far enough so that it can be removed.
• The turn sensor at the fusing unit exit counts the 12 turns and switches off the sensor after
the 12th turn.
• This also switches off the duplex entrance sensor (S15) at the exit sensor. (Paper trailing
edge pulled out)
• Instructions for this procedure are written on the fusing inner cover.
SM 5-109 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Transport
5.5.7 EXIT UNIT
Overview
No. Name
2 Decurl Roller
3 Exit Roller
Here is a summary of the exit unit mechanisms and features.
• Decurl Mechanism. The decurl roller removes back curl from the printed sheets.
• Exit Junction Gate Mechanism. Face-up, Face-down Exit. Normally, printed sheets feed
straight through the fusing unit and exit the machine face-up.
Decurl Mechanism
A paper decurl unit has been added to the exit unit entrance in order to improve paper transport
through the duplex unit and finishers.
• Three rollers comprise the decurl unit that depresses each sheet as it exits the fusing unit
in order to correct back curl.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-110 SM
Paper Transport
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Name
1 Decurl Roller
Exit Junction Gate Mechanism

The exit junction gate at the entrance to the exit unit guides each sheet directly to the exit for
face-up delivery or down into the invert unit for face-down delivery.
• The position of the junction gate is switched with the exit junction gate solenoid (solenoid is
on for exit and face-up delivery).
• The junction gate solenoid is at the rear of the duplex unit.
No. Name
1 Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
2 Invert/Duplex Paper Feed Direction
SM 5-111 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Paper Transport
No. Name
3 Exit Junction Gate Pawl
4 Face-up Feed Direction
Duplex Interleave Feed Sequence

This machine employs interleave processing.
• This avoids having to print first the front and then the back side of each sheet which would
be extremely slow.
• Interleave processing allows the machine to print the front and back sides out of sequence
while keeping several sheets in the paper path.
• For example, the machine can handle up to three sheets in the paper path when duplex
printing paper A4/LT SEF sizes or smaller.
• For other sizes like A4 LEF or larger, the machine can handle two pages at once.
• Duplex interleave printing always starts from the first page.
• This operation is described below.
In the illustrated example below:
• Original: 14 pages
• Scanning Mode: Duplex (both sides scanned simultaneously)
• Printed copies: Sheets (14 pages)
Order of Page Processing

Scan Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Only 1 1 3 5 2 7 4 9 6 11 8 13 10 12 14
Smaller than A4/LT LEF 1 3 5 2 7 4 9 6 11 8 13 10 12 14
A3, etc. 1 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 13 12 14
• Original scan: Original scan order
• With A4 LEF and smaller, 3 pages can be handled at once
• With A3 and larger sizes, only 2 sheets can be handled at once.
• Sequence is the same for one document.
Interleave processing with first 3 sheets
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-112 SM
Paper Transport
Descriptions
4BDetailed
1. After 3 pages feed, 1st sheet front page printed (page 1), 2nd sheet front printed (page 3),
3rd sheet printed (page 5)
2. 1st, 2nd, 3rd sheets fed to duplex tray, inverter table and inverted
3. 4th sheet feeds
4. 1st sheet back page prints (page 2)
5. 4th sheet feeds, front page prints (page 7)
6. 1st sheet exits (pages 1, 2)
7. 4th sheet feeds to duplex unit
8. 2nd sheet back page prints (page 4)
9. 5th sheet feeds
10. 2nd sheet exits
11. 5th sheet back page prints (page 9), feeds to duplex tray
12. 3rd sheet back page prints (page 6)
13. 6th sheet back page prints (page 11)
14. 4th sheet back page (page 8), 7th sheet front page (page 13) copied in order, the above
process repeats
SM 5-113 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Electronic Components
5.6 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
5.6.1 BOARDS
Board Layout
Board Functions
This machine employs a controller designed with GW (Grand Workware) architecture that
supports MFP devices.
BICU (PCB11). The BICU (formerly "BCU") is the main board that controls the main machine,
maintains overall system control, and image processing. This machine does not have separate
boards for an IPU and an SIO. These functions have been mounted on the BICU. Some of its
specific functions of the BICU are:
• Engine sequence timing control
• Timing of peripheral devices
• Original scanning control
• Laser control (image writing)
• C-MOS image sensor scanning and image processing with a CIS (PCB10)
BICU Fuse Table
Address Rated Shape Voltage Destination Operation when the fuse melts
value
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-114 SM
value
FU1 250V Micro 24V LDB: (+5VS) SC272-10 occurs.
5A fuse
Descriptions
4BDetailed
FU2 32V Micro 5V PEACE: The machine does not detect the
1.5A fuse (+5VE_LPS), original size when the ADF is
Platen ADF closed.
Sensor: The machine does not recognize
(+5VE_Z) when an original is set in the ADF
(the machine does not resume from
energy saving mode).
SC: none
FU3 250V Micro 24V Polygon motor, SC:
5A fuse CTL(FAX): If the fuse melts while the machine
(+24V1) is starting up: SC202-00
If the fuse melts while the machine
is in standby or operating:
SC204-00
FU4 30V Circuit 24V Attention light: Not used (for the attention light
0.75A protector (+24V_LPS) which can be connected to the
operation panel)
SC: none
FU5 72V Micro 24V Scanner motor SC:
3.15A fuse (M22): If the fuse melts while carriage is in
(+24V_SM) home position: SC120-00
If the fuse melts while carriage is
not in home position: SC121-00
FU7 50V Micro 5V Scanner HP SC:
0.25A fuse sensor (S62): SC120-00
(+5VSBU)
FU8 63V Micro 5V OPU: (5VX_LPS) The operation panel turns
5A fuse completely black and cannot be
operated.
SC: none
FU12 63V Micro 5V Platen ADF The machine does not detect the
0.5A fuse Sensor: original size when the ADF is
(+5VE_Z) closed.
The machine does not recognize
when an original is set in the ADF
SM 5-115 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
value
(the machine does not resume from
energy saving mode).
SC: none
FU15 72V Micro 24V Scanner LED SC:
1.25A fuse lamp: If the fuse melts while the machine
(+24VSBU) is starting up:
SC101/SC102/SC142-13
If the fuse melts when scanning is
started: SC101-13
Controller Board. The controller board (with the exception of the engine functions controlled by
the BICU (PCB11)) controls the system. This includes:
• Power supply monitoring (shutdown, Energy Save Mode)
• Network monitoring
• Printing, scanning control
• Memory control (includes HDD)
• Operation panel control
SBU (Sensor Board Unit). The SBU takes the analog signals of the image scanned with the
C-MOS image sensor and does the A/D (analog-to-digital) conversion.
IOB (I/O Board) (PCB1). The IOB handles the input and output of all motors, solenoids,
clutches, and sensors.
IOB Fuse Table
Address Rated Shape Voltage Destination Operation when the fuse
value melts
FU1 50V Micro fuse 3.3V Bypass Size Sensor Paper size mismatch
0.5A (chip fuse) (S7) causes a paper jam when
paper is fed from the
bypass tray.
FU3 72V Micro fuse 5V Charge Cleaning Motor SC305 occurs when the
1A (chip fuse) (M5) charge cleaning motor
(M5) operates.
FU4 250V Micro fuse 24VS Registration Motor (M2) Paper jams in the tray
5A Bypass Motor (M3) which attempted to feed
Feed Motor 1 (M16) paper.
Feed Motor 2 (M15)
Feed Motor 3 (M14)
Feed Motor 4 (M13)
FU5 250V Micro fuse 24V Controller Fan (FAN2) SC530-11
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-116 SM

value melts
5A Tandem Left Tray Lock Paper jam occurs when
Solenoid (SOL11) operated.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Pick-up Solenoid 1
(SOL6)
Pick-up Solenoid 2
(SOL8)
Pick-up Solenoid 3
(SOL15)
Pick-up Solenoid 4
(SOL17)
Reverse Release
Solenoid 1 (SOL7)
Reverse Release
Solenoid 2 (SOL9)
Reverse Release
Solenoid 3 (SOL16)
Reverse Release
Solenoid 4 (SOL18)
FU6 250V Micro fuse 24V Drum Fan (FAN11) SC530-5
5A Development Unit Fan 1
(FAN12)
Development Unit Fan 2
(FAN13)
PCU fan (FAN7)
Toner Bottle Fan (FAN6)
Heat Exhaust Fan
(FAN8)
Main Exhaust Fan
(FAN9)
Main Intake Fan
(FAN10)
PTL
FU7 30V Circuit 24V Attention light Not used (for attention
0.75A protector light)
FU8 8V Circuit 5V Web Motor (M9) SC540-03
1.1A protector
FU9 250V Micro fuse 24V Fusing Exit Fan SC530-07
SM 5-117 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1

value melts
5A (FAN14)
Front/Back Fence Open
Solenoid (SOL13)
Side Fence Open
Solenoid (FAN14)
FU10 72V Micro fuse 24VS Key counter Key counter does not
2.5A (chip fuse) operate.
FU11 30V Circuit 24VS Toner Bottle Motor (M1) Toner Bottle Motor does
1.1A protector not operate. Toner end
occurs.
FU12 250V Micro fuse 24V PSU Fan 1 (FAN4) SC547-02, SC530-04,
5A PSU Fan 2 (FAN5) SC530-08 or SC530-09
TD Sensor (S2) occurs depending on the
Bypass Feed Clutch machine condition.
(CL1)
Bypass Pick-up
Solenoid (SOL1)
Guide Plate Release
Solenoid (SOL2)
Duplex Fan (FAN1)
ACD
FU13 250V Micro fuse 24VS ACD SC440
5A Transfer/Separation
SOL
PFU Fan 1 (FAN15)
PFU Fan 4 (FAN18)
PFU Fan 3 (FAN17)
Charge Power Pack
(PCB6)
Potential Sensor (S11)
Transfer Power Pack
(PCB4)
Development Power
Pack (PCB3)
FU14 250V Micro fuse 24VS Duplex Jogger Motor During printing on the front
5A (M6) side: JAM16
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-118 SM

value melts
Paper Exit Junction During duplex printing:
Gate Solenoid (SOL5) JAM23
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Duplex Invert Solenoid
(SOL3)
Duplex Junction Gate
Solenoid (SOL4)
Duplex Invert Motor
(M7)
Duplex Transport Motor
(M8)
RYB (Relay Board). The RYB distributes DC current.
RYB Fuse Table
Address Rated Shape Output Destination Operation when the fuse melts
value
Secondary circuit
FU1 AC250V Micro 24V LCT When LCT is connected: LCT is
T4AL fuse recognized, but does not
operate.
FU2 AC250V Micro 24V ADF The machine start up normally.
T4AL fuse ADF cannot be used. Copies
can be made using the
exposure glass.
FU3 AC250V Micro 24V Development Motor, If the fusing unit is not warmed
T6.3AL fuse Drum Motor, Fusing up when the machine starts up:
Exit Motor SC540-01
The machine may restart
automatically.
If the fusing unit is warmed up
when the machine starts up:
Starts up normally.
SC440-02 appears when print
operation starts.
SC log: SC440-02, SC396-01,
SC324-01
FU4 AC250V Micro 5V CAPCNT SC: SC575-00
T4AL fuse SC log: SC575-00, SC670-01,
SC670-04
SM 5-119 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Address Rated Shape Output Destination Operation when the fuse melts
value
automatically.
5 V and 24 V starts up when the
power plug is plugged in to an
AC wall outlet.
AC250V Micro 24V Not used -
T4AL fuse
HDD (Hard Disk Drive). The HDD stores image data.
• Capacity: 320 GB.
• Document server capacity: 96,750 MB
• Document server max. capacity: 10,000 pages, SP expansion 45,000 pages (SP182-001).
PSU (Power Supply Unit). The PSU supplies DC power to the entire system.
PSU Fuse Table
Address Rated Output Power supplied Shape Operation when the fuse
voltage voltage board melts
Primary
circuit
FU100 12A/250V AC Ceramic Power cannot be supplied.
tube fuse (DC-SW no response)
with lead
Secondary circuit
FU200 12A/250V 5V CTL, OPU, Ceramic CTL and operation panel
CAPCNT tube fuse cannot be turned on
with lead (DC-SW no response)
5 V and 24 V starts up
when the power plug is
plugged in to an AC wall
outlet.
FU201 2A/250V 5V Not used Micro fuse -
FU202 5A/250V 5V IOB (PCB1) Micro fuse SC display: SC665-04
FU203 5A/250V 5V BICU (PCB11) Micro fuse SC display: SC670-03
The "Please wait"
message appears after the
machine is turned on.
FU204 10A/250V 24V IOB (PCB1), Ceramic SC display: SC272-00
BICU (PCB11) tube fuse SC log: SC272-00,
with lead SC547-02
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-120 SM
Address Rated Output Power supplied Shape Operation when the fuse
voltage voltage board melts
automatically.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
FU205 10A/250V 24V IOB (PCB1), Ceramic SC display: SC547-02
BICU (PCB11) tube fuse SC log: SC547-02,
with lead SC120-00, SC202-00
FU206 10A/250V 24V LCT, FIN Ceramic When LCT is connected:
tube fuse LCT is recognized, but
with lead does not operate.
When finisher is
connected: SC display:
SC621-01
automatically.
FU207 2A/250V 5V Not used Micro fuse -
PSU High Voltage Applied Part

Before the PSU is attached, disconnect the power plug and wait for about 3 minutes.
SM 5-121 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
AC Drive Board
The AC Drive board distributes AC power to the PSU, and also distributes power to the fusing
unit and anti-condensation heaters. This board also holds the protection circuits for the PSU.
Fuse Table (IM 7000/8000)
(primary voltage
circuit)
FU101 AC250V Glass AC Fusing unit SC547-02 is displayed.
T15A tube
fuse
FU102 AC250V Glass AC PSU (PCB23) Power cannot be supplied.
T15A tube (DC-SW no response)
fuse
FU103 AC250V Micro AC Heater The machine operates normally.
T2AL fuse Power cannot be supplied to the
heater.
FU105 AC250V Micro AC Voltage Starting up and resuming from
T2AL fuse detector energy takes longer when the
circuit fusing unit is not warmed up.
SP1-913-01 [AC Input Voltage
Display] displays "0 V".
FU106 Not - - - -
installed
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-122 SM
Fuse Table (IM 9000)

(primary voltage
circuit)
Descriptions
4BDetailed
FU101 AC250V Glass AC Fusing unit SC547-02 is displayed.
T15A tube
fuse
FU102 AC250V Glass AC Voltage A plotter-related app displays a
T15A tube detector message indicating power cord
fuse circuit, heater disconnection ("Power cord
disconnected. Turn machine off, and
then connect power cord to power
source.")
SC log: SC581-00
FU103 AC250V Micro AC Heater The machine operates normally.
T2AL fuse Power cannot be supplied to the
heater.
FU105 AC250V Micro AC Voltage A plotter-related app displays a
T2AL fuse detector message indicating power cord
circuit disconnection ("Power cord
disconnected. Turn machine off, and
then connect power cord to power
source.")
SC log: SC581-00
FU106 AC250V Glass AC PSU (PCB23) Power cannot be supplied. (DC-SW
T15A tube no response)
fuse
LDB. This is the laser drive board that holds the laser diode (LD) that creates images on the
drum.
Power Packs. Supplies the voltage requested by process control to perform adjustments for
conditions around the drum. There are three powers packs. The transfer coronal power pack
applies charge to the drum, the development power pack supplies the bias charge to the
development unit, and the transfer power pack supplies the charge for the transfer unit to
SM 5-123 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
transfer the image from drum to paper (and also for paper separation from transfer belt).
Operation panel boards. For more information about the operation panel boards, please refer
to "Smart Operation Panel Second Generation" manual.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-124 SM
ADF Unit
5.7 ADF UNIT
5.7.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Specifications
Item Specification
Configuration Automatic document feed duplex scanner (one pass two-side scanning)
Original size Duplex: A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6, DLT, LG, LT, HLT, Long (up to 1260
mm)
Single side: A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6, DLT, LG, LT, HLT
Scanning origin point Origin at rear upper left corner
Original setting Face-up on original tray
Original feed Feeds from top of stack on original tray
Original separation Feed belt and reverse roller separation by friction
Original scanning Through-sheet method (Front: White platen plate, Back: Color CIS and
method white roller)
Original tray capacity 220 sheets (81.4 g/mm2)(stack height < 25 mm (1 in.)
Line Speed 500 mm/sec. (Monochrome)
Scanning productivity
Simplex Copying 90 ipm: LT LEF, A4 LEF 1 to 1(Monochrome/color)
Scanning 120 ipm (200/300 dpi), LT LEF, A4 LEF 1-to-1 (color)
Duplex Copying 90 ipm: LT LEF, A4 LEF 1 to 1(Monochrome/color)
Scanning 240 ipm (200/300dpi), LT LEF, A4 LEF 1-to-1(color)
ADF magnification Front/Back66.7% (750 mm/sec.), 62.5% (800 mm/sec.) (system rate:
25 to 400%)
Dimensions (w x d x h) 587 x 520 x 175 mm (23 x 20 x 7 in.)
Weight Less than 13.9 kg (30.5 lb.)
Power Supply DC 24V, DC 5V (supplied from main machine)
Power consumption Less than 60 W
Supported Original Sizes

Paper 40.7 46.5 52.8 64 81.4 105 128 Translucent
Weight g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2
Sheets 250 250 250 250 220 150 125 1
A3/A4
A5 ---
B4/B5
B6P - - ---
SM 5-125 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF Unit
Paper 40.7 46.5 52.8 64 81.4 105 128 Translucent

Weight g/m 2
g/m2
g/m 2
g/m 2
g/m 2
g/m 2
g/m 2
Sheets 250 250 250 250 220 150 125 1

DLT ---
LT ---
HLT ---
Folio ---
Simplex/duplex
Simplex only
SADF Simplex only
--- No compatible paper
5.7.2 MECHANISM DETAILS
Drive Components
The rollers in the ADF are driven by the following seven motors.
A ADF Transport Motor (M33) E ADF Bottom Plate Lift Motor (M32)
B Pull-out Motor (M29) F ADF Exit Motor (M30)
C ADF Feed Motor (M28) G ADF Scanning Motor (M31)
D ADF Pick-up Roller Lift Motor (M34)
Original Pick-up
Paper Feed
When an original is placed on the original tray, its leading edge raises the feeler of the original
set sensor (S73) and the sensor detects the original.
Pick-up Roller
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-126 SM
ADF Unit
• When there is no original on the original tray, the pick-up roller [C] swings up to the limit of
its vertical movement.
• To lower the pick-up roller, the ADF pick-up roller lift motor (M34) [A] rotates the lift cam [E]
which lowers the pick-up arm [D] and the pick-up roller.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
• When the pick-up roller is lowered, the ADF pick-up roller lift motor (M34) [A] switches on.
• When the actuator switches off the bottom plate position sensor (S84) [B], the ADF pick-up
roller lift motor (M34) goes off, and then the lift cam [E] holds the roller up.
Pick-up Roller Down Timing

The pick-up roller lowers:
• When an original (or stack of originals) is set on the original table.
• When the trailing edge of the original passes the sensor (but, it does not lower for the last
original).
• For A4/LT LEF when the leading edge reaches the original registration sensor (S88).
Pick-up Roller Lift Motor On/Off Timing
The pick-up roller lift motor (M34) switches ON:
• When the original set sensor (S73) detects the leading edge of the original.
• Just after the machine is turned on
The pick-up roller lift motor (M34) switches OFF:
• When the original feed cover is open.
• When an original jams in the ADF paper path.
Bottom Plate Lift

• When an original is set on the original tray, after the pick-up roller drops, the bottom plate
position sensor (S84) goes off, and then the ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32) [A] goes on
and raises lift lever [B] which raises the bottom plate.
• The actuator above the pick-roller holder switches on the bottom plate position sensor
(S84) (see the previous diagram), and this turns the ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32) [A]
SM 5-127 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF Unit
off so the stack is positioned at the correct feed position.

• During scanning with the ADF, when the top of the stack becomes too low, the pick-up roller
drops low enough to turn the bottom plate position sensor (S84) off, which switches the
ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32) [A] on again and raises the stack until once again it is at
the paper feed position.
• This mechanism performs continuously and keeps the top of the stack at the correct feed
height for original stacks of up to 220 sheets (81.4 g/m2).
• At the end of the job, the original table descends under its own weight as far as the bottom
plate HP sensor (S72) [C].
Skew Correction Mechanism

• After the original feeds, the skew correction sensor (S81) detects its leading edge, and
stops the rotation of the feed motor for the prescribed number of pulses.
• The leading edge hits and straightens against the stationary roller to correct skew.
• If the original is small (B6, A5, B5, HLT) (or when duplex scanning regardless of paper size),
when the interval sensor (S86) [E] detects the leading edge of the original, it stops the
pre-scanning roller [D] for a prescribed number of pulses, long enough for the original to
buckle against the stationary roller and correct skew.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-128 SM
ADF Unit
Descriptions
4BDetailed
No. Part
[A] Original Width Sensors (S80, S79, S78, S77, S76)
[B] Skew Correction Sensor (S81)
[C] Entrance Roller
[D] Pre-Scanning Entrance Roller
[E] Interval Sensor (S86)
• You can turn on SP6020-001 (ADF Contact Mode In/Out) to enable skew correction at both
the entrance roller above as well as the pre-scanning roller below for all paper sizes but
this may slow down the speed of original feeding.

• When the leading edge of the original reaches the interval sensor (S86), the machine
determines the width from the readings of the 5 original width sensors
(S80,S79,S78,S77,S76).
• The length of the original is determined by the readings of the 3 original length sensors
(S68, S69, S70) under the original table and one sensor on the bottom plate.
SM 5-129 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF Unit
• These two arrays of sensors are used to determine the size of the originals.
No. Part
1 Original Length Sensor (A4/LT LEF) (S74)
2 Original Length Sensor (B5) (S70)
3 Original Length Sensor (A4) (S69)
4 Original Length Sensor (LG) (S68)
5 Original Width Sensor5 (S76)
9 Original Width Sensor (S80)
Width Sensors Length Sensors

1 2 3 4 5 A4 LEF B5 A4 LG
A3(297x420) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
B4(257x364) ON ON ON --- --- ON ON ON ON
A4 SEF (210x297) ON ON --- --- --- ON ON ON -
A4 LEF (297x210) ON ON ON ON ON --- --- --- ---
A4 SEF (210x297) ON --- --- --- --- ON ON --- ---
A4 LEF (297x210) ON ON ON --- --- --- --- --- ---
A4 SEF (210x297) --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
A4 LEF (297x210) ON --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
DLT SEF (11"x17") ON ON ON ON --- ON ON ON ON
DLT SEF (11"x17") ON ON ON ON --- ON ON ON ON
8 1/2"x11" SEF (LT) ON ON --- --- --- ON ON --- ---
11"x8 1/2" LEF (LT) ON ON ON ON --- --- --- --- ---
• 11"x17", 11"x15" are detected as the same size, so you need to select one or the other
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-130 SM
ADF Unit
with SP6016-001 (Original Size Determination Priority) to choose whichever are using.
Original Feed/Transport Mechanism

When the machine signals the ADF to start feeding, the ADF feed motor (M28) [A] drives the
Descriptions
4BDetailed
pick-up roller [C], the feed belt [B], and the ADF separation roller [D], and these rollers feed the
original.
This machine uses the FRR method as the separation mechanism, with a feed belt [B] and ADF
separation roller [D].
When the pick-up roller [C] feeds two or more sheets into the feed belt unit [B], the ADF
separation roller [D] rotates backward to push all sheets back to the original tray except the top
one. Then one sheet of the original remains and the ADF separation roller [D] rotates forward
due to the torque from the torque limiter included in the ADF separation roller. Then the original
is transferred by the feed belt [B] and bumps into the entrance roller [E] to correct the skew.
After skew correction at the entrance roller, the ADF feed motor (M28) [A] and the ADF
transport motor (M33) [B] drive the ADF entrance roller [C] and relay roller [D] to feed the
original towards the exposure glass.
SM 5-131 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF Unit
When the interval sensor (S86) [A] detects the original, the ADF scanning motor (M31) [B]
drives the pre-scanning entrance roller [C], scanning relay roller [D], white roller [E], and ADF
transport roller [F] in order to pass the original through the scanning area. (L: Original
Registration Sensor)
After the pre-scanning entrance roller starts to rotate, the ADF feed motor (M28) drives faster to
make the space smaller between the former sheet (on the scanner) and the next sheet.
However, if the sheet reaches the pre-scanning entrance roller [C] at this speed, original buckle
may occur due to the disparity of roller rotation speeds. So when the interval sensor (S86) [A]
detects the leading edge, original transport speed slows down so that the roller speeds match
when the leading edge of the original reaches the pre-scanning entrance roller [C].
The ADF exit motor (M30) [B] drives the exit roller [C] to send original out to the exit tray when
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-132 SM
ADF Unit
the original exit sensor (S87) [A] detects the original.
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Original Scanning
A CIS (Contact Image Sensor) [A] enables the machine to scan both faces of an original at
once.
The front side of the original is scanned by the scanner unit [C] and the back side of the original
is scanned by the CIS [A] in the ADF.
Scanning Method
A: CIS
B: White Roller
C: Scanner Unit (LED)
SM 5-133 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF Unit
D: White Plate
Jam Detection
1 Skew Correction Sensor (S81) 4 Original Registration Sensor (S88)

2 Separation Sensor (S82) 5 Interval Sensor (S86)
3 Original Exit Sensor (S87)
In jam detection, the following sensors are used. The detection triggers are also shown in the
list below.
Jam Jam Name Detection Trigger
Display
P Separation Sensor The leading edge cannot be detected even when the original
(S82) Late Jam is transported 224 mm after the feed roller starts
Skew Correction The leading edge cannot be detected even when the original
Sensor (S81) Late is transported 46 mm after the separation sensor detects the
Jam leading edge
Interval Sensor (S86) The leading edge cannot be detected even when the original
Late Jam is transported 172 mm after the entrance roller starts
Original Registration The leading edge cannot be detected even when the original
Sensor (S88) Late is transported 96 mm after the interval sensor detects the
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-134 SM
ADF Unit
Jam Jam Name Detection Trigger

Display
Jam leading edge
Original Exit Sensor The leading edge cannot be detected even when the original
Descriptions
4BDetailed
(S87) Late Jam is transported 130 mm after the original registration sensor
detects the leading edge
Separation Sensor The trailing edge cannot be detected even when the original
(S82) Lag Jam is transported xxx mm (the number comes out from the
following equation) after the entrance roller starts.
Equation: (“Standard Value”-35.3) x 1.5
See list 2 below about “Standard Value”;
If the user designates an original length which is larger than
“Standard Value”, the machine considers the designated
length as “Standard Value”.
Skew Correction The trailing edge cannot be detected even when the original
Sensor (S81) Lag is transported 46 mm after the separation sensor detects the
Jam trailing edge.
Interval Sensor (S86) The trailing edge cannot be detected even when the original
Lag Jam is transported 49 mm after the relay motor stops.
Original Registration The trailing edge cannot be detected even when the original
Sensor (S88) Lag is transported 93 mm after the interval sensor detects the
Jam trailing edge.
Original Exit Sensor The trailing edge cannot be detected even when the original
(S87) Lag Jam is transported 130 mm after the original registration sensor
detects the trailing edge.
List 2
A4 LEF/LT LEF B5 A4 LG Standard Value

Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected 226.8
Detected Not detected Not detected Not detected 253.8
- Detected Not detected Not detected 291
- - Detected Not detected 320
- - - Detected 432
Abnormal Detection
No. Abnormal Name To Possible Trigger
Release
700-01* ADF Bottom Plate Lift Reboot • Bottom plate position sensor (S84)
Motor Abnormal (1-Path the abnormal (output abnormal)
SM 5-135 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF Unit

Release
ADF) machine • Bottom plate HP sensor (S72) abnormal
(output abnormal)
• ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32)
abnormal (cannot drive)
• ADF controller board (PCB29) defective
700-02* Original Pick-up Reboot • ADF pick-up roller HP sensor (S83)
Abnormal (1-Path ADF) the abnormal (output abnormal)
machine • ADF pick-up roller lift motor (M34)
abnormal (cannot drive)
700-04* ADF Feed Motor Reboot • Motor defective
Abnormal (1-Path ADF) the • Connector disconnected
machine • Harness broken
• Overload
700-05* ADF Entrance Motor Reboot • Motor defective
• Overload
700-06* ADF Transport Motor Reboot • Motor defective
• Overload
700-07* ADF Scanning Motor Reboot • Motor defective
• Overload
700-09* ADF Exit Motor Abnormal Reboot • Motor defective
(1-Path ADF) the • Connector disconnected
• Overload
702-04 Protection-device Reboot Motor defective or harness short in ADF
Disconnection Abnormal the pick-up roller lift motor (M34), fax
4 (1-Path ADF) machine transmission stamp solenoid, or ADF bottom
plate lift motor (M32)
702-05 Protection-device Reboot Motor defective or harness short in ADF feed
Disconnection Abnormal the motor (M28), Pull-out motor (M29), ADF
5 (1-Path ADF) machine transport motor (M33), ADF scanning motor
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-136 SM
ADF Unit

Release
(M31), or ADF exit motor (M30)
111-01 Lamp Error (Scan): Rear Reboot • CIS defective
Descriptions
4BDetailed
the • CIS background white roller defective
machine • ADF control board defective
• Harness defective
• USB cable defective between CIS and
BICU board)
• BICU board defective
154-00* Scanner Communication Reboot • CIS defective
Error: Back Side the • ADF control board defective
machine • Harness defective
151-00* Black-level Abnormal: Reboot • CIS defective
Back Side the • ADF control board defective
machine • Harness defective
BICU board)
152-00* White-level Abnormal: Reboot • CIS defective
Back Side the • CIS background white roller defective
machine • ADF control board defective
BICU board)
161-02 BICU error (LSYNC Reboot • Cable disconnected between CIS and
abnormal) (Back) the IPU board (BICU board)
machine • CIS defective
• IPU board (BICU board) defective (ASIC:
Biscotti or other parts defective)
620-01 ADF Communication Reboot • ADF connection failure
Error 1 the • ADF control board defective
machine • BICU board defective
• Noise in the signal
SM 5-137 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
ADF Unit

Release
• The connected ADF is a non-compatible
model (The ADF machine code does not
meet specifications).
703-01 Double-feed Detection Reboot • Connector disconnected
Error (1-pass ADF) the • Harness broken
machine • Double-feed detection abnormal (Output
abnormal)
• ADF control board defective
*Occurrence two times in a row issues an initial jam notice. Occurrence five or more times in a
row issues an abnormal code notice.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-138 SM
New Features
5.8 NEW FEATURES
5.8.1 PS3/PDF DIRECT EMULATION (CLONE PS)
Descriptions
4BDetailed
Overview
This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter
“Clone PS”) as a standard feature. So, by default, it can perform printing using PostScript 3 and
PDF Direct Print, in addition to RPCS.
• What is Clone PS?
Based on the specifications of PostScript/PDF languages developed by Adobe, clone
programs for interpretation of PostScript and PDF documents have been created by
various companies other than Adobe. While the original program sold by the developer of
the language is named Adobe PS, compatible programs made by other manufacturers are
called clones. Strictly speaking, these clones must be fully compatible with the original
program; however, they are called clones even if they have some differences because they
cannot completely imitate the original.
Clone PS is basically designed to perform similar functions to Adobe PS, except for several
differences such as the inability to use Adobe fonts.
• Adobe PS, previously offered as an optional product for past models, is available again as
an option. (SD card option.)
• Clone PS and Adobe PS cannot be run simultaneously.
• The same printer driver can be used for Clone PS and Adobe PS.
• Clone PS emulates Adobe PostScript 3 version 3017. (The version of Adobe PS used in
the SD card option is v. 3018.)
• For the PDF Direct Print function, Clone PS emulates Adobe PDF version 1.7.
How to Distinguish Adobe PS from Clone PS

In the operation panel screen, it is difficult to tell whether Adobe PS or Clone PS is in use.
Both “PS3” and “PDF” are shown on the screen, regardless of whether Adobe PS or Clone PS
is used.
Identification can be done as follows:
• Configuration Page
The description of the Firmware Version listed on the page varies as shown below:
SM 5-139 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
New Features
PS type Description of Firmware Version

Adobe PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] Adobe PostScript 3 [x.xx], Adobe PDF [x.xx]
Clone PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] PS3 [x.xx], PDF [x.xx]
The manufacturer's name “Adobe” is shown in the list if Adobe PS is used.
• Configuration Page
The description of the Firmware Version listed on the page varies as shown below:
• Web Image Monitor

Go to Status/Information > Device Info, and open the Printer Language menu.
If Adobe PS is used, the screen shows the program name “Adobe PostScript 3” and
"Adobe PDF".
• Operation Panel: Firmware Version

Settings > System Settings > Machine/Control Panel Information > Firmware Version
When PostScript3 Unit Type M44 (Adobe PS) is installed:
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-140 SM
New Features
Descriptions
4BDetailed
When Clone PS only:
No. Module Description

Name
1 PS3 / The Clone PS firmware number appears.
IRIPS PS3 The Clone PS firmware number starts with “D0C9”.
SM 5-141 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
New Features
No. Module Description

Name
2 PS3 The Adobe PS firmware number starts with "D0CJ" appears. This module
name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit Type M44 is
installed.
3 PDF / The Clone PDF firmware number appears.
IRIPS PDF The Clone PDF firmware number starts with "D0C9".
4 PDF The Adobe PS firmware number starts with "D0CJ".
This module name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit
Type M44 is installed.
• Font Change Confirmation screen
The “Font Change Confirmation” screen is accessible only when Clone PS is used.
On the Home screen, select the Settings icon > Printer Settings > PS Menu > Font Change
Confirmation.
Difference in Device Fonts

The variety and number of built-in fonts (device fonts) differ between Adobe PS and Clone PS.
PS type Number of European fonts
Adobe PS 136 fonts
Clone PS 93 fonts
For license reasons, the device fonts for Adobe PS cannot be handled by Clone PS. Instead,
Clone PS is equipped with fonts similar to Adobe device fonts under different names; when an
Adobe PS font is specified in the data to be printed, Clone PS will replace it with a similar font.
Use of a substitute font sometimes leads to different printing results, as shown in the table
below.
Example 1
PS Helvetica
type
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-142 SM
New Features
PS Helvetica
type
When Helvetica is used in the original document, Clone PS applies a substitute font
named NimbusSans-Regular, maintaining almost the same appearance as the original
Descriptions
4BDetailed
data.
Example 2
PS LetterGothic
type
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
When LetterGothic is originally used, Clone PS substitutes it with LetterGothic-Regular.
In this case, the character spacing differs from that in the original data.
Example 3
PS type Chicago
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
Clone PS does not support alternative fonts for Chicago; instead, the Courier font (*) is
used. (The font shape differs significantly from Chicago.)
* Since Courier itself is named among the Adobe PS device fonts, Clone PS substitutes
it with an alternative font, NimbusMonoPS-Regular.
Font Change Confirmation Screen

Clone PS itself incorporates no Adobe fonts in it, and therefore replaces them with similar fonts
when Adobe PS fonts are specified in the print data output to the printer.
However, there is a possibility that a substitute font not desired by the customer may be used; to
cope with this issue, the operation panel shows a confirmation screen whenever an Adobe font
is to be replaced by a similar font.
SM 5-143 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
New Features
If the customer often prints data containing Adobe fonts that are almost the same in terms of
spacing and shape as their substitutes, the confirmation screen appears every time printing is
performed, making the printing operation cumbersome. In such a case, the font change
confirmation screen can be hidden.
• "Settings" icon on Home screen > Printer Settings > PS Menu > Font Change Confirmation
List of fonts and their replacements (Adobe PS -> Clone PS)

No. Adobe PS Clone PS
1 Courier NimbusMonoPS-Regular
2 Courier-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Bold
3 Courier-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-BoldItalic
4 Courier-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Italic
5 Helvetica NimbusSans-Regular
6 Helvetica-Bold NimbusSans-Bold
7 Helvetica-BoldOblique NimbusSans-BoldOblique
8 Helvetica-Oblique NimbusSans-Oblique
9 Symbol StandardSymL
10 Times-Bold NimbusRoman-Bold
11 Times-BoldItalic NimbusRoman-BoldItalic
12 Times-Italic NimbusRoman-Italic
13 Times-Roman NimbusRoman-Regular
14 AlbertusMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-144 SM
New Features
15 AlbertusMT-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
16 AlbertusMT-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
17 AntiqueOlive-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular
18 AntiqueOlive-Italic AntiqueOlive-Italic
Descriptions
4BDetailed
19 AntiqueOlive-Bold AntiqueOlive-Bold
20 AntiqueOlive-Compact NimbusMonoPS-Regular
22 Apple-Chancery NimbusMonoPS-Regular
22 ArialMT NimbusSansNo2-Regular
23 Arial-ItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-Italic
24 Arial-BoldMT NimbusSansNo2-Bold
25 Arial-BoldItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-BoldItalic
26 AvantGarde-Book URWGothic-Book
27 AvantGarde-BookOblique URWGothic-BookOblique
28 AvantGarde-Demi URWGothic-Demi
29 AvantGarde-DemiOblique URWGothic-DemiOblique
30 Bodoni NimbusMonoPS-Regular
31 Bodoni-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
32 Bodoni-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
33 Bodoni-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
34 Bodoni-Poster NimbusMonoPS-Regular
35 Bodoni-PosterCompressed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
36 Bookman-Light URWBookman-Light
37 Bookman-LightItalic URWBookman-LightItalic
38 Bookman-Demi URWBookman-Demi
39 Bookman-DemiItalic URWBookman-DemiItalic
40 Carta NimbusMonoPS-Regular
41 Chicago NimbusMonoPS-Regular
42 Clarendon NimbusMonoPS-Regular
43 Clarendon-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
44 Clarendon-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
45 CooperBlack NimbusMonoPS-Regular
46 CooperBlack-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
47 Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC NimbusMonoPS-Regular
48 Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC NimbusMonoPS-Regular
49 Coronet-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular
50 Eurostile NimbusMonoPS-Regular
51 Eurostile-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
52 Eurostile-ExtendedTwo NimbusMonoPS-Regular
SM 5-145 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
New Features
53 Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo NimbusMonoPS-Regular
54 Geneva NimbusMonoPS-Regular
55 GillSans NimbusMonoPS-Regular
56 GillSans-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
57 GillSans-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
58 GillSans-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
59 GillSans-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
60 GillSans-BoldCondensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
61 GillSans-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
62 GillSans-LightItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
63 GillSans-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
64 Goudy NimbusMonoPS-Regular
65 Goudy-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
66 Goudy-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
67 Goudy-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
68 Goudy-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
69 Helvetica-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
70 Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
71 Helvetica-Condensed-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
72 Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
73 Helvetica-Narrow NimbusSansNarrow-Regular
74 Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique NimbusSansNarrow-Oblique
75 Helvetica-Narrow-Bold NimbusSansNarrow-Bold
76 Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique NimbusSansNarrow-BoldOblique
77 HoeflerText-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular
78 HoeflerText-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
79 HoeflerText-Black NimbusMonoPS-Regular
80 HoeflerText-BlackItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
81 HoeflerText-Ornaments NimbusMonoPS-Regular
82 JoannaMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular
83 JoannaMT-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
84 JoannaMT-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
85 JoannaMT-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
86 LetterGothic LetterGothic-Regular
87 LetterGothic-Slanted NimbusMonoPS-Regular
88 LetterGothic-Bold LetterGothic-Bold
89 LetterGothic-BoldSlanted NimbusMonoPS-Regular
90 LubalinGraph-Book NimbusMonoPS-Regular
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-146 SM
New Features
91 LubalinGraph-BookOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
92 LubalinGraph-Demi NimbusMonoPS-Regular
93 LubalinGraph-DemiOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
94 Marigold Mauritius-Regular
Descriptions
4BDetailed
95 Monaco NimbusMonoPS-Regular
96 MonaLisa-Recut NimbusMonoPS-Regular
97 NewCenturySchlbk-Roman URWCenturySchoolbook-Roman
98 NewCenturySchlbk-Italic URWCenturySchoolbook-Italic
99 NewCenturySchlbk-Bold URWCenturySchoolbook-Bold
100 NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic URWCenturySchoolbook-BdIta
101 NewYork NimbusMonoPS-Regular
102 Optima NimbusMonoPS-Regular
103 Optima-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
104 Optima-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
105 Optima-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
106 Oxford NimbusMonoPS-Regular
107 Palatino-Roman Palladio-Roman
108 Palatino-Italic Palladio-Italic
109 Palatino-Bold Palladio-Bold
110 Palatino-BoldItalic Palladio-BoldItalic
111 StempelGaramond-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular
112 StempelGaramond-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
113 StempelGaramond-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
114 StempelGaramond-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
115 Tekton NimbusMonoPS-Regular
116 TimesNewRomanPSMT NimbusRomanNo9-Regular
117 TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-Italic
118 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT NimbusRomanNo9-Bold
119 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-BoldItalic
120 Univers NimbusMonoPS-Regular
121 Univers-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
122 Univers-Bold URWClassicSans-Bold
123 Univers-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
124 Univers-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
125 Univers-LightOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
126 Univers-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
127 Univers-CondensedOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
128 Univers-CondensedBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
SM 5-147 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
New Features
129 Univers-CondensedBoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular

130 Univers-Extended NimbusMonoPS-Regular
131 Univers-ExtendedObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
132 Univers-BoldExt NimbusMonoPS-Regular
133 Univers-BoldExtObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
134 Wingdings-Regular URWDingbats
135 ZapfChancery-MediumItalic URWChancery-MediumItalic
136 ZapfDingbats Dingbats
Differences in Driver Functions

As shown below, there are differences in available driver functions between Adobe PS and
Clone PS.
1. Font Substitution Table (Applicable only to the driver for Windows OS)
Start > Device and Printer > Printer Properties > Device Settings
For Clone PS, the Font Substitution Table under the Device Settings menu will not be
displayed. Clone PS has font substitution table data similar to that of Adobe PS and
performs font replacement as appropriate.
To disable font replacement, go to Printing Preferences > Detailed Settings > “Print Quality:
Option” > “True Type Font:” option, and select “Download as SoftFont”.
2. Fonts used for unauthorized copy prevention (Common to drivers for Windows OS
and Mac OS X)
The watermark text used for unauthorized copy prevention consists of a device font. The
range of available fonts varies between Adobe PS and Clone PS because of the difference
in available device fonts.
Adobe PS provides a choice from 136 fonts while 3 fonts are selectable for Clone PS.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-148 SM
New Features
Descriptions
4BDetailed
3. "User Setting” for dithering (Common to drivers for Windows OS and Mac OS X)
Clone PS ignores the “User Setting” option for dithering and performs dithering in the same
manner as when the “Automatic” setting (*) is selected.
* “Text Priority” is selected for text, and “Photo” for graphics and images.
In the driver menu for Mac OS X, the “User Setting” option is shown at half brightness
and cannot be selected.
5.8.2 SETTINGS ON DISPLAYING AN ALERT WHEN THE

ETHERNET CABLE IS BROKEN OR DISCONNECTED
Display an alert if the Ethernet cable is disconnected while operating the machine.
SM 5-149 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
New Features
By default, this setting is set to [OFF] and the interval to display the alert is set to 10 minutes.
Specify the setting according to the customer’s request. If the customer does not want to
connect the machine to the network, set this to [OFF].
1. Press the "Settings" icon.
2. Press [System Settings] > [Network/Interface] > [Unconnected Network Instruction
Screen].
3. Set this value to [Display].
5.8.3 OTHER NEW FEATURES

• "Web Help Support" Settings ("Web Help Support" Settings_11)
• "RemoteConnect Support" Settings ("RemoteConnect Support" Settings_111)
• "Remote Panel Operation" Settings ("Remote Panel Operation" Settings_111)
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 5-150 SM
Service Program Mode
6. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
6.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Maintenance
5BSystem
• Make sure that the data-in LED on the operation panel is not on before you go into the
SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED
is on, wait for the copier to process the data.
6.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is
used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In such a case, product quality cannot be
guaranteed.
Entering SP Mode
For details, ask your supervisor.
Exiting SP Mode
• Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the copy window.
6.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES

• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
• Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
• Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch
panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the
functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax
SP modes.
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
3 Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode
(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
4 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press [#].
The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing [#]. If not, just press the
required SP Mode number.)
5 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
Maintenance
5BSystem
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for
the test print.
3. Press [Start] key to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you
want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that
you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you
want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below
default or the current settings.
• Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
• Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the
appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
• Press [#] to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is
out of range.)
• Press "Yes" when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and select
the settings for the test print. Press [Start] key and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in the
copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Exiting Service Mode

Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate
the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure
that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and
then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
> > User Tools> Machine Features> System Settings> Administrator Tools > Service
Mode Lock
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine power switch off and on. It is
not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the main power switch
is turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5-169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5-169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine power switch off and on. Tell the administrator that you have
completed servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
PM Counter/ Firmware Update

PM Counter and Firmware Update can be entered in the SP mode main screen.
• PM Counter: PM counters for each PM part
• Firmware Update: Immediate remote update and remote update at next visit.
Maintenance
5BSystem
Checking the PM Counter
1. Enter the SP mode, and then press [PM Counter].
2. Press [Estimated Usage Rate/Estimated Remain Days].
3. You can see the “Remaining Days for each part”.
Executing Firmware Update

For details about how to use the Firmware Update, refer to Package Firmware Update.
6.1.3 REMARKS
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30
characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be
abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full
description is over 20 characters.
Item Description
Paper Weight Thin paper: 52-59 g/m2, 13.9-15.7lb.
Plain Paper1: 60-74 g/m2, 16-19.7lb.
Item Description
Plain Paper2: 75-81 g/m2, 20-21.6lb.
Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m2, 21.9-28lb.
Thick Paper1: 106-157 g/m2, 28.3-41.9lb.
Maintenance
5BSystem
Paper Type N: Normal paper
MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper
Paper Feed Station P: Paper tray
B: By-pass table
Print Mode S: Simplex
D: Duplex
Others
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
• If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of
the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only
numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by
using only the numbers.
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
Notation What it means
ENG Engine SP
CTL Controller SP
FA Factory setting: Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to
the factory setting sheets enclosed. You can find it in the front cover.
DFU Design/Factory Use only: Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
* An asterisk (*) to the left side of ENG/CTL column means that this mode is stored in
the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value.
"ENG" and "CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.
• *ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board
• *CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
SSP This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting.
Service Program Mode Tables
6.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
6.2.1 SP TABLES
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• System SP Tables
• Printer SP Tables
• Scanner SP Tables
Test Pattern Printing
6.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
6.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2902
Maintenance
5BSystem
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily
for design testing.
• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise,
an SC may occur.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2902.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#]. (See the table
below.)
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, press Yes to select the test pattern for
printing.
4. Press Copy Window to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print
(paper size, etc.)
5. Press [Start] twice (ignore the “Place Original” messages) to start the test print.
6. After checking the test pattern, press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode
display.
Test Pattern Table

These patterns can be selected.
No. Test Pattern
0 None
1 Alternating Dot Pattern (1-dot)
5 Grid Pattern (1-dot): 0ch
9 Grid Pattern (1-dot pair)
10 Checker Flag Pattern
11 Horizontal Line (2-dot)
12 Vertical Line (2-dot)
13 Horizontal Line (1-dot)
Test Pattern Printing
No. Test Pattern

14 Vertical Line (1-dot)
15 Cross Stitch (Vertical)
16 Cross Stitch (Horizontal)
17 Argyle Pattern
18 Trimming Area
19 Full Dot Pattern
20 Black Band (Vertical)
21 Black Band (Horizontal)
22 Blank Image
23 Grid (1 dot: Och with Outside Data)
24 Trimming Area (with external data)
25 Argyle Pattern (with external data)
Firmware Update (SD Card)
6.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SD CARD)
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
Maintenance
5BSystem
In order to update the firmware of this machine, it is necessary to download the latest version of
firmware to an SD card.
Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 beside the rear left of the controller box.
Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:
SFU SD Card RFU ARFU

Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available
6.4.2 UPDATE PROCEDURE
• SD cards are precision devices, so when handling them, keep in mind the following
guidelines:
• When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove a card.
• During installation, do not switch the power OFF.
• Since the card is manufactured to high precision, do not store it in a hot or humid
location, or in direct sunlight.
• Do not bend the card, scratch it, or give it a strong shock.
• Before downloading firmware to an SD card, check whether write-protection of the SD
card is canceled. If write-protection is enabled, an error code (error code 44, etc.) will
be displayed, and the download will fail.
• Before updating firmware, remove the network cable from this machine.
• If SC818 is generated during software update, switch the power OFF -> ON, and
complete the update which was interrupted.
• During software update, disconnect network cables and interface cables, remove
wireless boards, etc., (so that they are not accessed during the update).
1. First download the new firmware to the SD card.
4. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 1 [A: Lower Slot].
• Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. Insert the SD card until
you hear it click into place.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once.
6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (English display) When the SD
card contains two or more software modules, they are displayed as follows.
Maintenance
5BSystem
<<When two or more software names are displayed>>
1. Press the module selection button or [1] - [5] on the 10-key pad.
2. Choose the appropriate module. (If already selected, cancel the selection)
Operation of keys or buttons
Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Exit] or 10-key pad [0] Returns to normal screen.
[Start] Key Select all modules.
[Clear/Stop] key Cancel all selections.
Display contents
On the above screen, two programs, i.e., engine firmware and printer application are
displayed. (The screen may change depending on the firmware or application).
The display contents are as follows:
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number / version information.
NEW: Display module number / version information in the card.
The upper row corresponds to the module name, the lower row corresponds to the version
number.
8. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key pad operation. The selected
module is highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.
• Depending on the combination of modules to update, it may not be possible to

select all of them simultaneously.
<<Key or button operations>>


[Update] or [#] key Update the ROM of the selected module.
[Verify] button or [./*] key Perform verification of the selected module.
9. Press the [Update] or [#] key, and perform software update.
10. During firmware update, a "firmware update/ verification progress screen" is displayed.
When firmware update is complete, a "firmware update end screen" is displayed.
• In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed. (in this
case, the printer module is being updated)
• In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the
progress.)
<<Firmware update end screen>>
• This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated.
"Printer" in the second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When
more than one were updated simultaneously, only the module that was updated last is
displayed.)
• When Verify has completed normally, the Update done display of the above screen is
"Verify done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application
displayed in the lower row.
11. After turning the main power OFF, remove the SD card.
12. Turn the main power ON again, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
13. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.
• When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted,
and the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.
• To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is
successful.
• In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of
firmware from the SD card automatically.

• The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware. In the default
state, although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state, the function
is enabled by installing the PS3 card. (The program installed in the PS3 card is a
Maintenance
5BSystem
dongle (key) for enabling the PS3 function).
• Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module
number / software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location.
6.4.3 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING
EXX shows an error code.

For error codes, refer to the following table:
Error Code List
Code Contents Solutions
1 The module data does not match. • Power cycle the machine and try updating
again.
• If the update cannot be made even if you
insert the correct SD card, there is a
possibility that the SD card is broken.
Retry again with a different SD card.
• If you cannot resolve the problem with the
above steps, replace the controller board.
2 An error occurred while initializing the • >Power cycle the machine and try
update program. updating again.
above step, replace the controller board.
3 The ROM data to be rewritten is • Power cycle the machine and try updating
missing. again.
• Turn the power off, switch DIPSW-1 on the
controller board to ON, and then turn the
power back on to force the ROM data to be
rewritten.
• Reset the ROM-DIMM.

4 Failed to check the GNU ZIP data. • >Power cycle the machine and try
updating again.
power back on to force the ROM data to be
rewritten.
• Replace the ROM-DIMM.
5 A device error occurred while rewriting • Power cycle the machine and try updating
data. again.
power on to force the ROM data to be
rewritten.
• Reset the ROM-DIMM.
6 CPU clock error • Turn the power off, switch DIPSW-1 on the
rewritten.
10 A startup option error has occurred. • Restore the SD card for installation.
11 An error occurred while waiting to read • >Power cycle the machine and try
the installed SD card. updating again.
• Restore the SD card for installation.
• Retry updating with a different SD card.
12 Configuration file error • Power cycle the machine and try updating
again.
13 The memory is insufficient to install the • Reduce the number of module files to be
data. installed.

14 Failed to execute a system call. • >Power cycle the machine and try
updating again.
Maintenance
5BSystem
15 Failed to execute self-update. • Power cycle the machine and try updating
again.
19 Schedule data error • Turn the power off, switch DIPSW-1 on the
rewritten.
20 Physical address mapping cannot be • Switch the main power supply off and on to
performed. try again.
• Re-insert the SD card to reboot it.
• Replace the controller board if the above
solutions do not solve the problem.
21 Insufficient memory for the download • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• Replace the controller board if the updating
cannot be done by switching the power off
and on.
22 Decompression of compressed data • Switch the main power supply off and on to
failed. try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
23 Failed to execute self-update. • Power cycle the machine and try updating
again.

rewritten.
24 SD card access error • Re-insert the SD card.
• Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
30 Printing download cannot be done. • The model has no HDD but download
Tried to execute printing download with execution can be tried. It is a mistake of
the machine that HDD is not installed in implementation.
(Data is designated to be downloaded
into HDD).
31 An error to continue downloading has • Install the SD card containing the
occurred. subsequent program(s), and then turn the
When using two or more SD cards to power off and then back on to resume
download data, the data from the downloading.
second or later SD card was • Replace the SD card used for the update.
incompatible. • If the problem persists even if you try to
install the subsequent data using another
SD card, turn the power off, switch
DIPSW-1 on the controller board to ON,
and then turn the power on to force the
ROM data to be rewritten.
• If forcing the data to be rewritten fails,
replace the controller board.
32 The SD card used after download • Insert the SD card containing the same
suspension is incorrect. program as when the firmware update was
The SD card inserted before the power suspended, and then switch the main
interruption is not the same as the one power supply off and on to try again.
inserted after the power interruption. • There is a possibility that the SD card is
damaged if the update cannot be done
after the correct SD card has been
inserted. In this case, try again with a
different SD card.

Replace all relevant boards if the update is
done for the BICU and FCU.
Replace the operation panel unit if the
Maintenance
5BSystem
update is done for the operation panel.
33 Card version error. • Install the correct ROM update data for
The wrong card version is downloaded. each version in the SD card.
34 Destination error. • Install the correct ROM update data for
A card for the wrong destination is each destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in the
inserted. SD card.
35 Model error. • Install the correct ROM update data for
A card for the wrong model is inserted. each model in the SD card.
36 Module error. • Install the program to be updated in
The program to be downloaded does advance.
not exist on the main unit. • There is a possibility that the SD card
The download destination specified by containing the program to be updated has
the card does not match the destination not been mounted. Check to confirm that
for the main unit’s program. the SD card has been correctly mounted.
• The SD card is incorrect if the program to
be updated has been correctly installed. In
this case, insert the correct SC card.
38 The version of the downloaded program • Make sure that the program to be
has not been authorized for the update. overwritten is the specified version.
40 Engine download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the BICU.
41 Fax download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
controller board and the FCU board.
42 Control panel / language download • Switch the main power supply off and on to
fails. try again.
controller board and the operation panel
unit.
43 Printing download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to
try again.
• The SD card is damaged if the update fails

again. Replace the SD card.
44 The data to be overwritten cannot be • Switch the main power supply off and on to
accessed when controller-related try again.
programs are downloaded. • Install the correct ROM update data in the
SD card.
• Replace the controller board if the data to
be overwritten is contained on the
controller board.
49 Firmware updates are currently • The setting of Update Firmware in the
prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to
[Prohibit] by an administrator. Amend the
setting to [Do not Prohibit] and try again.
50 The results of the electronic • Install the correct ROM update data in the
authorization check have rejected the SD card.
update data.
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.
date/time reserved for receiving the
package firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.
reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted. • Check the HDD connection.
60 HDD could not be used during the • Try again.
package firmware update. • Replace the HDD if the download fails
again.
61 The module ID for the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update is incorrect.
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update files is incorrect.
63 Reception fails due to the power off at • Update is to be done automatically when
the reserved date/time of the remote the next reception time has elapsed.
firmware update from the network.
64 Reception fails due to the power off at • Reset the reservation date/time for the
the reserved date/time of the package remote update.
65 Reception fails due to the status error of • Update is to be done automatically when
the machine at the reserved date/time the next reception time has elapsed.
of the remote firmware update from the

network.
66 Reception failed due to the status error • Reset the reservation date/time for the
of the machine at the reserved remote update.
Maintenance
5BSystem
date/time of the package firmware
update from the network.
67 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails at correctly.
the reserved date/time of the remote
68 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails. correctly.
69 Download fails at the reserved • Check that the network is connected
date/time of the remote firmware correctly.
update from the network.
70 Package firmware download from the • Check that the network is connected
network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error occurs at • Check that the network is connected
the reserved date/time of the package correctly.
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid at the • Set the setting of @Remote Service in
reserved date/time of the package System Settings > Settings for
firmware update from the network. Administrator > Security > Extended
Security Settings to [Do not Prohibit].
74 Package file decompression has failed. • If this occurred during the update by the
removable media, check that
the removable media is not defective,
download the package again, and retry the
update.
• If this occurred during the remote firmware
update (WIM and utility) in the local
environment, replace the package file in
the local environment with the correct one
and retry the update.
• If this has occurred on other occasions or
keeps occurring even on the
abovementioned occasions, replace the
DIMM of the controller board.
If it persists, replace the hard disk.

75 The amount of update data has • Move “fwu” in the “/romdata” directory out
exceeded the limit. There is too much of that directory so that the same modules
data in the removable media. are not located in the same directory.
76 VPU process update fails. • Copy the correct update data and try
updating again.
• Replace the HDD if the above solution
does not solve the problem.
77 VMCU FPGA update fails. • Copy the correct update data and try
updating again.
• Replace the VMCU board if the above
solution does not solve the problem.
78 VMCU Ri update fails. • Copy the correct update data and try
updating again.
• Replace the VMCU board if the above
79 VICU FPGA update fails. • Copy the correct update data and try
updating again.
• Replace the VICU board if the above
80 VICU Ri update fails. • Copy the correct update data and try
updating again.
• Replace the VICU board if the above
81 Inspection parameter update fails. • Copy the correct update data and try
updating again.
• Replace the HDD if the above solution
82 VPU is disconnected. • Make sure that the PC and device are
connected with the cable correctly, and
then try updating again.
• Replace the VPU unit if the above solution
83 Package RFU reception has been • Package RFU reception has been
canceled by the user. canceled by the user.
84 Package RFU reception timeout. The • Check the network connection.
reception time has exceeded the limit
(100 minutes).
85 The composition of package version 2 • Prepare the proper package file.

conflicted with its specification.
86 The package is not permitted for • Prepare the package file that is permitted
updating the installed for updating respective/customized
Maintenance
5BSystem
respective/customized firmware. firmware.
221 Failed to terminate an application when • If a job is underway in the target
attempting to update or uninstall it. application, wait until the job is finished,
and then try updating again.
• Power cycle the machine and try updating
again.
222 Failed to verify the signature attached • Try updating again using a valid signature.
to the application or firmware.
224 The storage capacity is not enough. • Reduce the number of applications to be
installed.
• Uninstall unnecessary applications.
228 The target firmware file cannot be • Copy the correct update data and try
found. updating again.
229 The target update file is invalid. • Copy the correct update data and try
Occurs in the following cases. updating again.
• Failed to decompress the file.
• Failed to obtain application
information.
• Failed to read the public key for
signature verification.
230 The folder directory of the Smart • Copy the correct update data and try
Operation Panel firmware is invalid. updating again.
231 Failed to write data when updating the • Power cycle the machine and try updating
Smart Operation Panel firmware. again.
(There is a problem with the hardware.) • Replace the operation panel if the above
235 The target file is invalid, and the • Copy the correct update data and try
Android OS returns an error. updating again.
• If the same application has already been
installed, uninstall it and then try updating
again.
236 The Android SDK version required by • Check that the Android SDK version
the application is not installed on the required by the application is installed on
Smart Operation Panel. the Smart Operation Panel.

255 Software malfunction • Power cycle the machine and try updating
again.
• The PDF firmware installed as standard contains the program required to print PS3
data by default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
• The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When
the PS3 firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to
this specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part
number/software version of the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.
Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update)
6.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE)
In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.
Maintenance
5BSystem
SFU SD RFU ARFU

6.5.2 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION

RFU can be performed for devices that meet the following conditions:
1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The device is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)
6.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE)
• A HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package
firmware update via SD card.
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc.) used to be updated individually.
However, an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are two ways to update using the firmware package.
• Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
• Package Firmware Update with an SD card
Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
• There are two methods for SFU.

• Immediate Update: To update the firmware when visiting
• Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for downloading. The firmware will be
automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
• "Update at the next visit" is recommended since firmware download may take some
minutes due to the network condition.
• SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded
@Remote communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via an
intermediate device (RC Gate), the SFU function is disabled.
Package Firmware Update via an SD Card
Package firmware update can also be performed using the conventional SD card method by
writing the package firmware directly to the SD card.

Maintenance
6.6.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE
5BSystem
Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.
2. Touch [Firmware Update].
3. Touch [Update].
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Touch [YES].
6. The following will be displayed.
• If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed,
is displayed, go back to step 1.
• Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
• When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a
print job is started. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display shown
below to restart updating.
Maintenance
5BSystem
7. [Update done] is displayed.
• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All
items to be updated".
6.6.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE)

It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware required for SFU in advance,
and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time for the
firmware to download at the service visit.
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (Reserve)

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function. If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.
3. Touch [Reserve].
4. Touch [Reservation setting].
5. Enter the date and time of the next visit and the start of receiving data.
• "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically
downloaded by this time/date.

• "When to receive? (1-7)": The download of the package firmware will begin this
number of days before the next visit.
Maintenance
5BSystem
Successful Download
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next
scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second
diagram, the download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.
• If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition,
no power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six
hours until the scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the
download is set for the day before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at
24 hours before the visit, and then continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
• The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the
download will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy
Saver mode.
• The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy job,
fax receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
• The download will be terminated if the customer turns the power off while the download is
in progress.
• If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit,
the machine will stop trying to download the firmware.
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

3. Touch [Reserve].
4. Touch [Reserve and received package information].
5. Check the information displayed.

When the package firmware was downloaded successfully, the details of the download
result are displayed as the following picture shows.
Maintenance
5BSystem
• This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-".
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

3. Touch [Update].
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
• Update is started.
• If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version,
the messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
• If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
"Download and update the latest package." Then update of the package firmware
will be started.
• If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD (old version), touch [Execute]
beside the message "Update to the received package."
6. [Update done] is displayed.
• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
Maintenance
5BSystem
6.6.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD

Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the
package firmware to the SD card.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.

1. Create a new folder in the SD card, and then name it "package".
2. Copy the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to this folder.
• If you copy the package firmware into the conventional "romdata" folder, the
update will not work.

• Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you
copy multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select
only one version of the firmware randomly.
3. Turn the power OFF.
4. Insert the SD card which contains the package into SD card slot 2 (for service).
5. Turn the power ON and touch [Update].
• When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules,
the following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to
step 5 above.
6. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the HDD has been
completed.
7. When update is completed, "Update done" is displayed.
Maintenance
5BSystem
8. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then pull out the SD card from SD card slot 2.
9. Turn the power ON.
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)
6.7 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE
UPDATE)
• Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to
get permission from the customer before setting up this feature.
6.7.1 OVERVIEW
By Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the firmware is updated by checking the global
server every 76 hours and downloading the latest package if it is newer than the one installed
on the machine.
Function Overview

What is Included in the Firmware Package
Modules included in the firmware package are indicated by checkmarks ( ) in the firmware
download web site.
Firmware not included in the package require updating by SD cards, etc.
Included Firmware
- aics
animation
Application Site
BluetoothService
CheetahSystem
- CSPF
- Data Erase Onb
Included Firmware
- EcoInfoWidget
Engine
- External Auth
Maintenance
5BSystem
Fax
- FaxInfoWidget
GWFCU3.8-9(WW)
6.7.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS
Downloads the latest package

The machine accesses the server to check for latest package version.
If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on
the machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine
downloads the latest package in the background even when the customer is using the machine.
If the download fails, the machine will retry downloading 76 hours later.
The downloaded package can also be used with SFU (Smart Firmware Update). A package
downloaded with SFU (Smart Firmware Update) can be used with ARFU (Auto Remote
Firmware Update) and vice versa.
When replacing the hard disk, information concerning the current firmware package becomes
lost from the hard disk. So, even if the latest firmware is on the new hard disk, be sure to
download the latest package data.
When the machine connects to the server where the package files are stored, the DNS settings
and the name solution by DNS is needed. The machine will still try to download the package
even if the name cannot be resolved, but will fail as the name is not resolved.
The time and date to send the next inquiry to the global server can be checked with
SP5-886-116 (Firm Update Setting: Auto Update Next Date).
The auto remote firmware update is executed every 76 hours.
ARFU Update Determination

When the machine has successfully downloaded the latest package firmware file, or if the file
has already been downloaded, the machine verifies whether a firmware update is necessary.
If the update timing falls within the prohibited period set in the SP configuration or Web Image
Monitor, the machine will retry the firmware update 76 hours later.
If the machine is in use at the time of firmware update, the machine will retry the update. The
machine retries update up to three times at one-hour intervals (which can be changed in the SP
configuration). If the machine is in use on all three retries, the machine will retry the update 76
hours later.
Maintenance
5BSystem
Situations in which the machine is determined to be in use
No. Situations judged as machine in use

1 Within 30 seconds of the operation panel being used
2 During firmware update
3 While firmware update is disabled
4 While printing (copy, printer, fax, re-printing via network)
5 While scanning (copy, scanner, fax)
6 Retrieving image data via network
7 While initial setting (User Tools settings) or SP is being set
8 While fax is transferring data
9 During on hook / on handset
10 During the PC-FAX process (from PC to machine data transfer to the end of the job)
11 While shifting to/from the energy server mode
12 When not being able to run firmware update due to the modules that are running
e.g.) Waiting for DCS transfer (refer to appendix), accessing devices such as HDD/SD card,
etc.
13 While displaying a preview
14 While the document server function is in use
15 Connecting to TWAIN
16 During the interrupt copy process
17 While displaying the printer menu
18 While updating the display for the document server function via WIM or for stored fax
documents
19 While writing log information
20 While accessing the address book
21 During SC
Update Process
When the machine updates the firmware by Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), a
message dialog box opens to indicate the start of update.
“Cancel” and “OK” buttons appear in the dialog box. Update can be manually started by
pressing “OK” or starts automatically if the button is not pressed for 30 seconds.
If “Cancel” is pressed, the machine will perform the same retry process as when the machine is
in use at the time of update.
If the firmware update and three retries fail, the SC of the defective module during update will be
displayed as the update error. If the following SC occurs, replacing the corresponding device
restores the machine. The SC will not be reported to the call center.
Device and corresponding SC number.
Device name SC number

Engine board SC845-01
Controller board SC845-02
Operation panel (normal panel)* SC845-03
Operation panel (smart panel) SC845-04
FCU SC845-05
*1 Not available for this machine
Installing the downloaded package firmware when the device is turned off
When the following conditions are met, the firmware package can be installed when the device
is being turned off:
• If the ARFU is enabled. SP 5-886-111 (Auto Firmware Setting) is set to 1.
• If the firmware package downloaded before turned off.
• The firmware update is not restricted in the settings.
A confirmation dialog box displayed for continue to the update process or cancel. If confirmed
the device starts upgrading the firmware. The user can choose to cancel the process when this
dialog displayed.
A 15 seconds countdown timer will be displayed on the dialog box. After the 15 seconds the
machine will follow the newly added SP setting.

- SP 5-886-126 (Auto Update Power OFF Update Setting):
0 (Default): The device will try update after 15 seconds and shut down.
1: The device will shut down after 15 seconds.
Maintenance
5BSystem
2: Feature is disabled. No dialog box displayed.
If the shutdown time is between SP 5-886-113 (Auto Update Prohibit Start hour) and SP
5-886-114 (Auto Update Prohibit End hour), above message will be displayed.
When the following situations occur at the time of upgrade in progress, the device will cancel it:
The device status not switched to offline. (i.e. print/fax data is transferred.)
If there is a newer version of firmware available for ARFU on the server when the device
checked, the downloaded package firmware will not be updated.
The result of the package firmware update is logged on SP 7-520-051 (Update Result: Auto).
The date and time on SP5-886-116 (Auto Update Next Date) is not changed after the
completion of package firmware update with this feature.
6.7.3 RELATED SP
SP Number Selection Overview
Def.
SP5-886-111 0: OFF Sets auto update by ARFU ON/OFF .
1: ON
SP5-886-112 0: OFF Will not run the update when update prohibited time setting is ON
1: ON and the current time is in the range of the time set.
SP5-886-113 0 to 23 • Start time < End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to
9 the end time on the same day.
SP5-886-114 0 to 23 • Start time > End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to
17 the end time on the next day.
• Start time == End time: Prohibited time setting is disabled.
(Update will not be prohibited.)
SP5-886-115 0: OFF Even when the update function is disabled, downloading the
1: ON package is allowed.
The downloaded package can be used with SFU.
SP5-886-116 Display Displays when the latest package check will run.
only
SP5-886-117 1 to 24 Set time for the next version check after retry.
1
SP5-886-120 0x00 Update will not run if the corresponding bit for each day below is
set to 1.
• Prohibited at all times: bit 7
• Monday: bit 6

Def.
• Tuesday: bit 5
• Wednesday: bit 4
• Thursday: bit 3
• Friday: bit 2
• Saturday: bit 1
• Sunday: bit 0
This setting is not changed by the prohibited time setting.
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun. : 0x47 (01000111)
SP5-886-121 Execution Performs the connection test with the SERES server.
SP5-886-122 Display Displays the result of SP5-886-121. Refer to the following table for
only details.
SP5-886-126 0 to 3 Determines the update setting when the main power is turned off.
0 0: A confirmation screen appears. If 15 seconds have passed
without being operated on the confirmation screen, the machine
will shut down with updating.
1: A confirmation screen appears. If 15 seconds have passed
without being operated on the confirmation screen, the machine
will shut down without updating.
2: No confirmation screen appears.
SP5-886-127 0: Allow customers to enable/disable the auto update for ARFU.
Disabled 0: Disabled (customers cannot enable/disable the auto update
1: setting)
Enabled 1: Enabled (customers can enable/disable the auto update setting)
SP7-520-011 to Display History of dates and times when update has started.
015 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
If the last update failed, this is not recorded.
SP7-520-021 Display History of dates and times when update has finished.
to 025 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-031 Display History of the package numbers (including suffix) for which update
to 035 only has completed.
The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.

Def.
Maintenance
5BSystem
SP7-520-041 Display History of the package versions for which update has completed.
to 045 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
SP7-520-051 Display History of the results of the download and the update.
to 060 only Refer below for the numbers set.
Numbers set for the result history for SP7-520-051 to 060, and SP5-886-122
No. Result Description

255 Now connecting to the server. Only shows up on SP5-886-122. Wait until the result is
to be returned.
0 ARFU: Initial value SP-7520: Initial value
Connection Check: Success SP5-886: Successfully connected to the SERES server
1 Downloading with SFU Cannot download or update because the machine is
now downloading the package for SFU.
2 HDD not installed Cannot download or update because the machine has
no HDD.
3 Updating with SFU Cannot download or update because the machine is
being updated with SFU.
4 HDD error Cannot download or update because the HDD cannot
be used.
5 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the version
information cannot be obtained.
6 Update download error Cannot download or update because the update
download failed.
In the non @Remote method, this shows that the
download failed because there was no proxy set.
7 Name resolution error Cannot download or update because the name cannot
be resolved upon downloading the update.
8 Auto update setting disabled The package has been downloaded but will not run the
update because SP5-886-111 (auto update setting) is
disabled and SP5-886-115 (auto download setting for
SFU) is enabled.
9 Update prohibited time Cannot start to update because the auto update

prohibited time setting (SP5-886-112) is enabled and
the time update initiated was in the range of prohibited
time (SP5-886-113 to 114).
Or the day which update was initiated was a day for
which update was prohibited (SP5-886-120).
10 Update postponed due to Cannot start update due to the following conditions
machine in use when update was initiated.
• The machine is in use by a user (the panel was
used within 30 seconds)
• Machine offline for other reasons
• Operation prohibited
• Displaying SP/UP menu
• Firmware update is running with another method
• Configuration change prohibited
• Verifying the operation panel (smart panel)
11 Update cancelled by user Update was cancelled because a user selected
"Cancel" in the popup shown before starting the
update.
12 Offline failed Cannot start to update because the machine is offline
for other reasons.
13 Update successful Update was started and successfully completed.
14 Update failed Update was started but failed.
15 Update deemed completed Update was cancelled after the process was initiated
because a user selected “Cancel”. There is no need to
resume the update due to one of the following reasons:
• A newer update has been released and received.
• When retrying ARFU, the update has already been
completed by another method.
16 Update cancelled by user after Update was cancelled after the process initiated
update initiated because a user selected "Cancel" during the update.
17 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the name cannot
(communication error occurred be resolved when obtaining version information.
for hostname)
18 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because the proxy
(proxy verification failure) verification failed with proxy settings when obtaining
version information.
19 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update because an error other
(other than proxy verification than proxy verification with proxy settings occurred

failure when proxy is set) when obtaining version information.
20 Update download error (proxy Cannot download or update because the proxy
verification failure) verification failed with proxy settings when downloading
Maintenance
5BSystem
the package.
21 Update download error (other Cannot download or update because an error other
than proxy verification failure than proxy verification with proxy settings occurred
when proxy is set) when downloading the package.
22 Update by retry successful After power failure, unsuccessful update, or rebooting,
update by retry is executed successfully.
However, this does not apply to the case where the
update was cancelled after the process was initiated
because a user selected “Cancel”.
In this case, the update is “successful” if the retry is not
executed between the start and completion of the next
update (76 hours after the cancellation).
23 Update data decompression has Receiving the update data successfully completed but
failed failed to update because update data decompression
failed.
Data in the package file may be corrupted, or data may
be garbled due to a defect in the DIMM or the HDD.
24 No version information Successfully accessed to the server, but cannot
download or update because the releaseList.dat or
indexHistory.xml does not exist.
25 "releaseList.dat" parse error Cannot download or update because the
releaseList.dat is incorrect.
26 "indexHistory.xml" parse error Cannot download or update because the
indexHistory.xml is incorrect.
27 "fwu" files download error Failed to download the "fwu" files.
28 Download abort (Incorrect data Cannot download because it does not meet the
configuration) specification.
29 Download abort (Specialized Cannot download because it is not allowed to update.
firmware)
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
6.8 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
6.8.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD

Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked.
1. Do SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All(Data List)) before you switch the machine off. You will
need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
4. Insert the SD card in Service Slot [A: Lower Slot].
NVRAM Data Upload/Download

6. Execute SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the "Execute" key.
7. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload
procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
Maintenance
5BSystem
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114":
NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
8. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds
the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
6.8.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the
machine.
• The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if
the connection between the controller and BICU is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
• Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the
NVRAM data.
2. Remove the SD slot cover.
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
4. Switch ON the main power.
5. Do SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key.
• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the
serial numbers do not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count
UP/SP Data Import/Export
6.9 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
The machine can backup and restore the UP/SP settings by SD card, and the data can be
imported to the same model regardless of peripheral configurations.
6.9.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
Data that can be imported and exported

• Copier / Document Server Features
• Printer Features
• Scanner Features
• Facsimile Features
• Program (Document Server)
• Program (Copier)
• Program (Scanner)
• Web Image Monitor Setting
• Web Service Settings
• System Settings
Data that cannot be imported or exported

• Some System Settings *1 *2
*1 The setting for the date, settings that require the device certificate, and settings that
need to be adjusted for each machine (for example, image adjustment settings) cannot be
imported or exported.
*2 Settings only for executing functions and settings only for viewing cannot be imported or
exported.
• Extended Feature Settings
• Address book
• Programs (fax function)
• Programs (printer function)
• User stamp in Copier / Document Server Features
• Settings that can be specified via telnet
• @Remote-related data
• Counters
• Extended feature settings
• EFI printer unit settings
• Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example,
Bonjour, SSDP setting)
Exporting Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
Maintenance
5BSystem
When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
3. Press [Settings].
5. Press [Settings for Administrator]
6. Press [Data Management].
7. Press [Device Setting Information: Export (Memory Storage Device)].
8. Set the export conditions.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device

Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Specify an encryption key.
9. Press [Run Export].
10. Press [OK].
11. Press [Exit].
12. Log out.
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
• When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device
setting information file with special software and store it on the web server.
Importing Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
3. Press [Settings].
5. Press [Settings for Administrator]
6. Press [Data Management]
7. Press [Device Setting Information: Import (Memory Storage Device)].
8. Configure the import conditions.
• Press [Select] of the "Device Setting Info. File" to select the file(s) to import.
• When inserting a file into a home screen, press [Select] for the Image for Home screen
and select the file. You cannot use this setting when using the Smart Operation Panel.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device
Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Enter the encryption key that was specified when the file was exported.
9. Press [Run Import].
10. Press [OK].
11. Press [Exit].
The machine restarts.
6.9.3 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
Data that can be imported and exported

• System SP
• Printer SP
• Fax SP
• Scanner SP
Exporting Device Information

When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
2. Enter SP mode.
Maintenance
5BSystem
3. Press SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export)
4. Select "Target" SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner/Smart Operation Panel) to be
exported.
5. Select "Option" settings (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique information of the machine is Unique information that can be updated
included in the exported file if you #1. Items used to identify the machine.
select "Unique" setting. Example: Network Information/ Host name /
Information related to fax number /Mail
address assigned to the machine
#2. Items for specifying the options
equipped on the machine.
Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be
updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if
imported
Example: Serial number / Information
related to @Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the
machine
Example: Time and date / Counter
information / Installation date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
Secret Secret information is exported if you Secret information
select "Secret" setting. #1. Data that cannot be exported without
being encrypted.
(Exported data is encrypted.)
Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN
code
#2. Confidential information for the
customer
Example: User name / User ID /
Department code / Mail address / Phone
number
Item Specification Note

#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: MAC address / Network
parameters
* The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
6. Select "Crpt config" setting (Encryption).
Encryption Select whether to encrypt or not If the encryption function is used, setting of
when exporting. an encryption key is required by direct
If you push the "Encryption" key, input.
you can export secret information. • Type the arbitrary password using the
soft keyboard
• Can enter up to 32 characters
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
Importing Device Information

Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select a unique setting.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
6. Select an encryption setting.
Unique If you want to apply the unique information to the target Refer to the above
machine, select the "Unique" key. information.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the import file, this
setting is required.
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
6.9.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS

The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same
location as the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than "0"
indicate that an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
Maintenance
5BSystem
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note
down the error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) different models or machines with model with the same device
different device configurations. configurations.
4 (INVALID Failed to write the device Check whether the destination device is
OUTPUT DIR) information to the destination operating normally.
device.
7( MODULE An unexpected error occurred Switch the power off and then back on,
ERROR) during import or export. and then try the operation again. If the
error persists, contact your supervisor.
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on the Execute the operation again after
external medium is insufficient. making sure there is enough storage
space.
9 (DEVICE Failed to write or read the log file. Check whether the path to the folder for
ERROR) storing the file or the folder in which the
file is stored is missing.
10 (LOG The hard disk is faulty. Contact your supervisor.
ERROR)
20 (PART Failed to import some settings. The reason for the failure is logged in
FAILED) "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
Result Code Cause Solutions

2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the
allowable range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is
missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because
of the system status or interlocking with
other specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some
other reason.
21 (INVALID Failed to import the file because it is Check whether the file format is correct.
FILE) in the wrong format in the external The import file should be a CSV file.
medium.
22 (INVALID The encryption key is not valid. Use the correct encryption key.
KEY)
• When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only
on an SD card.
• The file format for exports is CSV.
Address Book Upload/Download
6.10 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
6.10.1 INFORMATION LIST
Maintenance
5BSystem
The following information can be uploaded and downloaded.
Information
• Registration No. • Select Title
• User Code • Folder
• E-mail • Local Authentication
• Protection Code • Folder Authentication
• Fax Destination • Account ACL
• Fax Option • New Document Initial ACL
• Group Name • LDAP Authentication
• Key Display
6.10.2 DOWNLOAD
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
5. Insert the SD card in Service Slot [A: Lower Slot].

7. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
8. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power switch.
9. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower).
10. Install the SD slot cover.
• An error message is displayed if there is not enough space on the SD card to store the
local user information.
• Carefully handle the SD card containing user information. Do not take it away with you.
Carefully handle the SD card containing user information. Do not take it away with you.
Auto Backup Setting

This machine is equipped with a function to automatically acquire an address book backup at
the date and time set by the administrator.
To enable the auto backup function, do the following procedure.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Set the value of SP5-846-030 to "1" (enable).
This allows the administrator to use auto backup function.
6.10.3 UPLOAD
2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine.
3. Install the SD card with the uploaded information into SD card slot 2 (lower).
6. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower).
9. Install the SD slot cover.
Maintenance
5BSystem
• The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.
• The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor
uploaded.
• An error message is displayed if there is no address book data on the SD card.
Capturing the Device Logs
6.11 CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS
6.11.1 OVERVIEW
With this feature, you can save device logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation
panel) on an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for
analysis.
The Log Capture feature saves the following four device logs.
• Controller device log including operation log
• Engine device log
• FCU device log
• Operation panel log
• In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After
that, when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the
device log.
• However, this new feature saves the device logs at the time that problems occur. Then
you can copy the logs to an SD card.
• You can retrieve the device logs using a SD card without a network.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of
the device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
• Make sure to open the right lower cover of the main machine before retrieving the
Debug Logs. Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the debug logs
are retrieved.
Types of device logs that can be saved
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum

storage capacity)
Controller device • Saved at all times HDD (4 GB) or SD card
log including connected to the service
operation log slot.
When the data gets over
4.0 GB, the older data is
deleted.
Engine device log • Engine SC occurs HDD or SD card connected
• A JAM on main machine, or ADF occurs to the service slot (Up to
• Error due to the door open occurs (except 1300 times)
for peripherals, or scanner open) If 1300 times or more, the
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum

storage capacity)
• Stored engine device log reaches the max log will be discarded in the
file size (400kb). order of old time stamp.
Maintenance
5BSystem
• Engine power off which includes moving to
energy saver mode.
FCU device log • When a specified amount of FCU device HDD or SD card connected
log is stored in the FCU. If fax application to the service slot
is unavailable (e.g. not installed), the
machine does not transfer the log.
Operation panel • When an error related to the operation Memory in the operation
log panel occurs. panel.
• Device logs are not saved in the following conditions:

• While erasing all memory
• While data encryption equipment is installed
• While changing the firmware configuration
• Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
• Engine device log while the machine is shutting down
• When the power supply to the HDD is off because of energy saving (engine OFF
mode/STR mode)
• When one of the following SCs occurs: SC672, SC816, SC819, SC878, SC899,
SC859, SC860, SC861, SC863, or SC864
• The following logs are not saved:

• Logs related to the energy saver mode (Engine-off, suspend-mode, or other cases)
Network communication log
Logs related to NRS
IP-FAX log
Access log for unauthorized users (guests)
• HTTP session timeout log
• Auto log-out log
• IC card related log
• Authorization for Fax
Security of the Operation Log

The following operation logs related to security are not saved.
• User ID
• Password
• IP address
• Telephone number
• Encryption key
• Transition to SP mode
6.11.2 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL
• Retrieve device logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find
details of the problems
• e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel
does not respond. Turn the main power supply off / on.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of
the device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with SD Card

1. Insert the SD card into the slot on the side of the operation panel or the service slot.
• It is recommended to use the SD card (2 GBs* or 8 GBs**) provided as a service

part. This is because the log data can be acquired much faster than when using
commercially available SD cards.
• Format the SD card by using SD Formatter from Panasonic before copying the
logs: https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_3/ (free software)
• Insert the SD card into the machine's service slot instead of the SD slot on the
side of the operation panel.
* The part number of the SD card with 2 GBs that is registered as a service part is
"B6455030".
** The part number of the SD card with 8 GBs that is registered as a service part is
"B6455040".
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Specify the date that the problem occurred in SP5-858-101 (Failure Occurring Date) by
setting it to the year-month-day calendar format.
• For example, if a problem occurred on February 1, 2015, the date should be set to
"20150201", as shown above.
• Be sure to confirm the date when the problem occurred before obtaining the logs.
5. Specify the number of days to collect the logs in SP5-858-102 (Tracing Days).
• "2" is set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem.
• A value of "1" to "180" can be set.
6. Execute SP5-858-111 (Acquire All Info & Logs) to copy all of the log types to an SD card.
It is possible to obtain the logs separately by the following SPs.
SP Collectable Information and/or Logs
SP5-858-111 All of the information and logs that are collected by executing the SPs from
Maintenance
5BSystem
SP5-858-121 to SP5-858-145, and SMC.
SP5-858-121 Configuration page
SP5-858-122 Font page
SP5-858-123 Print settings list
SP5-858-124 Error log
SP5-858-131 Fax information (whether the fax destinations are included or not depends on
the setting of SP5-858-103.)
SP5-858-141 Controller log, engine log, operation panel log, FCU, and SMC.
SP5-858-142 Controller log
SP5-858-143 Engine log
SP5-858-144 Operation panel log
SP5-858-145 FCU log
SP5-992-001 SMC
7. After executing the SP for copying the information and/or logs, a confirmation screen will
appear. To proceed with obtaining the information and/or logs, tap "Execute"
• The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time
may be affected by the type or format of the SD card.
Controller device log (GW device log): 2 - 20 minutes
Engine device log: 2 minutes
Operation panel device log: 2 - 20 minutes
If the estimated time is not calculated due to an error, an error code will be displayed.
Error Description
Code
-1 Other.
-2 No SD card is inserted in the service slot or in the SD slot on the side of the
operation panel. In this case, insert an SD card into either of the SD slots.
Error Description
Code
-3 The SD card is locked. In this case, unlock the SD card, as shown below.
[A]: Unlocked, [B]: Locked

8. Wait for the information and/or logs to be copied to the SD card.
9. After a message stating that the process has completed appears on the operation panel,
confirm that the LED light next to the SD card slot is not flashing and then remove the SD
card.
• The process of obtaining logs fails in the following cases:

- When the size of the logs to obtain exceeds the amount of space available on
the SD card.
- When the SD card is removed while the logs are being copied to it.
- When the SD card is not formatted.
• If ‘failed’ appears on the touch panel display, turn the power off, and then recover
from step 1 again.
Note When Retrieving the Logs
SP5-858-002 is an SP that changes where debug logs are stored.

The value is set to "0" (HDD) in the factory, and should not be changed unless the hard drive is
disabled or not.
Only when using an SD card as a permanent log storage medium instead of an HDD, change
the value to "1" (SD).
Even if the value is set to "1" (SD) at the time of log acquisition, log acquisition from HDD to SD
is not possible.
Problems that can be caused by changing the storage location setting

• SC672-12 (Controller does not start up) may occur when setting of SP5-858-002 is
changed and the power supply is not turned OFF/ON.
• After changing SP5-858-002 to "1", if a log is obtained by the log obtaining procedure
Maintenance
5BSystem
described above, a log obtaining error occurs.
• "LogTrace Directory Is Not Found" message is displayed on the banner on the operation
panel.
• The execution ends in the empty folder. (Message display completed successfully)
*When executing SP5-858-003, "LogTraceServiceSlotSd" folder is generated directly under the
root of the SD card.
However, no operation is required if you do not change to SD card in SP5-858-002.
6.11.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE

MONITOR
The device logs can be retrieved via the Web Image Monitor.
1. Access the following URL and log in as an administrator:
http://[IP address or host name]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysInfo.cgi
2. Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If
the fax destinations need to be included in the fax information, set "On" as "Obtain Fax
Destination(s) Information". Then click "Download".
• "3" is set by default for "Number of days, including date fault occurred, to obtain".
However "2", which is the minimum needed for investigating the problems, is
recommended for reducing the downloading time.
• "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information" is set to "Off" by default.
3. The confirmation screen will appear and the information and/or logs will start downloading.
To proceed with downloading the information and/or logs, wait for the open-or-save dialog
to appear.
• To cancel downloading, click "Cancel".

• To reconfigure some settings, click "Download again".
• Operation panel when downloading the logs:
4. After a while, the open-or-save dialog will appear. Specify where to download and save the
file.
• The debug logs are saved with the following file names. These names are the
same as the files downloaded with SD card.
The device logs are saved with the following file names.
Controller log /LogTrace/[the model number]/watching/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_[a unique

(mmesg) value].gz
Engine /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/engine/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_as_dbg.gz,
device log /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/engine/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_as_unf.gz
Operation /LogTrace/[the model number]/opepanel/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].tar.gz
panel log
SMC /LogTrace/[the model number]/smc/[the model
number]_[5992XXX]_[yyyymmdd]_[hhmmss].csv
Configuration /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ConfigrationPage/ConfigrationPage_
Maintenance
5BSystem
page [yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Font page • /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PCL_[the page
number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PDF_[the page
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PS_[the page
Print settings • /LogTrace/[the model
list number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RPGL_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].t
xt
• /LogTrace/[the model
number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RTIFF_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].
csv
Error log /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ErrorLog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Fax /LogTrace/[the model number]/faxreport/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
information
FCU debug /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/fculog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
log
Self-Diagnostic Mode
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
6BTroubleshoo
ting
7.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are
put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the
classification of the SC codes.
Type Display How to reset SC call or SC alarm
in customer support
system
A The SC is immediately displayed on Execute CE reset by Occurrence & alarm
the operation panel when SC entering and exiting the SP count
occurs. mode, and then power cycle
The error involves the fusing unit. the machine. Immediate alarm
The machine operation is disabled.
The user cannot reset the error.
B When a function is selected, the SC Turn the operation switch off Occurrence & alarm
is displayed on the operation panel. and on. count
The machine cannot be used
(down-time mitigation). Power OFF and ON
Alarm count and

alarm only if
recurrence
C No display on the operation panel. Only the SC history is Occurrence
The machine operates as usual. updated.
Logging count &
alarm count
D The SC is displayed on the Turn the main power switch Occurrence & alarm
operation panel. off and on. count
The machine cannot be used
(machine-error SC). Power OFF and ON
Alarm count and

alarm only if
recurrence
• When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When

an event is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary
SC, reboot is not performed. During automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is
displayed after the reboot.
• When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without
rebooting, and logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an *
mark is added alongside the SC number for clarity.
• Automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot
setting) (default value: OFF).
SP descriptions
• SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot: Reboot Setting)
Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs.
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the
SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for the pattern A or C.
7.1.2 SC LOGGING
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code"
are logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is
not performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history
is logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively
deleted starting from the oldest.
7.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT

When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic
reboot or reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting
out) (default value: 1 "OFF").
When a type D occurs, automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it
can reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to
the @Remote server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good
solution if an SC occurs twice.
When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The
confirmation screen can be cancelled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not cancelled only
when the main power switch is switched OFF to ON).
Screen display during reboot
• Status display on the current screen

• Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc.
• Automatic reboot .... After operation end
Post-processing
6BTroubleshoo
ting
Until automatic reboot
• Reset key (Reboot key)

Key to perform reboot
# Cancel key is not displayed.
• Turn ON spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated).
Operation during SC reboot
• Timing of SC reboot
When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding
SC is the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total
counter counts 10 times.
• Time to automatic reboot
Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of
post-processing during printing, etc.
At that time, a reboot is performed even if the MFP is operating. The engine does not start
process control when a reboot is possible.
• Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.
7.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT

When the automatic reboot is disabled in SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting), the user
reboots the machine manually. See the flowchart below.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC100: Scanning
7.2 SC100: SCANNING
7.2.1 SC100 (ENGINE)

To recover from the error, check if the SC occurs (feed paper, open/close the doors, Input
or Output check). If the SC occurs again, do the follow steps. After each step, turn the
power OFF then ON to check if the SC occurs again.
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC101-01 D Exposure lamp abnormal: Front side: SBU (PCB8)
The peak detection level reading on the reference white plate is too low.
• SBU (PCB8) defective
1. Turn the power off/on.
2. Reconnect the power/signal harness.
3. Replace the SBU (PCB8) (lens block).
4. If the machine is not recovered from this SC, perform procedures of
SC101-09.

SC101-03 D Exposure lamp abnormal: Front side: BICU (PCB11)
• BICU (PCB11) defective
3. Replace the BICU (PCB11).
SC101-09.

SC101-08 D Exposure lamp abnormal: Front side: Drive
• Scanner drive system or motor operation abnormal
2. Reconnect the motor system harness.
3. Replace motor system (motor, motor harness, or other parts).
SC101-09.
SC100: Scanning

SC101-09 D Exposure lamp error: Front side
6BTroubleshoo
ting
• LED defective
• SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11) (LED drive) defective
• SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11) defective
• Power source, signal harness loose, broken, defective
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Scanner mirror or lens out of position or dirty
• Reference white plate out of position or dirty
3. Replace the both LED boards, SBU (PCB8)/BICU (LED driver), and
power/signal harness.

SC101-12 D Exposure lamp abnormal: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Cable
3. Replace the SBU (PCB8) (lens block) and IF cable.
SC101-09.

SC101-13 D Exposure lamp abnormal: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11)
3. Replace the SBU (PCB8) (lens block) and BICU (PCB11).
SC100: Scanning

SC101-09.

SC101-14 D Exposure unit abnormal: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/LED unit
• LED unit defective
3. Replace the SBU (PCB8) (lens block) and lighting unit.
SC101-09.

SC101-15 D Exposure unit abnormal: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Scanner optics
• Mirror defective
• White plate defective
• DF white guide defective
3. Replace the SBU (PCB8) (lens block), mirrors, reference white plate,
and DF background guide plate.
SC101-09.

SC102-01 D Exposure adjustment error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)
The white plate reading (peak detection level) exceeded the preset value
after the prescribed number of adjustments.
SC100: Scanning

SC102-09.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC102-03 D Exposure adjustment error: Front side: BICU (PCB11)
SC102-09.

SC102-08 D Exposure adjustment error: Front side: Drive
SC102-09.

SC102-09 D Exposure adjustment error: Front side
• LED defective
• SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11) (LED drive) defective
SC100: Scanning

3. Replace the LED board, SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11), BICU (PCB11),
SBU (PCB8)/BICU (LED driver), and power/signal harness.

SC102-12 D Exposure adjustment error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Cable
SC102-09.

SC102-13 D Exposure adjustment error: Front side: SBU (PCB8) /BICU (PCB11)
SC102-09.

SC102-14 D Exposure adjustment error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/LED unit
SC100: Scanning

SC102-09.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC102-15 D Exposure adjustment error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Scanner optics
SC102-09.

SC111-01 D Exposure defective (scanner): Front side
After the black reduction reading from the CIS (PCB10) device the value of
the shading peak value reading was abnormal.
• CIS (PCB10) defective
• CIS white roller defective
• USB cable (CIS to BICU) defective
1. Check if the connectors of the harness connecting the ADF controller
board (PCB29) and CIS (PCB10) are connected correctly.
2. Replace the CIS (PCB10).
3. Replace the power/signal harness, ADF controller board (PCB29), and
USB cable.
SC100: Scanning

SC120-00 D Scanner home position error 1
The Scanner HP sensor (S24) does not go OFF.
Error detection timing
• During homing (when the machine is turned ON or when it returns from
energy save mode)
• During an automatic adjustment (when the machine is turned ON or
when it returns from energy save mode)
• During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass.
After an error occurs
• Stop process, Operation panel display, LED indication, Logging
• Scanner is not usable (Copier/Scanner/Document Server applications)
• Printer is usable.
• Scanner drive motor driver defective
• Scanner drive motor (M23) defective
• Scanner HP sensor (S24) defective
• Scanner drive board installed with control IC defective
• Harness defective (broken, shorted)
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
1. Check if all the connectors are connected correctly.
2. Check if the timing belt, pulley and wire are installed correctly.
3. Replace the scanner HP sensor (S24).
5. Replace the scanner drive motor.
6. Replace the harness.

SC121-00 D Scanner home position error 2
The Scanner HP sensor (S24) does not go ON.
Error detection timing
• During homing
• During an automatic adjustment
• During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass.
After an error occurs
• Stop process, Operation panel display, LED indication, Logging
• Scanner is not usable (Copier/Scanner/Document Server applications).
• Printer is usable.
• Scanner drive motor driver defective
• Scanner drive motor (M23) defective
SC100: Scanning

• Scanner HP sensor (S24) defective
• Scanner drive board installed with control IC defective
• Harness defective (broken, shorted)
6BTroubleshoo
• Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly
ting
2. Check if the timing belt, pulley and wire are installed correctly.
3. Replace the scanner HP sensor (S24).
5. Replace the scanner drive motor.
6. Replace the harness.

SC141-01 D Black level error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)
The black level did not conform to the specified value.
SC141-09.

SC141-03 D Black level error: Front side: BICU (PCB11)
SC141-09.

SC141-08 D Black level error: Front side: Drive
SC100: Scanning

SC141-09.

SC141-09 D Black level error: Front side
3. Replace the SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11), BICU (PCB11), power/signal
harness.

SC141-12 D Black level error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Cable
SC141-09.

SC141-13 D Black level error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11)
SC100: Scanning

SC141-09.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC142-01 D White level error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)
The white level did not conform to the specified value.
SC142-09.

SC142-03 D White level error: Front side: BICU (PCB11)
SC142-09.

SC142-08 D White level error: Front side: Drive
SC142-09.
SC100: Scanning

SC142-09 D White level error: Front side
• LED defective
• SBU (PCB8)/BICU (LED drive) defective
• Scanner drive mechanism defective
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Scanner mirror or lens out of position or dirty
• Reference white plate out of position or dirty
3. Reinstall the mirrors, lens, and reference white plate, and clean them.
4. Replace the SBU (PCB8)/BICU, LED board, SBU (PCB8)/BICU (LED
driver), BICU, and power/signal harness.

SC142-12 D White level error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Cable
SC142-09.

SC142-13 D White level error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11)
SC100: Scanning

SC142-09.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC142-14 D White level error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/LED unit
SC142-09.

SC142-15 D White level error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Scanner optics
SC142-09.

SC144-01 D Scanner communication error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)
• Cannot confirm connection at BICU (PCB11), or communication error.
SC100: Scanning

SC144-09.

SC144-03 D Scanner communication error: Front side: BICU (PCB11)
Cannot confirm BICU (PCB11) connection, or communication error.
SC144-09.

SC144-09 D Scanner communication error: Front side
• Cannot confirm SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11) connection (abnormal
connection detected).
• Cannot confirm SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11) connection, or
• BICU (PCB11) or other communication boards abnormal
• Power/signal harness abnormal
3. Replace the SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11), BICU (PCB11), and
power/signal harness.

SC144-12 D Scanner communication error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Cable
SC100: Scanning

SC144-09.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC144-13 D Scanner communication error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/BICU (PCB11)
SC144-09.

SC144-17 D Scanner communication error: Front side: SBU (PCB8)/Power harness
• Power source harness loose, broken, defective
3. Replace the SBU (PCB8) (lens block) and power harness.
SC144-09.

SC151-00 D Black level detection error: Back side
The black level detection error of the back side scanning sensor (CIS unit
(PCB30)).
This error is detected if even one pixel of the black level of the CIS
SC100: Scanning

unit (PCB30) did not coverage within prescribed threshold.
• CIS unit (PCB30) defective
• Harness loose, broken, defective
• USB cable (CIS - BICU) loose, broken, defective
USB cable.

SC152-00 D White level detection error: Back side
The white level detection error of the back side scanning sensor (CIS unit
(PCB30)).
This error is detected if there were no shading data of the CIS unit (PCB30) in
prescribed threshold.
• CIS background white roller/white plate dirty, positioned incorrectly
• USB cable (CIS - BICU) loose, broken, defective
USB cable.

SC154-00 D Scanner communication error: Back side
This error is detected when the value scanned in the ASIC on the CIS
(PCB10) was differ from the expectation, or when the FROM data in CIS
unit (PCB30) did not scanned normally.
SC100: Scanning

6BTroubleshoo
ting
3. Replace the power/signal harness and ADF controller board (PCB29).

SC161-02 D BICU (PCB11) error (LSYNC abnormal): Back side
LSYNC error is detected by debug function of Biscotti before the back side
scanning.
Detection Timing:
• At the start of a duplex scanning job (front/back sides scanned together)
• CIS (PCB10) and BICU (PCB11) not connected correctly or defective
• BICU (PCB11) defective (ASIC: Biscotti defective or others defective)
1. Check if the connectors of the cable connecting the CIS (PCB10) and
BICU (PCB11) are connected correctly.
3. Replace the cable connecting the CIS (PCB10) and BICU (PCB11).

SC161-20 D BICU (PCB11) error (DRAM initial error)
This error is detected in the DDR-PHY initialization and Training status
confirming when the machine is turned on, or returns to full operation from
energy save mode.
• BICU (PCB11) defective (Biscotti/DRAM device connection error or
others defective)
• DRAM devise defective

SC195-00 D Machine serial number error
Comparison of the product identification code in the machine serial number
(11 digits).
The product identification code in the machine serial number (11 digits) does
SC100: Scanning

not match.
Re-enter the machine serial number.
SC200: Exposure
7.3 SC200: EXPOSURE
6BTroubleshoo
SC202-00 D Polygon mirror motor error 1: Timeout at ON
ting
When the polygon mirror motor is turned on or the number of revolution is
changed, the motor does not rotate within the prescribed time.
• Harness disconnected
• Polygon mirror motor controller board (PCB18) or polygon mirror motor
defective
• BICU (PCB11) defective (polygon control signal error, image processing IC
defective)
• RYB (PCB24)/PSU (PCB23) defective (polygon power, fuse defective)
• Polygon mirror motor harness abnormal
• Power harness error abnormal
1. Check the harness connection between the laser unit and BICU (PCB11) by
hand.
2. Check the harness connection between BICU (PCB11) and RYB (PCB24),
between RYB (PCB24) and PSU (PCB23) by hand.
3. Replace the polygon mirror motor controller board (PCB18).
4. Replace the polygon mirror motor.
6. Replace the RYB (PCB24).
7. Replace the PSU (PCB23).
8. Replace the harness connecting the laser unit and BICU (PCB11).
9. Replace the harness connecting the BICU (PCB11) and RYB (PCB24).
10. Replace the harness connecting the RYB (PCB24) and PSU (PCB23).
SC203-00 D Polygon mirror motor error 2: Timeout at OFF

When the polygon mirror motor is turned off, the motor does not stop within the
prescribed time.
• Polygon harness disconnected
• Polygon mirror motor or polygon motor (M23) driver defective
defective)
hand.
SC200: Exposure

SC204-00 D Polygon mirror motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error

The polygon mirror motor rotated incorrectly during the rotation.
• Polygon harness disconnected
• Polygon mirror motor or polygon motor (M23) driver defective
defective)
hand.
SC220-00 D Laser synchronization detection error

The synchronization detection signal of LD0 (writing scanning cycle signal) is not
outputted.
(Laser diode does not turn on, and the synchronization detection signal cannot
be detected.)
• Laser unit harness disconnected
• Laser synchronization board defective
• Laser diode board defective (specialized IC defective)
• Laser unit abnormal (synchronization optical system abnormal)
• BICU (PCB11) defective (image processing IC defective)
• Laser unit harness abnormal
1. Check if dew condensation appears around the laser unit.
If dew condensation is found, wait until it disappears.
2. Check the harness connection between the laser unit and BICU (PCB11)
(synchronization harness) by hand.
3. Replace the laser synchronization detector.
4. Replace the LD unit.
5. Replace the laser unit.
7. Replace the harness connecting the laser unit and BICU (PCB11)
SC200: Exposure
(synchronization harness).
SC221-00 D Laser Synchronization Detector Error: K Leading Edge (LD1)

The synchronization detection signal except LD0 (writing scanning cycle
6BTroubleshoo
signal) is not outputted.
ting
(Laser diode does not turn on, and the synchronization detection signal cannot
be detected.)
• Laser unit harness disconnected
• Laser synchronization board defective
• Laser unit abnormal (synchronization optical system abnormal)
• Laser unit harness abnormal
1. Check if dew condensation appears around the laser unit.
If dew condensation is found, wait until it disappears.
(synchronization harness) by hand.
3. Replace the laser synchronization detector.
5. Replace the laser unit.
SC230-00 D FGATE ON error

Writing start signal is not outputted at writing start timing.
• Poor connection between controller board (PCB18) and BICU (PCB11).
• Controller board (PCB18) defective
1. Check the connection between the controller board (PCB18) and the BICU
(PCB11).
3. Replace the controller board (PCB18).
SC230-10 D FGATE ON error: image transfer error

Writing start signal (internal signal) is not outputted at writing start timing.
(PCB11).
SC200: Exposure

SC231-00 D FGATE OFF Error

Writing stop signal (internal signal) is not outputted at writing stop timing.
(PCB11).
SC240-00 D LD unit error

LD unit doesn't turn on normally.
• Laser unit harnesses disconnected
• Laser unit harnesses defective
(laser diode board harness) by hand.
3. Replace the harness connecting the laser unit and BICU (PCB11) (laser
diode board harness).
SC272-01 D Laser unit ASIC communication error

Communication between BICU (PCB11) (CPU) and LDB (PCB15) (specialized
IC) was not performed normally.
• Laser unit harnesses disconnected
• BICU (PCB11) defective (CPU defective)
• Laser unit harnesses abnormal
hand.
SC200: Exposure
SC272-10 D Laser unit ASIC communication error: others

Laser diode board main power (+5VS) is turned off with the main machine door
closed.
*Laser diode board main power (+5VS) is generated from the power (+24VS),
6BTroubleshoo
which is turned on only when the main machine door is closed.
ting
• Harness disconnected
• LDB (PCB15) defective (specialized IC defective)
• BICU (PCB11) defective (LDB power +5VS error)
• RYB (PCB24) /PSU (PCB23) defective (+24VS power, fuse defective)
• Laser unit harness defective
• Power harness defective
(laser diode board harness) by hand.
2. Check the harness connection between BICU (PCB11) and RYB (PCB24),
between RYB (PCB24) and PSU (PCB23) (power harness) by hand.
6. Replace the PSU (PCB23).
7. Replace the harness connecting the laser unit and BICU (PCB11) (laser
diode board harness).
8. Replace the harness connecting the BICU (PCB11) and RYB (PCB24).
9. Replace the harness connecting the RYB (PCB24) and PSU (PCB23).
SC300: Image Development 1
7.4 SC300: IMAGE DEVELOPMENT 1

SC300-00 D Charge corona output error
The feedback voltage from the charge corona unit is detected too high 9 times.
• Charge corona unit connection loose, broken, defective
• Charge corona power pack defective
• Inspect charge corona unit harness
• Replace charge corona power pack
SC305-00 D Charge corona wire cleaner error 1

• The charge cleaner pad did not arrive at the home position.
• Charge corona wire cleaner motor, motor driver defective
• Inspect motor harness
• Replace charge corona wire cleaner motor
SC306-00 C Charge corona wire cleaner error 2

Charge corona motor is not operating. The current at the charge corona motor
was detected less than 83 mA.
• Charge corona wire cleaner motor connector is defective or disconnected
• Motor defective
• Inspect motor harness
• Replace charge corona wire cleaner motor
SC307-00 D Charge grid circuit open

When high voltage went to the corona grid, feedback voltage was detected more
than the set value 9 times. This feedback voltage is used to update PWM for
output control.
• Charge corona harness defective
• Charge corona unit defective or disconnected
• Charge corona power pack is defective.
• Inspect charge corona harness
• Replace charge corona unit
SC320-01 D Development output abnormal

The high voltage applied to the development unit is detected 10 times higher than
the upper limit (45%) of PWM.

• Development bias leak due to poor connection, defective connector
• Development power pack (PCB3) defective
• Inspect development unit terminals for damage
6BTroubleshoo
• Replace development unit
ting
• Replace development unit power pack
SC324-01 D Development motor (M24) lock

The development motor (M24) lock signal remained high for 2 sec. while the
development motor (M24) was on.
• Drive mechanism overloaded due to toner clumping in the used toner path
• Motor drive board defective
• Inspect the toner supply unit coil.
• If the gear is not damaged, replace the coil.
• If the gear is damaged, replace the entire unit
• Replace development motor (M24)
SC360-01 D TD Sensor (S2) adjustment error: Adjustment output abnormal

During the TD Sensor (S2) auto adjustment, the TD Sensor (S2) output voltage
(Vt) is 0 volts. When this error occurs, the SC is displayed.
Note:
• This SC is released only after correct adjustment of the TD Sensor (S2) has
been achieved.
• Cycling the machine off/on will cancel the SC display, but does not release
ID sensor (S13) toner supply.
• When the TD Sensor (S2) is defective, the toner supply is controlled using
pixel count and the ID sensor (S13).
• TD harness, connector loose, broken, defective
• Toner bottle motor harness loose, broken, defective
• TD Sensor (S2) defective
• IOB (PCB1) defective
• Toner bottle motor (M1) defective
• Remove the development unit and inspect the TD sensor harness
• Inspect the toner bottle motor harness
• Replace TD sensor (S2)
• Replace toner bottle motor (M1)
• Replace IOB (PCB1)
SC360-11 D TD Sensor (S2) adjustment error: Timeout Error
During the TD Sensor (S2) auto adjustment, the TD Sensor (S2)output voltage
(Vt) does not enter the target range (3.0 ± 0.1V) within 20 s. When this error
occurs, the display of SP2-906-1 reads 0.00V.
Note:
• This SC is released only after correct adjustment of the TD Sensor (S2) has
been achieved.
• Cycling the machine off/on will cancel the SC display, but does not release
ID sensor (S13) toner supply.
• TD Sensor harness loose, broken, defective
• Remove development unit and inspect TD sensor harness
SC361-00 C TD Sensor (S2) output error: Upper Limit

When measuring TD Sensor (S2) output voltage (Vt) during each copy cycle;
• The output voltage is detected higher than 4V.
• If this error occurs 10 times consecutively, this SC is logged.
• TD Sensor harness loose, broken defective
Note: When the TD Sensor (S2) is defective, the toner supply is controlled
using pixel count and the ID sensor (S13).
• Remove the development unit and inspect the TD Sensor harness
SC362-00 C TD Sensor (S2) output error: Lower limit

When measuring TD Sensor (S2) output voltage (Vt) during each copy cycle;
• The output voltage is detected lower than 0.5V.
• If this error occurs 10 times consecutively, this SC is logged.
• TD Sensor harness loose, broken defective

Note: When the TD Sensor (S2) is defective, the toner supply is controlled
using pixel count and the ID sensor (S13).
6BTroubleshoo
• Remove the development unit and inspect the TD sensor harness
ting
SC370-01 C ID sensor (S13) adjustment error: LED output abnormal

One of the following ID sensor (S13) output voltages is detected at ID
sensor (S13) initialization.
• Vsg less than 4.0V when the maximum PWM input (255) is applied to the ID
sensor (S13).
• Vsg greater than or equal to 4.0V when the minimum PWM input (0) is
applied to the ID sensor (S13).
• ID sensor (S13) dirty (ID sensor (S13) pattern defective)
• ID sensor harness, connector loose, broken, defective
• ID sensor (S13) defective
• Remove the drum unit and inspect ID sensor harness
• Clean ID sensor (S13)
• Replace ID sensor (S13)
SC370-11 C ID sensor (S13) adjustment error: Timeout error

Vsg falls out of the adjustment target (4.0 ±0.2V) during Vsg checking within 20
sec.
SC375-00 C ID sensor (S13) error: Drum surface voltage error
The ID sensor (S13) output voltage is 5.0V and the PWM signal input to the ID
sensor (S13) is 0 when checking the ID sensor (S13) pattern.
• Charge power pack harness loose, broken defective
• Charge power pack (PCB6) defective
• Replace charge power pack (PCB6)
SC376-00 C ID sensor (S13) error: Pattern edge detection failed

For 2 s during the ID sensor (S13) pattern check, the ID sensor (S13) pattern
edge voltage is not 2.5V or the pattern edge is not detected within 800 ms.
• Charge power pack harness loose, broken defective
SC377-00 C ID sensor (S13) error: Potential surface reading error

The Vp value, which measures the reflectivity of the ID sensor (S13) pattern, was
not in the range of -70V to -400V.
• ID sensor (S13) dirty
• Potential sensor (S11) harness, connector loose, broken, defective
• Drum unit disconnected at the front
• Charge corona unit disconnected
• Potential sensor (S11) defective
• Charge corona wire dirty, broken

• Inspect potential sensor (S11) harness
• Inspect drum unit connection
• Inspect charge corona unit harness
6BTroubleshoo
• Replace potential sensor (S11)
ting
• Check, clean, replace charge corona unit
SC378-00 C ID sensor (S13) pattern error

One of the following ID sensor (S13) output voltages was detected twice
consecutively when checking the ID sensor (S13) pattern.
• Vsp greater than or equals 2.5V
• Vsg less than 2.5
• Vsp = 0V
• Vsg = 0
• ID sensor (S13) dirty (poor ID sensor (S13) pattern image, image density
incorrect)
• Charge power pack harness loose, broken, defective
• Remove drum unit, inspect clean ID sensor (S13)
• Inspect ID sensor harness
• Inspect charge power pack harness
SC380-51 C Potential sensor (S11) calibration (VL)

During drum potential sensor (S11) calibration, when VL was adjusted, the
pattern surface potential VL pattern was not within range 0V to -400V. (VL is the
potential after exposing a white pattern.)
• Drum unit connection harness loose, broken, defective
• Charge corona unit harness loose, broken, defective
• Development power pack harness loose, broken, defective
• Charge corona unit defective
• Development power pack (PCB3) defective

• Inspect drum unit connection
• Remove drum unit and inspect potential sensor (S11) harness
• Inspect charge corona harness
• Inspect development unit power pack harness
• Replace charge corona unit
• Replace development power pack (PCB3)
SC396-01 D Drum motor (M25) error

The drum motor (M25) lock signal remains low for 2 seconds while the main
motor is on.
• Drive mechanism overloaded
• Inspect the area around the motor and make sure no obstacles are blocking
operation of the motor
• Check the motor for loose or broken drive belts
• Replace drum motor (M25)
7.5 SC400: IMAGE DEVELOPMENT 2
6BTroubleshoo
SC410-00 C Quenching lamp error
ting
At the completion of auto process control initialization, the potential of the drum
surface detected by the potential sensor (S11) was more than -400V, the
prescribed value.
• Quenching lamp, connector loose, broken, defective
• Quenching lamp defective
• Remove the drum unit and inspect the quenching lamp harness and
connector
• Replace quenching lamp
SC411-01 C Charge potential: VD (1) adjustment error

The is SC code is logged by the machine if it detects either event below:
• Adjustment of VD (1) = VD default +/-20 V failed within the 5 prescribed
attempts.
• Adjustment of the drum surface potential for VD (1), achieved a result of VD
(1) for VG (1) with VD (1) > than VG (1).
The machine stops and the SC is logged without displaying the SC number. Also,
when SP3901 (Automatic Process Control On/Off) is set to "On", the problem is
detected only when control is enabled for the potential sensor (S11).
• Drum unit harness, connector loose, broken, defective
• Drum unit installed incorrectly
• Charge corona power pack harness loose, broken, defective
• Charge corona grid damaged, dirty
• Drum quenching lamp defective
• Check the drum harness, connector at the front of the machine
• Confirm that the drum unit is installed correctly
• Remove the drum unit and inspect the potential sensor (S11)
• Inspect the harnesses of the charge corona power pack
• Remove the charge corona unit and inspect the grid for damage, dirt, dust

• Replace drum quenching lamp
SC411-02 C Charge potential: VD (2) adjustment error

The is SC code is logged by the machine if it detects either event below:
• Adjustment of VD (2) failed within the 5 prescribed attempts.
• Adjustment of the drum surface potential for VD (2), achieved a result of VD
(2) for VG with VD (2) > than VG.
The machine stops and the SC is logged without displaying the SC number. Also,
when SP3901 (Automatic Process Control On/Off) is set to "On", the problem is
detected only when control is enabled for the potential sensor (S11).
• Drum unit harness, connector loose, broken, defective
• Drum unit installed incorrectly
• Charge corona power pack harness loose, broken, defective
• Charge corona grid damaged, dirty
• Drum quenching lamp defective
• Check the drum harness, connector at the front of the machine
• Confirm that the drum unit is installed correctly
• Remove the drum unit and inspect the potential sensor (S11)
• Inspect the harnesses of the charge corona power pack
• Remove the charge corona unit and inspect the grid for damage, dirt, dust
• Replace drum quenching lamp
SC440-01 D Transfer output abnormal (voltage leak detected)

When the transfer voltage was output, the feedback voltage remained higher
than 4V for 60 ms.
• Transfer current terminal, transfer power pack (PCB4) disconnected,
damaged connector
• Transfer power pack (PCB4) defective
• Remove the transfer unit
• Inspect the terminals at the front and rear
• Replace transfer power pack (PCB4)
SC440-02 D Transfer output abnormal release detection

When the transfer is output, there is hardly any feedback voltage within 60 ms
6BTroubleshoo
even with application of 24% PWM.
ting
• Transfer connector loose, defective
• Transfer unit harness disconnected
• Transfer power pack (PCB4) defective
• Remove transfer unit
• Inspect harnesses and connectors
• Replace transfer power pack (PCB4)
SC495-00 D Toner recycling unit error

Encoder pulse does not change for 3 s after the drum motor (M25) switched on.
• Waste toner transport has stopped due to drum motor (M25) overload
• Toner end sensor (S1) defective, disconnected
• Inspect the area around the drum motor (M25)
• Remove any obstacles that could interfere with motor operation
• Inspect the transport coils and check for clogging
• Remove the development unit and inspect the toner end sensor harness and
connector
• Replace toner end sensor (S1)
SC496-00 D Toner collection bottle error

The toner collection bottle set switch remained off when the front door is closed.
• No toner collection bottle is in the machine
• Toner collection bottle set switch harness loose, broken, defective
• Toner collection bottle set switch defective
• Confirm that there is a used toner collection bottle in the machine
• Inspect the harness of the toner collection bottle set switch
• Replace toner bottle collection set switch
SC500: Feed, Transport, Duplex, and Fusing
7.6 SC500: FEED, TRANSPORT, DUPLEX, AND FUSING

SC501-01 B 1st Tray Pick up Error
When the machine is turned on, the machine is returned from the sleep, or the
1st tray is set, the upper limit sensor fails to detect the upper limit 3 times
consecutively (sensor off) before the pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) is
turned on.
• Pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) abnormal, connector disconnected
• Upper limit sensor abnormal, connector disconnected
• Related harnesses broken
• IOB (PCB1) abnormal
1. Check if the 1st pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) is operating.
2. Check the connection of the connector of the 1st pick-up solenoid (SOL6,
SOL15, SOL17) and the condition of the pick-up release spring.
If the connector is disconnected, or it is not good condition, connect the
connector and replace the spring.
3. Replace the 1st pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17).
4. Replace the 1st feed unit harness.
5. Check the condition of harness connection between IOB (PCB1) and paper
feed unit.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it.
6. Replace the harness between IOB (PCB1) and paper feed unit.
7. Replace the IOB (PCB1).
8. Check if the connector of the harness of the upper limit sensor is connected.
9. Replace the upper limit sensor.
SC501-02 B 1st Tray Lift/lowering Error

When the 1st tray is lifted or lowered, an error is detected 3 times consecutively.
• Bottom plate caught
• Connector disconnected
• Upper limit sensor broken
• Pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) broken
• Lower limit sensor broken
• Tray lift motor broken
• Related harness broken
1. Check if the 1st tray bottom plate is operating.

2. Check if the connector of the harness related to upper limit determination is
connected.
(Upper limit sensor/Pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17))
6BTroubleshoo
If the connector is disconnected, reconnect it.
ting
3. Check the operation and condition of electrical components related to upper
limit determination.
(Upper limit sensor/Lower limit sensor/Pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15,
SOL17)/Tray lift motor)
If the component is not good, replace it.
4. Check the condition of harness components.
(Upper limit sensor/Lower limit sensor/Pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15,
SOL17))
SC501-03 B 1st Tray Lift Motor Overload Error

Wire overload is detected 3 times consecutively when the 1st tray is lifting
because the bottom plate is hooked on something.
• Bottom plate hooked on something
• Connector disconnected or broken
1. Check if the 1st tray bottom plate is operating.
2. Check if the connector of the harness related to lift operation is connected.
3. Check the operation and condition of electrical components related to lift
operation.
(Tray lift motor)
SC502-01 B 2nd Tray Pick up Error

2nd tray is set, the upper limit sensor fails to detect the upper limit 3 times
turned on.

• IOB(PCB1) abnormal
1. Check if the 2nd pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) is operating.
2. Check the connection of the connector of the 2nd pick-up solenoid (SOL6,
3. Replace the 2nd pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17).
4. Replace the 2nd feed unit harness.
feed unit.
SC502-02 B 2nd Tray Lift/lowering Error

When the 2nd tray is lifted or lowered, an error is detected 3 times consecutively.
• Pick-up Solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) broken
1. Check if the 2nd tray bottom plate is operating.
connected.
(Upper limit sensor/Pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17)/Tray lift motor)

SC503-01 B 3rd Tray Pick up Error
6BTroubleshoo
ting
3rd tray is set, the upper limit sensor fails to detect the upper limit 3 times
turned on.
1. Check if the 3rd pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) is operating.
2. Check the connection of the connector of the 3rd pick-up solenoid (SOL6,
3. Replace the 3rd pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17).
4. Replace the 3rd feed unit harness.
feed unit.
SC503-02 B 3rd Tray Lift/lowering Error

When the 3rd tray is lifted or lowered, an error is detected 3 times consecutively.
• Pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17) broken
1. Check if the 3rd tray bottom plate is operating.

connected.
(Upper limit sensor/Pick-up solenoid (SOL6, SOL15, SOL17)/Tray lift motor)
SC505-01 B LCIT error: Lift error

Before the pickup solenoid went ON at tray initialization, the machine failed to
detect the tray lift sensor (S30, S57, S61) OFF after 5 attempts.
• Pick-up solenoid harness connector loose, broken, defective
• Pickup solenoid defective
• Lift sensor harness connector loose, broken, defective
• Lift sensor (S30, S57, S61) defective
• LCIT main board defective
• Check pick-up solenoid harness, connector, and replace if damaged.
• Check lift sensor harness, connector, and replace if damaged.
• Replace pickup solenoid
• Replace lift sensor (S30, S57, S61)
• Replace LCIT main board
SC505-02 B LCIT error: Lift time-out error

At tray initialization the tray bottom plate was not detected at the up position
within the prescribed time (30 s).
• Lift motor harness connector loose, broken, defective
• Lift motor defective
• Inspect lift motor harness connector, and replace if damaged.
• Inspect lift sensor harness connector and replace if damaged.
• Replace lift sensor (S30, S57, S61)
• Replace lift motor

SC505-03 B LCIT error: Lower time-out error
6BTroubleshoo
At initialization, the bottom plate was lowered to check it at the down position, but
ting
the upper limit sensor was still ON after the prescribed 30 s, and the lower limit
sensor and four paper height sensors remained OFF.
-or-
At paper end, or after the down switch went ON, the machine lowered the bottom
plate, but the paper detect sensor or the lower limit sensor did not go ON within
the prescribed time (remained OFF for more than 30 s).
• Lift motor harness connector loose, broken, defective
• Paper sensor harness connector loose, broken, defective
• Lower limit sensor harness connector loose, broken, defective
• Paper height sensor harness connector loose, broken, defective
• Lift motor defective
• Paper sensor defective
• Lower limit sensor defective
• Paper height sensor defective
• Inspect lift motor harness, connector and replace if defective
• Inspect lift sensor harness, connector and replace if defective.
• Inspect paper sensor harness, connector and replace if defective.
• Inspect lower limit sensor harness, connector and replace if defective.
• Inspect paper height sensor harness, connector and replace if defective.
• Replace lift motor.
• Replace lift sensor (S30, S57, S61).
• Replace paper sensor.
• Replace lower limit sensor.
• Replace paper height sensor.
SC505-04 B LCIT error: Paper overload error

At initialization the machine detected both the lift sensor (S30, S57, S61) and
lower limit sensor ON.
• Paper tray overload
• Lift sensor harness, connector loose, broken, defective
• Lower limit sensor harness, connector loose, broken, defective

• Check the load limit mark on the paper tray.
• Inspect the lift sensor harness, connector loose, and replace if defective.
• Inspect the lower limit sensor harness, connector and replace if defective.
• Replace lift sensor (S30, S57, S61).
• Replace lower limit sensor.
SC515-00 C Duplex jogger motor (M6) error 1

When the jogger fence moves to the home position, the jogger HP sensor does
not turn on even if the jogger fence motor has moved the jogger fence 153.5 mm.
• Paper or other obstacle has jammed jogger fence mechanism
• Jogger HP sensor connector disconnected or defective
• Jogger HP sensor defective
• Inspect jogger fence mechanism for obstacles (paper scraps, etc.)
• Inspect jogger HP sensor connector, harness and replace if damaged.
• Replace jogger HP sensor.
SC516-00 C Duplex jogger motor (M6) error 2

When the jogger fence moves from the home position, the jogger fence HP
sensor does not turn off even if the jogger motor has moved the jogger fence
153.5 mm.
• Paper or other obstacle has jammed mechanism
• Jogger fence HP sensor connector disconnected or defective
• Jogger fence HP sensor defective
• Inspect jogger fence mechanism for obstacles (paper scraps, etc.)
• Inspect jogger HP sensor connector, harness and replace if damaged.
• Replace jogger HP sensor.
SC520-01 C Tray 1 paper feed motor (M16) error: Lock

An error was detected in the motor register (VODKA: Transport DCM) within 100
ms after the motor turned on, or the error was detected in the register 5
successive times, and the machine determined that the motor was not rotating
correctly.
Note: VODKA is a component of the IOB (PCB1).
• Motor harness, connector loose, broken, defective
• Motor torque too high, due to blockage, obstacle

• Motor defective
• Inspect motor harness, connector, and replace if damaged.
6BTroubleshoo
• Inspect motor and area around the motor for obstacles.
ting
• Replace Tray 1 paper feed motor (M16)
• Replace IOB (PCB1).
SC520-02 Tray2 paper feed motor (M15)error: Lock

ms after the motor turned on, or the error was detected in the register 5 successive
times, and the machine determined that the motor was not rotating correctly.
• Motor defective
SC520-03 C Tray 3 paper feed motor (M14) error: Lock

correctly.
• Motor defective
SC520-04 C Tray 4 paper feed motor (M13) error: Lock Japan Only
correctly.
• Motor defective
SC521-01 C Main relay motor lock error

correctly.
• Motor defective
• Replace main relay motor
SC521-02 C Registration motor (M2) lock error

correctly.
• Motor defective

• Replace registration motor (M2)
6BTroubleshoo
SC522-01 C Invert duplex motor lock error
ting
correctly.
• Motor defective
• Replace invert duplex motor
SC522-02 C Duplex transport motor (M8) lock error

correctly.
• Motor defective
• Replace duplex transport motor (M8)
SC530-01 D Drum fan (FAN11) error

After the fan turns on, the fan lock signal is checked at 1 sec. intervals.
• Due to an obstruction or other problem, the lock signal went HIGH 1.5 s after
the fan turned on and remained HIGH for 6 consecutive counts.
• The lock signal should remain LOW during normal operation.
• The fan stopped and then the machine stopped.

• Fan motor overload due to an obstruction.
• Fan motor connector, harness loose, broken, defective.
• Fan motor defective.
• Inspect the area around the fan for obstructions that could interfere with the
rotation of the fan blades.
• Inspect harness, connector and replace if damaged.
• Replace the drum fan (FAN11).
SC530-02 D Development unit fan 1 (FAN12) error

• Replace development unit fan 1 (FAN12).
SC530-03 D Development unit fan 2 (FAN13) error

• Replace development unit fan 2 (FAN13).
SC530-04 D Duplex fan (FAN1) error

6BTroubleshoo
ting
• Replace duplex fan (FAN1).
SC530-05 D PCU fan (FAN7) error

• Replace the PCU fan (FAN7).
SC530-06 D Toner bottle fan (FAN6) error

• Replace the toner bottle fan (FAN6).
SC530-07 D Fusing exit fan (FAN14) error

• Replace the fusing exit fan (FAN14).
SC530-08 D PSU fan 1 (FAN4) error

• Replace PSU fan 1 (FAN4).
SC530-09 D PSU fan 2 (FAN5) error


• Replace PSU fan 2 (FAN5).
6BTroubleshoo
SC530-10 D AC drive board fan
ting
• Replace the AC drive board fan.
SC530-11 D Controller fan 2 (top: exhaust)

• Replace controller fan 2.
SC530-12 B Capacitor fan error Japan Only


• Replace the capacitor fan.
SC530-13 B PFU fan 1 (FAN15) error Japan Only

• Replace PFU fan 1 (FAN15).
• Reconnect the connectors of IOB (PCB1) (Check if connectors are
disconnected.)
• Replace the IOB (PCB1).
SC530-14 B Paper feed unit fan 2 error Japan Only

• Replace PFU fan 2.
disconnected.)

6BTroubleshoo
ting
disconnected.)

Note: The machines of this series have four trays in Japan, and machines in
areas outside Japan have three trays. Tray 1 is a tandem tray, but Tray 1 in
Japan is smaller.
disconnected.)
SC530-17 B PFU fan 1 (FAN15) error

After the fan turns on, the fan lock signal is checked at 1 sec.intervals.
SC530-18 B Paper feed unit fan 3 error

After the fan turns on, the fan lock signal is checked at 1 sec.
intervals.
SC530-19 B Paper feed unit fan 4 error

Note: The machines of this series have four trays in Japan,
and machines in areas outside Japan have three trays. Tray 1 is a tandem tray,
but Tray 1 in Japan is smaller.
After the fan turns on, the fan lock signal is checked at 1 sec.intervals.

6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC531-01 D Main intake fan (FAN10)

• Replace the main intake fan (FAN10).
SC531-02 D Main exhaust fan (FAN9)

• Replace the main exhaust fan (FAN9).
SC531-03 D Heat exhaust fan (FAN8) error


• Replace the heat exhaust fan (FAN8).
SC540-01 D Fusing web motor error 1

The amount of current detected during operation of the web motor exceeded 350
mA in 5 successive samples.
• Web motor (M9) connection loose, broken, defective
• Web motor (M9) disconnected
• Inspect harness connection at CN252 on the IOB (PCB1)
• Inspect web motor connector, harness, and replace if damaged.
• Inspect paper exit harnesses from the point where web motor (M9) connects
under the fusing unit.
• Replace web motor (M9)
SC540-02 D Fusing web motor error

Web motor operation electric current value
• 350 mA or more detection electric current is detected 10 times or more
during web operation.
• Web motor (M9) locked
• Web motor (M9) shorted
• Cable and connector disconnected
Refer to Trouble shooting: SC540-02, -03 (SC540 Fusing web motor error_1)
SC540-03 A Fusing web motor error 2

SC540-02 has occurred three times and the machine has shut down
automatically due to failure of the web motor (M9).
• Web motor harness loose, broken, defective
• Web motor (M9) defective
• Inspect harness connection

• Replace motor
6BTroubleshoo
SC540-04 A Fusing web motor error 3
ting
SC540-02 has occurred at total of 10 times and the machine has shut down
automatically due to failure of the web motor (M9).
• Web motor harness loose, broken, defective
• Web motor (M9) defective
• Inspect harness connection
• Replace motor
SC541-00 A Fusing center thermistor error

The fusing temperature detected by the center NC sensor (thermistor) was below
0°C for 17 seconds.
• Thermistor connector defective
• Thermistor damaged, or out of position
• Pull fusing unit out of machine.
• At the front of the fusing unit, inspect the connection of the NC thermistor.
• Inspect the installation of the NC thermistor and confirm that it is not out of
position.
• Replace NC thermistor.
SC542-01 A Fusing temperature warm-up error 1: Center thermistor

The center NC sensor (thermistor) above the hot roller determined that the hot
roller failed to reach the warm-up temperature within the prescribed time.
• Fusing lamp disconnected
• Center thermistor out of position
• Pull the fusing unit out of the machine.
• Inspect the fusing lamp connections at front and rear.
• Inspect center NC sensor and confirm that it is installed correctly.

roller failed to reach the 100°C within the prescribed time.


roller failed to reach the reload temperature within the prescribed time.
SC543-00 A Fusing lamp overheat error 1 (software)

The center thermistor (NC sensor) detected a temperature of 250°C at the center
of the hot roller. Fusing temperature control software error
• PSU (PCB23) defective
• Replace PSU (PCB23)
• Replace BICU (PCB11)
SC544-00 A Fusing lamp overheat error 1: Hardware

The center thermistor (NC sensor) or an end thermistor detected a temperature
of 235°C on the hot roller.
• BICU defective
SC545-00 A Fusing lamp overheat error 2: Center lamp

• IM 7000/IM 8000
After the hot roller reached warm-up temperature, the fusing lamps (H6, H7,
H9) remained on at full capacity for 11 samplings (1.8 s. duration) while the
hot roller was not rotating.
• IM 9000
After the hot roller reached warm-up temperature, the fusing lamps (H6, H7)
turned on for more than 10 seconds but the temperature did not reach the
target temperature.
• Thermistor damaged, or out of position
6BTroubleshoo
ting
• Inspect all thermistor connections, harnesses.
• Inspect fusing lamp connections, harnesses.
SC547-01 D Zero cross signal error 1: Fusing relay

At power on and with the fusing relay off, 3 samplings detected that the zero
cross was not normal.
• Fusing relay short
• Fusing relay drive circuit defective
• Cycle the machine off/on.
• If the problem persists, check the harnesses and connections between the
AC drive board and the IOB (PCB1).
• Replace damaged harnesses, connectors
• Replace AC drive board.
SC547-02 D Zero cross signal error 2: Fusing relay

No zero cross signal was detected within 3 sec. after power on or after closing
the front door.
• Fusing relay short
• Fusing relay drive circuit defective
• If the problem persists, check the harnesses and connections between the
AC drive board and the IOB (PCB1).
• Replace damaged harnesses, connectors
• Inspect and replace PSU (PCB23) fuses (24VS).
SC547-03 D Zero cross signal error 2: Unstable power supply

After 11 samplings the power supply was not within 50 to 60 Hz, indicating that
the power supply is not stable.
• Power supply unstable.
• First, cycle the machine off/on.
• Consult with power supply company to confirm that the power supply is
stable.
• Check harnesses, connections between the AC drive board and the IOB
(PCB1).
SC551-00 A Fusing thermistor (TH2) error 1: End thermistor

• IM 7000/IM 8000
The end thermistor (contact type) was less than 0°C (32F) for more than 23
seconds.
• IM 9000
The end thermistor (contact type) was less than 0°C (32F) for more than 17
seconds.
• Thermistor connector loose, broken, defective
• Thermistor incorrectly installed or loose, and floating out of position.
• Pull the fusing unit out.
• Inspect all thermistor harnesses, connectors
• Confirm that thermistors are installed correctly.
SC552-01 A Fusing reload temperature error 1: End thermistor

• IM 7000/IM 8000
It is detected 5 times consecutively that the range of temperature rise for (t2)
seconds is less than (T2) degrees.
(When measure start temperature is below 90 degrees, the measure starts
at 100 degrees. When measure start temperature is 90 degrees or higher,
release is done. Detection interval: 100 ms)
t2: Rapid return= 1 second, Except Rapid return= 5 seconds
T2: Rapid return=3 degrees, Except Rapid return= 7 degrees
The machine operation is stopped and SC is displayed.
• IM 9000/IM 9000T
It is detected five times consecutively that the range of temperature rise for 3
seconds is less than 1 degree.
• End thermistor connector loose, broken, defective
• End thermistor out of position, installed incorrectly
• Thermostat open
• Pull out the fusing unit.
• Inspect the fusing lamp harnesses, connections.
• Check end thermistor harnesses, connector

• Inspect end thermistor and make sure that it is installed correctly and not
floating free.
• Replace thermostats.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
• IM 7000/IM 8000
The hot roller did not reach 100°C within the prescribed time.
• IM 9000
The hot roller did not reach 100°C within the prescribed time (31 seconds).
• Thermistor out of position, installed incorrectly
• Thermostat open
floating free.

• IM 7000/IM 8000
The hot roller did not reach the prescribed temperature within 3 sec, after the
start of the fusing temperature control cycle.
• IM 9000
The hot roller did not reach the prescribed temperature within 120 sec, after
the start of the fusing temperature control cycle.
• Thermistor out of position, installed incorrectly
• Thermostat open
floating free.
SC553-00 A Fusing thermistor (TH2) error 4: End thermistor (software)

The end thermistor (contact type) was at 225°C for more than 1 second.
• IOB (PCB1) control board defective
• BICU (PCB11) control board defective
SC555-00 A Fusing lamp error

• IM 7000/IM 8000
After the start of the warmup cycle, a fusing lamp was at full power for 1.8 s
but the hot roller did not turn.
• IM 9000
After the start of the warmup cycle, the machine determined that a fusing
lamp was at full power for 18 seconds without the hot roller rotating but the
temperature did not reach the target temperature.
• Thermistor bent, out of position
• Pull out fusing unit.
• Inspect thermistor harnesses, connectors
• Inspect fusing lamp harnesses, connectors
• Inspect thermistors and make sure they are installed correctly and not
floating free.
SC557-00 C Zero cross signal error

High frequency noise was detected on the power line.
The SC code is logged and the operation of the machine is not affected.
• No action required.
SC559-00 A Fusing jam: 3 counts

At the fusing exit sensor (S66) the paper was detected late for three pulse counts
(lag error), and SP1159 was on.
• If this SC occurs, the machine cannot be used until the service technician
cancels the SC code.
• This SC occurs only if SP1159 has been set to "1" (On). (Default: 0 (Off)).
• Enter the SP mode
SC569-00 D Fusing pressure release motor (M27) error

During copying, the HP sensor could not detect the actuator, tried again 3 times
and could not detect.
• Motor lock due to overload
6BTroubleshoo
ting
• HP sensor defective, disconnected, connector defective, harness damaged
• Inspect the area around the pressure motor for obstacles that could interfere
with the motor.
• Inspect pressure release sensor harness, connector, and replace if
damaged.
• Replace pressure release sensor.
• Replace motor.
SC570-00 B Capacitor discharge error 1 Japan Only

An error code was output from the capacitor control board (CAPCNT). At
discharge the capacitor unit could not boost:
• After the capacitor discharged the charge/discharge device issued an error
code to signal that an error had occurred.
• When the error was issued, a message appeared on the operation panel
display: "V Parts Maintenance Required".
• The capacitor unit ceased charging and discharging.
• The machine set charge/discharge control to the OFF state, but the machine
can continue operations that do not use the capacitor.
• Capacitor control board (CAPCNT) damaged
• Charge/discharge device damaged
• Cycle the machine off/on twice.
• If the problem persists, replace the capacitor control board (CAPCNT)
• Replace the capacitor unit V Parts.
• The original charge output data done before shipping must also be restored.

An error code was output from the capacitor control board (CAPCNT). When
discharge was halted, the discharge from the capacitor unit did not stop:

An error code was output from the capacitor control board (CAPCNT). When
discharge started, the capacitor unit could not discharge:
• Discharge FED damaged
• Discharge device harness loose, broken, defective
• Connector loose
• DC heater disconnected
SC573-00 B Discharge device error Japan Only

An error code was output from the capacitor control board (CAPCNT). At charge
the capacitor unit could not charge:
• While the capacitor boosted with an abnormal voltage when it started to
charge, or the machine detected that the capacitor voltage did not rise and
signaled an error.
• Charge device harness loose, broken, defective
• Connector loose, damaged
6BTroubleshoo
ting
• There was a drop in the power supply voltage (lower than AC78V).
SC574-00 B Capacitor deterioration error Japan Only

The capacity of the capacitor has dropped and the machine has entered CPM
down mode:
• The capacity of the capacitor calculated by CAPCNT from the result of a
measurement at the start of charging was determined to be below standard,
and the error was issued because the number exceeded the specification for
CPM down.
• Normal operation continues without shutting down the capacitor or the
engine.
• Capacity is too low due to deterioration of the capacitor
• Replace the capacitor control board (CAPCNT)
SC575-00 B Capacitor unit installation error Japan Only

The machine was not able to detect that the capacitor unit was set.
• IOB-CAPCNT harness loose, broken, defective
• Capacitor unit damaged, not installed correctly

• Confirm that the capacitor unit is installed correctly.
• If the problem persists, first check IOB-CAPCNT harness and replace if
damaged
• Replace the capacitor control board (CAPCNT)
SC577-00 B Capacitor unit front door detection error

• Front door open/close detected by capacitor control board (CAPCNT)
conflicted with the front door open/close detected by the IOB (PCB1) by five
seconds.
the connector (CN512) of the capacitor control board (CAPCNT), the IOB
connector (CN276), the relay connector of IOB-CAPCNT harness
disconnected
• Capacitor control board (CAPCNT) defective
• IOB controller board defective
• Harness between capacitor control board (CAPCNT) and relay connector
(capacitor unit) defective
• Harness between the IOB (PCB1) and relay connector (main harness)
defective
1. Reconnect the connector (CN512) of the capacitor control board
(CAPCNT), the IOB connector (CN276), the relay connector of
IOB-CAPCNT harness, and then turn the main power on to check if the SC
occurs.
2. Replace the capacitor control board (CAPCNT).
4. Replace the harness between the capacitor control board (CAPCNT) and
relay connector (capacitor unit).
5. Replace the harness between the capacitor control board (CAPCNT) and
IOB (main harness).
SC581-00 D Power cord not connected properly.

According to the control specification for this machine "Power Cord Connection
Detection (DOM 90 cpm)", a message on the operation panel (not an SC code)
alerts the operator that the power cord is disconnected.
This message display is: "Power cord disconnected. Turn machine off, and then
connect power cord to power source."

The following fusing unit SC codes are provided, listed here in order of
importance:
• High temperature: SC543, SC544, SC553
6BTroubleshoo
• Thermistor SC codes: SC541, SC551
ting
• Fusing lamp on alert SC codes (reload temperature failure): SC542, SC552,
SC545, SC555
Note the following:
• If the power cord is not detected as disconnected, a reload temperature
failure SC code is issued.
• If the power cord is detected disconnected, then the power cord connection
failure takes priority.
• In this case, the reload temperature failure SC (fusing lamp on SC) SC flag is
cleared.
• Power cord on the fusing unit side is disconnected.
• Turn the machine OFF.
• Connect the power cord to the power source.
• Turn the machine ON.
SC585-00 C Temperature sensor error

Machine issues this SC code after 3 consecutive abnormal temperature
readings.
• Temperature reading below –10°C
• Temperature reading above 100°C
• Temperature sensor harness connector loose, broken, defective
• Thermistor damaged
• Inspect temperature sensor harness, connector.
• Reset the temperature sensor
• Replace temperature sensor.
SC590-00 D Toner collection motor error

The toner collection motor sensor output does not change for 3 s while the toner
collection motor is on.
• Vertical drive shaft missing, not installed correctly.
• Motor lock due to obstruction
• Toner collection motor sensor harness, connector loose, broken, defective.
• Toner collection motor sensor defective
• Motor defective
• Make sure that the vertical drive shaft is installed, and installed correctly at
the bottom end of the shaft where it connects to the motor.
• Check the area around the motor for obstacles that could interfere with
motor operation.
• Inspect the motor harness, connector and replace if damaged.
• Inspect toner collection motor sensor harness, connector and replace if
damaged.
• Replace toner collection motor sensor.
• Replace toner collection motor.
SC600: Data Communication
7.7 SC600: DATA COMMUNICATION
6BTroubleshoo
SC620-01 D ADF communication error 1
ting
There was a communication error between the main machine and the ADF
connected via the ASAP. The break was detected after normal connection.
• Poor ADF connection
• Electrical noise on the power line
1. Connectors connected to BICU (PCB11) and ADF controller board (PCB29)
are connected correctly.
If the connectors are not connected correctly, reconnect them.
2. Check if noise or software bug occurs.
3. Replace harnesses.
4. Replace the engine board.
5. Replace the ADF controller board (PCB29).

There was a communication error between the main machine and the ADF
connected via ASAP.
(A retry was triggered by the communication error after normal connection, or the
SC was issued when connection of an incompatible ADF was detected (the ADF
cord specifications did not match).)
• Poor ADF connection at BICU (PCB11)
• Incompatible ADF connection (ADF cable specifications do not match)
1. Confirm that the ADF is the correct device for the machine.
2. Replace ADF with compatible ADF
3. If ADF communication is not recovered, perform SC620-01.

No signal received within the time prescribed for receipt of the CIS (PCB10)
initialization end command.
• Poor ADF connection at BICU (PCB11)

2. If ADF communication is not recovered, perform SC620-01.

A signal condition leading to an error was detected while double feed detection is
operating.
• Harness broken
• Double feed detection error (output error)
• Controller board (PCB18) error
2. Check if noise or software bug occurs.
3. Replace harnesses.
4. Replace the engine board.
5. Replace the ADF controller board (PCB29).
SC621-01 D BICU (PCB11) > Finisher communication error: Break error

During communication with the finisher MBX, the BICU (PCB11) received a break
(LOW) signal from the finisher.
• I/F cable connection to main machine or upstream finisher and loose,
broken, defective
• Breaker switch defective
• Power cord loose, broken, defective
• Peripheral unit control board defective
• Inspect I/F cable connections of finishers to the main machine or to
upstream unit.
• If the peripheral unit has a breaker switch, test it.
• Check power cord of peripheral unit if it has separate power cord.
• Replace peripheral unit control board.
SC621-02 D BICU (PCB11)> Finisher communication error: Timeout error

During communication between the finisher MBX and the BICU (PCB11), no ACK
signal was detected for 100 ms after three attempts.

• Serial line level unstable, external noise on the line
• I/F cable connection to main machine or upstream finisher and loose,
broken, defective
6BTroubleshoo
• Breaker switch defective
ting
• Power cord loose, broken, defective
• Peripheral unit control board defective
• Determine if there is electrical noise on the power line or around the
machine.
• Inspect I/F cable connections of finishers to the main machine or to
upstream unit.
• If the peripheral unit has a breaker switch, test it.
• Check power cord of peripheral unit if it has separate power cord.
• Replace peripheral unit control board.
SC626-01 D BICU (PCB11), LCIT communication error: Break reception error

During communication with the LCIT, the BICU (PCB11) received a break (Low)
signal.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
• LCIT connection to main machine loose, broken, defective
• LCIT control board defective
machine.
• Check I/F cable connection of the LCIT on the right side of the main
machine.
• Inspect the cable connector for damage.
• Make sure the connector is locked and connected.
• Replace LCIT control board.
• Replace BICU (PCB11).
SC626-02 D BICU (PCB11), LCIT communication error: Timeout error

After 1 data frame is sent to the LCIT, an ACK signal is not received within 100
ms, and is not received after 3 retries.
• Serial line connection unstable
• External noise on the line
• LCIT connection to main machine loose, broken, defective

• LCIT control board defective
machine.
• Check I/F cable connection of the LCIT on the right side of the main
machine.
• Inspect the cable connector for damage.
• Make sure the connector is locked and connected.
• Replace LCIT control board.
SC628-01 B IOB-CAPCNT communication break error Japan Only

When the error was issued, a message appeared on the operation panel display:
"V Parts Maintenance Required". The capacitor unit ceased charging and
discharging.
• A break (LOW signal) did not release at startup, or a break (LOW signal) was
received while the communication circuit was connected to CAPCNT.
• The serial line is unstable
• External electrical noise on power line or around the machine.
• Electrical short in the IOB-CAPCNT harness
• If the problem persists, inspect the IOB-CAPCNT harness, connectors, and
replace if damaged.
• Replace the capacitor control board (CAPCNT).
SC628-02 B IOB-CAPCNT communication timeout error Japan Only

There was no ACK returned within 100 ms after one frame of data was sent to
CAPCNT.
• The serial line is unstable
• External electrical noise on power line or around the machine.
• Electrical short in the IOB-CAPCNT harness
• If the problem persists, inspect the IOB-CAPCNT harness, connectors, and
replace if damaged.
• Replace the capacitor control board (CAPCNT).
SC663-00 D IOB (PCB1) reset detection error

Unexpected Reset from IOB (PCB1) was detected while the machine was waiting
6BTroubleshoo
or operating.
ting
• Burst of noise inside the machine is mixed into IOB (PCB1).
• IOB (PCB1) parts defective, not implemented correctly
• WDT reset of IOB (PCB1) occurred.
1. Turn the machine off /on.
SC664-01 D VODKA 1 SRAM access permission error (no write permission)

SC664-02 D VODKA 1 SRAM write error (write result abnormal)
SC664-03 D VODKA 1 program start error
When the machine was turned on, or recovered from the Energy Save mode,
there was an error detected in the connection signal between VODKA (resides on
IOB) and SRAM.
• IOB (PCB1), BICU (PCB11) harness, connectors loose, broken, defective.
1. Cycle the main power switch off/on.
2. Replace BICU (PCB11).
3. Replace IOB (PCB1).
SC665-04 D IOB (PCB1) failure to start error

There was a problem with the IOB_WAKE signal:
• The IOB_WAKE signal was detected abnormal when out of the WAKE
status. This occurred when the three VODKA modules on the IOB were
reset.
• There were IOB_WAKE signals detected from the 3 VODKA modules on the
IOB, but there were not released from WAKE status.
• IOB_WAKE status will not be released if the machine detects an IOB_WAKE
signal from even one of the three VODKA modules on the IOB.
• BICU (PCB11)-IOB harnesses, connectors, loose, broken, defective

• PSU (PCB23) 5V not output
• IOB (PCB1) damaged
• RYB (PCB24) damaged
• BICU (PCB11) damaged
• Inspect BICU (PCB11)-IOB harnesses, connectors and replace if damaged.
• Replace PSU (PCB23).
• Replace RYB (PCB24).
SC669-01 D ID Error at NVRAM OPEN

SC669-02 D Channel Error at NVRAM OPEN
SC669-03 D Device Error at NVRAM OPEN
SC669-04 D Communication interrupt error at NVRAM OPEN
SC669-05 D Communication timeout error at NVRAM OPEN
SC669-06 D Operation interrupt error at NVRAM OPEN
SC669-07 D Buffer Full Error at NVRAM OPEN
SC669-08 D No error code at NVRAM OPEN
SC669-09 D ID error at NVRAM CLOSE
SC669-10 D No error code at NVRAM CLOSE
SC669-11 D ID Error When Writing Data to NVRAM
SC669-12 D Channel error when writing data to NVRAM
SC669-13 D Device error when writing data to NVRAM
SC669-14 D Communication interrupt error when writing data to NVRAM
SC669-15 D Communication timeout error when writing data to NVRAM
SC669-16 D Operation interrupt error when writing data to NVRAM
SC669-17 D Buffer full error when writing data to NVRAM
SC669-18 D No error code when writing data to NVRAM
SC669-19 D ID error when reading data from NVRAM
SC669-20 D Channel error when reading data from NVRAM
SC669-21 D Device error when reading data from NVRAM
SC669-22 D Communication error when reading data from NVRAM
SC669-23 D Communication timeout error when reading data from NVRAM
SC669-24 D Operation error when reading data from NVRAM
SC669-25 D Buffer full error when reading data from NVRAM
SC669-26 D No error code when reading data from NVRAM
SC669-27 D ID error at NVRAM device detection
SC669-28 D Channel error at NVRAM device detection

SC669-29 D Device error at NVRAM device detection
SC669-30 D Communication interrupt error at NVRAM device detection
SC669-31 D Communication timeout error at NVRAM device detection
6BTroubleshoo
SC669-32 D Operation interrupt error at NVRAM device detection
ting
SC669-33 D Buffer full error at NVRAM device detection
SC669-34 D No error code at NVRAM device detection
SC669-36 D Verification error at SRAM expansion at NVRAM
SC669-37 D Malfunction detection error at NVRAM
An error is detected by CPU of the BICU (PCB11) during communication with the
EEPROM on the SMB (PCB22).
• SMB (PCB22) connection defective
• SMB (EEPROM) (PCB22) parts defective
1. Remove SMB from BICU (PCB11), and then reinstall it.
If connector pins are bent or not inserted correctly (opposite insertion), SMB
(EEPROM) (PCB22) may be defective.
2. Replace SMB (PCB22).
3. Replace BICU (PCB11).
7.7.2 SC600 (CONTROLLER)

SC632-00 D Counter device error 1
After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the
serial communication line, no signal was received within 100 ms.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier
control board is disconnected or damaged.
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Check the serial communication line.

After communication was established, the controller received the brake signal
from the accounting device.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier
control board is disconnected or damaged.
• Check the serial communication line.

A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.
Counter device control board or the backup battery of counter device
defective
• Replace the counter device control board.
• Replace the backup battery.

A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.
Counter device control board or the backup battery of counter device
defective
• Replace the counter device control board.
• Replace the backup battery.

SC636-01 D IC card error (Expanded authentication module error)
Issued when expanded authentication management is set to "ON" but either
of the following occur.
• There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.
• The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken.
• There is no DESS module in the machine.
• There is no DESS module in the machine (models on which the function
is optional).
• There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.
• The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken.
• Set a working SD card/expanded authentication module file.
• Install the DESS module.
• In the SSP mode set SP5-401-160 to 0.
• In the SSP mode, set SP5-401-161 to 0.
• Replace the NVRAM.

SC637-01 D Tracking information notification error (Tracking application error)
Tracking information was lost.
• Tracking SDK application error
• Internal notification error
Turn the main power off/on.

SC637-02 D Tracking information notification error (Management server error)
Tracking information was lost.
6BTroubleshoo
Communication with tracking management server failed.
ting
• Network error
• Tracking management server error
• Tracking SDK application error
Turn the main power off/on.

SC641-00 D Communication error between BICU (PCB11) and controller board (PCB18) .
Controller board (PCB18) does not respond after BICU (PCB11) tries to
communicate three times.
• Controller board (PCB18) software error
• Connect error between BICU (PCB11) and Controller board (PCB18)
• Engine board software error
• Check connections between Controller board (PCB18) and BICU
(PCB11).
• Turn the main switch off and on.

SC650-01 C Remote service modem communication error (dialup authentication failure)
• An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board
etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that prevents
RC Gate operation was detected at power on.
• Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is operating.
• SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because
it can be referenced using SP).
Dialup authentication failure
Check the following SPs.
• SP5-816-156
• SP5-816-157

SC650-04 C Remote service modem communication error (dialup failing because of
incorrect modem configuration)

Dialup failing because of incorrect modem configuration
Check if the setting of SP5-816-160 is correct.
If it is correct, then there is a software bug.

SC650-05 C Remote service modem communication error (insufficient current or
connection fault)
Insufficient current or connection fault
The line is not supported and nothing can be done.

SC650-13 C Remote service modem communication error (RC Gate Type M was installed
but modem is not present (detected during operation))
RC Gate Type M was installed but modem is not present (detected during
operation)
• If a modem board is not installed, install it.
• Check again if the modem driver configurations (SP5-816-160,
SP5-816-165 to 171) are correct.
• If the problem is not solved, replace the modem.

SC650-14 C Remote service modem communication error (RC Gate Type N was installed

but modem is present or wired/wireless LAN is not working correctly)
etc.) using the RC Gate was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate
6BTroubleshoo
operation was detected at power on.
ting
RC Gate Type N was installed but modem is present or wired/wireless LAN is
not working correctly
• If a modem board is attached, remove it.
• Check if wired/wireless LAN works.

SC651-01 C Illegal remote service dial-up (chat program parameter error)
An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate Type M dialed up the NRS
Center.
Software bug
Logging only.

SC651-02 C Illegal remote service dial-up (Chat program execution error)
An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate dialed up the NRS Center.
Software bug
Logging only.

SC652-00 A Remote service ID2 mismatching
There was an authentication mismatch between ID2 for @Remote, the
controller board (PCB18), and NVRAM.
• Used controller board (PCB18) installed
• Used NVRAM installed (such action is not allowed.)
• If this occurs during RC Gate installation:
Check the validity of the certificate and the NVRAM, check the machine
serial number, write the common certificate, and then begin installation
again.
• If this occurs after RC Gate installation:
Clear the RC Gate install status, check the validity of the certificate and
the NVRAM, check the machine serial number, write the common

certificate, and then begin installation again.

SC653-00 A Incorrect remote service ID2
ID2 stored in the NVRAM has either of the following problems.
• Number of characters is not 17.
• Includes a character that cannot be printed.
• All spaces
• NULL
Replace the NVRAM.
Clear the RC Gate install status, write the common certificate, and then begin
installation again.

SC670-01 D Engine start up error when the machine boots up
• /ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on.
• /IPURDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on or
returned from energy saver mode.
• EC/PC/SC response was not received within specified time from power
on.
• Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found through PCI).
• Connection defect between controller board (PCB18) and BICU
(PCB11).
• BICU (PCB11) is down / unstable
• Replace the BICU (PCB11).
• Replace the PSU (PCB23).
• Replace the controller board (PCB18).

SC670-02 D Engine start up error when the machine is in operation
• CPU reset by software
• CPU reset by anomaly CPU
• CPU reset by hardware defect / noise
• Hardware defect
Engine board reset unexpectedly.

• Ask the customer to demonstrate the procedure that was used when the
SC occurred. Try the same steps 10 times to check if the SC occurs
more than one time.
6BTroubleshoo
• Software bug. Update the firmware.
ting
• Check the connection of the engine board and the controller board
(PCB18).

SC670-03 D BICU (PCB11) start up error when the machine boots up
VDET_EPCI signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on.
• BICU (PCB11), PSU (PCB23), and/or controller board (PCB18) defective
• Incorrect connection between controller board (PCB18) and BICU
(PCB11)
• Harness of BICU (PCB11) disconnected
• Turn the main power off/on 10 times, and check if the SC occurs more
than one time.
(PCB18).
• Disconnect/connect the harness between the engine board and the
controller board (PCB18).

SC670-04 D Communication error between the engine and controller
Communication could not linked up.
• BICU (PCB11) and/or controller board (PCB18) defective
• Incorrect connection between controller board (PCB18) and BICU
(PCB11)
• Turn the main power off/on 10 times, and check if the SC occurs more
than one time.
(PCB18).
• Disconnect/connect the harness between the engine board and the

SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC670-05 C Link up error
If failing to link up by the 4th lane, the specified communication channel (and
instead linking up by the 1st or 2nd lane) at the PCIe I/F connection between
the controller and BiCU when the machine starts or returns from the energy
saver mode.
• CTL board defective
• Incorrect connection between CTL and BICU (PCB11).
Logging only.

SC672-00 D Controller start up error
After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller
and the operation panel was not established, or communication with
controller was interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late
• Check the connection of the controller board (PCB18).
• Check the operation panel harness.

SC673-01 D Operation panel system application not responding (Smart Operation Panel)
This occurs only when the Smart Operation Panel is mounted.
The Smart Operation Panel system application (MonitorService)
malfunctioned.
SC logging cannot be performed because the detection is performed by the
operation panel.
The Smart Operation Panel system application (MonitorService) ended

abnormally.
Press the Reboot button on the SC screen and then turn the main power OFF
and then ON.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC673-10 D Operation panel Flair communication error (Smart Operation Panel)
This occurs only when the Smart Operation Panel is mounted.
Communication between the operation panel and main machine (Flair
communication) is not sent.
SP setting (SP5-748-201) for Smart Operation Panel is not enabled.
The controller cannot notify a response to a notification from the monitoring
service module (operation panel).
• Turn the main power OFF and then ON.
• Set SP5-748-201 (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting) to
"1: Connect" if the value is "0: Not connect".
• Replace the controller or the engine board.
SC700: Peripherals
7.8 SC700: PERIPHERALS
7.8.1 SC700 TO 703: ADF

To recover from the error, check if the SC occurs (feed paper, open/close the doors, Input or
Output check). If the SC occurs again, do the follow steps. After each step, turn the power OFF
then ON to check if the SC occurs again.
SC700-01 D ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32) error (1-Pass ADF)
The bottom plate HP sensor (S72) does not detect the home position of the
bottom plate after the ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32) switches on and
lowers the bottom plate. Or, the bottom plate HP sensor (S72) does not
detect the position of the plate after the ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32)
switches on and raises the bottom plate.
Details:
The ADF notifies the main machine of the error. The first two occurrences are
displayed as jams.
• Bottom plate position sensor (S84) output error
• bottom plate HP sensor (S72) output error
• ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32) error (does not rotate)
• Check the connections of the sensor harnesses and motor harnesses.
• Replace the sensor harnesses and motor harnesses.
• Replace the sensor or motor.
• Replace the ADF controller board (PCB29).

SC700-02 D Original pick up error (1-Pass ADF)
The ADF pick-up roller lift motor (M34) is turned on but the pick-up roller HP
sensor (S83) is not detecting it.
Details:
The SC is detected when the output of the pick-up roller HP sensor (S83)
was not changed during the ADF pick-up roller lift motor (M34) driving. The
first two occurrences are displayed as jams.
• pick-up roller HP sensor (S83) output error
• ADF pick-up roller lift motor (M34) error (does not rotate)
• Check the connections of the sensor harnesses and motor harnesses.
SC700: Peripherals

• Replace the sensor harnesses and motor harnesses.
• Replace the sensor or motor.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC700-04 D ADF feed motor (M28) error (1-Pass ADF)
Error signal detected while the ADF feed motor (M28) is driven.
Details:
When encoder channel A (B) error or overload error is detected among the
ADF feed motor (M28) error notification registers.
The first two occurrences, however, are displayed as jams.
• ADF feed motor (M28) defective
• Connecter disconnected
• Harness broken
• Overload
• Check the harness connection.
• Replace the encoder harness.
• Replace the ADF feed motor (M28).
• Remove torn paper from the paper path, remove foreign objects from the
drive area, and check for motor/motor bracket deformation.

SC700-05 D Pull-out Motor (M29) error (1-Pass ADF)
Error signal detected while the Pull-out Motor (M29) is driven.
Details:
Pull-out Motor (M29) error notification registers.
• Pull-out Motor (M29) defective
• Harness broken
• Overload
• Replace the Pull-out Motor (M29).
SC700: Peripherals


SC700-06 D ADF transport motor (M33) error (1-Pass ADF)
Error signal detected while the ADF transport motor (M33) is driven.
Details:
pull-out motor error notification registers.
• Pull-out Motor (M29) defective
• Harness broken
• Overload
• Replace the Pull-out Motor (M29).

SC700-07 D ADF scanning motor (M31) error (1-Pass ADF)
Error signal detected while the ADF scanning motor (M31) is driven.
Details:
ADF scanning motor (M31) error notification registers.
• ADF scanning motor (M31) defective
• Harness broken
• Overload
• Replace the ADF scanning motor (M31).
SC700: Peripherals

SC700-09 D ADF Exit motor (M30) error (1-Pass ADF)
Error signal detected while the ADF exit motor (M30) is driven.
Details:
6BTroubleshoo
ting
ADF exit motor (M30) error notification registers.
• ADF exit motor (M30) defective
• Harness broken
• Overload
• Replace the ADF exit motor (M30).

SC702-04 D Protection device break error 4 (1-Pass ADF)
The protection device of PSU2 broke the circuit with the 24V power supply
on.
Details:
A motor defect or a short circuit occurred in either the ADF pick-up roller lift
motor (M34), transmission stamp, or ADF bottom plate lift motor (M32). Then
the protection device of PSU2 broke the circuit.
• Motors controlled by PSU2 are defective.
• Harnesses connected to PSU2 are broken.
• Replace the broken parts.
• Replace the board.

SC702-05 D Protection device break error 5 (1-Pass ADF)
The protection device of PSU1 broke the circuit with the 24V power supply
on.
Details:
A motor defect or a short circuit occurred in either the ADF feed motor (M28),
Pull-out Motor (M29), ADF transport motor (M33), ADF scanning motor
(M31), or ADF exit motor (M30). Then the protection device of PSU1 broke
SC700: Peripherals

the circuit.
• Motors controlled by PSU1 are defective.
• Harnesses connected to PSU1 are broken.
• Replace the broken parts.

SC703-01 B Double Feed Detection Error (1-Pass ADF)
A error signal was detected during double feed detection.
• Power of downstream unit is not turned on.
• Connector between the ADF controller board (PCB29) and the URB is
not connected properly.
• Harness between the ADF controller board (PCB29) and the URB is
damaged.
• Double feed detect sensor (emitter) is defective.
• URB is defective.
1. Connector between ADF controller board (PCB29) and URB not
connected properly
Check all the connectors are properly connected. (connectors not
disconnected or half-inserted)
Reconnect the connectors.
2. Harness between ADF controller board (PCB29) and URB damaged
Check if the harness is damaged or exposed.
Replace the harness if it is not in good condition.
3. URB defective
Check if there are any traces of short circuit on the URB. If so, replace it.
7.8.2 SC720: FINISHER/ BOOKLET FINISHER
• Finisher SR4150/ Booklet finisher SR4160
SC720-01 D Downstream device communication error
Communication with the downstream device has established, but the device
is not responding to the command sent out, even after being sent three times.
SC700: Peripherals

For details about cause and solution, refer to "Troubleshooting for
SC720-XX".
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC720-03 D Protection device break error 1
Protection device break error (fuse tripped) (FU3 of main controller board)
SC720-XX".

SC720-04 D Protection device break error 1 (Finisher with mailbox)
Protection device break error (fuse tripped) (FU2 of main controller board)
SC720-XX".

SC720-06 B Access error to NVRAM (Finisher/ Booklet Finisher)
When NV memory of the finisher/ booklet finisher is accessed, an error
occurred.
NV memory disconnected, defective
Corresponding parts: NV memory of the finisher/ booklet finisher, board (main
controller board)
1. Turn the main power of the main machine on/off, and then check if the
NV memory is connected to the IC socket correctly.
2. Replace the main controller board.

SC720-10 D Entrance transport motor error
SC720-11 D Horizontal transport motor error
SC720-13 B Transport motor error
SC720-15 D Pre-stack Transport motor error
SC720-17 B Exit motor error
DC motor control error (DC motor control software internal error) was
detected inside the software of the finisher/ booklet finisher.
(The first time to fourth time: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
SC720-XX".
SC700: Peripherals

SC720-20 B Lower junction gate motor error
SC720-24 B Paper exit guide plate motor error
• When moving to the home position, home position was not detected
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time to fourth
time: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still detected
after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time to fourth
SC720-XX".

SC720-25 D Punch motor error
SC720-27 D Punch movement motor error
SC720-28 D Punch registration motor error
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulse). (The first time to fourth
SC720-XX".

SC720-30 B Jogger motor error
SC720-33 B Positioning roller motor error
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulse). (The first time to fourth
SC720-XX".

SC720-34 B Positioning roller motor error
SC700: Peripherals

• DC motor control error (DC motor control software internal error) was
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC720-XX".

SC720-35 B Paper stacking holder motor error
within specified time (t0 sec). (The first time to fourth time: jam display,
the fifth time: SC)
after specified time (t1 sec). (The first time to fourth time: jam display, the
fifth time: SC)
SC720-XX".

SC720-41 B Feed-out belt motor error
SC720-XX".

SC720-42 B Corner stapler movement motor error
SC700: Peripherals

SC720-XX".

SC720-44 B Corner stapler motor error
the fifth time: SC)
fifth time: SC)
SC720-XX".

SC720-50 B Booklet jogger motor error
SC720-51 B Booklet jogging pawl movement motor error
SC720-52 B Press fold motor error
SC720-53 B Booklet bottom fence motor error
SC720-XX".

SC720-54 B Fold transport motor error
• STM control error (short-circuit or overheat) was detected inside the
software of the finisher/ booklet finisher.
SC700: Peripherals

SC720-XX".
6BTroubleshoo
SC720-60 B Booklet stapler motor error
ting
the fifth time: SC)
fifth time: SC)
SC720-XX".

SC720-70 B Tray lift motor error
• When descending, paper sensor is still detecting paper after the
specified time (t0 sec). (The first time to fourth time: jam display, the fifth
time: SC)
• When ascending, paper sensor did not detect paper within specified time
(t1 sec). (The first time to fourth time: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
SC720-XX".

SC720-71 B Shift motor error
SC720-72 B Front fence motor error
SC720-73 B Rear fence motor error
SC720-74 B Fence lift motor error
SC700: Peripherals

SC720-XX".

SC720-75 B Return roller motor error
the fifth time: SC)
fifth time: SC)
SC720-XX".

SC720-80 B Protection device break error 3
Protection device break error (fuse tripped) (FU2 of board of output jogger
unit)
SC720-XX".

SC720-81 B Dynamic roller transport motor error
SC720-XX".

SC720-82 B Leading edge guide motor error
SC700: Peripherals

SC720-XX".
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC720-83 B Paper guide motor error
SC720-XX".

SC720-84 D Protection device break error 2 (Finisher without Mailbox)
• Protection device break error (fuse tripped) (FU2 of main controller
board)
SC720-XX".
Troubleshooting for SC720-XX

Cause
Interface cable (downstream device side) connector disconnected or broken, PCB of

downstream device defective, Controller PCB defective, Connecter disconnected, Short-circuit,
Overload, Motor defective, Solenoid defective, Home position sensor defective
Solution
SC700: Peripherals
Check Points
1. Check the connector
SC No. Check Points

SC720-01 Connector which is connected to CN100 to CN101 of the main board
SC720-03 No need to check the connector
SC720-10 Connector between CN133 of the main board and the entrance transport motor
(DCM1)
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Check Points

SC720-11 Connector between CN133 of the main board and the horizontal transport motor
(DCM2)
SC720-13 Connector between CN118 of the main board and the transport motor (DCM3)
6BTroubleshoo
SC720-15 Connector between CN131 of the main board and the pre-stack transport motor
ting
(DCM5)
SC720-17 Connector between CN118 of the main board and the exit motor (DCM4)
SC720-20 Connector between CN128 of the main board and the lower junction gate motor
(STM2)
SC720-24 • Connector between CN128 of the main board and the paper exit guide plate
motor (STM4)
• Connector between CN116 of the main board and the exit guide plate HP sensor
(S34)
SC720-25 • Connector between CN130/CN132 of the main board and the punch unit
controller board (PCB2)
• Connector between CN605 of the Punch unit controller board (PCB2) and the
punch unit movement motor (STM13)
punch motor rotation sensor (S39)
punch HP sensor (S38)
SC720-27 • Connector between CN130/CN132 of the Punch unit controller board (PCB2)
and the punch unit controller board (PCB2)
punch unit HP sensor (S40)
SC720-28 • Connector between CN130/CN132 of the main board and the Punch unit
controller board (PCB2)
punch registration motor (STM14)
punch registration HP sensor (S41)
SC720-30 • Connector between CN127 of the main board and the jogger motor (STM1)
• Connector between CN117 of the main board and the jogger fence HP sensor
(S25)
SC720-33 • Connector between CN128 of the main board and the positioning roller motor
(DCM14)
• Connector between CN116 of the main board and the positioning roller HP
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Check Points

sensor (S28)
SC720-34 Connector between CN138 of the main board and the corner stapler movement
motor (STM7)
SC720-35 • Connector between CN122 of the main board and the paper stacking holder
motor (DCM8)
• Connector between CN115 of the main board and the paper stacking holder HP
sensor (S24)
SC720-41 • Connector between CN121 of the main board and the feed-out belt motor
(DCM7)
• Connector between CN117 of the main board and the feed-out belt HP sensor
(S12)
SC720-42 • Connector between CN121 of the main board and the corner stapler movement
motor (STM7)
• Connector between CN117 of the main board and the corner stapler move HP
sensor
SC720-44 Connector between CN125 of the main board and the corner stapler motor
SC720-50 • Connector between CN113 of the main board and the booklet jogger motor
(STM11)
• Connector between CN109 of the main board and the booklet jogging HP sensor
(S10)
SC720-51 • Connector between CN113 of the main board and the booklet jogging pawl
movement motor (STM8)
• Connector between CN108 of the main board and the booklet jogging pawl HP
sensor (S3)
SC720-52 • Connector between CN112 of the main board and the press fold motor (STM10)
• Connector between CN118 of the main board and the fold plate HP sensor (S1)
• Connector between CN109 of the main board and the fold plate cam HP sensor
(S9)
SC720-53 • Connector between CN113 of the main board and the booklet bottom fence
motor (STM12)
• Connector between CN109 of the main board and the booklet lower transport
path paper sensor (S15)
SC720-54 Connector between CN112 of the main board and the fold transport motor (STM9)
SC720-60 Connector between CN111 of the main board and the booklet stapler motor
SC720-70 • Connector between CN123 of the main board and the tray lift motor (DCM9)
• Connector between CN115 of the main board and the shift tray paper height
sensor (S35)
SC720-71 • Connector between CN127 of the main board and the shift motor (STM3)
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Check Points

• Connector between CN119 of the main board and the shift roller HP sensor
(S19)
SC720-72 • Connector between CN102/CN137 of the main board and the output jogger unit
6BTroubleshoo
• Connector between CN11 of the output jogger unit and the front fence motor
ting
(STM15)
• Connector between CN10 of the output jogger unit and the front fence sensor
(S47)
• Connector between CN4 of the output jogger unit and the rear fence motor
(STM16)
• Connector between CN10 of the output jogger unit and the rear fence sensor
(S48)
• Connector between CN7 of the output jogger unit and the fence lift motor
(STM17)
• Connector between CN5 of the output jogger unit and the lift sensor 2 (S46)
SC720-75 • Connector between CN122 of the main board and the stacking sponge roller lift
motor (DCM6)
• Connector between CN115 of the main board and the stacking sponge roller HP
sensor (S32)
SC720-80 Connector between CN102/CN137 of the main board and the output jogger unit
SC720-81 Connector between CN110 of the main board and the dynamic roller transport motor
SC720-82 • Connector between CN127 of the main board and the leading edge guide motor
(STM6)
• Connector between CN115 of the main board and the leading edge guide HP
sensor (S33)
SC720-83 • Connector between CN182 of the main board and the paper guide motor
(STM18)
• Connector between CN139 of the main board and the paper guide HP sensor
(S50)
2. Check the harness
SC No. Check Points
SC720-01 All the harnesses
SC720-03 All the harnesses
SC720-04 The harness which is connected to CN105 of the main board.
SC720-06 No need to check the harnesses
SC720-10 Harness between CN133 of the main board and the entrance transport motor
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Check Points

(DCM1)
SC720-11 Harness between CN133 of the main board and the horizontal transport motor
(DCM2)
SC720-13 Harness between CN118 of the main board and the transport motor
SC720-15 Harness between CN131 of the main board and the pre-stack transport motor
(DCM5)
SC720-17 Harness between CN131 of the main board and the pre-stack transport motor
(DCM5)
SC720-20 Harness between CN128 of the main board and the lower junction gate motor
(STM2)
SC720-24 • Harness between CN128 of the main board and the paper exit guide plate motor
(STM4)
• Harness between CN116 of the main board and the exit guide plate HP sensor
(S34)
SC720-25 • Harness between CN130/CN132 of the main board and the punch unit controller
board (PCB2)
• Harness between CN605 of the Punch unit controller board (PCB2) and the
punch motor rotation sensor (S39)
punch HP sensor (S38)
SC720-27 • Harness between CN130/CN132 of the Punch unit controller board (PCB2) and
the punch unit controller board (PCB2)
punch unit HP sensor (S40)
SC720-28 • Harness between CN130/CN132 of the main board and the Punch unit controller
board (PCB2)
punch registration motor (STM14)
punch registration HP sensor (S41)
SC720-30 • Harness between CN127 of the main board and the jogger motor (STM1)
• Harness between CN117 of the main board and the jogger fence HP sensor
(S25)
SC720-33 • Harness between CN128 of the main board and the positioning roller motor
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-100 SM
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Check Points

(DCM14)
• Harness between CN116 of the main board and the positioning roller HP sensor
(S28)
6BTroubleshoo
SC720-34 Harness between CN138 of the main board and the corner stapler movement motor
ting
(STM7)
SC720-35 • Harness between CN122 of the main board and the paper stacking holder motor
(DCM8)
• Harness between CN115 of the main board and the paper stacking holder HP
sensor (S24)
SC720-41 • Harness between CN121 of the main board and the feed-out belt motor (DCM7)
• Harness between CN117 of the main board and the feed-out belt HP sensor
(S12)
SC720-42 • Harness between CN121 of the main board and the corner stapler movement
motor (STM7)
• Harness between CN117 of the main board and the corner stapler move HP
sensor
SC720-44 Harness between CN125 of the main board and the corner stapler motor
SC720-50 • Harness between CN113 of the main board and the booklet jogger motor
(STM11)
• Harness between CN109 of the main board and the booklet jogging HP sensor
(S10)
SC720-51 • Harness between CN113 of the main board and the booklet jogging pawl
movement motor (STM8)
• Harness between CN108 of the main board and the booklet jogging pawl HP
sensor (S3)
SC720-52 • Harness between CN112 of the main board and the press fold motor (STM10)
• Harness between CN118 of the main board and the fold plate HP sensor (S1)
• Harness between CN109 of the main board and the fold plate cam HP sensor
(S9)
SC720-53 • Harness between CN127 of the main board and the jogger motor (STM1)
• Harness between CN117 of the main board and the jogger fence HP sensor
(S25)
SC720-54 Harness between CN112 of the main board and the fold transport motor (STM9)
SC720-60 Harness between CN111 of the main board and the booklet stapler motor
SC720-70 • Harness between CN123 of the main board and the tray lift motor (DCM9)
• Harness between CN115 of the main board and the shift tray paper height
sensor (S35)
SC720-71 • Harness between CN127 of the main board and the shift motor (STM3)
SM 7-101 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Check Points

• Harness between CN119 of the main board and the shift roller HP sensor (S19)
SC720-72 • Harness between CN102/CN137 of the main board and the output jogger unit
• Harness between CN11 of the output jogger unit and the front fence motor
(STM15)
• Harness between CN10 of the output jogger unit and the front fence sensor
(S47)
• Harness between CN4 of the output jogger unit and the rear fence motor
(STM16)
• Harness between CN10 of the output jogger unit and the rear fence sensor (S48)
• Harness between CN7 of the output jogger unit and the fence lift motor (STM17)
• Harness between CN5 of the output jogger unit and the lift sensor 2 (S46)
SC720-75 • Harness between CN122 of the main board and the stacking sponge roller lift
motor (DCM6)
• Harness between CN115 of the main board and the stacking sponge roller HP
sensor (S32)
• All the harnesses in the output jogger unit
SC720-81 Harness between CN110 of the main board and the shift roller drive motor (DCM11)
SC720-82 • Harness between CN127 of the main board and the leading edge guide motor
(STM6)
• Harness between CN115 of the main board and the leading edge guide HP
sensor (S33)
SC720-83 • Harness between CN182 of the main board and the paper guide motor (STM18)
• Harness between CN139 of the main board and the paper guide HP sensor
(S50)
SC720-84 Harness which is connected to CN105 of the main board
3. Check the motor/sensor
SC No. Check Points

SC720-01 No need to check the motors or sensors.
SC720-10 Entrance transport motor (DCM1)
SC720-11 Horizontal transport motor (DCM2)
SC720-13 Transport motor (DCM3)
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-102 SM
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Check Points

SC720-15 Pre-stack transport motor (DCM5)
SC720-17 Pre-stack transport motor (DCM5)
SC720-20 Lower junction gate motor (STM2)
6BTroubleshoo
SC720-24 Paper exit guide plate motor (STM4), Exit guide plate HP sensor (S34)
ting
SC720-25 Punch unit controller board (PCB2), Punch unit movement motor (STM13), Punch
motor rotation sensor (S39), Punch HP sensor (S38)
SC720-27 Punch unit controller board (PCB2), Punch unit movement motor (STM13), Punch
unit HP sensor (S40)
SC720-28 Punch unit controller board (PCB2), Punch registration motor (STM14), Punch
registration HP sensor (S41)
SC720-30 Jogger motor (STM1), Jogger fence HP sensor (S25)
SC720-33 Positioning roller motor (DCM14), Positioning roller HP sensor (S28)
SC720-34 Corner stapler movement motor (STM7)
SC720-35 Paper stacking holder motor (DCM8), Paper stacking holder HP sensor (S24)
SC720-41 Feed-out belt motor (DCM7), Feed-out belt HP sensor (S12)
SC720-42 Corner stapler movement motor (STM7), Corner stapler move HP sensor
SC720-44 Corner stapler motor
SC720-50 Booklet jogger motor (STM11), Booklet jogging HP sensor (S10)
SC720-51 Booklet jogging pawl movement motor (STM8), Booklet jogging pawl HP sensor (S3)
SC720-52 Press fold motor (STM10), Fold plate HP sensor (S1), Fold plate cam HP sensor (S9)
SC720-53 Jogger motor (STM1), Jogger fence HP sensor (S25)
SC720-54 Fold transport motor (STM9)
SC720-60 Booklet stapler motor
SC720-70 Tray lift motor (DCM9), Shift tray paper height sensor (S35)
SC720-71 Shift motor (STM3), Shift roller HP sensor (S19)
SC720-72 Front fence motor (STM15) and Front fence sensor (S47) of the output jogger unit
SC720-73 Rear fence motor (STM16) and Rear fence sensor (S48) of the output jogger unit
SC720-74 Fence lift motor (STM17) and lift sensor 2 (S46) of the output jogger unit
SC720-75 Stacking sponge roller lift motor (DCM6), Stacking sponge roller HP sensor (S32)
SC720-81 Harness between CN110 of the main board and the shift roller drive motor (DCM11)
SC720-82 Leading edge guide motor (STM6), Leading edge guide HP sensor (S33)
SC720-83 Paper guide motor, Paper guide HP sensor (S50)
4. Check the board
SC No. Check Points SC No. Check Points
SC720-01 All the boards SC720-42 Main board
SM 7-103 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals
SC No. Check Points SC No. Check Points

SC720-03 All the boards SC720-44 Main board
SC720-04 Main board SC720-50 Main board
SC720-24 Main board SC720-72 Main board, Main board of the
output jogger unit
SC720-25 Main board, Punch unit controller SC720-73 Main board, Main board of the
board (PCB2) output jogger unit
SC720-27 Main board, Punch unit controller SC720-74 Main board, Main board of the
board (PCB2) output jogger unit
SC720-28 Main board, Punch unit controller SC720-75 Main board
board (PCB2)
SC720-30 Main board SC720-80 Main board of the output jogger
unit
7.8.3 SC722: FINISHER
• Finisher SR4140
SC722-01 D Downstream machine communication error (Finisher)
There is no response to the command transmitted after communication with
the downstream machine (the cover interposer tray) is established, and if it is
transmitted three times repeatedly, there is no response.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-104 SM
SC700: Peripherals

• Controller Board defective
• Downstream machine (the cover interposer tray) defective
• Motor defective
6BTroubleshoo
1. Connector disconnected
ting
Check if the connector of the finisher and the connector of the
downstream machine (the cover interposer tray) are connected correctly,
and if disconnected, connect them.
2. Harness broken
Check if the harness of the finisher and the harness of the downstream
machine (the cover interposer tray) are uncovered or broken, and if they
are uncovered or broken, replace the harness.
3. Controller Board defective
If the controller board of the downstream machine (the cover interposer
tray) is shorted, replace it.
4. Controller Board defective
f the main controller board is shorted, replace it.

SC722-03 D Overcurrent protection device error 1
The protective fuse is blown.
• Overcurrent (PCB defective, harness short circuit, or solenoid defective)
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Check or replace the harnesses.
3. Check or replace the motors.
4. Replace the main controller board (PCB1).

Sensor power supply error detected.
Overcurrent (PCB defective, harness short circuit, sensor defective, or
connector disconnected)
2. Check or replace the harness.
3. Check or replace the motors and sensors.
SM 7-105 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

SC722-06 C NV memory error
Error detected when accessing NV memory.
• NV memory connection failure
• NV memory defective
1. Reinstall the NV memory.

SC722-10 D Upper transport motor (M27) error
SC722-11 D Entrance transport motor (M24) error
SC722-14 B Lower transport motor (M28) error
Motor driver detects an abnormal DC motor control condition. (The first four
times: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
• Motor defective
• Overload
• Encoder defective
3. Check or replace the motor/HP sensor.

SC722-16 D Proof tray exit motor (M26) error
SC722-17 B Shift exit motor (M23) error
SC722-18 B Stapler exit motor (M21) error
Motor driver detects an abnormal DC motor control condition. (The first four
times: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
• Motor defective
• Overload
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-106 SM
SC700: Peripherals

SC722-20 D Proof tray junction gate motor (M7) error
SC722-21 D Stapler junction gate motor (M8) error
SC722-22 B Pre-stack junction gate motor (M9) error
6BTroubleshoo
SC722-23 B Pre-stack stopper motor (M20) error
ting
SC722-24 B Exit open/close motor (M22) error
SC722-25 D Punching motor (M62) error
within specified time or specified number of pulses. (The first four times:
jam display, the fifth time: SC)
after specified time or specified number of pulses. (The first four times:
jam display, the fifth time: SC)
• Motor driver detects an abnormal condition.
• Motor defective
• Overload
• Home position sensor defective

SC722-27 B Punch unit motor (M31) error
• No change to the punch home position sensor after a specified time from
punch operation. (The first four times: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
• No change to the punch home position sensor within a specified number
of pulses from punch operation. (The first four times: jam display, the fifth
time: SC)
• Motor defective
• Overload
SM 7-107 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

SC722-30 B Jogger motor (M17) error
SC722-33 B Drag-in motor (M11) Error
• When moving to the home position, home position was not
detected within specified time or specified number of pulses. (The first
four times: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
• When moving from the home position, home position was still
detected after specified time or specified number of pulses. (The first
• Motor defective
• Overload

SC722-34 B Positioning roller motor (M13) error
• Motor driver detects an abnormal DC motor control condition. (The first
within specified number of pulses. (The first four times: jam display, the
fifth time: SC)
after specified number of pulses. (The first four times: jam display, the
fifth time: SC)
• Motor defective
• Overload
3. Check or replace the motor.

SC722-35 B Paper hold center motor (M14) error
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-108 SM
SC700: Peripherals

SC722-36 B Paper hold front motor (M15) error
SC722-37 B Paper hold rear motor (M16) error
When moving to the home position, home position was not
6BTroubleshoo
•
ting
• Motor defective
• Overload

SC722-39 B Leading edge stopper motor (M12) error
• Motor driver detects an abnormal DC motor control condition. (The first
• Motor defective
• Overload
• Home position sensor error
SM 7-109 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

SC722-40 B Jogger bottom fence motor (M19) error
SC722-41 B Feed out belt motor (M18) error
SC722-42 B Stapler front/rear motor (M1) error
SC722-43 B Stapler rotation motor (M2) error
• Motor defective
• Overload

SC722-44 B Staple motor (M3) error
• Motor defective
• Overload
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-110 SM
SC700: Peripherals

SC722-70 B Tray upper/lower motor (M24) error
• When ascending, paper sensor did not detect paper within specified
time. (The first four times: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
6BTroubleshoo
• When descending, paper sensor is still detecting paper after the
ting
specified time. (The first four times: jam display, the fifth time: SC)
• Overload due to staple jam or number of sheets exceeding the limit, etc.
• Motor defective
• Overload

SC722-71 B Shift motor (M4) error
SC722-72 B Jogger motor (M29) error
SC722-74 B Jogger top fence motor (M30) error
SC722-75 B Drag-in drive motor (M5) error
• Motor defective
• Overload
SM 7-111 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals
7.8.4 SC724: SLIDE SORT TRAY
• Shift Sort Tray SH4020

SC724-03 D Overcurrent Protection Device Error 1 (Shift Sort Tray)
Break in the protection device is detected. (The fuse is broken)
• Power of the downstream device is not turned on.
• Short circuit
• Harness is damaged.
• There is overload.
• Motor is defective.
Corresponding components:
• Transport Motor [STM1]
• Tray Lift Motor [DCM1]
• Shift Motor [DCM2]
1. Connector not connected properly
Check all the connectors of each motor are properly connected.
(controller board, motor, relay)
Reconnect the connector if it is not connected correctly.
2. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the board and the motor is damaged or
exposed.
Replace the harness if it is damaged.
3. Motor defective
Check if the motor's drive is transmitted to other components. Check if
the motor is overloaded. If the motor is defective, replace the motor.
4. Board defective
Check if there are any traces of short circuit on the controller board,
jogger unit main board.
Replace the board. (Board replacement is required for this error.)

SC724-04 D Overcurrent Protection Device Error 1 2 (Shift Sort Tray)
Break in the protection device is detected. (Sensor system 5V overcurrent)
• Short circuit
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-112 SM
SC700: Peripherals

6BTroubleshoo
• Paper Sensor [S1]
ting
• Transport Sensor [S2]
• HP Sensor [S3]
• Tray Lower Limit Sensor [S4]
• Tray Large Size Sensor [S5]
• Cover Open/Close Switch [SW1]
Check all the connectors of each component are properly connected.
(controller board, motor, sensor, switch, relay)
2. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the board and the sensor is damaged or
exposed.
3. Sensor/switch defective
Check if there are any traces of short circuit (melting fuse) on the
sensor/switch, and if the sensor/switch can be turned off and on.
Replace the sensor or switch.
4. Board defective
Check if there are any traces of short circuit on the controller board,
jogger unit main board.
Replace the board. (Board replacement is not required for this error.)

SC724-10 D Transport Motor Error (Shift Sort Tray)
The stepper motor driver IC detects an error. (Overcurrent, Overheat)
• Short circuit
Components: Transport Motor [STM1]
Check all the connectors of each component are properly connected.
SM 7-113 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

(main board, motor, relay)
2. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the board and the sensor is damaged or
exposed.
3. Motor defective
Check if the motor's drive is transmitted to other components. Check if
the motor is overloaded.
Replace the motor if it is defective.
4. Board defective
Check if there are any traces of short circuit on the controller board. If so,
replace it

SC724-70 D Tray Lift Motor (Shift Sort Tray)
• When ascending, the paper height sensors do not detect the surface of
the paper within a specified time. (t 0sec).(The first four times are
reported as jams. An SC is issued when it is repeated five times.)
• When descending, the paper height sensors continue to detect the
surface of the paper after a specified time. (t 1sec) (The first four times
are reported as jams. An SC is issued when it is repeated five times.)
• Power of downstream device is not turned on.
• Motor is defective
• Connector is not connected properly
• Short circuit
• Harness is damaged
• Paper sensor is defective.
• Tray Lift Motor [DCM1]
• Paper Sensor [S1]
Check if the connectors of each motor/sensor are connected correctly
(whether they are disconnected or incorrectly connected) (board, motor,
sensor, relay)
Reconnect it if it is not connected correctly.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-114 SM
SC700: Peripherals

2. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the board and the motor/sensor is
damaged or exposed.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
3. Motor/sensor defective
Perform Output Check to see if the motor rotates on its own, whether it is
overloaded, and whether the drive is transmitted.
Perform Input Check to see if the sensor turns off and on.
Replace the motor or sensor if it is defective.
4. Board defective
Check if there are any traces of short circuit on the board. If so, replace
the board.

SC724-71 B Shift Motor Error (Shift Sort Tray)
• Home position is not detected within the specified time (t 0sec) when
moving to the home position. (The first four times are reported as jams.
An SC is issued when it is repeated five times.)
• Home position remains detected after a specified time (t 1sec) after
leaving the home position. (The first four times are reported as jams. An
SC is issued when it is repeated five times.)
• Power of downstream device is not turned on.
• Motor is defective
• Connector is not connected properly
• Short circuit
• Harness is damaged
• HP sensor is defective.
• Shift Motor [DCM2]
• HP Sensor [S3]
Check all the connectors of each component are correctly connected.
(main board, motor, sensor, relay)
2. Harness damaged
Check if the harness between the board and the motor/sensor is
SM 7-115 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

damaged or exposed.
Replace the harness if it is not in good condition.
3. Motor/sensor defective
Perform Output Check to see if the motor rotates on its own, whether it is
overloaded, and whether the drive is transmitted. Perform Input Check to
see if the sensor turns off and on. Replace the motor or sensor if it is
defective.
4. Board defective
Check if there are any traces of short circuit on the controller board. If so,
replace it.
7.8.5 SC725: MULTI-FOLDING UNIT
• Multi-Folding Unit FD4020

• The break of the downstream device is longer than 10 seconds.
• After break waiting of the downstream device starts, 200 msec has
elapsed but the device does not stop working.
• The machine has received ATN from the downstream device without a
break in advance.
• The machine has received ST2 while receiving ST1 frame from the
downstream device, and vice versa.
• The downstream device is not responding to the transmitted frame
(ACKn) within the specified time (100ms), and even if the frame
transmission is retried three times (upper limit number of times)
consecutively, the device is not responding to the frame.
• After the downstream device is connected, the device stops working
again.
• Interface cable (downstream device side) connector disconnected or
broken
• PCB of downstream device defective
• Controller PCB defective
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-116 SM
SC700: Peripherals

Corresponding parts: the harness connecting the multi-folding unit and
downstream machine, the board of the multi-folding unit (main controller
board)
6BTroubleshoo
• Downstream machine defective
ting
Check if the connectors between the interface cable and the PCB are
connected correctly (whether they are disconnected or incorrectly
connected).
2. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the interface cable and the PCB is
damaged or exposed.
3. Motor defective
Check if the corresponding motor is damaged or there are missing parts.
Replace the motor.
4. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

The fuse on the PCB blew.
* Related Components:
• Horizontal transport exit motor
• Top tray exit motor
• Top tray transport motor
• Entrance JG (Junction gate) motor
• 1st stopper motor
• Jogger fence motor
• Fold plate motor
• 1st fold motor
• Registration roller release motor
• Dynamic roller lift motor
• Horizontal transport motor
• Entrance JG (junction gate) motor
• Top tray JG solenoid
• Exit JG pawl solenoid
SM 7-117 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

• Reverse JG pawl solenoid
1. Damaged harness
Check if the harnesses between the PCB and the motors/solenoids are
damaged or exposed.
2. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

* Related Components:
• Dynamic roller transport motor
• Registration roller transport motor
• 2nd fold motor
• 2nd stopper motor
• Direct send JG motor
• Crease motor
• 3rd stopper motor
• FM6 pawl motor
• Leading edge stopper pawl motor
• Bypass junction gate solenoid
1. Damaged harness
Check if the harnesses between the PCB and the motors/solenoids are
damaged or exposed.
2. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

SC725-12 B Registration roller transport motor (M14) error
SC725-13 B Dynamic roller transport motor (M13) error
SC725-14 B Top tray exit motor (M4) error
Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
• Overcurrent to the motor.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-118 SM
SC700: Peripherals

• Motor drive overheat
Check if the connectors between the motor and the PCB are connected
6BTroubleshoo
correctly (whether they are disconnected or incorrectly connected).
ting
2. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the motor and the PCB is damaged or
exposed.
3. Motor defective
Replace the motor.
4. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

SC725-30 B 1st stopper motor (M8) error
SC725-31 B 2nd stopper motor (M12) error
SC725-32 B 3rd stopper motor (M17) error
SC725-33 B Jogger fence motor (M6) error
SC725-34 B Dynamic roller lift motor (M11) error
SC725-35 B Registration roller release motor (M10) error
SC725-36 B Direct send JG HP motor (M15) error
SC725-37 B FM6 pawl motor (M16) error
SC725-38 B Fold plate motor (M9)
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
display, the second time: SC)
after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time: jam display,
the second time: SC)
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
SM 7-119 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

2. Damaged harness
exposed.
3. HP sensor defective
Check if the corresponding HP sensor is damaged or there are missing
parts.
Replace the HP sensor.
4. Motor defective
Replace the motor.
5. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

SC725-39 B 1st fold motor (M5) error
SC725-40 B 2nd fold motor (M18) error
SC725-41 B Crease motor (M19) error
2. Damaged harness
exposed.
3. Motor defective
Replace the motor.
4. Board defective
Replace the PCB.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-120 SM
SC700: Peripherals

SC725-71 B Horizontal transport motor (M3) error
SC725-72 B Horizontal transport exit motor (M7) error
SC725-73 B Top tray transport motor (M2) error
6BTroubleshoo
ting
2. Damaged harness
exposed.
3. Motor defective
Replace the motor.
4. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

SC725-74 D Entrance JG motor (M1) error
within specified number of pulses (p0 pulses). (The first time: jam
after specified number of pulses (p1 pulses). (The first time: jam display,
• Motor driver detected an error. (SC from the first time)
2. Damaged harness
SM 7-121 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

exposed.
parts.
4. Motor defective
Replace the motor.
5. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

SC725-75 D Overcurrent protection device error 3 (+5V line)
An error is detected when the power is turned ON.
The 5V line fuse on the PCB blew.
1. Damaged harness
Check if the harnesses between the PCB and the PSU/interlock switch
are damaged or exposed.
2. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

SC725-76 D Overcurrent protection device error 4 (+5V sensor line)
A sensor power protection device error signal is detected when the power is
turned ON.
• Sensor defective
Check if the connectors between the sensor and the PCB are connected
2. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the sensor and the PCB is damaged or
exposed.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-122 SM
SC700: Peripherals

3. Sensor defective
Check if the all sensors for damage or missing parts.
If the sensors are defective or give off unusual odor, replace the sensor.
6BTroubleshoo
4. Board defective
ting
Replace the PCB.
7.8.6 SC726: MULTI-FOLDING UNIT
• Multi-Folding Unit FD4010

Communication error between the multi-folding unit and downstream device
is detected.
• Interface cable (downstream device side) connector disconnected or
broken
• PCB of downstream device defective
• Controller PCB defective
1. Downstream device error
Connect the interface cable of the downstream device to the main
machine and check if it operates normally. If it does not operate normally,
there is a problem with the downstream device.
Check if the connectors between the interface cable and the PCB are
connected correctly.
3. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the interface cable and the PCB is
damaged or exposed.
4. Board defective
Replace the PCB.
SM 7-123 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

Protection device break error (FU1 tripped), 24V power supply line error. (SC
occurs at the first detection time)
• Fuse tripped
• PCB defective
• 24V power supply line harness damaged
1. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the PCB and each motor is damaged or
exposed.
2. Motor defective
Check if the each motor is damaged or there are missing parts.
Replace the motor.
3. Board defective
If the board is defective or gives off unusual odor, replace the PCB.

SC726-10 D Paper entrance motor (M8) error
SC726-12 B Pre-registration motor (M6) error
SC726-13 B Registration motor (M4) error
SC726-14 B Paper exit tray motor (M12) error
SC726-16 B Paper stack motor (M1) error
SC726-17 B Paper transport motor 1 (M7) error
SC726-18 D Paper transport motor 2 (M11) error
SC726-39 B Folding motor (M13) error
SC726-40 B FWD/RVS motor 2 (M14) error
Detecting motor error or encoder error (The first four time: jam display, the
fifth time: SC)
• Motor defective
• Harness short-circuit, broken
• PCB defective
correctly.
2. Damaged harness
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-124 SM
SC700: Peripherals

exposed.
3. Motor defective
6BTroubleshoo
ting
Replace the motor.
4. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

SC726-20 D Entrance JG motor (M10) error
SC726-21 D Paper exit JG motor (M9) error
SC726-36 B Folding JG motor (M2) error
SC726-37 B Anti-winding motor (M3) error
SC726-41 B Crease motor (M5) error
Detecting motor error or encoder error (The first four time: jam display, the
fifth time: SC)
• Motor defective
• HP sensor defective
• PCB defective
correctly.
2. Damaged harness
exposed.
parts.
4. Motor defective
Replace the motor.
5. Board defective
Replace the PCB.
SM 7-125 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals

SC726-71 D Sensor power supply error
Detecting sensor power supply (5V_SN) error (SC occurs at the first
detection time)
• Sensor defective
• PCB defective
Check if the connectors between the sensor and the PCB are connected
correctly.
2. Damaged harness
Check if the harness between the sensor/motor and the PCB is
damaged or exposed.
3. Board defective
Replace the PCB.

SC726-72 D Serial expansion I/O board (IOEX0) error
SC726-73 D Serial expansion I/O board (IOEX1) error
An error occurred when accessing the serial expansion I/O board and an
error was detected after retrying.
• Serial expansion I/O board defective, connection failure
1. Damaged harness
exposed.
correctly.
3. Board defective
Replace the IOEX.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-126 SM
SC700: Peripherals
7.8.7 SC740: COVER INTERPOSER TRAY
• Cover Interposer Tray CI4040
6BTroubleshoo
SC740-03 D Protection Device Break Error 1 (Cover Interposer Tray CI4040)
ting
Protection device break error (fuse tripped, 24V tripped)
• Short-circuit
• Overload
• Motor defective
• Connector broken
• Check the connections of all the connectors.
• Check if the coating material for the harnesses has peeled off. Replace
any broken harness.
• Check all the motors to see whether the drive force is transferred or the
motor is overloaded. Replace any defective motor.
• Check if there is any sign of boards having been shorted. Replace any
shorted board.

SC740-10 B Bottom Plate Lift Motor Error (Cover Interposer Tray CI4040)
• The lift motor rotates in the ascending direction but the upper limit sensor
does not detect within specified time (t0sec). (The first time: jam display,
• The lift motor rotates in the descending direction but the lower limit
sensor does not detect within specified time (t0sec). (The first time: jam
• Motor defective
• Overload
• Upper limit sensor defective
• Check the connections of the connector.
• Check the defective sensor.
• Replace the motor.
• Replace the harness.
SM 7-127 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC700: Peripherals
7.8.8 SC745: MAIL BOX
• Mail Box CS4010

SC745-03 D Protection device break error 1
Protection device break error (fuse tripped)
• Short-circuit
• Overload
• Motor/solenoid defective
4. Replace the PCB.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-128 SM
SC800: Controller
7.9 SC800: CONTROLLER
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC816 [0x0000] Energy save I/O subsystem error
SC816-01 D Subsystem error
SC816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
SC816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
SC816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
SC816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
SC816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
to -12
SC816-13 D open() error
SC816-14 D Memory address error
to -18
SC816-19 D Double open() error
SC816-22 D Parameter error
SC816-23, D read() error
-24
SC816-25 D write () error
SC816-26 D write() communication retry error
to -28
SC816-29, D read() communication retry error
-30
SC816-35 D read() error
to -96
Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality.
• Energy save I/O subsystem defective
• Energy save I/O subsystem detected a controller board (PCB18)
error (non-response).
SM 7-129 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

• Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by
cycling the power after each step.
1. Update the "System/Copy" firmware and the other system firmware
to the latest version.
2. Disable the STR shift function with SP5-191-001 (Power Str Set).

SC819-00 D Kernel halt error
[xxxx]: Detailed error code
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system
processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
[0x5032] HAIC-P2 error
HAIC-P2 decompression error (An error occurred in the ASIC
compression/decompression module.)
• The code data saved in the HDD was broken for an unexpected
reason. (HDD device defective)
• The code data saved to memory was broken for an unexpected
reason. (Memory device defective)
• ASIC defective
• Data other than code data was unzipped due to a software
malfunction.
• Turn the main power OFF/ON.
• Replace the HDD.
• Replace the memory
• Fix the software
[0x5245] Link up error
Link up transaction between Engine ASIC and Veena was not
completed within 100 ms.
Either one of following message appears on console if Link up error
occurs.
RESUME:PCI-Express bus ROOT_DL status error
RESUME:PCI-Express bus DETUP status error
"0x53554D45" -> Link up error
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-130 SM
SC800: Controller

Also, error code "0x5245" and detail code ""0x53554D45" -> Link up
error" appears on operation panel.
6BTroubleshoo
• Replace the controller board (PCB18) or the engine board (BICU
ting
(PCB11))
[0x5355] L2 status time out
L2 status register between Engine ASIC and Veena was not reached
the target value within 1 sec.
Engine ASIC during operation was rebooted or shifted to energy saving
mode.
Machine reboots when SC23x, SC30x occurs.
If Engine ASIC is working when rebooting (or shifting to the energy
saving mode), L2 status value is not on target.
The following message appears on console.
SUSPEND:PCI-Express L2 Status Check Error
SUSPEND:PCI-Express L2 Status Check Error
Also, error code "0x5355" and detail code ""0x5350454E44" -> L2
status time out" appears on operation panel.
• Replace the controller board (PCB18) or the engine board (BICU
(PCB11))
[0x6261] HDD defective
Received file system data was broken even if the initialization succeeds
and there was no error reply from the HDD.
Power supply disconnection during data writing to the HDD.
Replace the HDD.
This SC may occur when turning on the machine for the first time with a
new HDD. In this case, turn the main power off/on.
[0x696e] gwinit processing end
If the SCS process is ended for some reason
If an unexpected error occurs at SCS processing end, gwint processing
also halts (this result is judged a kernel stop error, by gwinit
specification)
“0x69742064” -> “init died”
Turn the main power OFF/ON.
[0x766d] VM full error
Occurs when too much RAM is used during system processing
"vm_pageout: VM is full"
SM 7-131 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

Console Other error (characters on operation panel)
string System detected internal mismatch error
• Software defective
• Insufficient memory
• Hardware driver defective (RAM, flash memory)
• Replace with a larger capacity RAM, or flash memory.
• Replace the connected controller option with a new one.

SC840-00 D EEPROM access error
• During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd reading
failure causes this SC code.
• During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
• Defective EEPROM
-

SC841-00 D EEPROM read data error
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
-

SC842-00 C Nand-Flash updating verification error
SCS write error (verify error) occurred at the Nand-Flash module when
remote ROM or main ROM was updated.
Nand-Flash defective

SC842-01 C Insufficient Nand-Flash blocks (threshold exceeded)
At startup, or when machine returned from low power mode, the Nand-Flash
status was read and judged that the number of unusable blocks had
exceeded threshold, and then SCS generated the SC code.
Number of unusable blocks exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-132 SM
SC800: Controller

Replace the controller board (PCB18).
6BTroubleshoo
SC842-02 C Number of Nand-Flash block deletions exceeded
ting
At startup, or when the machined returned from low power mode, the
Nand-Flash was read and judged that the number of deleted blocks had
exceeded threshold, and then SCS generated this SC code.
Number of blocks deleted exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash

SC845 Hardware Error Detected when the automatic firmware update
SC845-01 D Engine Board
SC845-02 D Controller Board (PCB18)
SC845-03 D Operation Panel (Normal)
SC845-04 D Operation Panel (Smart Operation Panel)
SC845-05 D FCU
When updating the firmware automatically (ARFU), the firmware cannot be
read or written normally, and the firmware update cannot be completed even
by 3 retries.
Hardware abnormality of the target board
Replace the target board
For SC852-02, HDD and memory may cause the problem. Replace the HDD
or memory if the SC cannot be recovered by replacing the controller board
(PCB18).
No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC845-50 D DIMM or hard disk failure
This SC occurs if auto firmware decompression fails after downloading the
package firmware during auto firmware update or receiving reservation
setting in SFU.
The machine operates normally if you turn the main power off and then back
on, but the SC occurs again when firmware decompression fails again during
the next auto firmware update.
Hardware failure (DIMM or hard disk failure) or the package file released via
the global server (SERES) is corrupt.
Replace the DIMM on the controller board (PCB18).
If the problem persists after replacing the DIMM, replace the hard disk.
SM 7-133 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

SC845-51 D Network, DIMM or hard disk failure
This SC occurs if auto firmware decompression fails after downloading the
package firmware during auto firmware update, update from the application
site, or receiving reservation setting in SFU.
Failure in the customer’s network or hardware (DIMM or hard disk) failure.
1. This may be recovered by retrying the firmware update.
2. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM on the controller board
(PCB18).
3. If the problem persists after replacing the DIMM, replace the hard disk.

SC855-01 B Wireless LAN board error (driver attachment failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN board
• Loose connection
• Replace the wireless LAN board

SC855-02 B Wireless LAN board error (driver initialization failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN board
• Loose connection
• Replace the wireless LAN board

SC857-00 B USB I/F Error
The USB interface is unusable because of a driver error.
USB driver error (There are three causes of USB error: RX error/CRC
error/STALL. SC is issued only in the case of STALL.)
• Check the USB connection.

SC860-00 B HDD startup error at main power on (HDD error)
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-134 SM
SC800: Controller

• The HDD is connected but the driver detected the following errors.
• SS_NO.T_READY:/* (-2)HDD does not become READY*/
• SS_BAD_LABEL:/* (-4)Wrong partition type*/
6BTroubleshoo
• SS_READ_ERROR:/* (-5)Error occurred while reading or checking
ting
the label*/
• SS_WRITE_ERROR:/* (-6)Error occurred while writing or checking
the label*/
• SS_FS_ERROR:/* (-7)Failed to repair the filesystem*/
• SS_MOUNT_ERROR:/* (-8)Failed to mount the filesystem*/
• SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to command*/
• SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/
• SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/
• SS_NO._PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not exist*/
• SS_NO._FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/
• Attempted to acquire HDD status through the driver but there has been
no response for 300 seconds or more.
• Unformatted HDD
• Label data corrupted
• HDD defective
Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting) through SP mode.

SC860-01 D HDD file system error at main power on (HDD error)
Failed to mount any of the hard disk partitions.
Power failed while writing files to the hard disk.
The machine shut down while writing files to the hard disk.
Be sure to back up the address book and retrieve the log before formatting the
hard disk.
1. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
It may take a while to shut down because of the hard disk failure.
2. Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting) through SP mode.
3. If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC860-02 D HDD label error at main power on (HDD error)
Hard disk partition data abnormal.
Power failed while writing files to the hard disk.
SM 7-135 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

The machine shut down while writing files to the hard disk.
hard disk.

SC860-03 D HDD encryption key error at main power on (HDD error)
The encryption key for reading the encrypted hard disk data has failed.
The controller’s ROM (NAND) and NVRAM are both damaged. (Rare)
hard disk.

SC863-01 D HDD data read failure
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
Bad sectors were generated during operation.
(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as the
disk label area.)
Guide for when to replace the HDD
1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
• Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (at power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the
engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD
may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs
such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data
and check them.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-136 SM
SC800: Controller

SC863-02 D HDD data read failure
to 23 The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
(An error occurred in partition "a" (SC863-02) to partition “v” (SC863-23)).
Guide for when to replace the HDD
1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
• Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (at power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the
engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD
may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs
such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data
and check them.

SC864-00 D HD data CRC error
During HD operation, the HD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data
transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HD.
HD defective
-

SC864-01 D HDD data CRC error
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data
transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD.
disk label area.)
• Format the HDD.

SC864-02 to D HDD data CRC error
SM 7-137 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

23 During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query.
Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the
HDD.
• Format the HDD.

SC865-00 D HD access error
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or
SC864 (CRC error).
Replace the HDD.

SC865-01 D HDD access error
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or
SC864 (CRC error).
disk label area.)
Replace the HDD.

SC865-02 to D HDD access error
23 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector)
or SC864 (CRC error).
Replace the HDD.

SC865-50 to D HDD time-out error
73 The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the HDD
operation.
The HDD does not respond to the read/ write command from the
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-138 SM
SC800: Controller

machine.
• Check the harness connections between the controller board
(PCB18) and HDD.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
SC866-00 B SD card authentication error
A license error of an application that is started from the SD card was
detected.
Invalid program data is stored on the SD card.
Store a valid program data on the SD card.

SC867-00 C SD card removed
The SD card was removed while the machine is on.
An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point of
/mnt/sd0).

/mnt/sd1).

/mnt/sd2).

SC868-** SD card access error
SC868-00 D The SD controller returned an error during operation.
(An error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd0)
SM 7-139 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

• SD card defective
• SD controller defective
Slot number is displayed on the sub code.
See the detail code on the SMC print to check the details of the error.
• -13 to -3: File system check error
• Otherwise (no code, -2) : Device access error
SD card that starts an application
1. Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
2. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
3. If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
4. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the
SD card for users
1. In the case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD
Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
In case of a device access error
1. Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
2. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
3. If an error occurs, use another SD card.
4. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the
* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only
format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.
SC869-01 C Malfunction of the proximity sensor (PCB13) is detected: Continuously
detecting malfunction
The proximity sensor (PCB13) keeps in a detection state and accumulated
time exceeds 24 hours.
The proximity sensor (PCB13) is disabled and is in the detection state at all
times.
Go to SC869-02.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-140 SM
SC800: Controller

SC869-02 C Malfunction of the proximity sensor (PCB13) is detected: Continuously
non-detecting malfunction
In the non-detection state, the following operations are detected 20 times
6BTroubleshoo
continuously.
ting
• Pressing "energy saver" key or touching the operation panel
• Opening/closing the plate cover or ADF
• Setting the original
• Opening the front cover
• Opening the paper feed tray
The proximity sensor (PCB13) is disabled and is in the non-detection state at
all times.
1. Go to SP5-102-203 (input check SP for the proximity sensor (PCB13)).
2. Cover the proximity sensor (PCB13) with 10 sheets of plain paper, and
then execute the SP to check if it becomes “0”. (Do not place your hand
near the proximity sensor (PCB13) even over the paper when covering
the sensor)
3. Remove the paper from the sensor and check if it becomes “1”.
4. If there is no issue after steps 2 and 3, check that there are no possible
factors around the machine that may cause a temperature change such
as a heater or fan. (Deal with the issue as necessary)
5. Replace the proximity sensors (PCB13) and proximity sensor board if
the abnormal value is detected after steps 2 and 3.
6. Turn on the main power on and perform steps 1, 2, and 3 again.
7. If the SC is not resolved, turn the main power off and replace the harness
which connects proximity sensors (PCB13) and proximity sensor board.
8. If the SC is still not resolved, there is a possibility that the other parts of
the machine such as the connector at the controller side or the harness
between proximity sensor board and BICU (PCB11) are broken.

SC870-00 B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.) (The other errors
except for the following branch numbers.)
SC870-01 B Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing the Address
Book is missing.)
SC870-02 B Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but the module
required for encryption (DESS) is missing.)
SC870-03 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store
internal Address Book.)
SM 7-141 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

delivery sender.)
delivery destination.)
information required for LDAP search.)
SC870-07 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to initialize entries required for
machine operation.)
SC870-08 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: HDD is present but the
space for storing the Address Book is unusable.)
SC870-09 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Inconsistency in the
NVRAM area used for storing settings required for Address Book
configuration.)
SC870-10 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Cannot make a directory for
storing the Address Book in the SD/USB Flash ROM.)
SC870-11 B Address Book data error (On startup: Inconsistency in Address Book entry
number.)
SC870-20 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to initialize file.)
SC870-21 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to generate file.)
SC870-22 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to open file.)
SC870-23 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to write to file.)
SC870-24 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to read file.)
SC870-25 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to check file size.)
SC870-26 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to delete data.)
SC870-27 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to add data.)
SC870-30 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache when
searching in the machine Address Book. delivery destination/sender.)
SC870-31 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache during
LDAP search.)
SC870-32 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache while
searching the WS-Scanner Address Book.)
SC870-41 B Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from cache.)
SC870-50 B Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the Address
Book encryption status.)
SC870-51 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to create directory
required for conversion between plaintext and encrypted text.)
SC870-52 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from plaintext
to encrypted text.)
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-142 SM
SC800: Controller

SC870-53 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from
encrypted text to plaintext.)
SC870-54 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data inconsistency
6BTroubleshoo
when reading the encrypted Address Book.)
ting
SC870-55 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete file when
changing encryption setting.)
SC870-56 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the file that
records the encryption key during an attempt to change the encryption
setting.)
SC870-57 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to move a file during an
attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-58 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete a directory
during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-59 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected a resource shortage
during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-60 B Address Book data error (Unable to obtain the on/off setting for administrator
authentication.)
When an error related to the Address Book is detected during startup or
operation.
• Software bug
• Inconsistency of Address Book source location (machine/delivery
server/LDAP server)
• Inconsistency of Address Book encryption setting or encryption key
(NVRAM or HDD was replaced individually without formatting the
Address Book)
• Address Book storage device (SD/HDD) was temporarily removed or
hardware configuration does not match the application configuration.
• Address Book data corruption was detected.
Install the device that contains address book information properly, and turn
the main power off/on. If SC occurs again, do the following steps.
1. After installing the HDD, or SD/USB ROM, execute SP5-846-046 (UCS
Setting).
Wait more than 3 seconds, then execute SP5-832 (HDD Formatting).
Procedure after SC870 is cleared
1. If there is backup data in the SD card or Web Image Monitor, restore the
address book data. (To restore from an SD card, enter the encryption
password which is the same as when you enter to backup.)
SM 7-143 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

SC871-01 D FCU error
An error occurred when the controller detects FCU defective.
• Time-out error
• Abnormal Parameter
2. Update the firmware if more recent firmware was released.

SC871-02 D FCU job error (Recovery possible)
This SC occurs when the FCU has detected a job error (failure to start or
complete a job) that may be recovered by auto reboot.
-

SC871-03 D FCU job error (Recovery not possible)
This SC occurs when the FCU has detected a job error (failure to start or
complete a job) that may be recovered by auto reboot.
-

SC872-00 B HDD mail reception error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned
on.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007: HDD Formatting: Mail RX Data).).
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Partly received partial mail messages.
• Already-read statuses of POP3-received messages (All messages on
the mail server are handled as new messages).
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-144 SM
SC800: Controller

SC873-00 B HDD mail sending error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned
on.
6BTroubleshoo
• HDD defective
ting
• Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007: HDD Formatting: Mail RX Data).
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Sender’s mail text
• Default sender name/password (SMB (PCB22)/FTP/NCP)
• Administrator mail address
• Scanner delivery history

SC874-05 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Read error
SC874-06 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Write error
SC874-09 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No response from HDD
SC874-10 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Error in Kernel
SC874-12 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated partition
SC874-13 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No device file
SC874-14 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Start option error
SC874-15 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated sector number
SC874-16 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : failure in performing hdderase
SC874-41 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Other fatal errors
SC874-42 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : End by cancellation
SC874-61 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : library error
to -65
SC874-66 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unavailable
SC874-67 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Erasing not finished
SC874-68 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Normal)
SC874-69 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Abnormal)
SC874-70 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unauthorized library
SC874-99 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : other errors
An error occurred while data was being erased on HDD or NVRAM.
• Error detected in the HDD data delete program
• Error detected in the NVRAM data delete program
• The “Delete All” option was not set
SM 7-145 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

• Turn the main power switch off and back on, and then execute "Erase
All Memory" under UP mode again. (However, if there is a defective
sector or other problem with the hard disk, the error will persist even
after trying the above.)
• If the "Delete All" option is not installed when this error occurs, install
the option.

SC875-01 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error)
SC875-02 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure)
An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase
data/failed to logically format HDD)
• HDD logical formatting failed.
• The modules failed to erase data.

SC876-00 D Log Data Error
An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
• Damaged log data file.
• Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed.
• Inconsistency of encryption key between NV-RAM and HDD.
• Software bug.
Try the SC876-01 to -99 solutions listed below. If it is not solved, do the
following steps (for when only an HDD is replaced):
1. Disconnect the HDD and turn ON the main power.
2. Execute SP5-801-019 (Memory Clear: LCS Memory Clr) to Initialize the
LCS settings.
4. Connect the HDD and turn ON the main power.
5. Execute SP5-832-004 (HDD Formatting (Job Log)).
The following step is to configure the logging/encryption setting again.

SC877-00 B Data Overwrite Security error
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-146 SM
SC800: Controller

Auto Erase Memory function of the Data Overwrite Security is enabled but it
cannot be done.
• Data Overwrite Security SD card is damaged.
6BTroubleshoo
• Data Overwrite Security SD card has been removed.
ting
• If the SD card is damaged, prepare a new Data Overwrite Security SD
card and replace the NVRAM.
• If the SD card has been removed, turn the main power OFF, and reinstall
the Data Overwrite Security.

SC878-00 D TPM authentication error
TPM electronic recognition failure
• Update of system module attempted without correct update path
• USB flash memory not operating correctly
Trusted Platform Module
• In computing, Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is both the name of a published specification
detailing a secure crypto processor that can store cryptographic keys that protect
information, as well as the general name of implementations of that specification often
called the "TPM chip" or "TPM Security Device" (as designated in certain Dell BIOS
settings).
SC878-01 D USB flash error
There is a problem in the file system of the USB flash memory.
USB Flash system files corrupted

SC878-02 D TPM error
An error occurred in either TPM or the TPM driver
TPM not operating correctly

SC878-03 D TCSD error
An error occurred in the TPM software stack.
• TPM, TPM software cannot start
SM 7-147 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC800: Controller

• A file required by TPM is missing

SC878-20 D Random number test error
An error was detected when a random number table was generated during a
self-test.
TPM is defective
• Replace the controller board (PCB18) if the SC occurs again.

SC878-21 D DESS self-test error
The power-on self-test for TPM failed at startup when the controller
encryption software was tested.
TPM firmware or CPU is defective

SC880-00 D MLB error
Reply to MLB access was not returned within a specified time.
MLB defective
• Replace the MLB.
• Remove the MLB.

SC882-01 A Smart Operation Panel software verification error
Smart Operation Panel verification was executed and an invalid result
returned.
• The Smart Operation Panel software has corrupted the memory.
• An unauthorized application has been installed on Smart Operation
Panel.
• Reinitialize Smart Operation Panel or rewrite the firmware.

SC890-01 A PaaS* function: Tampering detection
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-148 SM
SC800: Controller

PaaS data in NVRAM and on USB flash drive do not match at startup.
-
Activate PaaS => Install => After successful installation, reboot.
6BTroubleshoo
Notes on application:
ting
Before attempting recovery, check whether the device is registered to
PaaS-PF. If it is, cancel the registration. The SC is resolved by rebooting after
successful installation.

SC890-02 A PaaS function: Suspended
This SC occurs when the PaaS function is suspended because of an internal
or external factor (receiving a request from PaaS-PF to suspend).
-
The warning dialog box displayed when this SC occurs contains instructions.
Follow the instructions to solve the problem.
* PaaS stands for “Printer as a Service”. It is a remote service like the @remote service.
SC899-00 D Software performance error (signal reception end)
Unknown software error occurred.
Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally.
In the case of a hardware defect
• Replace the hardware.
In the case of a software error
• Try updating the firmware.
SM 7-149 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC900: Others
7.10 SC900: OTHERS
7.10.1 SC900 (ENGINE)

SC954-00 D Printer image setting error
The settings required for image processing using the printer controller are not
sent from the BICU (PCB11).
Software defective
Replace BICU (PCB11).

SC955-00 D Memory setting error
The settings that are required for image processing using the memory are
not sent from the BICU (PCB11).
Software defective
• Replace HDD.

SC965-00 D Print Start Error
During print processing, another command to start printing was received.
Software bug
Software version up

SC995-01 D CPM setting error 1
Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification
code.
Details:
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of BICU (PCB11)
replacement or malfunctioning.
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM
replacement
The machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does
not match.
• Enter the machine serial number using SP5-811, and then turn the
power on/off.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-150 SM
SC900: Others

• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
code.
Details:
Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM replacement
or malfunctioning.
not match.
• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.
• Download data on the NV-RAM using SP5-825.

code.
Details:
Unable to recognize machine identification code because the controller was
replaced incorrectly or is malfunctioning.
not match.
Replace it with a specified controller.

code.
not match.
Return the parts to the original configuration, and then replace them
according to the manual.

SC900-00 A Electric counter error
SM 7-151 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC900: Others

The electric total counter value is out of specification.
Error is detected when increasing the total counter.
• Unexpected NV-RAM is attached.
• NV-RAM defective
• NV-RAM data corrupted.
• Data written to unexpected area because of external factor etc.
• The count requested by the SRM on receiving PRT is not completed.
Replace the NV-RAM.

SC920-02 B Printer error 1 (WORK memory cannot be acquired)
SC920-04 B Printer application error (filter process aborted)
An error is detected in the application, and it cannot run.
• Software bug
• Unexpected hardware configuration (such as insufficient memory)
• Turn the main power OFF and ON.
• Increase the memory storage capacity.

SC921-00 B Printer application error (Resident font not found)
Resident fonts cannot be found at printer startup.
Preinstalled font files are absent.
Turn the main power OFF and ON.

SC926-01 D Log transfer function error
The capture operation timeout occurred when the capture setting and log
encryption setting are ON.
• Continuously capture data transmission failure
• Continuously capture data conversion failure
• Software bug
Automatic reboot is performed.

SC991-00 C Recoverable software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
SC991 covers recoverable errors as opposed toCS990.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-152 SM
SC900: Others

• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
6BTroubleshoo
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.
ting
Logging only

SC992-00 D Undefined SC issued.
An SC, that is not controlled by the system, occurred.
• An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly, etc.
• Basically a software bug.
Turn the main power OFF and ON.

SC997-00 D Application function selection error
The application selected by the operation panel key operated abnormally (No
response, abnormal ending).
Software bug (mainly the application)
• Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the application
program.
• Check if the combination of downloaded programs are correct.

SC998-00 D Application start error
• No application was registered to system within a specified time after the
main power was turned on.
(No application starts/All applications have been terminated abnormally)
• Application started but cannot be drawn now for some reason.
• Software bug (mainly the application)
• The optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the application program.
Are not installed correctly.
• Turn the main power OFF and ON.
• Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards.
• Check the combination of programs.
SM 7-153 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545
7.11 SC540 TO SC545

This section is a summary of some of the most common fusing unit SC codes that require your
attention.
• These are fatal fusing unit errors. Once one of these SC codes appears, the machine
cannot be used until the service technician clears the error by entering and exiting the SP
mode, solves the problem, and then power cycle the machine.
• There are three machines in this series (IM 7000, IM 8000, and IM 9000). Make sure all
replacement parts are the correct ones for the machine you are servicing.
• To prevent a fire, never attempt to reset a blown thermostat by manipulating the

exposed edges of the black cover with a screwdriver, or by hitting it on a table.
• A thermostat that has been reset manually could fail and cause a fire.
• Always replace a blown thermostat with a new one.
7.11.2 SC540 FUSING WEB MOTOR ERROR

Please follow the steps in order as presented below.
Confirm failure to feed

2. Paper fails to feed continuously for 1 min., and SC error recurs?
3. If the SC error does not recur > End.
4. If the SC error recurs, go to .
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-154 SM
SC540 to SC545
Web drive gears
6BTroubleshoo
ting
1. Check the web drive gears [1] for paper scraps, paper dust, or any other stray materials
jammed into the gears.
2. Remove any foreign material.
3. Any gears damaged or broken? > Replace the web unit.
5. Determine if paper feed has resumed, and then see if the SC error recurs.
Web motor (M9)
1. Replace web motor (M9) [1].

3. Determine if paper feed has resumed, and then see if the SC error recurs.
SM 7-155 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545
IOB (PCB1) connections
1. Reset the connection of the harness at CN252, cycle the machine off/on, and then see if
the SC error recurs.
IOB (PCB1)
1. Replace IOB (PCB1), cycle the machine off/on, and then see if the SC code recurs.
Web motor harnesses
1. Check the harnesses between the web motor (M9) and the paper exit drawer connectors.
2. Check the harness insulation for signs of damage.
3. Before you replace a harness, confirm that the replacement is the correct type for the
machine. The harnesses are slightly different for the IM 7000, IM 8000, IM 9000.
4. Cycle the machine off/on, and then see if the SC code recurs.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-156 SM
SC540 to SC545
Paper exit unit harnesses

1. Check the harnesses between the paper exit unit drawer connector and the IOB (PCB1) for
6BTroubleshoo
disconnections or damaged insulation
ting
2. Replace damaged harnesses.
3. Before you replace a harness, confirm that the replacement is the correct type for the
machine. The harnesses are slightly different for the IM 7000, IM 8000, IM 9000.
4. Cycle the machine off/on, and then see if the SC error recurs.
7.11.3 SC542 FUSING WARM-UP ERROR 1: CENTER

THERMISTOR
Error duplication
For your safety and to prevent damage to the machine, once the SC occurs start to
troubleshoot the problem immediately with the power supply check below (do not attempt to
duplicate the error).
Go to .
Power supply voltage level

1. Do SP1913-002 and check the displayed value to determine if it deviates from the voltage
rated for the machine.
2. If the voltage is lower than rated voltage, investigate the power supply at the client work
site.
3. If the power supply is not higher than the rated voltage > Got to
SM 7-157 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545
Center NC sensor position
1. Make sure that the center NC sensor [1] is installed correctly, and that the area around the
sensor is free of paper dust and other material.
2. If the NC sensor is not aligned correctly, re-install it at the correct position.
3. Clean the sensor and the area around the sensor.
4. Next, cycle the machine off/on to see if the SC error recurs.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-158 SM
SC540 to SC545
Thermostats
6BTroubleshoo
ting
1. Check the condition of the thermostats.
2. Surface of a thermostat is blackened and bowed outward, or has pushed in? These are
signs that the thermostat is blown and cannot conduct current.
3. Replace the thermostat.
Fusing lamp connections
1. Inspect the fusing lamp connections at the front [1] and rear [2] of the fusing unit and make
sure that they are set correctly.
2. Harness disconnected, or only half connected? Re-connect the loose harness.
SM 7-159 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545
Fusing lamp filaments
1. Remove the lamps [1] and inspect each fusing lamp for broken filaments inside the lamp.
2. Any filaments broken? Replace the fusing lamp.
AC control board connections
1. Reset the connections of the harnesses at CN985, CN986, CN994.

2. Cycle the machine off/on to see if the SC error recurs.
AC control board
1. Replace AC control board.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-160 SM
SC540 to SC545
6BTroubleshoo
ting
1. Reset the connections of the harnesses at CN270, CN281.
IOB (PCB1)
Harnesses
Harnesses in poor condition (broken or insulation damaged and causing short circuits).
1. Check the harnesses between the fusing unit and AC control board and IOB, and replace
them if you see any damage.
2. Make sure that the harnesses are correct for the machine. For example, the harnesses for
the IM 7000 are not the same as those for the IM 9000.
3. After replacing the harnesses, cycle the machine off to see if the error recurs.
7.11.4 SC543 FUSING LAMP OVERHEAT ERROR 1 (SOFTWARE)

Error duplication
troubleshoot the problem immediately (do not attempt to duplicate the error).
Go to .
SM 7-161 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545
End thermistor alignment
1. Check the area between the end thermistor [1] and the hot roller for paper dust or other dirt.
2. Area around the thermistor dirty? > Clean the thermistor and surrounding area.
3. Make sure that the thermistor is securely fastened and not floating free.
End thermistor damage
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-162 SM
SC540 to SC545
1. Check the end thermistor [1] for bending, warping, etc.

2. If the thermistor is bent out of alignment and not in contact with the roller, replace the
thermistor.
6BTroubleshoo
ting

AC control board
IOB (PCB1) connection

SM 7-163 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545

IOB (PCB1)
Harnesses
1. Check the condition of the harnesses between the fusing unit and AC control board and
IOB (PCB1) (broken wires, worn insulation can cause short circuits)
2. Replace the harnesses if you see any damage.
3. Make sure that the replacement harnesses are correct for the machine. For example, the
harnesses for the IM 7000 are not the same as those for the IM 9000.
7.11.5 SC544 FUSING LAMP OVERHEAT ERROR 1: HARDWARE

Error duplication
troubleshoot the problem immediately (do not attempt to duplicate the error).
Go to .
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-164 SM
SC540 to SC545
End thermistor alignment
6BTroubleshoo
ting
1. Check the area between the end thermistor [1] and the fusing roller for paper dust or other
dirt.
2. Area around the thermistor dirty? > Clean the thermistor and surrounding area.
3. Make sure that the thermistor is securely fastened and not floating free.
End thermistor damage check

1. Check the end thermistor for bending, warping, etc.
2. If the thermistor is bent out of alignment and not in contact with the roller, replace the
thermistor.
SM 7-165 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545
1. In the center of the fusing unit, check the NC sensor [1] for misalignment.

AC control board
1. Replace AC control board, cycle the machine off/on, and then see if the SC code recurs.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-166 SM
SC540 to SC545

4. IOB (PCB1) check
IOB (PCB1) Connections
6BTroubleshoo
ting
IOB
1. Replace IOB.
Harnesses
IOB (broken wires, worn insulation can cause short circuits)
7.11.6 SC545 FUSING LAMP OVERHEAT ERROR 2: CENTER

LAMP
Duplication of the error

SM 7-167 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545
troubleshoot the problem immediately with the power supply check below (do not attempt to
duplicate the error).
Go top .
Power supply voltage level

1. Do SP1913-002 and check the displayed value to determine if it deviates from the voltage
rated for the machine.
2. If the voltage is lower than rated voltage, investigate the power supply at the client work
site.
3. If the power supply is not higher than the rated voltage > Got to
1. Make sure that the center NC sensor [1] is installed correctly, and that the area around the
sensor is free of paper dust and other material.
3. Clean the sensor and the area around the sensor.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-168 SM
SC540 to SC545
Thermostats
6BTroubleshoo
ting
1. Check the condition of the thermostats.
2. Surface of a thermostat is blackened and bowed outward, or has pushed in? These are
signs that the thermostat is blown and cannot conduct current.
3. Replace the thermostat.
Fusing lamp connections
1. Inspect the fusing lamp connections at the front [1] and rear [2] of the fusing unit and make
sure that they are set correctly.
2. Harness disconnected, or only half connected? > Re-connect the loose harness.
SM 7-169 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SC540 to SC545
Fusing lamp filaments
1. Inspect each fusing lamp [1] for broken filaments inside the lamp.
2. Any filaments broken? Replace the fusing lamp.

AC control board
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-170 SM
SC540 to SC545
6BTroubleshoo
ting
IOB
1. Replace IOB, cycle the machine off/on, and then see if the SC code recurs.
Harnesses
IOB (broken wires, worn insulation can cause short circuits)
SM 7-171 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Jam Detection
7.12 JAM DETECTION
7.12.1 PAPER JAM CODE DISPLAY

A jam code letter and number indicates the location of the jam as shown below.
7.12.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES

Here are lists of SC codes that are printed in the SMC report; they do not appear on the
operation panel display.
ADF
Jam Cause Late Lag Stay Position
code Jam Jam Jam display
13 Separation Sensor (S82): Late Jam P
63 Separation Sensor (S82): Lag Jam P
14 Skew Correction Sensor (S81): Late P
Jam
64 Skew Correction Sensor (S81): Lag P
Jam
15 Interval Sensor (S86): Late Jam P
65 Interval Sensor (S86): Lag Jam P
16 Original Registration Sensor (S88): P
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-172 SM
Jam Detection

Late Jam
66 Original Registration Sensor (S88): P
6BTroubleshoo
Lag Jam
ting
17 Original Exit Sensor (S87): Late Jam P
67 Original Exit Sensor (S87): Lag Jam P
239 Misfeed: Original Removed P
1 Initial jam P
1 Overload jam P
99 Double-feed Detection Jam P
1 Small Paper Feeding Unit Removal P
Jam
1 Small Paper Feeding Unit Detection P
Error
Main Machine
No. Location Late Lag Stay Position
Jam Jam Jam display
001 1st Paper Feed SN A1
001 1st Vertical Transport SN A1
001 2nd Paper Feed SN A1
001 2nd Vertical Transport SN A1
001 3rd Paper Feed SN A1
001 3rd Vertical Transport SN A1
001 4th Paper Feed SN A1
001 4th Vertical Transport SN A1
001 Relay SN B
001 Registration SN B/C
001 Fusing Exit SN D
001 Exit Unit Entrance SN E
001 Exit Unit Exit SN E
001 Duplex Entrance SN E
001 Duplex Exit SN E
001 Duplex Transport SN 1 Z
003 1st Paper Feed SN: Late A1
SM 7-173 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Jam Detection
No. Location Late Lag Stay Position

Jam Jam Jam display
004 2nd Paper Feed SN: Late A1
005 3rd Paper Feed SN: Late A1
006 4th Paper Feed SN: Late (Japan Only) A1
008 1st Vertical Transport SN: Late A1
009 2nd Vertical Transport SN: Late A1
010 3rd Vertical Transport SN: Late A1
011 4th Vertical Transport SN: Late B
012 Relay SN: Late B
013 Registration SN: Late D
014 Fusing Exit SN: Late D
015 Exit Unit Entrance SN: Late E
016 Exit Unit Exit SN: Late E
019 Duplex Entrance SN: Late E
020 Duplex Transport SN 1: Late E
021 Duplex Transport SN 2: Late Z
022 Duplex Transport SN 3: Late Z
023 Duplex Exit SN: Late E
034 By-pass Paper Feed SN: Late A2
053 1st Paper Feed SN: Lag A1
054 2nd Paper Feed SN: Lag A1
055 3rd Paper Feed SN: Lag A1
056 4th Paper Feed SN: Lag (Japan Only) A1
058 1st Vertical Transport SN: Lag A1
059 2nd Vertical Transport SN: Lag A1
060 3rd Vertical Transport SN: Lag A1
061 4th Vertical Transport SN: Lag (Japan A1
Only)
062 Relay SN: Lag B
063 Registration SN: Lag B/C
066 Paper Exit SN: Lag E
069 Duplex Entrance SN: Lag E
071 Duplex Transport SN 2: Lag Z
072 Duplex Transport SN 3: Lag Z
LCIT RT4080
Jam code Cause Late Jam Lag Jam Stay Jam Position display
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-174 SM
Jam Detection
001 LCT Feed SN U
001 LCT Relay SN B/U
007 LCT Feed SN: Late U
6BTroubleshoo
057 LCT Feed SN: Lag U
ting
024 LCT Relay SN: Late B/U
074 LCT Relay SN: Lag B/U
Finisher SR4150, Booklet Finisher SR4160

1 Entrance Sensor (S17) R1-R5
1 Horizontal Transport Sensor (S13) R1-R5
1 Switchback Transport Sensor (S14) R1-R5
1 Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S20) R1-R5
1 Shift Tray Exit Sensor (S22) R1-R5
1 Booklet Exit Sensor (S6) R6-R11
*Booklet Finisher SR4160 only
150 Entrance Sensor (S17) late jam R1-R5
151 Entrance Sensor (S17) lag jam R1-R5
152 Horizontal Transport Sensor (S13) late R1-R5
jam
153 Horizontal Transport Sensor (S13) lag R1-R5
jam
154 Switchback Transport Sensor (S14) R1-R5
late jam
155 Switchback Transport Sensor (S14) lag R1-R5
jam
156 Proof exit unit late jam R1-R5
157 Proof exit unit lag jam R1-R5
158 Shift exit unit late jam R1-R5
159 Shift exit unit lag jam R1-R5
160 Booklet Exit late jam R6-R11
161 Booklet Exit lag jam R6-R11
162 Entrance Transport Motor (DCM1) Jam R1-R5
163 Horizontal Transport Motor (DCM2) R1-R5
SM 7-175 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Jam Detection

Jam
164 Pre-stack Transport Motor (DCM5) R1-R5
Jam
165 Transport Motor (DCM3) Jam R1-R5
166 Exit Motor (DCM4) Jam R1-R5
167 Paper Stacking Holder Motor (DCM8) R1-R5
Jam
168 Paper Exit Guide Plate Motor (STM4) R1-R5
Jam
169 Punch Drive Motor (DCM13) jam R1-R5
170 Punch Unit Movement Motor (STM13) R1-R5
Jam
171 Punch Registration Motor (STM14) jam R1-R5
172 Lower Junction Gate Motor (STM2) R1-R5
Jam
173 Jogger Motor (STM1) Jam R1-R5
174 Positioning Roller Motor (DCM14) Jam R1-R5
175 Feed-out Belt Motor (DCM7) Jam R1-R5
176 Corner Stapler Movement Motor R1-R5
(STM7) Jam
177 Corner Stapler Drive Motor Jam R1-R5
178 Booklet Jogger Motor (STM11) Jam R6-R11
179 Booklet Jogging Pawl Movement Motor R6-R11
(STM8)
180 Booklet Bottom Fence Motor (STM12) R6-R11
181 Booklet Stapler Motor R6-R11
182 Shift Roller Drive Motor (DCM11) R6-R11
183 Fold Transport Motor (STM9) R6-R11
184 Press Fold Motor (STM10) R6-R11
185 Tray Lift Motor (DCM9) Jam R1-R5
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-176 SM
Jam Detection

186 Shift Motor (STM3) Jam R1-R5
187 Shift Jogger Motor (STM1) (Front) Jam R1-R5
6BTroubleshoo
188 Shift Jogger Motor (STM1) (Rear) Jam R1-R5
ting
189 Fence Lift Motor (STM17) Jam R1-R5
190 Stacking Sponge Roller Lift R1-R5
Motor (DCM6) Jam
191 Leading Edge Guide Motor (STM6) R1-R5
Jam
192 Positioning Roller Motor (DCM14) Jam R1-R5
193 Paper Guide Motor (STM18) Jam R1-R5
194 Door open jam R1-R5
195 Display non-performing jam R1-R5
196 Disable paper stop jam R1-R5
197 Downstream device software internal R1-R5
error
Finisher SR4140
1 Entrance Sensor (S1) R1-3
1 Paper Transport Sensor (S8) R1-3
1 Shift Tray Exit Sensor (S10) R1-3
1 Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S5) R1-3
1 Staple Exit Sensor (S24) R4-8
1 Pre-stack Paper Sensor (S23) R4-8
111 Door open jam R1-3
120 Display non-performing jam R1-3
118 Disable paper stop jam R1-3
119 Software internal error R1-3
100 Entrance Sensor (S1) late jam R1-3
101 Entrance Sensor (S1) lag jam R1-3
121 Paper Transport Sensor (S8) late R1-3
jam
122 Paper Transport Sensor (S8) lag jam R1-3
104 Shift exit unit late jam R1-3
105 Shift exit unit lag jam R1-3
SM 7-177 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Jam Detection

102 Proof exit unit late jam R1-3
103 Proof exit unit lag jam R1-3
106 Staple Tray Exit late jam R4-8
107 Staple Tray Exit lag jam R4-8
108 Pre-stack late jam R4-8
109 Pre-stack lag jam R4-8
110 Release jam R4-8
123 Proof Tray Junction Gate Motor (M7) R1-3
jam
124 Stapler Junction Gate Motor (M8) R1-3
jam
125 Pre-stack Junction Gate Motor (M9) R4-8
jam
126 Pre-stack Stopper Motor (M20) jam R4-8
127 Drag-in Motor (M11) jam R4-8
128 Paper Hold Center Motor (M14) jam R4-8
129 Paper Hold Front Motor (M15) jam R4-8
130 Paper Hold Rear Motor (M16) jam R4-8
113 Jogger Motor (M17) jam R4-8
116 Feed Out Belt Motor (M18) jam R4-8
131 Stapler Front/Rear Motor (M1) jam R4-8
132 Stapler Rotation Motor (M2) jam R4-8
133 Leading Edge Stopper Motor (M12) R4-8
jam
134 Jogger Bottom Fence Motor (M19) R4-8
jam
135 Exit Open/Close Motor (M22) jam R1-3
114 Shift Motor (M4) jam R1-3
136 Drag-in Drive Motor (M5) jam R1-3
112 Tray Upper/Lower Motor (M24) jam R1-3
115 Staple Motor (M3) jam R4-8
117 Punching Motor (M62) jam R1-3
137 Punch Unit Motor (M31) jam R1-3
138 Jogger Motor (M29) jam R1-3
139 Jogger Top Fence Motor (M30) jam R1-3
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-178 SM
Jam Detection
Punch Unit PU 5050

6BTroubleshoo
149 Main Machine Command Error R1 to 5
Jam
ting
Multi-Folding Unit FD4020
1 Entrance Sensor (SEN18) N1 to N5
1 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor (S24) N1 to N5
1 Top Tray Exit Sensor (SEN17) N1 to N5
1 Top Tray Paper Path Sensor (SEN21) N1 to N5
1 Registration Sensor (SEN11) N6 to 22
1 1st Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN15) N6 to 22
1 2nd Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN6) N6 to 22
1 3rd Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN2) N6 to 22
1 Horizontal Transport Paper Path Sensor N1 to N5
(SEN20)
1 Horizontal Path Paper Sensor (SEN25) N1 to N5
1 Bypass Entrance Paper Sensor (SEN3) N6 to 22
1 Bypass Exit Paper Sensor (SEN4) N6 to 22
200 Entrance Sensor (SEN18) late jam N1 to N5
201 Entrance Sensor (SEN18) lag jam N1 to N5
202 Top Tray Exit Sensor (SEN17) late jam N1 to N5
203 Top Tray Exit Sensor (SEN17) lag jam N1 to N5
204 Straight-through exit late jam N1 to N5
205 Straight-through exit lag jam N1 to N5
206 1st Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN15) late N6 to N22
jam
207 1st Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN15) lag N6 to N22
jam
208 2nd Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN6) late N6 to N22
jam
209 2nd Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN6) lag N6 to N22
jam
210 3rd Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN2) late N6 to N22
jam
SM 7-179 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Jam Detection

211 3rd Stopper Paper Sensor (SEN2) lag N6 to N22
jam
212 Registration correction jam N1 to N5
213 Top Tray Transport Motor (MT2) jam N1 to N5
214 Entrance JG motor (MT1) jam N1 to N5
215 1st Stopper Motor (MT8) jam N6 to N22
216 2nd Stopper Motor (MT12) jam N6 to N22
217 3rd Stopper Motor (MT17) jam N6 to N22
218 Dynamic Roller Lift Motor (MT11) jam N6 to N22
219 Registration Roller Release Motor N6 to N22
(MT10) jam
220 Fold Plate Motor (MT9) jam N6 to N22
221 Jogger Fence Motor (MT6) jam N6 to N22
222 Direct Send JG HP Motor (MT15) jam N6 to N22
223 FM6 Pawl Motor (MT16) jam N6 to N22
224 Door open jam N1 to 5
225 Display non-performing jam N1 to 5
226 Disable paper stop jam N1 to 5
227 Software internal error N1 to 5
Mail Box CS4010

1 Transport Sensor 1 W
350 Transport Sensor 1: Late Jam W
351 Transport Sensor 1: Lag Jam W
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-180 SM
Jam Detection
360 Main Machine Data Corrupt W
6BTroubleshoo
Cover Interposer Tray CI4040
ting
1 Feed Sensor (S27, S54, S58) Q
1 Exit Sensor Q
230 Feed Sensor: Late Jam or Lag Q
Jam
231 Exit Sensor: Late Jam or Lag Jam Q
232 Bottom Plate Motor Jam Q

1 Paper Entrance Sensor (S9) N1
1 Pre-registration Sensor N2 to N12
1 Registration Sensor (S1) N2 to N12
1 Paper Stack Sensor (S2) N2 to N12
1 FWD/RVS Sensor 1 (S13) N2 to N12
1 FWD/RVS Sensor 2 (S14) N2 to N12
1 Crease HP Sensor (S15) N2 to N12
1 Bridge Paper Exit Sensor N2 to N12
1 Paper Exit Tray Paper Sensor (S8) N2 to N12
1 Folded Paper Sensor (S18) N2 to N12
1 Purge Paper Sensor (S19) N2 to N12
240 Door open jam N1
241 Display non-performing jam N1
242 Disable paper stop jam N1
243 Software internal error N1
244 Paper Entrance Sensor (S9) Late N1
Jam
245 Paper Entrance Sensor (S9) Lag Jam N1,N2 to N12
246 Pre-registration Sensor late jam N1
247 Pre-registration Sensor lag jam N2 to N12
248 Registration Sensor (S1) Late Jam N2 to N12
SM 7-181 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Jam Detection

249 Registration Sensor (S1) Lag Jam N2 to N12
250 Paper Stack Sensor (S2) late jam N2 to N12
251 Paper Stack Sensor (S2) lag jam N2 to N12
252 FWD/RVS Sensor 1 (S13) late jam N2 to N12
253 FWD/RVS Sensor 1 (S13) lag jam N2 to N12
254 FWD/RVS Sensor 2 (S14) late jam N2 to N12
255 FWD/RVS Sensor 2 (S14) lag jam N2 to N12
256 Crease HP Sensor (S15) late jam N2 to N12
257 Crease HP Sensor (S15) lag jam N2 to N12
258 Bridge Paper Exit Sensor late jam N2 to N12
259 Bridge Paper Exit Sensor lag jam N2 to N12
late jam
262 Paper Entrance Motor (M8) jam N1
263 Pre-registration Motor (M6) jam N2 to N12
264 Registration Motor (M4) jam N2 to N12
265 Paper Stack Motor (M1) jam N2 to N12
266 Folding Motor (M13) jam N2 to N12
267 FWD/RVS Motor 2 (M14) jam N2 to N12
268 Crease Motor (M5) jam N2 to N12
269 Paper Transport Motor 1 (M7) jam N2 to N12
270 Paper Transport Motor 1 (M11) jam N2 to N12
271 Paper Exit Tray Motor (M12) jam N2 to N12
272 Entrance JG Motor (M10) jam N1
273 Paper Exit JG Motor (M9) jam N2 to N12
274 Folding JG Motor (M2) jam N2 to N12
275 Anti-winding Motor (M3) jam N2 to N12

1 Shift Sort Tray: Transport sensor R
281 Shift Sort Tray: Tray lift motor R
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-182 SM
Jam Detection

282 Shift Sort Tray: Tray shift motor R
284 Shift Sort Tray: Door open jam R
6BTroubleshoo
285 Shift Sort Tray: Display R
ting
non-performing jam
286 Shift Sort Tray: Disable paper stop R
jam
287 Shift Sort Tray: Software internal error R
7.12.3 PAPER SIZE CODES

The table below lists the paper size codes. Measurements in the right columns (Main Scan/Sub
Scan Lengths) are 0.1 mm
Size Code Paper Size Orientation Main Scan Sub Scan
005(05H) A4 LEF 2970 2100
006(06H) A5 LEF 2100 1480
014(0EH) B5 LEF 2570 1820
038(26H) 81/2×11(LT) LEF 2794 2159
044(2CH) 51/2×81/2(HLT) LEF 2159 1397
132(84H) A3 SEF 2970 4200
133(85H) A4 SEF 2100 2970
134(86H) A5 SEF 1480 2100
141(8DH) B4 SEF 2570 3640
142(8EH) B5 SEF 1820 2570
160(A0H) 11×17(DLT) SEF 2794 4318
164(A4H) 81/2×14(LG) SEF 2159 3556
166(A6H) 81/2×11(LT) SEF 2159 2794
172(ACH) 51/2×81/2(HLT) SEF 1397 2159
072(48H) 8.5"x13.4"(Oficio) LEF 3404 2159
200(C8H) 8.5"x13.4"(Oficio) SEF 2159 3404
255(FFH) Other - - -
7.12.4 MAIN MACHINE SENSOR LOCATIONS

The illustration below shows the locations of the jam sensors in the main machine.
SM 7-183 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Jam Detection
7.12.5 FREQUENT PAPER JAMS

If there are frequent paper jams, check SP7504 in “Service Tables”. If these locations have
frequent jams, do the procedures described below.
Symptom 1: Jams when paper is fed from a by-pass tray that is not used frequently
If the customer does not use the by-pass tray frequently, the rollers can become worn.
1. Visually check the by-pass tray pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. If these rollers are paler than the rollers in paper trays that are more frequently used,
replace the rollers in the by-pass tray.
• For more details, see Replacement and Adjustment - By-Pass Tray Rollers.
Symptom 2: Jams with noise from the paper feed unit
1. Remove the paper feed unit.
2. Loosen screw [A].
3. Push the motor [B] toward the tray side, then tighten the screw [A].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-184 SM
Jam Detection
4. Loosen screws [C] and [D], let the spring move the unit to the correct position, then tighten
the screws.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
Symptom 3: Other
If none of the two symptoms 1 or 2 applies, do this procedure.
1. Use SP7504 to check the jam counts and find which SPs have high counts.
2. From the table and illustration below, find which gears must be replaced.
Example: For tray 1, if SP7504-012 is high, replace gear A, or if SP7504-008 is high,
replace gear B.
Tray SP7504 12 SP7504 8 SP7504 9 SP7504 10 SP7504 11
Tray 1 Gear [A] Gear [B]
1. Clean the shafts and replace the necessary gears.
2. Replace a gear if its cutout and arrow are not in the same position.
SM 7-185 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Jam Detection
3. When you replace Gear [A] or Gear [B], be sure to put the metal face on the outer side, and
the arrow must be in view.
4. If a replacement gear is not available, do this as a temporary procedure:

• Remove the paper feed unit.
• Remove the gear.
• Clean the gear shaft and inside the gear.
• Attach the gear.
• Install the paper feed unit.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-186 SM
Peripheral Units
7.13 PERIPHERAL UNITS
7.13.1 HEIGHT AND LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
6BTroubleshoo
Before you begin:
ting
• The main machine should be installed first and adjusted to level front-to-back, and
side-to-side.
• Note the settings on the leveling gauge. Due to the length of the paper path with several
optional peripheral units installed, it is extremely important that every unit be leveled to
match the front-to-back and side-to-side measurements of the main machine.
• The height and level of each peripheral unit must be adjusted at installation.
• The height and level of each unit must be adjusted before testing for the presence of skew
and checking that side-to-side registration is correct.
• If an accessory wrench is provided with the machine, use the large end [A] to adjust the
front and rear feet of the main machine.
• The small end of the wrench [B] is for the feet of the peripheral units.
1. If an accessory wrench is provided with the machine, use the large end [A] to adjust the
front and rear feet of the main machine.
2. The small end of the wrench [B] is for the feet of the peripheral units.
Setting the Leveling Shoes
• Do this procedure near each caster where an adjustable bolt is provided.

• The number of leveling shoes will differ, depending on which unit you are leveling.
SM 7-187 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Peripheral Units
1. Turn the lower nut to lower the bolt.
• The upper bold is spot-welded to the frame and does not move.
2. Set a leveling shoe below the bolt.
3. Continue to turn the lower nut until it stops against the shoe.
4. Set a level on the front, rear, and side edges to determine if the unit is level.
5. Adjust the height at each corner until the unit is level.
6. Check the results of the adjustments.

• The top of the first peripheral unit on the left must be at the same height as the left side
of the main machine.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-188 SM
Peripheral Units
• The tops of the other peripheral units on the left where the units are joined must be at
the same height.
• The top of the LCIT on the right must at the same height as the right side of the main
machine.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
• Make sure that the plate at the paper exit on the left side of the main machine [A]
moves freely and is not bent. It must be able to move to handle thick paper.
• Between the right side of the main machine and the LCIT, make sure that the LCIT
guide plate moves freely and does not interfere with the main machine guide plate.
7.13.2 SKEW AND SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION
Overview
The paper feed path is long when more than one peripheral unit is installed. In a longer path,
the cumulative effect of paper skew or deviation in side-to-side registration may require
adjustment.
• Skew [A] occurs when the trailing edge of the paper rotates away from the direction of
paper feed.
• If side-to-side registration shift [B] occurs, the sheet remains straight but shifts left or right
away from center of the paper path.
• Before adjusting skew manually, be sure to enter the SP mode and set SP1206 to "2"
(OFF). This disables side-to-side registration in the main machine’s registration unit.
SM 7-189 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Peripheral Units
Scales
• Skew and side-to-side registration can be checked with graduated scales where paper
exits.
• The scales are provided so that you can visually check and measure the amount of skew or
deviation in side-to-side registration.
• Correction for both skew and side-to-side registration are possible on peripheral units
provided with the graduated scale.
Use either the rear scale or front scale, depending on the type of paper used in your area:
• Rear [A]: DLT SEF
• Front [B]: A3 SEF
Here is a photo that shows the actual scales. It shows the scale on the left side of the Booklet
Finisher Tray. [A] is for DLT, and [B] is for A3.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-190 SM
Peripheral Units
6BTroubleshoo
ting
Here are some general rules for testing and adjusting for paper skew or a shift in side-to-side
registration.
1. After installation of each peripheral device, do some test prints and check for the presence
of skew, and check that side-to-side registration is correct.
2. When you detect a problem with skew or side-to-side registration, do the adjustment on the
joint bracket attached to the peripheral unit upstream of the unit where the problem
occurred.
3. Side-to-side registration is corrected by shifting the upstream joint bracket left or right. (See
the next procedure.)
4. Skew is eliminated by inserting shims under the rear or front end of the joint bracket. These
are attached by screws to the peripheral units before they leave the factory.
Checking Side-to-Side Registration

Do this procedure to confirm that the paper is centered in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream unit.
2. Disconnect the unit to the left of the unit to be tested.
3. Execute a run by feeding paper from Tray 2 of the host machine.
4. When each sheet exits, check the position of the paper on the scale to see if the paper is
centered.
• Read the rear scale for DLT-size paper.
• Read the front scale for A3-size paper.
• The scale graduations are at 2 mm apart.
SM 7-191 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Peripheral Units
5. The paper must not deviate more than ±2 mm on the scale.
[A] Leading/trailing edges centered. No adjustment necessary.

[B] Leading/trailing edges offset to the rear by more than 2 mm. Adjustment required.
[C] Leading/trailing edges offset to the front by more than 2 mm. Adjustment required.
If the edge of the paper is on the scale at the center [A], no adjustment is required.
-or-
If the edge of the paper is ±2 mm off the center line on the scale, adjustment is required. Do
the procedure in the next section.
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration

Each peripheral unit has a single-piece connection bracket. This adjustment can be done for
every unit on the connection bracket attached to the upstream unit
1. Enter the SP mode and set SP1206 to "2" (OFF).
2. Disconnect the peripheral unit from the upstream unit.
3. On the joint bracket attached to the upstream unit, loosen screws [1], [2], [3], [4].
4. Remove bracket [A] ( x1), rotate it 90 degrees, and then re-fasten the screw. Changing
the position of this bracket aligns the oval cut-out horizontally and frees the joint bracket so
it can slide from side to side.
5. Look at scale [B].
6. Slide the bracket to the left or right and tighten the screw.
7. If the deviation from center was toward the front, slide the bracket to the rear and tighten
screw [1].
-or-
If the deviation from center was toward the rear, side the bracket to the front and tighten
screw [1].
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-192 SM
Peripheral Units
8. Tighten screws [2], [3], and [4].
6BTroubleshoo
ting
9. Do another test run, so that you can check the results
10. When you are finished, enter the SP mode and re-set SP1206 to "1".
Detecting Paper Skew

Do this check to detect the presence of skew.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream unit.
2. If a peripheral unit is connected on the left side, disconnect it and pull it away.
3. Execute a straight-through run.
4. Check the scale where each sheet exits.
• The rear scale is for DLT-size paper.
• The front scale [2] is for A3-size paper.
SM 7-193 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Peripheral Units
• Be sure to read the correct scale for the paper size in use.
[A] Centered. No adjustment necessary.

[B] Trailing edge skew to the front, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment required.
[C] Trailing edge skew to the rear, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment required.
Correcting Skew
1. Enter the SP mode and set SP1206 to "2" (OFF).
2. Disconnect the peripheral unit from the upstream unit.
3. Locate and remove the shims from the peripheral unit where the problem occurred.
4. If the peripheral unit is provided with shims, open the front door you will find them attached
to the lower right corner. For example, here is the location for the shims attached to the
Multi Fold Unit.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-194 SM
Peripheral Units

6. Remove the shims.
Inserting Shims
6BTroubleshoo
ting
1. Loosen the screws of the joint bracket attached to the peripheral upstream of the unit
where the problem occurred.
2. Insert a shim and tighten the screws.
3. If the trailing edge of the paper is skewing toward the front of the machine, insert a shim
[A] under the rear end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
-or-
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the rear of the machine, insert a shim [B] under the
front end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
4. Do another run to check the adjustment. If skew is still present, insert another shim.
• Each shim is 2 mm thick.
• Only two shims are provided, so the maximum adjustment is 4 mm (using two shims).
5. Enter the SP mode and re-set SP1206 to "1".
7.13.3 BOOKLET FINISHER CENTER FOLD CORRECTION

If the angle between the bottom fence and fold plate is not correct, this can cause the bottom of
the fold line to slant out of alignment in the direction of paper feed or opposite the direction of
paper feed.
Slant in the direction of paper feed

When sheets are center-folded, the fold line [B] can slant in the direction of paper feed, causing
the front side [C] to be longer than the rear side [D] and cause misalignment [A].
SM 7-195 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Peripheral Units
Slant opposite the direction of paper feed

The fold line [B] can also slant opposite the direction of paper feed, causing the front side [C] to
be shorter than the rear side [D] and cause misalignment [A].
These problems occur if the angle between the bottom fence [1] and fold plate [2] is not correct.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-196 SM
Peripheral Units
How to Correct Misaligned Center Folding

1. Pull out the jogger unit and loosen bottom fence lock screw.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
2. Turn the bottom fence adjustment screw to adjust the angle between the bottom fence and
the folding plate.
• If the center line is slanting in the direction of paper feed, turn the bottom fence
adjustment screw clockwise to raise the bottom fence.
• If the center line is slanting away from the direction of paper feed, turn the bottom
fence adjustment screw counter-clockwise to lower the bottom fence.
To adjust [a]:
SM 7-197 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Peripheral Units
Paper size Clockwise Counterclockwise

B5 0.56 mm 0.55 mm
A4 0.64 mm 0.64 mm
B4 0.79 mm 0.78 mm
A3 0.91 mm 0.90 mm
3. Tighten the bottom fence lock screw.
4. If the adjustment has caused the folding position to shift to left or right, make corrections
with SP6-113.
5. For example, if there is a 3mm gap between the edges as shown below, shift the folding
line “-1.5mm” in the (-) direction.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-198 SM
Peripheral Units
6BTroubleshoo
ting
7.13.4 FINISHER SR4150, BOOKLET FINISHER SR4160
Troubleshooting for Jam at Proof Guide Plate

Symptom
A J151 or J156 Jam occurs when printing out to the proof tray.
• J151: Entrance Sensor : Lag Jam
• J156: Proof Tray Exit Sensor: Late Jam
The paper jam occurs at the R3 guide plate. There is some damage at leading edge of the
jammed paper, which seems to result from being scratched by the pawls.
Cause
The J151/156 jam is caused by incorrect assembly of the proof guide plate. When the proof
guide plate is not at the correct position, the leading edge of the paper is caught by a groove
between the proof guide plate [A] and the R3 guide plate [B]. Then the paper jam occurs.
Solution
Check whether the proof guide plate, which is integrated with the upper cover, is at the correct
position. Check that the screw of the proof guide plate is fixed at the center of the slotted hole.
SM 7-199 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Peripheral Units
• [A]: OK
• [B]: NG
If the screw is not fixed at the center of the slotted hole, remove the three screws shown below.
Then fasten the screws in the order of , , .
• If you remove the proof guide plate for maintenance, make sure that the proof guide
plate is at the correct position as described above after installing it.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-200 SM
Peripheral Units
• Do not modify the magnetic part [B] of the R3 guide plate [A]. If you modify the
magnetic part [B], the R3 guide plate cannot go back to the correct position. Then the
paper jam could occur.
6BTroubleshoo
ting
How to Deal with Stapling Errors Caused by Curls
If stapling errors with face curls with a height greater than 15 mm occurs, take the following
actions:
1. Turn the paper upside down, or feed from LCIT peripherals.
2. Turn ON the anti-humidification heater.
3. Perform a curl correction (if decurler unit is used)
4. Lower the fusing temperature by 5 °C (up to 10°C).
7.13.5 OUTPUT JOGGER UNITS
Jogger Width Adjustment Procedure

If a paper alignment problem occurs as below, do the following procedure to adjust the jogger
width.
1. Place an A4 original (SEF) on the exposure glass.

2. Select [Staple] on the operation panel (you can select any staple location: top or bottom.)
SM 7-201 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Peripheral Units
3. Press [Start].
4. A copy is put out on the staple tray, and is stopped with the jogger not holding the sheet.
5. Check the jogger operation visually in the previous step, and then check the position and
distance of jogger width and sheet.
6. Press the [#] button.

7. Adjust the jogger width with SP6143-004 (Range: -1.5 to +1.5 mm for each paper size).
8. Repeat step 3 through step 6 to complete the adjustment.
9. Adjust the jogger width to be slightly narrower (approximately -0.5 mm) than the paper
width.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-202 SM
Other Problems
7.14 OTHER PROBLEMS
7.14.1 COMMON PROBLEMS
6BTroubleshoo
Problem Check Inspect, Clean, Replace
ting
Dirty Copies Fusing Unit Pressure roller
Jam – Fusing Unit Fusing Unit Hot roller
Jam – Fusing Unit Fusing Unit Hot roller strippers
Jam – Original ADF Pick-up, paper feed, separation rollers
Lines (black or Around the Cleaning blade, cleaning brush
white) Drum
Misfeed – Fusing Fusing Unit Hot roller
Unit
Offset Fusing Unit Hot roller
Poor separation Transfer Belt Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade
Unit
SC300 to SC306 Around the Charge corona wire, charge corona grid, charge corona
Drum wire cleaner.
Skew – Original ADF Pick-up, paper feed, separation rollers
Toner on transfer Transfer Belt Transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade
belt Unit
Wrinkling Fusing Unit Pressure roller
7.14.2 CHECKING IMAGE QUALITY
Resolution
Standard 1:1/Enlargement: 4.5 lines/mm or more
Reduction: 4.5 x M or more mag.
Need
Method
Resolution measured after copying in Text Mode at AE5 notch with Normal
Paper
SM 7-203 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Other Problems
Even Density
Standard Left, right grayscale within 0.1 at 0.2 to 0.6
Need
Method
Right, left density measured after copying in Text Mode at AE5 notch with
Normal Paper.
Magnification Errors
Standards 1:1 Main scan: <±0.5%, Sub scan: <±0.8%
Magnification Main scan: <±1.0%, Sub scan: <±1.0%
What You Need 150 mm scale
Method
1. Set two scales on the exposure glass, and then copy them.
3. Measure 100 mm on the copied images with the actual scale.
Magnification Error Variation

Standard 1:1/Mag.: Sub scan (horizontal, vertical) less than 1.0%
What You 150 mm scale
Need
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-204 SM
Other Problems
Method
6BTroubleshoo
ting
1. Place three 150 mm scales on the exposure glass, and then copy them.
3. Use a scale to measure 100 mm against each scale image (x1, x2, x3) on the
paper.
4. Determine the maximum and minimum deviation (%) from the standard.
5. Calculate the difference between the maximum and minimum deviation.
Notes
• For example, if the three measurements of the scales are 100.4 mm, 99.5 mm,
100.2 mm, then the difference between the maximum and minimum values is
0.9 mm (100.4 – 99.5).
• Set the scales in the main scan direction (horizontal), copy them, and then use
the same method to determine the variation
• For best results, using at least three scales is recommended.
• If you have only one scale, then you can make three copies with the scale at
different positions.
• Please remember that line speed may vary slightly depending on the number
of copies in a job.
7.14.3 REINSTRALLING OCR UNIT

When the OCR unit is installed, its function is stored in the HDD, and its ID information in the
SD card is stored in the NVRAM. So the OCR unit must be installed again when you replace the
HDD and/or NVRAM.
If you have the original SD card and when you replaced:
• Only HDD
• Re-install the unit with the original SD card.
• Only NVRAM
• Re-install with the original SD card if you upload/download of the NVRAM data.
• Order a new SD card and Re-install with the new SD card if you do not upload/download of
the NVRAM data.
• Both the HDD and NVRAM at the same time
• Re-install the original SD card.
SM 7-205 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Other Problems
If you do not have the original SD card, order a new SD card and Re-install with the new SD
card.
• Re-installation procedure is the same as the installation procedure.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-206 SM
Fuses
7.15 FUSES
7.15.1 AC DRIVE BOARD
6BTroubleshoo
Fuse Rating Blown Fuse
ting
NA EU
FU101 15A/250VAC 8A/250VAC SC547-02
FU102 15A/250VAC 8A/250VAC Power switch does not operate.
FU103 Japan only Japan only
FU105 2A/250VAC 2A/250VAC SC547-02
FU106 Japan only Japan only
7.15.2 PSU
NA EU
FU1 15A/250VAC 15A/250VAC SC664-01 (SC log SC664-21, SC991-00(
FU2 15A/250VAC 15A/250VAC No copy icon, SC670-01 at power on, SC log SC899-00
FU3 10A/250VAC 10A/250VAC SC272-10 (SC log SC547-02, SC515-00)
FU4 10A/250VAC 10A/250VAC LCIT, Finisher do not operate, paper jam
SM 7-207 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
Fuses

NA EU
FU5 10A/250VAC 10A/250VAC SC530 (SC log SC531-02, SC531-03, SC531-01,
SC202-00, SC530-07, SC530-05, SC120-00
FU7 10A/250VAC 10A/250VAC Not used. No SC code returned, no abnormal operation.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 7-208 SM
Replacement and Adjustment
8. SMART OPERATION PANEL
8.1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
8.1.1 NFC BOARD
1. Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to "Operation Panel (PCB13)", "Replacement and
Adjustment" in Main Chapters.)
2. Remove the hinge cover [A].
3. Remove the cover of the NFC board [A].
4. Remove the NFC board [A].
8.1.2 LCD
2. Remove the main controller board (Main Controller Board).
3. Remove the connector of the LCD I/F cable [A].
Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable [A].
4. Remove the LCD unit [A].
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
5. Remove the LCD [A].
• After replacing the LCD, perform the following checks.

• LCD Check (LCD Check_1)
• TouchPanel Check (TouchPanel Check)
• Perform "TouchPanel Calibration" (TouchPanel Calibration) and "MultiTouch
Calibration" (MultiTouch Calibration) of the Self Check function.
8.1.3 MICROPHONE
2. Remove the main controller board (Main Controller Board).
3. Remove the LCD unit (LCD_1).
4. Remove the microphone [A].
8.1.4 WI-FI MODULE

2. Remove the base bracket (Main Controller Board).
3. Remove the Wi-Fi module [A].
• After replacing the Wi-Fi module, perform the following checks:

• Wireless LAN Check (Wireless LAN Check)
• Bluetooth Check (Bluetooth Check)
8.1.5 SPEAKER
2. Remove the bottom cover (Main Controller Board).
3. Remove the speaker [A] together with the speaker holder.
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
4. Remove the speaker [A] from the speaker holder [B].
• After replacing the speaker, perform the following check.

• Speaker Check (Speaker Check)
8.1.6 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD

2. Remove the bottom cover [A] ( ×4).
• There are ten hooks inside the operation panel unit. Before removing the
operation panel bottom cover, check the photos below.
3. Remove the base bracket [A].
4. Remove the main controller board [A].
Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable [A] on the main controller board side.
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
• By factory default, the following switches of the DIP switch [A] on the main controller
board are set to ON: No.1, No.3, and No.6. When installing the operation panel unit,
make sure that the DIP switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing
the panel.
• The correct DIP switch setting depends on the MFP. Note the DIP switch settings of
the old operation panel unit before replacing, and apply the same settings to the new
Smart Operation Panel.
The following example is for DIP switch settings when the following switches are set to
ON: No.1, No.3, and No.6 (this is the factory default setting of a service part).
• If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed.

• DIP switch No.1 turns ON/OFF the SC reduction function. Change the setting when
needed.
• 0 (OFF): The SC is displayed on the operation panel when SC672/SC673 occur.

• 1 (ON): If the error is caused by a software defect when SC672/SC673
occur, automatically reboot is performed and the SC is reset. If the error is caused
by a hardware defect when SC672/SC673 occur, the SC is displayed on the
operation panel.
• After replacing the main controller board, perform the following checks:
• LED Check (LED Check)
• Key Check (Key Check)
Mechanism
8.2 MECHANISM
8.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
Hardware Specifications
Components
No. Name No. Name

1 Speaker 9 Microphone
2 Main power indicator 10 Extended Feature key (EX3)
3 USB slot for digital cameras 11 Extended Feature key (EX2)
4 USB slot for NFC card readers 12 Extended Feature key (EX1)
5 NFC tag 13 Control panel reboot key
6 [Check Status] indicator 14 SD card slot
7 Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes) 15 Media access lamp
8 Fax indicator 16 USB slot
Basic Specifications
Category Specification
LCD panel • Size
10.1 inch panel
• Resolution
WSVGA (1024x600)
• Bit width
RGB666 (18 bit color)
• Brightness
250cd/m2 (typ.)
Mechanism
• Backlight
LED Backlight (life: 15,000 hours)
CPU ARM Cortex-A9 Quad Core 1GHz (SoC: MCIMX6Q5EYM10AD)
Touch panel Low load touch panel (recognizes touches to two points)
Memory • Volatile Memory
RAM (DDR3L-1066), 2GB
• Non-Volatile Memory
eMMC NAND, 8GB
• Uses a 16GB product in SLC Mode.

• Program area and data area for the operating system and
applications.
External interfaces • USB Memory
USB2.0 Host Type-A
• SD Card
SD card slot 1ch (SD*1/SDHC*2)
*1 Up to 2GB
*2 Up to 32GB
• USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-A
(for camera, USB keyboard, USB card reader)
• USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-miniB
(for NFC expansion)
Network • Wireless LAN
802.11ac/a/b/g/n (for Taiwan/China/Asia)
802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz only) (for North America/EU/Korea)
• Bluetooth
Bluetooth4.2
Audio input/output Monaural speaker 1ch (output: 1 to 2 W), Microphone
RTC accuracy ±52.56 seconds per month (using external crystal oscillator, 20 ppm)
Hard keys • Extended Feature keys (EX1, EX2, and EX3)
Use for startup in extended mode etc.
• Control panel reboot key
Use to reboot the control panel when it freezes.
LED types • Main power indicator (blue)
Lights when the power is on. Flashes slowly in Sleep mode.
Flashes gradually in Energy Saver mode
Mechanism
• [Check Status] indicator lamp (red/blue)
Lights when an error occurs.
• Data In indicator (blue)
Operation
7BSmart
Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or
Panel
LAN-Fax driver.
• Fax indicator (blue)
Flashes while sending or receiving a fax. Lights when there is a
received fax document in the fax memory.
• Media access lamp (blue)
Lights when there is an SD card inserted in the SD card slot.
Maximum power 4.5 W or less in standby mode (excluding external interfaces and internal
consumption feature expansions)
6 W or less when using wireless LAN (during high-load operation)
NFC Built-in NFC tag
Made by Vanskee Enterprise
RCH-NTI2CP1K-BSA-PCB-CE-1128
Power consumption 0.18 W or less
in Sleep mode (When in Sleep mode, power is not supplied to USB devices connected to
the USB slots except when the IC card R / W (NFC) is connected.)
Tilt function Equipped with an angle-adjustable hinge. Clicks at the standard position.
Depending on the model, there is also a hinge-less fixed type.
Specification comparison with the previous model
Item This model Previous model

Appearance
Control panel size 274.5 × 160 mm 267 × 160 mm

(Width × Height)
Brightness of LCD 250cd/m2 (typ.) 200cd/m2 (typ.)
panel
CPU ARM Cortex-A9 Quad Core 1GHz ARM Cortex-A9 Dual Core
(SoC: MCIMX6Q5EYM10AD) 1GHz
(SoC:
MCIMX6D5EYM10AC)
Volatile Memory RAM (DDR3L-1066), 2GB RAM (DDR3-1066), 2GB
Wireless LAN 802.11ac/a/b/g/n (for 802.11b/g/n
Mechanism
Item This model Previous model

Taiwan/China/Asia)
802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz only) (for North
America/EU/Korea)
Bluetooth Bluetooth4.2 Bluetooth4.0
NFC tag Built in Not equipped
Power consumption in 0.18 W or less 0.35 W or less
Sleep mode
Available languages
Japanese, English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish, Swedish,
Polish, Portuguese, Hungarian, Czech, Finnish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Thai,
Russian, Arabic, Greek, Korean, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese
Note: Available languages may vary depending on the machine’s specifications.
Software Specifications
A software package consisting of the Android Firmware and the manufacturer’s own
pre-installed applications is installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
The following three types of software are installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
1. Android Firmware (Android OS)
2. Pre-installed applications
3. Applications that can be installed additionally
Android Firmware (Android OS)
Mechanism
The Android Firmware (Android OS) consists of the following modules that are called “stacks”.
• Linux kernel
• Android Runtime
• Library
Operation
Application Framework
7BSmart
•
Panel
Pre-installed applications
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications such as the GW applications

(Copy/Printer/Document Server/Scanner/Fax), Control Panel Browser, the standard keyboard,
Installer, Gallery, Self Check are pre-installed. Unlike those installed on the controller board of
the MFP, GW applications that are installed on the Smart Operation Panel are for controlling
operation and display of the Smart Operation Panel.
Pre-installed applications are provided as part of the control panel firmware (Cheetah System)
together with the Android firmware. When you update the control panel firmware using the
recovery mode or another method, the pre-installed applications will also be updated.
Applications that can be installed
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications can be installed in addition to the pre-installed
applications.
Applications that can be installed include optional applications that customers can purchase,
applications that are installed only on machines sold in specific regions, and custom-made
applications.
On an MFP, applications such as Simple UI applications (Quick Copy, Quick Fax, and Quick
Scanner) and Scan to Me are installed.
Communication Specifications
The Smart Operation Panel and the GW controller are connected by a USB 2.0/3.0 cable. They
communicate with each other via the Android OS on the Smart Operation Panel, using
protocols called “OCS Library” and “Flair-API (System/Application)”.
System block diagram
Mechanism
Overview of Components
Communication Details
module/signal name
OCS Library OSC stands for Operating Control Service. It is a module that controls
the control panel. The set of signals used by this module to control the
control panel are called the OCS Library.
It is used during communication between the Legacy UI (system)
module on the Smart Operation Panel and the GW module for the
following processes.
• Deciding on the display format suitable for a particular model of
the control panel, so that the intended image data can be
converted to actual image data.
• Converting touch panel operations to commands.
Flair-API Flair is the manufacturer's own communication interface between
(System/Application) software modules. The interface uses a generic WebAPI.
It is divided into two parts: a part that communicates directly with
applications such as the application manager, Home, Authentication,
Mechanism
Communication Details
module/signal name
Banner, Check Status, and Widgets, and a part that monitors
applications. It communicates with the GW controller via the CATS
Operation
7BSmart
module.
Panel
CATS CATS stands for Cheetah Application Total System. It is a module in
the GW controller.
Because the Smart Operation Panel uses the Android OS, the contents
and protocols of communication are not the same as those of the
conventional control panel. CATS serves as an intermediary between
the GW controller and the Smart Operation Panel.
It also controls the power status of the control panel.
CATS communicates with the Smart Operation Panel using the
Flair-API, and communicates with the GW module using the GW-API.
GW-IPC The name of the interface used among modules in the GW controller.
The role is the same as that of the Flair-API.
• API stands for Application Programming Interface. An API is an interface that software
modules use in order to communicate with each other.
Mechanism
8.2.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT
Components of the Control Panel
No. Name Description

1 Display panel Displays icons for functions and applications. Displays the
operation screens, operation keys and other information.
2 Speaker Produces the operation and warning sounds.
3 Main power indicator Indicates power OFF/ON, and energy saving status.
4 USB slot for digital You can connect the optional numeric keypad and digital cameras.
cameras
5 USB slot for NFC You can connect the authentication card reader/writer and devices
card readers supporting near-field communication (NFC).
6 NFC tag Used to connect the machine and a smart device with the RICOH
simple input and output.
7 [Check Status] Indicates system status.
indicator
8 Data In indicator Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or
LAN-Fax driver.
9 Fax indicator Indicates fax status.
• During communication: Flashes
• When fax documents have been received using Substitute
Reception: Lights
• When the machine has received a confidential fax document:
Lights
10 Microphone There is currently no function that uses this.
11 Extended Feature Used for system maintenance, such as control panel self-check.
key (EX3)
Mechanism

key (EX2)
Operation
7BSmart
key (EX1)
Panel
14 Control panel reboot Used when rebooting the control panel.
key
15 SD card slot Insert an SD card here.
16 Media access lamp Lights when an external media is inserted into the SD card slot or
the USB slot.
17 USB slot Insert a USB memory device here.
Panel Display
Soft keys displayed on the screen (when the Authentication Function is
Disabled)

1 [Function] Users can assign shortcuts for each application. Up to three applications
keys can be assigned as shortcuts. When an application is assigned as a
function key, users can call the application from any screen. The function
keys are disabled by default. Users must enable this function to be able to
allocate applications to function keys.
2 [System System messages are displayed in this area. If there are multiple
messages] messages to be displayed, they are displayed alternately. Tapping the
key message opens a dialog which shows all the messages.
3 [Help] key This icon is displayed when Help is available for the displayed screen or
Mechanism

errors occurring when the machine is connected to the Internet.
Specify [Cookie] in the control panel browser to [ON] to display Help
properly.
4 [Energy Enters Sleep mode.
Saver] key
5 [Switch Press to scroll the screens right and left. The Home screen has 5 screens.
Screens] key You can switch between the screens by flicking.
6 [Application Displays the list of installed applications.
List] key
7 [Current Shows which of the five screens is currently displayed.
display
position] key
8 [Stop] key Stops the scanning of a document, fax transmission, or printing to paper.
9 [Menu] key Displays the menu screen of the application in use. May not be available
depending on the application.
10 [Home] key Displays the Home screen.
11 [Back] key Use this to go back to the previous screen when the Screen Features
Settings screen or the screen of an application is displayed.
12 [Media] key Displays icons when a USB flash drive or SD card is inserted.
By pressing this key, you can choose the media to remove and use.
Depending on the media, one of the following icons appear.
USB icon (key)
SD card icon (key)
USB/SD icon (key)
13 [Check Status] You can check the status of the MFP, each function, and the current job.
key You can also check the job history and maintenance information of the
MFP.
Items that Appear when the Authentication Function is Enabled
Login user information and login/logout key also appear.
Mechanism

1 [User icon] key You can configure the authentication setting. This key appears when
someone is logging in. If pressed after logging in, the login user name
appears for a while in the login user information display area.
Operation
7BSmart
2 [Login/Logout] key This key is displayed if the authentication function is enabled. By
Panel
pressing [Login], the login menu appears. If you have already logged
in, [Logout] appears. By pressing [Logout], you can log out.
3 Login user The name of the user logging in appears in this area. By pressing the
information display [User icon] key, the name of the user logging in appears for
area approximately 5 seconds (and then automatically switches back to
displaying the function keys.)
Items that Appear According to the Security Setting

1 Extended This icon is displayed if [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] >
Security icon [Security] > [Enhance File Protection] is set to [On].
2 Overwrite icon Displays the hard disk overwrite status when [Settings] > [System
Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Data Management] > [Auto Erase
Memory Setting] is set to [On].
8.2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Operation Panel Unit
Mechanism
Touch Panel
The touch panel of this machine uses a 4-wire resistive film method (low load resistive film
analog 4-wire method). It can detect two points for flick/drag/pinch-in/pinch-out operations.
Resistive touch panel has been adopted in order to allow operation with a prosthetic hand.
Basic Structure
An analog 4-wire resistive film touch panel has 2 layers. Two materials (mainly film or glass)
with transparent conductive film (ITO) are attached such that the transparent conductive film
layers face each other.
When the film is pressed with a finger or a pen, the transparent conductive films contact each
other and the touch panel operation is recognized.
Insulators (spacing dots) secure space between the two transparent conductive film layers to
prevent short-circuiting.
Because the transparent conductive film has a uniform resistance characteristic, the resistance
value reflects the distance of contact.
[A]: Spacing dot
Mechanism
[B]: PET film

[C]: Transparent conductive film
[D]: Base glass
[E]: LCD panel
Operation
7BSmart
Self-Check (multi-touch calibration) mechanism
Panel
With the Multi-touch calibration in the self-check function, the touch panel is automatically
calibrated using the results of touches to the top left and bottom right positions.
The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are used for internal processing.
They do not indicate the positions or distance of the touched points. There is no problem unless
there is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration and the second calibration.
8.2.4 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY
Exiting Energy Saving Modes

Because this model of Smart Operation Panel has no hardware keys, the MFP exits from
energy saving mode when the user does one of the following:
• Touches the display panel
• Lifts the ADF
• Sets an original in the ADF
Screen Startup Mode

Startup Modes
There are two screen startup modes. The factory default setting is Normal.
1. Normal
This is the standard startup mode. When the main power of the MFP is turned ON, the
control panel starts up using less power compared to Quick mode.
2. Quick
By preparing for the next startup when the machine shuts down, the control panel starts up
faster than in Normal mode.
Changing the Screen Startup Mode
Screen Startup Mode can be changed in Screen Features Settings.
Mechanism
Select [Screen Features Settings] > [SYSTEM] > [Screen Device Settings] > [Screen Startup
Mode], and then select [Normal] or [Quick].
• In the following cases, the control panel starts up in Normal mode even if [Quick] is
selected.
• The power cord has been disconnected from the power outlet after the last
shutdown.
• The MFP is turned ON after being turned OFF due to reasons such as a power
failure.
• The MFP was not properly shut down the last time it was turned OFF.
How the Control Panel Starts Up
In Normal mode
The startup screen is displayed on the display panel, followed by the startup animation.
In Quick mode
The [Home] screen is displayed immediately after the main power of the MFP is turned ON. The
startup screen displayed when starting in Normal mode is not displayed.
How the Screen Shuts Down When Quick mode Is Selected
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down. The
main power indicator flashes during preparation for the next startup. The indicator turns off
when preparation is completed.
Mechanism
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
If the MFP is turned ON during shutdown, the preparation for the next startup continues. When
preparation for the next startup is completed, the control panel starts up in Quick mode.
• When Quick mode is selected, the control panel starts up faster than in Normal mode
but shutdown takes longer than in Normal mode.
Shutdown Functions
The shutdown functions and their uses are as follows.
Shutdown Use Operation
mode
Normal Same as shutdown by users. Turn the main power switch off.
Shutdown
Forced When normal shutdown does not complete Hold the main power switch 6
shutdown even though you waited a long time. seconds or longer.
Shutdown for • When you have to disconnect the Turn the main power switch off
parts power cord from the power outlet, while holding down [Stop].
replacement such as when replacing parts. Continue to hold down the [Stop]
• When you want to start the machine key until the shutdown screen is
normally and then enter recovery displayed.
mode, without changing the Startup
mode in Screen Features Settings.
(For updating control panel firmware)
Shutdown for When you are going to turn on the MFP Turn the main power switch off
software within 5 minutes for updating the MFP while holding down the [EX1] key.
update firmware or package. Continue to hold down the [Stop]
(Use shutdown for parts replacement if you key until the shutdown screen is
are updating the control panel firmware.) displayed.
Normal Shutdown
The MFP is equipped with a function to shut down safely for the following reasons:
• Prevent damage to the file systems in the HDD and the NAND flash memory.
• Prevent paper from being left inside the body of the MFP (except when paper is jammed).
The shutdown process begins when the main power switch is pressed. To make a forced
Mechanism
shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds. However, if you force a
shutdown during the shutdown process, data being processed may be lost. Forced shutdown is
to be used to shut down the MFP without disconnecting the power cord when the shutdown
process cannot be completed.
Other Shutdown Functions
This MFP has two additional shutdown functions to facilitate maintenance.

Shutting down the MFP for parts replacement (Starting up in Normal mode when Quick
mode is selected)
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down. This
causes the shutdown process to take longer than when Normal mode is selected.
If you need to disconnect the power cord after shutdown in order to replace parts or for other
reasons, you can use the following procedure to shut down the MFP just like you do in Normal
mode. This shortens the time it takes to shut down the MFP.
• Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [Stop] key on the control panel.
Continue to hold down the [Stop] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
Shutting down the MFP for software updates (Shutting down the MFP with the control
panel in Sleep mode)
If you are going to turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes, you can use the following procedure to
shut down the MFP with the control panel in Sleep mode.
• Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [EX1] key. Continue to hold down
the [EX1] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
• You must turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes.

• If more than 5 minutes has elapsed after shutting down the MFP using the above
procedure, the machine starts up in Normal mode even if Quick mode is selected.
System Maintenance
8.3 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
8.3.1 MAINTENANCE MODES
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
Service program (SP) modes for the Smart Operation Panel are as follows:
Mode Use Notes
SP Mode (MFP) SP modes for the MFP The numeric keys are required to enter this
(controller, engine) mode. Display the application where soft keys
are displayed or the soft keys of the SP mode.
Service mode SP modes for the Smart Same as above
(operation Operation Panel.
panel) • Changing SP mode
settings in the Screen
Features Settings menu.
• Installing and updating
applications that can be
installed
Recovery mode Maintenance modes for the -
Android OS
• Updating firmware
• Initializing all data
8.3.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE

MODE
Login
Use the soft key numbers to log in to the service mode on the control panel, the same way as
logging into SP mode on the MFP.
• You cannot log in to the service mode of the control panel when one of the following
screens is displayed.
• Stop All Jobs
• Settings
• Address Book Management
Use the numeric keys on one of the following screens.
• Soft keys on the application screen where soft keys appear
• Soft keys for the control panel’s service mode (displayed by pressing both the [EX3] key
and [Check Status] at the same time)
System Maintenance
• To exit the soft keys, press [EXIT] on the screen.
Login Status Indicator

When you log in to the control panel’s service mode, the Screen Features Settings screen is
displayed.
• “Service” is displayed in the login information area [A].
• [Logout] is displayed in the Login key area [B] to allow logout from the service mode.
Logout
Press [Logout] to log out from the control panel’s service mode.
• You need to logout manually because the Auto Logout function does not work.
Depending on the authentication settings of the MFP, the following screen is displayed after you
log out.
System Maintenance
Authentication settings
Administrator authentication: OFF Administrator authentication: ON Administrator
User authentication: OFF User authentication: OFF authentication: ON
User authentication: ON
Operation
7BSmart
Screen of the function selected in Screen of the function selected in [Home] screen
Panel
[Function Priority] [Function Priority]
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator

The administrator of the MFP can prohibit entry into the control panel’s service mode by
enabling [Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Security] > [Service
Mode Lock].
When [Service Mode Lock] is enabled, the machine does not enter the service mode even if
you enter the number combination for the control panel’s service mode. A beeping sound
indicates login failure.
• The machine can enter the recovery mode even if [Service Mode Lock] is enabled.
8.3.3 SERVICE MODE MENU

There are four setting menus:
• Wireless & Networks
• Device
• Personal
• System
Wireless & Networks

Menu level Description
1st level 2nd level 3rd level
Wireless Group Owner Mode You can only view the setting.
Direct
System Maintenance

Settings
Connection Password You can only view the setting.
DHCP Server IP Address You can only view the setting.
DHCP IP Address Range You can only view the setting.
Select Channel You can only view the setting.
Fix SSID You can only view the setting.
PEER DEVICES View and configure devices that can
be connected.
REMEMBERED Displays groups that have been
GROUPS previously connected.
Bluetooth ON/OFF You can only view the setting.
SEARCH FOR DEVICES Scans for Bluetooth devices in the
vicinity.
(name of this device) You can only view the setting.
PAIRED DEVICES View and configure paired devices.
AVAILABLE DEVICES View and configure available
devices.
Port Port Forwarding Settings Port Requests sent to the wireless LAN
Forwarding Forwarding unit of the Smart Operation Panel
to Machine Config 1-20 can be forwarded to the controller of
the MFP. You can enable or disable
ports to forward these requests.
MTU PathMTU(Enable/Disable) Enables/disables the PathMTU size
Settings set in [MTU Size]. When you change
this setting, the control panel
restarts.
MTU Size Sets the size of PathMTU. Default:
1500.
Device
Storage & Internal Used and Total Displays the used size and total size of the
USB storage Storage Capacity internal storage.
SD CARD*1 Used and Total SD Displays the used size and total size of the SD
Card Capacity card.
System Maintenance

Safely Remove *To remove the SD card, click the or
Hardware icon ( ) icon instead of the Safely Remove Hardware
Operation
7BSmart
icon ( ).
Panel
USB Used and Total Displays the used size and total size of the
STORAGE *2
USB Storage USB storage device.
Capacity *To remove the USB flash drive, click the
Safely Remove or icon instead of the Safely Remove
Hardware icon ( ) Hardware icon ( ).
Apps Install Install from SD Install or update applications from an SD card.
Card
Install from Server Enter a product key to install or update
applications from the server.
Application Site Startup Application Site.
Activate Activate applications that have been installed
Applications from the server.
Update Update applications that have been installed.
Applications
Uninstall Uninstall applications.
Install From Install applications from internal storage.
Internal Storage
Check Server Check if you can connect to the Server.
Connect
Firmware update Update the firmware from the SD card set in
the operation panel slot. If the SD card is not
inserted, an error message is displayed.
*1 Displayed only when an SD card is inserted into the SD card slot of the operation panel.
*2 Displayed only when an USB storage device is inserted into the USB slot of the operation
panel.
Personal
1st level 2nd level 3rd
level
Lauguage & Registration - You can register the external keyboard, display the
input Keyboard connected keyboard, or remove the external
keyboard.
System Maintenance
System
1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level
Screen Status Displays the following:
Device • Wireless LAN MAC
Settings address
Information • Interface Settings
• Wi-Fi settings
(ON/OFF)
• IP address
Legal information Open source Displays the open source
licenses license information.
System Displays the license of the
WebView system used in this
Licences machine.
Wallpapers Displays the copy light of
the picture of the wallpaper.
Software Version Version List Displays the versions of
List Record operation panel firmware
Save to SD and installed applications.
Card *1
When saving the software
version list on an SD card,
insert an SD card into the
SD card slot of the
operation panel, and then
press [Save to SD Card].
Operation Panel Displays the hardware
Kind information of the operation
panel with a 4-digit code.
1st digit: LCD size
• 1: 10.1"
• 2: 7"
• 3: 17"
2nd digit: LCD vendor
• 0: AUO
• 1: INNOLUX
• 2: Dongbond
• 5: AUO
• 6: Giantplus
System Maintenance

3rd digit: eMMC version
• 5: Version 4.41
Operation
7BSmart
• 7: Version 5.00
Panel
• 8: Version 5.10
4th digit: PCB vendor
• N: NEC
• R: RICOH
Screen Use of External Screen SD Card Specify the SD card slot
Device Interface slot availability on the Smart
Settings Operation Panel.
When [Inactive] is selected,
no power is available
because the hardware is
deactivated.
Screen USB Port Specify the USB port
1 to 3 availability on the Smart
Operation Panel for each
USB port.
When [Inactive] is selected,
no power is available
because the hardware is
deactivated.
Prohibit Use of Wi-Fi If you select [Prohibit] for
External (Do not this setting, the Wi-Fi
Interface Prohibit / function is automatically set
Prohibit) to [OFF] and the Wi-Fi
function setting is hidden at
[Settings] > [System
Settings] >
[Network/Interface] >
[Control Panel: Wireless
LAN].
If you select [Do not
prohibit] for this setting, the
Wi-Fi function setting in
LAN] is displayed. The
System Maintenance

setting remains unchanged.
Wireless If you select [Prohibit] for
Direct this setting, the Wireless
(Do not Direct function is
Prohibit / automatically set to [OFF]
Prohibit) and the Wireless Direct
Settings] >
LAN].
prohibit] for this setting,
the Wireless Direct function
setting in [Control Panel:
Wireless LAN] is displayed.
The setting remains
unchanged.
Bluetooth If you select [Prohibit] for
(Do not this setting, the Bluetooth
Prohibit / function is automatically set
Prohibit) to [OFF] and the Bluetooth
Settings] >
[Bluetooth].
prohibit] for this setting, the
Bluetooth function setting in
[Bluetooth] is displayed. The
Screen If you select [Prohibit] for
SD Card this setting, the Screen SD
Slot Card Slot function is
(Do not automatically set to [OFF]
System Maintenance

Prohibit / and [Control Panel SD Card
Prohibit) Slot] is hidden at [Settings]
Operation
7BSmart
> [System Settings] >
Panel
[Machine] > [External
Device].
[Control Panel SD Card
Slot] is displayed. The
Screen If you select [Prohibit] for
USB this setting, the Screen USB
Memory Memory Slot function is
Slot automatically set to [OFF]
(Do not and [Control Panel USB
Prohibit / Memory Slot] is hidden at
Prohibit) [Settings] > [System
Settings] > [Machine] >
[External Device].
[Control Panel USB Memory
Slot] is displayed. The
Server Settings Port number Input a port number for
communication with the
import/export and RFU
server. The input number is
used for both HTTP and
HTTPS connections.
(Normally, input a number
within 55101-55111.)
Home Key Settings Home Key You can change the
Settings transition destination except
for the Home screen when
pushing the [Home] icon.
Home Key Normal mode:
System Maintenance

Assignment In addition to pressing the
Mode [Home] icon, in all statuses
such as logout and restoring
from lower power display
mode, the screen transitions
to the destination which the
user set with [Home Key
Application].
UI change mode:
The screen transitions to
the destination which the
user set with [Home Key
Application] only when you
press the [Home] icon.
Home Key You can set the application
Application of the transition destination
when pressing the [Home]
icon.
Show default You can specify whether the
Home for guest user can access the
unauthenticated application selected in
user [Home Key Application]
when user authentication is
set to ON.
System Home You can use this setting only
Key Icon when [Home Key
Settings Assignment Mode] is [ON]
and [UI Change Mode] is
selected in [Home Key
Assignment Mode].
You cannot set other than
the above because of high
brightness.
Application Displays a list of installed
Settings applications.
If you press [SETTINGS] for
an application, the setting
System Maintenance

screen for the CE is
displayed. The screen does
Operation
7BSmart
not change if the application
Panel
has no setting items.
Recovery by Recovery by This setting gives priority to
Authentication Authentication the recovery time from
Priority Priority energy saving modes when
an IC card authentication
device is connected.
When this setting is
selected, the MFP does not
enter Engine OFF mode,
and always recovers from
Silent mode.
Start Time You can specify the start
(hh:mm) time of Authentication
priority mode.
Note: This can be changed
only when [Recovery by
Authentication Priority] is
deselected.
Period (Hours) You can specify the period
of validity of Authentication
priority mode.
Note: This can be changed
only when [Recovery by
Authentication Priority] is
deselected.
Backup/Restore Specify whether to enable
Settings or disable backups and
restore backup data.
Screen device This setting prevents the
always-connection operation panel from
Setting entering Sleep mode, so
that Bluetooth and other
communication devices
remain connected.
System Maintenance

When this setting is
selected, the operation
panel does not enter Sleep
mode. Only the LCD
(display panel) turns OFF.
Intelligent Voice Specify whether or not to
Control display the AI Speaker Link
Setting Menu.
Inactive: hide
Active: view
If deactivated, the function
itself is turned OFF.
Panel Self Check Starts self-diagnosis of the
operation panel.
(Panel Self Check)
*1 This can be pressed only when an SD card is inserted to the SD card slot of the operation
panel.
8.3.4 PANEL SELF CHECK

The following are available as self-diagnostics functions of the control panel:
• LED Check
• Key Check
• LCD Check
• TouchPanel Calibration
• Bluetooth Check
• Speaker Check
• TouchPanel Check
• Wireless LAN Check
• MultiTouch Calibration
• eMMC Erasure Count
• MultiTouch sensitivity Adjustment
System Maintenance
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
*The [microSD Erasure Count] menu cannot be used with this machine.
• The [Self Check] menu is displayed in either English or Japanese. The language can
be changed using [Change Language] in the Home screen.
• If an unavailable language is selected, English will be displayed.
• With some diagnostic items, press [Back] [A] at the bottom of the screen to return to
the top menu of [Self Check].
LED Check
Select the [All Light On] check box, and make sure the following LEDs light:
• Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes)
• Fax indicator
• [Check Status] indicator (flashes in red and orange alternately)
• Operation call light (if attached) (lights in red/blue)
System Maintenance
When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
Key Check
Check if the Extended Feature keys on the left side of the control panel (EX1, EX2, EX3 from
top to bottom) are functioning normally. If they are functioning normally, the key will turn green
when pressed.
[FOOT SW] is not used.
When the check is completed, press [End] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
LCD Check
Visually inspect the color of the LCD. The displayed colors are white/black/red/green/blue. The
LCD changes to the next color when you press it.
The check is completed when all colors have been displayed. The screen returns to the top
menu of [Self Check].
TouchPanel Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel by touching the center of each of the five “+” signs.
The five “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left, bottom right, bottom left, center, and top
right.
System Maintenance
After you have touched the five “+” signs, the display switches to the [Retry/OK] screen.
• If you want to calibrate again, press [EX1].
• If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
Bluetooth Check
Check and configure the Bluetooth device connection.
System Maintenance
• You cannot switch Bluetooth to [ON] or [OFF] from the [Self Check] menu. Before
checking the Bluetooth device connection, specify [ON] for [Bluetooth] in [Screen
Features Settings] > [WIRELESS & NETWORKS] > [Bluetooth].
Speaker Check
Tests the speaker by playing the reference sound.
1. Select the frequency (220Hz, 440Hz, 880Hz, 1760Hz, or 2000Hz).
2. Press [START/STOP] to play the sound.
3. Touch the volume bar, and play the sound at minimum and maximum volumes.
4. Press [START/STOP] to stop the sound.
TouchPanel Check
For each of the nine reference points on the screen, the distance between the detected pressed
position and the nearest reference point is displayed. The distance is displayed continually near
each reference point.
If all the distances between each detected pressed position and the nearest of the five
System Maintenance
reference points on the screen (at the four corners and the center) are within ±12px, the [OK]
button appears. (However, even when the [OK] button is being displayed, if you press the
screen again and the distance exceeds ±12px, the [OK] button disappears.)
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
If you press the [OK] button, the inspection implementation status switches to “Adjusted” and
the screen returns to the self-inspection menu.
If you press the [Back] key, the inspection implementation status does not switch and the
screen returns to the self-inspection menu.
Wireless LAN Check

Checks the condition of the wireless LAN connection.
When you select the connected access point, the signal strength, IP address and other
information are displayed.
System Maintenance
MultiTouch Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel for multi-tap input methods such as pinch-in/pinch-out.
Touch the center of both “+” signs. The two “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left and
bottom right. Repeat the procedure. The touch panel will be calibrated.
• If you want to adjust it again, press the [EX1] key.
• If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to
System Maintenance
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
The “Back Key” in the message is actually the [EX1] key and the “Menu Key” in the message is
actually the [EX3] key.
• The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are for internal processing
and do not indicate the positions or distance of the points touched. There is no
problem unless there is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration
and the second calibration.
eMMC Erasure Count

Displays the status of the eMMC Erasure Count and the current number of times of rewriting.
System Maintenance
MultiTouch Sensitivity Adjustment

Adjusts the MultiTouch sensitivity of the operation panel.
Check the influence of external noise. If the detection level is 3 or higher, adjustment is
necessary.
The sensitivity level can be adjusted between "0" and "10". The default setting is "10". If set to
"0", the MultiTouch function is turned off.
• Sensitivity level: 10 (Default)
• Sensitivity level: 0 (MultiTouch function off.)
Note
• If the sensitivity level is set to "0", the MultiTouch function is turned off and you cannot
pinch in or out.
• If the sensitivity level is set between "1" and "9", the distance between the 2 points for
detecting MultiTouch increases as the sensitivity level is decreased. At the default setting
(sensitivity level 10), MultiTouch is detected for a distance of approximately 3 cm between
the 2 points. At sensitivity level 1, MultiTouch is detected for a distance of approximately 4
cm between the 2 points.
Adjustment Procedure
1. Press [Detect level confirmation].
System Maintenance
2. Keep your finger on the cross at the top right.
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
3. Check the result. If the detection level is "3" or "4", adjust the MultiTouch sensitivity.
4. Use [V] or [^] to adjust the sensitivity level.
8.3.5 RECOVERY MODE

The recovery mode menu is as follows. Ask your manager for details on how to enter Recovery
mode.
Menu Description
reboot system Reboots the Android OS.
now
apply update from Updates the Cheetah System firmware by specifying the folder path.
System Maintenance
Menu Description
sdcard
wipe data/factory Deletes all installed applications and all settings on the Cheetah.
reset
wipe cache Deletes all data that is stored on the cache partition. Currently, Cheetah does
partition not use the cache partition, so nothing happens when this menu item is
accessed.
wipe free area Deletes all data that is stored on the free partition. Cheetah stores the version
partition history on the free partition. When this menu item is selected, it will then
disappear.
wipe LegacyUI Deletes Legacy UI.
area
micon update Updates Keymicon by specifying the folder path.
from sdcard
view recovery Displays the recovery log.
logs
• If [Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Security] > [Extended
Security Settings] > [Update Firmware] is set to [Prohibit], the control panel cannot
enter the recovery mode.
• Ask your manager for information on how to enter the Recovery Mode.
8.3.6 SPECIAL KEY COMBINATIONS
Function Operation for Smart Operation Panel

Resetting Settings In the Settings screen, press a Settings category while holding
down the EX3 key.
Available for: System Settings, Copier/Document Server Settings,
and Scanner Settings.
System Reset Hold down the EX3 key and [#] simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets the controller software of the main machine.
Application Reset Hold down the EX3 key and [9] simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets a single application.
Resetting User Code Hold down [Reset] for 2 seconds.
Authentication Returns to the User Code entry screen.
System Maintenance
8.3.7 BACKUP/RESTORE FOR SMART OPERATION PANEL

APPLICATION/SETTINGS FUNCTION
Overview
Operation
Application settings and additional applications installed on the Smart Operation Panel can be
7BSmart
Panel
backed up automatically and can be restored, e.g. after Smart Operation Panel replacement.
In Cheetah SP mode, select [Screen Device Settings]> [Backup / Restore Settings].
Data that can be backed up and restored
• System application settings*1

• Standard application settings*1
• Pre-install application settings*1
• Add-on applications (including hybrids)*2
*1: The system application, standard installed application, and pre-installed application are
installed in MultiLink-Panel, so the application itself is not backed up or restored after
replacement.
*2: Add-on applications settings are not backed up or restored.
Backup
• After replacing the smart operation panel, if the version of the operation panel system
firmware is older than a certain version, update it to a later version.
• Backup cannot be performed manually by the user or the technician.
• During the backup, the message being backed up is displayed and other operations
cannot be performed.
• A backup is performed 24 hours after the last backup. If the machine doesn’t have backup
data, the first backup is performed at 2:00AM.
• A backup cannot be performed under any of the conditions below. Backup will retry 1 hour
later.
• During ARFU, firmware updating from download site, etc
• LCD on the operation panel: ON.
• HDD cannot be accessed for 60 sec.
• If the backup data has not changed, no backup will be performed. (Maximum - 7 days)
• During the backup, the LCD is off.
• Backup data is stored on the HDD.
• The amount of time for the backup is as follows:
Example:
Data Backup time
Additional applications 106MB 1m 6s
System Maintenance
Data Backup time

Application settings 0.2MB 36s
Total 106.2MB 1m 42s
Disabling the Backup setting
The default setting is “Enabled”. To change it to “Disabled”, uncheck “Enabled”. Restarting the
machine is not necessary.
Select [Screen Device Settings] > [Backup/Restore Settings] in Screen SP mode.
Restore
• After replacing the smart operation panel, if the version of the operation panel system
firmware is older than a certain version, update it to a later version.
• If the machine doesn’t have any backup data, the restore function cannot be used.
1. Enter [OpPanel-SP] and go [Screen Device Settings] > [Backup/Restore Settings] > [Start
Restore].
2. After a message indicating that restoration takes several minutes is displayed, touch
"execute".
A message saying please wait for a while is displayed. Time is about 10 minutes.
3. After a message indicating that the next message is displayed, touch [Close].
A message that the restoration was successful is displayed.
4. Turn the main switch off/on.
Restore Error Codes
If restore fails, an error code appears on the operation panel.

Code Cause Solution
1 Failed to restore additionally installed application data Retry the Restore procedure.
3 Failed to restore application setting data Retry the Restore procedure.
8.3.8 SOFTWARE UPDATE
Updating the Smart Operation Panel
• In the case of models provided with package firmware only, updates for the Smart
Operation Panel and applications are also provided via package firmware. For details,
see ”Firmware Update (SD Card)”.
There are three methods to update the Smart Operation Panel. The method is different
depending on what you want to update.
1. Installation/update from a media
System Maintenance
2. Installation/update from the eDC Server

3. Installation/update from Application Site
Update method Features Control Applications
panel
Operation
firmware
7BSmart
Panel
Installation/update Installation or update is possible in the Yes Yes
from a media following two ways.
1. Applications
• Use the installation screen in the
control panel’s service mode to
update applications.
• You can install or update multiple
applications at once.
• You can also uninstall an application.
2. Package firmware (SD card or USB flash
drive)
Refer to ”Firmware Update (SD Card)”.
Installation/update Install or update applications directly from the No Yes
from the eDC Server eDC Server.
This method is mainly for paid applications. A
product key is required when an application is
installed for the first time.
*The update procedure is the same as when
updating the Smart Operation Panel application
already released.
Installation/update Installation and Updating of applications and Yes*1 Yes
from Application Site firmware update can be done from Application
Site. When administrator authentication is
enabled, an administrator privilege is required
to start Application Site. If you log in to the
operation panel service mode, however, you
can use it with CE privilege.
*1 Update can only be done by using a package file.
The following two methods can be used for updating the firmware.
• Update from a media
• Installation/update from Application Site
The following three methods can be used for updating an application.
• Installation/update from a media
• Installation/update from the eDC Server
System Maintenance
• Installation/update from Application Site
Installation/Update from a Media

Installing/Updating an Application
Creating a media card for update

1. Download the update modules from the Firmware Download Center.
2. Unzip the downloaded file.
3. Create a folder named “romdata” in the root directory of the media.
4. Put the unzipped file in the “romdata” folder.
Update procedure
1. Log in to the control panel in service mode.
2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel.
3. Select [Apps] > [Install] > [Install from SD Card].
4. Select the application you want to install or update, and then press [Install]
5. The installation or update results are displayed.
6. Check that the application is correctly installed or updated, and then press [reboot
operation panel].
Package Update
This method uses the package update function to update the control panel firmware and/or
applications. The package update function is provided by the controller.
Update is done in the following order:
1. Controller firmware
2. Applications
3. Control panel firmware
If the control panel firmware has to be updated, the control panel starts in the recovery mode
and the firmware is automatically updated.
The control panel restarts when updating is completed. The result notification is processed after
the control panel restarts.
Refer to ”Firmware Update (Removable Media)” for details.
When Installation/Update Is Prohibited
If [Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Security] > [Extended Security
Settings] > [Update Firmware] is set to [Prohibit], the execution key is grayed out and
installation/update cannot be executed.
When trying to update from a PC, updating fails and the result is recorded as “Failed”.
Installation/Update from the eDC Server

Downloads applications from the eDC Server, and installs or updates them.
System Maintenance
• Installation/activation/update of applications from the server can only be done in the

service mode.
Check Server Connect
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
1. Log in to the control panel’s service mode.
2. Select [Apps] > [Install].
3. Press [Check Server Connect] and make sure that “Connect Server Succeeded!” is
displayed.
• The server address is stored in the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.
• To connect to the server, the network settings of the MFP must be configured
correctly. For the required configuration, see the Field Service Manual of the MFP.
• If server connection fails, see Troubleshooting_1 for error codes.
Installation

3. Select [Install from Server].
4. Enter the product key and press [Execute].
System Maintenance
5. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
• An application cannot be installed unless it is digitally signed by Ricoh.
Activation

3. Select [Activate Applications].
4. Select the application to be activated, and then enter the activation key and press
[Execute].
• Only charged applications have to be activated.
Update

3. Select [Update Applications].
4. Select the application to be updated, and then press [Check Update Status].
Forced Uninstallation
If you try to uninstall an activated application without first deactivating it, the uninstallation will
fail. However, the application can be uninstalled without deactivation (forced uninstallation) in
the following circumstances:
• Uninstallation using the service login uninstallation menu
• Deactivation failure due to the license information stored in the control panel not matching
the license information published by the server
• Forced uninstallation cannot be performed if deactivation fails because of other factors
System Maintenance
(such as failure to connect to the server because of temporary network disconnection

or server maintenance).
During forced uninstallation, the message indicating that deactivation failed appears.
If [OK] of the message is selected, uninstallation is executed forcibly without deactivation.
Operation
If [Cancel] of the message is selected, uninstallation is not executed.
7BSmart
Panel
• If executing forced uninstallation, forced deactivation must also be executed on the
eDC server. Accordingly, check whether the license has been published for the eDC
server.
Application Site
"Application Site" has been added to Screen Service mode. Field engineers can start up
Application Site to install or update applications or firmware without needing user administrator
credentials.
This menu item opens Application Site by using the Web Browser NX app.
Troubleshooting
8.4 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.4.1 MULTITOUCH MISDETECTION BY THE OPERATION PANEL

DUE TO AN AM RADIO SIGNAL
Problem
MultiTouch is detected even though only a single point on the operation panel is touched.
Cause
If there is an AM radio tower near the machine’s location, the person using the operation panel
acts as an antenna and radio noise enters the operation panel. As the result, in spite of only a
single point being touched, the machine senses MultiTouch.
Solution
Adjust the MultiTouch sensitivity of the operation panel.

Operation panel SP mode > Screen Device Settings > Panel Self Check > MultiTouch
Sensitivity Adjustment
Checking the Influence of External Noise in the Installation Environment
1. Press [Detection level confirmation].
Troubleshooting
2. Keep your finger on the cross at the top right.
Operation
7BSmart
Panel
3. Check the result, and if the detection level is "3" or "4", adjust the MultiTouch sensitivity.
<Displayed Result Example>
Detection Result
• Detection Level 1 (Best): No Problem. (Not required to adjust the sensitivity level.)
• Detection Level 2 (Fine environment): No Problem. (Not required to adjust the sensitivity
level.)
• Detection Level 3 (Non-recommended environment): Receiving the external noise
influence. (Required to adjust the sensitivity level)
• Detection Level 4 (Unusable environment): Receiving the external noise influence.
(Required to adjust the sensitivity level)
Troubleshooting
Sensitivity Level Adjustment
• In "Checking the Influence of External Noise in the Installation Environment", if the

detection level is "3" or "4", you are receiving the external noise influence, so adjust the
sensitivity level.
• The sensitivity level can be adjusted between "0" and "10". (Default: 10). If set to "0", the
MultiTouch function is turned off.
• When decreasing the sensitivity level, perform "Checking the Influence of External Noise in
the Installation Environment" again to check the influence of external noise.
• Sensitivity level: 10 (Default)
• Sensitivity level: 0 (MultiTouch function off.)
Note
• If the sensitivity level is set to "0", the MultiTouch function is turned off and you cannot
pinch in or out.
• If the sensitivity level is set between "1" and "9", the distance between the 2 points for
detecting MultiTouch increases as the sensitivity level is decreased.
• At the default setting (sensitivity level 10), MultiTouch is detected for a distance of
approximately 3 cm between the 2 points. At sensitivity level 1, MultiTouch is detected for a
distance of approximately 4 cm between the 2 points.
• If you cannot enter the adjustment menu due to receiving the radio wave influence, connect
a mouse to the operation panel by USB connection or operate with a non-conducting pen.
• Take care not to use a pointed obstacle for the operation. Doing so may damage the
operation panel.
8.4.2 PROBLEMS AND ERRORS RELATED TO HARDWARE

Symptom Solution
The touch panel is damaged (broken, • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
dented, etc.) and cannot be operated. enables the same operation as the touch panel.
• Replace the LCD.
• Replace the operation panel unit (you need to
transfer user information, and reinstall the
applications, etc.). Refer to "Factory Reset and
Restoration".
The touch panel does not respond. • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
enables the same operation as the touch panel.
• Execute the Panel Self Check.
• Check the operations other than that of the touch
panel.
• Replace the LCD.
Troubleshooting
Symptom Solution
Operation
7BSmart
Restoration".
Panel
The touch panel’s coordinates have • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
shifted substantially, resulting in not enables the same operation as the touch panel. So
being able to execute its calibration. you can execute the calibration
• Execute the Panel Self Check, or the TouchPanel
Calibration
• Execute the MultiTouch Calibration.
• If the shift occurs even after turning the power and
then back ON, check the battery voltage of the
operation panel’s main controller board.
• Replace the main controller board.
Restoration".
Cannot enter the SSP mode. If using the screen in a Classic Application, it does not
support multitouch, so you cannot enter the SSP mode
by the normal operation.
Instead, use the EX3 key. Press and hold the EX3 key,
and then press the "System/Copy" button in the SP
mode menu.
SC672-11 appears. Cause
Communication between the controller and the
operation panel was not established after a normal
startup.
USB cable between the operation panel and the MFP is
disconnected, damaged or defective.
Solution
Reconnect or replace the USB cable. For details about
how to replace the USB cable, refer to the service
manual for the MFP.
Reference
For details about SC672, refer to the service manual for
Troubleshooting
Symptom Solution
the MFP.
SC672-12 appears. Cause
Communication between the controller and the
operation panel was interrupted after a normal startup.
USB cable between the operation panel and the MFP is
disconnected, damaged or defective.
Solution
Reconnect or replace the USB cable. For details about
how to replace the USB cable, refer to the service
manual for the MFP.
Reference
For details about SC672, refer to the service manual for
the MFP.
8.4.3 ERRORS RELATED TO APPLICATIONS

Pre-installed Applications
Applicable applications
Copy (Classic) / Scanner (Classic) / Printer (Classic) / Document Server / Quick Copy / Quick
Fax / Quick Scanner / Web Browser
/ Quick ID Card Authentication Config*
*Depends on the model whether it is a pre-installed application
If an error related to the application occurs, the operation panel’s operating system
automatically restarts the application (with a confirmation dialog box).
Third-Party Application
If using a third-party application, the error message, code and solution may vary depending on
the application. Follow the third-party vendor’s instructions.
8.4.4 FACTORY RESET AND RESTORATION

This section explains the Factory Reset and subsequent procedure. Factory Reset may be
executed when an abnormal operation due to the system or an application occurs or when
replacing the operation panel (at the request of the customer to delete settings, etc.)
• When you execute the Factory Reset:
Troubleshooting
All data that created by users will be initialized.

All applications (including the applications from eDC server or Application Site) will be
deleted.
Items Objective
Operation
7BSmart
Only delete Reset application Update system and reset
Panel
data configuration to factory application configuration to
settings. factory settings.
Exporting configuration - As required As required
file
Storing user information - As required As required
other than those
exported
Factory reset Required Required Required
System update - - Required
Application installation - Required Required
Importing configuration - As required As required
file
Registering user - As required As required
information other than
those imported
Before executing Factory Reset, be sure to obtain the package firmware and copy it to the SD
card.
Factory Reset
1. Enter the recovery mode.
2. Select and execute "wipe data/factory reset".
Press the EX1 and EX2 keys to move the cursor up and down.
Press the EX3 key to execute the selected function.
Troubleshooting
3. A reconfirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes].
The message “wiping data…” appears and the data and cache are cleared (within 1
minute).
On completion, the displayed screen returns to the recovery mode menu.
If you reboot the machine as is, the machine cannot display the messages in the local
language because of the absence of the LegacyUI data.
The pre-installed applications have also been deleted, so the alert appears.
For restoration, follow the installation procedure of package firmware, and update it.
8.4.5 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING APPLICATION UPDATE

FROM AN SD CARD
Error Messages
Error message Explanation Solution
Insert a correct SD card. - • Remove the SD card and insert it
again.
• Make sure that the directory of
the SD card is correct. You must
create the "app" folder in the root
directory of the SD card and put
the zip file in the "app" folder.
You are trying to install the Displayed when you Check the file, and select [OK] or
same application with a attempt to update an [Cancel].
different part number. Is it application that is the same
OK to continue? but has a different part
number.
Some applications could Displayed in the following Restart the control panel and repeat
Troubleshooting
Error message Explanation Solution

not be installed. cases. the update procedure.
• You attempted to
update a module
Operation
7BSmart
(application) in use.
Panel
• The application is
corrupted.
- - • Make sure that the directory of
(The application you want the SD card is correct. You must
to update is not displayed create the "app" folder in the root
in the list of applications.) directory of the SD card and put
the zip file in the "app" folder.
• Check the application file in the
SD card.
Error Codes
Error codes may appear along with the message reporting the installation failure.
Error Explanation
Code
215-01 Installation of an application that cannot be used according to the system configuration
was attempted.
(Example: This occurs when installing an application with the copier, scanner and fax
functions on a non-MFP printer. However, if any of these functions can be used, the
application with such multiple functions can be installed.)
215-02 This occurs if the hard disk cannot be used.
215-03 An application that does not match the type (LP/MFP) or model has been installed. *
215-04 Installation of an application that cannot be installed for Basic model was attempted.
221 The system cannot stop the application for the update or uninstallation.
222 The signature is not authentic.
235 The signature is not authentic.
* If the model information (type or model) does not match, even if SC215-03 does light up at the
time of installation, the error message may appear the next time the machine is started. The
message shows the model information of the correct firmware and installed firmware. This can
be restored by updating the firmware to the version with the correct model information.
8.4.6 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING UPDATE FROM THE EDC

SERVER
Example of an error code display
Troubleshooting
XXX (3 digit error)

Error Explanation
code
101 Server connection error
102 Signature verification error
103 License error (for example, the product key was keyed in wrongly)
215 Dependency check error
Displayed when the control panel firmware version does not meet the installation
requirement of the application.
Example: The firmware version of the control panel is 1.02 and you attempted to install
an application that requires firmware version 1.03.
20X Other errors
• An additional 3-digit code may be displayed to indicate the details.

Example: 101-805
XXX -XXX (3 digit-3 digit error)
Error Explanation Solution
code
101-801 Connection Timeout Check the network settings of the
device.
• Network selection (MFP /
Operation Panel)
• IP address
• Default gateway
• Check DNS etc.
101-802 SSL communication failed Check the network settings of the
device.
101-803 Proxy authentication failed Check the proxy settings of the
device.
Troubleshooting
Error Explanation Solution

code
101-804 Proxy Connection Timeout Check the proxy settings of the
device.
Operation
7BSmart
101-805 The server is under maintenance. Resume the operation after
Panel
Connection timeout. completing the server maintenance.
(An incorrect network was selected on the Check the machine’s network
operation panel.) settings.
103-705 Executed activation for an already-activated Execute the update, not activation.
machine with a different product key.
201-700 Activation is being attempted from a device Check the machine’s network
with an unauthorized serial number. settings.
203-706 License update has been executed using a Execute activation, not license
deactivated product key. update.
=> User operation is required because the
settings remain even after deactivation.
8.4.7 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel Unit

HW: Hardware issue, SW: Software issue
No. Symptom Cause Solution
1 Both the Smart Operation HW The Smart Operation 1. Reconnect the
Panel and the blue LED on the Panel cannot be supplied USB cable
operation panel do not turn with electrical power. between the BICU
on. and the Smart
Operation Panel.
2. Replace the USB
cable.
3. Replace the main
controller board.
4. Replace the BICU.
2 The Smart Operation Panel HW The Smart Operation 1. Reconnect the
does not turn on, but the blue Panel can be supplied LCD I/F cable.
LED on the operation panel with electrical power (blue 2. Replace the LCD.
turns on. LED lamp), but nothing 3. Replace the main
can be displayed on the controller board.
LCD. 4. Replace the LCD
I/F cable.
Troubleshooting
No. Symptom Cause Solution
3 A splash (blue) screen SW The Smart Operation 1. Update the

or “Please wait” message HW Panel and LCD can be Cheetah System
stays on the display. supplied with electrical firmware in
power, but software recovery mode.
issues occur during the 2. Do a factory reset.
boot-up sequence. 3. Replace the main
Firmware or eMMC data controller board.
on the Board is defective.
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 1-1

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................... 1-1
Engine...................................................................................................................... 1-1
ADF.......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Document Server..................................................................................................... 1-6
Power Consumption ................................................................................................ 1-6
Noise Emission ........................................................................................................ 1-7
1.1.2 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 1-7
1.1.3 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 1-8
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ...................................................................................... 1-12
1.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION .......................................................................... 1-12
1.2.2 PAPER FEED .................................................................................................... 1-13
Main Machine ........................................................................................................ 1-14
Feed Station Options: A3/DLT Kit, LCIT, Cover Interposer Trays ......................... 1-15
1.2.3 PAPER EXIT ...................................................................................................... 1-17
Exit Tray (Main Machine), Mail Box CS4010 ........................................................ 1-19
Shift Sort Tray ........................................................................................................ 1-20
Finisher SR4140 (3K Finisher Corner Stapling Only) ........................................... 1-21
3K/2K Finishers ..................................................................................................... 1-24
Multi-Folding Unit FD4010..................................................................................... 1-27
Multi-Folding Unit FD4020..................................................................................... 1-30
Cover Interposer Tray............................................................................................ 1-33
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ...................................................................................... 1-35
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS.......................................................................................... 1-35
Windows Environment........................................................................................... 1-35
Mac OS and UNIX Environment ........................................................................... 1-37
1.3.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS ............................................................... 1-37
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................. 1-39
1.4.1 8 1/2"×14" PAPER SIZE TRAY TYPE 9002 (B474) .......................................... 1-39
1.4.2 A3/11" X 17" TRAY TYPE M44 (D3JG) ............................................................. 1-39
1.4.3 LCIT RT4080 (D3J6) ......................................................................................... 1-39
SM Appendices i D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1
1.4.4 FINISHER SR4140 (D3HD) .............................................................................. 1-40
1.4.5 PUNCH UNIT PU5050 (D3HE) ......................................................................... 1-44
1.4.6 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25 (D3CJ) ................................................... 1-44
1.4.7 FINISHER SR4150 (D3HB)............................................................................... 1-45
1.4.8 BOOKLET FINISHER SR4160 (D3HC) ............................................................ 1-46
1.4.9 PUNCH UNIT PU3090 (D3FP).......................................................................... 1-49
1.4.10 MAIL BOX CS4010 (D708) ............................................................................... 1-50
1.4.11 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI4040 (DC3N) ................................................. 1-50
1.4.12 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4020 (D3HH) .......................................................... 1-51
General .................................................................................................................. 1-51
Tray Capacity......................................................................................................... 1-53
1.4.13 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4010 (D3HJ) ........................................................... 1-56
1.4.14 SHIFT SORT TRAY SH4020 (D3HG) ............................................................... 1-58
2. ENGINE SP MODE TABLES......................................................... 2-1

2.1 ENGINE SP TABLES-1 .................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 ENGINE SP TABLES-2 ................................................................................................ 2-34
2.2.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM) ............................................................................................. 2-34
2.3 ENGINE SP TABLES-3 ................................................................................................ 2-83
2.3.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) ...................................................................................... 2-83
2.4 ENGINE SP TABLES-4 ................................................................................................ 2-86
2.4.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) ...................................................................................... 2-86
2.5 ENGINE SP TABLES-5 .............................................................................................. 2-107
2.5.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) ........................................................................................... 2-107
2.6 ENGINE SP TABLES-6 .............................................................................................. 2-112
2.6.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)............................................................................. 2-112
2.7 ENGINE SP TABLES-7 .............................................................................................. 2-167
2.7.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) .................................................................................... 2-167
2.8 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK .................................................................................. 2-199
2.8.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE .................................................................................... 2-199
Main Machine, LTC.............................................................................................. 2-199
ADF...................................................................................................................... 2-207
2K/3K Finisher ..................................................................................................... 2-208
Finisher 3KFIN (100Bind) .................................................................................... 2-210
Slide Sort Tray ..................................................................................................... 2-211
Multi Folder .......................................................................................................... 2-211
Print Post ............................................................................................................. 2-213
1-Tray CIT............................................................................................................ 2-213
2.8.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ................................................................................ 2-214
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 ii SM Appendices
Main Machine, LTC.............................................................................................. 2-214
ADF...................................................................................................................... 2-217
2K/3K Finisher ..................................................................................................... 2-217
Finisher 3KFIN (100Bind) .................................................................................... 2-218
Slide Sort Tray ..................................................................................................... 2-219
Multi Folder .......................................................................................................... 2-219
Print Post ............................................................................................................. 2-221
3. CONTROLLER SP MODE TABLES ............................................. 3-1

3.1 CONTROLLER SP TABLES-5 ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 CONTROLLER SP TABLES-6 ..................................................................................... 3-53
3.2.1 SP6-XXX (DATA LOG) ...................................................................................... 3-53
3.3.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ...................................................................................... 3-54
3.4.1 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2) .................................................................................... 3-98
3.5 PRINTER SERVICE MENU ....................................................................................... 3-169
3.5.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) .......................................................................... 3-169
3.6 SCANNER SP MODE ................................................................................................ 3-179
3.6.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS) .............................................................. 3-179
3.6.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY) ..................................................... 3-181
3.6.3 SP3-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY) ..................................................... 3-182
4. DEVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION ..................................... 4-1

4.1 PRINTING FEATURES .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION ..................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION ................................................................. 4-1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 4-1
Conditions for Detection of the PDL ........................................................................ 4-1
PDL Detection by the Printer System, PCL Interpreter and PS Interpreter ............ 4-2
PDL Selection and Switching .................................................................................. 4-2
Triggers.................................................................................................................... 4-3
Some Possible Problems ........................................................................................ 4-4
Printer Bit Switch Description .................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.3 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION................................................................................ 4-5
4.1.4 PJL USTATUS ..................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2 SCANNER FEATURES.................................................................................................. 4-9
SM Appendices iii D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1

4.2.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED ACAN DESTINATION ................. 4-9
4.2.2 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER ............................ 4-9
4.3 SECURITY FEATURES ............................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU............................... 4-11
4.3.2 HOW TO RESTRICT WEB IMAGE MONITOR ACCESS TO THE DOCUMENT
SERVER....................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.3 USER AUTHENTICATION FOR SPECIFIC MFP APPLICATIONS .................. 4-12
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 iv SM Appendices
APPENDICES:
SPECIFICATIONS
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
Pag e Date Ad d ed / Upd ated / New
None
General Specifications
1. MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Appendices
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 COPIER
Engine
Item Specification
Configuration Console
Originals Sheet, book, three-dimensional object
Copy Method Laser dry electrostatic transfer system
Exposure glass Stationary original exposure type
Scanning Simultaneous dual side scanning
Method
Front One-dimensional solid scanning system using CMOS
Back One-dimensional solid scanning system using CIS
Original Exposure Glass
scanning area • Vertical: Up to 297 mm (11.7 inches)
• Horizontal: Up to 432 mm (17. 1 inches)
ADF
• Vertical: 128 to 297 mm (5.1 to 11.7 inches)
• Horizontal
• Copy function: 128 to 1,260 mm (5.1 to 49.7 inches)
• Scanner function: 128 to 432 mm (5.1 to 17. 1 inches)
• Facsimile function: 128 to 1,200 mm (5.1 to 47.3 inches)
Copy Paper Tray1 • NA: 81/2 x 11 LEF
Size • EU: A4 LEF
Tray 2, 3 (Paper sizes that can be A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 JIS, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x
detected automatically) 17 SEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 13 SEF, 81/2 x
11, 81/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 71/4 x 101/2,
51/2 x 81/2, 8K SEF, 16K
Tray 2, 3 (Select the paper size 81/4 x 14 SEF, 8 x 101/2 SEF, 210 x 182 mm
using the Tray Paper Settings LEF, 210 x 170 mm LEF, 210 x 340 mm
menu) SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15
SEF, 81/2 x 132/5 SEF, 81/2 x 131/2 SEF
Tray 2, 3 (Custom size) NA:
• Vertical: 5.50–11.69 inches
• Horizontal: 5.50–17.00 inches
SM Appendices 1-1 D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1

Item Specification
EU:
• Vertical: 139.7–297.0 mm
• Horizontal: 139.7–432.0 mm
Tray 2, 3 (Tab stock) A4 LEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 11 LEF
Bypass Tray (Paper sizes that • NA:
can be detected automatically) A3 SEF, A4 LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 81/2 x
14 SEF, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2, 100 x 148
mm SEF
• EU:
A3 SEF, A4, A5, 100 × 148 mm SEF
Bypass Tray (Select the paper • NA:
size) A4 SEF, A5, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5
JIS, B6 JIS SEF, 81/2 x 13 SEF, 81/4 x
14 SEF, 81/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF , 8
x 101/2, 8 x 10, 71/4 x 101/2, 11 x 15
SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF , 10 x
14 SEF, 81/2 x 132/5 SEF, 81/2 x 131/2
SEF
• EU:
A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS
SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x
13 SEF, 81/2 x 11, 81/4 x 14 SEF, 81/4 x
13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 101/2, 8
x10,71/4 x 101/2, 51/2 x 81/2, 11 x 15
SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x
14 SEF, 81/2 x 132/5 SEF, 81/2 x 131/2
SEF
Bypass Tray (Custom size) • NA:
• Vertical: 3.94–12.00 inches
• Horizontal: 5.50–23.62 inches
• EU:
• Vertical: 100.0–305.0 mm
In printer or facsimile mode, the maximum
horizontal length of the custom size is
1,260 mm (49.60 inches). If you want to
print on paper with a horizontal length of
600–1,260 mm (23.62–49.60 inches),
D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1 1-2 SM Appendices

Item Specification
contact your service representative. If you
want to load paper with a horizontal length
Specifications
Appendices
of 600 mm (23.52 inches) or longer in the
bypass tray, it must have a vertical width of
305 mm (12.1 inches) or less.
When paper larger than 432 mm (17
inches) in size is used, the paper may
become wrinkled, may not be fed into the
machine, or may cause paper jams.
Bypass Tray (Translucent paper) A3 SEF, A4, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS
Bypass Tray (Label paper A4, B4 JIS SEF
(adhesive labels))
Bypass Tray (OHP A4, 81/2 x 11
transparencies) The supported paper sizes vary depending
on the finisher or option that is connected
to the machine. For details, see the
specifications of each option.
Duplex A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 SEF, B5, 11 x 17 SEF,
81/2 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 13 SEF, 81/2 x 11, 81/4
x 14 SEF, 81/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x
101/2, 8 x 10,71/4 x 101/2, 51/2 x 81/2, 182 x
210 mm LEF, 170 x 210 mm LEF, 210 x
340 mm SEF, 8K SEF, 16K, 11 x 15 SEF,
11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF,
81/2 x 132/5 SEF, 81/2 x 131/2 SEF
Duplex (Custom Size) • Vertical: 140.0–297.0 mm (5.51–11.69
inches)
(5.51–17.0 inches)
Paper Weight Tray 1 52.0–256.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–141.0 lb.
Index)
Tray 2, 3 52.0–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–141.0 lb.
Index)
Bypass • Plain Paper–Thick Paper 4:
52.0–300.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–165.0
lb. Index)
• Translucent paper,Label paper
(adhesive labels): 52.0–128.0 g/m2

Item Specification
(14.0 lb. Bond–34.0 lb. Bond)
Reproduction NA:
Ratios • Preset reproduction ratios (%):
• Enlargement: 400, 200, 155, 129, 121
• Full size: 100
• Reduction: 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25
EU:
• Preset reproduction ratios (%):
• Enlargement: 400, 200, 141, 122, 115
• Full size: 100
• Reduction: 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
Zoom 25% to 400% (1% units selectable)
Margins (White Leading margin 4.5±2.0 mm (0.18 ±0.08 inches)
Space)
Left margin 2.0±1.5 mm (0.08 ±0.06 inches)
Right margin 2.0±1.5 mm (0.08 ±0.06 inches)
Trailing margin 3.0±2.0 mm (0.12 ±0.08 inches)
Continuous IM 7000: 70 ppm (A4, LT LEF)
Copying Speed IM 8000: 80 ppm (A4, LT LEF)
IM 9000: 90 ppm (A4, LT LEF)
Max. Original • NA: 11x17 LEF (279x432 mm)
Size • EU: A3 (297x420 mm)
First Copy Time IM 7000 3.2 s (The first copy/print time may
IM 8000 3.2 s differ depending on the
IM 9000 2.9 s conditions and environment of
the machine.)
Warm-up Time IM 7000/8000
(23°C (73.4°F), • Normal mode: 50 seconds
rated voltage) • Quick mode: 20 seconds
IM 9000
• Normal mode: 60 seconds
• Quick mode: 60 seconds
Continuous 1 to 999 (Operation panel entry)
Copying
Duplex Standard
Paper Capacity Tray 1 1,550 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20 lb. Bond) x 2
Tray 2, 3 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Tray 3 550 sheets

Item Specification
Bypass tray • Plain Paper–Middle Thick: 100 sheets
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Specifications
Appendices
• Thick Paper 1: 30 sheets
• Translucent paper: 50 sheets
• Label paper (adhesive labels): 1 sheet
• OHP transparencies: 50 sheets
Power Source North America IM 7000/8000: 120–127 V, 15 A, 60 Hz
IM 9000: 208–240 V, 9 A, 60 Hz
Asia 220–240 V, 8.5 A, 50/60 Hz
Europe IM 7000/8000: 220-240 V, 8.5 A or more,
50/60 Hz
IM 9000: 220-240 V, 9 A or more, 50/60 Hz
Power See Power Consumption.
Consumption
Memory 4 GB (2 GB on the main unit and 2 GB on the control panel)
HDD Capacity 320 GB
Semi-conductor OPC drum
Dimensions 690 x 883 x 1,161 mm (27.2 x 34.8 x 45.7 inches)
(wxdxh)
Space required 1,290 x 883 mm (50.8 x 34.8 inches) (including the bypass tray and copy tray)
(wxd)
Weight Approx. 200 kg (440.9 lb.) or less
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi 8-bit
Printing 1200 dpi 1-bit
Gradation 256 levels (scanning and printing)
ADF
Item Specification
Mode Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Custom Size originals mode,
Original Orientation mode
Original Size • NA: 11 x 17 SEF–51/2 x 81/2, A3 SEF–A4
• EU: A3 SEF–A5, B4 JIS SEF–B6 JIS, 11 x 17SEF–81/2 x 11
You cannot scan two sides of B6 JIS originals.
Original Simplex: 40 to 128 g/m 2 (11 to 34 lb.)
Weight Duplex: 52 to 128 g/m2 (14 to 34 lb.)

Item Specification
Small size paper unit (optional): Simplex/Duplex: 64-128 g/m2 (17-34 lb. Bond)
Table 220 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Capacity Small size paper unit (optional): 44 sheets (81.4g/m2)
Document Server
Item Specification
HDD (Document Server) Approx. 94 GB
Maximum: 10,000 pages (Total number of pages that can be stored
with all functions combined.)
Copy/A4 original: Approx. 10,000 pages
Printer/A4/600 dpi, 2 bits: Approx. 10,000 pages
Scanner/A4/200 dpi, 8 bits/JPEG: Approx. 10,000 pages
(Under the printer and scanner modes, the number of the pages
that can be stored depends on the print image and original.)
Maximum number of stored 3,000 documents
documents
Number of pages supported Maximum: 3,000 pages
by memory sorting Copy/A4 original: Approx. 3,000 pages
Printer/A4/600 dpi, 4 bits: Approx. 3,000 pages
(Under the printer mode, the number of pages that can be sorted
depends on the print image.)
Power Consumption
NA
Operation Mode IM 7000 IM 8000 IM 9000
Main unit only
Ready 239 W 239 W 254 W
During printing 1,060 W 1,100 W 1,200 W
Maximum 1,760 W or less 1,760 W or less 2,020 W or less
Complete system*1
*1 Main Machine + Finisher + Cover Interposer Tray + LCT
EU/AA
Main unit only
Ready 254 W 254 W 254 W
During printing 1,140 W 1,160 W 1,200 W


Complete system*1
Specifications
Appendices
*1 Main Machine + Finisher + Cover Interposer Tray + LCT
Noise Emission
Sound power level Sound pressure level
Main unit only Complete system Main unit only Complete system
IM 7000 Stand-by 33.7 dB - 20.3 dB -
Copying 69.9 dB 74.3 dB 56.8 dB 59.5 dB
IM 8000 Stand-by 33.7 dB - 21.5 dB -
IM 9000 Stand-by 51.8 dB - 40.1 dB -
• Sound power levels and sound pressure levels are actual values measured in
accordance with ISO 7779.
• Sound pressure levels are measured from the position of the bystander.
• The complete system consists of the main unit (including ADF), LCT, Multi-Folding Unit
FD4010, interposer, Booklet Finisher SR4160, punch unit, and output jogger.
1.1.2 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS

Item Specification
Print Speed IM 9000: 90 ppm
(A4 LEF, 81/2 x 11 LEF, plain IM 8000: 80 ppm
paper, one-side printing) IM 7000: 70 ppm
Resolution 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
Printer Languages Standard PCL 5e/6, PostScript 3 Emulation, PDF Emulation,
MediaPrint (JPEG, TIFF)
Option Genuine Adobe PostScript 3, Genuine Adobe PDF,
IPDS, XPS
Interface Standard Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Operation Panel USB2.0 port(A type)
USB2.0 port(B type)
Operation Panel SD Card Slot
Option IEEE 1284 parallel interface
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
File format converter

Item Specification
Device Server option
Protocols TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
USB Interface • Transmission spec: USB 2.0 Standard
• Connectable device: Devices corresponding to USB 2.0
Standard
Compatible OS Windows 7/8.1/10
Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019
macOS 10.12 or later
Built-in Fonts PCL 5e/6: 80 fonts, 13 International fonts
PostScript 3 Emulation: 80 fonts, 13 International fonts
PDF Emulation: 80 fonts, 13 International fonts
Genuine Adobe PDF: 136 fonts
Genuine Adobe PostScript 3: 136 fonts
IPDS: 108 fonts
Store function Total number of documents that can be stored: Up to 3,000
documents
Number of pages for each document that can be stored: Up to
3,000 pages
Total number of pages of all documents that can be stored: Up to
10,000 pages
• To connect the machine to the network, use a LAN cable supporting 1000BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, and 10BASE-T. The length of the usable cable is up to 100 m.
• The maximum length for the cable connecting the machine to an Ethernet network is
100 meters.
• When the resolution is 1200 dpi, print speed may be slower.
1.1.3 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS

Item Specification
Configuration Full color scanner
Scanning Method Flatbed scanning
Image Sensors Front side: CMOS image sensor
Back side: Color CIS
Original Sheet, book, three-dimensional object
Original Size SEF: 10 to 297 mm (0.4 to 11.7 in.)
LEF: 10 to 432 mm (0.4 to 17 in.)
Scan sizes automatically • EU: A3 SEF, A4, A5 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS
detectable from the • NA: 11 x 17 SEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 132/5 SEF, 81/2 x 11,

Item Specification
exposure glass 51/2 x 81/2 LEF
Scan sizes automatically • NA: A3 SEF, A4, 11 x 17 SEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 132/5 SEF,
Specifications
Appendices
detectable from the ADF 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2 SEF, 51/2 x 81/2, 10 x 14 SEF
• EU: A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS, 11 x 17 SEF,
81/2 x 11
Scanning Speed • When scanning one-sided originals (black and white, full
(the machine equipped with color)
the one-pass duplex 120 pages/minute
scanning ADF) • When scanning two-sided originals (black and white, full
color)
240 pages/minute
When using the E-mail, Scan to Folder, WSD (Push Type), or
Scan to Removable device (Original size: A4 LEF/81/2 x 11,
Resolution: 300 dpi)
• Black and white
Original Type: B & W two-value, Compression (MMR):
Compressed, ITU-T No1 Chart
• Full Color
Original type: Text/Photo, Compression (Gray Scale/Full
Color): Default, Original Chart
Scanning speed differs depending on the operating
environment of the machine and computer, scan settings, and
the content of originals.
Gradation B&W: 2-Step
FC/Grayscale: 256-Step
Scan Resolution 200 dpi (standard)
Compression B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2)
Grayscale/FC: JPEG
Interface Standard Cover Interposer Tray(1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
10BASE-T)
Operation Panel USB2.0 Port(A-type)
Operation Panel SD Card Slot
Option IEEE802.11a/b/g/h (Wireless LAN)
Network I/F TCP/IP
WSD Supported
DSM Supported
(The function can be used only in Scanner (Classic).)
Mail TX

Item Specification
Protocol SMTP *1, POP *2, IMAP4 *2
(Supporting Web mail *1:Supporting SMTP over SSL.
transmission) *2:Supporting POP/IMAP4 over SSL.
Output Format TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A, Searchable
PDF *
*:
To perform OCR, the optional OCR unit is required.
The number of characters that can be scanned optically is about
40,000 characters per page.
Folder TX
Protocol SMB, FTP
Output Format TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A, Searchable
PDF*
*:
To perform OCR, the optional OCR unit is required.
The number of characters that can be scanned optically is about
40,000 characters per page.
TWAIN Driver
Resolution 100 to 1200dpi (The maximum resolution depends on the scan
size.)
Protocol TCP/IP
Compatible OS Windows 7/8.1/10
Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019
(WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating
systems.)
• To connect the machine to the network, use a LAN cable supporting 1000BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, and 10BASE-T. The length of the usable cable is up to 100 m.
• When you select [PDF], [High Compression PDF], or [PDF/A] for the file format, you
can attach a digital signature. You can also specify the security settings for [PDF] or
[High Compression PDF].
• To specify High Compression PDF for the PDF type, the following settings are
required:
• Selecting Gray Scale or Full Color for [Original Type] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting other than [Reduce / Enlarge] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], or [600 dpi] for [Resolution] under [Send

Settings]
• Selecting other than [Preview]
• Specifying [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] under [System Settings] to [Off]
Specifications
Appendices

Supported Paper Sizes
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
1.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Y: Supported
-: Not supported
Size (W x L) [mm] NA EU/Asia/Oceania/China
Platen ADF Platen ADF
*4
A3 SEF (297 x 420) - Y Y Y
B4 SEF (257 x 364) - - Y*4 Y
A4 SEF (210 x 297) - Y Y*4 Y
- *4
A4 LEF (297 x 210) Y Y Y
B5 SEF (182 x 257) - - Y*4 Y
B5 LEF (257 x 182) - - Y*4 Y
A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - Y*2 Y
A5 LEF (210 x 148) - - Y Y
B6 SEF (128 x 182) - - - Y
B6 LEF (182 x 128) - - - Y
DLT SEF (11" x 17") Y Y*1 - Y*1
LG SEF (81/2" x 14") Y*6 Y*1 - -
oficio SEF (81/2" x 132/5") Y*6 - -
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") Y Y*1 - Y*1
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") Y Y*1 - Y*1
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") Y*2 Y - -
1 1
HLT LEF (8 /2" x 5 /2") Y Y - -
F SEF (8" x 13") - - Y*3 Y*3
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") - Y*1 Y*3 Y*3
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") - - Y*3 Y*3
F4a SEF (216 x 343) - - Y*3 Y*3*5
11" x 15" - Y*1 - -
10" x 14" - Y - -
10" x 8" - Y*1 - -
Executive (7 1/4” x 10 1/2”) - - - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) - - Y*4 Y*1
16K SEF (195 x 267) - - Y*4 Y*1
16K LEF (267 x 195) - - Y*4 Y*1
US EXE SEF (7 1/4” x 10 1/2”) - Y - -
US EXE LEF (10 1/2” x 7 1/4”) - Y*1 - -

*1: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016.
*3: Foolscap (Default); It can be switched to F size (8.5"x13" SEF, 8.25"x13" SEF, 8"x13" SEF)
Specifications
Appendices
by SP mode.
*5: The machine cannot detect the paper size in consolidation mode.
*6: LG (Default); It can be switched to oficio by SP mode.
1.2.2 PAPER FEED

Remarks
A Auto detectable. Also can be selected with size button of initial setting.
B Can be selected with size button from initial setting.
C Select this size by setting the dial.
D Set dial to “*”, then select with size button from initial setting.
E Bypass setting. Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Size select or select with the print
bypass paper size/size button from initial setting.
F Select with SP from preset paper sizes.
Cannot be selected from printer driver.
G Switches which size to set as auto detect with SP.
*Example: The combination of A1-G1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as B.
Combinations are only made from same region same tray.
*Example: The combination of G1 and J1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as E.
Combinations are only made from same region same tray.
H Size fixed when shipping.
I Bypass setting. With bypass tray, after 1st sheet trailing edge goes through, auto detects
size, then fixed to size detected from the 2nd sheet,
or copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Size select or select with the print bypass paper
size/size button from initial setting.
J Bypass setting. Auto detect or Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Select with size button
or select with the print bypass paper size/size button from initial setting.
K Select with SP from preset paper sizes. Can be selected from printer driver.
--- Not available
Notes
0 Paper without designated size code can pass through the peripheral as a custom size.
1 Sizes that can be used in Tray 1 (Tandem Tray).
2 Long paper up to 432 mm long can be effectively fed from the bypass tray.
3 The paper size can be set with an SP code.

4 Paper lengths up to 150 mm (Thick 1, 2, 3) are not within specification.

5 When duplex printing with paper fed from the bypass tray, settings can be done (front sheet,
back sheet, etc.), or the default settings (paper type, paper size, thickness) can be used.
Examples
Combinations of letters and numbers direct your attention to the Remarks and Notes table
above.
• "E4" Refers to Remark "E" and Note "4".
• "K1" Refers to Remark "K" and Note "1".
• Do not confuse these notations with paper sizes (A4, etc.) The paper sizes are listed only in
the left column.
Main Machine
Bypass Tray 1 (Tandem) Tray 2, 3 (Universal)
(100) (1550+1550) (550 ea.)
NA EU/Asia NA EU/Asia NA EU/Asia
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) J J --- --- A A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) E J --- --- A A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) J J K1 H1 A A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) E J --- --- A A
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) E4 J4 --- --- A4 A4
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) E E --- --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) E E --- --- A A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) E E --- --- A A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) E E --- --- A A
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) E E --- --- --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) J E --- --- A A
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A1 E --- --- A A
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) E E --- --- A A
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) G1 E --- --- A1 A
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) J E H1 K1 A A
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) E E --- --- B B
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) E E --- --- A A
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) E E --- --- A A
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) E E --- --- B B
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) E E --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) E E --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) E E --- --- --- ---
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) E E --- --- A A

Bypass Tray 1 (Tandem) Tray 2, 3 (Universal)

(100) (1550+1550) (550 ea.)
NA EU/Asia NA EU/Asia NA EU/Asia
Specifications
Appendices
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) E E --- --- A A
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) J E --- --- A A
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) J4 E4 --- --- A4 A4
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- --- --- --- B B
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) --- --- --- --- B B
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) --- --- --- --- B B
8K SEF (267x390 mm) --- --- --- --- A A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) --- --- --- --- A A
16K LEF (267x195 mm) --- --- --- --- A A
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) E E --- --- B B
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) E E --- --- B B
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) E E --- --- B B
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) E E --- --- --- ---
8 1/2 x 13 2/5 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) G1 E --- --- G1 G1
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) E E --- --- B B
Feed Station Options: A3/DLT Kit, LCIT, Cover Interposer Trays

Tray 1 A3/DLT Kit, LCIT
Tray 1 A3/DLT Kit LCIT
(1000) (4000)
NA EU/Asia NA EU/Asia
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) K K --- ---
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) K K --- ---
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) K K K H
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) --- --- --- ---
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) --- --- --- ---
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) --- --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) K K --- ---
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) --- --- --- ---
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) --- --- K K
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) --- --- --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) H H --- ---
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) K K --- ---
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) --- --- --- ---
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) K K --- ---

Tray 1 A3/DLT Kit LCIT

(1000) (4000)
NA EU/Asia NA EU/Asia
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) K K H K
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) --- --- --- ---
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) --- --- --- ---
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) --- --- --- ---
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro (SEF 8x10 in.) --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) --- --- --- ---
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) --- --- --- ---
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- --- --- ---
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) --- --- --- ---
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) --- --- --- ---
8K SEF (267x390 mm) --- --- --- ---
16K SEF (195x267 mm) --- --- --- ---
16K LEF (267x195 mm) --- --- --- ---
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) --- --- --- ---
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) --- --- --- ---
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) --- --- --- ---
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) --- --- --- ---
8 1/2 x 13 2/5 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) K K --- ---
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
Cover Interposer Trays
Cover Interposer Trays (200)
NA EU/Asia
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) --- A
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) --- A
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) --- A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) --- A

Cover Interposer Trays (200)

NA EU/Asia
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A A
Specifications
Appendices
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A G4
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A1 ---
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) G1 A7
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A2 G6
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A3 G5
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) --- ---
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) --- G7
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) --- G7
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) --- ---
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) --- ---
Eng Quatro (SEF 8x10 in.) G2 ---
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) --- ---
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A ---
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) G3 ---
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A ---
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A ---
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- ---
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) --- ---
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) --- ---
8K SEF (267x390 mm) --- A4
16K SEF (195x267 mm) --- A6
16K LEF (267x195 mm) --- A5
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) --- ---
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) --- ---
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) --- ---
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A ---
8 1/2 x 13 2/5 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A ---
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) G1 G7
1.2.3 PAPER EXIT

Remarks:
A Paper exit is available and paper will pass.
B Paper exit is available but passage is not guaranteed as the paper is not with specifications.
--- Not available.

Notes
0 Paper without designated size code can pass through the peripheral as a custom size.
1 Folding is possible with Multi Folder with thick paper in the range 64 to 80 g/m2.
2 Main machine controls stapling.
3 Not used.
4 Not used.
5 Paper longer than 432 mm is not within specification
6 Paper lengths up to 150 mm (Thick 1, 2, 3) are not within specification.
7 There are limitations on FM 3 Letter Fold-out, FM 4 Letter Fold-in, FM6 Gate Folding with A3,
B4, DLT and LG size paper due to the possibility of wrinkling.
8 There are limitations on FM6 Gate Folding with A3, B4, DLT and LG size paper due to the
possibility of creasing.
9 Out of specification for stack alignment by jogger operation on the 2K/3K Finishers.
10 Estimated eight Z-folded sheets for 52 to 80 g/m2. Estimated thirteen Z-folded sheets for 80.1
to 105 g/m2.
11 Up to 5 multi-folded sheets allowed with 2K/3K Finishers.
12 Range of paper size that can be shifted with the 2K/3K Finishers
Width:125.0 to 304.8 mm
Length: 139.7 to 457.2 mm
13 Range of paper size that can be corner stapled with the 2K/3K Finishers
Width:182.0 to 297 mm
14 Range of paper size that can be booklet stapled with the 2K/3K Finishers
Width:182.0 to 330.2 mm
However, the width is further restricted to 182 mm, 207 to 225 mm, 250 to 257 mm, 279.4 to
306 mm
15 Can exit if folded with Multi Folder unit. Cannot exit if not folded.
16 The paper, including jam occurrence, is not within specification but can be selected for
keeping function of the machine to work as well as the predecessor machine. (Shift Sort
Tray)
17 Multi folding is available if thickness is within from 64g/m2 to 80g/m2. (Multi-Folding Unit
FD4010)
18 Paper exit can be done only for connected downstream machines. (Multi-Folding Unit
FD4010)
19 Paper exit can be done only for folding function tray. (Multi-Folding Unit FD4010)
20 Folding paper allowable width is A4 (210, 297), LT (215.9, 279.4) only. (Multi-Folding Unit
FD4010)
21 Staple allowable paper size of z-folded paper; A3 SEF, B4 SEF, DLT SEF, 8K SEF

Combination of staple allowable paper size of z-folded paper; A3 SEF (z-fold), A4 LEF, B4
SEF (z-fold), BS LEF, DLT SEF (z-fold), LT LEF, 8K SEF (z-fold), and 16K LEF
22 When z-folded paper composes the combination, non-folded paper can go through.
Specifications
Appendices
(Multi-Folding Unit FD4020)
23 When z-folded paper composes the combination, non-folded paper and envelope fold paper
(Half-Fold, Letter In, Letter Out, Gate, Double Parallel) can go through. (Multi-Folding Unit
FD4020)
Examples
Combinations of letters and numbers direct your attention to the Remarks and Notes table
above.
• "A6" Refers to Remark "A" and Note "6".
• "A(3)1" Refers to Remark "A" (3 sheets), Note "1".
• Do not confuse these notations with paper sizes (A6, etc.) The paper sizes are listed only in
the left column.
Exit Tray (Main Machine), Mail Box CS4010

Exit Tray Mail Box
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) A A
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) A6 A6
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) A ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A A
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) A ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A A
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A A
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) A A
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A A
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A A
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) A A
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) A A
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) A A
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) A A
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) A A
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) A A

Exit Tray Mail Box

Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) A A
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A A
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A A
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A A
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A6 A6
BD LEF (210x182 mm) A A
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) A A
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) A A
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) A A
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A A
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) A A
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) A A
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) A A
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A A
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A
Shift Sort Tray

Exit
Shift Shifting
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) A A
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) A A6
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) A B16
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A A
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) A B16
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A A
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) A A
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) A A

Exit
Shift Shifting
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) A A
Specifications
Appendices
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) A A
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) A A
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) A A
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) A A
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) A A
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A A
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A A
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A A
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A A6
BD LEF (210x182 mm) A A
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) A A
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) A A
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) A A
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A A
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) A A
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) A A
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) A A
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A A
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A
Finisher SR4140 (3K Finisher Corner Stapling Only)

Exit Stapling
Proof Shift Shifting Corner Booklet Sheets
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A A A A A 50 (2)
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A A A A 100
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A A A A 100
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) A A A --- --- ---
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) A6 A6 A6 --- --- ---
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) A --- --- --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A A A A A 50 (2)
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A A A A 100
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A A A A A 100
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) A --- --- --- --- ---

Exit Stapling
Proof Shift Shifting Corner Booklet Sheets
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A A A A A 100
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A A A A A 100
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A A A --- --- ---
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A6 A6 A6 --- --- ---
BD LEF (210x182 mm) A A A A A 50 (2)
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) A A A A A 50 (2)
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) A A A A A 50 (2)
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A A A A A 50 (2)
16K SEF (195x267 mm) A A A A A 50 (2)
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A A A A A 50 (2)
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A A A A 50 (2)
In the table below “EU-2” means European 2-hole punch, “NA-2”, “NA-3” means North
American 2-hole, 3-hole punch, and “SC4” means Scandinavian 4-hole punch.
Punching
EU-2 NA-2 NA-3 EU-4 SC-4
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A A A A A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A --- --- A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A A A A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) A A --- --- A

Punching
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) A6 A6 --- --- A6
Specifications
Appendices
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) A A --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A A A A A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A --- --- A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A A A A A
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) A A --- --- A
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A A A A A
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A A --- --- A
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) A A --- --- A
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A A --- --- A
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A A A A A
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) A A --- --- A
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) A A --- --- A
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) A A --- --- A
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) A A --- --- A
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) A A A A A
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) A A --- --- A
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) A A A --- A
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A A --- --- A
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A A A A A
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A A --- --- A
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A6 A6 --- --- A6
BD LEF (210x182 mm) A A --- --- A
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) A A --- --- A
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) A A --- --- A
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A A A A A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) A A --- --- A
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A A A A A
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) A A A A A
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) A A A A A
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) A A A --- A
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A A A --- A
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A --- --- A
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A --- --- A

3K/2K Finishers
The 3K finisher is the Finisher SR4150 (Corner Stapling Only), and the 2K finisher is the
Booklet Finisher SR4160 (Corner and Booklet Stapling).
Exit, Folded
Exit Folded
Proof Shift Shifting Booklet Booklet
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A A A A A11
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A A A A11
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A A --- ---
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) A A A --- ---
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) A6 A6 A6 --- ---
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) A B --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A A A A A11
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A A A A11
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A A A --- ---
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) A A B --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A A A A A11
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A A A A A11
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) A A A --- ---
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A A A A A11
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A A A --- ---
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) A A A A A11
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) A A A A A11
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) A A A --- ---
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) A A A --- ---
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) A A A --- ---
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) A A A --- ---
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) A A A --- ---
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A A A --- ---
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A A A --- ---
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A A A --- ---
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A6 A6 A6 --- ---
BD LEF (210x182 mm) A A A --- ---
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) A A A --- ---
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) A A A --- ---
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A A A --- ---
16K SEF (195x267 mm) A A A --- ---
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A A A --- ---

Exit Folded
Proof Shift Shifting Booklet Booklet
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) A A A A A11
Specifications
Appendices
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) A A A A A11
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) A A A A A11
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A A A A A11
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A A --- ---
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A A --- ---
Stapling
Stapled
Corner Double Sheets Booklet Sheets
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A21 A21 65 A 20
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A 65 A 20
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A 65 --- ---
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A21 A21 65 A 20
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A 65 A 20
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A A 65 --- ---
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A21 A21 65 A 20
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A A 65 A 20
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) A A 65 --- ---
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A A 65 A 20
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A A 65 --- ---
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) A A 65 A 20
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) A A 65 A 20
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) A A 65 --- ---
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A A 65 --- ---
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A A 65 --- ---
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- --- --- --- ---

Stapled
Corner Double Sheets Booklet Sheets
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A21 A21 65 --- ---
16K SEF (195x267 mm) A A 65 --- ---
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A A 65 --- ---
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) A A 65 A 20
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) A A 65 A 20
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) A A 65 A 20
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A A 65 A 20
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A 65 --- ---
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A 65 --- ---
Punching
In the table below “EU-2” means European 2-hole punch, “NA-2”, “NA-3” means North
American 2-hole, 3-hole punch, and “SC4” means Scandinavian 4-hole punch.
Punch
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A A A A A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A B --- --- A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A A A A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) A A --- --- A
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) A --- --- --- A
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A A A A A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A --- --- A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A A A A A
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A A A A A
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A A --- --- A
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) A A --- --- A
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A A --- --- A
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A A A A A
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) A A --- --- A
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) A A --- --- A
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) A A --- --- A
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) A A --- --- A
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) A A A A A

Punch
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) A A --- --- A
Specifications
Appendices
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) A A A A A
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A A --- --- A
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A A A A A
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A A --- --- A
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A6 A6 --- --- A6
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A A A A A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) A A --- --- A
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A A A A A
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) A A A A A
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) A A A A A
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) A A A --- A
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A A A --- A
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A --- --- A
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A --- --- A

Exit Straight Through
Fold Tray Downstream
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) --- A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) --- A
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) --- A
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) --- A
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) --- A
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) --- A
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) --- A
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) --- A


Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) --- A
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) --- A
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) --- A
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) --- A
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) --- A
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) --- A
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) --- A
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) --- A
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) --- A
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) --- A
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) --- A
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- A
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) --- A
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) --- A
8K SEF (267x390 mm) --- A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) --- A
16K LEF (267x195 mm) --- A
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) --- A
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) --- A
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) --- A
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) --- A
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) --- A
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) --- A
FM1 FM2 FM3 Letter Out FM4 Letter In

Z-Fold Half-Fold
Single Single Single Multi Single Multi
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A18 A18 A18 --- A18 ---
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A18 A18 A19 A(3)17,19 A19 A(3)17,19
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) --- A19 --- --- --- ---
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) --- --- --- --- --- ---
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) --- --- --- --- --- ---
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) --- --- --- --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A18 A18 --- --- A19 ---
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) --- A19 --- --- --- ---


Z-Fold Half-Fold
Specifications
Appendices
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) --- --- --- --- --- ---
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) --- --- --- --- --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A18 A18 A18 --- A18 ---
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A18 A18 A19 --- A19 ---
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 --- --- --- --- --- ---
in.)
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A18 A18 A19 A(3)17,19 A19 A(3)17,19
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) --- A19 --- --- --- ---
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 --- --- --- --- --- ---
in.)
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 --- --- --- --- --- ---
in.)
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 --- --- --- --- --- ---
in.)
Executive SEF --- --- --- --- --- ---
(7.25x10.5 in.)
Executive LEF --- --- --- --- --- ---
(10.5x7.25 in.)
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 --- --- --- --- --- ---
in.)
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 --- --- --- --- --- ---
in.)
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- --- --- --- --- ---
Lineslider1 LEF --- --- --- --- --- ---
(210x170 mm)
Lineslider2 SEF --- --- --- --- --- ---
(210x340 mm)
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A18 A18 --- --- --- ---
16K SEF (195x267 mm) --- --- --- --- --- ---
16K LEF (267x195 mm) --- --- --- --- --- ---
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---


Z-Fold Half-Fold
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 A18 A18 A19 --- A19 ---
in.)
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) --- --- --- --- --- ---

A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A15 A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A15 A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A22 A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) A22 A
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) A6, 22 A6
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) A22 A
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A15 A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A23 A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A22 A
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) A22 A
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A15 A
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A15 A
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) --- A
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A15 A
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A22 A
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) --- A
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) --- A
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) --- A
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) --- A
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) A22 A
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) A22 A
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) A22 A
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) --- A
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A22 A
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A22 A


Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A6, 22 A6
Specifications
Appendices
BD LEF (210x182 mm) A22 A
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) A22 A
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) --- ---
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A15 A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) --- A
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A22 A
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) --- A
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) --- A
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) --- A
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) --- A
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A15 A
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A15 A
FM1 FM2 FM3

Z-Fold Half-Fold Letter Out
Single Single Multi Single Multi
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A A A(3)1 A7 A(3)1,7
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A A(3)1 A A(3)1
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A A A(3)1 A7 A(3)1,7
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) --- A A(3)1 A A(3)1
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A A A(3)1 A7 A(3)1,7
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A A A(3)1 A7 A(3)1,7
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A A A(3)1 A A(3)1
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) --- --- --- --- ---

FM1 FM2 FM3

Z-Fold Half-Fold Letter Out
Single Single Multi Single Multi
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A A A(3)1 A A(3)1
16K SEF (195x267 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
16K LEF (267x195 mm) --- --- --- --- ---
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) --- --- --- --- ---
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A A(3)1 A A(3)1
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A A(3)1 A A(3)1
FM4 FM5 FM6 Gate

Letter In Dbl Parallel
Single Multi Single Single
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A7 --- A A7,8
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A A(3)1 A A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) --- --- --- ---
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) --- --- --- ---
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) --- --- --- ---
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) --- --- --- ---
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A7 A(3)1 A A7,8
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A A(3)1 A A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) --- --- --- ---
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) --- --- --- ---
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A7 --- A A7,8
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A7 A(3)1 A A7,8

FM4 FM5 FM6 Gate

Letter In Dbl Parallel
Single Multi Single Single
Specifications
Appendices
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) --- --- --- ---
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A A(3)1 A A
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) --- --- --- ---
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) --- --- --- ---
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) --- --- --- ---
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) --- --- --- ---
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) --- --- --- ---
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) --- --- --- ---
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) --- --- --- ---
BD LEF (210x182 mm) --- --- --- ---
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) --- --- --- ---
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) --- --- --- ---
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A --- A A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) --- --- --- ---
16K LEF (267x195 mm) --- --- --- ---
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) --- --- --- ---
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) --- --- --- ---
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) --- --- --- ---
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) --- --- --- ---
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A A(3)1 A A
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A A(3)1 A A
Cover Interposer Tray

The Cover Interposer Tray CI4040 (F-type) is for 3K/2K Finisher.
Straight Through
A3 SEF (297x420 mm) A
A4 SEF (210x297 mm) A
A4 LEF (297x210 mm) A
A5 SEF (148x210 mm) A
A5 LEF (210x148 mm) A6

Straight Through
A6 SEF (105x148 mm) A
B4 SEF (257x364 mm) A
B5 SEF (182x257 mm) A
B5 LEF (257x182 mm) A
B6 SEF (128x182 mm) A
DLT SEF (11x17 in.) A
Legal SEF (8.5x14 in.) A
Foolscap SEF (8.5x13 in.) A
Letter SEF (8.5x11 in.) A
Letter LEF (11x8.5 in.) A
Govt LG SEF (8.25x14 in.) A
Folio SEF (8.25x13 in.) A
F/GL SEF (8x13 in.) A
G LT SEF (8x10.5 in.) A
G LT LEF (10.5x8 in.) A
Eng Quatro SEF (8x10 in.) A
Eng Quatro LEF (10x8 in.) A
Executive SEF (7.25x10.5 in.) A
Executive LEF (10.5x7.25 in.) A
Half Letter SEF (5.5x8.5 in.) A
Half Letter LEF (8.5x5.5 in.) A6
BD LEF (210x182 mm) A
Lineslider1 LEF (210x170 mm) A
Lineslider2 SEF (210x340 mm) A
8K SEF (267x390 mm) A
16K SEF (195x267 mm) A
16K LEF (267x195 mm) A
11x15 SEF (11x15 in.) A
11x14 SEF (11x14 in.) A
10x15 SEF (10x15 in.) A
10x14 SEF (10x14 in.) A
8.5 x 13.4 SEF (8.5x13.4 in.) A
F4A SEF (8.5x13.5 in.) A

Software Accessories
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
Specifications
Appendices
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer
allows you to select which components to install.
Y = Supported; N = Not Supported
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS
Windows Environment
OS Type PCL6 PostScript3
Windows 7 Starter N N
Home Basic N N
Home Premium Y Y
Professional Y Y
Ultimate Y Y
Enterprise Y Y
Windows 8.1 Windows 8.1 Y Y
Pro Y Y
Enterprise Y Y
Windows 10 Windows 10 Home Y Y
Pro Y Y
Pro for Workstations Y Y
Enterprise Y Y
Education Y Y
Windows Server 2008 Standard Edition Y Y
Enterprise Edition Y Y
Datacenter Edition N N
Web Edition N N
Windows Server 2008R2 Standard Edition Y Y
Enterprise Edition Y Y
Datacenter Edition N N
Web Edition N N
Windows Server 2012 Foundation Y Y
Essentials Y Y
Standard Y Y
Datacenter N N
Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation Y Y
Essentials Y Y

OS Type PCL6 PostScript3

Standard Y Y
Windows Server 2016 Standard Y Y
Essentials Y Y
Datacenter Y Y
MultiPoint Premium Server Y Y
Windows Server 2019 Standard Y Y
Essentials Y Y
Datacenter Y Y
Point and Print
Windows OS Drivers
Server Client(Push to) PCL6 PostScript3
Windows Server 2008 7 Y Y
8 Y Y
10 Y Y
Windows Server 2008R2 7 Y Y
8 Y Y
10 Y Y
Windows 7 7 Y Y
8 Y Y
10 Y Y
Windows 8 7 Y Y
8 Y Y
10 Y Y
8 Y Y
10 Y Y
Windows Server 2012 R2 7 Y Y
8 Y Y
10 Y Y
Windows10 7 Y Y
8 Y Y
10 Y Y
8 Y Y
10 Y Y
8 Y Y

Windows OS Drivers
Server Client(Push to) PCL6 PostScript3
10 Y Y
Specifications
Appendices
Mac OS and UNIX Environment
Mac OS
OS PostScript3 Printer Utility for Mac

macOS 10.12 Sierra Y N
macOS 10.13 High Sierra Y N
macOS 10.14 Mojave Y N
macOS 10.15 Catalina Y N
Supported platforms for Unix filter
UNIX Platforms Version

Sun Solaris 10
HP-UX 11.x, 11i v2, 11i v3
Red Hat Linux Enterprise V4, V5, V6
SCO OpenServer 5.0.7, 6.0
IBM AIX V6.1, V7.1, V7.2
1.3.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS

Operating System Driver
TWAIN*9 LAN-FAX
Windows 7*1*3 Y Y
Windows 8.1*5 Y Y
Windows 10*6 Y Y
*2*3
Windows Server 2008 Y Y
Windows Server 2012*4 Y Y
Windows Server 2016*7 Y Y
*8
Windows Server 2019 Y Y
Macintosh N N
*1 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium / Professional / Ultimate / Enterprise
*2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard / Enterprise / Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Standard / Enterprise
*3 Supports both 32bit, 64bit (Scanner driver works on 32bit compatible mode)
*4 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard / Datacenter / Essentials / Windows Server 2012
R2 Foundation / Essentials / Standard
*5 Microsoft Windows 8.1 / Pro / Enterprise

*6 Microsoft Windows 10 Windows 10 Home / Pro / Pro for Workstations / Enterprise /

Education
*7 Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Standard / Essentials / Datacenter / MultiPoint Premium
Server
*8 Microsoft Windows Server 2019 Standard / Essentials / Datacenter
*9 TWAIN scanner runs on a 64-bit operating system, but is not compatible with 64-bit
applications. Use it with 32-bit applications.
• With LAN-FAX driver, sending documents directly from PC will be available.

• Also Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor will installed along.
• Network TWAIN driver will be provided on the scanner driver CD-ROM.

Optional Equipment Specifications
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Appendices
1.4.1 8 1/2"×14" PAPER SIZE TRAY TYPE 9002 (B474)
Items Specification
Paper type and weight 52.0-128.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond-34.0 lb. Bond)
Plain Paper-Thick Paper 1
Paper size • (mainly Europe and Asia)
A4 LEF
• (mainly North America)
81/2 × 11 LEF
*1
• (mainly Europe and Asia)
A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11
A4, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF
Paper capacity 2,500 sheets
*1 Paper any of the sizes specified above can be loaded by service representative.
1.4.2 A3/11" X 17" TRAY TYPE M44 (D3JG)

Items Specification
Paper type and 52.0-128.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. 52.0-169.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond-90.0 lb. Index)
weight Bond-34.0 lb. Bond) Plain Paper-Thick Paper 2
Plain Paper-Thick Paper 1
Paper size • (mainly Europe and *1
Asia) A3 SEF, A4, B4 JIS SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14
A3 SEF SEF, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF
• (mainly North America) 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
11 × 17 SEF
Paper capacity 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. 1,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Bond)
1.4.3 LCIT RT4080 (D3J6)

Item Specifications
Page size • (mainly Europe and Asia)
A4

Item Specifications
81/2 × 11
*1
• (mainly Europe and Asia)
B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11
A4, B5 JIS
Paper capacity 4,400 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Paper type and weight 52.0–128.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–34.0 lb. Bond)
Plain Paper–Thick Paper 1
Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.
Maximum power consumption 50 W or less
Dimensions (W × D × H) 352 × 540 × 625 mm (13.9 × 21.3 × 24.7 inches)
Weight Approx. 22 kg (48.6 lb.)
1.4.4 FINISHER SR4140 (D3HD)

Item Specification
Paper Upper Tray • Without Z-Folding
size A3 SEF, A4, A5, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS SEF,
11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4× 14
SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2, 8K SEF,
16K, 12×18 SEF, 11×15 SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF,
10×14 SEF, 13×191/5 SEF, 13×19 SEF, 123/5×191/5 SEF,
123/5×181/2 SEF, 13×18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4, 81/2×132/5
SEF, Custom size
• With Z-Folding
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF,
81/2×11 SEF
Following is applicable when FD4010 is installed:
Half fold: A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF,
81/2×11 SEF, 8K SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF, 81/2 ×131/5 ,
12×18 , 123/5×181/2, 13×18, 13×19, 123/5×191/5, 13×191/5
Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out: A3 SEF, 11×17 SEF
Shift Tray • Without Z-Folding
A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14
SEF,81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13
SEF, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2, 8K SEF, 16K, 12×18 SEF, 11×15

Item Specification
SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF, 13×191/5 SEF,
13×19 SEF, 123/5×191/5 SEF, 123/5×181/2 SEF, 13×18 SEF,
Specifications
Appendices
SRA3 SEF, SRA4, 81/2×132/5 SEF, Custom size
• With Z-Folding
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF,
81/2×11 SEF
Output jogger unit
• Without Z-Folding
A3, A4, A5, 11×17 SEF to 51/2×81/2 SEF, 12×18, 13×19
• With Z-folding
A3 , B4 , A4 SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 , 81/2×11 SEF, 12×18 ,
8K
*Following is applicable when FD4010 is installed
• Half fold: A3, A4, B4, 8K, 81/2×132/5, 12×18, 123/5×191/5,
123/5×181/2, 13×191/5, 13×19, 13×18, SRA3, SRA4
Staple • Without Z-Folding
A3 SEF, A4, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF,
81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF,
71/4×101/2, 8K SEF, 16K, 11×15 SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15
SEF, 10×14 SEF, 81/2× 132/5 SEF
• With Z-Folding
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11×17 SEF
• With Z-Folding, Mixed Size
A3 SEF and A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF and B5 JIS LEF, 11×17
SEF and 81/2×11 LEF
Paper sizes that 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 8K SEF, 16K, 12 × 18 SEF, 11 × 15 SEF,
can be shifted 11 × 14 SEF, 10 × 15 SEF, 10 × 14 SEF, 13 × 191/5 SEF, 13 × 19
when delivered to SEF, 123/5 × 191/5 SEF, 123/5 × 181/2 SEF, 13 × 18 SEF, SRA3
the finisher shift SEF, SRA4, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF, custom size
tray
Paper Upper Tray • Without Z-fold:
weight 52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
• With Z-fold:
64.0–105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)
• Half fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out
64.0 - 105.0g/m 2
Shift Tray • Without Z-fold:

Item Specification
52.3–300.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
• With Z-fold:
64.0–105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)
Staple 64.0–80.0 g/m 2 (17.1–21.3 lb. Bond)
When not using Z-fold, you can use two sheets of paper
weighing up to 200.0 g/m2 (110.7 lb. Cover) per set as cover
sheets.
Paper weight that 52.3-300.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond-165.0 lb. Index)
can be shifted
when delivered to
the finisher shift
tray
Capacity Upper Tray • Without Z-Folding
A4, 81/2×11 or smaller: 500 sheets
B4 JIS, 81/2× 14 or larger: 250 sheets
• With Z-Folding
30 sheets
• Half fold:
B4, 81/2×14 or larger: 40 sheets
• Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out:
A3, 11×17: 40 sheets (As a reference value)
Shift Tray • Without Z-Folding
A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 81/2×11 LEF: 3,000 sheets
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11×17 SEF,
81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×11 SEF: 1,500 sheets
12×18 SEF, 13×19 SEF: 1,000 sheets
A5 LEF, 51/2×81/2LEF: 500 sheets
A5 SEF, 51/2×81/2 SEF: 100 sheets
When using paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8–1,260.0
mm (19.21–49.60 inches), remove output sheets one by one
from the tray.
• With Z-Folding
30 sheets
• Half fold

Item Specification
B4, 81/2×14 or larger: 30 sheets
Staple • Without Z-Folding and Mixed Sizes:
Specifications
Appendices
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×13 SEF,
81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF, 8K SEF, 11×15 SEF,
11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF: 50
sheets
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2×11, 71/4×101/2, 16K: 100 sheets
• Mixed Size
50 sheets (A3 SEF /A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF, 11×17
SEF/81/2×11 LEF)
• With Z-Folding
10 sheets
• Combination of Z-folded sheets and unfolded sheets:
10 Z-folded sheets, 9 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 10 unfolded
sheets, 8 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 20 unfolded sheets, 7
Z-folded sheets and 0 to 30 unfolded sheets, 6 Z-folded
sheets and 0 to 40 unfolded sheets, 5 Z-folded sheets and 0
to 50 unfolded sheets, 4 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 60
unfolded sheets, 3 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 70 unfolded
sheets, 2 Z-folded sheets and 0 to 80 unfolded sheets, 1
Z-folded sheet and 1 to 90 unfolded sheets
Stack capacity Without Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
after stapling (80 2-9 sheets: 150 sets (A4, B5, 81/2×11, A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11×17
g/m2, 20 lb. SEF, 81/2×14 SEF)
Bond) 10-50 sheets: 150-30 sets (A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14
SEF)
10-100 sheets: 200-30 sets (A4, B5, 81/2×11)
With Z-fold and Mixed Sizes:
1-10 sheets: 30-3 sets (A3 Z-folded paper with A4, B4 JIS
Z-folded paper with B5 JIS, 11 × 17 Z-folded paper with 81/2 × 11)
With Mixed Sizes:
2-50 sheets: 30 sets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS LEF,
11 × 17 SEF/81/2 × 11 LEF)
Staple position 5 positions (Top 1, Bottom 1, Slant, Left 2, Top 2)
Power consumption 100 W or less
Weight approx. 75 kg (165.4 lb.)
Dimensions (W×D×H): 806×730×980 mm (31.8×28.8×38.6 inches)

1.4.5 PUNCH UNIT PU5050 (D3HE)
• For Finisher SR4140
Paper size:
Punch unit type Paper size

2 & 4 holes 2 SEF:
type holes A3, A4, A5, A6, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, B6 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 ×
(D3HE-02) 11, 81/4 × 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 8K, 16K, 12 × 18, 11
× 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14, 81/2 × 132/5, custom size
LEF: A4, A5, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 16K, custom size
4 SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 8K, 12 × 18, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, custom size
holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11,71/4 × 101/2, 16K, custom size
4 holes type 4 SEF: A3, A4, A5, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, B6 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2
(D3HE-03) holes × 11, 81/4 × 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 8K, 16K, 12 × 18,
11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14, 81/2× 132/5, custom size
2 & 3 holes 2 SEF: A3, A4, A5, A6, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, B6 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13,
type holes 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 8K, 16K, 12 ×
(D3HE-01) 18, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14, 81/2 × 132/5, custom size
3 SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 8K, 12 × 18, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14,
holes custom size
LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 16K, custom size
Paper weight:
• 52.3–300.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
1.4.6 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25 (D3CJ)

Item Specification
Paper Size A3 SEF, A4, A5 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF,
81/2 × 11, 51/2 × 81/2 LEF, 12 × 18 SEF, 13 × 191/5 SEF
Maximum power 15 W or less
consumption
Weight Approx. 2 kg (4.4 lb.)
Dimensions (W x D x 169 x 539 x 203 mm (6.7 x 21.3 x 8.0 inches)
H)

1.4.7 FINISHER SR4150 (D3HB)

Item Specification
Specifications
Upper Paper size A3 SEF, A4, A5, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS SEF, 11×17
Appendices
Tray SEF, 81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF,
8×13 SEF, 8×101/2, 8×10, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2, 182×210 mm LEF,
170×210 mm LEF, 210×340 mm SEF, 8K SEF, 16K, 11×15 SEF,
11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2
SEF, Custom size
Stack capacity • 250 sheets (A4, 81/2×11 or smaller)
(80 g/m 2, 20 lb. • 50 sheets (B4 JIS, 81/2×14 or larger)
Bond) When using paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8–600.0
mm (19.21–23.63 inches), remove output sheets one by one
from the tray.
Paper weight 52.3–216.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Shift Paper size A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS SEF, 11×17 SEF,
Tray 81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF,
8×13 SEF, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2, 8K SEF, 16K, 12×18 SEF, 11×15
SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF, 13×191/5 SEF, 13×19
SEF, 123/5×191/5 SEF, 123/5×181/2 SEF, 13×18 SEF, SRA3 SEF,
SRA4, 81/2×132/5 SEF, Custom size
Paper weight 52.3–300.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper sizes that A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 SEF, B5, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×13
can be shifted SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF, 8×10 1/2, 8×10,
when delivered to 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2, 182×210 mm LEF, 170×210 mm LEF,
the finisher shift 210×340 mm SEF, 8K SEF, 16K, 12×18 SEF, 11×15 SEF, 11×14
tray SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF, 8 1/2 × 13 2/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF,
Custom size
Paper weight that 52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
can be shifted
when delivered to
the Finisher Shift
Tray
Stack capacity to • 3,000 sheets: A4 LEF, 81/2×11 LEF
the Finisher Shift • 1,500 sheets: A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11×17
Tray SEF, 81/2×14, 81/2×11 SEF, 12×18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, 13×191/5
SEF
• 500 sheets: A5 LEF
• 100 sheets: A5 SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 51/2× 81/2 SEF

Item Specification
mm (19.21–49.60 inches), remove output sheets one by one from
the tray.
Staple Staple paper size A3 SEF, A4, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×13
Tray SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF, 71/4×101/2, 8K
SEF, 16K, 11×15 SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF,
81/2×132/5 SEF, 8 1/2 × 13 1/2 SEF, custom size
Staple paper 52.3–105.0 g/m2 (14.0–28.0 lb. Bold)
weight You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (140 lb.
Index) per set as cover sheets.
Staple capacity 65 sheets
2,
(80 g/m 20 lb.
Bond)
Stack capacity Without Mixed Sizes:
after stapling • 2–19 sheets: 150 sets (A4 LEF, 81/2× 11 LEF)
(80 g/m 2, 20 lb. • 20–65 sheets: 150–46 sets (A4 LEF, 81/2×11 LEF)
Bond) • 2–14 sheets: 100 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS, 81/2×11 SEF)
• 15–65 sheets: 100–23 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS, 81/2×11 SEF)
• 2–14 sheets: 100 sets (other size paper)
• 15–65 sheets: 100–23 sets (other size paper)
With Mixed Sizes:
• 2–65 sheets: 23 sets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS
LEF, 11×17 SEF/81/2×11 LEF)
Staple position Top 1, Bottom 1, Slant, Bottom Slant, Left 2, Top 2
consumption
Dimensions (W × D × H) 657×730×980mm (25.9 × 28.7 × 38.6 inches)
Weight Without punch unit: Approx. 38 kg (83.8 lb.)
With punch unit: Approx. 41 kg (90.4 lb.)
1.4.8 BOOKLET FINISHER SR4160 (D3HC)

Item Specification
Upper Paper size A3 SEF, A4, A5, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, B6 JIS SEF, 11×17
Tray SEF, 81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13
SEF, 8×13 SEF, 8×101/2, 8×10, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2, 182×210 mm
LEF, 170×210 mm LEF, 210×340 mm SEF, 8K SEF, 16K, 11×15
SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF, 81/2 ×

Item Specification
131/2 SEF, Custom size
Stack capacity • 250 sheets (A4, 81/2×11 or smaller)
Specifications
Appendices
(80 g/m 2, 20 lb. • 50 sheets (B4 JIS, 81/2×14 or larger)
Bond) When using paper that has a horizontal length of
487.8–600.0 mm (19.21–23.63 inches), remove output
sheets one by one from the tray.
Paper weight 52.3–216.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Shift Paper size A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 SEF, B5, B6 SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF,
Tray 81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF,
8×101/2, 8×10, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2, 182×210 mm LEF, 170×210
mm LEF, 210×340 mm SEF, 8K SEF, 16K, 11×15 SEF, 11×14
SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF,
Custom size
Paper weight for 52.3–300.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
the Finisher Shift
Tray
Paper sizes that A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 SEF, B5, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF, 81/2×13
can be shifted SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF, 8×101/2,
when delivered to 8×10, 71/4×101/2, 51/2×81/2, 182×210 mm LEF, 170×210 mm LEF,
the finisher shift 210×340 mm SEF, 8K SEF, 16K, 11×15 SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15
tray SEF, 10×14 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF, Custom size
Paper weight that 52.3–300.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
can be shifted
when delivered to
the Finisher Shift
Tray
Stack capacity to • 2,000 sheets: A4 LEF, 81/2 × 11 LEF
the Finisher Shift • 1,000 sheets: A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11×17
Tray SEF, 81/2×14, 81/2×11 SEF, 12×18 SEF, SRA3 SEF, 13×191/5
SEF
• 500 sheets: A5 LEF
• 100 sheets: A5 SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 51/2× 81/2 SEF
mm (19.21–49.60 inches), remove output sheets one by one from
the tray.
Staple Staple paper size A3 SEF, A4, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14 SEF,
Tray 81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF,
71/4×101/2, 8K SEF, 16K, 11×15 SEF, 11×14 SEF, 10×15 SEF,

Item Specification
10×14 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF, Custom size
Staple paper 52.3–105.0 g/m 2 (14.0–28.0 lb. Bold)
weight You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (140 lb.
Index) per set as cover sheets.
Staple capacity 65 sheets
2,
(80 g/m 20 lb.
Bond)
Stack capacity Without Mixed Sizes:
after stapling • 2–12 sheets: 150 sets (A4 LEF, 81/2× 11 LEF)
(80 g/m 2, 20 lb. • 13–65 sheets: 150–30 sets (A4 LEF, 81/2×11 LEF)
Bond) • 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS, 81/2×11 SEF)
• 10–65 sheets: 100–15 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS, 81/2×11 SEF)
• 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (other size paper)
• 10–65 sheets: 100–15 sets (other size paper)
With Mixed Sizes:
• 2–65 sheets: 23 sets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS
LEF, 11× 7 SEF/81/2×11 LEF)
Staple position Top 1, Bottom 1, Slant, Bottom Slant, Left 2, Top 2
Saddle Saddle stitch • Paper between 52.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond) and 81.0 g/m 2 (21.6
stitch capacity lb. Bond): 1 set (20 sheets)
• Paper between 82.0 g/m2 (22.0 lb. Bond) and 103.0 g/m2
(27.5 lb. Bond): 1 set (10 sheets)
Saddle stitch A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14
paper size SEF, 81/2×11 SEF, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 11×15 SEF, 11×14
SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF
Saddle stitch • Plain Paper: 64.0–105.0 g/m 2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)
paper weight • Coated Paper: 81.4–105.0 g/m2 (21.7–28.0 lb. Bond)
You can use a sheet of paper weighing up to 216.0 g/m2 (79.9 lb.
Cover) per set as a cover sheet.
Stack capacity • 2–5 sheets: 30 sets
after saddle • 6–10 sheets: 15 sets
stitching • 11–15 sheets: 10 sets
• 16–20 sheets: 6 sets
Saddle stitch Center 2 positions
position
Folding Types of folds Half fold
Half fold paper A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14
size SEF, 81/2×11 SEF, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 11×15 SEF, 11×14

Item Specification
SEF, 10×15 SEF, 10×14 SEF
Half fold Paper • 1 sheet: 64.0-216.0g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Specifications
Appendices
weight • 2–5 sheets: 64.0-105.0g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)
Maximum power 67 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
consumption
Dimensions (W × D × H) 657×730×980mm (25.9 ×28.8 × 38.6 inches)
Weight Without punch unit: Approx.58 kg (127.9 lb.)
With punch unit: Approx.61 kg (134.5 lb.)
1.4.9 PUNCH UNIT PU3090 (D3FP)
• For Finisher SR4150/Booklet Finisher SR4160
Paper size:
Punch unit type Paper size

2 & 4 holes 2 SEF: A3, A4, A5, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 × 11, 81/4
type holes × 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 8K, 16K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14,
(D3FP-01, 10 × 15, 10 ×14, 81/2 × 132/5, custom size
-03) LEF: A4, A5, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 16K, custom size
4 SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 8K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, custom size
holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 16K, custom size
4 holes type 4 SEF: A3, A4, A5, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 × 11, 81/4
(D3FP-02) holes × 14, 81/4× 13, 8 × 13, 8 × 10, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 8K, 16K, 11 × 15, 11
× 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14, SRA4, 81/2 × 132/5, custom size
2 & 3 holes 2 SEF: A3, A5, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 × 11, 81/4 ×
type holes 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 8K, 16K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10
(D3FP-00) × 15, 10 × 14, SRA4, 81/2 × 132/5, custom size
LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 16K, custom size
3 SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 8K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14, custom
holes size
LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 16K, custom size
Paper weight:
• 52.3–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–141.0 lb. Index)

1.4.10 MAIL BOX CS4010 (D708)

Item Specification
Number of trays 9 trays
Paper Size A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 11 x 17 SEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 13
SEF, 81/2 x 11, 81/4 x 14 SEF, 81/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8×101/2, 8×10, 71/4 x
101/2, 51/2 x 81/2, 182×210 mm LEF, 170×210 mm LEF, 210×340 mm SEF, 8K
SEF, 16K, 11 x 15 SEF, 11 x 14 SEF, 10 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 81/2 x 132/5
SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF, Custom size
Paper weight 60.0 to 128.0 g/m2 (16.1 lb. Bond–47.3 lb. Cover)
Paper capacity 100 sheets per tray
(80 g/m , 20 lb.
Bond)
Power Power is supplied from the main unit.
requirements
consumption
Weight approx. 15kg (33.1 lb.)
Dimensions (W x 540 x 600 x 660 mm (21.3 × 23.7 × 26.0 inches)
D x H)
1.4.11 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI4040 (DC3N)

Item Specification
Dimension (W x D x H) 500 x 600 x 600 mm (19.7 x 23.7x 23.7 in.)
Weight Approx. 12 Kg (26.5 lb.)
Power Consumption 43W or less
Paper Capacity 200 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Paper Size Paper sizes that can be detected automatically:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
A3 SEF, A4, A5, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 13 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K
(mainly North America)
A3 SEF, A4, B5 JIS LEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 ×
101/2 SEF, 51/2 × 81/2, 10 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF
*1
(mainly Europe and Asia)
11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 13 SEF, 8 × 13 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF
(mainly North America)
81/2 × 13 SEF, 8 × 10 SEF, 71/4 × 101/2 LEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF

Item Specification
Paper type and weight 64.0–216.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Plain Paper–Thick Paper 2
Specifications
Appendices
Original Set Position Center
Original Normal Face-up
Set Feed
Booklet Face-down
Feed
*1 These sizes can be made detectable by service representative.
1.4.12 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4020 (D3HH)
General
Item Specification
Operating Environment: Temperature and humidity ranges: Same as main machine.
Service Life: Expected: 5 years or 60,000 K (A4 LEF)
Paper Weight: 40 to 300 g/m 2
Speed: Straight-Through 100 to 758 mm/s
Folding 169 to 758 mm/s
Straight-Through Feed: Size Postcard to 13x19.2"
Type Used paper: A3, A4, B4, B5
OHP: A4, B5
Tap paper: A4 LEF, LT LEF
Folding Methods: 6 methods (FM1 to FM6)
• FM1: Z-Folding
• FM2: Half Fold
• FM3: Letter Fold-out
• FM4: Letter Fold-in
• FM5: Double Parallel Fold
• FM6: Gate Fold

Paper Sizes (Straight --- Postcard to 13 x 19.2 in.

Through):
Paper Sizes & FM1 A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2
Weight (Folding): × 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF
(64.0-105.0 g/m2 (17.1-28.0 lb. Bond))
FM2 A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 ×
FM3 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2
FM4 SEF
FM5 (64.0-105.0 g/m2 (17.1-28.0 lb. Bond))
FM6
Multiple Folding: FM1 Not allowed

14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2
SEF
(64.0-80.0 g/m 2 (17.1-21.3 lb. Bond))
FM3 A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF,
81/2 × 132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF
(64.0-80.0 g/m2 (17.1-21.3 lb. Bond))
14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 8K SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2
SEF
(64.0-80.0 g/m 2 (17.1-21.3 lb. Bond))
FM5 Not allowed
FM6
Line Speed (Only FM1 Z-Folded paper can exit downstream):
No Fold 350 mm/sec. to top tray
To downstream: Same as main machine.
FM1 758 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 355.6 mm long)
450 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 355.6 mm long)

To downstream: Same as main machine.

FM2 1 Sheet: Same as main machine
2-3 Sheets: 454 mm/sec.
Specifications
Appendices
758 mm/sec. to top tray (paper <355.6 mm long)
350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 279.4 <355.6 mm long)
250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 279.4 mm long)
FM4 2-3 Sheets: 454 mm/sec. to top tray
350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long)
FM6 1 Sheet: Same as main machine as far as 3rd Stopper. At 3rd stopper
feeds 50 mm at 100 mm/sec.
Power Supply: NA AC 120V 50/60 Hz, 2.0A
EU AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 1.2A
Power Consumption: 240 W or less
Size (W x D x H): 470 × 730 × 980 mm (18.6 × 28.8 × 38.6 inches)
Level: Less than 5 mm deviation at front/back, left/right
Weight: Approx. 92 kg (202.9 lb.)
Noise Level (dB A): Mode Alone System
No < 72 dB ---
Folding
Folding < 72 dB < 76 dB
• The Multi-sheet Fold function can fold a maximum of three sheets at a time.
• Wrinkling can occur when applying letter fold-in, letter fold-out, or gate fold to B4 JIS
SEF, A3 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 8K SEF, 12×18 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF, or
larger sheets. In some cases, you may have to use A4 sheets or smaller when
applying folds in combination with the reduction function.
Tray Capacity
The capacity of the tray on top of the unit for folded paper is determined by these variables:
• Folding Methods (FM1 to FM6)
• Paper size
• Paper weight

Folding Mode FM1
Size Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy)

64 to 80 g/m2 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 35 20
12x18" 35 20
A3 SEF 35 20
DLT 35 20
B4 SEF 35 20
LG SEF 35 20
A4 SEF 30 20
LT SEF 30 20
Folding Mode FM2

64 to 80 g/m2 64 to 80 g/m2
13x19.2" 40 25
13x19" 40 25
12.6x19.2" 40 25
12.6x18.5" 40 25
13x18" 40 25
SRA3 (320x450 mm) 40 25
SRA4 (225x320 mm) 40 25
226x310 mm 40 25
310x432 mm 40 25
8-kai 40 25
12x18" 40 25
A3 SEF 40 25
DLT 40 25
B4 SEF 40 25
LG SEF 40 25
A4 SEF 50 50


2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
LT SEF 50 50
Specifications
Appendices
B5 SEF 50 50
Folding Mode FM3

2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 30 20
12x18" 30 20
A3 SEF 30 20
DLT 30 20
B4 SEF 30 20
LG SEF 30 20
A4 SEF 40 30
LT SEF 40 30
B5 SEF 40 30
Folding Mode FM4

64 to 80 g/m2 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 40 20
12x18" 40 20
A3 SEF 40 20
DLT 40 20
B4 SEF 40 20
LG SEF 40 20
A4 SEF 50 40
LT SEF 50 40
B5 SEF 50 40
Folding Mode FM5


2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 30 20
12x18" 30 20
A3 SEF 30 20
DLT 30 20
B4 SEF 30 20
LG SEF 30 20
A4 SEF 30 30
LT SEF 30 30
B5 SEF 30 30
Folding Mode FM6

64 to 80 g/m2 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 50 20
12x18" 50 20
A3 SEF 50 20
DLT 50 20
B4 SEF 50 20
LG SEF 50 20
A4 SEF 30 30
LT SEF 30 30
B5 SEF 30 30
1.4.13 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD4010 (D3HJ)

Item Specification
Folding Methods: Z-Folding, Half Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out
Paper Fold • With Z-fold:
Size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11
SEF, 8K SEF

Item Specification
• With Half Fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF,
Specifications
Appendices
8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF, 8K SEF
• With Letter Fold-in:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF
• With Letter Fold-out:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8.5 x 14 SEF, 8.5 x 11
SEF
Multiple • With Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out:
sheets A4 SEF, 8.5 x 11 SEF
Paper Fold • With Z-fold, Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in:
weight: 64.0 to 105.0 g/m2 (17.1–28.0 lb. Bond)
Multiple • With Multi-sheet Fold:
sheets 64.0 to 80.0 g/m2 (17.1–21.3 lb. Bond)
Power requirements: • (mainly Europe and Asia)
220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
100–120 V, 50/60 Hz
(A separate power source is required.)
Maximum power 60W or less
consumption:
Weight: 45 kg (99.2 lb.) or less
Dimensions (W x D x H): 209 x 730 x 980 mm (8.2 x 28.8 x 38.6 inches) (Except protruding
parts)
Tray Paper Capacity (80 With Z-fold: Not available
g/m2): With Letter Fold-in, Fold-out: 30 or more
Tray Full Detection: Available

1.4.14 SHIFT SORT TRAY SH4020 (D3HG)
Item Specification
Exit Tray Method One shift tray
Transport Method Roller transport
Paper Size A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, B6
SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 13 SEF,
81/2 × 11 LEF/SEF, 81/4 × 14 SEF, 81/4 × 13 SEF, 8 × 13 SEF, 8×101/2,
8×10,
71/4 × 101/2 LEF/SEF, 51/2 × 81/2 LEF/SEF, 182×210 mm LEF, 170×210
mm LEF, 210×340 mm SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11 × 15 SEF,
11 × 14 SEF, 10 × 15 SEF, 10 × 14 SEF, SRA4 SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF, 81/2
× 131/2 SEF, custom size
Paper capacity (80 1,250 sheets: A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, 81/2 × 11 LEF/SEF
g/m2, 20.0 lb. Bond): 500 sheets: A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A5 LEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 12 ×
18 SEF
100 sheets: A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, 51/2 × 81/2 LEF/SEF
Paper weight 52.3-216.0g/m 2(14.0 lb. Bond-79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper sizes that can A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, 11 × 17 SEF,
be shifted when 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2"×11" LEF/SEF, 81/4 × 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 8×101/2,
delivered to the Shift 8×10, 81/2 × 13 SEF, 71/4 × 101/2 LEF/SEF, 51/2 × 81/2 LEF/SEF, 182×210
Tray: mm LEF, 170×210 mm LEF, 210×340 mm SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF,
12 × 18 SEF, 11 × 15 SEF, 11 × 14 SEF, 10 × 15 SEF, 10 × 14 SEF, 81/2 ×
132/5 SEF, 81/2 × 131/2 SEF, Custom size
Paper weight that can 52.3-216.0g/m 2(14.0 lb. Bond-79.9 lb. Cover)
be shifted when
delivered to the Shift
Tray:
Power requirements: Power is supplied from the main unit.
consumption:
Dimensions (W × D × 400 × 600 × 480 mm (15.7 × 23.6 × 18.9 inches)
H):
Weight: 11 kg (24.0 lb.)

APPENDICES:
ENGINE SP MODE TABLES
None
Engine SP Tables-1
2. ENGINE SP MODE TABLES
Mode Tables
Appendices
2.1 ENGINE SP TABLES-1
Engine SP
2.1.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)
SP No. Large Category Small Category EN [Min to
G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
1-001- Leading Edge Std Tray: Feed LCT: Duplex EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
001 Registration G 0.1mm]
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
1-001- Leading Edge Thick Paper: Std Tray: Feed EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
003 Registration LCT: Duplex G 0.1mm]
1-001- Leading Edge Thick Paper: By-pass EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
1-001- Leading Edge Mid-Speed: Std Tray: Feed LCT: EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
005 Registration Duplex G 0.1mm]
1-001- Leading Edge Mid-Speed: By-pass EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
1-002- Side-to-Side Tray-1 EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
1-002- Side-to-Side By-pass Tray EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
1-002- Side-to-Side LCT EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
1-002- Side-to-Side Duplex Tray EN [-9 to 9 / 0 /
1-003- Registration Buckle Tray LCT EN [-9 to 9 / 0 / 1mm]
001 Adjustment G

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
1-003- Registration Buckle Duplex Tray EN [-9 to 9 / 0 / 1mm]
002 Adjustment G
1-003- Registration Buckle By-pass Tray EN [-9 to 9 / 0 / 1mm]
003 Adjustment G
1-003- Registration Buckle ThickPaper Tray EN [-9 to 9 / 0 / 1mm]
004 Adjustment G
1-003- Registration Buckle ThickPaper Duplex Tray EN [-9 to 9 / 0 / 1mm]
005 Adjustment G
1-003- Registration Buckle Mid-Speed:StdTray EN [-9 to 9 / 0 / 1mm]
006 Adjustment G
1-003- Registration Buckle Mid-Speed:Duplex EN [-9 to 9 / 0 / 1mm]
007 Adjustment G
1-007- By-pass FeedPaper Size Display EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
001 G
1-008- Duplex Fence EN [-5 to 5 / 0 /
001 Adjustment G 0.1mm]
1-009- Retry Times Tray1 EN [0 to 5 / 2 / 1]
001 G
002 G
003 G
004 G
1-009- Retry Times By-pass EN [0 to 5 / 2 / 1]
005 G
1-009- Retry Times LCT EN [0 to 5 / 2 / 1]
006 G
1-010- Retry Execute Times Tray1 EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
001 G / 1]
002 G / 1]
003 G / 1]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
004 G / 1]
1-010- Retry Execute Times By-pass EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
005 G / 1]
1-010- Retry Execute Times LCT EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
006 G / 1]
1-011-0 Retry Succeed Times Tray1 EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
01 G / 1]
02 G / 1]
03 G / 1]
04 G / 1]
1-011-0 Retry Succeed Times By-pass EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
05 G / 1]
1-011-0 Retry Succeed Times LCT EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
06 G / 1]
1-012- Reset No. of Retry Tray1 EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Success G
002 Success G
003 Success G
004 Success G
1-012- Reset No. of Retry By-pass EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 Success G
1-012- Reset No. of Retry LCT EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 Success G
1-013- Adjust Pre-feed Stop Tray1 EN [0 to 100 / 0 /
001 Time G 1msec]
002 Time G 1msec]
003 Time G 1msec]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
004 Time G 1msec]
1-014- Size Set Miss Detection Paper Length Err Detection EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 Mode G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-015- Size Set Miss Detection Paper Length Detection EN [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
001 Count G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Normal Paper:Front Side EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
001 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Normal Paper:Back Side EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
002 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Med Thick:Front Side EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
003 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Med Thick:Back Side EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
004 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Thick Paper1:Front Side EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
005 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Thick Paper1:Back Side EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
006 Speed G
007 Speed G
008 Speed G
009 Speed G
010 Speed G
011 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Cardstock EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
012 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller OHP EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
013 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Tracing Paper EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
014 Speed G

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Envelope EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
015 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Label EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
016 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Postcard EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
017 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Normal Paper:Front Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
101 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Normal Paper:Back Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
102 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Med Thick:Front Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
103 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Med Thick:Back Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
104 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Thick Paper1:Front Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
105 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Thick Paper1:Back Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
106 Speed Speed G
107 Speed Speed G
108 Speed Speed G
109 Speed Speed G
1-016-1 Fine Adjust Reg Roller Thick Paper3:Back Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
10 Speed Speed G
1-016-1 Fine Adjust Reg Roller Thick Paper4:Front Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
11 Speed Speed G
1-016-1 Fine Adjust Reg Roller Cardstock: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
12 Speed G
1-016-1 Fine Adjust Reg Roller OHP: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
13 Speed G
1-016-1 Fine Adjust Reg Roller Tracing Paper: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
14 Speed G
1-016-1 Fine Adjust Reg Roller Envelope: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
15 Speed G
1-016-1 Fine Adjust Reg Roller Label: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
16 Speed G
1-016-1 Fine Adjust Reg Roller Postcard: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
17 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Normal Paper:Front Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
201 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Normal Paper:Back Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
202 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Med Thick:Front Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
203 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Med Thick:Back Side: Low EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
204 Speed Speed G
205 Speed Speed G
206 Speed Speed G
207 Speed Speed G
208 Speed Speed G
209 Speed Speed G
210 Speed Speed G
211 Speed Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Cardstock: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
212 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller OHP: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
213 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Tracing Paper: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
214 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Envelope: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
215 Speed G

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Label: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
216 Speed G
1-016- Fine Adjust Reg Roller Postcard: Low Speed EN [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1%]
217 Speed G
1-102- Fusing Temperature Duplex Actual Temperature EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Adjustment G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-102- Fusing Temperature Duplex Balance Temp (Center EN [-30 to 0 / -15 /
002 Adjustment Thermistor) G* 1deg]
1-102- Fusing Temperature Duplex Balance Temp (End EN [-30 to 0 / -15 /
1-103- Fusing Idling IdlingTime(Nomal) EN [0 to 300 / * / 1sec]
001 G* *IM 7000/IM 8000
(NA/EU/AP/CHN/K
OR): 6
*IM 7000/IM 8000
(TWN): 8
*IM 9000: 21
1-103- Fusing Idling IdlingTime(Low) EN [0 to 300 / 60 /
002 G* 1sec]
*IM 7000/IM 8000
(NA/EU/AP/CHN/K
OR): 66
*IM 7000/IM 8000
(TWN): 68
*IM 9000: 66
1-103- Fusing Idling IdlingTime(LowPower) EN [0 to 300 / 0 / 1sec]
003 G*
1-103- Fusing Idling IdlingTime(LowVoltage) EN [0 to 300 / * / 1sec]
004 G* *IM 7000: 8
*IM 8000: 8
*IM 9000: 21
1-103- Fusing Idling IdlingTime(CapacitorLowVoltag EN [0 to 300 / 90 /
005 e) G* 1sec]
1-103- Fusing Idling IdlingTime: 20s EN [0 to 300 / 0 / 1sec]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
006 G*
1-103- Fusing Idling IdlingTime: Warm EN [0 to 300 / 0 / 1sec]
007 G*
1-103- Fusing Idling IdlingTime(Prcn2) EN [0 to 300 / 60 /
008 G* 1sec]
1-105- Fusing Temperature Normal Time (Center EN [130 to 220 / 205 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Normal Time (End Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / 180 /
002 Adjustment G* 1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temperature OHP (Center Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / 210 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature OHP (End Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / 195 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Thick Paper 1,2 (Center EN [100 to 220 / 220 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Thick Paper 1,2 (End EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Normal Paper (Center EN [100 to 220 / * /
*IM 7000: 215
*IM 8000: 215
*IM 9000: 220
1-105- Fusing Temperature Normal Paper (End Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / * /
*IM 7000: 200
*IM 8000: 200
*IM 9000: 210
1-105- Fusing Temperature Small SizeNormal Paper EN [100 to 220 / 210 /
009 Adjustment (Center Thermistor) G* 1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temperature Small SizeThick Paper1,2 EN [100 to 220 / 210 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Label (Center Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / 220 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Label (End Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / 205 /

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
1-105- Fusing Temperature Tab Sheet (Center Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / 220 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Tab Sheet (End Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Thick Paper 3 (Center EN [100 to 220 / 220 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Thick Paper 3 (End Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Small Size Thick Paper 3 EN [100 to 220 / 210 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Temp: Ready2: Thermistor: EN [130 to 220 / 190 /
018 Adjustment Center G* 1deg]
1-105- Fusing Temperature Time: Ready2: Thermistor: EN [20 to 300 / 20 /
019 Adjustment Center G* 1sec]
1-105- Fusing Temperature Temp: Ready2: Thermistor: End EN [130 to 220 / 165 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Time: Ready2: Thermistor: End EN [20 to 300 / 20 /
021 Adjustment G* 1sec]
1-105- Fusing Temperature Small SizeNormal Paper (End EN [100 to 220 / 150 /
1-105- Fusing Temperature Normal Paper 1 (Center EN [100 to 220 / * /
*IM 7000: 185
*IM 8000: 215
*IM 9000: 215
1-105- Fusing Temperature Normal Paper 1 (End EN [100 to 220 / * /
*IM 7000: 185
*IM 8000: 200
*IM 9000: 200
1-105- Fusing Temperature Warm Paper 1 (Center EN [100 to 220 / * /
*IM 7000: 185
*IM 8000: 210
*IM 9000: 210

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
1-105- Fusing Temperature Warm Paper 1 (End Thermistor) EN [100 to 220 / * /
*IM 7000: 185
*IM 8000: 200
*IM 9000: 200
1-106- Fusing Temperature Center Temperature EN [0 to 0 / 0 / 0deg]
001 Display G
1-106- Fusing Temperature End Temperature EN [0 to 0 / 0 / 0deg]
002 Display G
1-106- Fusing Temperature Pressure Roller Temperature EN [0 to 0 / 0 / 0deg]
003 Display G
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Temperature EN [100 to 220 / 220 /
001 Adj. G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Temperature EN [100 to 220 / 210 /
002 Adj. G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time EN IM 7000/IM 8000:
003 Adj. G* [0 to 120 / 60 /
1sec]
IM 9000:
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Actual Time EN IM 7000/IM 8000:
004 Adj. G* [0 to 120 / 55 /
1sec]
IM 9000:
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Temp (Small Size EN [140 to 220 / 220 /
005 Adj. Paper) G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time EN [0 to * / 60 / 1sec]
006 Adj. (Small Size Paper) G* *IM 7000: 120
*IM 8000: 120
*IM 9000: 0
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Temp (Thick EN [140 to 220 / 220 /
007 Adj. Paper 1,2) G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time EN [0 to 120 / * / 1sec]
008 Adj. (Thick Paper 1,2) G* *IM 7000: 0

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
*IM 8000: 5
*IM 9000: 5
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Capacitor Heater Temperature EN [120 to 220 / 200 /
009 Adj. G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Capacitor Heater Actual Time EN [0 to 120 / * / 1sec]
010 Adj. G* *IM 7000: 0
*IM 8000: 60
*IM 9000: 0
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Temp (Label) EN [100 to 220 / 220 /
011 Adj. G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
012 Adj. (Label) G*
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Temp (Label) EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
013 Adj. G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
014 Adj. (Label) G*
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Temp (Tab Sheet) EN [100 to 220 / 220 /
015 Adj. G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time (Tab EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
016 Adj. Sheet) G*
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Temp (Tab Sheet) EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
017 Adj. G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Actual Time (Tab EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
018 Adj. Sheet) G*
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Temperature EN [100 to 220 / * /
019 Adj. G* 1deg]
*IM 7000: 185
*IM 8000: 205
*IM 9000: 205
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Temperature EN [100 to 220 / * /
020 Adj. G* 1deg]
*IM 7000: 185
*IM 8000: 205
*IM 9000: 205
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time EN IM 7000:

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
021 Adj. G* [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
IM 8000:
[0 to 120 / 60 /
1sec]
IM 9000:
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Actual Time EN IM 7000: 0
022 Adj. G* [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
IM 8000
(NA/EU/AP/CHN/K
OR):
[0 to 120 / 55 /
1sec]
IM 8000 (TWN):
[0 to 120 / 60 /
1sec]
IM 9000:
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Capacitor Heater Temperature EN [140 to 220 / * /
023 Adj. G* 1deg]
*IM 7000: 200
*IM 8000: 195
*IM 9000: 200
024 Adj. G* *IM 7000: 0
*IM 8000: 17
*IM 9000: 0
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Temperature EN [100 to 220 / * /
025 Adj. (Warm Paper 1) G* 1deg]
*IM 7000: 185
*IM 8000: 205
*IM 9000: 205
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Temperature (Warm EN [100 to 220 / * /
026 Adj. Paper 1) G* 1deg]
*IM 7000: 185

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
*IM 8000: 205
*IM 9000: 205
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time EN IM 7000:
027 Adj. (Warm Paper 1) G* [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
IM 8000:
[0 to 120 / 60 /
1sec]
IM 9000:
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Actual Time (Warm EN IM 7000:
028 Adj. Paper 1) G* [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
IM 8000
(NA/EU/AP/CHN/K
OR):
[0 to 120 / 55 /
1sec]
IM 8000 (TWN):
[0 to 120 / 60 /
1sec]
IM 9000:
[0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Temp (Thick EN [140 to 220 / 220 /
029 Adj. Paper 3) G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Center Lamp Actual Time EN [0 to 120 / * / 1sec]
030 Adj. (Thick Paper 3) G* *IM 7000: 5
*IM 8000: 5
*IM 9000: 10
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Capacitor Heater Temperature EN [120 to 220 / * /
031 Adj. (Warm Paper 1) G* 1deg]
*IM 7000: 205
*IM 8000: 200
*IM 9000: 190
032 Adj. (Warm Paper 1) G* *IM 7000: 0
*IM 8000: 17

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
*IM 9000: 0
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Temp: Thick Paper1, 2: Heater: EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
033 Adj. Center G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Time: Thick Paper1, 2: Heater: EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
034 Adj. Center G*
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Temp: Thick Paper1, 2: Heater: EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
035 Adj. End G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Time: Thick Paper1, 2: Heater: EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
036 Adj. End G*
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Temp: Thick Paper3: Heater: EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
037 Adj. Center G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Time: Thick Paper3: Heater: EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
038 Adj. Center G*
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Temp: Thick Paper3: Heater: EN [100 to 220 / 205 /
039 Adj. End G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time Time: Thick Paper3: Heater: EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
040 Adj. End G*
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Temp (Small Size EN [100 to 220 / 150 /
041 Adj. Paper) G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Actual Time (Small EN IM 7000
042 Adj. Size Paper) G* (NA/TWN):
[0 to 120 / 60 /
1sec]
IM 7000
(EU/AP/CHN/KOR
):
[0 to 120 / 55 /
1sec]
IM 8000 (NA):
[0 to 120 / 70 /
1sec]
IM 8000
(EU/AP/CHN/KOR
):
[0 to 120 / 55 /

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
1sec]
IM 8000 (TWN):
[0 to 120 / 60 /
1sec]
IM 9000:
[0 to 80 / 70 / 1sec]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Temp (Thick Paper EN [100 to 220 / 150 /
043 Adj. 1,2) G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Actual Time (Thick EN IM 7000 (NA/EU):
044 Adj. Paper 1,2) G* 0
[0 to 120 /0 /
1sec]
IM 7000
(AP/CHN/KOR/TW
N): 5
[0 to 120 / 5 / 1sec]
IM 8000
(NA/AP/CHN/KOR
/TWN): 5
[0 to 120 / 5 / 1sec]
IM 8000 (EU): 0
[0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
IM 9000: 5
[0 to 80 / 5 / 1sec]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Temp (Thick Paper EN [100 to 220 / 150 /
045 Adj. 3) G* 1deg]
1-107- Start Fusing Temp. Time End Lamp Actual Time (Thick EN IM 7000 (NA):
046 Adj. Paper 3) G* [0 to 120 / 0 / 1sec]
IM 7000 (EU):
[0 to 120 / 5 / 1sec]
IM 7000
(AP/CHN/KOR/TW
N):
[0 to 120 / 10 /
1sec]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
IM 8000 (NA/EU):
[0 to 120 / 5 / 1sec]
IM 8000
(AP/CHN/KOR/TW
N):
[0 to 120 / 10 /
1sec]
IM 9000:
[0 to 80 / 10 / 1sec]
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp: Low Temp: Start-up EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
001 G*
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp: Low Temp (Pl1) EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
002 G*
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp: Low Temp (Pl2) EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
003 G*
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp: Low Temp (TH1,2) EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
004 G*
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp: Low Temp (TH3) EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
005 G*
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp: Low Temp (OHP) EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
006 G*
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp: Low Temp (Lbl) EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
007 G*
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp: Low Temp (Indx) EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
008 G*
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp Cap: Low Temp EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
009 (Pl1) G*
010 (Pl2) G*
011 (TH1,2) G*
012 (TH3) G*
013 (OHP) G*

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
1-108- Environment Correction Corr Temp Cap: Low Temp (Lbl) EN [0 to 20 / 0 / 1deg]
014 G*
015 (Indx) G*
1-109- Measure Nip Width Execute EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 G 0: OFF
1: ON
1-109- Measure Nip Width Nip Width (Adjust Value) EN [200 to 400 / 300 /
002 G* 10mm]
1-112-0 Auto Process Co EN [70 to 150 / 140 /
01 G* 1deg]
1-159- Fusing Jam SC Setting EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-901- CPM Down for Special Thick Paper CPM EN [0 to 4 / * / 1]
001 Paper (0:25/1:35/2:40/3:45/4:55) G* 0: 25cpm
1: 35cpm
2: 40cpm
3: 45cpm
4: 55cpm
*IM 7000: 2
*IM 8000: 2
*IM 9000: 3
1-901- CPM Down for Special Tab Sheet CPM EN [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
002 Paper (0:25/1:35/2:40/3:45/4:55) G* 0: 25cpm
1: 35cpm
2: 40cpm
3: 45cpm
4: 55cpm
1-901- CPM Down for Special Label CPM EN [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
003 Paper (0:25/1:35/2:40/3:45/4:55) G* 0: 25cpm
1: 35cpm
2: 40cpm
3: 45cpm
4: 55cpm

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
1-901- CPM Down for Special Special Paper CPM EN [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
004 Paper (0:25/1:35/2:40/3:45/4:55) G* 0: 25cpm
1: 35cpm
2: 40cpm
3: 45cpm
4: 55cpm
1-901- CPM Down for Special Thick Paper 3 CPM EN [0 to 4 / * / 1]
005 Paper (0:25/1:35/2:40/3:45/4:55) G* 0: 25cpm
1: 35cpm
2: 40cpm
3: 45cpm
4: 55cpm
*IM 7000: 2
*IM 8000: 2
*IM 9000: 3
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Fusing Web Used Area EN [0 to 120 / 0 / 1]
001 Control Display/Setting G*
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Fusing Web Motor Operation EN [5 to 50 / * / 1]
002 Control Interval G* *IM 7000: 17
*IM 8000: 16
*IM 9000: 14
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Web Near End Value EN [0 to 100 / 80 / 1]
004 Control G*
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Web Roll Coefficient EN [5 to 30 / 18 / 1]
005 Control G*
1-902- For Web Design Web Length (0: 20m 1: EN [0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
006 22.7m) G* 0: 20m
1: 22.7m
2: 28.5m
3: 32m
1-902- Web Motor SC Detection Web Motor Counter:Continuous EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007 Display G*
1-902- Web Motor SC Detection Web Motor Counter:Total EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008 Display G*
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Near End Detection EN [1 to 2 / 1 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
009 Control G*
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Near End Judge Logs EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010 Control G*
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Web Near End Display Setting EN [0 to 99999999 /
011 Control 1 G* 21 / 1]
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Web End Display Setting Pages EN [0 to 100 / 13 / 1]
012 Control G*
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Web Near End Display Setting EN [0 to 99999999 /
013 Control 2 G* 21 / 1]
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Detection OFF EN [0 to 100 / 41 / 1]
014 Control SaveResetSettingPages G*
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Detection ON EN [0 to 100 / 41 / 1]
015 Control SaveResetSettingPages G*
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Detection ON Save Detected EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
016 Control Pages G* / 1]
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Detection OFF Save Detected EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
017 Control Pages G* / 1]
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Total Operation Count EN [0 to 99999999 / 0
018 Control G* / 1]
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Web Operation Time EN [0 to 5 / 2.9 /
019 Control G* 0.1sec]
1-902- Fusing Web Motor Denominator: UsageCalcForm EN [0 to 99999999 /
020 Control G* 1180 / 1]
1-903- Web Job End Yes/No EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-903- Web Job End Job End Condition (Continous EN [1 to 99 / 7 / 1]
002 PPC Time) G*
1-903- Web Job End Job End Frequency EN [1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
003 G*
1-904- By-passTrayPaperSizeC Minimum Size EN [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001 orrection G
1-904- By-passTrayPaperSizeC Maximum Size EN [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002 orrection G
1-905- By-pass Adj. Thick Paper - By-pass Tray EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
001 G
1-905- By-pass Adj. Size Setting: Priority Detecting EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 G 0: LG
1: LT
1-905- By-pass Adj. Adj. Size Determining Time EN [0 to 3 / 3 / 1sec]
003 G
1-906- Temp/humid Sensor Temp/humid Sensor EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 G*
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Thick 1,2 (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Thick 1,2: Small Paper Size EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 (1:ON/0:OFF) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Nomal Mode (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Normal Mode: Small Paper Size EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 (1:ON/0:OFF) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Middle Thick (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Middle Thick: S-size EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 (1:ON/0:OFF) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Label (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
007 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Envelope (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
008 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Thick 3 Mode (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009 G* 0: OFF
1: ON

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Thick 3 Mode: Small Paper Size EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010 (1:ON/0:OFF) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Thick1, 2:Heater:Center EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
011 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Thick1, 2:Heater:End EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
012 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:Thick1, 2 EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
013 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Thick EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
014 1,2:Small:Heater:Center G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Thick EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
015 1,2:Small:Heater:End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:Thick 1,2:Small EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
016 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Plain:Heater:Center EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
017 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Plain:Heater:End EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
018 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:Plain EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
019 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Small EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
020 Plain:Heater:Center G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Small Plain:Heater:End EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
021 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:Small Plain EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
022 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:MidThick:Heater:Center EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
023 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:MidThick:Heater:End EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
024 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:MidThick EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
025 G* 1sec]
026 MidThick:Heater:Center G* 1]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
027 MidThick:Heater:End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:Small MidThick EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
028 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Label:Heater:Center EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
029 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Label:Heater:End EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
030 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:Label EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
031 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:TabSheet:Heater:Center EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
032 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:TabSheet:Heater:End EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
033 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:TabSheet EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
034 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Thick3:Heater:Center EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
035 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Thick3:Heater:End EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
036 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:Thick3 EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
037 G* 1sec]
038 Thick3:Heater:Center G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Temp:Small Thick3:Heater:End EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
039 G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Time:Small Thick3 EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
040 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Thick 1,2 (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
041 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Thick 1,2: Small Paper Size EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
042 (1:ON/0:OFF) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Nomal Mode (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
043 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Normal Mode: Small Paper Size EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
044 (1:ON/0:OFF) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Middle Thick (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
045 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Middle Thick: S-size EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
046 (1:ON/0:OFF) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Label (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
047 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Envelope (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
048 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Thick 3 Mode (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
049 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling Thick 3 Mode: Small Paper Size EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
050 (1:ON/0:OFF) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Thick1, EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
051 2:Heater:Center G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Thick1, EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
052 2:Heater:End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:Thick1, 2 EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
053 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Thick EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
054 1,2:Small:Heater:Center G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Thick EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
055 1,2:Small:Heater:End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:Thick 1,2:Small EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
056 G* 1sec]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Plain:Heater:C EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
057 enter G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Plain:Heater:E EN [100 to 220 / * / 1]
058 nd G* *IM 7000: 190
*IM 8000: 190
*IM 9000: 210
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:Plain EN [0 to 250 / * / 1sec]
059 G* *IM 7000: 60
*IM 8000: 60
*IM 9000: 120
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Small EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
060 Plain:Heater:Center G* 1]
061 Plain:Heater:End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:Small Plain EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
062 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:MidThick:Heat EN [100 to 220 / * / 1]
063 er:Center G* *IM 7000: 200
*IM 8000: 200
*IM 9000: 220
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:MidThick:Heat EN [100 to 220 / * / 1]
064 er:End G* *IM 7000: 190
*IM 8000: 190
*IM 9000: 210
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:MidThick EN [0 to 250 / * / 1sec]
065 G* *IM 7000: 60
*IM 8000: 60
*IM 9000: 120
066 MidThick:Heater:Center G* 1]
067 MidThick:Heater:End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:Small MidThick EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
068 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Label:Heater:C EN [100 to 220 / 200 /

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
069 enter G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Label:Heater:E EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
070 nd G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:Label EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
071 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:TabSheet:Heat EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
072 er:Center G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:TabSheet:Heat EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
073 er:End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:TabSheet EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
074 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Thick3:Heater: EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
075 Center G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp:Thick3:Heater: EN [100 to 220 / 190 /
076 End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:Thick3 EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
077 G* 1sec]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Temp: Small Thick3: EN [100 to 220 / 200 /
078 Heater: Center G* 1]
079 Thick3:Heater:End G* 1]
1-907- Pre-Fusing Idling LowTemp:Time:Small Thick3 EN [0 to 250 / 60 /
080 G* 1sec]
1-908- Pre-Fusing Idling 1:ON/0:OFF EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-908- Pre-Fusing Idling: Low Standby (Pre-Idling) EN [0 to 180 / 0 / 1sec]
002 Temp. G*
1-908- Pre-Fusing Idling: Low Sleep Mode (Pre-Idling) EN [0 to 180 / 60 /
003 Temp. G* 1sec]
1-909- SpeedMode LowSpeedMode EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 (Enable/Disable) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-909- SpeedMode Previous Paper: Speed EN [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
002 G*

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
1-909- SpeedMode LowSpeedMode (Tab Sheet) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-909- SpeedMode LowSpeedMode (Label) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-909- SpeedMode LowSpeedMode (Special EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 Paper) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-909- SpeedMode LowSpeedMode EN [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
006 ProcessControl G* 0: OFF
1: Adjust1
2: Adjust2
1-909- SpeedMode ProcessControl Action Print EN [0 to 9999999 /
007 Distance(Adj2) G* 1050 / 1cm]
1-909- SpeedMode MiddleSpeedMode(Disable/Mo EN [0 to 2 / * / 1]
008 de1/Mode2) G* 0: OFF
1: MODE1
2: MODE2
*IM 7000: 0
*IM 8000: 0
*IM 9000: 1
1-909- SpeedMode MiddleSpeedMode (Tab Sheet) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-909- SpeedMode MiddleSpeedMode (Label) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-909- SpeedMode MiddleSpeedMode (Special EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011 Paper) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-909- SpeedMode MiddleSpeedMode EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
012 ProcessControl G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-909- Fusing Temp. CPM MidSpeed/LowTempMode EN [0 to 1 / * / 1]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
013 Down Setting (On/Off) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
*IM 7000: 0
*IM 8000: 0
*IM 9000: 1
1-910- Capacitor Status Display Latest Capacity EN [0 to 200 / 160 /
001 G* 1F]
1-910- Capacitor Status Display Current Voltage EN [0 to 50 / 0 / 0.01V]
002 G
1-910- Capacitor Status Display Charge Time EN [0 to 600000 / 0 /
003 G 1ms]
1-910- Capacitor Status Display Worn-out Counter EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 G*
1-910- Capacitor Status Display Charged Power EN [0 to 500 / 285 /
005 G* 1W]
1-911-0 Capacitor Discharge EN [1 to 20 / 7 / 1V]
01 Stop Volt G*
1-912- Capacitor Worn-out Worn-out Counter EN [30 to 255 / 30 / 1]
002 Detection G*
1-912- Capacitor Worn-out AC Input Voltage EN [80 to 100 / 99 /
003 Detection G* 1V]
1-912- Capacitor Worn-out Capacitor Capacity EN [50 to 150 / 100 /
004 Detection G* 1F]
1-913- AC Input Voltage Display AC Input Voltage initial value EN IM 7000/IM 8000
001 G (NA):
[0 to 200 / 120 /
1V]
IM 7000/IM 8000
(EU/AP):
[0 to 300 / 240 /
1V]
IM 7000/IM 8000
(CHN/KOR):
[0 to 300 / 220 /
1V]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
IM 7000/IM 8000
(TWN):
[0 to 200 / 110 /
1V]
IM 9000
(NA/EU/AP/TWN):
[0 to 300 / 240 /
1V]
IM 9000
(CHN/KOR):
[0 to 300 / 220 /
1V]
1-913- AC Input Voltage Display AC Input Voltage measured EN [0 to 300 / 0 / 1]
002 value G
1-920- Capacitor Charge 0:ON/1:OFF EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Setting G* 0: ON
1: OFF
1-921- Job End Idlling Idlling Time EN [0 to 30 / 0 / 1sec]
001 G*
1-921- Job End Idlling Target Temperature EN [190 to 205 / 200 /
002 G* 1deg]
1-922- Not Used 0:OFF 1:ON EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-923- HV Fusing Temp Cont 0:OFF 1:ON EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-924- 10 Sec. Recovery Temperature Sensor EN [16 to 25 / 20 / 1]
001 Temperature G*
1-925- Idling Setting:Power On Middle Thick (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-925- Idling Setting:Power On Thick 1,2 (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 G* 0: OFF
1: ON

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
1-925- Idlling Setting:Power On Nomal Paper1(1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-925- Idlling Setting:Power On Nomal Paper2(1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-925- Idling Setting:Power On Thick 3 (1:ON/0:OFF) EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-926- Capacitor Discharge: End Thermistor EN [135 to 220 / 190 /
001 S-Size G* 1deg]
1-927- Capacitor Discharge Capacitor Discharge Time EN [12 to 120 / 30 /
001 Setting G* 1sec]
1-928- Heater OFF during Heater OFF Time EN IM 7000/IM 8000:
001 Feeding G* [5 to 5 / 5 / 1deg]
IM 9000:
[5 to 10 / 10 / 1deg]
1-929- Capacitor OFF: Feeding 1:ON/0:OFF EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-930- Web Operation: Fusing 1:ON/0:OFF EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Idling G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-930- Web Operation: Fusing Operation Times EN [1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
002 Idling G*
1-931- Normal Paper Setting 1 1:ON/0:OFF EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 control G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-931- Normal Paper Setting 1 Capacitor Voltage EN [15 to 25 / 22 / 1V]
002 control G*
1-933- Not Used Not Used EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-933- Not Used Not Used EN [0 to 0 / 0 / 1sec]
002 G*

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
1-933- Not Used Not Used EN [0 to 200 / 50 /
003 G* 1deg]
1-933- 20sec Recover Reload Forced Reload (1: Enable/0: EN [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
004 Disable) G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-933- 20sec Recover Reload Forced Reload Time EN [15 to 10 / 18 /
005 G* 1sec]
1-933- 20sec Recover Reload Forced Reload Permit Temp EN [0 to 200 / 50 /
006 G* 1deg]
1-951- Dsp Inside Machine Temperature EN [-128 to 127 / 0 /
001 Temperature G 1deg]
1-952- Switching Temp: Fan Operation Switch Temp: Silent EN [0 to 100 / 25 /
001 Operation Mode G* 1deg]
1-952- Switching Temp: Fan Operation Switch Temp: Normal EN [0 to 100 / 40 /
002 Operation Mode G* 1deg]
1-952- Switching Temp: Fan Operation Switch Temp: High EN [0 to 100 / 42 /
003 Operation Temp Mode G* 1deg]
1-953- DevUnitFan: Forced Forced Enable EN [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Enable Set G* 0: OFF
1: ON
1-954- Extra Operation Determining Temp EN [0 to 100 / * / 1deg]
001 G* *IM 7000: 50
*IM 8000: 50
*IM 9000: 10
1-955- Switching Temperature Threshold Temperature EN [0 to 20 / 2 / 1deg]
001 G*
1-956- Exhaust Fan DUTY Adj. Silent EN [0 to 100 / 28 / 1%]
001 G*
1-956- Exhaust Fan DUTY Adj. Low Speed EN [0 to 100 / 28 / 1%]
002 G*
1-956- Exhaust Fan DUTY Adj. Mid Speed EN [0 to 100 / 28 / 1%]
003 G*
1-956- Exhaust Fan DUTY Adj. High Speed EN [0 to 100 / 30 / 1%]
004 G*
1-956- Exhaust Fan DUTY Adj. Printing EN [0 to 100 / * / 1%]

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
005 G* *IM 7000: 48
*IM 8000: 48
*IM 9000: 58
1-957- Intake Fan DUTY Adj. Silent EN [0 to 100 / 30 / 1%]
001 G*
1-957- Intake Fan DUTY Adj. Low Speed EN [0 to 100 / 50 / 1%]
002 G*
1-957- Intake Fan DUTY Adj. Mid Speed EN [0 to 100 / 60 / 1%]
003 G*
1-957- Intake Fan DUTY Adj. High Speed EN [0 to 100 / 70 / 1%]
004 G*
1-958- Fusing Exhaust Fan Silent EN [0 to 100 / 33 / 1%]
001 DUTY Adj. G*
1-958- Fusing Exhaust Fan Low Speed EN [0 to 100 / 33 / 1%]
002 DUTY Adj. G*
1-958- Fusing Exhaust Fan Mid Speed EN [0 to 100 / 38 / 1%]
003 DUTY Adj. G*
1-958- Fusing Exhaust Fan High Speed EN [0 to 100 / * / 1%]
004 DUTY Adj. G* *IM 7000: 55
*IM 8000: 55
*IM 9000: 65
1-958- Fusing Exhaust Fan Printing Low Speed EN [0 to 100 / * / 1%]
005 DUTY Adj. G* *IM 7000: 55
*IM 8000: 55
*IM 9000: 65
1-958- Fusing Exhaust Fan Printing Mid Speed EN [0 to 100 / * / 1%]
006 DUTY Adj. G* *IM 7000: 55
*IM 8000: 55
*IM 9000: 65
1-958- Fusing Exhaust Fan Printing High Speed EN [0 to 100 / * / 1%]
007 DUTY Adj. G* *IM 7000: 55
*IM 8000: 55
*IM 9000: 65
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Drum Fan EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec]
001 G*

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Main Intake Fan EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec]
002 G*
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Duplex Fan EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
003 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Development Unit Fan 1 EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
004 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Development Unit Fan 2 EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
005 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Main Exhaust Fan EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec]
006 G*
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. PCU Fan EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
007 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Fusing Inner Cover Fan EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
008 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Toner Bottle Fan EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
009 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Heat Exhaust Fan EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec]
010 G*
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. PSU Fan 1 EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
011 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. PSU Fan 2 EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
012 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. AC Drive Board Fan EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
013 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. Controller Fan EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
014 G* 1sec]
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. PFU Fan 1 EN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec]
015 G*
1-960- Fan Stop Time Adj. PFU Fan 2 EN [0 to 255 / 90 /
016 G* 1sec]
017 G*
018 G*
1-961- Fan Operation Determining Temp EN [0 to 100 / 50 /

Engine SP Tables-1

G Max/Init./Step]
or
Mode Tables
Appendices
CTL
Engine SP
001 G* 1deg]

Engine SP Tables-2
2.2.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to Max/Init./Step]
or
CTL
2-001-002 Charge Roller Bias ID Sensor Pattern: Adj. of ENG [600 to 1500 / 800 /
Adjustment Applied Voltage 10V]
2-001-003 Charge Roller Bias Setting for Total Bias ENG* [900 to 1500 / 900 /
Adjustment Current 10uA]
2-001-004 Charge Roller Bias Setting for Total Bias ENG* [600 to 1500 / 900 /
Adjustment Current of Grid 10V]
2-001-005 Charge Roller Bias Total Bias Grid Voltage: ENG [600 to 1500 / 650 /
Adjustment OHP Total 10V]
2-001-006 Charge Roller Bias Total Bias Grid Current: ENG [1400 to 1500 / 1500 /
Adjustment Photo Mode Total 10uA]
2-001-007 Charge Roller Bias Set for Total Bias Current ENG* [600 to 1500 / 900 /
Adjustment of Grid(LowSpeed) 10V]
2-001-008 Charge Roller Bias Set for Total Bias Current ENG* [600 to 1500 / 900 /
Adjustment of Grid (Middle) 10V]
2-101-001 Printing Erase Margin Leading Edge ENG [0 to 9 / 4.5 / 0.1mm]
2-101-002 Printing Erase Margin Trailing Edge ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 0.1mm]
2-101-003 Printing Erase Margin Left edge ENG [0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
2-101-004 Printing Erase Margin Right edge ENG [0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
2-104-001 Small Pitch Band Reduction Mode O ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1-]
0: OFF
1: ON
2-104-002 Small Pitch Band Reduction Mode O ENG* [-20 to 10 / 0 / 1-]
2-104-003 Small Pitch Band Reduction Mode O ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1-]
0: OFF
1: ON
2-104-004 Small Pitch Band Reduction Mode O ENG* [-20 to 10 / 0 / 1-]
2-107-001 Image Parameter Image Gamma Flag ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
2-107-002 Image Parameter Shading Correction Flag ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
2-110-001 LD Driver Error Flag ENG* [0x0000 to 0xFFFF /

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
0x0000 / 1]
Engine SP
2-110-005 LD Driver Writing Unit Adj. Transfer ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2-110-010 LD Driver Power Detection Result ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
2-114-001 Binary Edge Pro Leading Edge Pixe ENG [2 to 15 / 8 / 1-]
2-114-002 Binary Edge Pro Trailing Edge Pix ENG [2 to 15 / 15 / 1-]
2-114-004 Binary Edge Pro Independent Dot P ENG [2 to 15 / 8 / 1-]
2-114-005 Binary Edge Pro Leading Edge Pixe ENG [2 to 15 / 7 / 1-]
2-114-006 Binary Edge Pro Trailing Edge Pix ENG [2 to 15 / 15 / 1-]
2-114-008 Binary Edge Pro Independent Dot P ENG [2 to 15 / 15 / 1-]
2-115-001 Main Scan Beam Pitch Pitch Adj. Between LD0 ENG* [-100 to 100 / 0 /
Adj. and LD2 1um]
Adj. and LD3 1um]
Adj. and LD1 1um]
2-115-004 Main Scan Mag. Adj. Main Scan:Front Between ENG* [-100 to 100 / 0 /
LD0 and LD1 1um]
2-115-005 Main Scan Mag. Adj. Main Scan:Rear Between ENG* [-100 to 100 / 0 /
LD0 and LD1 1um]
2-201-001 Development Bia Dev. Bias (Image) ENG* [100 to 800 / 550 /
10V]
2-201-002 Development Bia ID Sensor Pattern ENG* [100 to 800 / 360 /
10V]
2-201-003 Development Bia OHP ENG [100 to 800 / 300 /
10V]
2-201-004 Development Bia ID Sensor Pattern ENG* [140 to 380 / 240 /
10V]
2-201-005 Development Bia Vb Scale Voltage ENG* [100 to 800 / 550 /
1V]
2-201-006 Development Bia Dev. Bias ENG* [100 to 800 / 550 /
(Image)(LowSpeed) 10V]
2-201-007 Development Bia Dev. Bias ENG* [100 to 800 / 550 /
(Image)(MiddleSpeed) 10V]
2-207-001 Forced Toner Su ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0-]
2-208-001 Toner Supply Mode (0:Sensor 1:Pixel Count) ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Sensor

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
1: Pixel Count
2-209-001 Toner Supply Rate ENG* [50 to 2000 / 850 /
5mgpsec]
2-210-001 ID Sensor Patter ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1-]
2-220-001 Vref Manual Setting ENG* [1 to 4 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
2-223-001 Vt Display ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.02V]
2-224-001 Tnr Remains: Disp Tnr mg(NewBtl) ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1100000 / 0.1mg]
2-224-002 Tnr Remains: Disp mg Remains ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1100000 / 0.1mg]
2-224-003 Tnr Remains: Disp % Remains ENG* [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%]
2-224-004 Tnr Remains: Disp TnrRemainsCoef ENG [0 to 30 / 1 / 0.01]
2-224-006 Tnr Remains: Disp Coverage date ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
2-301-001 Trans. Curr. Adj. Main Unit Image Area: ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Front Side *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-002 Trans. Curr. Adj. Main Unit Image Area: ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Back Side *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-003 Trans. Curr. Adj. By-pass Image Area: ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Front Side
2-301-004 Trans. Curr. Adj. Postcard ENG [10 to 200 / 165 /
1uA]
2-301-005 Trans. Curr. Adj. Paper Interval ENG [10 to 200 / 15 / 1uA]
2-301-006 Trans. Curr. Adj. Tab Paper ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
*IM 7000: 75
*IM 8000: 75
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-009 Trans. Curr. Adj. OHP: Front Side ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
*IM 7000: 75
*IM 8000: 75
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-010 Trans. Curr. Adj. Tracing Paper: Front Side ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
1uA]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
2-301-011 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge: ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Engine SP
Front *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-012 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge: ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Front *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-013 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge: ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Back *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-014 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge: ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Back *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-015 Trans. Curr. Adj. Bypass: Image Leading ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Edge *IM 7000: 75
*IM 8000: 75
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-016 Trans. Curr. Adj. Bypass: Image Trailing ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Edge *IM 7000: 75
*IM 8000: 75
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-017 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge: ENG [10 to 200 / 165 /
Postcard 1uA]
2-301-018 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge: ENG [10 to 200 / 165 /
Postcard 1uA]
2-301-019 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge:Tab ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Paper *IM 7000: 75
*IM 8000: 75
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-020 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge:Tab ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Paper *IM 7000: 75
*IM 8000: 75
*IM 9000: 80

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
2-301-023 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Edge:OHP *IM 7000: 75
*IM 8000: 75
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-024 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge:OHP ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
*IM 7000: 75
*IM 8000: 75
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-025 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
Edge:Tracing Paper 1uA]
2-301-026 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
Edge:Tracing Paper 1uA]
2-301-027 Trans. Curr. Adj. Label ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
*IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
Edge:Label *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-029 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Edge:Label *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-030 Trans. Curr. Adj. envelope ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
*IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
Edge:envelope *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-032 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Edge:envelope *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
2-301-033 Trans. Curr. Adj. Med Thick Paper: Front ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Engine SP
Side Side *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-034 Trans. Curr. Adj. Med Thick Paper: Back ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Side *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-035 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge:Med ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Thick Paper *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-036 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge:Med ENG [10 to 200 / * / 1uA]
Thick Paper *IM 7000: 65
*IM 8000: 65
*IM 9000: 80
2-301-037 Trans. Curr. Adj. Thick Paper1: Front Side ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
1uA]
2-301-038 Trans. Curr. Adj. Thick Paper1: Back Side ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
1uA]
Edge:Thick Paper1 1uA]
1uA]
1uA]
1uA]
1uA]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
1uA]
2-301-101 Trans. Curr. Adj. Main Unit Image Area: ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]
Front Side: Low Speed
Back Side: Low Speed
2-301-104 Trans. Curr. Adj. Postcard: Low Speed ENG [10 to 200 / 165 /
1uA]
2-301-105 Trans. Curr. Adj. Paper Interval: Low ENG [10 to 200 / 15 / 1uA]
Speed
2-301-106 Trans. Curr. Adj. Tab Paper: Low Speed ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
2-301-109 Trans. Curr. Adj. OHP: Front Side: Low ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Speed
2-301-110 Trans. Curr. Adj. Tracing Paper: Front ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
Side: Low Speed 1uA]
2-301-111 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge: ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]
Front: Low Speed
2-301-112 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge: ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]
Front: Low Speed
Back: Low Speed
Back: Low Speed
2-301-115 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge:Low ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Speed
2-301-116 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge:Low ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Speed
Engine SP
Postcard: Low Speed 1uA]
2-301-119 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge:Tab ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Paper: Low Speed
2-301-120 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge:Tab ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Paper: Low Speed
2-301-123 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Edge:OHP: Low Speed
2-301-124 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Edge:OHP: Low Speed
Edge:Tracing Paper: Low 1uA]
Speed
Speed
2-301-127 Trans. Curr. Adj. Label: Low Speed ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]
Edge:Label: Low Speed
2-301-130 Trans. Curr. Adj. envelope: Low Speed ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]
Edge:envelope: Low
Speed
Edge:envelope: Low
Speed
2-301-133 Trans. Curr. Adj. Med Thick Paper: Front: ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]
Low Speed
2-301-134 Trans. Curr. Adj. Med Thick Paper: Back: ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]
Low Speed
2-301-135 Trans. Curr. Adj. Img Leading Edge:Med ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Thick Paper: Low Speed
2-301-136 Trans. Curr. Adj. Img Trailing Edge:Med ENG [10 to 200 / 50 / 1uA]
2-301-137 Trans. Curr. Adj. Thick Paper1: Front Side: ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
Low Speed 1uA]
2-301-138 Trans. Curr. Adj. Thick Paper1: Back Side: ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
Low Speed 1uA]
Edge:Thick Paper1: Low 1uA]
Speed
Speed
Low Speed 1uA]
Low Speed 1uA]
Speed
Speed
Low Speed 1uA]
Low Speed 1uA]
Speed
Speed
Low Speed 1uA]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
Speed
Speed
Back Side: Low Speed
2-301-204 Trans. Curr. Adj. Postcard: Low Speed ENG [10 to 200 / 165 /
1uA]
2-301-205 Trans. Curr. Adj. Paper Interval: Low ENG [10 to 200 / 15 / 1uA]
Speed
2-301-206 Trans. Curr. Adj. Tab Paper: Low Speed ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
2-301-209 Trans. Curr. Adj. OHP: Front Side: Low ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Speed
2-301-210 Trans. Curr. Adj. Tracing Paper: Front ENG [10 to 200 / 120 /
Side: Low Speed 1uA]
Front: Low Speed
Front: Low Speed
Back: Low Speed
Back: Low Speed
2-301-215 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge:Low ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Speed
2-301-216 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge:Low ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Speed

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
2-301-219 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Leading Edge:Tab ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Paper: Low Speed
2-301-220 Trans. Curr. Adj. Image Trailing Edge:Tab ENG [10 to 200 / 75 / 1uA]
Paper: Low Speed
Edge:OHP: Low Speed
Edge:OHP: Low Speed
Speed
Speed
2-301-227 Trans. Curr. Adj. Label: Low Speed ENG [10 to 200 / 65 / 1uA]
2-301-230 Trans. Curr. Adj. envelope: Low Speed ENG [10 to 200 / 65 / 1uA]
Edge:envelope: Low
Speed
Edge:envelope: Low
Speed
2-301-233 Trans. Curr. Adj. Med Thick Paper: Front: ENG [10 to 200 / 65 / 1uA]
Low Speed
2-301-234 Trans. Curr. Adj. Med Thick Paper: Back: ENG [10 to 200 / 65 / 1uA]
Low Speed
2-301-235 Trans. Curr. Adj. Img Leading Edge:Med ENG [10 to 200 / 65 / 1uA]
2-301-236 Trans. Curr. Adj. Img Trailing Edge:Med ENG [10 to 200 / 65 / 1uA]
Low Speed 1uA]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
Low Speed 1uA]
Speed
Speed
Low Speed 1uA]
Low Speed 1uA]
Speed
Speed
Low Speed 1uA]
Low Speed 1uA]
Speed
Speed
Low Speed 1uA]
Speed
Speed

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
2-506-001 Cont. Op.Time Operation Setting ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Cleaning Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
2-506-002 Cont. Op.Time Time Setting ENG [1 to 100 / 15 / 1min]
Cleaning Setting
2-507-001 ID Sen. Patt. Du Operation Setting ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1-]
0: OFF
1: ON
2-507-002 ID Sen. Patt. Du No. of Sheets ENG [1 to 10000 / 100 / 1-]
2-602-001 PTL Setting 1st Side: ON/OFF Setting ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
2-602-002 PTL Setting 1st Side: OFF Timing ENG [-10 to 20 / 3 / 1mm]
2-602-003 PTL Setting 2nd Side: ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
2-602-004 PTL Setting 2nd Side: OFF Timing ENG [-10 to 20 / 3 / 1mm]
2-602-101 PTL Setting 1st Side: ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Setting: Low Speed 0: OFF
1: ON
2-602-102 PTL Setting 1st Side: OFF Timing: ENG [-10 to 20 / 3 / 1mm]
Low Speed
1: ON
2-602-104 PTL Setting 2nd Side: OFF Timing: ENG [-10 to 20 / 3 / 1mm]
Low Speed
2-602-201 PTL Setting 1st Side: ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: ON
2-602-202 PTL Setting 1st Side: OFF Timing: ENG [-10 to 20 / 3 / 1mm]
Low Speed
1: ON
2-602-204 PTL Setting 2nd Side: OFF Timing: ENG [-10 to 20 / 3 / 1mm]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Low Speed
Engine SP
2-801-001 TD Sensor Initial ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Setting
2-801-002 TD Sensor Initial Developer Lot Number ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Setting Input
2-803-001 Charge Cleaner Start ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Time
2-804-001 Charge Cleaner Operation Mode ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
2-804-002 Charge Cleaner Number of Sheets ENG* [100 to 10000 / 5000 /
1]
2-901-001 HumidityControl (0:OFF 1:ON) ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
2-901-002 HumidityControl Humidity Thresh: Trans. ENG* [0 to 100 / 70 / 1%]
Bias
2-902-003 Test Pattern Printing Test Pattern ENG [0 to 25 / 0 / 1]
0: None
1: Alternating Dot
Pattern(1dot)
2: Alternating Dot
Pattern(2dot)
3: Alternating Dot
Pattern(4dot)
4: Alternating Dot
Pattern(2048dot)
5: Grid(1dot):0ch
6: Grid(1dot):1ch
7: Grid(1dot):2ch
8: Grid(1dot):3ch
9: Grid(1dot pair)
10: Checker Flag
Pattern
11: Horizontal
Line(2dot)

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
12: Vertical
Line(2dot)
13: Horizontal
Line(1dot)
14: Vertical
Line(1dot)
15: Cross
Stitch(Vertical)
16: Cross
Stitch(Horizontal)
17: Argyle Pattern
18: Trimming Area
19: Full Dot Pattern
20: Black
Band(Vertical)
21: Black
Band(Horizontal)
22: Blank Image
23:
Grid(1dot):0ch(with
Outside Data)
24: Trimming
Area(with Outside
Data)
25: Argyle
Pattern(with Outside
Data)
2-906-001 TD Sensor Ctrl Voltage TD Sensor Ctrl Voltage ENG [0 to 24 / 9.7 / 0.1V]
& Check Setting
2-906-002 TD Sensor Ctrl Voltage Automatic Adjustment ENG [0 to 24 / 9.7 / 0.1V]
& Check Setting
2-909-001 Writing Main Scan ENG* [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1%]
Mag.
2-910-001 Writing Sub Scan Mag. ENG* [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
2-912-001 Drum Reverse ENG* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
Rotation Interval

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
2-913-001 Temp/humid Display Internal Temparature ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 /
Engine SP
1deg]
2-920-001 LD Off Check 0:ON 1:OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
2-930-001 Transfer Idle Cleaning ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
2-931-001 Trans.Cur. On Timing: La1(Front) ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-002 Trans.Cur. La1f(Front) ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-003 Trans.Cur. Lc1r(Front) ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-004 Trans.Cur. Off Timing: Lc1(Front) ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-005 Trans.Cur. On Timing: La2(Back) ENG [-30 to 30 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-006 Trans.Cur. Leading Edge: ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT La2f(Back)
2-931-007 Trans.Cur. Trailing Edge: Lc2r(Back) ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-008 Trans.Cur. On Timing: Lc2(Back) ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-013 Trans.Cur. On Timing: M-Thick ENG [-30 to 30 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-014 Trans.Cur. Leading Edge: M-Thick ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-015 Trans.Cur. Trailing Edge:M-Thick ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-016 Trans.Cur. Off Timing: M-Thick ENG [-30 to 30 / 15 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-017 Trans.Cur. On Timing: After Punch ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-018 Trans.Cur. Leading Edge: After ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT Punch
2-931-019 Trans.Cur. Trailing Edge: After ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT Punch
2-931-020 Trans.Cur. Off Timing: After Punch ENG [-30 to 30 / * / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT *IM 7000: -22

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
*IM 8000: -22
*IM 9000: -25
2-931-021 Trans.Cur. On Timing: Thick Paper1 ENG [-30 to 30 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-022 Trans.Cur. Leading Edge: Thick ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT Paper1
2-931-023 Trans.Cur. Trailing Edge: Thick ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
2-931-024 Trans.Cur. Off Timing: Thick Paper1 ENG [-30 to 30 / 15 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
On/OffTiming:LCT
On/OffTiming:LCT
On/OffTiming:LCT
On/OffTiming:LCT
On/OffTiming:LCT
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-101 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: On Timing: ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT La1(Front)

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
2-931-102 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: La1f(Front) ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-103 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: Lc1r(Front) ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT
2-931-104 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: Off Timing: ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT Lc1(Front)
On/OffTiming:LCT La2(Back)
2-931-106 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: Leading ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge: La2f(Back)
2-931-107 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: Trailing ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge: Lc2r(Back)
On/OffTiming:LCT Lc2(Back)
On/OffTiming:LCT M-Thick
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge: M-Thick
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge:M-Thick
On/OffTiming:LCT After Punch
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge: After Punch
2-931-120 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: Off Timing: ENG [-30 to 30 / -16 /
On/OffTiming:LCT After Punch 1mm]
On/OffTiming:LCT Thick Paper1
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge: Thick Paper1

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:LCT La1(Front)
On/OffTiming:LCT
On/OffTiming:LCT
On/OffTiming:LCT Lc1(Front)
On/OffTiming:LCT La2(Back)

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge: La2f(Back)
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge: Lc2r(Back)
On/OffTiming:LCT Lc2(Back)
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge: M-Thick
On/OffTiming:LCT Edge:M-Thick
On/OffTiming:LCT After Punch
On/OffTiming:LCT After Punch 1mm]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1 La2f(Back)
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Punch
On/OffTiming:Tray1 *IM 7000: -22
*IM 8000: -22
*IM 9000: -25
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Paper1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1 La1(Front)
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Lc1(Front)
On/OffTiming:Tray1 La2(Back)
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Edge: La2f(Back)
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Edge: Lc2r(Back)
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Lc2(Back)
On/OffTiming:Tray1 M-Thick
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Edge: M-Thick
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Edge:M-Thick
On/OffTiming:Tray1 After Punch
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Edge: After Punch
On/OffTiming:Tray1 After Punch 1mm]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Thick Paper1
On/OffTiming:Tray1 Edge: Thick Paper1
On/OffTiming:Tray1
On/OffTiming:Tray1

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
*IM 8000: -22
*IM 9000: -25
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:Tray2
On/OffTiming:Tray2

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Tray3

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
*IM 8000: -22
*IM 9000: -25
On/OffTiming:Tray3

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Tray3
On/OffTiming:Tray3

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
*IM 8000: -22
*IM 9000: -25
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
On/OffTiming:Tray4
2-935-102 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: Low Speed: ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Tray4 La1f(Front)
On/OffTiming:Tray4

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
2-935-202 Trans.Cur. Low Speed: Low Speed: ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Tray4 La1f(Front)
On/OffTiming:Tray4

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass La2f(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-013 Trans.Cur. On Timing: OHP ENG [-30 to 30 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-014 Trans.Cur. Leading Edge: OHP ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-015 Trans.Cur. Trailing Edge: OHP ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
2-936-016 Trans.Cur. Off Timing: OHP ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-019 Trans.Cur. Trailing Edge: M-Thick ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass Punch
On/OffTiming:Bypass Punch
On/OffTiming:Bypass *IM 7000: -22
*IM 8000: -22
*IM 9000: -25
2-936-025 Trans.Cur. ON Timing:Label La1 ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-026 Trans.Cur. Label La1 ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-027 Trans.Cur. Label Lc1 ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-028 Trans.Cur. OFF Timing:Label Lc1 ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-029 Trans.Cur. ON Timing:envelope La1 ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-030 Trans.Cur. envelope La1 ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-031 Trans.Cur. envelope Lc1 ENG [0 to 20 / 0 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass
2-936-032 Trans.Cur. OFF Timing:envelope Lc1 ENG [-30 to 30 / 20 / 1mm]
On/OffTiming:Bypass

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass Paper1
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass La1(Front)
On/OffTiming:Bypass

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass Lc1(Front)
On/OffTiming:Bypass La2(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: La2f(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: Lc2r(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass Lc2(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass OHP
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: OHP
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge:OHP
On/OffTiming:Bypass M-Thick
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: M-Thick
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge:M-Thick
On/OffTiming:Bypass After Punch
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: After Punch
On/OffTiming:Bypass After Punch 1mm]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Bypass Label
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: Label
On/OffTiming:Bypass envelope
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: envelope
On/OffTiming:Bypass Thick Paper1
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: Thick Paper1

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
On/OffTiming:Bypass La1(Front)
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass
On/OffTiming:Bypass Lc1(Front)
On/OffTiming:Bypass La2(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: La2f(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: Lc2r(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass Lc2(Back)
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: OHP
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge:OHP

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge: M-Thick
On/OffTiming:Bypass Edge:M-Thick
On/OffTiming:Bypass After Punch
On/OffTiming:Bypass After Punch 1mm]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
2-940-001 Reface Mode Pattern Count ENG* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
2-950-001 Vh Pattern Creation Exposure Level ENG* [0 to 15 / 8 / 1-]
Setting
2-950-002 Vh Pattern Creation Offset Light Amount ENG* [-100 to 0 / -45 / 1-]
Setting
2-960-001 Process Interval Additional Time ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1sec]
2-961-001 Developer Adjust ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Mode

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
2-962-001 AutomaticAdj of DrumConditions ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0-]
Engine SP
2-963-001 Installation Mode ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0-]
2-963-002 Installation Mode Developer Lot Number ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Input
2-966-002 Drum Conditions: Interval Setting ENG* [1 to 24 / 24 / 1hour]
Periodic Adj
2-967-001 Developer Density Adj ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1-]
Mode 0: OFF
1: ON
2-968-001 Toner Exit Mode ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
2-969-001 Toner Bottle Copy Count Setting ENG* [50 to 112 / 100 /
Revolution Count 1Mai]
2-969-002 Toner Bottle Count Reset ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Revolution Count
2-969-003 Toner Bottle Copy Count Display ENG [0 to 0xFFFF / 0 /
Revolution Count 0Kai]
2-970-001 Trans. Belt ENG [0 to 0xFFFF / 0 /
Resistance:Display 0Mohm]
2-971-001 Trans. Interval Output Voltage ENG [0 to 0xFFFF / 0 / 0V]
2-971-002 Trans. Interval Output Current ENG [0 to 0xFFFF / 0 /
0uA]
2-972-001 New Toner Bottle Fan NewTonerBottle Cooling ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Setting Fan Forced Operation 0: OFF
1: ON
2-973-001 Development motor Development motor ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
speed change speed setting 0: Level0
1: Level1
2: Level2
3: Level3
2-974-001 Drum Cooling Fan Drum Cooling Fan Forced ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Setting Operation 0: OFF
1: ON
2-975-001 Main Intake ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
FanDriveCtrl 0: OFF
1: ON
2-976-001 Dev. Cooling Fan 1/2 Development Cooling ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-2

or
CTL
Setting Fan1, 2 Forced Operation 0: OFF
1: ON
2-977-001 Main Exhaust Fan ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
Drive Setting 0: Normal
1: ON
2: Option Connection
Check
2-978-001 Fan Extension Time Extension Time Setting ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1min]
Setting
2-980-001 PaperIntervalTransCur.OnTiming ENG* [80 to 500 / 170 /
10msec]
2-986-001 Refresh Mode Interval ENG [0 to 25 / 0 / 1Kmai]
2-986-002 Refresh Mode Level ENG [0 to 4 / 2 / 1]
0: Vsp=0.8
1: Vsp=1.0
2: Vsp=1.2
3: Vsp=1.5
4: Vsp=1.8
2-986-003 Refresh Mode Repetitions ENG [1 to 3 / 2 / 1]
2-986-004 Refresh Mode Execution Mode ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
2-998-001 MemoryClear Exec Latest ENG* [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF /
Date 0x00000001 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-3
Mode Tables
Appendices
2.3.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)
Engine SP
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
CTL Max/Init./Step]
3-001-001 ID Sensor Initial Setting ID Sensor PWM Setting ENG* [0 to 255 / 70 / 1-]
3-001-002 ID Sensor Initial Setting ID Sensor Initialization ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0-]
3-103-001 ID Sensor Output Vsg ENG [0 to 5 / 4.08 /
Display 0.01V]
3-103-002 ID Sensor Output Vsp ENG [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
Display
3-103-003 ID Sensor Output Vpdp ENG [0 to 5 / 4.08 /
Display 0.01V]
3-800-001 Waste Toner Full Condition ENG* [0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
Detection
3-800-002 Waste Toner Full Page Count After ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Detection Replacement 1sheet]
3-800-003 Waste Toner Full Threshold : Page Count ENG* [300 to 1000 / 400 /
Detection 1 10k]
3-800-004 Waste Toner Full Threshold : Page Count ENG* [500 to 1500 / 800 /
Detection 2 10k]
3-800-005 Waste Toner Full Release date : Near-full ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Detection 1
Detection 2
Detection 3
3-800-008 Waste Toner Full Pg Count History:Latest ENG* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Detection 1 1sheet]
Detection 2 1sheet]
Detection 3 1sheet]
3-800-011 Waste Toner Full Confirmed date : New ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Detection bottle 1
Detection bottle 2

Engine SP Tables-3

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Detection bottle 3
3-901-001 Auto Process Control On/OffSet ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1-]
0: OFF
1: ON
3-902-001 Drum Condition Display Auto Process Control ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1-]
On/Off
3-902-002 Drum Condition Display Vd ENG* [100 to 970 / 800 /
1-]
3-902-003 Drum Condition Display Vh ENG* [100 to 500 / 300 /
3-]
3-902-004 Drum Condition Display Vg ENG* [0 to 0xFFFF / 0 /
1-]
3-902-005 Drum Condition Display LD Level ENG* [-127 to 127 / 0 / 3-]
3-902-006 Drum Condition Display ID Sensor Pattern ENG* [0 to 0xFFFF / 0 /
Potential 1-]
3-902-007 Drum Condition Display Vql ENG* [0 to 0xFFFF / 0 /
1-]
3-902-008 Drum Condition Display Vl ENG* [-32768 to 32767 / 0
/ 1-]
3-902-009 Drum Condition Display LD Level(LowSpeed) ENG* [-127 to 127 / 0 / 3-]
3-902-010 Drum Condition Display LD Level(MiddleSpeed) ENG* [-127 to 127 / 0 / 3-]
3-903-001 Drum Rotate Time (0:OFF, 1:ON) ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
ExtensionMode 0: OFF
1: ON
3-903-002 Drum Rotate Time Drum Rotation Time ENG* [120 to 600 / 240 /
ExtensionMode 1sec]
3-903-003 Drum Rotate Time Interval ENG* [30 to 360 / 120 /
ExtensionMode 1min]
3-903-004 Drum Rotate Time Pattern Count ENG* [50 to 100 / 100 /
ExtensionMode 1set]
3-903-005 Drum Rotate Time Start Time ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
ExtensionMode
3-904-001 Warm Up Short Mode Action Level ENG* [0 to 4 / * / 1-]
0: Level0
1: Level1
2: Level2

Engine SP Tables-3

CTL Max/Init./Step]
3: Level3
Mode Tables
Appendices
4: Level4
Engine SP
*IM 7000: 0
*IM 8000: 0
*IM 9000: 4
3-905-001 exclusion time(Level2) Interval Setting ENG* [0 to 24 / 2 / 1hour]
3-930-001 Total Bias Current Change Control On/Off ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1-]
Set 0: OFF
1: ON
3-930-002 Total Bias Current Change Control ENG* [0 to 500 / 180 / 1V]
Threshold
3-930-003 Total Bias Current Average |VG|-|VD| ENG* [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1V]
3-940-001 |VG|-|VD| History Latest 1 ENG* [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1V]
3-990-001 Engine Process Adjust ENG [-32768 to 32767 / 0
1 / 1]
3-990-002 Engine Process Adjust ENG* [-32768 to 32767 / 0
2 / 1]
3 / 1]
4 / 1]
3-990-005 Toner Supply Execution Count Value Setting ENG* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
Count

Engine SP Tables-4
2.4.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to
or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4-008-00 Sub Scan Magnification Adj ENG [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
1 *
4-010-00 Sub Scan Registration Adj ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
1 * 0.1mm]
4-011-00 Main Scan Reg ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 /
1 * 0.1mm]
4-012-00 Set Scale Mask Book:Sub LEdge ENG [0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1mm]
1
4-012-00 Set Scale Mask Book:Sub TEdge ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
2
4-012-00 Set Scale Mask Book:Main:LEdge ENG [0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1mm]
3
4-012-00 Set Scale Mask Book:Main:TEdge ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
4
4-012-00 Set Scale Mask ADF: Leading Edge ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
5 *
4-012-00 Set Scale Mask ADF: Right ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
7 *
4-012-00 Set Scale Mask ADF: left ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
8 *
4-013-00 Scanner Free run Book mode :Lamp Off ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1
4-013-00 Scanner Free run Book mode :Lamp On ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2
4-020-00 Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1
4-020-00 Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl ENG [0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
2
4-020-00 Dust Check Dust Reject:Lvl ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
3
4-020-01 DF Dust Check Dust Detect ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
1 Level:Rear
Engine SP
4-020-01 DF Dust Check Correction Level:Rear ENG [0 to 8 / 4 / 1]
2
4-201-00 LoCPP edge level:K 600dpi 2bit edge1 ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1]
1 *
2 *
3 *
4 *
4-201-01 LoCPP edge off/on:K 1200dpi 1bit edge12 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1 *
4-201-01 LoCPP edge off/on:K 1200dpi 1bit edge345 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2 *
4-301-00 Operation Check APS Sensor ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
1
4-303-00 Min Size for APS ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1 * 0: No Original
1: A5-Lengthwise
4-305-00 8K/16K Detection ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
1 * 0: Normal
Detection
1: A4-Sideways
LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways
A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K
4-308-00 Scan Size Detection Detection ON/OFF ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
1 * 0: OFF
1: ON
2: APS
4-311-00 Detection:Start Position Detection:Start ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
1 Position * 0: 20mm
1: 30mm
2: 130mm

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4-312-00 Scan Size Detect:Setting Original Density ENG [0 to 255 / 28 /
1 Thresh:S1 * 1digit]
4-312-00 Scan Size Detect:Setting Detection Time ENG [10 to 20 / 10 /
4 * 10msec]
4-312-00 Scan Size Detect:Setting Detection:Delay Time ENG [0 to 200 / 10 /
5 * 10msec]
4-312-00 Scan Size Detect:Setting LED PWM Duty ENG [0 to 100 / 15 / 1]
6 *
4-313-00 Scan Size Detect Value S1:R:LEDOFF ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 1digit]
4-313-00 Scan Size Detect Value S1:G:LEDOFF ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 1digit]
4-313-00 Scan Size Detect Value S1:B:LEDOFF ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
3 1digit]
4 1digit]
5 1digit]
6 1digit]
7 1digit]
8 1digit]
9 1digit]
4-313-01 Scan Size Detect Value S1:R:LEDON:AREA1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
0 1digit]
4-313-01 Scan Size Detect Value S1:G:LEDON:AREA1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 1digit]
4-313-01 Scan Size Detect Value S1:B:LEDON:AREA1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 1digit]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
3 1digit]
4 1digit]
5 1digit]
6 1digit]
7 1digit]
8 1digit]
9 1digit]
0 1digit]
1 1digit]
2 1digit]
3 1digit]
4 1digit]
5 1digit]
6 1digit]
7 1digit]
8 1digit]
9 1digit]
0 1digit]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1 1digit]
2 1digit]
3 1digit]
4 1digit]
5 1digit]
6 1digit]
4-400-00 Org Edge Mask Book:Sub LEdge ENG [0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1mm]
1
4-400-00 Org Edge Mask Book:Sub:TEdge ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
2
4-400-00 Org Edge Mask Book:Main:LEdge ENG [0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1mm]
3
4-400-00 Org Edge Mask Book:Main:Tedge ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
4
4-400-00 Org Edge Mask ADF: Leading Edge ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
5 *
4-400-00 Org Edge Mask ADF: Right ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
7 *
4-400-00 Org Edge Mask ADF: left ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1mm]
8 *
4-417-00 IPU Test Pattern Test Pattern ENG [0 to 14 / 0 / 1]
1 0: Scanned image
1: Gradation main
scan A
2: Patch 16C
3: K Patch 256C
4: C Patch 256C
5: M Patch 256C
6: Y Patch 256C
7: Slant grid

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
pattern A
Engine SP
8: Slant grid
pattern B
9: Slant grid
pattern C
10: Slant grid
pattern D
11:
Scanned+Slant
Grid A
12:
Scanned+Slant
Grid B
13:
Scanned+Slant
Grid C
14:
Scanned+Slant
Grid D
4-417-00 IPU Test Pattern Test Pattern 2 ENG [0 to 8 / 0 / 1]
2 0: Scanned image
1: 5C
Checkered1:A3/A
4 LEF
2: 5C
Checkered2:A4
SEF
3:
Halftone1:A3/A4
LEF
4: Halftone2:A4
SEF
5: 7C Belt1:A4
LEF
6: 7C Belt2:A4
SEF

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7: 7C Belt3:A3
8: Gray
Checkered
4-429-00 Select Copy Data Security Copying ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
1
4-429-00 Select Copy Data Security Scanning ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
2
4-429-00 Select Copy Data Security Fax Operation ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
3
4-460-00 Digital AE Low Limit Value ENG [0 to 1023 / 364 /
1 1]
4-460-00 Digital AE Background level ENG [512 to 1535 / 932
2 / 1]
4-540-05 Print Coverage RY Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
7 Option:Scan
4-540-05 Print Coverage RY Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
8 1]
4-540-05 Print Coverage RY Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
9 1]
4-540-06 Print Coverage RY Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
0 1]
4-540-06 Print Coverage YR Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
1 Option:Scan
4-540-06 Print Coverage YR Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
2 1]
4-540-06 Print Coverage YR Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
3 1]
4-540-06 Print Coverage YR Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
4 1]
4-540-06 Print Coverage YG Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
5 Option:Scan
4-540-06 Print Coverage YG Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
6 1]
4-540-06 Print Coverage YG Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
7 1]
4-540-06 Print Coverage YG Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
8 1]
Engine SP
4-540-06 Print Coverage GY Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
9 Option:Scan
4-540-07 Print Coverage GY Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
0 1]
4-540-07 Print Coverage GY Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
1 1]
4-540-07 Print Coverage GY Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
2 1]
4-540-07 Print Coverage GC Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
3 Option:Scan
4-540-07 Print Coverage GC Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
4 1]
4-540-07 Print Coverage GC Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
5 1]
4-540-07 Print Coverage GC Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
6 1]
4-540-07 Print Coverage CG Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
7 Option:Scan
4-540-07 Print Coverage CG Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
8 1]
4-540-07 Print Coverage CG Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
9 1]
4-540-08 Print Coverage CG Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
0 1]
4-540-08 Print Coverage CB Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
1 Option:Scan
4-540-08 Print Coverage CB Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
2 1]
4-540-08 Print Coverage CB Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
3 1]
4-540-08 Print Coverage CB Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
4 1]
4-540-08 Print Coverage BC Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
5 Option:Scan
4-540-08 Print Coverage BC Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
6 1]
4-540-08 Print Coverage BC Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
7 1]
4-540-08 Print Coverage BC Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
8 1]
4-540-08 Print Coverage BM Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
9 Option:Scan
4-540-09 Print Coverage BM Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
0 1]
4-540-09 Print Coverage BM Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
1 1]
4-540-09 Print Coverage BM Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
2 1]
4-540-09 Print Coverage MB Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
3 Option:Scan
4-540-09 Print Coverage MB Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
4 1]
4-540-09 Print Coverage MB Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
5 1]
4-540-09 Print Coverage MB Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
6 1]
4-540-09 Print Coverage MR Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
7 Option:Scan
4-540-09 Print Coverage MR Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
8 1]
4-540-09 Print Coverage MR Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
9 1]
4-540-10 Print Coverage MR Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
0 1]
4-540-10 Print Coverage RM Phase: ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
1 Option:Scan
4-540-10 Print Coverage RM Phase: R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
2 1]
4-540-10 Print Coverage RM Phase: G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
3 1]
4-540-10 Print Coverage RM Phase: B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
4 1]
Engine SP
4-540-10 Print Coverage WHITE: Option:Scan ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
5
4-540-10 Print Coverage WHITE:R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
6 1]
4-540-10 Print Coverage WHITE:G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
7 1]
4-540-10 Print Coverage WHITE:B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
8 1]
4-540-10 Print Coverage BLACK: Option:Scan ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
9
4-540-11 Print Coverage BLACK:R:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
0 1]
4-540-111 Print Coverage BLACK:G:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
1]
4-540-11 Print Coverage BLACK:B:Scan ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 /
2 1]
4-550-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Print MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-550-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Print Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-550-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Print Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-550-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Print Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-550-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Print Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-551-00 Scan Apli:Txt MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-551-00 Scan Apli:Txt Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-551-00 Scan Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-551-00 Scan Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-551-00 Scan Apli:Txt Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-552-00 Scan Apli:Txt Dropout MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-552-00 Scan Apli:Txt Dropout Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-552-00 Scan Apli:Txt Dropout Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-552-00 Scan Apli:Txt Dropout Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-552-00 Scan Apli:Txt Dropout Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-553-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-553-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-553-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-553-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-553-00 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-554-00 Scan Apli:Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-554-00 Scan Apli:Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-554-00 Scan Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-554-00 Scan Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-554-00 Scan Apli:Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-565-00 Scan Apli:GrayScale MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-565-00 Scan Apli:GrayScale Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-565-00 Scan Apli:GrayScale Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
7
Engine SP
4-565-00 Scan Apli:GrayScale Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-565-00 Scan Apli:GrayScale Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-570-00 Scan Apli:Col Txt/Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-570-00 Scan Apli:Col Txt/Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-570-00 Scan Apli:Col Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-570-00 Scan Apli:Col Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-570-00 Scan Apli:Col Txt/Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-571-00 Scan Apli:Col Gloss Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-571-00 Scan Apli:Col Gloss Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-571-00 Scan Apli:Col Gloss Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-571-00 Scan Apli:Col Gloss Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-571-00 Scan Apli:Col Gloss Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-572-00 Scan Apli:AutoCol MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-572-00 Scan Apli:AutoCol Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-572-00 Scan Apli:AutoCol Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-572-00 Scan Apli:AutoCol Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-572-00 Scan Apli:AutoCol Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-573-00 Scan Apli:Shiny Materials MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-573-00 Scan Apli:Shiny Materials Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-573-00 Scan Apli:Shiny Materials Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-573-00 Scan Apli:Shiny Materials Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-573-00 Scan Apli:Shiny Materials Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-580-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-580-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-580-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-580-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-580-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-580-01 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Texture Erase: 0 ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0
4-581-00 Fax Apli:Txt MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-581-00 Fax Apli:Txt Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-581-00 Fax Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-581-00 Fax Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-581-00 Fax Apli:Txt Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-582-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-582-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-582-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
7
Engine SP
4-582-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-582-00 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-582-01 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Texture Erase: 0 ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0
4-583-00 Fax Apli:Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-583-00 Fax Apli:Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-583-00 Fax Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-583-00 Fax Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-583-00 Fax Apli:Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-583-01 Fax Apli:Photo Texture Erase: 0 ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0
4-584-00 Fax Apli:Original 1 MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-584-00 Fax Apli:Original 1 Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-584-00 Fax Apli:Original 1 Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-584-00 Fax Apli:Original 1 Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
8
4-584-00 Fax Apli:Original 1 Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 1-7 (Weak-Strong)
4-585-00 Fax Apli:Original 2 MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1]
5 (Weak-Strong)
4-585-00 Fax Apli:Original 2 Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1]
6 (Weak-Strong)
4-585-00 Fax Apli:Original 2 Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]
7
4-585-00 Fax Apli:Original 2 Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
8
4-585-00 Fax Apli:Original 2 Independent Dot ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
9 Erase (0)/ 1-7 (Strong)
4-600-00 SBU Version Display SBU_ID ENG [0x0000 to
1 0xFFFF / 0 / 1]
4-605-00 Abnormal Analysis Operation HP Detection Enable ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1
4-605-00 Abnormal Analysis Operation HP Detection Disable ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2
4-609-00 Gray Balance Set: R Book Scan ENG [-384 to 255 / -100
1 * / 1digit]
4-609-00 Gray Balance Set: R DF Scan ENG [-384 to 255 / -100
2 * / 1digit]
4-610-00 Gray Balance Set: G Book Scan ENG [-384 to 255 / -100
1 * / 1digit]
4-610-00 Gray Balance Set: G DF Scan ENG [-384 to 255 / -100
2 * / 1digit]
4-611-00 Gray Balance Set: B Book Scan ENG [-384 to 255 / -100
1 * / 1digit]
4-611-00 Gray Balance Set: B DF Scan ENG [-384 to 255 / -100
2 * / 1digit]
4-645-00 Abnormal Error Flag Md ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
1
4-645-00 Abnormal Error Flag Power System ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
2
4-645-00 Abnormal Error Flag Image ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
3
4-646-00 Scan Adjust Error White level ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
1 *
4-646-00 Scan Adjust Error Black level ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
2 *
4-647-00 Scanner Hard Error ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
1
4-688-00 Scan Image Density 1-pass DF ENG [80 to 120 / 103 /
2 Adjustment * 1%]
4-699-00 SBU Test Pattern Change ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
1
Engine SP
4-712-00 CIS GB Adj. Value: R ENG [0 to 2048 / 881 /
1 * 1digit]
4-713-00 CIS GB Adj. Value: G ENG [0 to 2048 / 876 /
1 * 1digit]
4-714-00 CIS GB Adj. Value: B ENG [0 to 2048 / 872 /
1 * 1digit]
4-721-00 ADF Process Adjustment Auto Adjustment ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
1
4-721-00 ADF Process Adjustment Ripple Amplitude ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
2 Measurement
4-730-00 FROM Main Factory Setting Execution ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
2
4-730-00 FROM Main Factory Setting Execution Flag ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
3 *
4-730-00 FROM Data Update FROM Data Update ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
4
4-735-00 CISForeignObjectDetectJudge Judgment 2 ENG [0 to 1023 / 1023 /
1 2 Thresh_Area0_Max_ * 1digit]
R
G
B
4 2 Thresh_Area0_Min_R * 1digit]
5 2 Thresh_Area0_Min_G * 1digit]
6 2 Thresh_Area0_Min_B * 1digit]
R

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
G
B
R
G
B
4-736-00 CISForeignObjectDetectJudge Ripple Amplitude ENG [0 to 1023 / 24 /
1 1 Judgment 1 Thresh_R * 1digit]
2 1 Judgment 1 Thresh_G * 1digit]
3 1 Judgment 1 Thresh_B * 1digit]
4-746-00 CIS GB Adj Error Flag ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
1
4-747-00 CIS Hard Error Flag ENG [0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
1

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
4-748-00 CIS Dust Detection ENG [0 to 63 / 0 / 1]
Engine SP
1
4-785-00 CIS White Level Peak Target Lower Limit ENG [0 to 1023 / 600 /
1 * 1digit]
4-785-00 CIS White Level Peak Target Upper Limit ENG [0 to 1023 / 774 /
2 * 1digit]
4-786-00 CIS Black Level Peak Target Lower Limit ENG [0 to 255 / 43 /
1 * 1digit]
4-786-00 CIS Black Level Peak Target Upper Limit ENG [0 to 255 / 60 /
2 * 1digit]
4-796-00 Low Density Color Correction Front Side ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
1 * 0: OFF
1: WEAK
2: MEDIUM
3: STRONG
4-796-00 Low Density Color Correction Rear Side ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
2 * 0: OFF
1: WEAK
2: MEDIUM
3: STRONG
4-797-00 Rear Side: Digital AE Low Limit Setting ENG [0 to 1023 / 364 /
1 1]
4-797-00 Rear Side: Digital AE Background Erase ENG [512 to 1535 / 932
2 Level / 1]
4-799-00 CIS TEST Pattern Pattern Setting ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
1
4-799-00 CIS TEST Pattern Output Level Setting ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 /
2 1digit]
4-803-00 Home Position Adj Value ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
1 * 0.1mm]
4-805-00 Criteria of Carriage Position Adjustiment ENG [0 to 12.5 / 2 /
1 * 0.1mm]
4-805-00 Criteria of Carriage Position Scan ENG [0 to 12.5 / 2 /
2 0.1mm]
4-853-00 Partial LED ON ON/OFF(Scan) ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1 *

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4-853-00 Partial LED ON ON/OFF(Size ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
2 Detection) *
4-902-00 Disp ACC Data ditect patch(up)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
1
4-903-00 Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: Text ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
1
4-903-00 Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
2 Generation Copy
4-907-00 Gamma Correction Stamp Entry ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
1
4-918-00 Man Gamma Adj ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
9
4-937-00 ACS:Preprocessing selection ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1
4-938-00 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Sub LEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1]
5
4-938-00 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Sub TEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1]
6
4-938-00 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Main LEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1]
7
4-938-00 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Main TEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1]
8
4-939-00 ACS:Color Range ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 / 1]
1
4-992-00 Background Detection Sensitivity Selection ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1]
1
4-992-00 Background Detection Range Selection ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1]
2
4-993-00 High Light Correction Sensitivity Selection ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1]
1
4-993-00 High Light Correction Range Selection ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1]
2
4-993-00 High Light Correction Background Level ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
3 Default Setting
4-994-00 Adj Txt/Photo Recog Level High Compression ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
1 PDF

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
4-996-00 White Paper Detection Level strength(fax) ENG [0 to 6 / 3 / 1]
Engine SP
1
4-997-00 White Paper count conditions conditions 1 ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1]
1
2
3
4-997-00 White Paper count conditions conditions 4 ENG [0 to 16777215 /
4 16777215 / 1]
4-998-00 White Paper Binary thresh strength 0:up side ENG [0 to 255 / 20 / 1]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4-998-00 White Paper Binary thresh strength 0:down side ENG [0 to 255 / 20 / 1]
8
9
0
1
2
3

Engine SP Tables-4

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4

Engine SP Tables-5
Mode Tables
Appendices
2.5.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
Engine SP
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-126-001 Set F-size ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
Document 0: 8 1/2 x13
1: 8 1/4 x13
2: 8 x13
3: 8 1/2 x13 1/2
5-129-001 F Paper Size ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
Selection 0: 8x13
1: 8 1/2x13
2: 8 1/4x13
5-131-001 Paper Size Type Paper Size Destination ENG* [0 to 3 / * / 1]
Selection Selection 0: JP
1: NA
2: EU
3: CH
*NA: 1
*EU/AP/CHN/TWN/KOR:
2
5-131-002 Paper Size Type Bypass Automatic Size ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Selection Detection ON/OFF 0: OFF
1: ON
5-135-001 Oficio Priority ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Detection Set
5-179-001 By-pass 0: OFF 1: ON ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
PaperSize 0: OFF
ErrorDisplay 1: ON
5-186-001 RK4 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-768-001 Remaining toner MIB Output ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
detection type 0: 0%-100% (10%
increments)
1: 0%-100% (1%
increments)
5-801-002 Memory Clear Engine ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-5

CTL
5-802-001 Printer Free Run ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
5-805-001 Dehumid Heater Dehumid Heater ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
Setting Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
3: Calendar
Setting Setting:Jan. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Feb. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Mar. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Apr. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:May. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Jun. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Jul. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON

Engine SP Tables-5

CTL
Setting Setting:Aug. 0: OFF
Mode Tables
Appendices
1: ON
Engine SP
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Sep. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Oct. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Nov. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
Setting Setting:Dec. 0: OFF
1: ON
2: Continuous ON
5-811-002 Machine Serial Display ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
5-811-004 Machine Serial Set BICU ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
5-811-021 Machine Serial Update Latest ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-811-022 Machine Serial Update Previous ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-811-023 Machine Serial Previous ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
5-811-024 Machine Serial Update Latest:BICU ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-811-025 Machine Serial Update Pre:BICU ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-811-026 Machine Serial Previous:BICU ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
5-894-001 External Charge Switch Charge Mode ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
Unit Setting
5-899-001 PM Double Count ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
5-900-001 Engine Log Pattern ENG* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
Upload
5-900-002 Engine Log Trigger ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
Upload
5-900-003 Engine Log Execute ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-5

CTL
Upload
5-915-001 Mechanical (1:Detect) ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Counter Detection
5-952-001 Fact Adjust Mode ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-957-001 Front/Right Door ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Config. SW
5-959-001 Paper Size Tray 1 ENG* [0 to 11 / * / 1]
0: A4
1: 8 1/2x11
2: A3
3: B4
4: A4R
5: 11x17
6: 8 1/2x14 R
7: 8 1/2x11 R
8: B5
9: B5R
10: 8 1/2x13 2/5R
11: Custom Size
*NA: 1
*EU/AP/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
5-959-005 Paper Size LCT ENG* [0 to 12 / * / 1]
0: A4
1: 8 1/2x11
2: B5
3: A4R
4: 8 1/2x11 R
5: B4R
6: 8 1/2x14 R
7: B5R
8: A5
9: A5R
10: A6R
11: Postcard
12: A3R
*NA: 1

Engine SP Tables-5

CTL
*EU/AP/CHN/TWN/KOR:
Mode Tables
Appendices
0
Engine SP
5-959-006 Paper Size Cover Sheet ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-6
2.6.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6-006-00 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Front ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
1 * 0.1mm]
6-006-00 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist: Rear ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
2 * 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
0 Front * 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist (1-Pass): ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1 Rear * 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment 1st Buckle (1-Pass) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
2 * 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment 2nd Buckle (1-Pass) ENG [-2 to 3 / 0 /
3 * 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (1-Pass): ENG [-5 to 5 / -3 /
4 Front * 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (1-Pass): ENG [-5 to 5 / -2.5
5 Rear * / 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:Front: ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
7 with Feeding Unit * 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:Rear: ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
8 with Feeding Unit * 0.1mm]
6-006-01 ADF Adjustment L-Edge ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
9 Regist(1-Pass):Front:with * 0.1mm]
FeedingUnit
6-006-02 ADF Adjustment L-Edge ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
0 Regist(1-Pass):Rear:with * 0.1mm]
Feeding Unit
6-006-02 ADF Adjustment T-Edge ENG [-5 to 5 / -3 /
1 Erase(1-Pass):Front:with * 0.1mm]
FeedingUnit
6-006-02 ADF Adjustment T-Edge ENG [-5 to 5 / -2.5
2 Erase(1-Pass):Rear:with * / 0.1mm]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Feeding Unit
Engine SP
6-006-02 ADF Adjustment 1st Buckle(1-Pass):with ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
3 Feeding Unit * 0.1mm]
6-009-00 ADF FreeRun Free Run Simplex Motion ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
6-009-00 ADF FreeRun Free Run Duplex Motion ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
2 1]
6-009-00 ADF FreeRun Free Run Stamp Motion ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 1]
6-010-00 Stamp Position Adj. ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1 * 0.1mm]
6-016-00 Original Size Detect Setting ENG [0 to 255 / 0
1 * / 1]
6-017-00 DF Magnification Adj. ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1 * 0.1%]
6-020-00 Skew Correction Moving Setting ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 * 1]
6-040-00 ADF Double Feed Detect Setup Double Feed Detect Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 (1-Pass) * 1]
6-040-00 ADF Double Feed Detect Setup Detect enable (1-Pass) ENG [0 to 1 / 1 /
2 * 1]
6-040-00 ADF Double Feed Detect Setup Detect decide (1-Pass) ENG [10 to 15 /
3 * 10 / 1Times]
6-040-00 ADF Double Feed Detect Setup Detect number (1-Pass) ENG [1 to 8 / 2 /
6 * 1Times]
6-040-00 ADF Double Feed Detect Setup Detect Test (1-Pass) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
8 1]
6-040-00 ADF Double Feed Detect Setup Detect Adjust Result ENG [0 to 255 / 0
9 (1-Pass) / 1]
6-050-00 DF Feeding Unit detect ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 * 1]
6-099-00 Sel. ShiftTray Full:2K/3K FIN Sel. ShiftTray Full ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Prioritize
stack
1: Prioritize

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
capacity
6-100-00 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
1 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-100-00 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K NA: 3-Hole ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
2 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-100-00 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K Europe: 4-Hole ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
3 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-100-00 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K NEU: 4-Hole ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
4 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-100-00 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K NA: 2-Hole ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
5 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-101-00 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
1 FIN 0.4mm]
6-101-00 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K NA: 3-Hole ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
2 FIN 0.4mm]
6-101-00 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K Europe: 4-Hole ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
3 FIN 0.4mm]
6-101-00 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K NEU: 4-Hole ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
4 FIN 0.4mm]
6-101-00 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K NA: 2-Hole ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
5 FIN 0.4mm]
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K A3 SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K B4 SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
2 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K A4 SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
3 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K A4 LEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
4 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K B5 SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
5 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K B5 LEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
6 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K A5 LEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
7 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K DLT SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
8 FIN 0.2mm]
Engine SP
6-102-00 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K LG SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
9 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K Oficio SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
0 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K LT SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K LT LEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
2 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K HLT LEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
3 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K 12"x18" ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
4 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K 8K SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
5 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K 16K SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
6 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K 16K LEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
7 FIN 0.2mm]
6-102-01 SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K Other ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
8 FIN 0.2mm]
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
2 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 1]
0: With

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
4 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
5 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
6 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
7 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
8 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-00 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
9 1]
0: With

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Buckle Adj
Engine SP
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
0 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
2 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
4 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
5 1]
0: With

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
6 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
7 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-103-01 SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
8 1]
0: With
Buckle Adj
1: Without
Buckle Adj
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
1 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
2 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
3 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
4 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
5 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
6 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
7 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
8 0 / 0.5mm]
Engine SP
6-104-00 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
9 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-01 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
0 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-01 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
1 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-01 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
2 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-01 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
3 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-01 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
4 0 / 0.5mm]
6-104-01 ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
5 0 / 0.5mm]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
1 / 5deg]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
2 / 5deg]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
3 / 5deg]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
4 / 5deg]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
5 / 5deg]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
6 / 5deg]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
7 / 5deg]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
8 / 5deg]
6-105-00 ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
9 / 5deg]
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Jogging

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
2 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
4 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
5 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
6 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
7 1]
0: Jogging

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
On
Engine SP
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
8 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-00 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
9 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-01 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
0 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-01 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-01 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
2 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-01 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 1]
0: Jogging

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-01 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
4 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-106-01 Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN Other ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
5 1]
0: Jogging
On
1: Jogging
Off
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K A3 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
1 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K B4 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
2 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K A4 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
3 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K A4 LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
4 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K B5 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
5 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K B5 LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
6 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K DLT SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
7 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K LG SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
8 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-00 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K Oficio SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
9 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-01 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K LT SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
0 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-01 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K LT LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
1 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
Engine SP
6-107-01 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K 8K SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
2 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-01 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K 16K SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
3 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-01 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K 16K LEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
4 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-107-01 JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K Other ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
5 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K A3 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
1 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K B4 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
2 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K A4 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
3 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K B5 SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
4 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K DLT SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
5 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K LG SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
6 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K Oficio SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
7 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K LT SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
8 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-00 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K 12"x18" ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
9 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-01 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K 8K SEF ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
0 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-108-01 JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K Other ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 /
1 FIN 0 / 0.5mm]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
1 1times]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
2 1times]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
3 1times]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
4 1times]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
5 1times]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
6 1times]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
7 1times]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
8 1times]
6-109-00 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
9 1times]
6-109-01 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
0 1times]
6-109-01 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
1 1times]
6-109-01 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
2 1times]
6-109-01 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
3 1times]
6-109-01 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
4 1times]
6-109-01 CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
5 1times]
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K A3 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
1 FIN 1times]
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K B4 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
2 FIN 1times]
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K A4 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
3 FIN 1times]
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K B5 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
4 FIN 1times]
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K DLT SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
5 FIN 1times]
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K LG SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
6 FIN 1times]
Engine SP
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K Oficio SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
7 FIN 1times]
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K LT SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
8 FIN 1times]
6-110-00 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K 12"x18" ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
9 FIN 1times]
6-110-01 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K 8K SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
0 FIN 1times]
6-110-01 BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K Other ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
1 FIN 1times]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
1 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
2 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
3 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
4 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
5 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
6 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
7 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
8 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-00 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
9 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-01 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
0 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-01 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
1 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-01 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
2 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-01 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
3 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-01 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
4 0 / 0.5mm]
6-111-01 Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN Other ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 /
5 0 / 0.5mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K A3 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
1 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K B4 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
2 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K A4 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
3 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K B5 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
4 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K DLT SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
5 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K LG SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K Oficio SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
7 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K LT SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
8 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-00 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K 12"x18" ENG [-1.8 to 1.8 /
9 FIN 0 / 0.2mm]
6-112-01 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K 8K SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
0 FIN 0.2mm]
6-112-01 BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K Other ENG [-1.8 to 1.8 /
1 FIN 0 / 0.2mm]
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
5 0.2mm]
Engine SP
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-113-00 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"*18" ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-113-01 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8-Kai SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-113-01 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-113-01 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
3 0.2mm]
4 0.2mm]
6-113-01 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-113-01 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
7 0.2mm]
8 0.2mm]
6-113-01 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
0 0.2mm]
1 0.2mm]
2 0.2mm]
6-113-02 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
3 0.2mm]
4 0.2mm]
5 0.2mm]
6 0.2mm]
6-113-02 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-113-02 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
9 0.2mm]
0 0.2mm]
6-113-03 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-113-03 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
3 0.2mm]
4 0.2mm]
6-113-03 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-113-03 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
7 0.2mm]
8 0.2mm]
6-113-03 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-113-04 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
1 0.2mm]
Engine SP
2 0.2mm]
6-113-04 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-113-04 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18"(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
5 0.2mm]
6 0.2mm]
6-113-04 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18"(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-113-04 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
9 0.2mm]
0 0.2mm]
6-113-05 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-113-05 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other(1-5) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
3 0.2mm]
4 0.2mm]
6-113-05 BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other(16-over) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
2 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
3 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
4 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
5 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
6 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
7 1]
Engine SP
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
8 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-00 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
9 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-01 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
0 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-114-01 Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN Other ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Std Speed
1: Mid
Speed
2: Low
Speed
6-115-00 Finisher Free Run: 2K/3K FIN Free Run 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
2 1]
3 1]
4 1]
6-115-00 Finisher Free Run: 2K/3K FIN Service Parts Psition Shift ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
5 Free Run 1]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI A3 SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
1 N 1sheets]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI B4 SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
2 N 1sheets]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI A4 SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
3 N 1sheets]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI A4 LEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
4 N 1sheets]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI B5 SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
5 N 1sheets]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI B5 LEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
6 N 1sheets]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI DLT SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
7 N 1sheets]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI LG SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
8 N 1sheets]
6-116-00 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI Oficio SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
9 N 1sheets]
6-116-01 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI LT SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
0 N 1sheets]
6-116-01 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI LT LEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
1 N 1sheets]
6-116-01 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI 8K SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
2 N 1sheets]
6-116-01 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI 16K SEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
3 N 1sheets]
6-116-01 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI 16K LEF ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
4 N 1sheets]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
6-116-01 CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFI Other ENG [-1 to 0 / 0 /
Engine SP
5 N 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF A3 SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
1 IN 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF B4 SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
2 IN 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF A4 SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
3 IN 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF B5 SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
4 IN 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF DLT SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
5 IN 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF LG SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
6 IN 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF Oficio SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
7 IN 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF LT SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
8 IN 1sheets]
6-117-00 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF 12"x18" ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
9 IN 1sheets]
6-117-01 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF 8K SEF ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
0 IN 1sheets]
6-117-01 BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KF Other ENG [-2 to 0 / 0 /
1 IN 1sheets]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
1 / 2mm]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
2 / 2mm]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
3 / 2mm]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 LEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
4 / 2mm]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
5 / 2mm]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 LEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
6 / 2mm]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
7 / 2mm]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
8 / 2mm]
6-118-00 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
9 / 2mm]
6-118-01 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
0 / 2mm]
6-118-01 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LT LEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
1 / 2mm]
6-118-01 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
2 / 2mm]
6-118-01 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K SEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
3 / 2mm]
6-118-01 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K LEF ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
4 / 2mm]
6-118-01 CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [-16 to 16 / 0
5 / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI A3 SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
1 N / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI B4 SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
2 N / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI A4 SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
3 N / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI B5 SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
4 N / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI DLT SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
5 N / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI LG SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
6 N / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI Oficio SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
7 N / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI LT SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
8 N / 2mm]
6-119-00 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI 12"x18" ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
9 N / 2mm]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
6-119-01 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI 8K SEF ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
Engine SP
0 N / 2mm]
6-119-01 BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFI Other ENG [-30 to 30 / 0
1 N / 2mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 A3 SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
1 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 B4 SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
2 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 A4 SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
3 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 A4 LEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
4 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 B5 SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
5 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 B5 LEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
6 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 DLT SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
7 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 LG SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
8 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-00 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 Oficio SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
9 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-01 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 LT SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
0 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-01 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 LT LEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
1 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-01 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 8K SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
2 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-01 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 16K SEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
3 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-01 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 16K LEF ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
4 KFIN 10mm]
6-120-01 CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3 Other ENG [0 to 30 / 0 /
5 KFIN 10mm]
6-121-00 NV Adjustment Data Rewrite Jogger Position Factory Adj. ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
1 0.5mm]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6-121-00 NV Adjustment Data Rewrite Folding Position Factory Adj. ENG [-1.4 to 1.4 /
2 0 / 0.2mm]
6-121-00 NV Adj. Data Mod. Staple Stacking Fence Pos. ENG [-1 to 1 / 0 /
3 Factory Adj. 0.2mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 A3 SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 B4 SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
2 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 A4 SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
3 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 B5 SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
4 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 DLT SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
5 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 LG SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
6 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 Oficio SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
7 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 LT SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
8 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-00 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 12"x18" ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
9 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-01 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 8K SEF ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
0 KFIN 1mm]
6-122-01 BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3 Other ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1 KFIN 1mm]
6-125-00 Use Paper Guide(Big Size) All Size ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Paper
Guide Use
1: Paper
Guide Not
Use
6-126-00 Use Paper Guide(Small Size) All Size ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Paper

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Guide Use
Engine SP
1: Paper
Guide Not
Use
6-127-00 Paper Guide PossAdj:2K/3K All Size ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
1 FIN / 1mm]
6-129-00 Paper Guide AceptAdj:2K/3K All Size ENG [-50 to 50 / 0
1 FIN / 5msec]
6-130-00 Paper Guide RetraAdj:2K/3K All Size ENG [-50 to 50 / 0
1 FIN / 5mm]
6-133-00 AdjRegistrationControl3KFIN(10 ENG [0 to 1 / 1 /
1 1]
0: Corr: OFF
1: Corr: ON
6-134-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(10 A4 LEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0 0.5mm]
6-134-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(10 A5 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0 0.5mm]
6-134-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(10 A5 LEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0 0.5mm]
6-134-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(10 B5 LEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0 0.5mm]
6-134-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(10 LT LEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0 0.5mm]
6-134-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(10 HLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0 0.5mm]
6-134-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(10 HLT LEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0 0.5mm]
6-134-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(10 Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0 0.5mm]
6-135-00 SkewCorrAdj(Z-Fold)3KFIN(100Bi ENG [0 to 2 / 2 /
1 1]
0: Corr: OFF
1: Corr: ON
2: Rev Corr:
ON

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6-136-00 AdjRegistrationBuckle3KFIN(100 ENG [-9 to 0 / 0 /
1 0.5mm]
6-137-00 SkewCorrReverseAmtAdj(Z-F)3KFI ENG [-3 to 0 / 0 /
1 0.5mm]
6-138-00 PuncCISBinarizedThreshold3K Initial Adjustment ENG [0 to 1 / 1 /
1 FIN 1]
0: Not
Adjust
1: Adjust
6-138-00 PuncCISBinarizedThreshold3K COMPTH Duty ENG [0 to 100 /
2 FIN 40 / 1%]
6-138-00 PuncCISBinarizedThreshold3K Adjustment Forced ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 FIN Execution 0]
6-139-00 PuncPoAdjMainscan3KFIN(100 2-Hole: DOM/EU ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1 Bind 0.5mm]
6-139-00 PuncPoAdjMainscan3KFIN(100 3-Hole: NA ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
2 Bind 0.5mm]
6-139-00 PuncPoAdjMainscan3KFIN(100 4-Hole: EU ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
3 Bind 0.5mm]
6-139-00 PuncPoAdjMainscan3KFIN(100 4-Hole: SCAN ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
4 Bind 0.5mm]
6-139-00 PuncPoAdjMainscan3KFIN(100 2-Hole: NA ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
5 Bind 0.5mm]
6-140-00 PuncPoAdjSubscan3KFIN(100 2-Hole: DOM/EU ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
1 Bind) 0 / 0.5mm]
6-140-00 PuncPoAdjSubscan3KFIN(100 3-Hole: NA ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
2 Bind) 0 / 0.5mm]
6-140-00 PuncPoAdjSubscan3KFIN(100 4-Hole: EU ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
3 Bind) 0 / 0.5mm]
6-140-00 PuncPoAdjSubscan3KFIN(100 5-Hole: SCAN ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
4 Bind) 0 / 0.5mm]
6-140-00 PuncPoAdjSubscan3KFIN(100 2-Hole: NA ENG [-7.5 to 7.5 /
5 Bind) 0 / 0.5mm]
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K A3 SEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
1 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K B4 SEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
2 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
Engine SP
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K A4 SEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
3 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K A4 LEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
4 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K B5 SEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
5 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K B5 LEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
6 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K DLT SEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
7 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K LG SEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
8 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-00 Jogger Pos Adj:3K LT SEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
9 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-01 Jogger Pos Adj:3K LT LEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
0 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-01 Jogger Pos Adj:3K Oficio SEF ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
1 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-141-01 Jogger Pos Adj:3K Other ENG [-2 to 1.5 / 0
2 FIN(100Bind) / 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) A3 SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
1 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) B4 SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
2 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) A4 SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
3 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) A4 LEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
4 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) B5 SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
5 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) B5 LEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
6 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) DLT SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
7 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) LG SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
8 0.5mm]
6-142-00 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) LT SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
9 0.5mm]
6-142-01 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) LT LEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
0 0.5mm]
6-142-01 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) Oficio SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
1 0.5mm]
6-142-01 Staple Pos Adj: 3KFIN(100Bind) Other ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
2 0.5mm]
6-143-00 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K A3 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
1 FIN(100Bind) 0.1mm]
6-143-00 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K B4 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-00 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K A4 LEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-00 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K B5 SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-00 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K B5 LEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-00 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K A5 LEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-00 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K DLT SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-01 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K LG SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-01 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K LT SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-01 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K LT LEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-01 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K HLT SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-01 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K HLT LEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
6-143-01 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K Oficio SEF ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-143-01 ShiftJogPosAdj:3K Other ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
6-144-00 MxPrstkShAdj:3KFIN(100Bind) A4 LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: 2 Sheets
1: None
6-144-00 MxPrstkShAdj:3KFIN(100Bind) B5 LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
2 1]
0: 2 Sheets
1: None
6-144-00 MxPrstkShAdj:3KFIN(100Bind) LT LEF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 1]
0: 2 Sheets
1: None
6-144-00 MxPrstkShAdj:3KFIN(100Bind) Other ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
4 1]
0: 2 Sheets
1: None
6-145-00 LE A4 LEF ENG [-5 to 10 / 0 /
1 StopPressAdj:3KFIN(100Bind) 0.1mm]
6-145-00 LE B5 LEF ENG [-5 to 2 / 0 /
6-145-00 LE LT LEF ENG [-5 to 10 / 0 /
6-145-00 LE Other ENG [-5 to 10 / 0 /
6-146-00 StapleJogTimes: 3KFIN(100Bind) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1times]
0: Default
1: +1 Time
6-162-00 Free Run Print Post ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
6-252-00 Free Run Slide Sort Tray ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
1 1]
6-253-00 Sel. Tray Full:Slide Sort Tray Use Tray Full Aux ENG [0 to 1 / 1 /
1 Sensor(Large Paper) 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
2 Sensor(Middle Paper) 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
3 Sensor(Small Paper) 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 1st Fold: A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 1st Fold: B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 1st Fold: A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 1st Fold: DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 1st Fold: LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 1st Fold: LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 1st Fold: 12"x18" ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 1st Fold: Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-301-00 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 2nd Fold: A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-301-01 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 2nd Fold: B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-301-01 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 2nd Fold: A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-301-01 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 2nd Fold: DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
2 0.2mm]
Engine SP
6-301-01 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 2nd Fold: LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-301-01 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 2nd Fold: LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-301-01 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 2nd Fold: 12"x18" ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-301-01 Fine Adjust Z-Fold 1 2nd Fold: Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-312-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-312-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-312-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-312-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-312-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-312-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-312-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld 12"*18" ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-312-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld 8-kai ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-312-01 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-312-02 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 1st Fld Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-313-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-313-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-313-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-313-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
4 0.2mm]
6-313-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-313-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-313-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld 12"*18" ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-313-00 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld 8-kai ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-313-01 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-313-02 FM1 Z-Fld: Fine Adj 2nd Fld Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld B4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 12"*18" (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 8-kai (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-314-00 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld B5 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-314-01 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 13"*19" (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-314-01 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Custom (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
0 0.2mm]
Engine SP
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A3 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld B4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld DLT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LG SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 12"*18" (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 8-kai (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-314-02 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld B5 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-314-03 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 13"*19" (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-314-03 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Oficio SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-314-04 FM2 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Custom (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st B4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st 12"*18" (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st 8-kai (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-315-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st B5 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-315-01 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-315-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st Custom (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-315-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st B4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-315-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-315-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-315-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-315-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st B5 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-315-03 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-315-04 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st Custom (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd B4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
6 0.2mm]
Engine SP
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd 12"*18" (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd 8-kai (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-316-00 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd B5 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-316-01 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-316-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd Custom (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-316-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd B4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-316-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-316-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-316-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-316-02 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd B5 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-3 to 3 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-316-03 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-316-04 FM3 Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd Custom (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st B4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st 12"*18" (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st 8-kai (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-317-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st B5 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-317-01 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Custom (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A3 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st B4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st DLT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st 12"*18" (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st 8-kai (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-317-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st B5 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-317-03 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-317-04 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Custom (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd B4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
2 0.2mm]
Engine SP
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd 12"*18" (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd 8-kai (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-318-00 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd B5 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-318-01 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Custom (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A3 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd B4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd DLT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [0 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd 12"*18" (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd 8-kai (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-318-02 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd B5 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
9 0.2mm]
6-318-03 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-318-04 FM4 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Custom (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st 12"*18" ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st 8-kai ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-319-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st B5 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-319-01 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-319-02 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
5 0.2mm]
Engine SP
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd 12"*18" ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd 8-kai ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-320-00 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd B5 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-320-01 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-320-02 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-321-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-321-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-321-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-321-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-321-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-321-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-321-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st 8-kai ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-321-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st B5 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-321-01 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-321-02 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-322-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-322-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
2 0.2mm]
6-322-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-322-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-322-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-322-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-322-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd 8-kai ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-322-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd B5 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-322-01 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-322-02 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd 12"*18" ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd 8-kai ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-323-00 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd B5 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-323-01 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
9 0.2mm]
Engine SP
6-323-02 FM6 4ths 2 Flap:Fine Adj 3rd Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.2mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust A3 SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
1 0.5mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust B4 SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
2 0.5mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust A4 SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
3 0.5mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust DLT SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
4 0.5mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust LG SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
5 0.5mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust LT SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
6 0.5mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust 12"*18" ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
7 0.5mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust 8-Kai ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
8 0.5mm]
6-324-00 Jogger Fence Position Adjust B5 SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
9 0.5mm]
6-324-01 Jogger Fence Position Adjust Oficio SEF ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
9 0.5mm]
6-324-02 Jogger Fence Position Adjust Other ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 /
0 0.5mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
1 1mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
2 1mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
3 1mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
4 1mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust LG SEF ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
5 1mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust LT SEF ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6 1mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust 12"*18" ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
7 1mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust 8-Kai ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
8 1mm]
6-325-00 Registration Buckle Adjust B5 SEF ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
9 1mm]
6-325-01 Registration Buckle Adjust Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
9 1mm]
6-325-02 Registration Buckle Adjust Other ENG [-4 to 2 / 0 /
0 1mm]
6-326-00 Reg Buckle Adjust Select ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: With
Buckle
Control
1: Without
Buckle
Control
6-327-00 Top Tray Full Set: Enable ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Full
Detection
ON
1: Full
Detection
OFF
6-328-00 TopTray Full Set:Limit Output ENG [0 to 250 / 0
1 / 1sheets]
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.1mm]
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
4 0.1mm]
Engine SP
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.1mm]
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.1mm]
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st 8K SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.1mm]
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.1mm]
6-351-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.1mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.2mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.2mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.2mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.2mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.2mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.2mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd 8K SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.2mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.2mm]
6-352-00 Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.2mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld B4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.1mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld DLT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
4 0.1mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LG SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.1mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LT SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.1mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 12x18inch ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.1mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 8K SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.1mm]
6-354-00 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld B5 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.1mm]
0 0.1mm]
6-354-01 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Oficio SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-354-01 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 12.6x19.2inch ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.1mm]
6-354-01 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 12.6x18.5inch ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-354-01 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 13x19.2inch ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.1mm]
5 0.1mm]
6-354-01 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld SRA3 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.1mm]
6-354-01 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld SRA4 SEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.1mm]
6-354-01 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A4 LEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.1mm]
6-354-01 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LT LEF ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.1mm]
6-354-02 Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Other ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-357-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-357-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st B4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
2 0.1mm]
Engine SP
6-357-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-357-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.1mm]
6-357-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.1mm]
6-357-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.1mm]
6-357-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.1mm]
6-357-01 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st Other (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.1mm]
6-357-01 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-357-01 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-357-01 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 1st Other (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.1mm]
6-358-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-358-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd B4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.1mm]
6-358-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-358-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.1mm]
6-358-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.1mm]
6-358-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.1mm]
6-358-00 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.1mm]
6-358-01 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd Other (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
0 0.1mm]
6-358-01 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
1 0.1mm]
6-358-01 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-358-01 Equal 3rds:FineAdj 2nd Other (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
5 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st Long-Size (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st Other (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.1mm]
6-361-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.1mm]
6-361-01 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-361-01 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 1st Other (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd A3 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd A4 SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
2 0.1mm]
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd DLT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd LG SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
4 0.1mm]
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd LT SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
5 0.1mm]
Engine SP
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd Oficio SEF (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
6 0.1mm]
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd Long-Size (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
7 0.1mm]
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd Other (Single Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
8 0.1mm]
6-362-00 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd A4 SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
9 0.1mm]
6-362-01 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd LT SEF (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
1 0.1mm]
6-362-01 3rds 1 Flap:FineAdj 2nd Other (Multi Sheet) ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 /
3 0.1mm]
6-363-00 Registration Buckle Select Before Regist. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Mode1
1: Mode2
6-363-00 Registration Buckle Select Paper Stack ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
2 1]
0: Mode1
1: Mode2
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust A3 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
1 0.1mm]
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust B4 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
2 0.1mm]
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust A4 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
3 0.1mm]
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust DLT SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
4 0.1mm]
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust LG SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
5 0.1mm]
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust LT SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
6 0.1mm]
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust 12x18inch (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
7 0.1mm]
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust 8K SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
8 0.1mm]
6-364-00 Registration Buckle Adjust B5 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
9 0.1mm]
0 0.1mm]
6-364-01 Registration Buckle Adjust Oficio SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
1 0.1mm]
6-364-01 Registration Buckle Adjust 12.6x19.2inch (Before ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
2 Regist.) 0.1mm]
6-364-01 Registration Buckle Adjust 12.6x18.5inch (Before ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
3 Regist.) 0.1mm]
6-364-01 Registration Buckle Adjust 13x19.2inch (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
4 0.1mm]
5 0.1mm]
6-364-01 Registration Buckle Adjust SRA3 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
6 0.1mm]
6-364-01 Registration Buckle Adjust SRA4 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
7 0.1mm]
6-364-01 Registration Buckle Adjust A4 LEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
8 0.1mm]
6-364-01 Registration Buckle Adjust LT LEF (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
9 0.1mm]
6-364-02 Registration Buckle Adjust Long-Size (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
1 0.1mm]
6-364-02 Registration Buckle Adjust Other (Before Regist.) ENG [-5 to 20 / 5 /
2 0.1mm]
6-364-02 Registration Buckle Adjust A4 SEF (Paper Stack) ENG [-5 to 20 / 6 /
3 0.1mm]
6-364-02 Registration Buckle Adjust LT SEF (Paper Stack) ENG [-5 to 20 / 6 /
5 0.1mm]
6-364-02 Registration Buckle Adjust Other (Paper Stack) ENG [-5 to 20 / 6 /
7 0.1mm]
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust A3 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
1 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust B4 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
2 1.2 / 0.1mm]
Engine SP
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust A4 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
3 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust DLT SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
4 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust LG SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
5 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust LT SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
6 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust 12x18inch (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
7 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust 8K SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
8 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-00 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust B5 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
9 1.2 / 0.1mm]
0 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-01 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust Oficio SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
1 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-01 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust 12.6x19.2inch (Before ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
2 Regist.) 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-01 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust 12.6x18.5inch (Before ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
3 Regist.) 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-01 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust 13x19.2inch (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
4 1.2 / 0.1mm]
5 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-01 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust SRA3 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
6 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-01 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust SRA4 SEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
7 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-01 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust A4 LEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
8 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-01 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust LT LEF (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
9 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-02 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust Long-Size (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
1 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-02 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust Other (Before Regist.) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
2 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-02 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust A4 SEF (Paper Stack) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
3 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-02 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust LT SEF (Paper Stack) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
5 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-365-02 Registration Buckle Rev Adjust Other (Paper Stack) ENG [0.5 to 3.4 /
7 1.2 / 0.1mm]
6-366-00 Set Number of Creasing Single Sheet ENG [0 to 4 / 1 /
1 1times]
6-366-00 Set Number of Creasing Multi Sheet ENG [0 to 6 / 3 /
2 1times]
6-369-00 Set Fast Speed ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
1 1]
0: Mode1
1: Mode2
2: Mode3
6-370-00 Equal 1/2 Exit Speed Single Sheet (297.0mm or ENG [-200 to 200
1 less) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-370-00 Equal 1/2 Exit Speed Single Sheet (297.1mm or ENG [-200 to 200
2 more) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-371-00 Equal 3rds Exit Speed Single Sheet (297.0mm or ENG [-200 to 200
1 less) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-371-00 Equal 3rds Exit Speed Single Sheet (297.1mm or ENG [-200 to 200
2 more) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-371-00 Equal 3rds Exit Speed Multi Sheet (297.0mm or ENG [-200 to 200
3 less) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-371-00 Equal 3rds Exit Speed Multi Sheet (297.1mm or ENG [-200 to 200
4 more) /0/
10mm/sec]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
6-372-00 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Single Sheet (297.0mm or ENG [-200 to 200
Engine SP
1 less) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-372-00 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Single Sheet (297.1mm or ENG [-200 to 200
2 more) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-372-00 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Multi Sheet (297.0mm or ENG [-200 to 200
3 less) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-372-00 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Multi Sheet (297.1mm or ENG [-200 to 200
4 more) /0/
10mm/sec]
6-374-00 Top Tray Full Set: Enable ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: ON
1: OFF
6-376-00 NV Adj. Data Mod. 1st Fold Pos. Factory ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
1 Setting / 0.1mm]
6-376-00 NV Adj. Data Mod. 2nd Fold Pos. Factory ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
2 Setting / 0.1mm]
6-376-00 NV Adj. Data Mod. Crease Pos. Factory Setting ENG [-10 to 10 / 0
3 / 0.1mm]
6-379-00 Special Order Folder Special Order 1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0
1 / 1]
2 / 1]
3 / 1]
4 / 1]
5 / 1]
6 / 1]
7 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
6-450-00 PrioritySizeSetting:1-TrayCIT A3SEF/12"*18" ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]
0: A3 SEF
1: 12 * 18
SEF
6-450-00 PrioritySizeSetting:1-TrayCIT EU,CHN,Taiwan:8.5"*13" ENG [0 to 3 / 0 /
2 1]
0: 8 1/2 * 13
SEF
1: 8 * 13
SEF
2: 8 1/4 * 13
SEF
3: 8 1/2 * 13
1/2 SEF
6-450-00 PrioritySizeSetting:1-TrayCIT NA:8.5"*14" ENG [0 to 2 / 0 /
3 1]
0: 8 1/2 * 14
SEF
1: 8 1/2 * 13
SEF
2: 8 1/2 * 13
1/2 SEF
6-450-00 PrioritySizeSetting:1-TrayCIT NA:11"*8.5" ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
4 1]
0: LT LEF
1: 10 1/2 * 7
1/4 LEF
6-450-00 PrioritySizeSetting:1-TrayCIT NA:8.5"*11" ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
5 1]
0: LT SEF
1: 8 * 10
SEF
6-450-00 PrioritySizeSetting:1-TrayCIT EU,CHN,Taiwan:8K ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
6 1]
0: 8-Kai SEF

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
Mode Tables
Appendices
1: DLT SEF
Engine SP
6-450-00 PrioritySizeSetting:1-TrayCIT EU,CHN,Taiwan:16KS(267* ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
7 195) 1]
0: 16-Kai
SEF
1: LT SEF
6-450-00 PrioritySizeSetting:1-TrayCIT EU,CHN,Taiwan:16KL(195* ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
8 267) 1]
0: 16-Kai
LEF
1: LT LEF
6-795-00 Staple N.E. Setting 3KFIN(100B Near-End Threshold ENG [0 to 5000 /
1 800 /
100staples]
6-795-00 Staple N.E. Setting 3KFIN(100B Staple Remaining Setting ENG [0 to 5000 /
2 0 / 1staples]
6-795-00 Staple N.E. Setting 3KFIN(100B Anomaly Near-End Disp. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 Clear Setting 1]
0: ON
1: OFF
6-796-00 Staple N.E. Setting:2K/3K FIN Near-End ENG [0 to 5000 /
1 Threshold(CrnrStplr) 800 /
100staples]
6-796-00 Staple N.E. Setting:2K/3K FIN Staple Remaining ENG [0 to 5000 /
2 Setting(CrnrStplr) 0 / 1staples]
3 Threshold(BookStplr Front) 300 /
100staples]
4 Setting(BookStplr Front) 0 / 1staples]
5 Threshold(BookStplr Rear) 300 /
100staples]
6 Setting(BookStplr Rear) 0 / 1staples]
6-796-00 Staple N.E. Setting:2K/3K FIN Anomaly Near-End Disp. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-6

or Max/Init./Ste
CTL p]
7 Clear Setting 1]
0: ON
1: OFF
6-799-01 MachineSerial Display ADF ENG [0 to 255 / 0
0 / 1]
6-799-02 MachineSerial Display LCT ENG [0 to 255 / 0
0 / 1]
6-799-03 MachineSerial Display Finisher ENG [0 to 255 / 0
0 / 1]
6-799-04 MachineSerial Display Folder ENG [0 to 255 / 0
0 / 1]
6-801-00 1-pass Stamp Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 * 1]
6-900-00 ADF Bottom Plate Setting ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 * 1]
6-901-00 ADF Operation Setting ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1]

Engine SP Tables-7
Mode Tables
Appendices
2.7.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
Engine SP
CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-001-001 Main Motor ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 0]
Operation Time
7-621-001 Display PM Count Developer ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-002 Display PM Count Hot Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-003 Display PM Count Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-004 Display PM Count Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-005 Display PM Count Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-006 Display PM Count Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-007 Display PM Count Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-008 Display PM Count Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-009 Display PM Count Web Roll ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-010 Display PM Count Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-011 Display PM Count Development Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-012 Display PM Count Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-013 Display PM Count Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-014 Display PM Count Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-015 Display PM Count Grid Plate ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-621-016 Display PM Count Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-017 Display PM Count Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-018 Display PM Count Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-019 Display PM Count Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-020 Display PM Count Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Blade 1]
7-621-022 Display PM Count ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-023 Display PM Count ADF Feed Belt ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-024 Display PM Count ADF Separation Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-025 Display PM Count Feed Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-026 Display PM Count Pick-up Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-027 Display PM Count Separation Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
1]
7-621-037 Display PM Count Feed Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-038 Display PM Count Pick-up Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-039 Display PM Count Separation Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-040 Display PM Count Feed Belt Cover feeder ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-041 Display PM Count Pick-up Roller Cover feeder ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-042 Display PM Count Separation Roller Cover ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
feeder 1]
7-621-044 Display PM Count Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
unit:Thermistor(Back) 1]
7-621-045 Display PM Count Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
unit:Thermistor(Center) 1]
7-621-046 Display PM Count Dust Filter(Main) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-047 Display PM Count Main Tray(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
7-621-051 Display PM Count Paper Tray1(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
1]
1]
1]
7-621-059 Display PM Count LCT(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-060 Display PM Count LCT(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-063 Display PM Count Interposer(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-064 Display PM Count Interposer(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-066 Display PM Count UFP Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-621-067 Display PM Count sheet:paper crimp:folder ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
7-622-001 Clear PM Count Developer ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-002 Clear PM Count Hot Roller ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-003 Clear PM Count Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-004 Clear PM Count Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-005 Clear PM Count Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-006 Clear PM Count Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-007 Clear PM Count Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-008 Clear PM Count Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-009 Clear PM Count Web Roll ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-010 Clear PM Count Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-011 Clear PM Count Development Filter ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-012 Clear PM Count Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-013 Clear PM Count Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-014 Clear PM Count Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-015 Clear PM Count Grid Plate ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-016 Clear PM Count Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-622-017 Clear PM Count Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
7-622-018 Clear PM Count Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-019 Clear PM Count Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-020 Clear PM Count Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Blade
7-622-022 Clear PM Count ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-023 Clear PM Count ADF Feed Belt ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-024 Clear PM Count ADF Separation Roller ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-025 Clear PM Count Feed Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-026 Clear PM Count Pick-up Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-027 Clear PM Count Separation Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-037 Clear PM Count Feed Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-038 Clear PM Count Pick-up Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-039 Clear PM Count Separation Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-040 Clear PM Count Feed Belt Cover feeder ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-041 Clear PM Count Pick-up Roller Cover feeder ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-042 Clear PM Count Separation Roller Cover ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
feeder
7-622-044 Clear PM Count Fusing ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
unit:Thermistor(Back)
7-622-045 Clear PM Count Fusing ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
unit:Thermistor(Center)
7-622-046 Clear PM Count Dust Filter(Main) ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-047 Clear PM Count Main Tray(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-622-051 Clear PM Count Paper Tray1(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-059 Clear PM Count LCT(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-060 Clear PM Count LCT(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-063 Clear PM Count Interposer(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-064 Clear PM Count Interposer(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-066 Clear PM Count UFP Filter ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-622-067 Clear PM Count sheet:paper crimp:folder ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-623-001 Unit PM Target Developer ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]
7-623-002 Unit PM Target Hot Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-003 Unit PM Target Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-004 Unit PM Target Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-005 Unit PM Target Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-006 Unit PM Target Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-007 Unit PM Target Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-008 Unit PM Target Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-009 Unit PM Target Web Roll ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-010 Unit PM Target Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-011 Unit PM Target Development Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-623-012 Unit PM Target Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 99999999 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
600000 / 1]
Engine SP
7-623-013 Unit PM Target Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]
7-623-014 Unit PM Target Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]
7-623-015 Unit PM Target Grid Plate ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]
7-623-016 Unit PM Target Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]
7-623-017 Unit PM Target Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]
7-623-018 Unit PM Target Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]
7-623-019 Unit PM Target Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 99999999 /
600000 / 1]
7-623-020 Unit PM Target Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 99999999 /
Blade 600000 / 1]
7-623-022 Unit PM Target ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 /
120000 / 1]
7-623-023 Unit PM Target ADF Feed Belt ENG [0 to 99999999 /
120000 / 1]
7-623-024 Unit PM Target ADF Separation Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 /
120000 / 1]
7-623-025 Unit PM Target Feed Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
7-623-026 Unit PM Target Pick-up Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
7-623-027 Unit PM Target Separation Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
7-623-037 Unit PM Target Feed Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
7-623-038 Unit PM Target Pick-up Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
7-623-039 Unit PM Target Separation Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
7-623-040 Unit PM Target Feed Belt Cover feeder ENG [0 to 99999999 /
60000 / 1]
7-623-041 Unit PM Target Pick-up Roller Cover feeder ENG [0 to 99999999 /
60000 / 1]
7-623-042 Unit PM Target Separation Roller Cover ENG [0 to 99999999 /
feeder 60000 / 1]
7-623-044 Unit PM Target Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 /
unit:Thermistor(Back) 450000 / 1]
7-623-045 Unit PM Target Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 /
unit:Thermistor(Center) 450000 / 1]
7-623-046 Unit PM Target Dust Filter(Main) ENG [0 to 99999999 /
450000 / 1]
7-623-047 Unit PM Target Main Tray(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 /
300000 / 1]
300000 / 1]
300000 / 1]
300000 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-623-051 Unit PM Target Paper Tray1(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1000000 / 1]
Engine SP
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
1000000 / 1]
7-623-059 Unit PM Target LCT(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
7-623-060 Unit PM Target LCT(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
7-623-063 Unit PM Target Interposer(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 /
60000 / 1]
7-623-064 Unit PM Target Interposer(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 99999999 /
60000 / 1]
7-623-066 Unit PM Target UFP Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1200000 / 1]
7-623-067 Unit PM Target sheet:paper crimp:folder ENG [0 to 99999999 /
1000000 / 1]
7-625-001 Pg Count Developer ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-002 Pg Count Hot Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-003 Pg Count Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-004 Pg Count Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-005 Pg Count Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-006 Pg Count Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-007 Pg Count Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-008 Pg Count Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-009 Pg Count Web Roll ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-010 Pg Count Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-011 Pg Count Development Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-012 Pg Count Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-013 Pg Count Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-014 Pg Count Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-015 Pg Count Grid Plate ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-016 Pg Count Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-017 Pg Count Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-018 Pg Count Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-019 Pg Count Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-020 Pg Count Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 Blade 1]
7-625-022 Pg Count ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-023 Pg Count ADF Feed Belt ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-024 Pg Count ADF Separation Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-625-025 Pg Count Feed Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
History:Latest 1 1]
Engine SP
7-625-026 Pg Count Pick-up Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-027 Pg Count Separation Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-037 Pg Count Feed Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-038 Pg Count Pick-up Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-039 Pg Count Separation Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-040 Pg Count Feed Belt Cover feeder ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-041 Pg Count Pick-up Roller Cover feeder ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-042 Pg Count Separation Roller Cover ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 feeder 1]
7-625-044 Pg Count Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
History:Latest 1 unit:Thermistor(Back) 1]
History:Latest 1 unit:Thermistor(Center) 1]
7-625-046 Pg Count Dust Filter(Main) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-047 Pg Count Main Tray(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-051 Pg Count Paper Tray1(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-059 Pg Count LCT(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]
7-625-063 Pg Count Interposer(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 1 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-625-066 Pg Count UFP Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
History:Latest 1 1]
Engine SP
7-625-067 Pg Count sheet:paper crimp:folder ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
History:Latest 1 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Mode Tables
Appendices
History:Latest 2 1]
Engine SP
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 2 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Mode Tables
Appendices
History:Latest 3 1]
Engine SP
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Mode Tables
Appendices
History:Latest 3 1]
Engine SP
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
History:Latest 3 1]
7-628-001 Clear PM Counter Clear Exceeded Counts ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-628-002 Reset Reset All Counts ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
7-801-002 ROM No. Engine ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-005 ROM No. ADF ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-007 ROM No. Finisher ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-009 ROM No. Bank ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-010 ROM No. LCT ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-801-011 ROM No. Mail Box ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-020 ROM No. Cover Interposer ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-024 ROM No. Capacitor ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-025 ROM No. Holding Unit ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-102 Firmware Version Engine ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-105 Firmware Version ADF ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-107 Firmware Version Finisher ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-109 Firmware Version Bank ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-110 Firmware Version LCT ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-111 Firmware Version Mail Box ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-120 Firmware Version Cover Interposer ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-124 Firmware Version Capacitor ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-801-125 Firmware Version Holding Unit ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-834-001 Clear Pixel Last & Average ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Coverage Data
7-834-002 Clear Pixel Toner Bottles In Use ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Coverage Data
7-834-003 Clear Pixel Page Counts (2 Prev. Toner ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Coverage Data Bottles)
7-834-004 Clear Pixel Pixel Coverage Clear ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Coverage Data
7-834-255 Clear Pixel All Clear ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Coverage Data
7-852-001 DF Glass Dust Dust Detection Counter ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
Check
7-852-002 DF Glass Dust Dust Counter Clear Counter ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
Check
7-852-003 DF Glass Dust Dust Detection Counter: ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
Check Back
7-940-001 Drive Distance:End Developer ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 145900
*IM 8000: 137900
*IM 9000: 117800
7-940-002 Drive Distance:End Hot Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
*IM 8000: 171000
Mode Tables
Appendices
*IM 9000: 146800
Engine SP
7-940-003 Drive Distance:End Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-940-004 Drive Distance:End Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-940-005 Drive Distance:End Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-940-006 Drive Distance:End Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-940-007 Drive Distance:End Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-940-008 Drive Distance:End Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-940-009 Drive Distance:End Web Roll ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-940-010 Drive Distance:End Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 193100
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-940-011 Drive Distance:End Development Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 145900
*IM 8000: 137900
*IM 9000: 117800
7-940-012 Drive Distance:End Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 291900
*IM 8000: 275800
*IM 9000: 235600
7-940-013 Drive Distance:End Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 167400
*IM 8000: 160500
*IM 9000: 129400
7-940-014 Drive Distance:End Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 167400
*IM 8000: 160500
*IM 9000: 129400
7-940-015 Drive Distance:End Grid Plate ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 167400
*IM 8000: 160500
*IM 9000: 129400
7-940-016 Drive Distance:End Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 167400
*IM 8000: 160500
*IM 9000: 129400
7-940-017 Drive Distance:End Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
*IM 7000: 167400
Mode Tables
Appendices
*IM 8000: 160500
Engine SP
*IM 9000: 129400
7-940-018 Drive Distance:End Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 167400
*IM 8000: 160500
*IM 9000: 129400
7-940-019 Drive Distance:End Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value 1m]
*IM 7000: 334900
*IM 8000: 321000
*IM 9000: 258800
7-940-020 Drive Distance:End Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value Blade 1m]
*IM 7000: 334900
*IM 8000: 321000
*IM 9000: 258800
7-940-044 Drive Distance:End Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value unit:Thermistor(Back) 1m]
*IM 7000: 199300
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-940-045 Drive Distance:End Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 / * /
Std Value unit:Thermistor(Center) 1m]
*IM 7000: 199300
*IM 8000: 171000
*IM 9000: 146800
7-942-001 Drive Distance % Developer ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-002 Drive Distance % Hot Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-003 Drive Distance % Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-004 Drive Distance % Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-005 Drive Distance % Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Counter
7-942-006 Drive Distance % Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-007 Drive Distance % Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-008 Drive Distance % Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-009 Drive Distance % Web Roll ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-010 Drive Distance % Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-011 Drive Distance % Development Filter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-012 Drive Distance % Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-013 Drive Distance % Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-014 Drive Distance % Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-015 Drive Distance % Grid Plate ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-016 Drive Distance % Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-017 Drive Distance % Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-018 Drive Distance % Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-019 Drive Distance % Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter
7-942-020 Drive Distance % Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter Blade
7-942-044 Drive Distance % Fusing ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter unit:Thermistor(Back)
7-942-045 Drive Distance % Fusing ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Counter unit:Thermistor(Center)
7-944-001 Drive Distance Developer ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-944-002 Drive Distance Hot Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
Counter 1m]
Engine SP
7-944-003 Drive Distance Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-004 Drive Distance Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-005 Drive Distance Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-006 Drive Distance Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-007 Drive Distance Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-008 Drive Distance Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-009 Drive Distance Web Roll ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-010 Drive Distance Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-011 Drive Distance Development Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-012 Drive Distance Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-013 Drive Distance Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-014 Drive Distance Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-015 Drive Distance Grid Plate ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-016 Drive Distance Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-017 Drive Distance Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-018 Drive Distance Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-019 Drive Distance Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter 1m]
7-944-020 Drive Distance Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Counter Blade 1m]
7-944-044 Drive Distance Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter unit:Thermistor(Back) 1m]
7-944-045 Drive Distance Fusing ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Counter unit:Thermistor(Center) 1m]
7-954-001 Pg Counter(%) Developer ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-002 Pg Counter(%) Hot Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-003 Pg Counter(%) Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-004 Pg Counter(%) Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-005 Pg Counter(%) Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-006 Pg Counter(%) Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-007 Pg Counter(%) Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-008 Pg Counter(%) Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-009 Pg Counter(%) Web Roll ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-010 Pg Counter(%) Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-011 Pg Counter(%) Development Filter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-012 Pg Counter(%) Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-013 Pg Counter(%) Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-014 Pg Counter(%) Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-015 Pg Counter(%) Grid Plate ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-016 Pg Counter(%) Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-017 Pg Counter(%) Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-018 Pg Counter(%) Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-019 Pg Counter(%) Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-020 Pg Counter(%) Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Blade
7-954-022 Pg Counter(%) ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-023 Pg Counter(%) ADF Feed Belt ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-024 Pg Counter(%) ADF Separation Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-025 Pg Counter(%) Feed Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-026 Pg Counter(%) Pick-up Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-027 Pg Counter(%) Separation Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
7-954-037 Pg Counter(%) Feed Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-038 Pg Counter(%) Pick-up Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-039 Pg Counter(%) Separation Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-040 Pg Counter(%) Feed Belt Cover feeder ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-041 Pg Counter(%) Pick-up Roller Cover feeder ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-042 Pg Counter(%) Separation Roller Cover ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
feeder
7-954-044 Pg Counter(%) Fusing ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
unit:Thermistor(Back)
7-954-045 Pg Counter(%) Fusing ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
unit:Thermistor(Center)
7-954-046 Pg Counter(%) Dust Filter(Main) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-047 Pg Counter(%) Main Tray(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-051 Pg Counter(%) Paper Tray1(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-059 Pg Counter(%) LCT(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-060 Pg Counter(%) LCT(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-063 Pg Counter(%) Interposer(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-064 Pg Counter(%) Interposer(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-066 Pg Counter(%) UFP Filter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954-067 Pg Counter(%) sheet:paper crimp:folder ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-960-001 Estimated Usage Developer ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Rate
7-960-002 Estimated Usage Hot Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-003 Estimated Usage Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-004 Estimated Usage Hot Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-005 Estimated Usage Pressure Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-006 Estimated Usage Hot Roller Strippers ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-007 Estimated Usage Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-008 Estimated Usage Cleaning Roller Bearings ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-009 Estimated Usage Web Roll ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-010 Estimated Usage Web Cleaning Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-011 Estimated Usage Development Filter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-012 Estimated Usage Toner Recycling Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-013 Estimated Usage Pressure Release Filter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-014 Estimated Usage Charge Corona Wire ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-015 Estimated Usage Grid Plate ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-016 Estimated Usage Cleaning Pad ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-017 Estimated Usage Cleaning Blade ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-018 Estimated Usage Cleaning Brush ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-019 Estimated Usage Transfer Belt ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-960-020 Estimated Usage Transfer Belt Cleaning ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Rate Blade
Engine SP
7-960-022 Estimated Usage ADF Pick-up Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-023 Estimated Usage ADF Feed Belt ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-024 Estimated Usage ADF Separation Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-025 Estimated Usage Feed Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-026 Estimated Usage Pick-up Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-027 Estimated Usage Separation Roller-Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
7-960-037 Estimated Usage Feed Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-038 Estimated Usage Pick-up Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-039 Estimated Usage Separation Roller-LCT ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
Rate
7-960-040 Estimated Usage Feed Belt Cover feeder ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-041 Estimated Usage Pick-up Roller Cover feeder ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-042 Estimated Usage Separation Roller Cover ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate feeder
7-960-044 Estimated Usage Fusing ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate unit:Thermistor(Back)
7-960-045 Estimated Usage Fusing ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate unit:Thermistor(Center)
7-960-046 Estimated Usage Dust Filter(Main) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-047 Estimated Usage Main Tray(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
7-960-051 Estimated Usage Paper Tray1(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
7-960-059 Estimated Usage LCT(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Rate
Engine SP
7-960-060 Estimated Usage LCT(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-063 Estimated Usage Interposer(Custom 1) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-064 Estimated Usage Interposer(Custom 2) ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-066 Estimated Usage UFP Filter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-960-067 Estimated Usage sheet:paper crimp:folder ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
Rate
7-979-001 ENG Reset Log Data1 ENG* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00
/ 1]
7-979-002 ENG Reset Log Data2 ENG* [0x0000 to 0xFFFF /
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-7

CTL Max/Init./Step]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]
0x0000 / 1]

Input and Output Check
2.8 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK
Mode Tables
Appendices
2.8.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE
Engine SP
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Main Machine, LTC

5-803-001 IOB-VODKA1-GPIO3
Bit Description 1 0
0 PCB version detection 4 Combination 1 Combination 1
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 Front fence open sensor Open Closed
5 Front fence release sensor Closed Open
6 Back fence open sensor Open Closed
7 Back fence release sensor Closed Open
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -

Bit Description 1 0
6 Controller exhaust fan Locked
7 - - -
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 Tandem right tray set detection Not set Set
2 Tandem tray down sensor Down
3 Right tray paper sensor No paper Paper
4 Tray 1 paper height sensor 3 Detect Not detect
7 Tandem 1 near end sensor - -
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 Tandem left tray set detect Not set Set
2 Side fence HP sensor HP
3 Pressure sensor Pressed
4 Left tray paper end sensor No paper Paper
5 Tray type detect 3 trays 4 trays
6 Back fence open/close sensor Closed Open
7 Back fence HP sensor HP
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 CPM detection 90 cpm 65/75 cpm
2 3 trays/ 4 trays detection 3 trays 4 trays
3 Tray 2 paper size detection switch 5 Off On
Bit Description 1 0
0 Paper feed sensor 1 No paper Paper

Bit Description 1 0
4 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 No paper Paper
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
Bit Description 1 0
0 Paper end sensor 1 No paper Paper
4 Tray 1 paper height sensor 1 Paper No paper
Bit Description 1 0
0 Tray 1 paper height sensor 2 Paper Near end
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 - - -
2 - - -
Bit Description 1 0

Bit Description 1 0
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 PFU fan 4 Locked
Bit Description 1 0
0 PFU fan 1 Locked
1 PFU fan 2 Locked
2 - - -
3 PFU fan 3 Locked
4 Lift sensor 1 - Up
Bit Description 1 0
0 Key card Copy allowed
1 Hardware high temperature detection 2 Normal
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
Bit Description 1 0
0 Reserve fan Locked
1 Fusing exit sensor Paper No paper
2 Fusing unit set detection Not set Set
3 Key counter set detection 2 Set Not set
4 Duplex unit set detection Not set Set
5 - - -
6 - - -

Bit Description 1 0
7 - - -
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 Duplex entrance sensor No paper Paper
2 Inverter exit sensor No paper Paper
3 - - -
4 Jogger HP sensor Feeler No feeler
5 Transport sensors 1 No paper Paper
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 Key counter set detection Not set Set
5 Grid PP leak detection Normal
6 Charge PP leak detection Normal
7 Toner collection motor sensor Detect Not detect
Bit Description 1 0
0 Drum fan Locked
1 Development unit fan 2 Locked
2 Development unit fan 1 Locked
3 Main intake fan Locked
4 Main intake fan Locked
5 Main exhaust fan Locked
6 PCU fan Locked
7 Toner bottle fan Locked
Bit Description 1 0
0 DIP SW 8 Off On
1 DIP SW 7 Off On
2 DIP SW 6 Off On
3 DIP SW 5 Off On

Bit Description 1 0
4 DIP SW 4 Off On
5 DIP SW 3 Off On
6 DIP SW 2 Off On
7 DIP SW 1 Off On
5803 [Input Check]

5-803-019 LD0 Iop Monitor ENG [0 to 99.9 / 0 / 0.1mA]
5-803-023 Capacitor Port 1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
Bit Description 1 0
0 PCU fan 1 Locked
1 PCU fan 2 Locked
2 - - -
3 Used toner bottle set sensor Not set Set
4 Drum motor Rated rotation
5 - - -
6 Development motor Rated rotation
7 - - -
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 Exit unit entrance sensor No paper Paper
2 Paper exit sensor No paper Paper
3 Turn sensor Detect Not detect
4 Fusing inner cover fan Locked
5 Fusing pressure release sensor Pressure released
6 Exit unit set detection Not set Set
7 Web end sensor Web end
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 Development PP error detection Normal

Bit Description 1 0
2 Lever C1 open/close sensor Open Closed
3 CAPCNT: WAKEUP Sleep Boot
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
4 CAPCNT set detection Not set Set
5 65CPM unit set detection Not set Set
6 - - -
7 Used toner lock sensor Detect Not detect
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 AC drive board fan Locked
5 Used toner bottle full sensor Full Not full
6 Toner end sensor Toner No toner
7 Front door open/close detection Open Closed
Bit Description 1 0
0 Total counter set detection Set Not set
1 Reserved - -
2 Reserved - -
3 Reserved - -
4 - - -
5 Hardware high temperature detection 1 Normal
6 NC sensor high temperature detection Normal
7 - - -
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 - - -
2 - - -
3 Bypass paper end sensor No paper Paper
4 Duplex fan Locked
5 Guide open/close sensor Open Closed
6 Exit full sensor Full Not full
7 Bypass paper length sensor No paper Paper
5-803-032 IOB-VODKA2-EIMON1

Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 Relay sensor No paper Paper
5 - - -
6 Registration sensor No paper Paper
7 - - -
Bit Description 1 0
0 - - -
1 - - -
2 Fusing exit motor Rated rotation -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
5803 [Input Check]

5-803-034 IOB-VODKA2-GPIO15 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
5-803-050 LCT Port1
Bit Description 1 0
0 Paper feed motor Normal
1 - - -
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 - - -
7 - - -
5-803-051 LCT Port2
Bit Description 1 0
0 Paper supply cover open/close sensor Open Closed
1 Tray falling SW Off On
2 Paper detection Not detect Detect
3 Paper jam release open/close SW Open Closed

Bit Description 1 0
4 - - -
5 - - -
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
6 - - -
7 - - -
5-803-052 LCT Port3
Bit Description 1 0
0 Lower limit detection Lower limit
1 Paper end detection No paper Paper
2 Upper limit detection Upper limit
3 - - -
4 - - -
5 Paper feed sensor No paper Paper
6 - - -
7 - - -
5803 [Input Check]

5-803-200 HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-803-201 Platen ADF Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-803-202 Scanner fan lock signal ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
ADF
6011 [1-Pass ADF INPUT Check]
6-011-001 Original Length 1 (B5 Sensor) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-002 Original Length 2 (A4 Sensor) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-003 Original Length 3 (LG Sensor) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-004 Original Width 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-009 Original Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-010 Separation Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-011 Skew Correction ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-012 Scan Entrance Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-013 Registration Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-014 Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-015 Feed Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-011-016 Lift Up Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-011-018 Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-021 Bottom Plate HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-022 Bottom Plate Position Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-023 Original Length 4 (LT/A4 Tail Sensor) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-024 Double Feed Detect Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-011-025 Feeding Unit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2K/3K Finisher
6123 [INPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]
6-123-001 Entrance Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-002 Horizontal Transport Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-003 Switchback Transport Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-004 Proof Tray Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-005 Shift Tray Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-006 Booklet Stapler Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-007 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-008 Punch HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-009 Punch Move HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-010 S-to-S Registration Detection HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-011 Lower Junction Solenoid HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-012 Jogger HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-013 Positioning Roller HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-014 Feed-out HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-015 Stapler Moving HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-016 Booklet Stapler HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-017 Booklet Jogger HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-018 Booklet Jog Solenoid HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-019 Booklet Standard Fence HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-020 Booklet Stapler HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-022 Folder Blade Cam HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-023 Folder Blade HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-024 Shift Roller HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-028 Drag Roller Vibrating HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-029 LE Guide HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-030 TE Stack Plate HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-031 Staple Tray Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-032 ITB Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6123 [INPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]

6-123-033 Booklet Stapler Transport Paper Sn: Upper ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-034 Booklet Stapler Transport Paper Sn: Lower ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
6-123-035 Paper Height Sensor: Shift ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-036 Corner Stapler Paper Height Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-037 Corner Stapler Paper Height Sensor 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-038 Proof Tray Full Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-039 Booklet Stapler Full Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-040 Booklet Stapler Full Sensor 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-041 S-to-S Registration Detection Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-042 Punch RPS Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-043 Corner Stapler Leading Edge Detection Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-044 Corner Stapler Staple End Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-045 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Front ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-046 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Rear ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-047 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-052 Punch Chad Full Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-053 Punch Set Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-054 Shift Jogger Set Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-055 Booklet Stapler Set Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-056 Front Door SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-057 Dynamic Roller Open/Close Guide Plate Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-058 Tray Upper Limit SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-059 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Limit SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-060 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-061 Punch Selection DIPSW 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-065 Paper Guide HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-066 Shift Jogger HP Sensor: Front ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-067 Shift Jogger HP Sensor: Rear ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-068 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor: Upper ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-069 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor: Lower ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-071 TE Height Front Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-072 TE Height Rear Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Finisher 3KFIN (100Bind)

6147 [FIN INPUTCheck 3KFIN(100Bind)]
6-147-002 Proof Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-003 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-004 Staple Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-005 Tray Lower Limit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-006 Shift Tray Near Full Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-007 Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-008 Jogger HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-009 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-010 Stapler HP Front/Rear Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-011 Stapler HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-012 Staple Out Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-013 Staple Tray Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-014 Front Door Open Switch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-015 Punch Detection Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-016 Punch Blade HP Sensor1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-017 Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-018 Stapling Paper Height Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-019 Paper Detection Sensor: Shift ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-020 Jam Detection Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-021 Proof Full Detection Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-022 Stapler Rotation Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-023 Stapler Trimmings Hopper Full Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-024 Pre-Stack Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-025 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-026 Exit Guide Open Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-027 Stapler Rotation Sensor 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-028 Staple Ready Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-029 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-030 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Back) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-031 Positioning Roller HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-032 Return Drive HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-033 Stapling Paper Height Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-034 Shift Lower Limit Sensor (Large Paper) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-035 Punch Blade HP Sensor2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-036 Shift Jogger Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-147-037 Shift Jogger HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-147-038 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-039 Emergency Stop Switch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
6-147-040 Top Fence HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-041 Bottom Fence HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-042 LowerTray Full Sensor (Z-Folded Paper) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-043 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-044 Upper Tray Junction Gate HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-045 Staple Junction Gate HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-046 Pre-Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-047 Pre-Stack Sensor (Right) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-048 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Release HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-049 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-050 Staple Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-051 Punch Unit HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-052 Punch Unit HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-147-053 Punch Side-to-Side Regist Sn ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
Slide Sort Tray

6250 [INPUT Check Slide Sort Tray]
6-250-001 Transport Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-250-002 Shift Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-250-003 Lower Limit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-250-004 Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-250-005 Door Switch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-250-006 Tray Full Auxiliary Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Multi Folder
6309 [INPUT Check Multi Folder]
6-309-002 Entrance JG HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-005 Dynamic Roller HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-006 Registration Roller HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-007 Fold Plate HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-008 Jogger Fence HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-010 1st Stopper Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-011 1st Stopper HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-309-012 2nd Stopper Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-309-013 2nd Stopper HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-014 3rd Stopper Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-015 3rd Stopper HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-016 Direct-Send JG HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-017 FM6 Pawl HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-018 Top Tray Paper Path Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-019 Top Tray Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-020 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-021 Top Tray Full Sensor (E) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-023 Front Door Switch (SW1) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-024 Horizontal Path Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-025 Vertical Path Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-026 Bypass Entrance Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-309-027 Bypass Exit Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6337 [INPUT Check]

6-377-002 Registration Front Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-004 Paper Stack Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-005 1st 2-direction Paper Feed SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-006 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-007 Crease Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-008 Bridge Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-010 Entrance JG HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-011 Relay JG HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-012 Folding JG HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-013 Anti-Winding JG HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-014 Crease HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-015 Top Tray Paper Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-016 After Folding Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-017 Under Folding Paper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-018 Cover SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-019 Entrance Guide Plate SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-020 Before Regist. Transport Guide Plate SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-021 Regist. Transport Guide Plate SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-377-022 After Fold Transport Guide Plate SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-377-023 Crease Guide Plate SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-377-024 Relay Transport Guide Plate SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
6-377-025 Top Tray Exit Guide Plate SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Print Post
6160 [Input Check Print Post]
6-160-001 Paper Detect Sn 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-160-002 Vert Transport Sn1:Bin1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-160-003 Paper Overflow Sn 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-160-024 Door Open Switch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1-Tray CIT
6451 [INPUT Check:1-Tray CIT]
6-451-001 Paper Feed Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-451-003 Paper Near End Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-451-004 Paper Feed Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-451-006 Grip Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-451-007 Guide Plate Set Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-451-008 Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-451-009 Paper Set Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-451-010 Width Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-451-013 Length Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2.8.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

Activates the electrical components for functional check.
It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time.
Main Machine, LTC

5804 [OUTPUT Check]
5-804-001 Feed Motor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-002 Feed Motor 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-003 Feed Motor 3 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-004 Feed Motor 4 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-005 By-pass Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-006 LCT Feed Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-804-009 Pick-up SOL 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-010 Pick-up SOL 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-011 Pick-up SOL 3 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-012 Pick-up SOL 4 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-013 By-pass Pick-up SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-014 LCT Pick-up SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-804-017 Reverse Release SOL 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-022 Tandem Connection Release SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-023 Left Tandem Lock SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-024 Tandem Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]

5-804-027 Relay Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]

5-804-028 Main Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-031 Fusing Discharge Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
5-804-032 Fusing Removal Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-804-039 Registration Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-040 Guide Plate Release SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-041 Exit Junction SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-804-043 Inverter Duplex Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-044 Duplex Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-045 Duplex Entrance Gate SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-046 Inverter Jogger SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-048 Duplex Jogger ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-052 Toner Supply CL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-053 Development Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-054 Used Toner Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-055 Web Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-804-056 Toner Bottle Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-057 Transfer/Separation SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-062 Quenching Lamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-063 Charge Corona ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-064 Grid Wire ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-067 Development Bias ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-069 Transfer Bias ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-070 ID Sensor LED ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-073 New Toner Bottle Cooling Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-074 Development Unit Fan 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-075 Duplex Unit Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-076 Main Ventilation Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-077 Main Suction Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-078 Drum Cooling Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-079 OPC Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-084 Total Counter ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-098 Status Lamp (Green) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-099 Status Lamp (Red) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-100 PTL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-101 LD0 DC Lamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-102 LD1 DC Lamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-103 LD2 DC Lamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]

5-804-104 LD3 DC Lamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]

5-804-111 Development Unit Fan 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-112 Fusing Exit Inner Cover Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-113 PSU Cooling Fan 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-114 PSU Cooling Fan 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-115 AC Cooling Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-116 Controller Exhaust Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-117 Capacitor Cooling Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-118 Exhaust Heat Fan ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-120 Paper Feeding Fan 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-150 LED A ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-151 LED B1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-152 LED B2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-153 LED C1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-154 LED C2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-155 LED D1/E1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-156 LED D2/D3 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-157 LED E2/Z ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-158 LED Front Cover ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-159 LED ALL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-161 Tray 1 Lift Motor (Up: 1sec) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-162 Tray 1 Lift Motor (Down: 1sec) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-169 Front End Fence SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-170 Rear End Fence SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-171 Back Fence Open/Close Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
5-804-200 Scanner fanmotor ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
5-804-202 Scanner Lamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-804-203 Scanner Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]

ADF
6012 [1-Pass ADF OUTPUT Check]
6-012-001 Pick-Up Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
6-012-003 Feed Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-012-005 Relay Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-012-009 Exit Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-012-010 Bottom Plate Motor For/Rev ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-012-012 Stamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-012-015 Pull-Out Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-012-016 Middle Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2K/3K Finisher
6124 [OUTPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]
6-124-001 Entrance Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-002 Horizontal Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-003 Pre-Stack Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-004 ITB Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-005 Paper Exit Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-006 Upper Junction Solenoid ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-007 TE Stack Plate Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-008 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-009 Punching Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-010 Punch Move Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-011 S-to-S Registration Detection Move Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-012 Lower Junction Solenoid Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-013 Jogger Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-014 Positioning Roller Rotation Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-015 Feed-out Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-016 Booklet Stapler Move Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-017 Corner Stapler Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-018 Booklet Stapler Jogger Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-019 Booklet Stapler Jog Solenoid Move Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-020 Booklet Stapler Standard Fence Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-021 Booklet Stapler Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-022 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-023 Folder Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-025 Square-fold Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-026 Tray Lift Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-124-027 Shift Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-124-028 Front Shift Jogger Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-029 Rear Shift Jogger Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-030 Shift Jogger Retraction Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-031 Drag Roller Vibrating Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-032 LE Guide Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-033 Navigation LED (All) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-037 Positioning Roller Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-124-038 Paper Guide Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Finisher 3KFIN (100Bind)

6148 [FIN OUTPUTCheck 3KFIN(100Bind)]
6-148-001 Upper Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-002 Shift Exit M:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-003 Upper Tray JG Mtr:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-004 Tray Lift Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-005 Jogger Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-006 Stapler Front/Rear Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-007 Stapler Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-008 Punch Drive Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-009 Stapler JG Mtr:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-010 Stp Hammer Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-011 Feed Out M:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-012 Tray Shift Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-013 Stapler Rotation Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-014 Stp Exit M:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-015 Open Exit Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-016 Fold Plate Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-017 Prestack JG Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-018 Prestack Stop Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-019 Fold M:Front:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-020 Fold M:Back:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-021 Return Drv Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-022 Return TransM:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-023 Shift Jog Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-024 Shift Jog Shunt Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-025 Top Fence Motor:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-026 Bottom Fence Motor:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-148-027 Lower Transport Mtr:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-148-028 Upper Tray Exit Mtr:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-029 Positioning Roller Mtr:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
Appendices
Engine SP
6-148-030 Prestack Trans Mtr:Cont ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-031 Staple Trim Chute SOL:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-032 Punch Movement Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-033 Punch S-to-S Regist: CIS Lamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-148-034 Entrance Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Slide Sort Tray

6251 [OUTPUT Check Slide Sort Tray]
6-251-001 Transport Motor:Continuous ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-251-002 Transport Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-251-003 Shift Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-251-004 Tray Lift Motor:Up ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-251-005 Tray Lift Motor:Down ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-251-006 Tray Lift Moter:1 Op ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Multi Folder
6310 [Output Check Multi Folder]
6-310-001 Horizontal Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-002 Top Tray Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-003 Top Tray Exit Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-004 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-005 Registration Roller Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-007 Entrance JG Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-008 1st Stopper Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-009 2nd Stopper Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-010 3rd Stopper Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-011 Dynamic Roller Lift Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-012 Registration Roller Release Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-013 Fold Plate Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-014 Jogger Fence Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-016 Direct-Send JG Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-017 FM6 Pawl Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-018 1st Fold Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-019 2nd Fold Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-020 Crease Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-310-021 Bypass JG Solenoid ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-310-022 Exit JG Solenoid ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-023 Top Tray JG Solenoid ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-024 LE Stop Pawl Solenoid ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-025 Reverse JG Solenoid ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-310-026 Horizontal Exit Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6378 [OUTPUT Check]

6-378-001 Entrance Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-002 Registration Front Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-003 Registration Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-004 Paper Stack Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-005 Folding Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-006 2nd 2-direct Paper Feed Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-007 1st Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-008 2nd Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-009 Top Tray Exit Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-010 Entrance JG Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-011 Relay JG Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-012 Folding Junction Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-013 Anti-Winding JG HP Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-014 Crease Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-378-015 Navigation LED (All) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Print Post
6161 [Output Check Print Post]
Mode Tables
Appendices
6-161-001 Vert Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Engine SP
6-161-002 Junction Gate SOL1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-003 Turn Gate SOL1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

APPENDICES:
CONTROLLER SP MODE TABLES
None
Controller SP Tables-5
3. CONTROLLER SP MODE TABLES
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
3.1 CONTROLLER SP TABLES-5
3.1.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)

G or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-009-2 Add display language 1-8 CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
01 *
02 *
03 *
04 *
05 *
06 *
07 *
5-024-0 mm/inch Display 0:mm 1:inch CTL [0 to 1 / * / 1]
01 Selection * *NA: 1
*EU/AP/CHN/TW
N: 0
5-037-0 Status Lamp Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-045-0 Accounting counter Counter Method CTL [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-047-0 Paper Display Backing Paper CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-055-0 Display IP address CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-061-0 Toner Remaining Icon CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Display Change *
5-061-0 Toner PreNearEnd CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


CTL
02 Display Change *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Developer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Hot Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Pressure Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Hot Roller Bearings CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
04 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Pressure Roller Bearings CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
05 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Hot Roller Strippers CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
06 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Cleaning Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
07 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Cleaning Roller Bearings CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
08 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Web Roll CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
09 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Web Cleaning Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
10 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Development Filter CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
11 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Toner Recycling Unit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
12 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Pressure Release Filter CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
13 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Charge Corona Wire CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
14 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Grid Plate CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
15 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Cleaning Pad CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
16 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Clearning Blead CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
17 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Cleaning Brush CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
18 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Transfer Belt CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
19 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
20 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert ADF Pick-up Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
22 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert ADF Feed Belt CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
23 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert ADF Separation Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
24 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Feed Roller-Tray1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
25 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Pick-up Roller-Tray1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
26 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Separation Roller-Tray1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
27 Display *
28 Display *
29 Display *
30 Display *
31 Display *
32 Display *
33 Display *
34 Display *
35 Display *
36 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Feed Roller-LCT CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


CTL
37 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Pick-up Roller-LCT CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
38 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Separation Roller-LCT CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
39 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Feed Belt Cover feeder CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
40 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Pick-up Roller Cover feeder CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
41 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Separation Roller Cover feeder CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
42 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Fusing unit:Thermistor (Back) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
44 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Fusing unit:Thermistor (Center) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
45 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Dust Filter (Main) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
46 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Main Tray (Custom 1) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
47 Display *
48 Display *
49 Display *
50 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Paper Tray1 (Custom 1) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
51 Display *
52 Display *
53 Display *
54 Display *
55 Display *


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
56 Display *
57 Display *
58 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert LCT (Custom 1) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
59 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert LCT (Custom 2) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
60 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Interposer (Custom 1) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
63 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Interposer (Custom 2) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
64 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert Wast Toner Bottle CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
65 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert UFP Filter CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
66 Display *
5-062-0 Part Replacement Alert sheet:paper crimp:folder CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
67 Display *
5-066-0 PM Parts Display CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Developer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Hot Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Pressure Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Hot Roller Bearings CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
04 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Pressure Roller Bearings CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
05 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Hot Roller Strippers CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
06 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Cleaning Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
07 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Cleaning Roller Bearings CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


CTL
08 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Web Roll CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
09 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Web Cleaning Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
10 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Development Filter CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
11 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Toner Recycling Unit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
12 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Pressure Release Filter CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
13 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Charge Corona Wire CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
14 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Grid Plate CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
15 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Cleaning Pad CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
16 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Clearning Blead CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
17 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Cleaning Brush CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
18 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Transfer Belt CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
19 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
20 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement ADF Pick-up Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
22 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement ADF Feed Belt CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
23 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement ADF Separation Roller CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
24 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Feed Roller-Tray1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
25 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Pick-up Roller-Tray1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
26 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Separation Roller-Tray1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
27 Operation Type *
28 Operation Type *
29 Operation Type *
30 Operation Type *
31 Operation Type *
32 Operation Type *
33 Operation Type *
34 Operation Type *
35 Operation Type *
36 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Feed Roller-LCT CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
37 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Pick-up Roller-LCT CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
38 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Separation Roller-LCT CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
39 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Feed Belt Cover feeder CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
40 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Pick-up Roller Cover feeder CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
41 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Separation Roller Cover feeder CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
42 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Fusing unit:Thermistor (Back) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
44 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Fusing unit:Thermistor (Center) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
45 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Dust Filter (Main) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


CTL
46 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Main Tray (Custom 1) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
47 Operation Type *
48 Operation Type *
49 Operation Type *
50 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Paper Tray1 (Custom 1) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
51 Operation Type *
52 Operation Type *
53 Operation Type *
54 Operation Type *
55 Operation Type *
56 Operation Type *
57 Operation Type *
58 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement LCT (Custom 1) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
59 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement LCT (Custom 2) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
60 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Interposer (Custom 1) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
63 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Interposer (Custom 2) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
64 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement Wast Toner Bottle CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
65 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement UFP Filter CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
66 Operation Type *
5-067-0 Part Replacement sheet:paper crimp:folder CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
67 Operation Type *
5-071-0 Set Bypass Paper Size CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Display
5-073-0 Supply Part Waste Tonner Bottle CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Replacement Operation *
Type
5-074-0 Home Key Login Setting CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
02 Customization *
5-074-0 Home Key Function Setting CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
91 Customization *
5-074-0 Home Key Product ID CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
92 Customization * 1]
5-074-0 Home Key Application Screen ID CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
93 Customization *
5-075-0 USB Keyboard Display setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03 *
5-081-0 ServiceSP Entry Code CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 Setting *
5-083-0 LED Light Switch Toner Near End CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Setting *
5-083-0 LED Light Switch Waste Toner Near End CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 Setting *
5-085-0 Keybord Setting CH/TW SoftKeybord Setting CTL [0 to 2 / * / 1]
01 * *NA/EU/AP: 0
*CHN: 1
*TWN: 2
5-101-2 Copy Auto Clear Setting Auto Clear Timer Setting (0:ON CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 1:OFF) *
5-102-2 AutoDetect HumanDetectSetting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03
5-112-0 Non-Std. Paper Sel. (0:OFF 1:ON) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-113-0 Optional Counter Type Default Optional Counter Type CTL [0 to 12 / 0 / 1]
01 *


CTL
5-113-0 Optional Counter Type External Optional Counter Type CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
02 *
5-114-0 Optional Counter I/F MF Key Card Extension CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-118-0 Copy mode setting Disable Copying CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-118-0 Copy mode setting DocumentServer:Printed File CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03 Auto Delete *
5-118-0 Copy mode setting Copy Limit Warning Display CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
04 Setting
5-120-0 Mode Clear Opt. 0:Yes 1:StandBy 2:No CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
01 Counter Removal *
5-121-0 Counter Up Timing 0:Feed 1:Exit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-127-0 APS OFF Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-150-0 Length Setting Bypass(0:OFF 1:Long) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-167-0 Fax Printing Mode at CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Optional Counter Off *
5-169-0 CE Login CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-182-0 HDD Pages Mgmt Release LS Limit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
01
5-188-0 Copy Nv Version CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 *
5-191-0 Mode Set Power Str Set CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
01 *
5-195-0 Limitless SW CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-199-0 Paper Exit After Staple Staple(1:Without 2:After 0:Auto) CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
01 End *
5-199-0 Paper Exit After Staple Saddle(1:Without 2:After CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
02 End 0:Auto) *
5-212-0 Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL [-1000 to 1000 / 0
03 Position of Left/Right Facing * / 0.01mm]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-212-0 Page Numbering Duplex Printout Top/Bottom CTL [-1000 to 1000 / 0
04 Position of Left/Right Facing * / 0.01mm]
5-212-0 Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL [-1000 to 1000 / 0
18 Position of Top/Bottom Facing * / 0.01mm]
5-212-0 Page Numbering Duplex Printout Top/Bottom CTL [-1000 to 1000 / 0
19 Position of Top/Bottom Facing * / 0.01mm]
5-227-2 Page Numbering Allow Page No. Entry CTL [2 to 9 / 9 / 1]
01 *
5-227-2 Page Numbering Zero Surplus Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 *
5-302-0 Set Time Time Difference CTL [-1440 to 1440 / * /
02 * 1]
*NA: -300
*EU: 60
*AP/CHN/TWN:
480
5-305-1 Auto Off Set Auto Off Limit Set CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-307-0 Daylight Saving Time Setting CTL [0 to 1 / * / 1]
01 * *NA/EU: 1
*AP/CHN/TWN: 0
5-307-0 Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(Start) CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
03 * 1]
*NA: 0x03200210
*EU: 0x03500010
*AP: 0x10500010
*CHN/TWN: 0
5-307-0 Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(End) CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
04 * 1]
*NA: 0x11100200
*EU: 0x10500100
*AP: 0x03100000
*CHN/TWN: 0
5-401-1 Access Control Default Document ACL CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
03 *
5-401-1 Access Control Authentication Time CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /


CTL
04 * 1sec]
5-401-1 Access Control Extend Certification Detail CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
62 *
5-401-2 Access Control SDK1 UniqueID CTL [0 to
00 * 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 /
1]
5-401-2 Access Control SDK1 Certification Method CTL [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
01 *
1]
11 *
1]
21 *
5-401-2 Access Control SDK Certification Device CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
30 *
5-401-2 Access Control Detail Option CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
40 *
5-402-1 Access Control SDKJ1 Limit Setting CTL [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
01 *
02 *
03 *
04 *
05 *
06 *
07 *


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
08 *
09 *
10 *
1 *
12 *
13 *
14 *
15 *
16 *
17 *
18 *
19 *
20 *
21 *
22 *
23 *
24 *
25 *


CTL
26 *
27 *
28 *
29 *
30 *
5-402-1 Access Control SDKJ1 ProductID CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
41 * 1]
42 * 1]
43 * 1]
44 * 1]
45 * 1]
46 * 1]
47 * 1]
48 * 1]
49 * 1]
50 * 1]
51 * 1]
52 * 1]
53 * 1]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
54 * 1]
55 * 1]
56 * 1]
57 * 1]
58 * 1]
59 * 1]
60 * 1]
61 * 1]
62 * 1]
63 * 1]
64 * 1]
65 * 1]
66 * 1]
67 * 1]
68 * 1]
69 * 1]
70 * 1]
5-404-0 User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01


CTL
5-404-1 User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear Permit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Setting *
5-411-0 LDAP-Certification Simplified Authentication CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
04 *
5-411-0 LDAP-Certification Password Null Not Permit CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
05 *
5-411-0 LDAP-Certification Detail Option CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
06 *
5-412-1 Krb-Certification Encrypt Mode CTL [0 to 0xFF / 0x1F /
00 * 1]
5-413-0 Lockout Setting Lockout On/Off CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-413-0 Lockout Setting Lockout Threshold CTL [1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
02 *
5-413-0 Lockout Setting Cancelation On/Off CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03 *
5-413-0 Lockout Setting Cancelation Time CTL [1 to 9999 / 60 /
04 * 1min]
5-414-0 Access Mitigation Mitigation On/Off CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-414-0 Access Mitigation Mitigation Time CTL [0 to 60 / 15 /
02 * 1min]
5-415-0 Password Attack Permissible Number CTL [0 to 100 / 30 / 1]
01 *
5-415-0 Password Attack Detect Time CTL [1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
02 *
5-416-0 Access Information Access User Max Num CTL [50 to 200 / 200 /
01 * 1]
5-416-0 Access Information Access Password Max Num CTL [50 to 200 / 200 /
02 * 1]
5-416-0 Access Information Monitor Interval CTL [1 to 10 / 3 / 1]
03 *
5-417-0 Access Attack Access Permissible Number CTL [0 to 500 / 100 / 1]
01 *
5-417-0 Access Attack Attack Detect Time CTL [10 to 30 / 10 /
02 * 1sec]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-417-0 Access Attack Productivity Fall Waite CTL [0 to 9 / 3 / 1sec]
03 *
5-417-0 Access Attack Attack Max Num CTL [50 to 200 / 200 /
04 * 1]
5-420-0 User Authentication Copy CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-420-0 User Authentication DocumentServer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
11 *
5-420-0 User Authentication Fax CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
21 *
5-420-0 User Authentication Scanner CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
31 *
5-420-0 User Authentication Printer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
41 *
5-420-0 User Authentication SDK1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
51 *
61 *
71 *
5-420-0 User Authentication Browser CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
81 *
5-430-0 Auth Dialog Message Message Change On/Off CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Change
5-430-0 Auth Dialog Message Message Text Download CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02 Change
5-430-0 Auth Dialog Message Message Text ID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
03 Change *
5-431-0 External Auth User Tag CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
10 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User Entry CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
11 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User Group CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
12 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User Mail CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
20 Preset *


CTL
5-431-0 External Auth User Fax CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
30 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User FaxSub CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
31 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User Folder CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
32 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User ProtectCode CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
33 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User SmtpAuth CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
34 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User LdapAuth CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
35 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User Smb Ftp Fldr Auth CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
36 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User AcntAcl CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
37 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User DocumentAcl CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
38 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User CertCrypt CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
40 Preset *
5-431-0 External Auth User UserLimitCount CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
50 Preset *
5-481-0 Authentication Error System Log Disp CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Code *
5-481-0 Authentication Error Panel Disp CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
02 Code *
5-490-0 MF KeyCard Job Permit Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-491-0 Optional Counter Detail Option CTL [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-501-0 PM Alarm PM Alarm Level CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-504-0 Jam Alarm CTL [0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
01 *
5-504-0 Jam Alarm Threshold CTL [1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
02 *


CTL
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-505-0 Error Alarm CTL [0 to 255 / * / 1]
01 * *IM 7000: 10
*IM 8000: 14
*IM 9000: 17
5-505-0 Error Alarm Threshold CTL [1 to 99 / 7 / 1]
02 *
5-507-0 Supply/CC Alarm Paper Supply Alarm CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-507-0 Supply/CC Alarm Staple Supply Alarm CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
02 *
5-507-0 Supply/CC Alarm Toner Supply Alarm CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
03 *
5-507-0 Supply/CC Alarm WasteTonerBottle CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
06 *
5-507-0 Supply/CC Alarm WasteTonerBottle Call Timing CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
70 *
5-507-0 Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Timing CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
80 *
5-507-0 Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Threshold CTL [10 to 90 / 50 /
81 * 10%]
5-507-1 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: Others CTL [250 to 10000 /
28 * 1000 / 1]
5-507-1 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A3 CTL [250 to 10000 /
32 * 1000 / 1]
33 * 1000 / 1]
34 * 1000 / 1]
5-507-1 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B4 CTL [250 to 10000 /
41 * 1000 / 1]
5-507-1 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B5 CTL [250 to 10000 /
42 * 1000 / 1]
5-507-1 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: DLT CTL [250 to 10000 /
60 * 1000 / 1]
5-507-1 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LG CTL [250 to 10000 /
64 * 1000 / 1]


CTL
5-507-1 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LT CTL [250 to 10000 /
66 * 1000 / 1]
5-507-1 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: HLT CTL [250 to 10000 /
72 * 1000 / 1]
5-508-0 CC Call Jam Remains CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
01 *
5-508-0 CC Call Continuous Jams CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
02 *
5-508-0 CC Call Continuous Door Open CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
03 *
5-508-0 CC Call Jam Detection: Time Length CTL [3 to 30 / 10 / 1]
11 *
5-508-0 CC Call Jam Detection: Continuous CTL [2 to 10 / 5 / 1]
12 Count *
5-508-0 CC Call Door Open: Time Length CTL [3 to 30 / 10 / 1]
13 *
5-513-0 PartsAlermlevelCount Normal CTL [1 to 9999 / 300 /
01 * 1]
5-513-0 PartsAlermlevelCount Df CTL [1 to 9999 / 300 /
02 * 1]
5-514-0 PartsAlermlev Normal CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
01 *
5-514-0 PartsAlermlev Df CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting SC Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
01 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts Near End Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
02 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts End Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
03 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting User Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
04 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Communication Test Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
06 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Machine Information Notice CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
07 *


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Alarm Notice CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
08 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Supply Automatic Ordering Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
10 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Supply Management Report CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
11 Call *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Jam/Door Open Call CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
12 *
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Manual Call CTL [1 to 255 / 5 /
50 * 1min]
5-515-0 SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Other Call CTL [1 to 255 / 10 /
51 * 1min]
5-517-0 Get Machine AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
61 Information Setting
62 Information Interval
63 Information Weekday
5-517-0 Get Machine AutoDiscovery Execution Hour CTL [0 to 23 / 0 / 1]
64 Information
65 Information Minute
5-517-0 Get Machine AutoDiscovery SNMP CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
66 Information Community Name
5-517-1 Get Machine GetLog:NotificationSetting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
00 Information *
5-728-0 Network Setting NAT Machine Port1 CTL [1 to 65535 /
01 * 49101 / 1]
5-728-0 Network Setting NAT UI Port1 CTL [1 to 65535 /
02 * 55101 / 1]
03 * 49102 / 1]
04 * 55102 / 1]
05 * 49103 / 1]


CTL
06 * 55103 / 1]
07 * 49104 / 1]
08 * 55104 / 1]
09 * 49105 / 1]
10 * 55105 / 1]
11 * 49106 / 1]
12 * 55106 / 1]
13 * 49107 / 1]
14 * 55107 / 1]
15 * 49108 / 1]
16 * 55108 / 1]
17 * 49109 / 1]
18 * 55109 / 1]
19 * 49110 / 1]
20 * 55110 / 1]
5-728-1 Network Setting PacketCapture CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01
5-728-1 Network Setting PacketCapture:mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02
5-728-1 Network Setting PacketCapture:interface CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
03


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-728-1 Network Setting PacketCapture:length CTL [54 to 65535 / 128
04 / 1]
5-728-1 Network Setting PacketCapture:broadcast CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
05
5-728-1 Network Setting PacketCapture:specify port CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
06
5-728-1 Network Setting PacketCapture:portnumber CTL [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
07
5-728-1 Network Setting PacketCapture:time CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
08 1]
5-729-0 Print Server Active IPv6 Link Local Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
13
5-729-0 Print Server IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
14 *
5-729-0 Print Server Active IPv6 Stateless Address 1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
15
5-729-0 Print Server Active IPv6 Stateless Address 2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
16
5-729-0 Print Server IPv6 Manual Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
19 *
5-729-0 Print Server IPv6 Gateway Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
20 *
5-730-0 Extended Function Expiration Prior Alarm Set CTL [0 to 999 / 20 /
10 Setting * 1days]
5-731-0 Counter Effect Change Mk1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Cnt(Paper->Combine) *
5-734-0 PDF Setting PDF/A Fixed CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-741-0 Node Authentication CTL [1 to 255 / 60 /
01 Timuout * 1sec]
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Controller Standby CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
11 ption *
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum STR CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
12 ption *
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Main Power Off CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
13 ption *


CTL
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Scanning and Printing CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
14 ption *
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Printing CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
15 ption *
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Scanning CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
16 ption *
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Engine Standby CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
17 ption *
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Low Power Consumption CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
18 ption *
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Silent condition CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
19 ption *
5-745-2 DeemedPowerConsum Heater Off CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
20 ption *
5-748-1 OpePanel Setting Op Type Action Setting CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
01
5-748-2 OpePanel Setting Cheetah Panel Connect Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01
5-749-0 Import/Export Export CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01
5-749-1 Import/Export Import CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01
5-752-0 Copy:WebAPI Setting Copy:FlairAPI Setting CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-755-0 Display Setting Disp Administrator Password CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 Change Scrn *
5-755-0 Display Setting Hide Administrator Password CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02 Change Scrn
5-758-0 RemoteUI Setting Authentication CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-759-0 Machine Limit Count Machine Limit Count Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-759-0 Machine Limit Count Limit Count CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0
51 * / 1]
5-761-0 SmartOperationPanel Restore the default Home CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
01 Setting screen *


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-761-0 SmartOperationPanel Introduction Setting Boot Mode CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
07 Setting *
5-761-0 SmartOperationPanel SmartOperationPanel Font CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
09 Setting Setting *
5-764-0 NFC Setting GuestNetwork CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-764-0 NFC Setting Encrypted Communication CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 Permission *
5-764-0 NFC Setting Access Port1 CTL [0 to 65535 / 8081
03 * / 1]
5-764-0 NFC Setting Access Port2 CTL [0 to 65535 / 8080
04 * / 1]
5-764-0 NFC Setting Access Port3 CTL [0 to 65535 / 80 /
05 * 1]
5-767-0 Screen USB host port Port1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-767-0 Screen USB host port Port2 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 *
5-767-1 Screen USB host port Screen USB memory CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-780-0 ACT Version Current Version Disp CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-780-0 ACT Version ROM Max Version Disp CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
02 *
5-780-0 ACT Version HDD Version Disp CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
03 *
5-780-0 ACT Version OpePanel Version Disp CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
04 *
5-780-0 ACT Version Factory Version Display CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
05 *
5-780-0 ACT Version Batch Activate Exe CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
50 *
5-780-1 ACT Version Auto Activate Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
00 *
5-780-2 ACT Version Restore from NV CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
00 *


CTL
5-780-2 ACT Version Restore from HDD CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-780-2 ACT Version Restore from OpePanel CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
02 *
5-780-2 ACT Version Display Not Use Check State CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
10 *
5-780-2 ACT Version Not Use Message Re-Popup CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
11 Time * 1hour]
5-782-0 ACT HISTORY version1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
01
5-782-0 ACT HISTORY date and time1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02
5-782-0 ACT HISTORY fwu1 CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03
5-782-0 ACT HISTORY method1 CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
04
51
52
53
54
01
02
03
04
51
52


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
53
54
01
02
03
04
5-785-0 SmartSDK Version Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 *
5-801-0 Memory Clear All Clear CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01
5-801-0 Memory Clear SCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
03
5-801-0 Memory Clear IMH Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
04
5-801-0 Memory Clear MCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
05
5-801-0 Memory Clear Copier application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
06
5-801-0 Memory Clear Fax Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
07
5-801-0 Memory Clear Printer Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
08
5-801-0 Memory Clear Scanner Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
09
5-801-0 Memory Clear Web Service CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
10
5-801-0 Memory Clear NCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
11
5-801-0 Memory Clear R-FAX CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
12


CTL
5-801-0 Memory Clear Clear DCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
14
5-801-0 Memory Clear Clear UCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
15
5-801-0 Memory Clear MIRS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
16
5-801-0 Memory Clear CCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
17
5-801-0 Memory Clear SRM Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
18
5-801-0 Memory Clear LCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
19
5-801-0 Cleae Memory Web Uapli CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
20
5-801-0 Memory Clear ECS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
21
5-801-0 Memory Clear AICS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
23
5-801-0 Clear Memory websys CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
25
5-801-0 Memory Clear SAS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
27
5-801-0 Memory Clear Rest WebService CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
28 *
5-812-0 Service Tel. No. Setting Service CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 *
5-812-0 Service Tel. No. Setting Facsimile CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02 *
5-812-0 Service Tel. No. Setting Supply CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
03 *
5-812-0 Service Tel. No. Setting Operation CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
04 *
5-816-0 Remote Service I/F Setting CTL [0 to 2 / 2 / 1]
01 *
5-816-0 Remote Service CE Call CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02 *


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-816-0 Remote Service Function Flag CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03 *
5-816-0 Remote Service SSL Disable CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
07 *
5-816-0 Remote Service RCG Connect Timeout CTL [1 to 90 / 30 /
08 * 1sec]
5-816-0 Remote Service RCG Write Timeout CTL [0 to 100 / 60 /
09 * 1sec]
5-816-0 Remote Service RCG Read Timeout CTL [0 to 100 / 60 /
10 * 1sec]
5-816-0 Remote Service Port 80 Enable CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
11 *
5-816-0 Remote Service RFU Timing CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
13 *
5-816-0 Remote Service RCG Error Cause CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
14
5-816-0 Remote Service RCG-C Registed CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
21 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Connect Type(N/M/3G) CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
23 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Cert Expire Timing CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
61 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Use Proxy CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
62 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Proxy Host CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
63 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Proxy PortNumber CTL [0 to 0xffff / 0 / 1]
64 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Proxy User Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
65 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Proxy Password CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
66 *
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:Up State CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
67 *
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:Error CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
68 *


CTL
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:Up ID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
69 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Firm Up Status CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
83 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Firm Up User Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
85 *
5-816-0 Remote Service Firmware Size CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
86 * 1]
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:Macro Ver. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
87
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:PAC Ver. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
88
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:ID2Code CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
89
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:Subject CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
90
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:SerialNo. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
91
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:Issuer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
92
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:Valid Start CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
93
5-816-0 Remote Service CERT:Valid End CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
94
5-816-1 Remote Service CERT:Encrypt Level CTL [1 to 2 / 1 / 1]
02 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Client Communication Method CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
03 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Client Communication Limit CTL [1 to 7 / 7 / 1]
04 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Network Information Waiting CTL [5 to 255 / 5 /
15 timer * 1sec]
5-816-1 Remote Service Access GW HostName CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
30
5-816-1 Remote Service LGWAN:Setup Execute CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
33


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-816-1 Remote Service Selection Country CTL [0 to 10 / * / 1]
50 * *NA: 1
*EU: 3
*AP/CHN/TWN/K
OR: 0
5-816-1 Remote Service Line Type Automatic CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
51 Judgement
5-816-1 Remote Service Line Type Judgement Result CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
52
5-816-1 Remote Service Selection Dial / Push CTL [0 to * / 0 / 0]
53 * *NA/EU: 1
*AP/CHN/TWN/K
OR: 2
5-816-1 Remote Service Outside Line Outgoing Number CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
54 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Dial Up User Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
56 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Dial Up Password CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
57 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Local Phone Number CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
61 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Connection Timing Adjustment CTL [0 to 24 / 1 / 1]
62 Incoming *
5-816-1 Remote Service Access Point CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
63 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Line Connecting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
64 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Modem Serial No. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
73 *
5-816-1 Remote Service Retransmission Limit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
74
5-816-1 Remote Service FAX TX Priority CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
87 *
5-816-1 Remote Service 3G DongleID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
90 *
5-816-1 Remote Service ppp Connect Timer CTL [15 to 30 / 15 /


CTL
99 * 1min]
5-816-2 Remote Service Manual Polling CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
00
5-816-2 Remote Service Regist Status CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
01
5-816-2 Remote Service Letter Number CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02 *
5-816-2 Remote Service Confirm Execute CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03
5-816-2 Remote Service Confirm Result CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
04
5-816-2 Remote Service Confirm Place CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
05
5-816-2 Remote Service Register Execute CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
06
5-816-2 Remote Service Register Result CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
07
5-816-2 Remote Service Error Code CTL [-2147483647 to
08 2147483647 / 0 /
0]
5-816-2 Remote Service Instl Clear CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
09
5-816-2 Remote Service CommErrorTime CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
40
5-816-2 Remote Service CommErrorCode 1 CTL [0 to 0xffffffff /
41 * 0x00000000 / 1]
42 * 0x00000000 / 1]
43 * 0x00000000 / 1]
5-816-2 Remote Service CommErrorState 1 CTL [0 to 0xffff /
44 * 0x0000 / 1]
45 * 0x0000 / 1]
46 * 0x0000 / 1]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-816-2 Remote Service SSL Error Count CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
47 *
5-816-2 Remote Service Other Err Count CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
48 *
5-816-2 Remote Service CommLog Print CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
50
5-821-0 Remote Service RCG RCG IPv4 Address CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
02 Setting * 1]
5-821-0 Remote Service RCG RCG Port CTL [0 to 65535 / 443 /
03 Setting * 1]
5-821-0 Remote Service RCG RCG IPv4 URL Path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
04 Setting *
5-821-0 Remote Service RCG RCG IPv6 Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
05 Setting *
5-821-0 Remote Service RCG RCG IPv6 URL Path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
06 Setting *
5-821-0 Remote Service RCG RCG Host Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
07 Setting *
5-821-0 Remote Service RCG RCG Host URL Path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
08 Setting *
5-824-0 NV-RAM Data Upload CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01
5-825-0 NV-RAM Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 Download
5-828-0 Network Setting User Class CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
39 *
5-828-0 Network Setting Class Id CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
40 *
5-828-0 Network Setting 1284 Compatiblity (Centro) CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
50 *
5-828-0 Network Setting ECP (Centro) CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
52 *
5-828-0 Network Setting Job Spooling CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
65 *
5-828-0 Network Setting Job Spooling Clear: Start Time CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
66 *


CTL
5-828-0 Network Setting Job Spooling (Protocol) CTL [0x00 to 0xff / 0xff
69 * / 0]
5-828-0 Network Setting Protocol usage CTL [0x00000000 to
87 * 0xffffffff /
0x00000000 / 1]
5-828-0 Network Setting TELNET(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
90 *
5-828-0 Network Setting Web(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
91 *
5-828-1 Network Setting Active IPv6 Link Local Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
45
5-828-1 Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless Address 1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
47
49
51
53
55
5-828-1 Network Setting IPv6 Manual Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
56 *
5-828-1 Network Setting IPv6 Gateway Address CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
58 *
5-828-1 Network Setting IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
61 *
5-828-2 Network Setting IPsec Aggressive Mode Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
19 *
5-828-2 Network Setting Web Item visible CTL [0x0000 to 0xffff /
36 * 0xffff / 1]
5-828-2 Network Setting Web shopping link visible CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
37 *
5-828-2 Network Setting Web Supplies Link visible CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
38 *
5-828-2 Network Setting Web Link1 Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
39 *
5-828-2 Network Setting Web Link1 URL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
40 *
5-828-2 Network Setting Web Link1 visible CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
41 *
5-828-2 Network Setting Web Link2 Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
42 *
5-828-2 Network Setting Web Link2 URL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
43 *
5-828-2 Network Setting Web Link2 visible CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
44 *
5-828-2 Network Setting DHCPv6 DUID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
49
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (ALL) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (IMH) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
03 (Thumbnail/OCR)
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (Job Log) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
04
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
05
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (User Info) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
06
5-832-0 HDD Mail RX Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
07
5-832-0 HDD Mail TX Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
08
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (Data for a CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
09 Design)
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (Log) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
10
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
11
5-832-0 HDD HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL
12
5-836-0 Capture Setting Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Copy CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
11 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Doc. Svr. CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
12 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Fax RX Printer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
13 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Fax TX CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
14 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Printer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
15 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Scanner CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
16 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Capture Setting: SDK CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
17 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Captured File Resend (0:Off CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
61 1:On) *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Reduction for Copy Color CTL [0 to 3 / 2 / 1]
71 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Reduction for Copy B&W Text CTL [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
72 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Reduction for Copy B&W Other CTL [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
73 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Reduction for Printer Color CTL [0 to 3 / 2 / 1]
74 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Reduction for Printer B&W CTL [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
75 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Format for Copy Color CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
81 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Format for Copy B&W Text CTL [0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
82 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Format for Copy B&W Other CTL [0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
83 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Format for Printer Color CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
84 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Format for Printer B&W CTL [0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
85 *
5-836-0 Capture Setting Default for JPEG CTL [5 to 95 / 50 / 1]
91 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Primary srv IP address CTL [0 to 0xffffffff /
01 * 0x00 / 0]
5-836-1 Capture Setting Primary srv scheme CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Primary srv port number CTL [1 to 65535 / 80 /
03 * 1]
5-836-1 Capture Setting Primary srv URL path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
04 *
5-836-11 Capture Setting Secondary srv IP address CTL [0 to 0xffffffff /
1 * 0x00 / 0]
5-836-1 Capture Setting Secondary srv scheme CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
12 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Secondary srv port number CTL [1 to 65535 / 80 /
13 * 1]
5-836-1 Capture Setting Secondary srv URL path CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
14 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Default Reso Rate Switch CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
20 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: Copy(Color) CTL [0 to 255 / 2 / 1]
21 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: Copy(Mono) CTL [0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
22 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: Print(Color) CTL [0 to 255 / 2 / 1]
23 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: Print(Mono) CTL [0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
24 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: Fax(Color) CTL [0 to 255 / 4 / 1]
25 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: Fax(Mono) CTL [0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
26 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: Scan(Color) CTL [0 to 255 / 4 / 1]


CTL
27 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: Scan(Mono) CTL [0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
28 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: SDK(Color) CTL [0 to 255 / 4 / 1]
29 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Reso: SDK(Mono) CTL [0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
30 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting All Addr Info Switch CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
41 *
5-836-1 Capture Setting Stand-by Doc Max Number CTL [10 to 10000 /
42 * 2000 / 1]
5-836-1 Capture Setting ClearLightPDF Switch CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
43 *
5-840-0 IEEE 802.11 Channel MAX CTL [1 to 14 / 14 / 1]
06 *
5-840-0 IEEE 802.11 Channel MIN CTL [1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
07 *
5-840-0 IEEE 802.11 WEP Key Select CTL [0x00 to 0x11 /
11 * 0x00 / 0]
5-840-0 IEEE 802.11 WPA Debug Lvl CTL [1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
45 *
5-840-0 IEEE 802.11 11w CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
46 *
5-840-0 IEEE 802.11 PSK Set Type CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
47 *
5-841-0 Supply Name Setting Toner Name Setting: Black CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 *
5-841-0 Supply Name Setting OrgStamp CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
07 *
5-841-0 Supply Name Setting WasteTonerBottle CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
09 *
5-841-0 Supply Name Setting StapleStd1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
11 *
12 *


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
13 *
14 *
5-841-0 Supply Name Setting StapleBind1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
21 *
22 *
23 *
5-842-0 GWWS Analysis Setting 1 CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
01 * 1]
5-842-0 GWWS Analysis Setting 2 CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
02 * 1]
5-844-0 USB Transfer Rate CTL [1 to 4 / 4 / 0]
01 *
5-844-0 USB Vendor ID CTL [0x0000 to 0xffff /
02 * 0x05ca / 0]
5-844-0 USB Product ID CTL [0x0000 to 0xffff /
03 * 0x0403 / 0]
5-844-0 USB Device Release Number CTL [0 to 9999 / 100 /
04 * 1]
5-844-0 USB Fixed USB Port CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
05 *
5-844-0 USB PnP Model Name CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
06 *
5-844-0 USB PnP Serial Number CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
07 *
5-844-0 USB Mac Supply Level CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
08 *
5-844-0 USB USB Toggle Clear Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
09 *
5-844-1 USB Notify Unsupport CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
00 *
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting FTP Port No. CTL [1 to 65535 / 3670
01 * / 1]
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting IP Address (Primary) CTL [0 to 0xffffffff /


CTL
02 * 0x00 / ]
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Delivery Error Display Time CTL [0 to 999 / 300 /
06 * 1sec]
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting IP Address (Secondary) CTL [0 to 0xffffffff /
08 * 0x00 / ]
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Delivery Server Model CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
09 *
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Delivery Svr. Capability CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
10 *
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Delivery Svr. Capability (Ext) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
11 *
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Server Scheme(Primary) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
13 *
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Server Port Number(Primary) CTL [1 to 65535 / 80 /
14 * 1]
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Server URL Path(Primary) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
15 *
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Server Scheme(Secondary) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
16 *
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Server Port CTL [1 to 65535 / 80 /
17 Number(Secondary) * 1]
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Server URL Path(Secondary) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
18 *
5-845-0 Delivery Server Setting Rapid Sending Control CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
22 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Machine ID (for Delivery CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 Server) *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Machine ID Clear (for Delivery CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02 Server) *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Maximum Entries CTL [2000 to 20000 /
03 * 2000 / 1]
5-846-0 UCS Setting Delivery Server Retry Timer CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
06 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Delivery Server Retry Times CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
07 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Delivery Server Maximum CTL [2000 to 20000 /


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
08 Entries * 2000 / 1]
5-846-0 UCS Setting LDAP Search Timeout CTL [1 to 255 / 60 / 1]
10 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting WSD Maximum Entries CTL [50 to 250 / 250 /
20 * 1]
5-846-0 UCS Setting Folder Auth Change CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
21 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Addr Auto Backup Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
30 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
40 Migration(USB->HDD) *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Fill Addr Acl Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
41 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Addr Book Media CTL [0 to 30 / 0 / 1]
43 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Initialize Local Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
47 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Initialize Delivery Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
48 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Initialize LDAP Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
49 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Initialize All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
50 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Backup All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
51 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Restore All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
52 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Clear Backup Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
53 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting Search option CTL [0x00 to 0xff / 0x0f
60 * / 1]
5-846-0 UCS Setting Complexity option 1 CTL [0 to 32 / 0 / 1]
62 *
63 *


CTL
64 *
65 *
5-846-0 UCS Setting FTP Auth Port Setting CTL [0 to 65535 / 3671
91 * / 1]
5-846-0 UCS Setting Encryption Stat CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
94 *
5-846-1 UCS Setting Initialize Suprvisor CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
00 *
5-847-0 Rep Resolution Rate for Copy Color CTL [0 to 5 / 2 / 1]
01 Reduction *
5-847-0 Rep Resolution Rate for Copy B&W Text CTL [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
02 Reduction *
5-847-0 Rep Resolution Rate for Copy B&W Other CTL [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
03 Reduction *
5-847-0 Rep Resolution Rate for Printer Color CTL [0 to 5 / 2 / 1]
04 Reduction *
5-847-0 Rep Resolution Rate for Printer B&W CTL [0 to 6 / 0 / 1]
05 Reduction *
5-847-0 Rep Resolution Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi CTL [0 to 5 / 4 / 1]
06 Reduction *
5-847-0 Rep Resolution Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi CTL [0 to 6 / 1 / 1]
07 Reduction *
5-847-0 Rep Resolution Network Quality Default for CTL [5 to 95 / 50 / 1]
21 Reduction JPEG *
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
02 Repository(onlyLower4bits) * 0x02 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: Doc.Svr.Print CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
03 (Lower 4bits) * 0x00 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: udirectory (Lower CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
04 4bits) * 0x00 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: Comm. Log CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
07 Fax(Lower 4bits) * 0x00 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
09 4bits) * 0x00 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
11 Devicemanagement(Lower * 0x00 / 0]
4bits)
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
21 4bits) * 0x00 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: uadministration CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
22 (Lower 4bits) * 0x00 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: Log Service (Lower CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
24 4bits) * 0x00 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Access Ctrl: Rest WebService CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
25 (Lower 4bits) * 0x00 / 0]
5-848-0 Web Service Reverse Proxy Server CTL [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
45 Setting(ESA Port) * 1]
5-848-0 Web Service 8080/51443 Port Open Time CTL [0 to 300 / 60 / 1]
46 *
5-848-0 Web Service Repository: Download Image CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
99 Setting * 0x00 / 1]
5-848-1 Web Service Repository: Download Image CTL [1 to 2048 / 2048 /
00 Max. Size * 1]
5-848-1 Web Service Log Operation Mode CTL [0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
50 *
5-848-1 Log Robustness Log Robustness Setting CTL [0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
60 *
5-848-1 Log Robustness Job Log Stagnation Status CTL [0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
61 *
5-848-1 Log Robustness Img Log Stagnation Status CTL [0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
62 *
5-848-1 Dummy Dummy1 CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
63 * 1]
5-848-1 Dummy Dummy2 CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
64 * 1]
5-848-2 LogTrans Setting: Timing CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
17 *
5-848-2 SysLogTrans Setting: Timing CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
18 *
5-848-2 SysLogTrans Primary srv port number CTL [1 to 65535 / 80 /
20 * 1]


CTL
5-848-2 SysLogTrans Check Cert CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
21 *
5-849-0 Installation Date Display CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 *
5-849-0 Installation Date Switch to Print CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
02 *
5-849-0 Installation Date Total Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0
03 * / 1]
5-850-0 Address Book Function Replacement of Circuit CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
03 Classifications
5-851-0 Bluetooth Mode CTL [0x00 to 0x01 /
01 * 0x00 / 1]
5-853-0 Stamp Data Download CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01
5-856-0 Remote ROM Update Local Port CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02
5-858-0 Collect Machine Info 0:OFF 1:ON CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
01
5-858-0 Collect Machine Info Save To (0:HDD 1:SD) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02
5-858-0 Collect Machine Info Make Log Trace Dir CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
03
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Failure Occuring Date CTL [0 to 20371212 / 0
01 / 1]
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Tracing Days CTL [1 to 180 / 2 /
02 1day]
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Address(0:OFF CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03 1:ON)
5-858-11 Collect Machine Info Acquire All Info & Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
1
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Configuration Page CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
21
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Font Page CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
22
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Print Setting List CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
23


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Error Log CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
24
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Info CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
31
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire All Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
41
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Controller Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
42 Only
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Engine Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
43 Only
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Opepanel Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
44 Only
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire FCU Debug Logs Only CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
45
5-858-1 Collect Machine Info Acquire Only Network Packets CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
46
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Partial Mail Receive Timeout CTL [1 to 168 / 72 /
20 * 1hour]
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 MDN Response RFC2298 CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
21 Compliance *
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. From Field CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
22 Replacement *
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting CTL [0 to 0xff / 0x0 / 1]
25 *
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 S/MIME:MIME Header Setting CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
26 *
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 S/MIME: Authentication Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
28 *
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Server 3G Line IP CTL [0 to 0xffffffff /
29 Address * 0x00 / ]
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP3/IMAP4 Select SSL CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
30 *
5-860-0 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP3/IMAP4 Server CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
31 Verification *
5-861-2 Account Setting Send Domain1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 *


CTL
02 *
03 *
5-866-0 E-Mail Report Report Validity CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01
5-866-0 E-Mail Report Add Date Field CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
05 *
5-866-1 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:3G Line Validity CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
09 *
5-866-1 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Validity CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
10 *
5-866-11 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Destination CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
1 Registration *
5-866-1 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Test CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
12 *
5-866-1 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Next Send Date CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
13 *
5-866-1 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Date CTL [0 to 31 / 0 / 1]
14 Setting *
5-866-1 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Time CTL [0 to 2359 / 0 / 1]
15 Setting *
5-866-1 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Destination1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
21 *
22 *
23 *
5-870-0 Common KeyInfo Writing CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Writing
5-870-0 Common KeyInfo Initialize CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
03 Writing
5-870-0 Common Key Info Writing: 2048bit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
04 Writing
5-873-0 SDCardAppliMove MoveExec CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
01


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-873-0 SDCardAppliMove UndoExec CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
02
5-875-0 SC Auto Reboot Reboot Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-875-0 SC Auto Reboot Reboot Type CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
02 *
5-878-0 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01
5-878-0 Option Setup OCR Dictionary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
04
5-881-0 Fixed Phrase Block CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 Erasing
5-885-0 Set WIM Function DocSvr Acc Ctrl CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
20 * 0x00 / 0]
5-885-0 Set WIM Function DocSvr Format CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
50 *
5-885-0 Set WIM Function DocSvr Trans CTL [5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
51 *
5-885-1 Set WIM Function Set Signature CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
00 *
5-885-1 Set WIM Function Set Encrypsion CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 *
5-885-2 Set WIM Function Detect Mem Leak CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
00 * 0x00 / 0]
5-885-2 Set WIM Function MonitorDisable CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
05 *
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Skip Version Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
00
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Skip LR Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Skip LR/CS Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02
5-886-11 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1 *
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Term CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
12 Setting *


CTL
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Start hour CTL [0 to 23 / 9 /
13 * 1hour]
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit End hour CTL [0 to 23 / 17 /
14 * 1hour]
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting SFU Auto Download Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
15 *
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Next Date CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
16 *
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Retry Interval Hour CTL [1 to 24 / 1 /
17 * 1hour]
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Day of CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
20 Week Setting *
5-886-1 Firmware Setting AutoUpdateConnectTestExe CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
21 *
5-886-1 Firmware Setting AutoUpdateConnectTestResult CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
22 *
5-886-1 Firmware Setting AutoUpdateConnectTestResult CTL [-32768 to 32767 /
23 _Exp1 * 0 / 1]
24 _Exp2 * 0 / 1]
25 _Exp3 * 0 / 1]
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Power Off Update CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
26 Setting *
5-886-1 Farm Update Setting Auto Update User Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
27 Enable *
5-886-2 Farm Update Setting Restore Date CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 *
5-886-2 Farm Update Setting Save Old Version List CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
02
5-887-0 SD GetCounter CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01
5-888-0 Personal Information CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Protect *
5-893-0 SDK Application SDK-1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
01 Counter


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
02 Counter
03 Counter
04 Counter
05 Counter
06 Counter
07 Counter
08 Counter
09 Counter
10 Counter
11 Counter
12 Counter
5-895-0 Application invalidation Printer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
01
5-895-0 Application invalidation Scanner CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
02
5-907-0 Plug & Play CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
01 Maker/Model Name *
5-913-0 Switchover Permission Print Application Timer CTL [0 to 30 / 3 / 1]
02 Time *
5-967-0 Copy Server : Set (0:ON 1:OFF) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
01 Function *
5-973-1 User Stamp Frame deletion setting CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
01 Registration *
5-985-0 Device Setting On Board NIC CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
01


CTL
5-985-0 Device Setting On Board USB CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
02
5-990-0 SP Print Mode All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
01
5-990-0 SP Print Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
02
5-990-0 SP Print Mode User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
03
5-990-0 SP Print Mode Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
04
5-990-0 SP Print Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
05
5-990-0 SP Print Mode Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
06
5-990-0 SP Print Mode NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
07
5-990-0 SP Print Mode Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
08
5-990-0 SMC Print Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
21
5-990-0 SP Print Mode Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
22
5-990-0 SP Print Mode Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
23
5-990-0 SP Print Mode SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
24
5-990-0 SP Print Mode SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
25
5-990-0 SP Print Mode Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
26
5-990-0 SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
27
5-990-0 SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
28
5-990-0 SMC Print Smart UP Print CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
29


Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
5-990-0 SP Print Mode SC Jam Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
51
5-992-0 SP Text Mode All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
01
5-992-0 SP Text Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
02
5-992-0 SP Text Mode User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
03
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
04
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
05
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
06
5-992-0 SP Text Mode NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
07
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
08
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
21
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
22
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
23
5-992-0 SP Text Mode SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
24
5-992-0 SP Text Mode SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
25
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
26
5-992-0 SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
27
5-992-0 SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
28
5-992-0 SP Text Mode Smart UP Print CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
29


CTL
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
01
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
02
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
03
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
04
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
05
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
06
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
07
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
08
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
21
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
22
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
23
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
24
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
25
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
26
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
27
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
28
5-993-0 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Smart UP Print CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
29

Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
SP No. Large Small Category ENG or [Min to
Category CTL Max/Init./Step]
6-830-001 Extra Staples 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
6-830-002 Extra Saddles 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
6-830-003 Extra Half-Fold 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
6-830-006 Extra MultiFold(Folder) CTL* [0 to 5 / 0 / 1]
6-890-001 Function Z-Fold 0:No Punch CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Enabled 1:Punching OK


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-334-001 Function Use Orig. Orien. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-002 Function Use Reverse Orien. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-003 Function Use All Job Stop CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-004 Function Use Copy Quality CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-005 Function Use Mag. FixRatio CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-006 Function Use Mag. Ratio CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-007 Function Use Size Mag. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-008 Function Use Direct. Mag. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-009 Function Use Dir. Size Mag. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-010 Function Use Auto Reduce/Enlarge CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-011 Function Use Create Margin CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-012 Function Use OneSideDpx CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-013 Function Use Cover CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-014 Function Use Chapter CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-015 Function Use SlipSheet CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-016 Function Use EraseCenter CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-017 Function Use EraseFrame CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-018 Function Use MarginAdj CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-019 Function Use Centering CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-020 Function Use Double CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-021 Function Use Repeat CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-022 Function Use Mirror CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-023 Function Use Negative CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-024 Function Use NumberingStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-025 Function Use Stmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-026 Function Use UserStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-027 Function Use DateStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-028 Function Use PageStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-029 Function Use CharStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-030 Function Use CharNumStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-031 Function Use PatternPrint CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-032 Function Use ReserveCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-033 Function Use IntCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-034 Function Use ProgramCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-035 Function Use SampleCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-036 Function Use OriginalReturn CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-037 Function Use FullColor CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-038 Function Use TwoColor CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-039 Function Use SingleColor CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-040 Function Use MonoColor CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-041 Function Use Acs CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-042 Function Use Accessibility CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-043 Function Use SmallSizeMode CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-334-044 Function Use Glossy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
Count 0 / 0]
7-335-001 Total Job Count LegacyCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
0 / 0]
7-335-002 Total Job Count SmartCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
0 / 0]
7-335-003 Total Job Count SmartCopy Ful. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
0 / 0]
7-335-004 Total Job Count SimpleCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
0 / 0]
7-335-005 Total Job Count OtherCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
0 / 0]
7-401-001 Total SC SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0]
7-401-002 Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0]
7-403-001 SC History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
7-403-002 SC History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-404-001 Software Error Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
History
7-404-002 Software Error Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
History
History
History
History
History
History
History
History
History
7-502-001 Total Paper Jam Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0]
7-502-002 Total Paper Jam Total Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0]
7-503-001 Total Original Jam Original Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0]
7-503-002 Total Original Jam Total Original Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
/ 0]
7-504-001 Paper Jam At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-003 Paper Jam 1stPaperFeedSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
7-504-007 Paper Jam LCIT:PaperFeedSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-008 Paper Jam 1stVerticalTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
7-504-012 Paper Jam RelaySN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-013 Paper Jam RegistrationSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-014 Paper Jam FusingExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-015 Paper Jam ExitUnitEntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-016 Paper Jam PaperExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-019 Paper Jam DuplexEntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-020 Paper Jam DuplexTransportSN1:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
7-504-023 Paper Jam DuplexInvertExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-024 Paper Jam PaperTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-034 Paper Jam BypassPaperFeedSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-053 Paper Jam 1stPaperFeedSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
7-504-057 Paper Jam LCIT:PaperFeedSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-058 Paper Jam 1stVerticalTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
7-504-062 Paper Jam RelaySN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-063 Paper Jam RegistrationSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-066 Paper Jam PaperExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-069 Paper Jam DuplexEntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-071 Paper Jam DuplexTransportSN2:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Location / 0]
7-504-072 Paper Jam DuplexTransportSN3:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-074 Paper Jam PaperTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-100 Paper Jam 3KFIN:EntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-101 Paper Jam 3KFIN:EntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-102 Paper Jam 3KFIN:ProofTrayExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-103 Paper Jam 3KFIN:ProofTrayExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-104 Paper Jam 3KFIN:ShiftTrayExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-105 Paper Jam 3KFIN:ShiftTrayExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-106 Paper Jam 3KFIN:StaplePaperExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-107 Paper Jam 3KFIN:StaplePaperExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-108 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PreStackPaperSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-109 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PreStackPaperSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-110 Paper Jam 3KFIN:Feed Out Jam CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-111 Paper Jam 3KFIN:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-112 Paper Jam 3KFIN:TrayUpperLowerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-113 Paper Jam 3KFIN:JoggerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-114 Paper Jam 3KFIN:ShiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-115 Paper Jam 3KFIN:StapleMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Location / 0]
7-504-116 Paper Jam 3KFIN:FeedOutBeltMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-117 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PunchingMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-118 Paper Jam 3KFIN:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-119 Paper Jam 3KFIN:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-120 Paper Jam 3KFIN:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-121 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PaperTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-122 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PaperTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-123 Paper Jam 3KFIN:ProofTrayJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-124 Paper Jam 3KFIN:StaplerJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-125 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PrestackJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-126 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PrestackStopperMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-127 Paper Jam 3KFIN:Drag-inMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-128 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PaperHoldCenterMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-129 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PaperHoldFrontMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-130 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PaperHoldRearMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-131 Paper Jam 3KFIN:StaplerFrontRearMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-132 Paper Jam 3KFIN:StaplerRotationMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-133 Paper Jam 3KFIN:LeadEdgeStopperMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Location / 0]
7-504-134 Paper Jam 3KFIN:JoggerBottomFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-135 Paper Jam 3KFIN:ExitOpenCloseMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-136 Paper Jam 3KFIN:Drag-inDriveMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-137 Paper Jam 3KFIN:PunchUnitMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-138 Paper Jam 3KFIN:JoggerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-139 Paper Jam 3KFIN:JoggerTopFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-149 Paper Jam GBC PunchUnit CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-150 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:EntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-151 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:EntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-152 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:HorizontalTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-153 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:HorizontalTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-154 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:SwitchbackTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-155 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:SwitchbackTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-156 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:ProofTrayExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-157 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:ProofTrayExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-158 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:ShiftTrayExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-159 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:ShiftTrayExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-160 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:BookletExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Location / 0]
7-504-161 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:BookletExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-162 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:EntranceTrans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-163 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:HorizontalTrans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-164 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:Pre-stackTrans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-165 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:Trans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-166 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:ExitMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-167 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PaperStackingHolderMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-168 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PaperExitGatePlateMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-169 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PunchDriveMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-170 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PunchUnitMovementMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-171 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PunchRegistrationMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-172 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:LowerJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-173 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:JoggerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-174 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PositioningRollerShiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-175 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:Feed-outBeltMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-176 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:CornerStaplerMovementMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-177 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:CornerStaplerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-178 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:BookletJoggerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Location / 0]
7-504-179 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:BookletJoggingPawlMoveMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-180 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:BookletBottomFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-181 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:BookletStaplerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-182 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:ShiftRollerDriveMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-183 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:FoldTrans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-184 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PressFoldMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-185 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:TrayLiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-186 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:ShiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-187 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:FrontFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-188 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:RearFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-189 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:FenceLiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-190 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:StackingSpongeRollerLiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-191 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:LeadingEdgeGuideMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-192 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PositioningRollerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-193 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:PaperGuideMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-194 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-195 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-196 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Location / 0]
7-504-197 Paper Jam 2K/3KFIN:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-200 Paper Jam MultiFold:EntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-201 Paper Jam MultiFold:EntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-202 Paper Jam MultiFold:TopTrayExtSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-203 Paper Jam MultiFold:TopTrayExtSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-204 Paper Jam MultiFold:HorizPathExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-205 Paper Jam MultiFold:HorizPathExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-206 Paper Jam MultiFold:StopperSN1:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-207 Paper Jam MultiFold:StopperSN1:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
7-504-212 Paper Jam MultiFold:SkewCorrect CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-213 Paper Jam MultiFold:TopTrayTransport CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-214 Paper Jam MultiFold:EntranceJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-215 Paper Jam MultiFold:StopperMtr1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
7-504-218 Paper Jam MultiFold:DynamicRollerLiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-219 Paper Jam MultiFold:RegistRollerReleaseMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-220 Paper Jam MultiFold:FoldPlateMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-221 Paper Jam MultiFold:JoggerFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-222 Paper Jam MultiFold:DirectSendJGHPMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-223 Paper Jam MultiFold:FM6PawlMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-224 Paper Jam MultiFold:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-225 Paper Jam MultiFold:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-226 Paper Jam MultiFold:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-227 Paper Jam MultiFold:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-230 Paper Jam CoverFeeder:PaperFeedSN:Off/On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-231 Paper Jam CoverFeeder:PaperExitSN:Off/On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-232 Paper Jam CoverFeeder:BottomPlateMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-240 Paper Jam MultiFold:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-241 Paper Jam MultiFold:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-242 Paper Jam MultiFold:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-243 Paper Jam MultiFold:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Location / 0]
7-504-244 Paper Jam MultiFold:EntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-245 Paper Jam MultiFold:EntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-246 Paper Jam MultiFold:PreRegist.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-247 Paper Jam MultiFold:PreRegist.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-248 Paper Jam MultiFold:Registration SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-249 Paper Jam MultiFold:Registration SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-250 Paper Jam MultiFold:StackPaperSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-251 Paper Jam MultiFold:StackPaperSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-252 Paper Jam MultiFold:FWD/RVS SN1:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-253 Paper Jam MultiFold:FWD/RVS SN1:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-254 Paper Jam MultiFold:FWD/RVS SN2:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-504-255 Paper Jam MultiFold:FWD/RVS SN2:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-505-001 Original Jam At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-013 Original Jam SeparationSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-014 Original Jam SkewCorrectionSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-015 Original Jam ScanEntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-016 Original Jam RegistrationSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-017 Original Jam OriginalExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Detection / 0]
7-505-063 Original Jam SeparationSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-064 Original Jam SkewCorrectionSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-065 Original Jam ScanEntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-066 Original Jam RegistrationSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-067 Original Jam OriginalExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-099 Original Jam Double Feed Detection CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-505-239 Original Jam Original Pull CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0]
7-506-005 Jam Count by A4 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-006 Jam Count by A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-014 Jam Count by B5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-038 Jam Count by LT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-044 Jam Count by HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-132 Jam Count by A3 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
Paper Size / 0]
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-141 Jam Count by B4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-142 Jam Count by B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-160 Jam Count by DLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-164 Jam Count by LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-166 Jam Count by LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-172 Jam Count by HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-506-255 Jam Count by Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Paper Size / 0]
7-507-001 Plotter Jam Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
History
7-507-002 Plotter Jam Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
History
History
History
History
History
History
History
History
History
7-508-001 Original Jam Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
History
7-508-002 Original Jam Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
History
History


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
History
History
History
History
History
History
History
7-509-001 Paper Jam MultiFold:Crease SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-002 Paper Jam MultiFold:Crease SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-003 Paper Jam MultiFold:BridgePaperExitSn:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-004 Paper Jam MultiFold:BridgePaperExitSn:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-005 Paper Jam MultiFold:PaperExitTrayPaperSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-006 Paper Jam MultiFold:PaperExitTrayPaperSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-007 Paper Jam MultiFold:PaperEntranceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-008 Paper Jam MultiFold:PreRegistMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-009 Paper Jam MultiFold:RegistrationMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-010 Paper Jam MultiFold:StackPaperMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-011 Paper Jam MultiFold:FoldingMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-012 Paper Jam MultiFold:FED/RVSMtr2 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Location / 0]
7-509-013 Paper Jam MultiFold:CreaseMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-014 Paper Jam MultiFold:PaperTransportMtr1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-015 Paper Jam MultiFold:PaperTransportMtr2 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-016 Paper Jam MultiFold:PaperExitTrayMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-017 Paper Jam MultiFold:EntranceJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-018 Paper Jam MultiFold:PaperExitJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-019 Paper Jam MultiFold:FoldingJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-020 Paper Jam MultiFold:Anti-windingMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-025 Paper Jam Sorter:TransportSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-026 Paper Jam Sorter:LiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-027 Paper Jam Sorter:ShiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-028 Paper Jam Sorter:VerticalTransporSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-029 Paper Jam Sorter:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-030 Paper Jam Sorter:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-031 Paper Jam Sorter:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-032 Paper Jam Sorter:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-095 Paper Jam MBOX:VerticalTransportSN1:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-096 Paper Jam MBOX:VerticalTransportSN1:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
Location / 0]
7-509-105 Paper Jam MBOX:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-509-255 Paper Jam NoResponse CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0]
7-514-001 Paper Jam Count At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-003 Paper Jam Count 1stPaperFeedSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
7-514-007 Paper Jam Count LCIT:PaperFeedSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-008 Paper Jam Count 1stVerticalTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
7-514-012 Paper Jam Count RelaySN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-013 Paper Jam Count RegistrationSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-014 Paper Jam Count FusingExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-015 Paper Jam Count ExitUnitEntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-016 Paper Jam Count PaperExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-019 Paper Jam Count DuplexEntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-020 Paper Jam Count DuplexTransportSN1:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
7-514-023 Paper Jam Count DuplexInvertExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-024 Paper Jam Count PaperTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-034 Paper Jam Count BypassPaperFeedSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-053 Paper Jam Count 1stPaperFeedSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
by Location / 0]
7-514-057 Paper Jam Count LCIT:PaperFeedSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-058 Paper Jam Count 1stVerticalTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
7-514-062 Paper Jam Count RelaySN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-063 Paper Jam Count RegistrationSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-066 Paper Jam Count PaperExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-069 Paper Jam Count DuplexEntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-071 Paper Jam Count DuplexTransportSN2:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-072 Paper Jam Count DuplexTransportSN3:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-074 Paper Jam Count PaperTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-100 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:EntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-101 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:EntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-102 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:ProofTrayExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-103 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:ProofTrayExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-104 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:ShiftTrayExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-105 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:ShiftTrayExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
by Location / 0]
7-514-106 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:StaplePaperExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-107 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:StaplePaperExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-108 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PreStackPaperSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-109 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PreStackPaperSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-110 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:Feed Out Jam CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-111 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-112 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:TrayUpperLowerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-113 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:JoggerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-114 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:ShiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-115 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:StapleMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-116 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:FeedOutBeltMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-117 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PunchingMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-118 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-119 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-120 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-121 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PaperTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-122 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PaperTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-123 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:ProofTrayJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
by Location / 0]
7-514-124 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:StaplerJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-125 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PrestackJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-126 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PrestackStopperMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-127 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:Drag-inMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-128 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PaperHoldCenterMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-129 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PaperHoldFrontMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-130 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PaperHoldRearMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-131 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:StaplerFrontRearMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-132 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:StaplerRotationMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-133 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:LeadEdgeStopperMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-134 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:JoggerBottomFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-135 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:ExitOpenCloseMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-136 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:Drag-inDriveMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-137 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:PunchUnitMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-138 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:JoggerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-139 Paper Jam Count 3KFIN:JoggerTopFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-149 Paper Jam Count GBC PunchUnit CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-150 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:EntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
by Location / 0]
7-514-151 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:EntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-152 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:HorizontalTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-153 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:HorizontalTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-154 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:SwitchbackTrans.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-155 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:SwitchbackTrans.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-156 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:ProofTrayExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-157 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:ProofTrayExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-158 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:ShiftTrayExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-159 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:ShiftTrayExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-160 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:BookletExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-161 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:BookletExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-162 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:EntranceTrans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-163 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:HorizontalTrans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-164 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:Pre-stackTrans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-165 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:Trans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-166 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:ExitMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-167 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PaperStackingHolderMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-168 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PaperExitGatePlateMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
by Location / 0]
7-514-169 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PunchDriveMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-170 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PunchUnitMovementMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-171 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PunchRegistrationMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-172 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:LowerJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-173 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:JoggerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-174 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PositioningRollerShiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-175 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:Feed-outBeltMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-176 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:CornerStaplerMovementMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-177 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:CornerStaplerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-178 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:BookletJoggerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-179 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:BookletJoggingPawlMoveMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-180 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:BookletBottomFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-181 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:BookletStaplerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-182 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:ShiftRollerDriveMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-183 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:FoldTrans.Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-184 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PressFoldMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-185 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:TrayLiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-186 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:ShiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
by Location / 0]
7-514-187 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:FrontFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-188 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:RearFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-189 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:FenceLiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-190 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:StackingSpongeRollerLiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-191 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:LeadingEdgeGuideMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-192 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PositioningRollerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-193 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:PaperGuideMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-194 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-195 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-196 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-197 Paper Jam Count 2K/3KFIN:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-200 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:EntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-201 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:EntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-202 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:TopTrayExtSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-203 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:TopTrayExtSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-204 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:HorizPathExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-205 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:HorizPathExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-206 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:StopperSN1:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
by Location / 0]
7-514-207 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:StopperSN1:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
7-514-212 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:SkewCorrect CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-213 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:TopTrayTransport CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-214 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:EntranceJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-215 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:StopperMtr1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
7-514-218 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:DynamicRollerLiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-219 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:RegistRollerReleaseMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-220 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FoldPlateMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-221 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:JoggerFenceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-222 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:DirectSendJGHPMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-223 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FM6PawlMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-224 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
by Location / 0]
7-514-225 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-226 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-227 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-230 Paper Jam Count CoverFeeder:PaperFeedSN:Off/On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-231 Paper Jam Count CoverFeeder:PaperExitSN:Off/On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-232 Paper Jam Count CoverFeeder:BottomPlateMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-240 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-241 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-242 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-243 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-244 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:EntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-245 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:EntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-246 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PreRegist.SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-247 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PreRegist.SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-248 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Registration SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-249 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Registration SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-250 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:StackPaperSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-251 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:StackPaperSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
by Location / 0]
7-514-252 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FWD/RVS SN1:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-253 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FWD/RVS SN1:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-254 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FWD/RVS SN2:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-514-255 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FWD/RVS SN2:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-515-001 Original Jam At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-013 Original Jam SeparationSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-014 Original Jam SkewCorrectionSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-015 Original Jam ScanEntranceSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-016 Original Jam RegistrationSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-017 Original Jam OriginalExitSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-063 Original Jam SeparationSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-064 Original Jam SkewCorrectionSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-065 Original Jam ScanEntranceSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
7-515-066 Original Jam RegistrationSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-067 Original Jam OriginalExitSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-099 Original Jam Double Feed Detection CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-515-239 Original Jam Original Pull CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count by / 0]
Detection
7-516-005 Paper Size Jam A4 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-006 Paper Size Jam A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-014 Paper Size Jam B5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-038 Paper Size Jam LT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-044 Paper Size Jam HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-132 Paper Size Jam A3 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
Count / 0]
Count / 0]
7-516-141 Paper Size Jam B4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-142 Paper Size Jam B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-160 Paper Size Jam DLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-164 Paper Size Jam LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-516-166 Paper Size Jam LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-172 Paper Size Jam HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-516-255 Paper Size Jam Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Count / 0]
7-519-001 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Crease SN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-002 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Crease SN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-003 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:BridgePaperExitSn:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-004 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:BridgePaperExitSn:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-005 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PaperExitTrayPaperSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-006 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PaperExitTrayPaperSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-007 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PaperEntranceMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-008 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PreRegistMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-009 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:RegistrationMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-010 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:StackPaperMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-011 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FoldingMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-012 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FED/RVSMtr2 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-013 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:CreaseMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-014 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PaperTransportMtr1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-015 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PaperTransportMtr2 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
7-519-016 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PaperExitTrayMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-017 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:EntranceJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-018 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:PaperExitJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-019 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:FoldingJGMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-020 Paper Jam Count MultiFold:Anti-windingMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-025 Paper Jam Count Sorter:TransportSN:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-026 Paper Jam Count Sorter:LiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-027 Paper Jam Count Sorter:ShiftMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-028 Paper Jam Count Sorter:VerticalTransporSN:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-029 Paper Jam Count Sorter:Door Open CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-030 Paper Jam Count Sorter:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-031 Paper Jam Count Sorter:Unusable Paper CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-032 Paper Jam Count Sorter:Internal Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-095 Paper Jam Count MBOX:VerticalTransportSN1:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-096 Paper Jam Count MBOX:VerticalTransportSN1:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
by Location / 0]
7-519-105 Paper Jam Count MBOX:Job Data Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-519-255 Paper Jam Count NoResponse CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
by Location / 0]
7-520-001 Update Log ErrorRecord1 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
7-520-011 Update Log Auto:StartDate1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
7-520-021 Update Log Auto:EndDate1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-520-031 Update Log Auto:Piecemark1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-520-041 Update Log Auto:Version1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-520-051 Update Log Auto:Result1 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1]
1]
7-617-001 PM Parts Counter Normal CTL* [0 to 9999999
Display / 0 / 0]
7-617-002 PM Parts Counter Df CTL* [0 to 9999999
Display / 0 / 0]
7-618-001 PM Parts Counter Normal CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Reset
7-618-002 PM Parts Counter Df CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Reset
7-624-001 Part Replacement Developer CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-002 Part Replacement Hot Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-003 Part Replacement Pressure Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-004 Part Replacement Hot Roller Bearings CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-005 Part Replacement Pressure Roller Bearings CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-006 Part Replacement Hot Roller Strippers CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-007 Part Replacement Cleaning Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-008 Part Replacement Cleaning Roller Bearings CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-009 Part Replacement Web Roll CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-010 Part Replacement Web Cleaning Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-011 Part Replacement Development Filter CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-012 Part Replacement Toner Recycling Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-013 Part Replacement Pressure Release Filter CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-014 Part Replacement Charge Corona Wire CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-015 Part Replacement Grid Plate CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-016 Part Replacement Cleaning Pad CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-017 Part Replacement Clearning Blead CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-018 Part Replacement Cleaning Brush CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-019 Part Replacement Transfer Belt CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-020 Part Replacement Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-022 Part Replacement ADF Pick-up Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-023 Part Replacement ADF Feed Belt CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-024 Part Replacement ADF Separation Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-025 Part Replacement Feed Roller-Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-026 Part Replacement Pick-up Roller-Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-027 Part Replacement Separation Roller-Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-037 Part Replacement Feed Roller-LCT CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-038 Part Replacement Pick-up Roller-LCT CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-039 Part Replacement Separation Roller-LCT CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-040 Part Replacement Feed Belt Cover feeder CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-041 Part Replacement Pick-up Roller Cover feeder CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-042 Part Replacement Separation Roller Cover feeder CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-044 Part Replacement Fusing unit:Thermistor (Back) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-045 Part Replacement Fusing unit:Thermistor (Center) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-046 Part Replacement Dust Filter (Main) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-047 Part Replacement Main Tray (Custom 1) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-051 Part Replacement Paper Tray1 (Custom 1) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-059 Part Replacement LCT (Custom 1) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-060 Part Replacement LCT (Custom 2) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-063 Part Replacement Interposer (Custom 1) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-064 Part Replacement Interposer (Custom 2) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-065 Part Replacement Wast Toner Bottle CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-066 Part Replacement UFP Filter CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-624-067 Part Replacement sheet:paper crimp:folder CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Operation
ON/OFF
7-801-255 ROM No./ CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Firmware Version
7-803-001 PM Counter Paper CTL* [0 to 9999999
Display / 0 / 0]
7-804-001 PM Counter Paper CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Reset
7-807-001 SC/Jam Counter CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Reset
7-826-001 MF Error Counter Error Total CTL* [0 to 9999999
/ 0 / 0]
7-826-002 MF Error Counter Error Staple CTL* [0 to 9999999
/ 0 / 0]
7-827-001 MF Error Counter CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Clear
7-832-001 Self-Diagnose CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Result Display


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-836-001 Total Memory CTL [0 to 0xffffffff /
Size 0 / 0MB]
7-840-001 ServiceSP Entry Change Time :Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Code Chg Hist
7-840-002 ServiceSP Entry Change Time :Last1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Code Chg Hist
7-840-101 ServiceSP Entry Initialize Time :Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Code Chg Hist
7-840-102 ServiceSP Entry Initialize Time :Last1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
Code Chg Hist
7-841-001 HddSmartInfoNrs 1-9 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-841-004 HddSmartInfoNrs 28 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-841-051 HddSmartInfoSc 1-9 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-841-054 HddSmartInfoSc 28 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-901-001 Assert Info. File Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-901-002 Assert Info. Number of Lines CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-901-003 Assert Info. Location CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-001 ROM No System/Copy CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-002 ROM No Engine CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-003 ROM No Lcdc CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-005 ROM No ADF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-007 ROM No Finisher1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-009 ROM No Bank CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-010 ROM No LCT CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-011 ROM No Mail Box CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-012 ROM No FCU CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-018 ROM No NetworkSupport CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-020 ROM No Cover Interposer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-022 ROM No BIOS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-023 ROM No HDD Format Option CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-024 ROM No Capacitor CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
7-910-025 ROM No Folding Unit CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-150 ROM No RPCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-151 ROM No PS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-152 ROM No RPDL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-156 ROM No R55 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-157 ROM No RTIFF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-158 ROM No PCL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-159 ROM No PCLXL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-160 ROM No MSIS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-162 ROM No PDF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-165 ROM No PJL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-166 ROM No IPDS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-167 ROM No MediaPrint:JPEG CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-168 ROM No MediaPrint:TIFF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-169 ROM No XPS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-180 ROM No FONT CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-181 ROM No FONT1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-182 ROM No FONT2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-183 ROM No FONT3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-184 ROM No FONT4 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-185 ROM No FONT5 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-186 ROM No FONT6 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-187 ROM No FONT7 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-200 ROM No Factory CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-201 ROM No Copy CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-202 ROM No NetworkDocBox CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-203 ROM No Fax CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-204 ROM No Printer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-205 ROM No Scanner CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-206 ROM No RFax CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-210 ROM No MIB CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-211 ROM No Websupport CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-212 ROM No WebUapl CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-213 ROM No SDK1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-214 ROM No SDK2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-910-215 ROM No SDK3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-910-250 ROM No Package CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-001 Firmware Version System/Copy CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-002 Firmware Version Engine CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-003 Firmware Version Lcdc CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-005 Firmware Version ADF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-007 Firmware Version Finisher1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-009 Firmware Version Bank CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-010 Firmware Version LCT CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-011 Firmware Version Mail Box CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-012 Firmware Version FCU CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-018 Firmware Version NetworkSupport CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-020 Firmware Version Cover Interposer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-022 Firmware Version BIOS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-023 Firmware Version HDD Format Option CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-024 Firmware Version Capacitor CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-025 Firmware Version Folding Unit CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-150 Firmware Version RPCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-151 Firmware Version PS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-152 Firmware Version RPDL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-156 Firmware Version R55 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-157 Firmware Version RTIFF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-158 Firmware Version PCL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-159 Firmware Version PCLXL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-160 Firmware Version MSIS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-162 Firmware Version PDF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-165 Firmware Version PJL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-166 Firmware Version IPDS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-167 Firmware Version MediaPrint:JPEG CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-168 Firmware Version MediaPrint:TIFF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-169 Firmware Version XPS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-180 Firmware Version FONT CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-181 Firmware Version FONT1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


or Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
CTL
Mode Tables
Appendices
7-911-200 Firmware Version Factory CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-201 Firmware Version Copy CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-202 Firmware Version NetworkDocBox CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-203 Firmware Version Fax CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-204 Firmware Version Printer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-205 Firmware Version Scanner CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-206 Firmware Version RFax CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-210 Firmware Version MIB CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-211 Firmware Version Websupport CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-212 Firmware Version WebUapl CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-213 Firmware Version SDK1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
7-911-250 Firmware Version Package CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

3.4.1 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-001-001 T:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-002-001 C:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-003-001 F:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-004-001 P:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-005-001 S:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-006-001 L:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-011-001 T:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-012-001 C:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-013-001 F:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-014-001 P:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-015-001 S:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-016-001 L:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-017-001 O:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-021-001 T:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-022-001 C:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-023-001 F:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-024-001 P:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-025-001 S:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-026-001 L:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-027-001 O:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-031-001 T:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-032-001 C:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-033-001 F:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-034-001 P:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-035-001 S:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-036-001 L:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-037-001 O:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-041-001 T:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-042-001 C:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-043-001 F:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-044-001 P:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-045-001 S:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-046-001 L:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-047-001 O:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-051-001 T:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-052-001 C:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-053-001 F:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-054-001 P:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-055-001 S:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-056-001 L:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-057-001 O:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-001 T:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-002 T:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-003 T:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-004 T:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-005 T:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-006 T:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-007 T:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-008 T:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-009 T:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-010 T:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-011 T:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-012 T:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-061-013 T:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-061-014 T:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-015 T:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-061-016 T:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-001 C:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-002 C:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-003 C:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-004 C:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-005 C:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-006 C:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-007 C:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-008 C:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-009 C:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-010 C:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-011 C:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-012 C:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-013 C:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-014 C:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-062-015 C:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-062-016 C:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-001 F:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-002 F:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-003 F:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-004 F:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-005 F:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-006 F:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-007 F:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-008 F:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-009 F:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-010 F:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-011 F:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-012 F:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-013 F:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-014 F:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-015 F:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-063-016 F:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-001 P:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-064-002 P:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-064-003 P:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-004 P:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-005 P:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-006 P:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-007 P:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-008 P:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-009 P:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-010 P:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-011 P:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-012 P:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-013 P:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-014 P:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-015 P:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-064-016 P:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-001 S:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-002 S:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-003 S:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-004 S:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-065-005 S:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-006 S:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-007 S:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-008 S:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-009 S:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-010 S:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-011 S:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-012 S:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-013 S:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-014 S:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-015 S:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-065-016 S:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-001 L:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-002 L:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-003 L:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-004 L:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-005 L:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-006 L:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-066-007 L:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-066-008 L:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-009 L:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-010 L:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-011 L:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-012 L:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-013 L:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-014 L:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-015 L:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-066-016 L:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-001 O:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-002 O:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-003 O:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-004 O:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-005 O:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-006 O:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-007 O:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-008 O:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-009 O:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-067-010 O:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-011 O:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-012 O:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-013 O:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-014 O:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-015 O:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-067-016 O:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-071-001 T:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-071-002 T:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-071-006 T:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
8-071-014 T:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-072-001 C:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-072-002 C:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-072-006 C:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-072-014 C:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-073-001 F:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-073-002 F:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-073-006 F:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-073-014 F:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-074-001 P:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-074-002 P:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-074-006 P:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-074-014 P:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-075-001 S:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-075-002 S:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-075-006 S:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
1]
1]
8-075-014 S:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-076-001 L:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-076-002 L:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-076-006 L:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-076-014 L:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-077-001 O:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-077-002 O:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-077-006 O:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-077-014 O:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-081-001 T:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-082-001 C:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-083-001 F:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-084-001 P:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-085-001 S:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-001 T:Jobs/Driv V3 RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-091-002 T:Jobs/Driv V3 RPCS Basic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-003 T:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS Inbox CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-004 T:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-005 T:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-006 T:Jobs/Driv V3 XPS(RPCS) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-007 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-008 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PS UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-009 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PS UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-010 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PS UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-011 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PS UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-012 T:Jobs/Driv V3 GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-013 T:Jobs/Driv V3 GL/GL2 Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-014 T:Jobs/Driv V4 GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-015 T:Jobs/Driv PDF Direct CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-016 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-017 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL5e/5c Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-018 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-019 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-091-020 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-091-021 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PCL XL UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-022 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PCL XL UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-023 T:Jobs/Driv XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-024 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PC-Fax CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-025 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PC-Fax CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-091-026 T:Jobs/Driv Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-001 P:Jobs/Driv V3 RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-002 P:Jobs/Driv V3 RPCS Basic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-003 P:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS Inbox CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-004 P:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-005 P:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-006 P:Jobs/Driv V3 XPS(RPCS) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-007 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-008 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PS UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-009 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PS UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-010 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PS UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-011 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PS UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-012 P:Jobs/Driv V3 GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-094-013 P:Jobs/Driv V3 GL/GL2 Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-014 P:Jobs/Driv V4 GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-015 P:Jobs/Driv PDF Direct CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-016 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-017 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL5e/5c Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-018 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-019 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-020 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-021 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PCL XL UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-022 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PCL XL UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-023 P:Jobs/Driv XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-024 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PC-Fax CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-025 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PC-Fax CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-094-026 P:Jobs/Driv Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-111-001 T:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-111-101 T:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-113-001 F:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-113-101 F:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-121-001 T:IFAX TX Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-123-001 F:IFAX TX Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-131-001 T:S-to-Email Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-131-002 T:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-131-003 T:S-to-Email Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-135-001 S:S-to-Email Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-135-002 S:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-135-003 S:S-to-Email Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-141-001 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-141-002 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-141-003 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-145-001 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-145-002 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-145-003 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-151-001 T:Deliv Jobs/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-151-002 T:Deliv Jobs/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-151-003 T:Deliv Jobs/PC ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-155-001 S:Deliv Jobs/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-155-002 S:Deliv Jobs/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-155-003 S:Deliv Jobs/PC ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-161-001 T:PCFAX TX Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-163-001 F:PCFAX TX Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-171-001 T:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs/WSD/DSM 1]
8-171-002 T:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs/WSD/DSM 1]
8-171-003 T:Deliv ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs/WSD/DSM 1]
8-175-001 S:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs/WSD/DSM 1]
8-175-002 S:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs/WSD/DSM 1]
8-175-003 S:Deliv ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs/WSD/DSM 1]
8-181-001 T:Scan to Media Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-181-002 T:Scan to Media Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-181-003 T:Scan to Media Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-185-001 S:Scan to Media B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs 1]
8-185-002 S:Scan to Media Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs 1]
8-185-003 S:Scan to Media ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs 1]
8-191-001 T:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-192-001 C:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-193-001 F:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-195-001 S:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-196-001 L:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-201-001 T:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-203-001 F:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-205-001 S:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-211-001 T:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-212-001 C:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-213-001 F:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-215-001 S:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-216-001 L:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-221-001 ADF Org Feeds Front CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-221-002 ADF Org Feeds Back CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-231-001 Scan PGS/Mode Large Volume CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-231-002 Scan PGS/Mode SADF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-231-003 Scan PGS/Mode Mixed Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-231-004 Scan PGS/Mode Custom Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-231-005 Scan PGS/Mode Platen CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-231-006 Scan PGS/Mode Mixed 1side/2side CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-231-007 Scan PGS/Mode ID card Feeder CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-241-001 T:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-002 T:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-003 T:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-004 T:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-005 T:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-006 T:Scan PGS/Org Normal/Detail CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-007 T:Scan PGS/Org Fine/Super Fine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-008 T:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-009 T:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-010 T:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-241-011 T:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-242-001 C:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-242-002 C:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-242-003 C:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-242-004 C:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-242-005 C:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-242-011 C:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-243-001 F:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-243-002 F:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-243-003 F:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-243-006 F:Scan PGS/Org Normal/Detail CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-243-007 F:Scan PGS/Org Fine/Super Fine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-243-011 F:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-245-001 S:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-245-002 S:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-245-003 S:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-245-004 S:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-245-008 S:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-245-009 S:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-245-010 S:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-245-011 S:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-246-001 L:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-246-002 L:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-246-003 L:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-246-004 L:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-246-005 L:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-246-011 L:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-251-001 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-252-001 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-255-001 S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-256-001 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-257-001 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-281-001 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-285-001 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-291-001 T:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-293-001 F:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-295-001 S:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-301-001 T:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-301-004 T:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-301-005 T:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-301-006 T:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-301-007 T:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-301-008 T:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-301-009 T:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-301-010 T:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-301-254 T:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-301-255 T:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-001 C:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-302-004 C:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-005 C:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-006 C:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-007 C:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-008 C:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-009 C:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-010 C:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-254 C:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-302-255 C:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-001 F:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-303-004 F:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-005 F:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-006 F:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-007 F:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-008 F:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-009 F:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-010 F:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-254 F:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-303-255 F:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-305-001 S:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-305-004 S:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-305-005 S:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-305-006 S:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-305-007 S:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-305-008 S:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-305-009 S:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-305-010 S:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-305-254 S:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-305-255 S:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-001 L:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-306-004 L:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-005 L:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-006 L:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-007 L:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-008 L:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-009 L:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-010 L:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-254 L:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-306-255 L:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-311-001 T:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-311-002 T:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-311-005 T:Scan PGS/Rez ~199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-315-001 S:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-315-002 S:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-315-005 S:Scan PGS/Rez ~199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-321-001 T:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-322-001 C:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-326-001 L:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-381-001 T:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-381-101 T:Total PrtPGS DFE:Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-382-001 C:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-383-001 F:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-384-001 P:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-384-101 P:Total PrtPGS DFE:Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-385-001 S:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-386-001 L:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-387-001 O:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-391-001 LSize PrtPGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-401-001 T:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-402-001 C:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-403-001 F:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-404-001 P:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-405-001 S:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-406-001 L:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-411-001 Prints/Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-421-001 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-421-002 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-421-003 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-421-004 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-421-005 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-421-006 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-421-012 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-421-013 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-421-014 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-421-019 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-422-001 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-422-002 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-422-003 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-422-004 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-422-005 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-422-006 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-422-012 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-422-013 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-422-014 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-422-019 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-423-001 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-423-004 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-423-005 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-423-006 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-423-012 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-423-013 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-423-014 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-423-019 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-424-001 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-424-004 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-424-005 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-424-006 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-424-012 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-424-013 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-424-014 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-424-019 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-425-001 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-425-004 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-425-005 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-425-006 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-425-012 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-425-013 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-425-014 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-425-019 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-426-001 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-426-004 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-426-005 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-426-006 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-426-012 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-426-013 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-426-014 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-426-019 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-427-001 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-427-002 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-427-003 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-427-004 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-427-005 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-427-006 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-427-012 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-427-013 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-427-014 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-427-019 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
1]
8-431-001 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-431-002 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-431-003 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-432-001 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-432-002 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-432-003 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-434-001 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-434-002 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-434-003 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-436-001 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-436-002 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-436-003 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-437-001 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-437-002 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-437-003 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-001 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
1]
1]
8-441-004 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-005 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-006 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-007 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-008 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-009 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-010 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-254 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-441-255 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-442-001 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-442-004 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-442-005 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-442-006 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-442-007 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-442-008 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-442-009 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-442-010 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-442-254 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-442-255 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-001 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-443-004 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-005 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-006 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-007 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-008 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-009 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-010 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-254 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-443-255 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-001 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
1]
8-444-004 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-005 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-006 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-007 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-008 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-009 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-010 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-254 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-444-255 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-445-001 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-445-004 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-445-005 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-445-006 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-445-007 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-445-008 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-445-009 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-445-010 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-445-254 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-445-255 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-001 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-446-004 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-005 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-006 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-007 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-008 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-009 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-010 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-254 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-446-255 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-001 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-447-004 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-005 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-006 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-007 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-008 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-009 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-010 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-254 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-447-255 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-451-001 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Bypass Tray CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-451-002 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-451-101 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray LC Inserter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-451-102 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-461-001 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-461-002 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-461-003 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-461-004 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-461-005 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-461-006 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-461-007 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-461-008 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-462-001 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-462-002 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-462-003 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-462-004 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-462-005 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-462-006 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-462-007 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-462-008 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-463-001 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-463-002 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-463-003 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-463-004 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-463-005 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-463-006 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-463-007 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-463-008 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-464-001 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-464-002 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-464-003 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-464-004 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-464-005 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-464-006 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-464-007 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-464-008 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-466-001 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-466-002 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-466-003 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-466-004 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-466-005 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-466-006 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-466-007 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-466-008 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-471-001 PrtPGS/Mag ~49% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-471-002 PrtPGS/Mag 50%~99% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-471-003 PrtPGS/Mag 100% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-471-004 PrtPGS/Mag 101%~200% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-471-005 PrtPGS/Mag 201% ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-481-001 T:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-484-001 P:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-511-001 T:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-002 T:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-003 T:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-004 T:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
8-511-006 T:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
8-511-008 T:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-009 T:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-010 T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-011 T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-012 T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-013 T:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-014 T:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-015 T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-016 T:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-017 T:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-018 T:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-511-019 T:PrtPGS/Emul PictBridge CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-511-020 T:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-021 T:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintJPEG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-022 T:PrtPGS/Emul GG PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-511-023 T:PrtPGS/Emul GG PCL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-001 P:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-002 P:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-003 P:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-004 P:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
8-514-006 P:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
8-514-008 P:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-009 P:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-010 P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-011 P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-012 P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-013 P:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-014 P:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-514-015 P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-016 P:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-017 P:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-018 P:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-019 P:PrtPGS/Emul PictBridge CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-020 P:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-021 P:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintJPEG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-022 P:PrtPGS/Emul GG PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-514-023 P:PrtPGS/Emul GG PCL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-001 T:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-002 T:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-003 T:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-004 T:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-005 T:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-006 T:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-007 T:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-008 T:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-009 T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-521-010 T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-521-011 T:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-012 T:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-013 T:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-014 T:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-015 T:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-521-016 T:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-001 C:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-002 C:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-003 C:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-004 C:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-005 C:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-006 C:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-007 C:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-008 C:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-009 C:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-010 C:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-011 C:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-012 C:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-522-013 C:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-014 C:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-015 C:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-522-016 C:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-001 F:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-002 F:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-003 F:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-004 F:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-005 F:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-006 F:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-007 F:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-008 F:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-009 F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-010 F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-011 F:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-012 F:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-013 F:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-523-014 F:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-523-015 F:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-523-016 F:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-001 P:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-002 P:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-003 P:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-004 P:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-005 P:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-006 P:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-007 P:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-008 P:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-009 P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-010 P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-011 P:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-012 P:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-013 P:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-014 P:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-015 P:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-524-016 P:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-001 S:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-525-002 S:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-003 S:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-004 S:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-005 S:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-006 S:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-007 S:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-008 S:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-009 S:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-010 S:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-011 S:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-012 S:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-013 S:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-014 S:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-015 S:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-525-016 S:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-001 L:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-002 L:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-003 L:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-526-004 L:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-526-005 L:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-006 L:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-007 L:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-008 L:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-009 L:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-010 L:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-011 L:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-012 L:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-013 L:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-014 L:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-015 L:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-526-016 L:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-531-001 Staple Staples CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-531-002 Staple Stapless CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-541-001 T:GPC Counter GPC Counter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-542-001 C:GPC Counter GPC Counter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-544-001 P:GPC Counter GPC Counter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-551-001 T:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-551-002 T:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-551-003 T:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-552-001 C:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-552-002 C:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-552-003 C:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-554-001 P:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-554-002 P:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-554-003 P:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-556-001 L:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-556-002 L:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-556-003 L:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-561-001 T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-561-002 T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-561-003 T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-561-004 T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-561-005 T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-561-006 T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-562-001 C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-562-002 C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-562-003 C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-562-004 C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-562-005 C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-562-006 C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-563-001 F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-563-002 F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-563-003 F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-563-004 F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-563-005 F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-563-006 F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-564-001 P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-564-002 P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-564-003 P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-564-004 P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-564-005 P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-564-006 P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-566-001 L:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-566-002 L:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-566-003 L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-566-004 L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-566-005 L:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-566-006 L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-567-001 O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-567-002 O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-567-003 O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-567-004 O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-567-005 O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-567-006 O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-581-001 T:Counter Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-581-032 T:Counter Total(A3) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-581-082 T:Counter Total(A3) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-582-011 C:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-582-012 C:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-582-013 C:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-582-014 C:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-582-027 C:Counter B/W:Simplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-582-028 C:Counter B/W:Duplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-582-035 C:Counter B/W:Simplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-582-036 C:Counter B/W:Duplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-583-011 F:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-583-012 F:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-583-013 F:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-583-014 F:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-583-027 F:Counter B/W:Simplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-583-028 F:Counter B/W:Duplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-583-035 F:Counter B/W:Simplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-583-036 F:Counter B/W:Duplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-584-011 P:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-584-012 P:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-584-013 P:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-584-014 P:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-584-027 P:Counter B/W:Simplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-584-028 P:Counter B/W:Duplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-584-035 P:Counter B/W:Simplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-584-036 P:Counter B/W:Duplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-585-001 S:Counter Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-585-002 S:Counter Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-586-011 L:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-586-012 L:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-586-013 L:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-586-014 L:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-586-027 L:Counter B/W:Simplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-586-028 L:Counter B/W:Duplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-586-035 L:Counter B/W:Simplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-586-036 L:Counter B/W:Duplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-587-011 O:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-587-012 O:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-587-013 O:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-587-014 O:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-587-027 O:Counter B/W:Simplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-587-028 O:Counter B/W:Duplex:A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-587-035 O:Counter B/W:Simplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-587-036 O:Counter B/W:Duplex:Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-591-001 O:Counter A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-591-002 O:Counter Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-601-001 T:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%]
8-601-011 T:Coverage Counter B/W Printing Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-602-001 C:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%]
8-603-001 F:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%]
8-604-001 P:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%]
8-606-001 L:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%]
8-617-001 SDK Apli Counter SDK-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
1]
8-621-001 Func Use Counter Function-001 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
1]
8-631-001 T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-631-101 T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-633-001 F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-633-101 F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-641-001 T:IFAX TX PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-643-001 F:IFAX TX PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-651-001 T:S-to-Email PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-651-002 T:S-to-Email PGS Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-655-001 S:S-to-Email PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-655-002 S:S-to-Email PGS Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-661-001 T:Deliv PGS/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-661-002 T:Deliv PGS/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-665-001 S:Deliv PGS/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-665-002 S:Deliv PGS/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-671-001 T:Deliv PGS/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-671-002 T:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-675-001 S:Deliv PGS/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-675-002 S:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-681-001 T:PCFAX TXPGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-683-001 F:PCFAX TXPGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-691-001 T:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-692-001 C:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-693-001 F:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-694-001 P:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-695-001 S:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-696-001 L:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-701-001 TX PGS/Port PSTN-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
1]
8-701-004 TX PGS/Port ISDN(G3,G4) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-701-005 TX PGS/Port Network CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-001 T:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-002 T:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-003 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-004 T:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-005 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-006 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-007 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-008 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-711-009 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-715-001 S:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-715-002 S:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-715-003 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-715-004 S:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-715-005 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-715-006 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-715-007 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-715-008 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-715-009 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-721-001 T:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
PGS/WSD/DSM 1]
8-721-002 T:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
PGS/WSD/DSM 1]
8-725-001 S:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
PGS/WSD/DSM 1]
8-725-002 S:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
PGS/WSD/DSM 1]
8-731-001 T:Scan PGS/Media B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-731-002 T:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-735-001 S:Scan PGS/Media B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-735-002 S:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-741-001 RX PGS/Port PSTN-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
1]
1]
8-741-004 RX PGS/Port ISDN(G3,G4) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-741-005 RX PGS/Port Network CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-771-001 Dev Counter Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-781-001 Toner_Botol_Info. BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-791-001 LS Memory Remain CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
Mode Tables
Appendices
8-801-001 Toner Remain K CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-001 Eco Counter Eco Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-004 Eco Counter Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-005 Eco Counter Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-008 Eco Counter Duplex(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-009 Eco Counter Combine(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-010 Eco Counter Paper Cut(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-051 Eco Counter Sync Eco Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-054 Eco Counter Sync Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-055 Eco Counter Sync Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-058 Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-059 Eco Counter Sync Combine(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-060 Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-101 Eco Counter Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-104 Eco Counter Duplex:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-105 Eco Counter Combine:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-108 Eco Counter Duplex(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-109 Eco Counter Combine(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-110 Eco Counter Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-151 Eco Counter Sync Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-154 Eco Counter Sync Duplex:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-155 Eco Counter Sync Combine:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-811-158 Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-811-159 Eco Counter Sync Combine(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-811-160 Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
8-851-011 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 0~2%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-851-021 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 3~4%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-851-031 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 5~7%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-851-041 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-861-001 Cvr Cnt:11-20% BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-871-001 Cvr Cnt:21-30% BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-881-001 Cvr Cnt:31%- BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-891-001 Page/Toner Bottle BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-901-001 Page/Toner_Prev1 BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-911-001 Page/Toner_Prev2 BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-921-001 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):BK CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%]
8-921-011 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-941-001 Machine Status Operation Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-941-002 Machine Status Standby Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-941-003 Machine Status Energy Save Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-941-004 Machine Status Low Power Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-941-005 Machine Status Off Mode Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-941-006 Machine Status SC CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-941-007 Machine Status PrtJam CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-941-008 Machine Status OrgJam CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-941-009 Machine Status Supply PM Unit End CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-951-001 AddBook Register User Code /User ID CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
8-951-002 AddBook Register Mail Address CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
8-951-003 AddBook Register Fax Destination CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
8-951-004 AddBook Register Group CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
8-951-005 AddBook Register Transfer Request CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
8-951-006 AddBook Register F-Code CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
8-951-007 AddBook Register Copy Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
8-951-008 AddBook Register Fax Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
8-951-009 AddBook Register Printer Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
8-951-010 AddBook Register Scanner Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
8-961-001 Electricity Status Ctrl Standby Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-002 Electricity Status STR Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-003 Electricity Status Main Power Off Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-004 Electricity Status Reading and Printing Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-005 Electricity Status Printing Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-006 Electricity Status Reading Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-007 Electricity Status Eng Waiting Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-008 Electricity Status Low Pawer State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-009 Electricity Status Silent State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-010 Electricity Status Heater Off State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-961-011 Electricity Status LCD on Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
1]
8-961-101 Electricity Status Silent Print CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-971-001 Unit Control Engine Off Recovery Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-971-002 Unit Control Power Off Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-971-003 Unit Control Force Power Off Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-971-004 Unit Control Standby Recovery Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-971-005 Unit Control STR Recovery Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-998-113 Admin. Counter List Total: BW Simplex A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-998-114 Admin. Counter List Total: BW Duplex A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-998-125 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW Simplex A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-998-126 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW Duplex A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-998-137 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-998-138 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW Duplex A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-998-147 Admin. Counter List Fax: BW Simplex A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-998-148 Admin. Counter List Fax: BW Duplex A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-001 Admin. Counter List Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-003 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-007 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-010 Admin. Counter List Fax Print: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
Controller SP
8-999-012 Admin. Counter List A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Mode Tables
Appendices
1]
8-999-013 Admin. Counter List Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-023 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1]
8-999-027 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1]
8-999-030 Admin. Counter List Fax Print: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1]
8-999-101 Admin. Counter List Transmission Total: Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-102 Admin. Counter List Transmission Total: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-103 Admin. Counter List FAX Transmission CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-104 Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Color 1]
8-999-105 Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-115 Admin. Counter List Total: BW Simplex Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-116 Admin. Counter List Total: BW Simplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-117 Admin. Counter List Total: BW Duplex Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-118 Admin. Counter List Total: BW Duplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-135 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW Simplex Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-136 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW Simplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-137 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW Duplex Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-138 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW Duplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-155 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW Simplex Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /


CTL Max/Init./Step]
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-156 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW Simplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-157 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW Duplex Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-158 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW Duplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-171 Admin. Counter List Fax: BW Simplex Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-172 Admin. Counter List Fax: BW Simplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-173 Admin. Counter List Fax: BW Duplex Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-174 Admin. Counter List Fax: BW Duplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1]
8-999-191 Admin. Counter List Scan: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]
8-999-192 Admin. Counter List Scan: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1]

Printer Service Menu
3.5 PRINTER SERVICE MENU
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
3.5.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE)
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit DFU - -
0
bit sysName Value Model name (PnP name) Hostname
1 This BitSw can switch the value of the sysName of the standard MIB.
0 (default): Model name (PnP name)
1: Host name
bit DFU - -
2
bit I/O Timeout Enabled Disabled
3 Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. If disabled, the MFP I/O Timeout setting will not
be in effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit SD Card Save Mode Disabled Enabled
4 This BitSw enables the SD card save mode setting menu to be displayed.
After enabling this BitSw, the Card Save settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Machine Features >Printer Features > List/Test print"
bit Paper Size Error Margin ±5pt ±10pt
5 When a PS job is printed on a custom paper size, the job might not print because of
a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation error. This BitSw can set the
allowable margin of error value.Note:This is available for PS, PDF only
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7
1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Collation Type Shift Collation Normal Collation
The type of collation will be applied to a job when the job does not explicitly define
a collation type. Note: If #5-0 is enabled, this BitSw has no effect.
bit 3 PDL Auto Switching Enable Disable

1001 Bit Switch

Enables/Disables the MFPs ability to switch the PDL processor when receiving a
job which contains both PS and PCL5e/c.
bit 4 DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

bit Display Finishing Settings Hide settings Display settings
0 If enabled, users will be able to configure the Collate Settings, Staple Settings, and
Punch Settings from the operation panel. The available Settings will depend on the
device and configured options.
After enabling this BitSw, the settings will appear under:

"User Tools > Machine Features >Printer Features > System"
bit Number of Copies with Paper Print Single Copy Print All Copies
1 Mismatch
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this bit switch, the device can be configured to
print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit GPS Filter Enabled Disabled
2 If the GPS Filter is disabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter the print data
standard printer applications receive. Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for
troubleshooting the effects of SDK applications on data.
bit PS Trigger for PDL Switching Standard pattern Pattern1
3 Specifying the auto detection algorithm for PS while switching the print language.
If the Pattern1 is selected, "%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
bit Increase max. number of stored Disabled (100) Enabled (xxx)
4 jobs.
Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD. The default
(disabled) is 100. If this is enabled, the max. will be raised to 750 or 1000 depending

1001 Bit Switch

on the model.
Controller SP
bit Direction of Output Face-down Face-up
Mode Tables
Appendices
5 This setting enables you to specify the whether the paper is output face-down or
face-up onto the output tray.
bit Change Imposition Standard specification Old model
6 Specification specification
This setting enables the specification for imposition such as page alignment and
image rotation to be changed to the specification of old models when job orientation
and paper size are mixed.
The old models are below:
• PCL: 04A and earlier models
• PS/PDF/RPCS: 05S and earlier models
• BMLinkS: 05A and earlier models
IRIPS PS/PDF:
• 09A and earlier models: Operation under current model specification is not
supported (Operation with older specification is recommended)
• 15S and later models: Operation under current model specification is supported.
bit DFU - -
7
1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

bit Print path Disabled Enabled
0 If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last
page of an odd-paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the
duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
bit DFU - -
1 to
7
1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 to DFU - -
6

1001 Bit Switch

bit 7 [PDF]: Orientation Auto Detect Function Enabled Disabled
Automatically chooses page orientations of PDF jobs (Landscape or Portrait)

based on the content.
1001 Bit Switch

bit PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted Disabled Enabled
0 via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediately) (10 seconds)
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection does not
necessarily mean that the job can not be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit DFU - -
1
bit Job Cancel after Jam Not cancelled Cancelled
2 This setting enables it to be specifed whether jobs will be cancelled after a jam
occurs.
Note: If this BitSw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
• Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
• Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
• Printing a large number of jobs continuously (The status of the job are not
acquired when jobs exceeding the number guaranteed by the job monitor are
continuously printed.)
bit Bypass Tray Paper Rotation (SEF/LEF) Disabled Enabled
3 his BitSw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous generations. It only
takes effect if ""Bypass Tray Setting Priority"" = ""Driver/Command"".
Previous spec (BitSw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the bypass
tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this BitSw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch, the
MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by the MFP
bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
Note:This is available for PCL,PS only.
bit Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB END) Mode 0 Mode 1
4 when printing multiple collated copies.
This BitSw determines the timing of the PJL STATUS JOB END sent when multiple
collated copies are being printed.
Mode 0: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy has

1001 Bit Switch

completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented after the first
Controller SP
copy and then again at the end of the job.
Mode Tables
Appendices
Mode 1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished
printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each job.
bit UTF-8 Mode Enabled Disabled
5 Enabled (=0):
Text composed of UTF-8 characters can be displayed in the operation panel.
Disabled (=1):
UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation panel.
For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8 encoded
characters. When these are displayed on the operation panel, they will be garbled
unless this BitSw is enabled (=0).
bit Print Option Configuration (rsh, rcp, ftp) Enabled Disable
6 This BitSw enables the specification of the configuration of the print option using
rcp/rsh/ftp.
bit Enable/Disable Print from USB/SD's Preview Enabled Disabled
7 function
Determines whether the Print from USB/SD function will have the Preview function.
Enabled (=0): Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
Disabled (=1): Print from USB/SD will not have the Preview function.
1001 Bit Switch

010 Bit Switch A 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 Store and Skip Errored Job locks the queue Queue is not Queue locked
locked after after SSEJ
SSEJ
If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ), new
jobs cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has been completely printed.
bit 6 Allow use of Store and Skip error Job if Does not allow Allows SSEJ
connected to an external charge device. SSEJ with ECD with ECD
If this is 0, Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ) will be automatically disabled if an
external charge device is connected.
Note: We do not officially support enabling this bit switch (1). Use it at your own
risk.
bit 7 Job cancels remaining pages when the Job does not Job cancels
paid-for pages have been printed on an cancel

1001 Bit Switch

external charge device
When setting 1 is enabled, after printing the paid-for pages on an external charge
device, the job that includes any remaining pages will be canceled.
This setting will prevent the next user from printing the unnecessary pages from the
previous user's print job.
1001 Bit Switch

011 Bit Switch B 0 1
bit Show Menu List Hide Menu Show Menu
0 List List
If this is 0, the Menu List button will be removed from Printer Features.
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit Change the behavior of the center staple Cancel the job Continue to
3 print
This Bit Switch can change the behavior of the center staple when the maximum
number of sheets for stapling is exceeded.
0 (default): The job is canceled and an error is recorded in the log.
1: The job is not canceled and is produced. How the job is produced in any behavior
depends on the type of finisher.
bit "Apply Auto Paper Select" to Override Paper Disabled Enabled
4 Size or Paper Type of the Device
If this BitSw is enabled, the "Apply Auto Paper Select" setting will decide if the paper
size or paper type that is specified in the device settings should be overridden by the
job's commands when "Tray Setting Priority" is set to "Driver/Command" or "Machine
Setting(s): Any Type".
- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overridden (priority is given to the job’s
commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: NOT overridden (priority is given to the device
settings)
bit DFU - -
5
bit Tray Selection when a Paper Mismatch Disabled Enabled
6 Occurs.
This BitSw enables the inactive auto paper select tray to be unselectable when a
paper size/type mismatch occurs.

1001 Bit Switch

bit DFU - -
Controller SP
7
Mode Tables
Appendices
1001 Bit Switch
012 Bit Switch C 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
to 2
bit 3 Switching paper discharge operation when the one by one Upper limit
limit number of sheets stapled is exceeded number
Switching paper discharge operation when the limit number of sheets stapled is
exceeded
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 Change the user ID type displayed on the Login User User ID
operation panel Name
If this BitSw is enabled, the user ID type on the operation panel can change to the
user ID behavior exhibited in 14A and earlier models.
bit 6 AirPrint Enabled Disabled
For 15S and later models that support AirPrint, AirPrint can be disabled by
changing this Bit Switch from 0 (default) to 1.
bit 7 AirPrint PDF Enabled Disabled
-
1002 Bit Switch

001 Bit Switch (2) 1 0 1
bit 0 Paper Size Mismatch Display Enabled Disabled
Display warning screen (40909) of paper size mismatch
bit 1 DFU - -
to2
bit 3 Switch dither Normal dither Alternative dither
Switch dither
bit 4 Input tray mask Enabled Disabled
Enable / disable input tray mask
bit 5 PDL Filter Disabled Enabled
Enable / disable the PDL Filter setting in Web Image Monitor
bit 6 Printing is canceled when the job exceeds Disable Enable
the sheet limit for stapling.
This feature notifies that printing cannot continue when the number of staples is

1002 Bit Switch

exceeded before printing starts. Until now, when printing started and the staple max
limit was exceeded, a notification screen appeared.
The target drivers are PCL6/PCL UD/PS/PS UD, except for Mac.
bit 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

002 Bit Switch (2) 2 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

003 Bit Switch (2) 3 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

004 Bit Switch (2) 4 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

005 Bit Switch (2) 5 0 1
bit 0 PDF speeding printing operation Enabled Disabled
PDF speeding printing operation
bit 1 to 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

006 Bit Switch (2) 6 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

007 Bit Switch (2) 7 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

008 Bit Switch (2) 8 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

009 Bit Switch (2) 9 0 1

1002 Bit Switch

bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
1002 Bit Switch
010 Bit Switch (2) A 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

011 Bit Switch (2) B 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1002 Bit Switch

012 Bit Switch (2) C 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1003 [Clear Setting]

1-003-001 Initialize Printer System *CTL [- / - / -]
[Execute]
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1-003-003 Delete Program *CTL [- / - / -]
[Execute]
1004 [Print Summary]

Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1-004-001 Print Printer Summary CTL [- / - / -]
[Execute]
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]

Selects the setting for the media print device.
1-110-002 0: Disable 1: Enable *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]

1-111-001 - *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step ]
0: Excluding New Job
1: Including New Job
Selects whether to include an image processing job in jobs subject to full cancellation
from the SCS job list.

1122 [Delete ALL Job History]

Delete all job history files stored in the internal storage.
1-122-001 - CTL [EXECUTE]

Scanner SP Mode
3.6 SCANNER SP MODE
Controller SP
Mode Tables
Appendices
3.6.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS)
1001 [Scan Nv Version]
1-001-005 - *CTL [- / - / -]
Operates automatic initialization to ensure that scanner NV is initialized if necessary.
To do this SP, specify the version of scanner NV within 9 characters.
“Function name”_”Machine code”_”Serial number”
- Function name: Enter “3”.
- Machine code: Enter the machine code with three characters.
- Serial number: Enter the number (default: 001).
1005 [Erase margin(Remote scan)]

1-005-001 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is
activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1009 [Remote scan disable]

1-009-001 0:enable 1:disable *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Enable or disable remote scan.
1010 [Non Display ClearLight PDF]

1-010-001 0:Display 1:Nondisplay *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Display or nondisplay ClearLight PDF function.
1011 [Org Count Disp]

1-011-001 0:ON 1:OFF *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Display or nondisplay original counter.
0: Displays remaining memory.
1: Displays original counter.
1012 [UserInfo Release]

1-012-001 0:No 1:Yes *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Set if the following user information is released or not.
- Destination of the mail, folder, CS
- Sender

Scanner SP Mode
- Message
- Subject
- Fail name
1013 [Scan to Media Device Setting]

1-013-002 0:OFF 1:ON *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Enable or disable ScanTo media device.
1014 [Scan to Folder Pass Input Set]

1-014-001 0:OFF 1:ON *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Sets enable or disable the password setting when make a Scan to Folder job.
1016 [Scan To Email Sender Address]

1-016-001 0: Login user address *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
1: POP before SMTP address
Specify the Scan To Email sender address.
1041 [Scan:FlairAPI Setting]

1-041-001 0x00 – 0xff *CTL * see BitSwitch below:
Sets Scanner FlairAPI Function enable / disable.
This SP is set by BitSwitch and needs to reboot the machine after making changes.
bit Setting meanings Description
0 1
bit 0 Start of FlairAPI Off On Sets whether to start exclusive
Server (Do not (Start) FlairAPI http server. If it is 0, scanning
Start) FlairAPI function and simple UI
function will be disabled.
bit 1 Access Disabled Enabled If it is “0”, accessing is limited from the
permission of machine only, such as operating panel,
FlairAPI from SDK/J, MFP browsers etc… If it is “1”,
outside of the accessing is allowed from outside of
machine FlairAPI such as PC, Remote UI,
IT-Box etc…
bit 2 IPv6 (Exclusive) IPv6 IPv4 If this bit is “0”, only IPv6 accessing is
/ IPv4 (Priority) (Exclusive) (Priority) permitted.
Switching If this bit is “1” and IPv4 is enabled, the
machine uses IPv4 accessing. If this
bit is “1” and IPv4 is disabled, the
machine uses IPv6 accessing. In this

Scanner SP Mode
case, it is unable to access through

Smart Operation Panel if IPv4 address
Controller SP
is enabled.
Mode Tables
Appendices
bit 3 Remote UI Not Used Use Sets use of Remote UI for scanner
Function function.
bit 4 Reserved - - -
1042 [Scan To Email Sender Address]

1-042-001 0: Pursuant to the language setting (Default) *CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
1: MM/DD/YYYY
2: DD/MM/YYYY
3: YYYY/MM/DD
Specify the format to display the date when sending files by Scan To Email.
1043 [Result Screen Doc Name Display]

1-043-001 0: NoDisplay *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
1: Display
Specify whether or not to display the document name (for security purposes) on the
screen
displaying the Scan To Email transmission result.
3.6.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY)

2021 [Compression Level(Grayscale)]
Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the five
settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2-021-001 Comp1:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2-021-002 Comp2:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
2-021-003 Comp3:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
2-021-004 Comp4:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2-021-005 Comp5:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
2023 [ClearLightPDF:ACS Setting]

2-023-001 0:OFF 1:ON *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]
2024 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF]

Scanner SP Mode
Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
2-024-001 Compression Ratio(Normal) *CTL [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
2-024-002 Compression Ratio(High) *CTL [5 to 95 / 15 / 1 /step ]
2025 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF JPEG2000]

Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
2-025-001 Compression Ratio(Normal) JPEG2000 *CTL [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
2-025-002 Compression Ratio(High) JPEG2000 *CTL [5 to 95 / 15 / 1 /step ]
2030 [OCR PDF DetectSens]

2-030-001 White Lumi Value: 0 - 255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 250 / 1 / step]
2-030-002 White Pix Ratio: 0 - 100 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]
2-030-003 White Tile Ratio: 0 -100 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]
2031 [Vertical Judgment Setting]

2-031-001 Function Setting: 0 - 1 *CTL [0 to 1/ 0 / 1 / step]
0:Enable
1:Disable
When the image does not become upright state due to the vertical judgment error,
set this SP to "0: Disable". After changing the setting, turn OFF/ON the main power.
2-031-002 Algorithm Setting: 0 - 2 *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Normal Algorithm
1: Simple Algorithm
2: Composite Algorithm
Set the identification algorithm when SP2-031-001 is "1: Enable". Change the setting
when the vertical judgment error occur frequently. After changing the setting, turn
OFF/ON the main power.
3.6.3 SP3-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY)

3066 [High ComprerssionPDF Priority Setting]
3-066-001 - CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Specify the clear light PDF generation mode.

0: Generate PDF
1: Handling Speed

Scanner SP Mode
3067 [flate Compression Setting]

3-067-001 - CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Controller SP
Specify whether to enable or disable clear light PDF compression.
Mode Tables
Appendices
0: Disable
1: Enable
3070 [Scan Limit Warning Display Setting]

3-070-001 - CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Specify whether or not to display the warning when the number of scans reaches the
upper limit.
0: Not Display
1: Display
3071 [Function Use Count]

3-071-001 WSD CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of jobs sent via Scan to PC of the WSD function.
3-071-002 DSM CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of jobs sent via Scan to PC of the DSM function.
3-071-003 SmallSizeTray CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of originals fed from the small paper feeding unit.
*This machine does not count because it does not come with this optional unit.
3-071-004 BlankDetect Ocr CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of jobs to which the blank paper elimination function (with OCR)
is applied.
3-071-005 BlankDetect CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of jobs to which the blank paper elimination function (without
OCR) is applied.
3-071-006 AirPrint/Mopria CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of pages scanned with AirPrint/Mopria.
3-071-007 ScanToURL CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of pages sent with ScanToURL.

Scanner SP Mode
3072 [Total Job Count]

3-072-001 LegacyScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using “Scanner (Classic)”.
3-072-002 SmartScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using “Scanner”.
3-072-003 SimpleScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using “Simple Scanner”.
3-072-004 MediaScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using the Media Scanner function.
3-072-005 OtherScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using any other scanner function.

APPENDICES:
DEVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
None
Printing Features
4. DEVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Device Software
Configuration
Appendices
4.1 PRINTING FEATURES
4.1.1 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION

An MFP connected via USB sends its product name and unique serial number. With the data,
the machine determines whether requires a printer driver for the USB device to be installed.
SP5-844-005 allows you to change how to determine the MFP requires a printer driver
installation:
• OFF
If SP5-844-005 is set to OFF, the unique serial number of the device is sent to the computer.
As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the same product, pop-up
messages will appear, because the serial numbers between the two are different.
• Level 1
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 1, a common serial number for the product is sent to the
computer. As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the same product, pop-up
messages will not appear because the devices are recognized as having the same serial
number.
• Level 2
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 2, a common serial number for all GW/GW+ models is sent
to the computer. As a result, if a GW/GW+ device is swapped out for a different GW/GW+
device, pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are both recognized as
being based on GW/GW+.
4.1.2 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION
Overview
The Auto PDL Detection function gives the MFP the ability to determine the PDL of a job or of
specific parts of a job. This can be especially useful in cases where the PDL is not specified or if
the job contains multiple PDLs. This is only possible if the job was not created using a driver.
Conditions for Detection of the PDL

The MFP will only attempt to detect a job's PDL if all of the following conditions are met.
• No @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command is contained in the job
• No submission protocol options (lpr, ftp, rcp, or rsh options) have been used to specify the
PDL
• User Tools > Printer > System > Printer Language = Auto

Printing Features
• The printer is unable to detect PCL6 or RPCS. However these are almost always
created using a driver and therefore contain the PJL command specifying the PDL.
PDL Detection by the Printer System, PCL Interpreter and PS Interpreter

There are 3 components in the printer which can perform Auto PDL Detection:
1. Printer system:
Uses a set of triggers unique to PCL5, PS or PDF. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can
be searched for triggers.
2. PCL interpreter:
It can detect PS triggers in PCL data. If a PS trigger is detected, the PCL interpreter will
abort processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. Up
to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
3. PS interpreter:
It can detect PCL5 triggers in PS data. If a PCL trigger is detected, the PS interpreter will
abort processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. The
entire page (regardless of the number of bytes) is searched for triggers.
• 2. and 3. can be disabled using Printer Bit Switch 2-3=1.

• If the "Printer Language" is configured to anything other than Auto, all detection will be
disabled.
• An interpreter submits a job page by page to the rasterizer. Therefore, when an
interpreter detects a trigger mid-job, the previous pages will have already been
submitted and will be output using the previously detected PDL.
• If the PDL cannot be detected by the printer system, then the PDL defaults to the one
configured in "Configuration > Printer Basic Settings > Default Printer Language".
The Printer Language setting and Default Printer Language setting in WIM:
PDL Selection and Switching

3 types of PDL selection/switching are performed:

Printing Features
1. PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the
printer system
Device Software
Configuration
Appendices
2. PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system
3. PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system
Triggers
Printer system
PCL5 triggers [ESC]E

[FF]
PS triggers %!PS-Adobe-3.1
%!

Printing Features
dict begin
bind def
findfont
showpage
/statusdict
0 startjob
[EOT]
} + space character + "def"
userdict (*)
PDF triggers %PDF-
%!PS-Adobe-M.nPDF- (*M, n=numeric)
* "userdict" is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1.
• Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers.
• "%%" can be added to the PS triggers by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1
• If a job is identified as PDF, it will be sent to the PS interpreter to be processed as a
regular PS job.
PS interpreter
PCL5 trigger [ESC]E and 2 or more continuous PCL commands
• Up to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
Some Possible Problems

Garbled output:
If a string of characters (or binary data) is mistaken as a trigger and an incorrect PDL is applied,
the output will be garbled.
Incorrect printer settings:
Printer settings, for example the paper size, is incorrectly applied. This can happen when the
printer settings at the beginning of the job are initialized before a PDL switch occurred and no
settings were configured for the rest of the job.
Printer Bit Switch Description

Bit Switch 2-3
This controls Auto PDL Detection by the PCL interpreter and PS interpreter.
BitSW 2-3=0 (default):
If PDL switching is applied to the job, all of the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS
interpreter will search for switching criteria (triggers).
BitSW 2-3=1:
Printing Features
Only the printer system will search for switching criteria (triggers). PCL/PS interpreters will not.
Bit Switch 5-3
Device Software
Configuration
This affects the PDL switching criteria (triggers) used by the printer system.
Appendices
"%%" is not used as a printer system PS trigger. "%%" will not call the PS interpreter.
BitSW 5-3=1:
"%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
The reason that "%%" is not included as a trigger by default, is that a string of text in the body of
the job such as the below, could result in a false positive. This would trigger a switch and result
garbled output.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
However some customers prefer that "%%" be included as a switching criteria. BitSW5-3=1
should be used in such a case.
• A side effect of BitSW5-3=1 is that "userdict" will no longer be used as a PS trigger.

Bit Switch 9-0
These determine whether Auto PDL Detection for print jobs transmitted via USB/parallel will
wait 10 seconds to make sure the first 2KB of the job has been sent.
The Printer system portion of the Auto PDL Detection function is only performed on the first 2KB
of a job and can wait up to 10 seconds for that first 2KB to arrive. As the printer is unable to
detect the end of jobs submitted over a USB/Parallel connection, it might be preferable to not
wait 10 seconds if jobs of less than 2KB are going to be printed. Enabling/disabling this waiting
time is the purpose of BitSw 9-0.
BitSw 9-0=0 (default):
The printer system will not wait 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
BitSw 9-0=1:
The printer system will wait up to 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
4.1.3 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION

Bit Switch 5-6
This changes the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will be applied to every page of every job. Pages
will always be rotated as if they were to be bound on that edge.
BitSW 5-6=1:
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will only be applied if the job is stapled, punched, or
Z-folded. Otherwise, the bound edge might differ from page to page.
Example:

Printing Features
A 3-page job. Page 1 has the PCL simplex command. Page 2 and 3 have the PCL duplex
long-edge bind commands.
No finishing options (staple, punch, z-fold) are used.
Bit Switch #5-6=0:
Bit Switch #5-6=1:
• Used in conjunction with Bit Switch #5-6, Orientation Auto Detect for PS/PDF jobs
might cause unexpected results.
4.1.4 PJL USTATUS

Bit Switch 9-4
These control the way PJL USTATUS returns page count totals in cases where multiple copies
of a job are being printed.
BitSw 9-4=0 (default):
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
1. The page count for a single copy is returned after the first copy is printed.
2. The page count for the rest of the copies, excluding the first copy, is returned after all
copies have been printed.
3. This emulates an older HP PCL firmware spec. It is only needed for compatibility with

Printing Features
legacy software.
BitSw 9-4=1:
Device Software
Configuration
The page count for all copies is output after all copies have been printed.
Appendices
This emulates more recent HP PCL firmware specs.
For example, consider 3 copies of a 3 page job:
9-4 = 0
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=3
<comment> The page count of the first copy is returned.</comment>
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6
<comment> The page count of the remaining two copies is returned.</comment>
9-4 = 1
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1

Printing Features
@PJL USTATUS PAGE

2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6@PJL USTATUS PAGE
7
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
8
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
9
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=9
<comment> The page count of all three copies is returned.</comment>

Scanner Features
4.2 SCANNER FEATURES
Device Software
Configuration
Appendices
4.2.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED ACAN
DESTINATION
Configuring the scanner interface so that the most recently used scan destination is cleared.
Whether the MFP clears the most recently used scan destination, can be configured using
Scanner SP 1-012-001.
By default, this is cleared to avoid subsequent users scanning to it by mistake.
Scanner SP 1-012-001
1 (default): Clear
0: Do not clear
This will cause all of the following to be cleared after the scanning is complete:
• Destination
• Sender
• Email subject
• Email message
• File name
The information in the list above will be cleared after scanning is finished.
Exceptions:
• User Auth.: If SP 1-012-001 = 0 and if User Auth. (excluding User Code authentication) is
enabled, the most recently used scan destination will only be retained until the user logs
out.
• Scanner Auto Reset timer: Even if SP 1-012-001 = 0 the most recently used scan
destination can still be cleared by the Scanner Auto Reset timer. If the Scanner Auto Reset
timer is shorter than the System Auto Reset timer, then the most recently used scan
destination will be cleared when the Scanner Auto Reset timer elapses.
4.2.2 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER

Determining which account Scan to Folder uses to access a scan destination and the effects of
System SP 5-846-021.
This method depends on how the destination is accessed, whether authentication is being used,
and SP 5-846-021.
Cases:
Case Destination User auth. Account used to access the folder
selection
A Manual entry Either enabled or The user's account *
disabled

Scanner Features
Case Destination User auth. Account used to access the folder

selection
B Destination list disabled The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address Book's Folder
Authentication setting)
C enabled If SP 5-846-021 =
0 (default): The authenticated user's account
1: The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address Book's Folder
Authentication setting)
* The "user's account" will be either the one entered during scanning (see the Manual Entry
screen capture) or if User Auth. is enabled, the account configured in the user's Folder
Authentication setting will be used.
The destination's access logs:
Case A or Case C with SP=0: The access logs can be used to determine which user sent the
scan.
Case B or Case C with SP=1: All access will be logged as the same user.

Security Features
4.3 SECURITY FEATURES
Device Software
Configuration
Appendices
4.3.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU
1. Enter 'Printer' SP mode.
2. Set SP5-888-001
0: (default): "Job" menu is enabled.
1: "Job" menu is disabled.
• This setting takes effect only if user authentication (other than User Code auth.) is
disabled.
4.3.2 HOW TO RESTRICT WEB IMAGE MONITOR ACCESS TO THE

DOCUMENT SERVER
System (Copier) SP 5-885-020 bit 0, 1 and 7 restrict Web Image Monitor access to the DS. It
disables the following WIM settings:
• The entire Document Server menu (shown in blue in fig1)
• Job > Document Server (shown in red in fig1)
See the following for details:
Bit 0:
Bit 0 = 0 (default): Allows anyone (guests, users, admins) access to the DS via WIM.
Bit 0 = 1: Prevents everyone from accessing the DS via WIM.
Bit 1:
Bit 1 = 1: Only administrators can access the DS via WIM.
• Without admin privileges, even authenticated users will be unable to access the DS via
WIM.
Bit 7:
Bit 7 = 1: Only administrators and authenticated users can access the DS via WIM.

Security Features
The most restrictive result of combining these three configurations will take priority. So for
example:
Bit 0 = 0
Bit 1 = 1
Bit 7 = 1
As Bit 1 = 1 is the most restrictive of the three, it will take presedence over the other two and
only administrators will be able to access the DS via WIM.
• Access to the entire "Job" menu can be restricted using SP 5-888-001. For details,
refer to Use of SP 5-888-001 to restrict access to the "Job" menu on WIM.
4.3.3 USER AUTHENTICATION FOR SPECIFIC MFP

APPLICATIONS
The SP5-420 settings enable/disable User Authentication for specific MFP applications.
SP 5-420 User Authentication Value (Default: 0)
SP 5-420 User Authentication Value (Default: 0)
SP5-420-001 Copy 0 (ON) 1 (OFF)
SP5-420-011 Document Server
SP5-420-021 Fax
SP5-420-031 Scanner
SP5-420-041 Printer
1. Enable User Authentication for the device as a whole:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > User Authentication Management
2. Use the SP5-420 settings to specify the applications to which User authentication is to
apply.

Im 9000 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Im 9000 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D0CZ/D0D0/D0D1

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2021 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

Ricoh USA, Inc.

2. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 2-1

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 3-1

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

5. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................... 5-1

6. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ........................................................... 6-1

7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 7-1

8. SMART OPERATION PANEL ..................................................... 8-1

Location of the connector(s), clamp(s) or spring(s) to be removed

1.1 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

No. Part No. Part

No. Part No. Part

1.1.2 PAPER PATH (WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY)

1.1.3 PAPER PATH (WITH 9-BIN MAILBOX)

1.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT

1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS

1.2.1 MAIN MACHINE

1.2.2 PERIPHERAL UNITS

(1) Options Mounted to the Machine’s Top Section

(2) Options Mounted to the Machine’s Right Side Section

(3) Options Mounted to the Machine’s Left Side Section

(4) Other Options

1.2.3 OTHER OPTIONS

Mainframe Options: External

Mainframe Options: Internal

Controller Options: I/F Slots

See " Appendices" for the following information:

1.4 DIFFERENCES FROM PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS

Items RICOH MP RICOH IM 9000_8000_7000

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS

The Main Power LED lights or flashes:

2.2 MAIN MACHINE

2.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

No. Description Q'ty Comments

No. Description Q'ty Comments

No. Description Q'ty Comments

2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW

2.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Remove Tapes and Shipping Materials

1. Remove the cover [A].

5. Remove tapes from the surface of ADF.

8. Remove accessory decals [A] attached on the original output tray.

18. Remove bracket, wire, red tag [A].

19. Remove plug, wire, red tag [A].

Attaching Fine Particle Filter

• EU: IM 7000/ IM 8000 only

2. Fix the fine particle filter [A].

3. Attach the cover [A].

Attach Power Cord to Machine

Remove Development Unit

5. Remove the shuttle cover [A].

• Turn the knob clockwise to remove it.

11. On the right [A] disconnect the development unit.

12. Slip the development unit [A] to the right.

14. Lay the development unit on the prepared surface.

2. Disconnect the toner hopper.